The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis, by
Leonard Bloomfield

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org.  If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.



Title: Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis

Author: Leonard Bloomfield

Release Date: December 30, 2015 [EBook #50797]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TAGALOG TEXTS ***




Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
Gutenberg (This book was produced from scanned images of
public domain material from the Google Books project.)








                     UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS STUDIES
                                   IN
                        LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

             Vol. III      May-November, 1917      Nos. 2-4


                            Board of Editors

                             George T. Flom
                          William A. Oldfather
                           Stuart P. Sherman


                Published by the University of Illinois
               Under the Auspices of the Graduate School
                            Urbana, Illinois






                            Copyright, 1917
                     By the University of Illinois.







                             TAGALOG TEXTS
                            WITH GRAMMATICAL
                                ANALYSIS

                     PART I: TEXTS AND TRANSLATION
                     PART II: GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS
               PART III: LIST OF FORMATIONS AND GLOSSARY


                                   BY

                           LEONARD BLOOMFIELD


                         UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

                                  1917









TABLE OF CONTENTS


PART I
                                                               PAGE
    Preface                                                       9
    List of Books and Articles consulted                         13
    Texts in Phonetic Transcription and Translation              16


PART II--GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS

    A. PHONETICS                                                134

        1. Distinctive sounds                                   134
        2. Syllabication                                        138
        3. Accentuation                                         141

    B. SYNTAX                                                   146

        1. Sentence and word                                    146

            a. Syntactic relations                              146
            b. Parts of speech                                  146
            c. Static and transient words                       147
            d. Personal names                                   147
            e. The object construction                          148
            f. Expressions of indefinite quantity               150

        2. Subject and predicate                                151

            a. Non-predicative sentences                        151
            b. The subject                                      153
            c. The predicate                                    153
            d. Subordinate predications                         159
            e. Omission of predicate                            160

        3. Attributes                                           160

            a. Conjunctive attributes                           162
            b. Disjunctive attributes                           170
            c. Local attributes                                 177
            d. Absolute attributes                              180

        4. Serial groups                                        205

    C. MORPHOLOGY                                               210

        1. Composition                                          210
        2. General features of word-formation                   211
        3. Description of formations                            218

            I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, pang-)               218

                A. Simple static forms                          218

                    (1) Root-words                              218
                    (2) Doubling                                223
                    (3) Reduplication                           224
                    (4) Prefix pang-                            224

                B. Transients, abstracts, and special static
                   words                                        226

                  (1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag-   226
                  (2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r 231
                  (3) Active with mang- and abstract with
                      pang- r                                   239
                  (4) Special static words                      241
                  (5) Direct passive, with -in                  243
                  (6) Special static words                      247
                  (7) Instrumental passive, with i-             247
                  (8) Special static words                      250
                  (9) Local passive, with -an                   250
                 (10) Special static words                      257

            II. Secondary groups                                262

                1. Prefix si-                                   262
                2. Prefix paki-                                 263
                3. Prefix ka-                                   265

                  (1) Simple static forms                       265
                  (2) Normal transients, abstracts, and
                      special static forms                      268
                  (3) Additional transients, abstracts, and
                      special static forms                      280

                4. Prefix pa-                                   298

                  (1) Simple static forms                       299
                  (2) Normal transients, abstracts, and
                      special static forms                      301
                  (3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka- 309

                5. Prefix pati-                                 313

            III. Irregular derivatives                          314


PART III

    LIST OF FORMATIONS                                          317
    INDEX OF WORDS                                              320
    CORRIGENDA                                                  406









PREFACE


This essay is purely linguistic in character and purpose.

In taking phonetic notes on Tagalog I noticed that the pronunciation
of the speaker to whom I was listening, Mr. Alfredo Viola Santiago
(at present a student of architectural engineering in the University
of Illinois) presented certain features of accentuation not mentioned
in the descriptions familiar to me. With the intention of briefly
describing these features, I took down more extensive notes and
asked Mr. Santiago to tell me in Tagalog the stories of "The Sun"
and "The Northwind and the Sun," used as models by the International
Phonetic Association.

The data so obtained showed that the features of accentuation I had
observed were in part distinctive (expressive of word-meaning), and,
further, that certain other features, which were but imperfectly
described in the treatises I knew (so especially the use of the
"ligatures"), appeared in Mr. Santiago's speech in a regular and
intelligible manner. A more extensive study was thus indicated.

The results of this study were subject to two obvious limitations. The
utterances I had transcribed were either translations or isolated
sentences, and I could not determine to what extent the features of
Mr. Santiago's speech which I had observed were general in Tagalog.

The former of these limitations was fully overcome when I asked
Mr. Santiago to tell me connected stories. In addition to fortunate
endowments of a more general kind Mr. Santiago possesses, as I found,
that vivacity of intellect and freedom from irrelevant prepossessions
which we seek and so rarely find in people whose language we try
to study. This latter quality may be due in part to the fact that,
as Mr. Santiago's education has been carried on entirely in Spanish
and English, his speech-feeling for his mother-tongue has not been
deflected by the linguistic, or rather pseudo-linguistic training
of the schools, so familiar to us. However this may be, I cannot
be grateful enough to Mr. Santiago (and I hope that the reader
will join me in this feeling) for the intelligence, freshness, and
imagination with which he has given us connected narratives in his
native language,--stories he heard in childhood and experiences of
his own and of his friends. It is to be hoped that some of these
will be of interest to students of folk-lore (as, for instance,
Nos. 9, 10, 11, the old Hindu fable in No. 4, and the Midas story,
much changed, in No. 5); the texts are here given, however, only for
their linguistic interest.

The second limitation could not be overcome. As there exists at present
no adequate description of the dialectal differentiation of Tagalog,
nor even an adequate description of any one form of the language,
I can make no definite statement as to the relation of Mr. Santiago's
speech to other forms of Tagalog.

What is here presented is, then, a specimen of the speech of an
educated speaker from Mr. Santiago's home town, San Miguel na Matamés,
Bulacán Province, Luzón. It would have been possible to include in the
description the speech of at least one other educated Tagalog from a
different region (uneducated speakers are unfortunately not within
my reach), as well as such data as might be gathered from printed
Tagalog books: I have refrained from this extension because, at the
present state of our knowledge, a single clearly defined set of data
is preferable to a necessarily incomplete attempt at describing the
whole language in its local and literary variations. Comparison of
literary Tagalog (chiefly the translation of José Rizal's "Noli me
Tangere" by Patricio Mariano, Manila, Morales, 1913 [1]) shows that
Mr. Santiago's speech is not far removed from it. In most cases where
my results deviate from the statements of the Spanish grammars, the
evidence of printed books (and not infrequently the internal evidence
of the grammars themselves) shows that the divergence is due not
to dialectal differences but to the fact that the grammars are the
product of linguistically untrained observers, who heard in terms of
Spanish articulations and classified in those of Latin grammar.

This study presents, then, the first Tagalog texts in phonetic
transcription and the first scientific analysis of the structure of
the language [2]. Although the nature of the problem forbade the use
of any material other than that obtained from Mr. Santiago, I have
examined all the treatises on Tagalog accessible to me. No experience
could show more clearly than the reading of these books the necessity
of linguistic and especially phonetic training for anyone who wishes
to describe a language. Not one of the works in the following list
[3] contains an intelligible description of the pronunciation of
Tagalog. The only general work of scientific value is the excellent
second volume of P. Serrano Laktaw's dictionary. Much as one may admire
the pioneer courage of Totanes and the originality of Minguella,
these venerable men were as little able to describe a language as
one untrained in botany is to describe a plant. Among the authors of
monographs are several good names and one or two of the greatest in
our science: nearly all of these authors mention the difficulty under
which they labored for want of an adequate description of the language.









LIST OF BOOKS AND ARTICLES CONSULTED


Alter, F. C., Über die tagalische Sprache. Wien 1803.

Blake, F. R., Contributions to comparative Philippine Grammar. (Journal
of the American Oriental Society, vols. 27, 28, 29, 30).

Brandstetter, R., Tagalen und Madagassen, Luzern 1902. (= his
Malayo-polynesiche Forschungen, ser. 2, no. 2).

Conant, C. E., The names of the Philippine languages. (Anthropos,
vol. 4).

The pepet law in the Philippine languages. (Anthropos, vol. 7).

de Coria, J., Nueva gramática tagalog. Madrid 1872.

Cue-Malay, G., Frases usuales para la conversacion en espańol tagalo
é ingles. Manila 1898.

Doherty, D. J., The Tagalog language. (Educational Review, vol. 24).

Durán, C. G., Manual de conversaciones en castellano tagalo é
inglés. Manila 1900.

Fernandez, D. E., Nuevo vocabulario ó manual de conversaciones en
espańol, tagalo y pampango. Binondo 1901.

Francisco [Blancas] de San Josef, Arte y Reglas de la lengua
Tagala. Manila 1832.

Garcia, F., at Herrera, V., Manga onang turo sa uikang inglés. Maynila
1902.

Gaspar de San Agustin, Compendio de la Lengua Tagala. Manila 1879.

Hévia Campomanes, J., Lecciones de gramática Hispano-Tagala. Manila
1872. 3d ed. 1883. 4th ed. 1888.

von Humboldt, W., Die Kawi-Sprache, vol. 2, pp. 315 ff., 347 ff. (=
Berlin Academy Transactions, 1832, vol. 3).

Kern, J. H. C., Over zoogenaamde verbindingsklanken in het
Tagala. (Bijdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde van
Nederlandsch-Indië, ser. 3, vol. 11).

Sanskritsche woorden in het Tagala. (ib., ser. 4, vol. 4).

Kirk, May, The Baldwin primer. Tagalog edition. New York [1899 and
1902 copyright].

Lendoyro, C., The Tagalog language. Manila 1902.

MacKinlay, W. E. W., A handbook and grammar of the Tagalog
language. Washington 1905.

Marre, A., Grammaire tagalog (Bijdragen, ser. 6, vol. 9).

Merrill, E. D., A dictionary of the plant names of the Philippine
Islands. Manila 1903. (Publications of the Bureau of Government
Laboratories, Department of the Interior, Philippine Islands, no. 8).

Miles, J., Método teórico-práctico y compendiado para aprender el
lenguaje Tagálog. Barcelona 1887.

Minguella, T., Ensayo de gramática Hispano-Tagala. Manila 1878.

Método práctico para que los nińos y nińas de las provincias tagalas
aprendan á hablar Castellano. Manila 1886.

Neilson, P. D., English-Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Tagalog-English Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Nigg, C., Tagalog English and English Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1904.

de Noceda, J., y de Sanlucar, P., Vocabulario de la lengua
Tagala. Manila 1860.

Paglinawan, M., Balarilang Tagalog [on cover: Gramatikang Tagalog]
Maynila 1910.

Pardo de Tavera, T. H., Consideraciones sobre el origen del nombre
de los números en Tagalog (La Espańa oriental 1889).

El Sánscrito en la lengua Tagalog. Paris 1887.

Rizal, José, Die Transcription des Tagalog. (Translated by
F. Blumentritt, Bijdragen, vol. 42).

de los Santos, Domingo, Vocabulario de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1835
(reimpreso).

Serrano, R., Diccionario de terminos comunes
Tagalo-Castellano. Ed. 3. Binondo 1869.

Nuevo diccionario manual Espańol-Tagalo. Manila 1872.

Serrano Laktaw, P., Diccionario Hispano-Tagalog. Primera parte. Manila
1889.

Diccionario Tagalog-Hispano. Segunda parte. Manila 1914.

de Totanes, S., Arte de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1745. Sampaloc
1796. Manila 1850. Binondo 1865 (reimpreso).

Wolfensohn, L. B., The infixes la, li, lo in Tagalog. (Journal of
the American Oriental Society, vol. 27).









I. TEXTS IN PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION


1. ANG ULŇL NA UNGGŇ` AT ANG MARÚNONG NA PAGŇNG.

Mínsan ang pagňng hábang nalělígo sa ílog, ay nakŕkíta syŕ nang isa
ng púno-ng-ságing na lumůlútang at tinátangŕy nang ágos. Hiníla niya
sa pasígan, dátapwat hindí nya madalŕ sa lúpa`. Dáhil díto tináwag
nya ang kaybígan niya ng unggň` at iniyálay nyŕ ang kapútol nang
púno-ng-ságing kung itátanim nyŕ ang kanyŕ ng kapartč. Tumangň` ang
unggň` at hináte nilŕ sa gitnŕ` mulá sa magkábila ng dúlo ang púno
nang ságing. Inangkěn nang unggň ang kapútol na máy manga dáhon,
dáhil sa panukálŕ nya na iyňn ay tůtúbo na mabúti káy sa kapútol na
wala ng dáhon.

Nang makaraŕn ang ila ng áraw, ang púno nang unggň` ay namatŕy, yámang
ang sa pagňng ay tumúbo hanggŕng sa magbúnga. Ang manga ságing ay
nahinňg, dátapwat hindí maakyŕt nang pagňng. Dahil díto tináwag nyŕ
ang kanya ng kaybíga ng unggň` at inyálay nya ang ila ng búnga nang
ságing kung ŕakyatin nyŕ ang púno`. Ang unggň` ay umakyŕt at kumáin
nang makŕkáya.

Sinábi nang pagňng: "Hulúgan mo akň."

Dátapuwat isinagňt nang unggň`: "Balat mŕn at malinamnŕm ay hindí
kita hůhulúgan."

Ang pagňng ay nagálit at nagsábug sya nang tiněk sa palígid nang
púno`. Nang lumuksň ang unggň ay nátinik syŕ. Pinagbintangan nyŕ ang
pagňng at kanya ng hinánap úpang parusáhan niyŕ. Nŕhúli nya ang pagňng
sa kabilŕ nang isa ng toňd.

Sinábi nya sa pagňng: "Kitŕ ay áki ng parůrusáhan. Mamíli ka sa
dalawŕ. Dikdikěn kitŕ sa lusňng o lunúrin kitŕ sa ílog?"

Ang marúnong na pagňng ay nagumpisŕ nang pagsisigŕw at hinilěng nya
sa unggň` na, kung maŕáre`, ay dikdikěn siya sa lusňng.

Dátapwat isinagňt nang unggň`: "Ibíbigay kň sa iyň ang parúsa na
hindí mo gustň."

At inihágis nya sa ílog ang pagňng.

Nang dumápo ang pagňng sa túbig ay nagsisigŕw sya at sinábi nyŕ sa
unggň`: "Salámat, kaybígan. Itň ang áki ng těráhan!"





2. ANG PAGTATAKBÚHAN NANG USŔ AT NANG SUSŇ`.

Isŕ ng usŕ ng nangěngináin sa gúbat ay nakátagpň nang isa ng susň` na
gumŕgápang sa dáhon nang búho`. Ang usŕ ay naghintň nang pangingináin
at pinagmasdŕn nyŕ ang mabágal na paggápang nang susň`.

Makaraŕn ang ila ng sandalě` ay sinábi nyŕ sa susň`: "Ano ng hína mo
ng lumákad! Bákit hindí ka magáral na lumákad nang matúlin? Gáya ko,
aků y paráti ng nŕhŕhábul nang manga áso, dátapwat ang matúlin ko ng
pagtakbň ay sya ng naglíligtŕs sa ákin nang áki ng búhay. Dátapwat
gáya mň, kung ikŕw ay habúlin nang káhit anň ng kaáway, papáno ang
mangyŕyári sa iyo ng búhay? Pího ng ikŕw ay mŕpŕpatŕy."

Pagkárinig nang susň` sa manga salitŕ ng itň ay tiningnŕn nya ang usŕ
at kanya ng pinagarálan ang maínam nya ng pangangatawŕn, ang kanya ng
mahahába ng paŕ, at ang malalakŕs nya ng lamŕn. Iníbig nya na siya mŕn
ay gaya rěn nang usŕ úpang siyŕ ay makatakbň nang matúlin. Dátapwat
kanyŕ ng inakálŕ` na, kung pilítin nya na sya y tumakbň, ay hindí
sya mŕhůhulč nang malakě sa usŕ.

Sa gayňn ay isinagot nyŕ sa usŕ: "Ikŕw ay mapangmatŕ. Hindí
mo hiněhinálŕ` kung anň ang magágawa nang isa ng may matíbay na
paggustň. Hinŕhámon kitŕ na makipagtakbúhan sa ákin mula ríto hanggŕng
sa ílog na nása bandŕ ng kalunúran mulŕ ríto."

Ang usŕ ay tumáwa nang malakŕs at isinagňt sa susň`: "Bákit mo inakála
ng tŕtalúnin mo akň? Sigúro ng ikŕw ay magdŕdáya`!"

Isinagňt nang susň`, na hindí siya magdŕdáya`, at, úpang máy-roo
ng tumingěn sa kanilŕ at magěng hukňm sa kanila ng pagtatakbúhan,
ay sinábi nyŕ na tumáwag silŕ nang isŕ sa manga kayibígan nilŕ,
na sya ng magíging hukňm.

Ang usŕ ay pumáyag, at tináwag nilŕ ang isa ng kálaw, úpang siya ng
magěng hukňm.

Nang magumpisŕ silŕ nang pagtakbň ay malakě ang nagěng pagkáhuli nang
susň`. Sa kanyŕ ng pagtakbň ang usŕ ay nakáraŕn nang isa ng mayábung
na damúhan. Naghintú sya úpang mangináin, yámang malakě ang pagkáuna
nya sa susň`. Binálak nyŕ na pagkátanaw nya na dumárating ang susň`
ay tátakbo syŕ ng mulě`. Dátapuwat, nang sya y makapangináin, ay
sinumpňng sya nang katŕmáran. Natúlug sya sa panukálŕ na mŕgěgising
syŕ bágo dumatěng ang susň`.

Dátapwat, hábang sya y natůtúlog, ay nakaraŕn ang susň`. Nang mágising
syŕ ay malálim nŕ sa hápon. Tumakbo syŕ nang úbus-lakŕs patúngu sa
ílog, at doňn ay sinalúbong sya nang susň` at nang kanila ng hukňm
na kálaw.

"Ikŕw ay talúnan," winíka pagdáka nang kanila ng hukňm.





3. ISŔ NG BIYŔRNES-SŔNTO.

Si Hwŕn at ang kanyŕ ng kaybíga ng si Pédro ay namámangká sa ílug
patúngo sa báya-ng-Balíwag. Sa bangkŕ` ay máy-roon silŕ ng isŕ ng
laráwan nang Krísto na kanila ng iniháhatid sa páre`, úpang magámit sa
pagdadáus nang isa ng Pitů ng Wíka`. Si Hwŕn ay siněsiglŕn nang tákot.

Sinábi nya kay Pédro: "Ang táwu nátin sa bangkŕ` ay tadtŕd nang súgat
at hindí humíhingŕ. Sa akálŕ ko y patŕy ang táo ng iyŕn. Baká táyu
ang pagbintangŕn nang pári ng áti ng paghŕhatdŕn sa kanyŕ."

Isinagňt ni Pédro: "Sŕsabíhin nátin sa kanyŕ na, nang mŕlúlan sa
áti ng bangkŕ` ang táo ng itň y ganyan nŕ ang kanya ng anyň`. Táyu
y marámi ng tagapagpatotoň, kanyá hwag kŕ ng matákot."

Nang dumatěng sila sa páre`, ay ibinigŕy nila ang laráwan. Pinagsabíhan
silŕ nang páre` na pumaroňn sila sa simbáhan kinŕbukásan nang hápon,
úpang makiněg nang sčrmon.

Si Hwŕn ay siniglŕ ng mulí nang tákot, sapagkŕt hindí nya mŕpagkúro
kung bákit íbig nang páre` na silŕ ay pása simbáhan. Paráti sya ng
nakárinig nang manga táo ng kinumbidŕ sa simbáhan at doňn ay hinúli
nang gwŕrdya-siběl. Dátapuwat hindí sya nagwíka nang anu mŕn kay Pédro,
sapagkŕt nŕkěkíta nya na itň y walŕ ng tákot.

Kinŕbukásan nang hápun ay naparoňn sila sa simbáhan, at doňn ay nŕkíta
nilŕ ang isa ng Krísto ng nŕpŕpáků sa krůs.

Winíkŕ ni Hwŕn: "Ang táu ng yaňn, kung iyň ng natŕtandaŕn, ay sya
náti ng inihatěd sa páre`. Mabúti táyo y dumoňn sa isa ng lugŕr na
hindí maáabut nang matŕ nang páre`."

Kanyá silŕ ng dalawŕ ay naparoňn sa ilálim nang půlpito, úpang doňn
nilŕ pakinggŕn ang sčrmon. Nagumpisŕ ang Syéti-Palábras, at ang párě
ay dumárating nŕ sa bandŕ ng hulě nang kanya ng sčrmon.

Winíkŕ nang pári sa kanya ng sčrmon: "Magsísi kayň sa inyů ng manga
kasalánan, malulupět na táo. Masdŕn ninyň ang manga súgat na hiníwa
ninyů sa katawŕn nang áti ng Mŕnanákop."

Pagkárinig nitň ni Hwŕn ay sya y siniglŕ ng mulí nang tákot, sapagkŕt
inakálŕ nya na siya y nŕpŕpagbintangŕn.

Kanyŕ` ang ginawá nya ay umalěs sya sa ilálim nang půlpito, hinarŕp nya
ang páre`, at sinábi nya: "Ámong, hindí po kamě ang sumúgat sa táo ng
iyŕn. Nang sya y ilúlan sa ámi ng bangkŕ`, ay sugatan nŕ sya antimáno."

Pagkawíkŕ nya nitň ay bumalěk sya sa ilálim nang půlpito. Hindí
pinansěn nang párě` ang manga nárinig nya ng salitŕ`, at ipinatúluy
nya ang kanya ng sčrmon.

"Dumating nŕ ang áraw na kayň ng manga makasalánan ay dápat
magsipagsísi. Ang manga pintúan nang lángit ay nábuksan nŕ sa
pagkamatŕy nang áti ng Mŕnanákop, at káhit na sínu ng makasalánan ay
makapŕpásuk sa lángit, kung sila y magsipagsísi. Dátapwat, kung hindí
kayo magsipagsísi, ay mŕpŕparusáhan kayň nang hírap na wala ng hanggŕn
sa manga apůy sa infyčrno, dahilŕn sa manga hírap na ipinasákit ninyň
sa áti ng Mŕnanákop. Masdŕn ninyň ang kanyŕ ng katawŕn na pumŕpáwis
nang dugň`, ang kanya ng paŕ t kamŕy na nŕpŕpáko sa krůs, at ang kanyŕ
ng manga súgat mulá sa paŕ hanggŕng úlo. Wala ng ibŕ ng nagpŕpahírap
sa kanyŕ at sumúgat sa kanyŕ ng mahŕl na katawŕn, kung hindí kayň,
manga táwo ng makasalánan, at, kung hindí kayo magsipagsísi, ay
mahůhúlug kayo sa infyčrno!"

Si Hwŕn ay hindí mŕpalagŕy, at inakálŕ nya na ang pári ay
siněsilakbuhŕn nang gálit lában sa kanyŕ.

Kanyŕ` hinarap nyŕ ng mulí ang páre`, at sinábi nya nang úbus-lakŕs:
"Ámong, sinábi ko na pň` sa inyň kanína na hindí ako kasále ng sumúgat
sa táo ng iyán, kanyá hwag pň ninyo akň ng ipadalŕ sa impyčrno."

Ang pári ay siniglŕn nang malakě ng gálit, kanyá sinábi nya sa mangŕ
nakíkiněg: "Anu ba kayň, manga ungŕs na táo? Walá baga ní isa sa inyň
na makaháwak sa táo ng itň úpang bigtihěn?"

Pagkárinig nitň ni Hwŕn ay tumakbo syŕ nang úbus-lakŕs at sinagasáa
ng walŕ ng patumanggŕ ang manga táo ng nŕlůluhňd at umíiyŕk sa
pagsisísi nang kanilŕ ng kasalánan. Sinundan syŕ ni Pédro at silŕ ng
dalawŕ ay nagtakbúhan nang wala ng hintň hanggŕng sa dumatěng sila
sa kanila ng báyan. At doňn ay ipinamalítŕ nila ang bútas-karáyum na
niligtasŕn nilŕ.





4. ANG KÚBA` AT ANG BULŔG.

Isa ng kúba` at isa ng bulŕg ay matálik na magkaybígan. Kung sila
y naglálakŕd ang kúba` ang umŕákay sa bulŕg. Ang bulŕg namŕn ay syŕ
ng pumápasŕn sa kúbŕ kung máy-roon silŕ ng mahírap na nilŕlakáran,
sapagkŕt ang kúba` ay mahína` ang katawŕn.

Mínsan sila y nakáraŕn nang isŕ ng púno-ng-nyňg. Íbig nila ng pumitŕs
nang búnga, dátapuwat hindí nila mŕláman kung síno sa kanilŕ ng
dalawŕ ang áakyŕt sa púnň`. Sinábi nang bulŕg na hindí sya makaáakyŕt,
sapagkŕt hindí nya mŕkěkíta kung alěn ang pěpitasín, yámang máy-roo
ng manga múra ng búnga. Ang kúba` ay hindi rěn íbig umakyŕt, dahilŕn
sa kanyŕ ng kahináan. Dátapuwat malakě ang pagkágusto nyŕ na kumáin
nang nyňg. Kanyŕ`, sa katapusŕn ay sinábi nya na siyŕ ang áakyŕt.

"Úpang huwag kŕ ng mŕnakáwan nang manga ilálaglag kň ng búnga, ay
běbilángin mo nang malakŕs ang kalabůg sa lúpa nang manga búnga na
ilálaglag kň, úpang áki ng matandaŕn ang bílang."

Ang kúba ay nagumpisŕ nang pagakyŕt, dátapwat pangangalahátě nya ay
nahúlug syŕ.

"Isŕ!" ang sábi nang bulŕg.

Sinábi sa kanyŕ nang kúbŕ` na siyŕ ang kumalabňg at hindí ang búnga
nang nyňg.

Umakyŕt sya ulč`. Pagkaraŕn nang ila ng sandalě` ay nahúlog ulí sya.

"Dalawŕ!" isinigŕw nang bulŕg.

Ang kúba ay nagálit, at sinábi nya sa bulŕg na syŕ ay maúlit.

Winíkŕ nya: "Iyo ng úna ng kumalabňg ay akň, ang ikalawŕ ay ako
rěn. Kanyŕ`, wala pŕ ng niyňg akň ng nŕpěpitŕs."

Dátapuwat ang bulŕg ay nagakála ng gawě ng katatawanŕn ang pagkahúlog
nang kúba`. Kanyá binálak nya na, kung makárinig syŕ ulč nang kalabňg,
ay sísigaw syŕ nang "Tatlň!"

Ang kúba ay umakyŕt na mulě`, dátapwat nahúlog děn syŕ. Ang bulŕg
ay sumigŕw nang "Tatlň!" at tumáwa sya. Ang kúba ay nagínit nang
gálit. Nilapítan nya ang bulŕg at kanyŕ ng sinampŕl sa mukhŕ`. Ang
sampŕl ay tumáma sa manga matŕ nang bulŕg, at dáhil díto ay nadílat
ang kanyŕ ng manga matŕ.

Úpang manghigantě sya ay sinípŕ nya ang kúba`. Tinamaan nyŕ itň sa
likňd at dáhil díto ay nŕúnat ang kanya ng kúba`.

Silŕ ng dalawŕ ay natwá sa nangyári at lálo ng tumíbay ang kanila ng
pagkakaybígan sa lugŕr nang magkasirá silŕ.





5. ANG HÁRI NG MAY SÚNGAY AT SI HWŔN.

Sa isŕ ng kapuluwŕn naghŕhári ang isa ng táwu ng may dalawŕ ng maiiklě
ng súngay na nŕtŕtágů sa malagú nya ng buhňk. Hindí itň nŕlŕláman nang
kanya ng manga pinaghŕharían. Dátapwat ang líhim na ytň y nagumpisŕ ng
nŕibadyŕ sa madlŕ` sa pamamagítan nang manga manggugúpit na nakŕpútul
nang kanyŕ ng buhňk.

Kanyá sya y nagkaroňn nang malaki ng gálit sa manga barbéro, at inakálŕ
nya ng lipúlin ang manga barbéro sa kanya ng kaharyŕn. Iniyútus nya ng
humúkay nang ápat na malálim na balňn sa harapŕn nang kanya ng těráhan,
at sa gitná nang ápat na húkay na yitň ay nagpalagŕy sya nang isa ng
ůpúan. Isa ng áraw naupó sya sa taburéte sa gitná nang ápat na húkay,
at báwat táo ng nagdaŕn ay tinanůng nya kung marúnung manggupět. Ang
báwat sumagňt nang "Óo" ay pinahintú nya úpang bigyŕn nya nang guntěng
at syŕ y gupitŕn. Pagkaraŕn nang ilŕ ng sandalě` ay itinanůng nya sa
báwat manggugúpit kung anň ang nŕkěkíta nya sa úlo nang háre`. Ang
manga manggugúpit ay nagsipagsábi nang katotohánan at báwat isŕ
sa kanilŕ ay sumagňt nang súngay ang kanila ng nŕkěkíta. Ang báwat
sumagňt nang ganitň ay ibinulěd nang háre` sa isŕ sa manga húkay sa
palígid niyŕ.

Nakaraŕn ang ila ng áraw at ang dalawŕ ng húkay ay napunú nŕ nang manga
barbéro at pinatabúnan na nyŕ. Dumálang ang manga tao ng nagdádaŕn
na marúnung manggupět, at ang háre ay nagakála ng nápatay nŕ niya ng
lahŕt ang manga barbéro sa kanyŕ ng kaharyŕn.

Isa ng áraw ay naghintŕy sya sa kanya ng ůpúan hanggŕng katanghalían
bágo nagdaŕn ang isa ng táo na nagsábi ng sya y marúnung gumupět
nang buhňk.

Itinanůng sa kanyŕ nang háre`: "Anň ang pangálan mo?"

Isinagňt nang táo: "Ang pangálan ko pň` ay Hwŕn."

"Gupitŕn mo akň, Hwŕn," iniyútus nang háre`.

Lumápit si Hwŕn sa háre` at inumpisahan nyŕ ang panggugupět.

Makaraŕn ang ila ng sandalě` ay itinanůng nang háre`: "Anň ang nŕkěkíta
mo sa úlo ko, Hwŕn?"

Ang kanya ng sagňt ay ganitň: "Ang iyo pň ng Kamŕhálan, nŕkěkíta ko
sa úlo ninyň ang koróna."

Itň ay ikinatuwá nang háre`. Kanyá nagtindig syŕ sa ůpúan at inákay
nya si Hwŕn sa kanya ng palásiyo at ginawá nya si Hwŕn na barbéro nang
háre`. Malakě ang suwčldu na ibinigŕy nya kay Hwŕn, at pinatabúnan
nya ang manga nŕtětirŕ ng húkay.





6. TATLŇ NG ESTUDYŔNTE.

Si Hwŕn, si Pédro, at si Andrčs ay tatlň ng magkakayibíga ng estudyŕnte
ng magkababáyan. Nang dumatěng ang pagbubukŕs nang manga pŕaralŕn ay
nŕláman nilŕ na silŕ ay magkŕkahiwá-hiwalŕy. Iba t ibŕ ng báyan ang
kapŕpatungúhan nang báwat isŕ sa kanilŕ. Bágo silŕ naghiwá-hiwalŕy
ay nagtěpánan silŕ nang pagtŕtagpuŕn nila ng lugŕr paguumpisŕ nang
bakasyňn.

Nakaraŕn ang isa ng taňn at dumatěng ang pagsasarŕ nang kláse at ang
manga estudyŕnte ay naguwían sa kaní-kanilŕ ng báyan, at ang tatlň
ng magkakaybíga ng si Pédro, si Hwŕn, at si Andrčs ay nagtatagpň sa
báya ng tinubúan ni Pédro, úpang doňn sila magpalípas nang bakasyňn.

Nang silŕ y magkikíta, pagkaraŕn nang iba t ibŕ ng bágay na kanilŕ ng
pinagusápan, ay nagsiyásat silŕ kung ganň ang nŕtutúhan nang báwat
isŕ sa kanila ng pagaáral nang wíka ng Kastíla`. Sinábi ni Pédro na
syŕ ay marámi ng nŕlŕláma ng salitŕ ng Kastíla`, dátapuwat ang maígi
nya ng natŕtandaŕn ay ang salitŕ ng "Bámos."

Sumagňt namŕn si Hwŕn: "Ako mŕn ay marámi rě ng nŕlŕláman, dátapuwat
sa ngayňn ang nŕŕalaála ko ay ang salitŕ ng 'Matŕr.'"

Si Andrčs namŕn ay nagwíka ng walá sya ng nŕtutúhan kung hindí ang
salitŕ ng "Sě."

Makaraŕn ang kanila ng pagsasŕlitáan ay nagyayá si Pédro na sila
ay mamangká sa ílog at magsipalígo tulňy. Nang sila y namámangká na
sa ílog, sa pangpŕng ay nakátanaw silŕ nang isŕ ng Kastílŕ` na íbig
malígo`. Sinábi ni Pédro na mabúti ay makipagúsap silŕ sa Kastíla`,
úpang sa gayů y mŕipakíta nilŕ ang kaní-kanilŕ ng dúnong.

Nagumpisŕ si Pédro at sinábi nya ng "Bámos!"

Si Hwŕn namŕn ay sumagňt: "Matŕr!"

At sa hulč ay si Andrčs ang kanya ng "Sě!"

Nang márinig itň nang Kastíla`, ay siniglŕn sya nang tákot, sapagkŕt
inakálŕ nya na pŕpataěn sya nang tatlň ng namámangkŕ`. Kanyá, káhit na
hindí sya marúnung lumangňy, ay nagtalňn sya sa ílog at sya y nalúnod.





7. ISA NG SUNDÁLU NG MARÚNUNG NANG LATĚN.

Tatlň ng magkakayibígan, isa ng párč`, isa ng manggagámut, at isa
ng sundálu, ay magkakasáma ng nagsipamarěl nang maiílap na háyup sa
isŕ ng maláwak na gúbat. Ang gúbat ay maláyů sa báyan. Kanyŕ` silŕ
ay nagdalŕ nang marámi ng báon, úpang hwag silŕ ng gutúmin.

Nakaraŕn ang ila ng áraw, dátapuwat walá pa sila ng nŕhůhúli káhit
anň. Ang kanila ng báon ay umuntí nang umuntě` hanggŕng sa walŕ ng
nátira kung hindí isa ng hilŕw na itlňg. Dumatěng sa kanilŕ ang áraw
nang malaki ng gútom, dátapuwat sila ng tatlň ay walŕ ng pagkáin kung
hindí ang itlňg lámang na nŕtětirŕ.

Sinábi nang páre` na, kung paghatían nilŕ ang isa ng itlňg, ay hindí
makabůbúti sa kanilŕ, sapagkŕt hindí makapŕpáwi` nang kaní-kanila ng
gútom. Kaniyŕ` ipináyu nang párě` na isŕ lámang sa kanilŕ ng tatlň ang
kumáin nang itlňg na nŕtětirŕ,--at sa kanya ng kasakimŕn ay ipináyu
nya na kung sínu sa kanilŕ ang pinakamahúsay na magsalitá nang Latěn
ay sya lámang kŕkáin nang itlňg. Inakálŕ nya na ang sundálu ay hindí
marúnung nang Latěn at ang médiko lámang ang sya nyŕ ng mŕkŕkatálo,
at ang dúnong nitň y kanya ng minámatŕ.

Ang médiko y umáyun sa hátul nang párě`, dátapuwat ang sundálu ay áyaw
pumáyag, sapagkŕt hindí sya nagáral na gáya nang pári` at nang médiko;
ngúnit walá sya ng magawŕ`.

Kinúha nang párě` ang itlůg at itinuktňk nya sa isa ng batň. Nang
mabásag ang itlňg ay sinábi nyŕ: "Koronátum est," at tiningnŕn nyŕ
ang dalawŕ nya ng kasáma.

Inabůt nang médiko ang basŕg na itlňg, inalis nyŕ ang balŕt na basŕg
at nilagyan nyŕ nang asěn at kanya ng sinábi: "Sŕltum est."

Iniyabůt nang manggagámot sa sundálu ang itlůg, at ang páre at siyŕ ay
naghintŕy nang sŕsabíhin nang sundálo. Itň y walŕ ng mŕláma ng sabíhin,
sapagkŕt katunáya ng walá sya ng nŕlŕláman káhit isa ng hóta tungkůl sa
Latěn. Sa kanya ng pagiisěp ay nŕalaála nya na, mínsan pumásuk sya sa
simbáhan úpang makiněg nang Syéti-Palábras, ay nárinig nyŕ sa párě` na
ang kahulugŕn nang salitŕ ng "Konsumátum est" ay "Tapus nŕ ang lahŕt."

Kanyŕ ibinúhos nya sa kanyŕ ng biběg ang itlňg, at pagkalaguk nyŕ ay
kanya ng sinábi: "Konsumátum est."

Ang dalawŕ nya ng kasáma ay nŕpagúlat nang malakě sa hindí nila
hininála ng dúnung nang sundálo.





8. ANG PITŮ NG DWČNDE.

Isŕ ng magasáwa ay máy-roo ng pitů ng anŕk na dwčnde. Ang amŕ ay walŕ
ng trabáho at hindí rěn siya makŕkíta nang trabáho. Ang inŕ namŕn ay
hindí kuměkíta nang salapě`, sapagkŕt mahína` ang kanyŕ ng katawŕn
at paráti sa sakět.

Isa ng tangháli` sila y nŕůupú sa isa ng bangkň` at pinagůusápan nilŕ
ang kanila ng pamumúhay na pinagdŕdaanŕn. Itinanůng nang laláke kung
anň ang mabúte nila ng gawěn sa kanila ng marŕmi ng anŕk. Ipináyu
nang babáye na kanilŕ ng ihánap nang trabáho ang manga báta`, úpang
kumíta silŕ nang kwaltŕ. Dátapuwat isinagňt nang laláki na sa akálŕ
nya ay hindí sila makŕkěkíta nang trabáho, sapagkŕt siya rěn ay
wala ng mŕkíta. Kanyŕ` ipináyu nyŕ na ang mabúti ay itápun nilŕ ang
manga báta`.

Itň y ikinalungkňt at ikináiyŕk nang babáye. Áyaw sya ng pumáyag
na itápon ang manga báta`. Dátapuwat ipinakíta sa kanyŕ nang kanyŕ
ng asáwa na, kung hindí nila gawěn iyňn, sila ng lahŕt ay mamámatay
nang gútom. Sa kalaúnan ay pumáyag ang babáe at pinagkŕsunduŕn nila
na dalhěn nila ng magpasyŕl ang manga báta` at kanila ng íwan sa daŕn.

Hábang pinagůusápan nilŕ itň, ang ikapitů ng bátŕ ay nása isŕ ng
bitŕk nang bangkň na kanila ng inůupŕn at nárinig nya ng lahŕt ang
gŕgawin sa kanilŕ nang kanila ng magúlang. Pagkaraŕn nang kanilŕ ng
sŕlitáan ay hinánap pagdáka nang báta ang kanyŕ ng manga kapatěd at
ibinalítŕ nya ang kanya ng náriněg. Silŕ ay nagěyákan, sapagkŕt hindí
ipinaálam sa kanilŕ nang kanila ng magúlang na silŕ ay nakabíbigat
sa kanila ng pamumúhay. Inakálŕ nila na, kung itň y nŕláman nilŕ,
káhit na papáno tůtúlong sila ng maghánap nang kabuháyan. Dátapuwat
pinagkŕsunduwan nilŕ na silŕ y sumáma pag niyáyŕ sila ng magsipagpasyŕl
at paligŕw silŕ.

Kinŕbukásan hinánap silŕ nang kanilŕ ng amŕ, pinapagbíhis
sila, binigyŕn sila nang manga púto, at sinábi ng sila y
magsísipagpasyŕl. Nang silŕ y magumpisŕ ang ikapitň ng báta ay
hindí kináin ang kanya ng tinápay, dátapuwat magmulá sa kanila ng
tŕrangkáhan ay dinúrog nya ang tinápay at ibinudbňd nya sa daŕ ng
kanila ng nilakáran. Nang sila y málayú nŕ ay naubúsan sya nang
tinápay, kanyá nanghingí sya sa kanya ng manga kapatěd. Dátapwat
hindí nila syŕ binigyŕn. Itň namŕn ay hindí sinábi sa kanilŕ kung
bákit sya naubúsan agŕd nang tinápay. Nang hindí sya makáhingě nang
tinápay ay namúlot sya nang manga batň, at itň y sya nyŕ ng isa-isŕ
ng inilaglŕg sa kanila ng pinagdaánan.

Nang dumatěng sila sa isa ng gúbat ay iníwan silŕ nang kanilŕ
ng magúlang at pinagsabíhan silŕ na hantayěn sila doňn, at silŕ y
bábalik agŕd. Silŕ y naíwan, dátapwat nŕlŕláman nilŕ na hindí sila
pagbŕbalikŕn nang kanila ng magúlang.

Nang makaraŕn ang ila ng sandalě`, ay nakárinig silŕ nang isa ng
íngay. Pinuntahŕn nilŕ ang lugŕr na pinanggŕgalíngan nang íngay. Doňn
ay nŕkíta nilŕ ang isa ng malakě ng higŕnte na nalělígo sa tabi nang
isa ng balňn. Tiningnŕn nila ang palígid-lígid nang lugŕr, at sa
tabě nang isa ng káhuy ay nŕkíta nilŕ ang pananamět nang higŕnte. Ang
ikapitů ng bŕta ay pinaalěs ang kanya ng manga kapatěd at sinábi nya
na magtágo silŕ at kanyŕ ng nŕnakáwin ang sapátos nang higŕnte. Itň
ay kanila ng ginawŕ`, at ninákaw nang báta ang sapátos.

Nang makapalígo` ang higŕnte at siyŕ y nagběbíhis ay hindí nya mŕkíta
ang kanya ng manga sapátos. Sya y nagálit at nagmurŕ. Tumáwag sya nang
túlong. Nang itň y máriněg nang numákaw nang sapátos ay dali-dáli sya
ng dumalň. Nang mŕkíta sya nang higŕnte ay hindí sya pinagbintangŕn,
sapagkŕt dahilŕn sa kanya ng kaliitŕn ay inakálŕ nang higŕnte ng
hindí nya madádala ang sapátos.

Kanyŕ` itň y nagwíka sa kanyŕ: "Kung iyo ng dŕdalhěn ito ng súpot ko
nang kwaltŕ sa áki ng asáwa at pabilhěn mo syŕ nang sapátos at ihatěd
nya sa ákin, ay ůupáhan kitŕ nang marámi ng kwŕlta."

Sinábi tulňy nya na sya y hindí nakalŕlákad nang wala ng sapátos,
kanyá sya y magmadalě`. Nang mŕkúha nya ang súpot nang kwaltŕ ay
ipinangáků nya ng bábalik syŕ agŕd. Dátapwat, nang málayo sya, ay
tináwag nya ang manga nŕtŕtágů nya ng kapatěd, at nang sila y maípon ay
nagyayá sya ng umuwč`. Dátapwat isinagňt nang kanya ng manga kapatěd
na hindí nila nŕlŕláman ang daŕ ng pauwč`. Ngúnit kanyŕ ng isinagňt
na tůtuntuněn nilŕ ang kanya ng inilaglŕg na batň at tinápay sa daŕn.

Sinábi nang isŕ nyŕ ng kapatěd na, kung nŕláman nya kung anň ang
kanya ng ginawŕ` sa tinápay, ay binigyŕn sána nya syŕ nang syŕ y
manghingě`. Kanilŕ ng ikinalungkňt ang ipinakíta nila ng karamútan
sa kanila ng kapatěd.

Hindí naláon at nŕtagpuan nilŕ ang hiléra nang manga batň sa daŕn. Itň
y tinuntňn nila at nakaratěng sila sa kanila ng báhay, dalŕ nilŕ
ang súpot nang kwaltŕ na kanila ng ibinigŕy pagdáka sa kanila ng
magúlang. Silŕ y nangatwá at nangalungkňt dahilŕn sa kanilŕ ng malě
ng inásal sa manga anŕk,--sila y natwá sapagkŕt máy-roon sila ng
ikabůbúhay sa maláo ng panahňn.





9. ISŔ NG PULĚS NA NAGASWŔNG-ASWÁNGAN.

Noň ng tagáraw nang taň ng míle-nobisyčntos-dňs, hábang ang manga
hinňg na búnga nang káhoy ay nangakabiyábit sa manga sangŕ, lumagánap
ang balíta sa boo ng báyan nang San-Antónyo na máy-roo ng aswŕng na
naglílibot sa báyan.

Ang manga táo-ng-San-Antónyo sa manga taň ng iyňn ay may paniniwála`
sa manga núno`, aswŕng, dwčnde, at iba pŕ ng katatakutŕn. Karamíhan sa
kanilŕ y hindí nagkapálad na makapagáral, dátapwat, káhit na ganitň ang
kalŕgáyan nila, sila y manga táwo ng mababaět, matahímik, at masisípag.

Ang manga báhay sa báya ng itň ay maliliět at nayŕyárě nang páwid at
kawáyan. Máy-roon dě ng ila ng báhay na tablŕ. Karamíhan ay nŕtŕtayň
sa malalakě ng bakúran, at ang dulúhan nang bakúran ay nŕtŕtamnŕn
nang manga púno-ng-káhoy na masasarŕp ang búnga, gáya nang tsíko,
súha`, santňl, mabúlo, manggŕ, at iba pŕ.

Kasalukúya ng nagkŕkahinňg ang manga búnga-ng-káhuy na ytň nang
lumagánap ang balíta na may-roňn nŕ ng ila ng gabě na nŕmatáan nang ila
ng babáe ang aswŕng sa ibŕ t iba ng dulúhan. Ang manga báta at manga
babáe ay siniglŕn nang malakě ng tákot, kanyá pagkagŕt nang dilěm ay
agad-agŕd silŕ ng nagsipanahímik sa loňb nang báhay. Karamíhan nang
manga laláki ay nangatákot děn, dátapwat máy-roo ng ila ng nagsipagsábi
na sila y hindí natŕtákot, sapagkŕt hindí pa sila nakátagpo nang
aswŕng, at sa ganitň y hindí nila nŕlŕláman kung dápat katakútan
ang aswŕng.

Ang aswŕng ay isa ng táo ng malakě ang kapangyaríhan. Nakapagěiba-t-ibŕ
sya nang pangangatawŕn. Kung mínsan ay may katawŕn siya ng pára ng táo,
dátapwat maitčm, kung mínsan siya y isa ng malakě ng áso o báboy. Sya
y nangŕngáin nang táo, lálů nŕ nang manga báta`. Dátapuwat ang lálo ng
mahalagŕ nya ng pagkáin at sya rěn namŕn nyŕ ng karanyúa ng kinŕkáin
ay ang báta ng hindí pa naipangánganŕk at násŕsa tiyŕn pa lámang nang
kanya ng inŕ. Kanyá ang manga buntěs na babáye sa báya ng yaňn ay
lálo ng malakě ang tákot. Hindí nila pinatúlog ang kanila ng asáwa
sa pagbabantŕy sa kanila ng tabě. Ang aswŕng ay mahírap mápatay nang
patalěm o barěl, sapagkŕt máy-roon sya ng íisa lámang na lugŕr na
dápat mŕtamaŕn o masugátan úpang sya y mápatŕy, at ang lugŕr na ytň
ay lihěm. Ang bágay lámang na kanya ng iněilágan ay ang báwang. Kanyá
itň y malakě ng kagamitŕn sa pagpapaláyas nang aswŕng.

Dátapwat isŕ ng bágay na nakapagtátakŕ sa aswŕng na iyňn ay ang kanyŕ
ng inugáli ng pagtitirŕ sa manga dulúhan nang bakúran. Katakŕ-takŕ rěn
ang bágay na manga dalága ang karamíhan nang nagsipagsábi ng nŕmatáan
nilŕ sa dulúhan sa itaŕs nang súha` o iba pŕ ng púno-ng-káhoy ang
aswŕng na iyňn. Ila ng táo ng matalíno ay nagsábi ng ang bintŕng nilŕ
y isa ng magnanákaw at hindí aswŕng ang pinagkŕkatakutŕ ng iyňn.

Isa ng polěs na may hindí karanyúa ng tápang ay siya ng tumiktěk sa
aswŕng na itň sa dulúha ng bágo ng kinakitáan sa kanyŕ. Pagdilěm ay
nároon na syŕ sa kanya ng kublíhan. Hindí nalaúnan at dumatěng ang
aswŕng, umakyŕt sa isa púno-ng-súha`, at nárinig niya ng pumitŕs nang
marámi ng búnga. Itň y bumába` at umalěs, dátapwat sya y sinundŕn
nang pulěs hanggŕng sa báhay na kanya ng pinasúkan.

Malakě ang nagěng pagkŕgúlat nang polěs, nang díto nŕmálas nya ng ang
kápwa nya polěs nabŕbálot nang maitěm na kúmot, at ang súpot na itěm
na punň nang súha` ay kasalukúyan pa lámang niya ng inilálapŕg.

Niyáyŕ nya sa munisípyo ang kápwa nya polěs, at doňn kinŕbukásan
ipinagsumbňng nyŕ sa presidčnte. Ang polěs na nagaswang-aswángan ay
nábilanggň dahilŕn sa sála ng pagnanákaw.





10. ISŔ NG ASWŔNG NA NÁPATŔY.

Isŕ ng gabě sa isŕ ng báhay na pŕngaserahŕn nang ilŕ ng manga
nagsěsipagáral sa báya-ng-Malólos ay nárinig ko ng isinalaysŕy nang
isŕ ng matandŕ` na may gúlang na siyŕm na pů ng taňn sa isŕ ng umpúkan
ang sumúsunňd.

Noň ng sya y bágo ng táwu pa lámang ay sa búkid sya nagtítirŕ. Íilan
lámang silŕ ng magkakápit-báhay. Isa ng áraw ay namatayŕn ang isa nyŕ
ng kápit-báhay. Sa pagsunňd sa isa ng matandŕ ng kaugaliŕn ay dumalo
syŕ sa kápit-báhay na may hápis.

Nang dumatěng sya doňn ay hindí nalaúnan at nŕbalitáan nyŕ na may
aswŕng sa kanila ng lugŕr. Syŕ ay may malakě at katutúbo ng gálit sa
manga aswŕng, kaniyá inakálŕ nya ng magbantŕy nang gabě ng iyňn.

Nang malálim nŕ ang gabě ay nanáog sya sa báhay at sa isa ng karitň
ng dí maláyo sa báhay, doňn sya nahigŕ`. Kabilúgan nang bwŕn nang
gabi ng iyňn, kanyŕ malínaw ang pagkŕkíta nya sa manga bágay sa
palěgid-lígid. Walá sya ng nŕmálas na mŕpaghěhinaláa ng isa ng aswŕng,
kanyá sya y natúlog.

Kinŕháti-ng-gabihŕn ay nágising syŕ at ang úna ng tinamaŕn nang kanyŕ
ng manga matŕ ay isŕ ng bágay na maitěm sa bubungŕn nang báhay nang
kinamatayŕn. Ang maitěm na iyňn ay walá roon bágo sya natúlog, kaniyá
nagbintang syŕ na iyňn ay ang aswŕng na nŕbalitáan nyŕ. Ang aswŕng
ay nangŕngáin nang patŕy na táo, kanyŕ sinapantáhŕ nya na ang patŕy
ang sadyá doňn nang aswŕng na iyňn.

Pumanhěk sya sa báhay at dalŕ nyŕ ang isa ng gúlok. Ang manga táo
y natůtúlog. Sa itaŕs ay may-roon syŕ ng nŕkíta ng isa ng bágay na
nakalawět mulá sa bubungŕn nang báhay. Itň y gáya nang bitúka nang
manňk. Humábŕ nang humába`, hanggŕng sa ang dúlo y pumások sa biběg
nang patŕy. Ang patŕy ay nagtinděg sa kanyŕ ng kinŕlŕlagyŕn pagkapások
sa kanya ng biběg nang bágay na iyňn.

Ang ginawá nang bágo ng táo ay lumápit siya sa nakatinděg na patŕy at
sa pamamagítan nang dala nyŕ ng gúlok ay pinútol niya ang bágay na iyňn
na pára ng bitúka nang manňk. Nang itň y mapútol ay may kumalabňg sa
tabě nang báhay. Nanáog siya at doňn ay nŕkíta nya ang patŕy na aswŕng.





11. ANG MANGKUKÚLAM.

Sa ilŕ ng poňk sa Filipínas ay may lubňs na paniniwálŕ sa mangkukúlam
ang manga táo. Áyon sa kanila ng paniwála` ang mangkukúlam ay isa ng
táo ng may malakě ng kapangyaríhan at ang kapangyaríha ng itň y gáling
sa dimóniyo o kayŕ y mána sa magúlang. Bágo mŕkamtŕn ang kapangyaríha
ng iyňn ang isŕ ay dápat múna ng makipagkayibígan at magsilbč sa
dimóniyo. Dátapwat may ilan dě ng naněniwála ng nŕpůpúlot o naŕágaw
ang kapangyaríha ng iyňn sa gúbat o ilŕng na lugŕr na mahírap puntahŕn
at karanyúwa y pinagkŕkatakutŕn.

Ang kúlam ay siyŕ ng naŕágaw, nŕmŕmána, o ibiníbigay nang dimóniyo, at
iyň y sya ng pinanggŕgalíngan nang kapangyaríhan nang nagmčme-áre`. Ang
hitsúra nang kúlam ay hindí parč-parého. Kung měnsan ay isa ng batň o
isa ng maníka ng maliět at masamŕ` ang hitsúra. Kung madilěm ang kúlam
na itň y nagníningněng na pára ng alitaptŕp, dátapwat ang ningněng
na itň y nawáwalŕ namŕn pag iněbig nang kúlam. Ang kúlam at ang táo,
káhit laláki o babáe, na nagŕári sa kanyŕ ay hindí naghíhiwalŕy káhit
isŕ ng sandalč` at káhit na sa pagpalígo` ay dinádala nang mangkukúlam
ang kanya ng kúlam. Dáhil díto ang manga táo ng mapagsyásat, pag
íbig nilŕ ng mŕpagkilála kung mangkukúlam ngŕ` o hindě` ang isa ng
táo ng kanila ng pinaghěhinaláan, ay sinůsubúkan nila itň sa kanyŕ
ng pagpalígo`. Kung hindí maíngat at walŕ ng hinálŕ ang mangkukúlam
na syŕ y sinůsubúkan, kung mínsan ay nagkŕkapálad ang nanůnúbok na
mŕkíta nya ang kúlam.

Ang mangkukúlam ay may kapangyaríhan dě ng itágo` sa loňb nang kanyŕ
ng katawŕn ang kúlam, at hindi bihíra` ang manga táo ng nakŕkíta nang
mangkukúlam sa kanya ng pagkamatŕy. Sa kŕhulě-hulíha ng sandalě`,
bágo malagňt ang hiningŕ, inilúluwa nilŕ ang kúlam.

Itň y nangyŕyári lámang kung áyaw ipamána nang mangkukúlam ang kanyŕ
ng kúlam. Kung ipinamŕmána namŕn itň, malwat pŕ bágo mamatŕy ang
mangkukúlam ay tinŕtáwag na nyŕ ang kanyŕ ng íbig pamanáhan, at díto
y líhim na líhim nya ng ibiníbigay ang kúlam.

Ang malakě ng kapangyaríhan nang mangkukúlam ay ginŕgámit nya lában sa
kanya ng manga kaáway, sa manga táo ng kanyŕ ng kinagŕgalítan, o kayŕ
y sa manga háyop nilŕ, kung siya nyŕ ng íbig panghigantihŕn. Gayon
děn ginŕgámit nya ang kanya ng kapangyaríhan sa pangbibíro` sa isa
ng táo o háyop na kanya ng mŕkatwaŕn.

Ang kanyŕ ng pinasŕsakítan kadalasŕ y nagáanyo ng pára ng ulňl. Kung
mínsan ang kanya ng kinůkúlam ay dumádaing na masakět ang kanya ng buň
ng katawŕn, nagsísisigŕw, at hindí mŕtahímik káhit isŕ ng sandalč`. Sa
háyop namŕn karanyúwa y ang bábuy na pinakamahalagŕ sa may ári`,
ang kanya ng ibiníbigay na parúsa ay gáya nang sakět na kólera,
dátapuwat lálu ng mabagsěk káy sa ríto. Ang pagdumě nang háyop ay
wala ng patěd, at pagkaraŕn nang ilŕ ng óras, káhit na gáno katabŕ`
ang háyop, ay nagíging butň t balŕt. Ang táo ng nŕkůkúlam nya ay
malakŕs kumáin, katimbŕng nang dalawŕ katáo, at mapanghilěng nang
masasarŕp na pagkáin. Dáhil díto ang paniwála nang manga táo y kasálo
ng kumŕkáin nang máy sakit ang mangkukúlam na nagpŕparúsa sa kanyŕ.

Ang mangkukúlam ay may kapangyaríha ng pumaloňb sa katawŕn nang
kanyŕ ng kinůkúlam. Itň y sya ng paniwála`, dátapuwat kung papáno
ang paraŕn nang pagpások nang mangkukúlam at kung saŕn sya pumŕpások
sa katawŕn nang kanya ng kinůkúlam ay walŕ ng nakŕŕalŕm. Ngúnit ang
kanya ng nilŕlabasŕn ay ang hintutúro`. Ang bágay na itň ay malakě ng
kabuluhŕn úkol sa paggamňt sa nŕkůkúlam at gayon děn sa pagpaparúsa
sa mangkukúlam.

Káhit na malakě ang kapangyaríhan nang mangkukúlam ay mayroon děn sya
ng kinatŕtakútan, karanyúwa y ang manga táo ng malalakŕs, matápang,
at wala ng paniwálŕ sa kapangyaríhan nang mangkukúlam at iba pŕ ng
pinagkŕkatakutŕn nang manga iba ng táo. Dáhil díto y hindí bihíra`
na ang isŕ ng táo y pamagatŕ ng "médiko-ng-mangkukúlam" pagkaraŕn
nang úna o ikalawŕ nya ng pagpapagalěng nang táo sa sakět na itň.

Mínsan ay nárinig ko ng magbalíta` ang isa ng táo ng nakŕkíta
nang panggagamňt nang táo ng nŕkůkúlam. Ang táo ng itň y may isa
ng kápit-báhay na may anŕk na dalága. Sa dalága ng itň y marámi ng
manglilígaw, at ang isŕ sa kanilŕ y pinaghěhinaláa ng mangkukúlam. Sa
kasamaŕ-ng-pálad nitň ay nagěng isa syŕ sa manga hindí nátanggŕp. Sa
malakě nya ng gálit ay magkasunňd nya ng kinúlam ang babáye at laláki
ng magkaěbígan.

Inúna nya ang babáye at ito namŕ y agŕd na itináwag nang
médiko-ng-mangkukúlam nang kanyŕ ng manga magúlang. Nang dumatěng ang
médiko at nŕkíta nya ang máy sakět, ay sinábi nya ng nŕkůkúlam ngŕ`
ang babáye.

Sinábi nya sa manga táo doňn na hwŕg paŕaláman sa nŕkůkúlam na syŕ y
nŕrňroňn sa báhay. Pag itň y nŕláman nang máy sakět, ay mŕlŕláman děn
nang mangkukúlam na nása loňb nang kanya ng katawŕn, at makaáalis agŕd
ang mangkukúlam. Ang médiko y lumápit na hindí nŕmaláyan nang babáye,
at pagdáka y tinangnan nyŕ nang mahigpět ang dalawŕ ng hintutúro`
nang babáye. Itň y lálo ng inilakŕs ang pagsigŕw, at kuminěg na pára
ng isa ng natŕtákot.

Ang mangkukúlam, áyon sa paniwálŕ nang manga táo, ay sya ng
nakŕrŕramdŕm nang ano mŕ ng pasákit na ibigŕy sa katawŕn nang kanyŕ
ng kinůkúlam hábang sya y násŕsa loňb nang katawŕn nitň. Gayon děn,
kung kausápin ang máy sakět, ay siyŕ ang sumásagňt.

Dáhil díto y itinanňng pagdáka nang médiko: "Anň ang ginágawá mo
ríto, salbáhe?"

Ang máy sakit ay hindí kumibň`, dátapwat nagpílit na magkawalŕ`. Ang
ipinakíta nya ng lakŕs ay hindí karanyúwa ng lakŕs nang babáye.

Dátapuwat hindí sya pinawalŕn nang médiko, at itň y tumanňng na mulě`:
"Anň ang ginágawá mo ríto? Bákit ka naparíto? Pag hindí ka sumagňt,
ay pahěhirápan kitŕ."

Ang babáye ay nagmŕmakaáwa ng sumagňt: "Walá po`, hindí na po` úulč`,
pawalan pň` ninyo akň, at akň y nahěhirápan nŕ."

"Pawalŕn kitŕ?" itinanňng agŕd nang médiko, "Mangáků ka múna sa ákin
na hindí ka na bábalik."

"Hindí na pň` akň bábalik," ang sagňt nang babáye.

"Pag nŕhúle kitŕ ulč` díto, ay pŕpatayěn kitŕ. Hwag kŕ ng
salbáhe. Tumahímik ka sa iyň ng báhay."

"Ó po`, ó po`, hindí na pň` akň bábalik. Pawalŕn na pň ninyo akň!"

Hábang ang sŕlitáa ng itň y nangyŕyári ang babáye ay nagpěpílit
na magkawalŕ`, íbig nya ng mabitíwan nang médiko ang kanya ng
hintutúro`. Pagkapangáko nang babáye ay binitíwan nang médiko
ang dalawŕ nya ng hintutúro`. Ang mukhá nang babáye na dáti ay
nagpŕpakilála nang malakě ng paghihírap ngayň y nŕhúsay, at sya y pára
ng gága na pinagsa-ulŕn nang pagiísip. Sya ay tumahímik, pinútol ang
pagsisigŕw, at nŕkaúsap nang matwěd.

Ang laláki namŕn ay nŕtětirŕ sa isa ng báya ng malápit. Nang sya y
kinůkúlam nŕ ay itináwag sya nang manggagámot nang kanya ng kapatěd
na laláke. Sa kalakhŕn nang gálit nang kapatěd na ytň ay sya nyŕ ng
tináwag ang manggagamňt na mabagsěk at malupět sa pagtaráto nya sa
mangŕ mangkukúlam.

Líhim na dumatěng ang manggagámot sa báhay nang máy sakět. Mulá sa
kanya ng kublíhan ay piního múna nya kung ang mangkukúlam ay násŕsa
katawŕn ngŕ` nang máy sakět. Itň y nŕpagkěkilála sa pagsisigŕw,
pagkílos, at pananalitŕ ng hindí tulŕ-tulŕ` nang máy sakět. Ang
manggagamňt ay nagpatalěm nang isŕ ng gúlok at pagkatápos ay maligsě
sya ng tumakbň sa tabě nang máy sakět. Tinangnan nyŕ ang dalawŕ
ng hintutúro nitň, dinaganŕn nya ang katawŕn, at tinagá nya ng
makáilan ang mukhá nang máy sakět. Itň y nagsisigŕw at nagkawalŕ`,
dátapwat nang makawalá sya y may manga súgat na ang kanyŕ ng mukhŕ`
at ang dugň y umŕágos na wala ng patěd. Walŕ ng kibú sya iníwan nang
manggagamňt. Hinánap nitň ang kapatěd nang sugatŕn at kanya ng sinábi
na hwag pansiněn ang manga súgat nang kanya ng kapatěd, at kinŕbukása
y mawáwala` iyňn at mŕlělípat sa mangkukúlam, sapagkŕt dinatnŕn nya
itň sa katawŕn nang kanyŕ ng kapatěd. Kinŕbukásan ay pinarunŕn nang
médiko ang kanya ng ginamňt nang patalěm, at malakě ang tuwá nya nang
itň y mŕkíta nya ng mahúsay at wala ng bakas-súgat sa mukhŕ`. Pagkaraŕn
nang ila ng áraw nŕbalitáan nilŕ na isa ng mangkukúlam sa kápit-báyan
nilŕ ay malubhŕ` ang lagŕy dahilŕn sa pagdudugň ng hindí maampŕt nang
manga súgat nya sa mukhŕ`.

Máy-roon děn namŕ ng mangkukúlam na maligsě at hindí na paaábot
sa manggagamňt. Ang manggagamňt namŕn ay kinŕkayilánga ng bihása`
at maligsě. Ang káhit síno y maŕári ng gumamňt sa isŕ ng nŕkůkúlam,
yámang walá namŕ ng ibŕ ng panggamňt kung hindě` ang pagpapahěrap
sa katawŕn nang nŕkůkúlam. Dátapuwat malakě ang pangánib, sapagkŕt,
kung hindí maligsě, dahilŕn sa kawalŕn nang sánay, ang gumágamňt,
maŕári ng makawalŕ` ang mangkukúlam. Kung magkágayo y ang nŕkůkúlam
měsmo ang maghěhírap dahilŕn sa parúsa. Mínsan ay máy nŕbalíta ng
nangyári na gáya nitň ng sumúsunňd.

Ang isŕ sa dalawŕ ng magkapatěd na laláki ay kinúlam nang kanya ng
karibŕl sa paglígaw. Walŕ ng mŕtáwag na médiko-ng-mangkukúlam. Sa
malakě ng áwŕ sa kanyŕ nang kanya ng kúya ay tinalagŕ nitň ng
gamutěn sya káhit na walá sya ng pagkasánay. Hindí ngá sya sanŕy,
dátapwat madalŕs nya ng nŕpakinggŕn sa manga manggagamňt ang paraŕn
nang paggamňt. Isa ng hápon, nang inakálŕ nya ng nása loňb na namŕn
nang katawŕn nang kanyŕ ng kapatěd ang mangkukúlam, ay sinunggabŕn
nya agŕd ang isa ng gúlok at pagkálapit nyŕ sa kanya ng kapatěd ay
tinagá nya itň nang walŕ ng tuňs. Kinŕbukásan sa lugŕr nang mŕkíta
nya ng magalěng at wala ng súgat ang kanyŕ ng kapatěd itň y bangkŕy
na lámang. Ang mangkukúlam ay nakawalŕ`.





12. ANG LARO NG SÍPA` SA FILIPÍNAS.

Ang laro ng sípŕ sa Estádos-Unídos at sa Filipínas ay lubhŕ ng malakě
ang pagkakáibŕ. Sa lugŕr nang dalawŕ ng pangkŕt na nagtŕtálo ang
nagsěsipaglarň` na gáya nang fůtbol, sa sípŕ ay isŕ ng pangkŕt lámang
ang naglálarň`. Sa sípŕ ang hangŕd nang nagsěsipaglarň ay hindí ang
talúnin ang isa ng kaáway, dátapuwat ang huwŕg bayáa ng lumagpŕk sa
lúpŕ ang bóla o sípa`.

Ang bóla ng gámit ay malakě ng malaki rěn ang kaibhŕn. Itň y nayŕyárě
nang yantňk na tinilŕd at nilála ng pabilňg. Walŕ ng lamŕn ang loňb,
at ang manga matŕ nang sulihiyŕ ay malalakč. Dáhil díto ay magaŕn
ang sípa`, hindí gáya nang bňla ng gámit sa bčsbol.

Mulá sa dalawŕ hanggŕng sa dalawŕ ng pů` ang bílang nang
nagsěsipaglarň`. Kung silŕ ay marámi ang áyos ay pabilňg. Úpang
umpisahŕn ang paglalarň` isŕ sa manga kasále ay ihiníhitsŕ ang sípa
na paitaŕs at patúngo sa isŕ sa manga nagsěsipaglarň`, karanyúwa y sa
isŕ ng katapŕt nyŕ. Ang táo ng hinitsahŕn nang sípa` ay ipinabábalik
itň sa naghágis sa kanyŕ, hindí nang kanya ng kamŕy, dátapwat nang
kanya ng paŕ.

Kung ang manga nagsěsipaglarň ay marurúnong, napapúpunta nilŕ ang
pelóta sa káhit na síno sa manga kasále, kayŕ t báwat isŕ sa kanilŕ
ay nakaabŕng at naghíhintay nang pagdatěng nang sípa`. Ang báwat isŕ
ay nagěíngat na hwŕg bayáa ng lumagpŕk sa lúpa ang pelóta. Kadalasŕn
ang manga nagsísipaglarň ay nagpŕpakíta nang sarě-sári ng áyus nang
pagsípa`. Ang manga magandŕ ng pagbabaluktňt nang paŕ sa harapŕn
o likurŕn, ang maligsě at magaŕ ng lundŕg, ang banáyad at magaŕ ng
pagsípŕ sa pelóta, at ang pagpapadalŕ nang sípŕ sa káhit na alě ng
bandŕ ay manga bágay na nagpŕpagandŕ sa laro ng sípa`. Hindi rěn
bihíra na ang balíkat, ang síko, ang túhod, o ang kamŕy ay sya ng
ginŕgámit sa pagpapabalěk nang pelóta.

Papáno ang pagkakatalň sa larň ng itň? Itň y maŕári lámang sa
pagpapŕtagálan nang hindí paglagpŕk nang sípŕ sa lúpa`.

Kung halimbáwa y íbig makipaglában nang isa ng pangkŕt nang manga
mŕninípa o sipéros sa ybŕ ng pangkŕt, ang úna y manghŕhámon sa alin mŕ
ng pangkŕt na kanila ng mŕpíle`. Kung itň y tanggapěn, ang áraw, óras,
at lugŕr nang paglalarň ay agad nŕ ng nŕbŕbalíta sa manga pŕhayagŕn.

Sa óras nang paglalarň` ay hindí íilan lámang na líbo ng táo ang
nagsísipanoňd. Ang manghahámun karanyúwa y umůúpa nang isa ng
bŕnda-ng-músika at tinůtugtugŕn ang báwat pangkŕt sa kanilŕ ng
paglalarň`. Karanyúwa y dalawŕ ng bŕnda ang músika, sapagkŕt, kung
ang hinámon ay may kauntě ng gílas, ay íbig děn namŕn nilŕ ng ipakíta,
at dáhil díto y nagdádala silŕ nang saríle nilŕ ng bŕnda nang músika.

Pagkaraŕn nang larň` ang hukňm ay syŕ ng nagpŕpaháyag sa manga nanúnoňd
kung alě ng pangkŕt ang nanálo. Pagkárinig nilŕ nang paháyag nang
hukňm ay agad-agŕd inůumpisahŕn ang pagisěgáwan at manga pagpúri sa
nanálo ng pangkŕt. Ang mŕnanalň ng pangkŕt at ang kanila ng manga
kaybígan magkakasáma ng tinůtugtugŕn nang kanila ng bŕnda nang músika
ay agŕd-agŕd na nagpŕpaséyo sa manga lugŕr na malápit sa kanilŕ
ng pinaglaruŕn. Kinŕbukásan ang lahŕt nang nangyári ay nŕkěkíta sa
manga pŕhayagŕn.

Ang ganitň ng manga paglalarň nang sípa ay hindí karanyúwan sa manga
báya ng maliliět sa prověnsiya, dátapuwat sa malalakě lámang na báyan,
gáya nang Mayníla` at iba pŕ.





13. ANG KÚRA NG SI PATÚPAT.

Sa báya-ng-San-Migčl ay máy-roo ng nagtirŕ ng isa ng táo noň ng manga
hulě ng áraw nang panahňn nang Kastěla`. Ang táo ng itň y nagáral
at sa kanya ng katalinúhan ay nŕintindihan nyŕ ang manga masamŕ ng
palákad nang manga kúra na sya ng manga maliliět na háre sa kanila
ng bayŕn-bayŕn.

Sa San-Migčl ang kúra ng nŕdistíno ay isa ng mabagsěk at maínit ang
úlo. Ang táwag sa kanyŕ nang manga táo ay "si Patúpat."

Isa ng linggo ang táwu ng nábanggět sa itaŕs nitň ay naparoňn sa
simbáhan úpang makiněg nang sčrmon nang páre`. Sapagkŕt ang pári ng
itň ay nagakála ng manga walŕ ng pinagarálan ang kanyŕ ng sinčsčrmunan
ay hindí sya nagpílit na makapagsalitŕ ng matwěd nang Tagálog. Ang
kanya ng pananalitŕ` ay walŕ ng púno t dúlo, at halů-hálo ng pára
ng kalámay. Gayon děn ang kanya ng isinčsčrmun ay hindí nŕěibŕ sa
infiyčrno, purgatóriyo, manga salbáhi ng táo-ng-báyan, at katapusŕn
nang mundň.

Nang ang sčrmon nya ay nagumpisa nŕ, pumások sa simbáhan ang áti ng
kaybíga ng si Pransěsko.

Gáya nang karanyúwan inumpisahŕn nang kúra ang kanya ng sčrmon sa
ganitň ng pananalitŕ`: "Manŕ kapatěr-konkristyános!"

May ápat na pu ng taňn na sya sa lúpa ng Katagalúgan, ay hindí pa
nya nŕtutúha ng sabíhi ng matwěd ang "Mangŕ kapatěd-Kongkristyános."

Si Pransěsko ay nŕtŕtayú sa isa ng lugŕr na malápit sa půlpito,
pinakinggŕn nya ng mabúte ang sčrmon na noň y wala ng ibŕ kung hindí
ang makŕlělíbo nŕ ng inúlit nang pári ng itň, at iyň y úkul sa manga
hírap sa infiyčrno at purgatóriyo at pagtutúlus nang kandíla` at
pagbibigŕy nang kwŕlta sa simbáhan úpang mŕligtasŕn ang manga hírap
na iyňn. Si Pransěsko ay siniglŕn nang malakě ng gálit, sapagkŕt
nŕpagkilála nya na nilňlóko nang páre ang kanyŕ ng manga táo, at walá
sya ng ibŕ ng pákay kung hindí ang takútin lámang ang manga namŕmáyan
úpang kanilŕ ng payamánin ang simbáhan at manga kúra.

Pagkaraŕn nang sčrmon ay hindí umwé si Kíko na gáya nang karanyúwan,
dátapuwat hinantŕy nya ng matápus ang mísa. Pagkaraŕn nitň y nagpáiwan
syŕ sa simbáhan. Kumúha sya nang manga papčl at sumúlat sya sa páre
nang ganitň:

"Ámong, náriněg ko pň` ang inyu ng sčrmon kanína ng
umága. Nŕpagkěkilála ko na kayň y naněniwála ng may infiyčrno at
may purgatóriyo. Akň y walŕ ng paniwála díto. Sa linggo ng dárating,
kung íbig mo, prubahŕn mo sa iyo ng sčrmon sa manga táo na máy-roo
ng infyčrno at purgatóriyo. Pagkatápos půprubahŕn kň namŕn sa kanilŕ
na walŕ ng infiyčrno ni purgatóriyo. Kung ikŕw ang paniwaláan nang
manga táo hindí báli ng ipabítay mo akň dahilŕn sa áki ng pagkatálo
at hindí paniniwála`. Dátapuwat, kung akň y manálo ang hiníhiling ko
lámang sa iyň ay pabayaŕn mo akň ng makapagsábi sa madlŕ` na walŕ ng
infyčrno ni purgatóryo."

Ang ilŕ ng kópya nang súlat na ytň ay idinikět nya sa manga padčr
nang simbáhan at ang isŕ y ipinaabňt nya sa kúra.

Nang itň y mŕbása ni Patúpat sumubň ang kanya ng dugň`, at
walŕ ng pagkŕsyahŕn ang kanya ng gálit. Ipinatáwag nya ang manga
gwŕrdya-siběl, at sa gabi děn nang linggň ng iyňn ay pinapanhikŕn at
pinahanápan nya ang manga bahŕy-bahŕy sa boo ng báyan, úpang hulíhin
si Kíko`. Dátapuwat si Kíko ay hindí nila nŕhúle. Nang hápon dě ng
iyňn ay ibinalíta ni Kíko sa ilŕn nya ng matálik na kaybígan ang kanyŕ
ng ginawŕ`, at silŕ y nangŕpamanghŕ`. Itinanňng nilŕ kung bákit niya
ginawá iyňn at kung hindí nya napagkůkúro ang mangyŕyári sa kanyŕ.

Ang isŕ sa kanilŕ y nagsábi nang ganitň: "Magbalňt ka nŕ nang damět,
at umalěs ka ngayon děn, kung hindí mo gustň ng mŕhúli ka nang manga
sundálo ni Patúpat at maipabarěl ka kinŕbukásan."

Si Kíko ay áyaw sumunňd sa kanyŕ ng páyo, sapagkŕt inakálŕ nya ng
tŕtanggapěn ni Patúpat ang kanya ng hámon tungkňl sa pagpapakilála
sa manga táo na walŕ ng infiyčrno ni purgatóriyo at ang manga itň y
panghúle lámang nang manga páre nang kwŕlta. Kanyá sya y nagpaábot
nang gabě sa báhay nang isa nyŕ ng kaybígan.

Nang dumilim nŕ at ang báya y nagúgulo dahilŕn sa paghahanŕp nang
manga gwŕrdya-siběl ay saká pa lámang nya nŕpagkilála ang malakě ng
pangánib na kanyŕ ng kinŕběbingítan. Sapagkŕt itň y nŕbalitáan nya
agŕd, kanyá nagkaroňn sya nang panahň ng makapagtágo sa isa ng líhim
na súlok sa báhay nang kanya ng kaybígan.

Nang makaraŕn ang manga paghahanapŕn sya y lumabŕs sa kanya ng
taguŕn, umwí sya, nagbalňt nang ilŕ ng damět, nagpasingkŕw nang isa
ng karumáta, at pagkakúha nya nang manga bála nang barěl, binitbět
nya ang barěl, sumakŕy sya sa karumáta, at napahatěd sa labŕs nang
báyan. Pagkaraŕn nang ila ng áraw ay namundok syŕ, kasáma nang ilŕ
ng manga táo-ng-báyan na hindí makatirŕ sa loňb nang báyan, sapagkŕt
nŕkagalítan sila nang kúra o nang iba pŕ ng Kastíla ng may katungkúlan
sa báyan.

Díto sa pamumundok nyŕ sya y inabútan nang paghihěmagsíkan lában sa
manga Kastíla` nang taň ng isa ng líbo walo ng daŕn walň ng pu t ánim.





14. SI MARYÁNO AT ANG PÁRI NG SI PATÚPAT.

Si Maryáno ay isŕ sa íila ng botikáriyo sa báya-ng-San-Migčl. Sya
y nagěng isŕ sa manga nasawi-ng-pálad dahilŕn sa pagswŕy sa manga
kautusŕn nang kúra ng si Patúpat. Sya y may famíliya; bukňd sa asáwa
ay may dalawŕ sya ng anŕk, isŕ ng dadalawáhi ng taňn at isŕ ng kabŕbágu
ng panganŕk pa lámang.

Isa ng áraw ang kanyŕ ng alíla ay nagkasakět. Sya y may bayŕw na
médiko, kanyá ang alíla` ay ipinagamůt nya díto na walŕ ng báyad,
at ang gamňt namŕn ay ibinigŕy nya na walŕ ng báyad sa alíla`. Nang
makaraŕn ang ilŕ ng áraw ay gumalěng ang alíla` at itň y nagakála
ng magpahingŕ ng sandalě` sa búkid. Kanyŕ` binayáran nya ang kanya
ng útang at napaálam sya kay Maryáno úpang magtirŕ sa búkid. Hindí
nalaúnan ang pagtitira nyŕ sa búkid at ang alíla ng itň y nagkasakět
na mulě`, at ang naging dúlo y ang kanya ng pagkamatŕy.

Sa Filipínas nang manga panahň ng yaňn ay hindí maŕári ng huwŕg
pabendisyunŕn ang isa ng patŕy bágo mábaňn. Itň y hindí ipinahěhintúlot
nang manga kúra, dátapuwat ang pagsasáma na hindí kasŕl nang isa ng
babáye at laláki ay hindí nila masyádo ng pinápansěn, palibhása y
gawá rin namŕn nilŕ.

Ang patŕy na alílŕ ni Maryáno ay lubhŕ ng mahírap at ang kanyŕ ng
manga kamagának ay mahihírap děn at walŕ ng ikakáya ng magbáyad sa
halagŕ na sinísingěl ni Patúpat. Dáhil díto y walŕ ng magpabaňn sa
katawŕn nang alíla`.

Nang mŕláman itň ni Patúpat ay ipinatáwag nya si Maryáno at sinábi
nya ng siyŕ ang dápat magpabaňn sa patŕy at siyŕ ang magbáyad
nang gŕstos. Sa akálŕ ni Maryáno ay lumálampŕs ang kasalbahíhan ni
Patúpat. Kanyá sinábi nya na hindi nyŕ sya bŕbayáran sa pagbabaňn
nang patŕy, káhit na anň ang mangyáre.

Si Patúpat ay sinubhŕn nang gálit. Ipinabaňn niya ang patŕy at sa
áraw di ng iyňn ay naparoňn sya sa hůkúman at ipinagsakdŕl nya si
Mariyáno úpang pagbayáran siyŕ nang gŕstos sa pagbebendisyňn sa patŕy.

Nang dumatěng ang paghuhůkúman si Maryáno y naparoňn at nang itinanňng
nang hukňm kung anň ang íbig nya ng sabíhin tungkňl sa sakdŕl na iyňn,
ay sinábi nya itň ng sumúsunňd:

"Ginoň ng Hwčs, ang namatŕy na iyňn ay walá na sa áki ng kapangyaríhan,
sapagkŕt hindí ku nŕ sya alíla nang sya y namatŕy. Noo ng syŕ
y máy sakit pa lámang ay ipinagamňt ko syŕ ng wala ng báyad, at
binigyŕn ko syŕ ng wala ng báyad nang gamňt. Nagawá ku nŕ ang áki ng
katungkúlan sa áki ng kápuwa táo at ang katungkúla ng iniyátas sa
ákin ni Bathála`. Isŕ sa manga katungkúlan nang manga párč` ay ang
magpabaňn nang manga patŕy. Ngayň ng ang táo ng iyňn ay patay nŕ,
bákit namŕn hindí magawá nang pári ng itň ang kanya ng katungkúlan
na walŕ ng úpa, yámang ito namŕn ay hindí mangyŕyári kung may káya
ang manga kamagának nang namatŕy?"

Pagkaraŕn nang manga ilan pŕ ng manga tanňng nang hukňm sa kúra at
kay Mariyáno ay tinápus nya ang paghuhůkúman, at ipinaháyag nya ng
si Mariyáno ay nása katwíran at ang kúra y dápat magpasyčnsya sa
pagkábendisyon nyŕ nang patŕy na wala ng úpa.

Nang makaraŕn itň y lálu ng lumakě ang gálit ni Patúpat kay Maryáno,
at pagkaraŕn nang ilŕ ng áraw ay ipinagsakdŕl niya ng mulí si
Mariyáno. Ngayňn ay iba namŕn ang kanya ng sakdŕl. Isinakdŕl niya sa
hůkúman na si Maryáno ay isŕ ng Masňn, sapagkŕt sya y hindí nagsísimbŕ
ně hindí nangúngumpisŕl ně hindí rin nagmŕmáno sa páre`. Ang manga
Masňn ay kaáway nang Romaněsmo at sa makatwěd ay kaáway děn nang
pŕmahalaŕn sa Filipínas nang manga panahň ng iyňn, at dáhil díto y
kanya ng ipináyo na si Maryáno y ipatápon sa ibŕ ng lupaěn.

Nang mŕbalitáan ni Maryáno ang sakdŕl na yitň ni Patúpat ay inakálŕ
nya ng walá na sya ng pagása kung hindí ang magtagň o umílag sa mangŕ
manghuhúli sa kanyŕ. Kanyŕ` ang ginawá nya ay lumwŕs sya sa Mayníla`
at doňn sya nagtagň`.

Dátapuwat doon mŕn ay nŕhúli rěn syŕ nang manga gwŕrdya-sivěl. Kasáma
nang pitň o walň ng taga iba t ibŕ ng báyan sya y inilúlan sa isŕ
ng bapňr at dinalŕ sila sa ibabá nang kapuluŕ-ng-Filipínas. At doňn
pagdatěng nilŕ ang ibŕ sa kanila ng magkakasáma ay pinagbábarěl nang
manga sundálo ng naghatěd sa kanilŕ, sapagkŕt iyňn ang útos nang
pinúno ng nagpatápon sa manga táo ng iyňn.

Dátapuwat si Maryáno y hindí naging isŕ sa manga nábaril na iyňn. Doňn
sya nátirŕ hanggŕng sa pananálo nang manga Amerikáno ay nagkaroňn sya
nang kalayáa ng makabábalik sa kanya ng famíliya. Nang itň y datnan
nyŕ ang isa nyŕ ng anŕk ay pitň na ng taňn ang gúlang at ang ikalawŕ
namŕn ay limŕ na ng taňn.





15. ANG INTSĚK NA MŔNGANGÁTAM.

Si Hwŕn ay isa ng alwáge na may kápit-báhay na Intsčk na aluwáge
rěn. Ang Intsčk na ytň ay isa ng magalěng na alwáge at ang kanya ng
kínis ay nŕpagkěkilála sa magalěng nya ng paggámit nang katŕm. Isa
ng áraw nakábili syŕ nang isa ng piráso-ng-káhoy na may ápat na
pu ng paŕ ang hába`. Itů y kanya ng nilínis. Sinubúkan nya kung
makakůkúha syŕ nang pinagkatamŕn na walŕ ng patěd sa boň ng hábŕ
nang káhoy. Dahilŕn sa húsay nang kanyŕ ng kasangkápan at sa kanyŕ
ng kabutíhan sa pagaalwáge, ang bágay na yňn ay nagěng pára ng walŕ
ng ano mŕn sa kaniyŕ. Twě ng isůsúlung niya ang katŕm ay nakakůkúha
nang pinagkatamŕn na walŕ ng patěd, ápat na pu ng paŕ ang hába`. Úpang
ipakilála nya sa kápit-báhay niya ng aluwági ng Tagálog ang kanyŕ ng
galěng, itň y kanyŕ ng pinadalhŕn nang isa ng pinagkatamŕn áraw-áraw.

Ang aluwági ng Tagálog na si Hwŕn ay nŕpagúlat sa galěng nang
Intsčk. Úpang gantihěn nya ang kanyŕ ng manga tinanggŕp na
pinagkatamŕn, sinubúkan děn nyŕ ng kumatŕm at ipadalŕ sa Intsčk ang
pinagkatamŕn. Dátapuwat ang pinakamahábŕ nya ng nŕkúha na pinagkatamŕn
ay may-roon lámang na labě ng limŕ ng paŕ. Itň y kahyá-hiyŕ ng ipadalŕ
sa Intsčk.

Si Hwŕn ay magalěng gumámit nang darŕs at siya y nakapagpŕpakínis
nang tablŕ sa pamamagítan lámang nang darŕs. Hindí na kayilánga ng
gamítan nang katŕm ang ano mŕ ng káhoy na kanya ng darasěn, dátapuwat
ang pinagdarasŕn ay manga tátal na maiiklí lámang, hindí súkat
pagkŕkilanlŕn nang kanyŕ ng galěng, at hindí nya mŕipadalŕ sa Intsčk.

Hábang si Hwŕn ay walŕ ng mŕláma ng gawěn, ang Intsěk namŕn ay hindí
naglúlubŕy nang pagpapadalŕ nang pinagkatamŕ ng mahahába`. Siniglŕn
si Hwŕn nang gálit. Sinunggabŕn nya ang kanya ng darŕs at pinarunŕn
nya ang Intsčk. Itň y nŕpagúlat at natákot nang mŕkíta si Hwŕn.

Sinábe nitň: "Anň ang gustu mu ng sabíhin sa manga ipinagpapadalŕ
mo ng pinagkatamŕn sa ákin? Akň y binuwísit mo at itň y iyo ng
pagbŕbayáran. Půputúlin ko ang buhuk mň sa pamamagítan nang darŕs
na itň."

Ang Intsčk ay natákot, sapagkŕt, pag ang úlo nya y tinamaŕn na nang
darŕs na iyňn, ay pího ng hindí sya mabůbúhay. Sya y nagkŕkawalŕ`,
dátapuwat sinunggabŕn sya ni Hwŕn, iginápus sya sa bangkň`, at
inumpisahŕn nya ng dinarŕs ang úlo nang Intsčk.

Ang darŕs ay isa ng kasangkápa ng malakě, gáya nang isŕ ng píko, at
mabigŕt, dátapuwat sa magalěng na kamŕy ni Hwŕn itň y naging pára ng
isa ng guntěng lámang. Ang lagpŕk nang darŕs sa úlo nang Intsěk ay
lubhŕ ng banáyad, at ang manga buhňk lámang ang pinůpútol nang patalěm.

Sa tákot nang Intsčk itň y nagsisigŕw na sinábe: "Wapélo! Daluhŕn
ninyň kň, masamŕ táo si Hwŕn, hindí Kilistyáno!"

Itň y nárinig nang manga kápit-báhay at ibŕ ng nagsěsipaglakŕd.

Kanyá pumások silŕ sa gŕwáan nang Intsčk at doňn ay sinábi sa kanilŕ
ni Hwŕn: "Hwag kayů ng makialŕm díto! Ang Intsěk na yitň y hindí ko
sinŕsaktŕn. Ákin lámang pinůputlŕn nang buhňk."

At patúluy děn ang kanyŕ ng pagdarŕs.

Nang mapútul na nya ng lahŕt ang buhňk nang Intsčk ay malakě ang
nagěng pagkámanghŕ nang nagsěsipanoňd, sapagkŕt ang buhňk nang Intsčk
ay pára ng ginupět nang guntěng nang isa ng bihasŕ ng barbéro. Ang
Intsěk namŕn, nang mŕkíta nya sa salaměn na wala ng súgat ang kanya
ng úlo, ay malaki rěn ang nagěng pagkámanghŕ`, at hindí mapatěd ang
pagpúri nya sa galěng ni Hwŕn sa paggámit nang darŕs.





16. ISA NG TÁO NG MAY BIRTŮD NANG USŔ.

Mínsan sa isa ng báyan sa kapuluŕ-ng-Filipínas ay náhayŕg ang pangálan
nang isa ng táo sa kanya ng manga kababáyan at manga kápit-báyan,
dahilŕn sa hindí karanyúwa ng lakŕs nya sa pagtakbň at pagluksň.

Sya y isa ng táo ng hindí mayábang, dátapuwat may kauntě ng talíno
sa paghahánap at gayon děn may kauntě ng tápang. Ang kanya ng hindí
karanyúwa ng kapaláran ay hindí nya ipinagmayabŕng ní hindí nya
ipinagkayilŕ` kung anň ang pinanggŕgalíngan nang kanyŕ ng dí karanyúwa
ng lakŕs. Sinábi nya sa mangŕ mapagusísa` na ang pinanggŕgalíngan
nang kanya ng lakŕs ay ang angkěn niya ng birtůd nang usŕ. Hindí nya
sinábe kung papáno ang pagkápasa kanyŕ nang birtůd na iyňn, dátapuwat
siya y hindí marámot sa pagbibigŕy-loňb úpang ikatúlung niya sa mangŕ
kakilála o hindě` ang kanya ng lakŕs.

Sya y may pagíbig na yumáman, gáya nang karamíhan nang táo, at díto
nya ginámit ang kanya ng lakŕs. Paráti sya ng nakěkipagtakbúhan, at
ang manga takbúha ng itň y lágě na ng pinagkatalunŕn nang marámi ng
salapč`. Sya ay lágě na ng may malakě ng pustŕ. Walá sya ng itinángě na
pinakěkipagtakbuhŕn. Kung měnsan nakěkipagtakbúhan sya sa kápwa táo,
kung mínsan ay sa kabáyo, sa áso, at sa iba pŕ ng háyop na matúli
ng tumakbň.

Pagkaraŕn nang ila ng áraw ay dumámi ang naípon nya ng salapě`
na pinanalúnan sa pustáhan. Gayon děn ang kanya ng manga kaybígan
na nagsipustŕ sa kanyŕ ay nagkaroňn nang marámi ng kwŕlta. Nang
mŕpagaláman nang manga táo na syŕ y may birtůd nang usŕ ay hindí
na sya íbig labánan sa takbúhan. Dáhil díto y úpang hwag máhinto`
ang kanya ng pananálo at pagkíta nang kwaltŕ, ay nagbíbigay syŕ
nang malalakě ng palúgit sa kanya ng kinŕkalában. Dáhil sa kalakhŕn
nang manga palúgit na ibinigay nyŕ ay marámi rě ng táo ng lumában
sa kanyŕ. Dátapuwat tuwí nŕ y sya ang nagěng mŕnanalň. Gayon děn sa
manga pakikipagluksúhan paráti nŕ ng syŕ ang nanŕnálo.

Dátapuwat, kung malaki mŕn ang kabutíha ng nŕkamtan nyŕ sa birtůd
na ytň, ay máy-ron dě ng ilŕ ng kahirápan na nŕkamtan nyŕ dahilan
díto. Dahilan děn sa kahirápa ng itň ay hindí nya natagalŕ ng angkiněn
hábang búhay nya ang birtůd na iyňn. Dahilŕn sa birtůd na iyňn sya
y nagěng lubhŕ ng magugulatěn. Ang manga kalabňg, íngay, at tahňl
nang áso kung gabě ay hindí nagpatúlug sa kanyŕ. Dahilŕn sa manga
íngay na yitň, kung natůtúlug sya ay palági ng nŕpŕpaluksň. Lálů na,
kung isa ng tahňl nang áso, halimbáwa`, ang makŕgísing sa kanyŕ,
sya y nŕpŕpaluksň nang lubhŕ ng mataŕs sa kanyŕ ng hihigŕn, at bágo
sya pagsa-ulŕn nang saríle, ay nagtŕtatakbň na syŕ. Sa pagluksu
nyŕ ng itň na hindí sinásadya` ay walá sya ng nagíging pagiíngat at
karanyúwa y umáabot syŕ sa ituktňk nang bubungŕn, at sa kababáan nitň
y lági ng nalálamog ang kanya ng katawŕn o kayŕ y nagkŕkabúkul syŕ sa
úlo, dahilŕn sa pagkáhampas nyŕ sa bubungŕn. Gayon děn sa kanya ng
hindí sinásadya ng pagtakbň pagkágising nyŕ dahilŕn sa pagkŕgúlat,
ay nagkŕkaumpňg-umpňg ang boň ng katawan nyŕ sa manga dinděng nang
kanya ng báhay.

Itň y isŕ ng mahírap na těísin, at inakálŕ nya ng hindí sya mabůbúhay
nŕ ng malwŕt dahilŕn sa hindí pagkŕkatúlog kung gabě. Kanyá inakálŕ nya
ng itápon ang birtůd na ytň pagkaraŕn nang ilŕ ng áraw. Nang sumápit
ang ikapitů ng áraw nang kanya ng pagaáre` sa birtůd ay sya y lubhŕ
ng hirap nŕ at inakálŕ nya ng sya y mamámatay nŕ sa hírap. Ang úlu
nya ay bukulŕn. Ang mukhá nya ay marámi ng pasŕ` at káhit na hindí
sya nabalían nang butň, ang manga lamŕn namŕn nya ay lubhŕ ng lamňg.

Dáhil díto y walŕ ng kibú sya ng naparoňn sa isa ng párang at itinápon
nya doňn ang birtůd na nŕpúlut nya, yámang marámi na rěn lámang siya
ng salapě ng pinanalúnan.





17. ANG ALÍLA NG UNGGŇ`.

Siy Andrčs ay máy-roo ng isa ng alíla ng unggň na kanyŕ ng lubhŕ ng
minámahŕl, sapagkŕt ang unggu ng itň y nagbíbigay sa kanyŕ nang malakě
ng serbísyo. Kung gabě ipinaglŕlátag sya nang baněg nang unggo ng itň;
kung umága ay iniháhandŕ` ang kanyŕ ng panghilámos, at ang ano mŕ ng
kanya ng iyútos ay sinúsunod nang unggň`.

Gabě-gabě ang unggu ng itň y natůtúlog sa ilálim nang kátri ng
tinůtulúgan nang kanya ng panginoňn. Itň y hindí gustň nang kanya
ng panginoňn, sapagkŕt, dahilŕn sa kanya ng malakě ng kabuluhŕn,
ay íbig ni Andrčs na syŕ y bigyŕn nang isa ng mabúte ng lugŕr na
tulugŕn. Dátapuwat, káhit na gánu ng pagpílit ang gawěn ni Andrčs,
ay hindí nya mapatúlog sa ibŕ ng lugŕr ang kanya ng alíla ng unggň`.

Siy Andrčs ay isa ng táwu ng may tákot at pagíbig sa Dyňs. Kanyá
gabi-gabě bágu sya matúlog ay nagkúkurus syŕ at tumŕtáwag sya sa
Dyňs. Sa óras nang kanya ng paghigŕ gabi-gabě ay dinŕratnan nŕ nyŕ
na nása ilálim nang kanya ng kátri ang unggň`. Mínsan mŕn ay hindí
sya náuna sa paghigŕ` sa unggu ng itň.

Isa ng áraw ang párě sa báyan ay dumálaw kay Andrčs sa kanya ng
báhay. Pagkaraŕn nang ilŕ ng sandalě ng pagsasŕlitáan ay ibinalítŕ niy
Andrčs sa páre` na sya y máy-roo ng isŕ ng alíla ng unggň na lubhŕ
ng malakě ang kabuluhŕn, sapagkŕt sya y pinagsěsilbihŕ ng mabúte,
at káhit na anň ang iyútos nya ay sinúsunod, at sinábi pa nyŕ ng
masípag pa káy sa manga iba nyŕ ng alíla` ang unggo ng iyňn.

Malakě ang nagěng pagtatakŕ nang páre`, at hiniling nyŕ ng ipakíta sa
kanyŕ ang unggň ng iyňn. Kanyá tináwag ny Andrčs ang unggň`. Hindí gáya
nang dáti, na sa isŕ ng táwag lámang niy Andrčs ay lumŕlápit agad-agŕd
ang unggň`, ngayňn makása-m-pu ng táwag nŕ ay walá pa syŕ. Siy Andrčs
ay nagálit, nagtinděg, at hinánap nya sa manga sulok-sulňk nang báhay
ang unggň`.

Ito y nŕkíta nya sa isa ng súlok at nakakápit na mabúte sa isa ng
halíge. Tináwag nya at kanya ng pinaáalis sa súlok, dátapuwat ang
unggň y áyaw umalěs doňn, káhit na anň ang gawěn sa kanyŕ. Dáhil díto
ay tináwag nya ang páre`, úpang itň y doňn tingnŕn sa súlok ang alílŕ
nya ng unggň`.

Pagkálapit nang páre` ang unggň y kuminěg sa tákot. Nagkaroňn nang
hinálŕ ang párč` na ang unggů ng iyňn ay isŕ ng dimónyo. Kanyŕ` ang
ginawá nya y nagkurůs sya at pagkabendisyňn nya nang kauntě ng túbig
ay niwisikŕn nya ang unggň`.

Pagdápo` sa katawŕn nitň nang túbig ay pumutňk na pára ng isa ng barěl,
at sa lugŕr nang unggň` ay walá silŕ ng nŕkíta kung hindí asu lámang
na agŕd nawalŕ`.

Pagkaraŕn nitň siniyásat nang páre si Andrčs tungkůl sa kanya ng
paniniwála sa Diyňs. Sinábi ny Andrčs na hindí nabŕbágo ang matíbay
nya ng paniniwála` at gabi-gabě nagdádasal syŕ bágo matúlog. Siniyásat
děn nang páre` kung saŕn tumůtúlog ang unggň`. Sinábe ni Andrčs na
itň y tumúlog gabi-gabě sa ilŕlim nang kanyŕ ng kátri ng tulugŕn.

Pagkaraŕn nitň y ipinakilála sa kanyŕ nang páre` na ang unggů ng
iyňn ay isŕ ng dimónyo na umáabŕng sa kanyŕ, at kung syŕ y sumála
nang pagtáwag sa Diyňs bágu matúlog, sa gabě di ng iyňn ay ihůhúlug
sya nang dimónyo sa infyčrno.





18. ANG MATANDÁ SA PUNSŇ SA LIWÁNAG NANG ÁRAW.

Si Pédro ay isŕ ng matápang na laláke. Paráti sya ng nakárinig nang
manga kwčnto tungkůl sa asuwŕng, duwčndi, mangkukúlam, at mangŕ matandá
sa punsň, dátapuwat ang ipinagtátakŕ ni Pédro ay kung bákit hindí sya
makátagpo ně káhit isŕ nang mangŕ bágay na itň. Íbig niya ng makŕkíta
nang isa man lámang sa kanilŕ, úpang mŕláman nya kung túnay ngŕ` na
silŕ y máy-roo ng manga kapangyaríha ng hindí karanyúwan sa karamíhan
nang táo.

Sya y naglálakŕd na isa ng gabě sa isŕ ng lugŕr na madilěm at
pinagkŕkatakutŕn, sapagkŕt díto y marámi ng nakŕkíta nang matandá
sa punsň.

Ang tabáko nang matanda ng itň y nakatŕtákot ang lakě, at kung itň
y hititin nyŕ ang liwánag na nangyŕyári ay pára ng liwánag nang isŕ
ng sigŕ`.

Sa gabi ng iyňn sa kanyŕ ng paglalakŕd maláyů pa syŕ y nakŕkíta na
syŕ nang isŕ ng liyŕb. Ang buhuk nyŕ y nagsitinděg at inakálŕ nya
ng bumalěk, dátapuwat nŕpigílan nya ang kanyŕ ng tákot at ipinatúloy
din nyŕ ang kanya ng paglákad.

Sya y sinalúbong nang nagtŕtabáko. Pagkálapit nya y inanínaw nya
ang katawŕn nang matandŕ ng iyňn, dátapuwat hindí rin nasyahŕn ang
kanya ng pagsisyásat, kanya iníbig nya ng mŕkíta sa síkat nang áraw
ang matandŕ ng iyňn. Úpang itů y mangyári dápat nya ng pigílin ang
matandŕ`, sapagkŕt ang manga ispíritu ng itň ay bumábalik sa kanilŕ
ng tŕhánan sa impyčrno o iba pa mŕ ng lugŕr sa paglápit nang umága.

Kanyŕ` ang ginawá nya y hinawákan nya agŕd ang matandŕ`. Ito y
nakipagbunň sa kanyŕ. Kung mínsan sya y nása ilálim, kung mínsan sya
y nása ibábaw, dátapwat hindí nya pinakawalŕn ang matandŕ`. Mahigpět
na mahigpět ang kanya ng kápit at tinalaga nyŕ ng sumáma káhit na
saŕn sya dalhěn nang matandŕ kung itň y malakŕs káy sa kanyŕ.

Silŕ y nagbunň hanggŕng alastrčs. Si Pédro sa óras na itň ay pagňd na
pagod nŕ at malakě ang panglalatŕ`, dátapuwat hindí rin nya binitáwan
ang kanyŕ ng kabunň`. Nang magŕalaskwŕtru nŕ ay naglubŕy nang pagkílos
ang kanya ng háwak. Nang makaraŕn ang kalaháti-ng-óras ang sínag nang
áraw ay nagumpisa nŕ nang pagtanglŕw sa kanilŕ, dátapuwat hindí pa
rěn lubhŕ ng maliwánag úpang mŕpagkilála ni Pédro kung anň ang kanyŕ
ng tángan. Nang dumatěng ang alasěngko ay malaki nyŕ ng pagkámangha`,
nang mŕkíta nya ng sya y nŕŕákap sa isŕ ng halígi ng hindí lubhŕ ng
mataŕs káy sa kanyŕ, dátapuwat nŕtůtúlus sa lúpŕ at sunňg na sunňg.





19. ANG TIYÁNAK NI HWŔN.

Isa ng gabč si Hwŕn ay tumawěd sa ílog sa kanya ng paglilibňt. Nang
sya y nása pasígan pa lámang, nakáramdam syŕ nang sábuy nang buhángin
sa kanya ng likňd, nang sya y mátuntung nŕ sa kabuhangínan.

Nang úna ng gabč itň y hindí nya ininň. Nang ikalawŕ ng gabč, nang
magdaŕn sya ng ulč sa pasíga ng itň, nakáramdam sya ng mulí nang sábuy
nang buhángin sa kanya ng likňd. Inakálŕ nya ng subúkan at hulíhin
ang nagsŕsábuy sa kanyŕ nang buhángin, kanyŕ` sa kanya ng paglákad
ay pamínsan-mínsan sya ng puměpíhit na pabiglŕ` sa kanya ng likurŕn,
dátapwat walá sya ng mŕkíta káhit na anň.

Dáhil díto y siniglŕn siya nang kaunti ng tákot at inakálŕ nya ng baká
kung anů ng matandá sa punsň o tiyának ang kanya ng nŕkŕkatúngo. Kanyá`
tinulínan nya ang pagtakbň, dátapuwat hábang nagtůtúlin sya ay lálu
namŕ ng dumádalas ang pagdápů nang buhángin sa kanya ng likňd. Lumakě
ang kanya ng tákot at dáhil díto y bumalik syŕ sa kanya ng báhay na
patakbň nang úbus-lakŕs.

Nang dumatěng sya doňn ay hinŕhábul nya ang kanya ng hiningŕ at hindí
sya makaúsap. Nang sya y makapaghinga nŕ nang kauntč` ay saká pa lámang
sya nakasagňt sa marámi ng manga tanňng nang kanya ng amŕ at iba pŕ
ng kasa-ng-bahŕy. Sinábi nya sa kanya ng amŕ na sya y sinůsundŕn nang
manga dwčnde sa kanya ng paglalakŕd at sinŕsabúyan sya nang buhángin.

Itinanňng nang kanya ng amŕ kung saŕn ang lugŕr na iyňn at sinábi nya
ng sa pasígan nang ílog. Ang kanya ng amŕ ay nápahalakhŕk nang táwa
at sinábi nya ng iyňn ay hindí dwčnde, dátapuwat ang kanyŕ lámang
paŕ ang nagtátangŕy nang buhángin sa kanya ng likňd sa báwat kanya
ng paghakbŕng.

Dátapuwat si Hwŕn ay áyaw maniwála` at máy ila ng áraw na hindí
sya nanáog nang báhay. Dáhil díto y iníbig nang kanya ng amŕ na
mŕipakilála sa kanyŕ ang katotohánan nang kanya ng sinábe, at isa ng
gabč ay sinábi nya kay Hwŕn na sya y magpasyŕl at magdaŕn sa lugŕr
di ng iyňn at sya y kanyŕ ng sŕsamáhan.

Pumáyag si Hwŕn at sila ng dalawŕ y naparoňn sa pasígan. Nang dumatěng
na sila doňn ay nagpahúle ang ama ni Hwŕn. Nang itu namŕn ay naglálakad
nŕ sa kabuhangínan at nang sya y nakáramdam nang sábuy nang buhángin
sa likňd, siniglŕn sya ng mulí nang tákot at isinigŕw nya sa kanya
ng amŕ na nagumpisa nŕ nang pagsábuy nang buhángin sa kanya ng likňd.

Pinabalěk nya si Hwŕn at kanya ng pinalákad na mulč`. Ngayňn ay
sinůsundan nyŕ sa likurŕn. Dáhil díto y nŕkíta nang ama ni Hwŕn na
twě ng sya y háhakbŕng ang sinélas na soňt nya ay nagtátangŕy nang
buhángin, at sa pagaalsŕ nitň nang paŕ ang buhángi ng tangŕy ay
napŕpasábuy sa likňd ni Hwŕn.

Ang ginawá nang kanya ng amŕ ay ipinaalěs ang soňt nya ng sinélas at
pinalákad sya ng mulě`. Ngayňn, káhit na gáno kaláyo` ang lakáran ni
Hwŕn ay walá na sya ng nŕrŕramdamŕ ng sábuy nang buhángin sa kanya
ng likňd.

Mulá noon ay nawalŕn sya nang tákot sa manga matandŕ`, duwčnde,
asuwŕng, at iba pŕ ng pinagkŕkatakutŕn.





20. SI HWŔ NG MANGLILÍGAW.

Ang dalága ng si Maryŕ ay balíta nang gandŕ sa kanya ng
báriyo. Dátapuwat walŕ ng manglilígaw sa kanyŕ, líban na lámang kay
Hwŕn. Ngúnit ang amŕ ni Maryŕ ay malakě ang pagkáayaw kay Hwŕn. Hindí
mŕkaúsap ni Hwŕn ang nilěligáwan kung hindí palihěm, sapagkŕt pag
nŕláman nang amŕ ni Maryŕ, itň y sinŕsaktan silŕ kápwa` sa pamamagítan
nang pamálň`. Kung měnsan at malakě ang gálit nang amŕ ay bambň ang
ginŕgámit nya kay Hwŕn, at sa ganitň y malápit sya ng mabalían nang
butň káylan man at sila y mŕhúli sa paguúsap.

Isa ng gabě ng madilěm ang amŕ ni Mariyŕ ay naglibňt. Nang itň y
mŕláman ni Hwŕn pinarunŕn nya si Mariyŕ úpang kausápin. Nalibŕng
sila sa paguúsap, kanyá sila y dinatnŕn nang amŕ ni Maryŕ sa kanya
ng pagwč`.

Siniglŕn sya agŕd nang gálit at pasigŕw nya ng kinaúsap si Hwŕn:
"Anu kŕ, salbáhe? Sinábi ku nŕ sa iyň ng hwag kŕ ng tútuntong díto
sa áki ng pamamáhay. Ano ang íbig mo t nŕrěrito kŕ?"

At pagkasábe nitň y sinunggabŕn nya ang isa ng bisěg nang kawáyan at
inakmaŕn nya ng bambuhěn si Hwŕn. Sa malaki ng tákot nitň ay nagtalňn
sya sa bintánŕ`, dátapuwat sinundŕn din syŕ nang amŕ. Kanyá ang ginawá
nya y tumakbň sya nang úbus-lakŕs.

Ang gabě ay madilěm na pára ng úling, at hindí nya mŕtumpakŕn kung saŕn
ang parunŕn, dátapuwat patúloy rin sya nang pagtakbň. Nagkangdadápŕ
sya sa pagtakbň, dátapwat maligsi syŕ ng nagbŕbángon at patúluy din
sa pagtakbň.

Hindí naláon at nakádaan sya nang isŕ ng malakě at maitěm na
bágay. Nŕkilála nya ng iyňn ay isa ng kalabŕw, kanyá sya y lumundŕg
agŕd sa likňd nitň, at kanya ng pinatakbň.

Ang pagsakŕy sa kalabŕw ay hindí lubhŕ ng mahírap sa kalapáran nang
likňd nitň at sa kahináan nang takbň. Kanyŕ`, káhit na walŕ ng pamitěk
si Hwŕn ay dí natákot na sumakŕy. Sa kadilimŕn nang gabě sa kanya
ng pagsakŕy ay nangyári ng náharap sya sa buntútan nang kalabŕw at
hindí sa uluhŕn.

Pinatúlin nya ang kalabŕw. Nangyári namŕ ng ang kalabŕw na itň ay
árě nang amŕ ni Maryŕ. Hindí nalaúnan at nakátanaw sya nang báhay na
maílaw sa pinatůtungúhan nang kalabŕw. Ang boň ng ása nyŕ ang báhay
na iyňn ay sa kanya ng kápit-báhay. Kanyá bumabá sya sa kalabŕw at
patakbo syŕ ng pumanhěk sa báhay.

Malakě ang nagěng pagkalitň nya at pagkatákot nang pagkápanhik nya y
sinalúbong sya nang amŕ ni Maryŕ, at binambň sya sa katawŕn at sinábi:
"Anň t nagbalěk ka pŕ? Hindí ba pinaláyas na kitŕ, wala ng hyŕ`?"

Nang pagsa-ulŕn si Hwŕn nang kanya ng saríli ay nagtalňn sya sa
batalŕn at tumakbň sya ng mulí patúngo sa kanya ng báhay, dátapuwat
ngayň y hindí na sya sumakŕy sa káhit anň pa mŕn.





21. SI MARIYŔ NG MARÁMOT.

Nang nabůbúhay pa si Mariyŕ ay nátira syŕ sa kanya ng maínam na báhay
sa gitná nang isa ng maláwak na bakúran na may magagandŕ ng harděn
at manga púnu-ng-káhoy. Sya y lubhŕ ng mayáman, kanyŕ` ang búhay nya
y isa ng panŕy na kaginhawáhan.

Hindí sya nakaratěng nang ápat na pu ng taňn sa gúlang at sya y
namatŕy. Ang lahŕt nang kanya ng yáman ay hinátě nya sa kanya ng
kapatěd at sa simbáhan. Hindí nya nŕalaála ang mahihírap nya ng
kakilála at ilŕ ng kápit-báhay.

Ang kapatěd na naíwan ay nagpamísa nang sunňd-sunňd sa loňb nang pito
ng áraw, úpang ang káluluwa ni Mariyŕ ay papasúkin ni Sam-Pédro sa
pintúan nang lángit.

Nang ang kanya ng kapatěd ay nabůbúhay pa itň y balíta ng balítŕ
sa karamútan. Siya měsmo ay bihíra ng magpamísa o magpatúlos nang
kandíla`. Ang manga pulúbi ng nagpŕpalimňs, kung tumáwag sa kanyŕ,
ay pinalŕláyas nya at hindí nilělimusŕn. Kadalasŕn ay ipinahŕhábul
pa nyŕ sa áso. Ang kanya ng manga kasamŕ ay pinapagtŕtrabáho nya
nang walŕ ng úpa, at kung kanya ng pakánin, ay wala ng úlam,--asěn
at kánin lámang. Sa panunúyo sa kanyŕ nang kanya ng manga kasamŕ,
twi ng silŕ y nagsěsiuwč` ay nagdádala sila nang manga manňk, itlňg,
biěk, at manga búnga nang gúlay o haláman, úpang ibigŕy kay Maryŕ. Ang
manga alaála ng itň ay hindí nila ibiníbigay dahilŕn sa kanilŕ ng
pagmamahŕl kay Maryŕ, dátapwat pára ng isa ng súhol, úpang sila y hwag
masiyádu ng alipustaěn sa kanilŕ ng pagparoňn sa kanya ng báhay. Kung
si Maryŕ namŕn ay lumálabas sa búkid sa kanya ng manga kasamŕ, ang
báwat mŕkíta nya sa pamamáhay nila na kanya ng mŕgustuhŕn ay kinůkúha
nya nang wala ng kibň` at hindí nya binŕbayáran. Kung halimbáwa y
makŕkíta sya sa kanya ng manga kasamŕ nang isŕ ng bágu ng yári ng
bákol, biláo, bistŕy, bayňng, baněg, palayňk, lumbň, sandňk, kalŕn,
o iba pŕ ng kasangkápan sa báhay, ay kinůkúha nyŕ at ipinadádala nyŕ
sa kanya ng báhay. Kung hindí nya magámit ang manga pinagkúkuha nyŕ
ay ipinagbíbili nyŕ. Gayon děn ang gawá nya sa manga háyop nang kanya
ng manga kasamŕ. Dáhil díto y yumáman sya ng agŕd.

Nang sya y máy-roon nŕ ng tatlu ng áraw na namámatŕy, ang kanyŕ
ng kapatěd ay nŕrňroňn sa kanyŕ ng báhay at doňn nagpŕpalípas nang
pagdadalamháte`. Isa ng hápun nang sya y naglálakad sa hŕlamanŕn,
nátabi syŕ sa balňn na nása bakúran. Nŕpagúlat sya, sapagkŕt
sa ilálim nang balňn ay may nárinig syŕ ng tumŕtáwag sa kanya ng
pangálan. Itinungu nyŕ ang kanya ng úlo sa balňn at doňn ay lálu ng
nárinig nyŕ ng mabúte ang pagtáwag, dátapuwat walá sya ng mŕkíta ng
táo na káhit anň.

Sinábi nang bóses: "Áki ng kapatěd, akň ay si Mariyŕ. Ang ginawá
ku ng pamumúhay na karamútan, kasakimŕn, at kalupitŕn ay áki ng
pinagbŕbayáran ngayňn. Akň ay nŕrěrinč sa pŕrusahŕn ni Bathálŕ sa lahŕt
nang makasalánan. Kung maŕárě ay hwŕg mu akň ng tuláran, at ikaw sána
y humánap nang paraŕn úpang mahángo mo akň díto sa kumúkulu ng langěs
na áki ng těráhan ngayňn."

Ang kanya ng kapatěd ay lubhŕ ng malakě ang nagěng pagkahápis,
at sya y naparoňn agŕd sa páre`, úpang ipagtanňng kung papáno ang
paraŕ ng magágawŕ nyŕ úpang mahángo nya sa infyčrno ang kanyŕ ng
kapatěd. Ipináyo nang pári` na sya y magsadyá sa isa ng báyan na
máy-roo ng laráwan ni Sam-Pédro na milagróso. Ang laráwa ng itň ni
Sam-Pédro ay nakěkipagúsap sa manga táo at naghŕhátol nang sarě-sári
ng paraŕn úpang makapások sa lángit. Iyůn ang kanya ng milágro.

Ang kapatěd ni Maryŕ ay nagsadyá agad-agŕd sa báya ng kinŕdňroonŕn
nang Sam-Pédro ng milagróso. Nang dumatěng sya roňn at nakěkipagúsap na
syŕ kay Sam-Pédro, sinábi nya ang lahŕt-lahŕt. Sinábi nya ng ang sábi
sa kanyŕ nang kanyŕ ng kapatěd ay ang kanya ng ginawŕ ng karamútan,
kasakimŕn, at kalupitŕn ay sya nyŕ ng ikinahúlog sa infyčrno.

"Kung gayňn," ang wíkŕ ni Sam-Pédro, "humánap ka nang káhit íisa ng
táo, háyop, o haláman na ginawaŕn nang iyo ng kapatěd nang isŕ ng
kabŕítan. Kung ikŕw ay makŕkíta nŕ, bumalik kŕ ng mulí sa ákin, at
běbigyŕn kitŕ nang paraŕ ng ikahŕhángo mo sa hírap sa iyo ng kapatěd."

Ang kapatěd ni Maryŕ ay umuwí agŕd sa kanila ng báyan, at díto y
nagusísŕ sya sa lahŕt nang namŕmáyan kung síno ang may útang na loňb sa
kanya ng kapatěd o kayá kung síno ang kanya ng ginawŕn o pinagsalitaŕn
nang mabúti. Dátapuwat káhit isŕ ay walŕ ng makasagňt. Ang manga
háyop namŕn sa manga kápit-báhay at sa bakúran ni Maryŕ ang kanya ng
pinagusisŕ`, dátapuwat walá rin syŕ ng nŕkíta na ginawaŕn nang mabúti
nang kanyŕ ng kapatěd.

Ang isa ng áso ng buto t balŕt ay nagsábi sa kanyŕ: "Isa ng hápon akň y
gutňm na gutňm. Nakádaan akň sa kanyŕ ng bakúran nang isa ng butň. Itň
y kinagat kň at áki ng dinádala, nang mŕkíta nya akň. Ipinahábol
nya akň ng agŕd, at nang bitíwan ko ang butň itň y ipinabaon nyŕ sa
lúpa`. Iyan bŕ y isa ng kabŕítan?"

Lálu ng lumakě ang hápis nang kapatěd ni Mariyŕ at untě-untě
ng nawáwalŕ ang kanya ng pagása na mahángo sa hírap ang kanya ng
kapatěd. Inumpisahan nyŕ ng usisáin ang manga haláman sa bakúran nang
kanya ng kapatěd. Inisa-isŕ nya ng lahŕt ang manga kalabása, úpo,
pipíno, síle, milňn, singkamŕs, manč`, talňng, sítaw, at sibúyas,
báwang, at iba pŕ ng gúlay. Sa kanilŕ y walá sya ng nŕkíta nang kanya
ng hinŕhánap. Isinunňd namŕn nyŕ ang manga púno-ng-káhoy. Siniyásat
nya isŕ-isŕ ang manga púnň nang síko, anúnas, átis, mabúlo, súhŕ`,
dalandŕn, dáyap, at balúbad. Ngúnit walá ri ng nagěng katuturŕn ang
kanya ng págod; íisa na lámang pangkŕt nang manga haláman ang hindí pa
nya naůusísa`, at kung díto y hindí sya makŕkíta nang kanya ng hánap,
ay walá sya ng magágawŕ sa pagdudúsa nang kanya ng kapatěd. Nalíbot
nya sila ng lahŕt, dátapuwat walŕ ng nakapagsábi na tumanggŕp sila
nang isŕ ng gawŕ ng kabŕítan sa kay Maryŕ.

Sa kŕhuli-hulíhan pumaroňn ang kapatěd sa tabě nang balňn, at doňn
inusísŕ nya ng lahŕt ang manga damň. Nang dumatěng ang gabě ay íisa
na lámang na púnu-ng-damň ang hindí nya naůusísa`. Itň y nilapítan
nya na punň ng punú nang tákot at pagása.

Itinanůng nya sa púno nang damň na nŕtŕtaněm sa tabě nang balňn:
"Nang nabůbúhay ba ang áki ng kapatěd, ay ginawŕn ka nyŕ nang isŕ
ng kabŕítan?"

Isinagňt nang damň: "Ó! Ang iyo bŕ ng kapatěd? Siyŕ ngŕ`, siyŕ ang
nagbigŕy sa ákin nang bágo ng búhay. Noň ng tagáraw na nagdaŕn, lantŕ
ng lanta nŕ ang áki ng manga dáhon at akň y malápit na ng mamatŕy,
dátapuwat ang iyň ng kapatěd ay nalígo` isa ng hápon sa tabě nang
balo ng itň. Sa kanya ng pagpalígo` ay nŕwisikan akň nang túbig at
dáhil díto y lumakŕs ako ng mulě`, at ang manga lantŕ ku ng dáhon ay
nanaríwa ng muli`."

Wala ng pagkŕsyahŕn ang naging tuwá nang kapatěd ni Maryŕ, at sa gabě
ri ng iyňn ay nagbalěk sya kay Sam-Pédro. Binigyan syŕ ni Sam-Pédro
nang isa ng dŕsálan, at sinábi sa kanyŕ na umuwé sya at iláwit nya
sa balňn ang dŕsála ng iyňn. Tawágin nya si Maryŕ at pakapítin nya sa
dŕsálan, at dáhil díto y mahŕhángů nya sa hírap ang kanya ng kapatěd.

Nagbalěk sya ng agŕd at suměsíkat pa lámang ang áraw nang sya
y dumatěng sa bakúran ni nasíra ng Maryŕ. Lumápit sya sa balňn,
inilawit nyŕ ang dŕsálan, at tináwag nya ang kanya ng kapatěd. Itň y
lumitŕw sa ibábaw nang túbig at humáwak sa dŕsálan. Inumpisahŕn nang
kanyŕ ng kapatěd ang paghátak sa dŕsálan at sya y nátaas nŕ untě-untč`.

Sa paghángo ng itň sa kanyŕ ay máy-roo ng ibŕ ng káluluwa na íbig
di ng makaalěs sa infyčrno. Kanyá silŕ y nagsikápit sa paŕ ni Maryŕ,
nang mŕkíta nilŕ na itň y nahŕhángů sa hírap. Dátapuwat nang ang paŕ
ni Maryŕ ay sya na lámang nŕlůlubňg sa túbig ang ginawá nya y ikinawŕg
nya ang dalawa ng paŕ, úpang ang manga káluluwa ng nŕkŕkápit sa kanyŕ
ay mangŕkabitŕw.

Nang itů y gawin nyŕ ay napatěd ang dŕsálan at agad-agŕd sya ng lumubůg
sa balňn, at mulá noon ay hindí nŕ sya nŕkaúsap nang kanya ng kapatěd.

Bumalěk itň kay Sam-Pédro at ibinalíta` ang nangyáre, dátapuwat sinábe
ni Sam-Pédro na walá na sila ng magágawa úpang mahángo sa infyčrno
ang kanyŕ ng kapatěd.





22. TATLŇ NG KÁLULUWA NG TUMÁWAG KAY SAM-PÉDRO.

Si Hwŕn ay isa ng bágu ng táwu ng makísig. Dátapuwat nang dumatěng
sya sa gúlang na dalawa ng pů t dalawŕ, sya y nagkasakět nang malubhŕ`
at dí nalaúnan at namatŕy siyŕ. Ang kanya ng káluluwa ay naparoňn sa
lángit at tumuktňk sa pintúan nitň.

Si Sam-Pédro ay sumagňt sa kanya ng pagtuktňk at itinanňng nitň:
"Sínu ka? Anň ang sadyá mo ríto?"

Isinagňt nang káluluwa ni Hwŕn: "Akň ang káluluwa ni Hwŕn. Buksan mň
ang pintň`, at íbig ko ng pumások."

Binuksŕn nang bantay-pintň` ang pintúan, at bágu nya binayáa ng
makapások ang káluluwa ni Hwŕn ay sinyásat múna nya nang ganitň:
"Ano ang dáhil at naparíto ka? Ano ang kabŕnála ng ginawá mo sa lúpa`
at nagakálŕ ka ng nŕbŕbágay sa yň ang kaginhawáhan sa lángit? Ikŕw
bagŕ y may iníwa ng asáwa?"

Ang káluluwa ni Hwŕn ay nagsábi: "Nang akň y nása lúpŕ pa, madalŕs
aku ng magsimbŕ, magdasŕl, at maglimňs, dátapuwat hindí ako nagkapálad
na magasáwa."

Isinagňt nang bantay-pintň`: "Hindí ka dápat magtamň nang kaginhawáhan
sa lángit."

At pagkŕsábi nya nitň ay isinara nyŕ ang pintň`. Ang káluluwa ni Hwŕn
ay hindí nakapások sa lángit.

Pagkaalěs ni Hwŕn ay dumatěng namŕn ang isa pa rě ng káluluwa.

"Sínu ka? At bákit mo gustň ng pumások sa lángit? Ikaw bŕ y nagasáwa
nang násŕsa lúpŕ pŕ?" ang manga tanůng nang bantay-pintň`.

Isinagňt nang káluluwa: "Aků y ang káluluwa niy Andrčs. Nagasáwa akň
nang akň y násŕsa lúpŕ pa. Buksan mň ang pintň` at íbig ko ng pumások."

Agad-agŕd na binuksŕn ni Sam-Pédro ang pintú nang lángit at pagkŕkíta
nya sa káluluwa niy Andrčs ay sinábi nya: "Ó! Kŕwáwa ng káluluwa! Sa
mangŕ gáya mo nŕtŕtaŕn at nŕrŕrápat ang manga kaginhawáhan sa
lángit. Pumásuk ka!"

Ang káluluwa ni Andrčs ay tuwa ng twá at pumások sa masayŕ ng tŕhánan.

Pagkásara nang pintň ay máy-roon na namŕ ng tumuktňk.

"Sínu ka?" ang tanong ulí nang bantŕy.

"Akň y ang káluluwa ni Mariyáno," ang sagňt nang tumuktňk.

"Bákit ka naparíto? Bákit ka nagakála ng marápat ka ng magtamň nang
lángit? Ikŕw bagŕ y nagasáwa nang násŕsa lúpa ka pŕ?"

Sa manga tanůng na itň y isinagňt nang káluluwa ni Mariyáno: "Nang akň
y násŕsa lúpŕ pa madalŕs aků ng magpamísa. Ang kalahátě nang yáman
ko ay ibinigay kň sa simbáhan sa pagpapamísa at manga pagpapatugtňg
nang kampána`. Ang nŕipatúlus kň ng kandílŕ ay hindí mahěhíla nang
tatlň ng kalabŕw, at kung sa pagaasáwa namŕn," idinugtung nyŕ,
"akň y nagkaroňn nang dalawŕ. Nabáo aků at nagasáwa ng mulě`."

"Áki ng ikinalúlungkot ang hindí ko pagkaári ng papasúkin kitŕ. Ang
manga lóku ng gáya mo ay wala ng lugŕr díto sa kahariyŕn nang lángit."

At isinara nyŕ ang pintň`.





23. SI HWŔ NG BANGKÉRO.

Isa ng áraw isa ng Kastíla` ay napatátawěd kay Hwŕn sa kanya ng
bangkŕ` sa ibáyo nang ílog. Ang Kastíla ng sakay nyŕ ay marúnung
magsalitá nang Tagálog. Kanyŕ`, nang silŕ y nŕlŕlayú na sa pasígan,
ay nagumpisa syŕ nang pakikipagúsap kay Hwŕn.

Ang Kastíla ng itň ay isa ng marúnong na táo, sigúro ng isa ng gurů ng
balítŕ sa Espánya, at itň y nŕpagkěkilála sa pagsasalitá nya kay Hwŕn
tungkůl sa heyugrafíya, aritmétika, at iba t ibŕ ng wíkŕ sa Ewrúpa.

Nang matápus ang kanya ng pagsasalitŕ`, ay nagtanůng syŕ kay Hwŕn
nang ganitň: "Ikŕw ba y nagáral nang hewgrafíya?"

"Hindí pň`," ang sagňt ni Hwŕn,--at katunáya y uwalŕ ng mwŕng si Hwŕn,
sapagkŕt sya y lumakě sa hírap at sa gayň y panŕy na pagtatrabáho
lámang ang pinagdŕdaanan nyŕ ng búhay.

Ang Kastílŕ ay nŕpagúlat sa sagňt ni Hwŕn at sinábe niya ng agŕd:
"Dináramdam ko, kaybígan, ang hindí mu pagkáalam nang hewgrafíya,
sapagkŕt dáhil díto y pára ng nawalŕ` ang kalahátě nang iyo ng búhay."

Si Hwŕn ay hindí kumibň` at patúluy děn ang pagsagwŕn.

Hindí nalaúnan at tumanůng namŕn ang Kastíla`: "Nagáral ka bŕ nang
aritmétika?"

"Hindí pň`," ang sagňt ni Hwŕn.

"Kung gayňn, kaybígan, ay pára ng nawalá sa iyň ang ikápat na baháge
nang iyo ng búhay."

Si Hwŕn ay natákot nang kauntě`, sapagkŕt hindí nya mŕpagkúro ang
íbig sabíhin nang Kastíla`.

Sinábi nya sa kanya ng saríli: "Kŕwáwŕ ka, Hwŕn, walá nŕ ng nŕtětirŕ
nang iyu ng búhay, kung hindí isa ng ikápat na partč lámang."

Nang ang bangká nila ay násŕsa malálim na lugŕr na nang ílog, at
hábang ang Kastílŕ namŕn ay pinagkůkúro ang malakě ng kamangmangŕn
nang manga táo ng trabahadůr sa Filipínas, si Hwŕn ay tumanůng nang
ganitň sa kanya ng sakŕy: "Marúnong pú ba kayo ng lumangňy?"

"Hindě`!" ang sagut agŕd nang Kastíla`.

"Kung gayňn," ang sagot ni Hwŕn, "ay hindí lámang pára kayů ng nawalŕn
nang boň ng inyo ng búhay, dátapwat nawalá na ngŕ ng túnay."

At sinabayŕn nya itů nang pagtataňb nang bangkŕ ng sinŕsakyan nilŕ. Si
Hwŕn ay lumangůy sa pasígan at ang Kastílŕ namŕn ay tinangŕy nang ágos.





24. ANG KABŔÍTAN SA MANGA HÁYOP.

Isŕ ng gabě ng madilěm ay naglálakad si Hwŕn sa manga kaparánga
ng malaláyo` sa manga báyan. Sya y patúngo sa kanya ng báyan. Bágu
sya makaratěng díto ay kinŕkayilánga ng magdaŕn sya sa manga ilŕng
na lugŕr.

Isa ng gabě na sya y naglálakad sa ganitň ng lugŕr biglá sya
ng nŕpagúlat sa pagdatěng nang isa ng púsa ng itěm na humúni
at kinámot ang kanya ng paŕ. Ang ginawá nya y úbus-lakŕs nya ng
sinípa ang púsa`, at itň y nŕpahitsŕ nang maláyo`. Ipinatúluy nya ang
paglalakŕd, dátapuwat hindí nalaúnan at nagbalěk na namŕn sa kanyŕ ang
púsa`. Lálu ng lumakě ang kanya ng gálit at sinípŕ nya ng mulě` ang
púsa`. Inakálŕ nya ng ang púsa ng iyňn ay isŕ ng laruwŕn nang tyának
o asuwŕng. Ipinatúluy nya ang paglákad. Hindí naluwatŕn at ang púsa
ng itčm ay nagbalěk na mulí sa kanyŕ. Ngayňn, sa lugŕr nang sipáin
nya ang púsa`, itň y hinawákan nyŕ at dinala nyŕ sa kanya ng bisěg,
kanya ng hinagňd, at pinagtátapěk, at sinábi nya sa púsa`: "Mabaět
na púsŕ`, anň ang gusto mň? Sŕsáma ka ba sa áki ng paglalakŕd?" at
ipinatúluy nyŕ ang kanyŕ ng paglákad.

Hindí nalaúnan at sya y sinumpňng nang antňk. Sa daŕn ay máy nŕkíta
sya ng isa ng báhay, dátapuwat ang manga táo sa báyan ay may paniwála
ng ingkantádo ang báhay na iyňn. Dátapuwat walŕ ng iba ng mŕtulúgan
si Hwŕn, kaniyŕ` ang ginawá nya y pumanhik syŕ sa báhay úpang doňn
matúlog.

Sya y náhimběng, dátapuwat nang naghŕháti-ng-gabi nŕ ay nágising sya
sa kŕluskúsan nang manga dagŕ`. Ang ginawá nya y pinagsisipá nya
at pinagdadagukŕn ang manga dagŕ` úpang kanya ng patayěn o kayŕ y
palayásin. Dátapuwat ang manga dagŕ` ay dumámi nang dumámi hanggŕng
sa napunň` ang kuwŕrto at sya y kanilŕ ng pinagkakagŕt.

Ang ginawá ni Hwŕn ay kinúha nya ang kanya ng púsa ng itěm at sinábi
nya ríto ng patain nyŕ ang manga dagŕ`. Ang púsŕ` ay ngumiyŕw at
inumpisahŕn ang paghábol sa manga dagŕ`. Malakě ang nagěng tákot nang
manga dagŕ`, at ang manga hindí nápatay nang púsa ay nagsipagtakbň sa
kaní-kanilŕ ng lunggŕ`. Nang mŕkíta ni Hwŕn na walá na ng nŕtětirŕ
sa manga dagŕ kung hindí dádalawa lámang, ay pinapaghintú nya ang
púsa`. Kanya ng hinúli ang dalawa ng dagŕ` at kanya ng inámo` at
inakálŕ nya ng isáma rěn silŕ na gáya nang púsŕ sa kanya ng paglalakŕd.

Kinŕbukásan ay ipinatúluy nya ang kanya ng paglalakŕd. Inabútan
sya nang gabč sa isa ng lugŕr na wala ng báhay, kanyá ang ginawá
nya y ipinatúluy nya ang paglalakŕd papuntŕ sa isa ng báhay na árě
nang isa ng matandŕ`. Nagkátaon namŕn na ang matanda ng itň y isŕ
ng engkantadňr. Pinatúluy nya si Hwŕn at pinatúlog nya sa isa ng
silěd. Si Hwŕn ay natúlog nang walŕ ng paghihinálŕ nang anu mŕn.

Dátapuwat, nang mágising syŕ kinŕbukásan, ay nŕpagúlat sya at
natákot nang mŕkíta nya ng sya y nŕkůkulňng sa isa ng kahňn na walŕ
ng bůkásan. Pinagsipá nya ang manga dingděng nang kahňn, dátapuwat
walá sya ng magawŕ`, itň y hindí nya mabuksŕn. Malakě ang kanya ng
pagdadalamháte` at walá sya ng mŕláma ng gawěn, nang mŕalaála nya
ng sya y may kasáma ng isŕ ng púsa at dalawŕ ng dagá sa kanya ng
kůlúngan. Kinúha nya ang dalawa ng dagŕ`, inamů-amú nya, at sinábi nya
ng bumútas silŕ sa kahň ng kanila ng kinŕkůkulungŕn. Ang manga dagŕ ay
nagumpisŕ nang pagkagŕt sa tablŕ at untě-untí sila ng nakagawá nang
húkay sa makapŕl na tablŕ, hanggŕng sa itň y nabútas. Nang makabútas
na silŕ ay bumalěk silŕ ng mulí kay Hwŕn at si Hwŕn namŕn ay pinabútas
silŕ ng mulě` sa dinděng nang kůlúngan. Sa paguúlit-úlit nang kanila
ng paggawá nang manga bútas, sa kalaúnan ay nakagawá silŕ nang isŕ
ng malaki ng bútas, at si Hwŕn ay nakawalŕ`.

Ang matandŕ ay hinánap ni Hwŕn, dátapuwat itň y hindí nya mŕkíta káhit
saŕn. Kanyŕ ipinatúluy nyŕ ang pagwč`, at doňn nang dumatěng sya ay
ipinamalítŕ nya ang malakě ng serbísyo na ginawá sa kanyŕ nang kanya
ng tatlň ng kaybíga ng isŕ ng púsa` at dalawa ng dagŕ`.





25. SI HWŔ NG MANGDUDÚKIT.

Nŕbása ku sa isa ng nobéla ng Kastíla` na ang pamagŕt ay "La tůmba
de yčrro" ang sumúsunňd.

Si Hwŕn ay isa ng báta ng lilimáhi ng taňn, anŕk nang isŕ ng kasamŕ
nang mayáma ng si Andrčs. Si Hwŕn mulá pa sa pagkabátŕ` ay pípe,
dátapuwat hindě` bingč. Gayon děn ang pagkapípe nya ay hindí malubhŕ`,
sapagkŕt kadalasŕn sya y nakasísigŕw, dátapuwat hindí ngŕ` lámang
gáya nang tiněg nang karanyúwa ng báta` ang sa kanyŕ.

Isa ng gabě si Andrčs ay dumálaw sa báhay nang kanyŕ ng kasamŕ na
ama ni Hwŕn, at sa kanya ng pagdálaw na ytň y isináma nya ang kanya
ng anŕk na babáye, lilimáhin dě ng taňn ang gúlang. Káhit na pípe
si Hwŕn ay nakipagkayibígan sya sa anŕk nang kanya ng panginoňn,
at silŕ ng dalawŕ y nagsipaglarň` hábang ang kanilŕ ng manga amŕ
ay nagsŕsŕlitáan nang tungkňl sa pananěm. Ipinakíta nya kay Maryŕ
(na sya ng pangálan nang kanya ng kalarň`) ang manga larwan nyŕ na
gawá nang kanya ng saríli ng kamŕy at talíno.

Ang kanya ng manga laruwŕn ay sarě-sári ng mukhá nang táo na ginawá
nya at nayŕyárě nang pútik. Marámi rin díto ang manga buň ng táo na
may sarě-sári ng anyň`. Ang ibŕ y nagtátaněm, ang ibŕ y nagsásayŕw,
ang ibŕ y nakahigŕ`, at gayon děn may manga nagbúbunň`, nagtŕtakbúhan,
at iba t iba pŕ ng anyň`. Gayon děn máy manga háyop syŕ; ang ibŕ y
nayŕyárě nang pútek at ang ibŕ y nayŕyári nang káhoy.

Tumálik ang pagkakaybígan nang dalawa ng báta` at nŕwíli sila sa
paglalarň`. Nang makatápus nŕ ang kanila ng amŕ sa pagsasŕlitáan ay
tináwag ni Andrčs si Maryŕ úpang umwí na silŕ, dátapuwat niyáyŕ múna
ni Maryŕ ang kanya ng amŕ sa lugŕr na kinŕlŕlagyŕn nang manga larwŕn
ni Hwŕn, at úpang itň y mŕkíta nyŕ. Nang mŕmasdan ny Andrčs ang manga
larwa ng yňn ay nŕpagúlat sya sa lakě nang talíno na ipinakěkilála
nang dumúkit sa manga tao-taóha ng iyňn. Sinábi ny Andrčs sa ama ni
Hwŕn na itň y matalíno at dápat ipadalŕ sa pŕaralŕn. Dátapwat isinagňt
nang ama ni Hwŕn na syŕ y wala ng kwŕrta úpang ipapagáral kay Hwŕn.

"Kung gayňn," sinábi ni Andrčs, "ay akň ang ůúpa sa mayčstro. Búkas
ay páparoon sa ámi ng báhay ang gurň ni Maryŕ. Sya y papagtůtuluyěn
ku díto sa iyň, úpang umpisahŕn nya ang pagtutúro` at pagbubukŕs nang
ísip ni Hwŕn."

Napasalámat nang marámi ng marámi ang ama ni Hwŕn at silŕ y
naghiwalŕy. Malakě ang ikinalungkňt ni Hwŕn nang umalis nŕ ang kanyŕ
ng kalarň`.

Mulá sa áraw na itň kadalasŕn si Hwŕn ay ipinasúsundň nang ama ni
Maryŕ úpang doňn siyŕ sa kanya ng báhay makipaglarň` kay Maryŕ.

Isa ng hápon na silŕ ng dalawŕ y naglálaro sa hŕlamanan nang maláwak
na bakúran ni Andrčs ay nagdaŕ ng lumílipŕd sa tabě nang dalawa ng
báta` ang isa ng paruparň. Itň y kanila ng hinábol. Nŕůunŕ si Maryŕ
at sumúsunňd si Hwŕn. Sa pagtatakbň nilŕ ay nahúlog si Maryŕ sa isa
ng sápa ng mabábaw na pŕbyáyan nang manga isdŕ` niy Andrčs. Si Hwŕn
ay nŕpasigŕw nang malakŕs at pagsigŕw nya ng itň y napatirŕn sya
nang lamŕn sa lalamúnan at nagdudugň` ang kanya ng biběg. Hindí nya
itň inalintána at tumalňn din sya sa sápa` úpang iligtŕs si Maryŕ sa
pagkalúnod. Sa kababáwan nang sápa` ay hindí nangalúnod ang dalawŕ
ng báta`, dátapuwat siniglŕn lámang si Maryŕ nang malaki ng tákot na
sya nyŕ ng ipinaghimatŕy nang násŕsa túbig na syŕ. Kanyŕ` ang ginawá
ni Hwŕn ay hinawákan nya si Maryŕ sa likňd at itinaas nyŕ úpang hwŕg
makáinom nang túbig, hábang syŕ ay nŕsěsísid sa túbig. Ganitň ang anyú
nila nang mŕdatnan silŕ nang isa ng alíla ny Andrčs at silŕ y hinángo
sa sápŕ`. Malakě ang pagkŕgúlat niy Andrčs at malakě ang naging twŕ`
nang ama ni Hwŕn nang si Hwŕn ay márinig nila ng magsalitŕ` at ibalítŕ
sa kanilŕ ang nangyári.

Dáhil sa pagsasalitá ni Hwŕn ay lálu ng lumakŕs ang kanya ng pagsúlong
sa pagaáral, at gayon děn lálu ng tumálik ang pagkakaybígan nila
ni Maryŕ. Dumatěng ang áraw na sinábi nang gurú nya na sya y dápat
lumípat nang báyan úpang ipatúluy ang pagaáral, sapagkŕt sya y walá
na ng mŕitúro sa kanyŕ. Itň y sinábi rin nyŕ kay Andrčs. Ang ginawá
ny Andrčs ay ipinadalŕ si Hwŕn sa isa ng eskwčlhan nang pangdudúkit,
at díto sya nagáral na may ánim na taňn.

Si Hwŕn at si Maryŕ ay nagsilakě at ang kanila ng pagkakaybígan ay
nagěng pagiěbígan. Twě ng bakasyňn ay umuwč` si Hwŕn sa kanilŕ ng
báhay sa búkid ni Andrčs at doňn sya nagpŕpalípas nang áraw sa píling
ni Mariyŕ.

Dumatěng ang isa ng áraw nang pagtatanyágan nang manga dinúkit nang
manga artísta, at dáhil díto y pinagarálan ni Hwŕn ang isa ng áyos
na kanya ng dápat dukítin parŕ sa áraw na itň. Ang manálo sa manga
kasále ay běbigyŕn nang isa ng ganti ng pálŕ na may malaki ng kasáma
ng kwŕlta, bukňd sa pagdiríwang sa karŕngálan nang mŕnanalň. May isŕ
ng taň ng nagtrabáho si Hwŕn sa kanya ng kumpusisyňn.

Dumatěng ang áraw nang pagtatanyŕg nang manga dinúkit. Si Hwŕn,
ang kanya ng amŕ, si Andrčs, at si Maryŕ ay naparoňn sa báhay na
kinŕdňroonŕn nang manga dinúkit. Lubhŕ ng marámi ang manga táo,
dátapuwat ang pinagkŕkalipumpunŕn nilŕ ay ang dinúkit ni Hwŕn. Si
Maryŕ ay nápaiyŕk sa twŕ` sa gandŕ nang dinúkit ni Hwŕn. Si Andrčs
namŕn ay walŕ ng mŕláma ng sabíhin sa pagpúri. Dumatěng ang óras nang
pagpapaháyag nang manga hukňm kung síno ang nanálo, at ang dinúkit
ni Hwŕn ay sya ng binanggět na nakakúha nang gantě ng pála`.

Itň y isa ng grúpo ng máy-roo ng isa ng babáye ng nakatinděg. Ang
kaliwŕ ng kamŕy ay may háwak na isa ng sulň` at ang kánan namŕn ay
isa ng koróna ng dáhon. Sa banda ng kánan nang babáe at sa ilálim
nang koróna ng olíva ay may isŕ ng bináta ng nŕlůluhod ang kána ng
paŕ. Sa kanya ng kaliwŕ` ay may háwak sya ng librň at sa kánan ay
isa ng pamukpňk. Sa kanilŕ ng paánan ay nŕsŕsábug ang iba t iba ng
kasangkápan nang isa ng nagŕáral.

Nang silŕ y umuwč` ipinagtapŕt nang dalawa ng nagkŕkŕibígan sa kanila
ng manga magúlang ang kanila ng líhim. Ang ama ni Hwŕn ay nalungkňt
lámang, sapagkŕt nŕlŕláman nya na ang pagkakasŕl sa kanila ng dalawŕ
ay hindí maŕári`, sapagkŕt ang kanila ng lagŕy ay gáya nang sa isa
ng busábos o alípin at isa ng panginoňn o háre`. Pagkáalam ni Andrčs
sa bágay na itň ay siniglŕn sya nang malaki ng gálit. Ipinatáwag
nya si Hwŕn at kanya ng minúra. Sinábi nya ng sya y walŕ ng hyŕ` at
hindí marúnong tumanŕw nang útang na loňb, hindí marúnong kumilála sa
nagparúnong sa kanyŕ, at sinábi nya ng hindí sya maŕári ng mŕpakasŕl
kay Mariyŕ. Dáhil díto y sya y umalěs agad-agŕd na walŕ ng nakŕŕalŕm
káhit síno nang kanya ng patůtungúhan.

Nagdaŕn ang limŕ o ánim na taňn at si Hwŕn sa kanya ng pangdudúkit
ay káylan ma y hindí nalělimútan si Maryŕ.

Si Mariyŕ namŕn ay nagpalípas nang ánim na tao ng itň sa kanya ng
báhay. Nŕlůlugmok syŕ hábang panahňn sa isa ng malálim na kalungkútan
at tuwí na y si Hwŕn ang kanya ng nŕŕalaála. Si Maryŕ y nagkasakět
nang malubhŕ` at malápit na ng mamámatŕy.

Ipináyu nang manggagámot nya kay Andrčs na, kung íbig nya ng
máligtas ang kanya ng anŕk, ay sunděn nya ang gusto nitň tungkňl sa
pagaasáwa kay Hwŕn. Dátapuwat nang pumáyag siy Andrčs ay lubhŕ ng
huli nŕ. Palalá nang palalŕ` ang sakět ni Maryŕ, at si Hwŕn namŕn ay
hindí nya nŕlŕláman kung saŕn ang kinŕdňroonŕn. Marámi sya ng inutúsan
sa malalaki ng báyan úpang hanápin si Hwŕn, dátapuwat nakaraan nŕ
ang marámi ng áraw ay walá pa ng nagkapálad káhit isŕ sa kanilŕ na
makátagpň` kay Hwŕn.

Sa kalaúnan ang isa sa kanilŕ y nŕtagpuan itň sa báya-ng-Kamálig sa
kanya ng gŕwáan. Nang mŕbalitáan nya na ipinasúsundo syŕ ni Andrčs
úpang ipakasŕl sila ng dalawŕ ni Maryŕ, ay lubhŕ ng malakě ang kanyŕ
ng naging twŕ`. Dátapuwat gayon děn malakě ang kanya ng tákot na
baká hindí nya abúta ng buhŕy ang kanya ng iněíbig. Sya y matúli ng
matúli ng umwč` at nang dumatěng sya sa báhay niy Andrčs ay nŕkíta nya
doňn ang butň t balŕt na pangangatawŕn ni Maryŕ nŕlŕlátag sa kanya ng
hihigŕn. Nang sandalí ri ng iyňn ay nagpasundú si Andrčs nang isa ng
páre`, at si Hwŕn at si Maryŕ y ipinakasŕl. Hábang ang pagkakasŕl ay
idinŕdaos nang páre` ang hiningŕ namŕn ni Maryŕ ay pumŕpánaw. Nang
mákasal na silŕ ay nagkaroňn lámang si Hwŕn nang panahň ng mahagkŕn
ang kanya ng asáwa, at itň y pinanáwan nang hiningŕ na ang mukhá y
masayŕ at nŕngěngitě ang biběg.





26. SI MARKÍTA.

Si Markíta ay isŕ ng dalága ng mabaět at magandŕ, dátapuwat
mahírap. Sya y máy-roo ng isa ng nóbyo na mahírap děn, dátapuwat may
empléyo sa gobyčrno sa Mayníla` at máy-roo ng mabúti ng swčldo.

Si Markíta ay máy-roo ng isa ng kápit-báhay na mayáman. Ang báhay
ay tablŕ, at yéro ang bubungŕn, malápad ang kanya ng bukirěn. Ang
kápit-báhay na ytň y malakě ang pagkágusto kay Markíta, dátapuwat hindí
nátin mŕsŕsábe kung túnay ang kanya ng pagíbig, sapagkŕt maluwŕg ang
kanya ng tornílyo. Lahŕt nang pagsúyo` ay ginawá nya kay Markíta,
dátapuwat si Markíta y isa ng dalága ng hindí sa-lawáhan ang loňb,
at ang lahŕt nang kanya ng pagsúyo` ay hindí pinansěn.

Sa kalakhŕn nang pagíbig nang manglilígaw na si Markíta ay mápasa
kanyŕ, ang ginawá nya y gumámit nang lakŕs. Isa ng hápon pumások sa
bakúran nila Markíta at nagkubli syŕ sa isa ng púno-ng-ságing. Nang
hápu ng yoňn ay nagkátaon namŕ ng ang bakúran nilŕ Markíta ay
marumě. Kanyŕ itň y nanáog at niwalisŕn ang bakúran. Pagkátabi nyŕ sa
púno-ng-ságing na pinagkůkublihŕn nang laláke, itň y lumápit pagdáka,
tinangnŕn sya sa kamŕy at kanyŕ sya hinagkŕn.

Nŕlŕláman na ninyň na sa manga mahihinhě ng táo doňn sa átin ang isa
ng halěk ay isa ng malakě ng kasiraŕn nang púri. Dáhil díto nang si
Markíta ay pumanhěk sa báhay na umíiyŕk, at nang mŕláman nang kanya ng
manga magúlang na syŕ y tinampalásan o hinagkŕn nang laláki ng iyňn,
inakálŕ nila na walŕ ng iba ng pangtakěp sa kasiraŕ-ng-púri ng itň
kung hindí ang ipakasŕl nilŕ sa laláki ng iyňn ang kanilŕ ng anŕk
na si Markíta. Káhit anň ng pagayŕw ang ginawá ni Markíta at káhit
na nŕlŕláman nilŕ na itň y may kaěbígan, ay kanila rě ng ipinatúloy
ang pagkakasŕl.

Si Markíta ay isa ng báta ng lubhŕ ng masůnúrin sa kanya ng manga
magúlang, kanyá hindí sya makasuwŕy nang tňtohánan ngayňn. Ang ginawá
na lámang niyŕ ay isinúlat nya sa kanya ng nóvyo ang manga nangyári
at mangyŕyári at sinábi nya ng ang magíging pagkakasŕl sa kanyŕ ay isa
lámang pagsunňd sa manga magúlang at siya rěn ay kanya ng iněíbig. Sa
manga magúlang namŕn ni Markíta ay kanya ng sinábi na sya ay hindí
nila pakěkinabángan, sapagkŕt ang pagkakasŕl nya sa táu ng kanya ng
kinabůbuwisítan ay kanyŕ ng ikamámatay na madalě`.

Ikinasŕl silŕ. Hindí nalaúnan at inapuyŕn si Markíta nang lagnŕt. Mulá
sa áraw nang kanya ng pagkakasŕl ay hindí sya makakáin nang káhit
anň, at áraw-gabě sya y lumůlúha`. Ang manga magagalěng na médiko sa
báyan, ang lahŕt nang yáman nang kanya ng asáwa, at ang lahŕt nang
manga panalángin nang kanya ng manga magúlang ay hindí makapagligtŕs
sa kanyŕ sa kamŕtáyan. Pagkaraŕn nang pitů ng áraw nang kanya ng
pagkákasŕl ay sya y namatŕy. Itň y nagěng malakě ng kalungkútan nang
kanya ng nagěng nóbyo at isa ng nakatúlong sa nagěng kasawiŕ-ng-pálad
nitň sa kanya ng búhay na dumatěng.





27. ANG MANGMŔNG NA PÁRE`.

Sa báya-ng-Balíwag ay máy nŕdistíno ng isa ng pári ng wala ng muwŕng
káhit anu mŕn. Hiněhinála` nang manga táo na syŕ y isa ng sakatéro
lámang sa Espánya na nápadpad doňn at idinistíno sa kanilŕ ng báyan
úpang magkaroňn nang swčldo at sa gayň y máligtas sa pagkamatŕy nang
gútom. Linggo-linggň syŕ y nagměmísa, dátapwat ang manga nakíkinig
nang mísa ay wala ng márinig sa kanyŕ kung hindě` ang salitŕ ng
"Mísa, mísa, mísa," at iba pŕ. Papasí-pasyal sa harapŕn nang altŕr;
kung mínsan ay humáharap sa manga táo, pinagdódoop ang kamŕy, at sa
lahŕt nang pagkílos nya ng itň y wala ng patěd nya ng sinŕsábi ang
"Mísa, mísa, mísa," at iba pŕ.

Ang manga táo y nagálit at ipinagsumbňng sya sa arsuběspo. Ang sagňt
nang arsuběspo ay páparoon sya ng isŕ ng linggň at makíkinig nang mísa,
úpang mŕkíta kung túnay ngŕ` ang sumbong nilŕ.

Dumatěng doňn ang arsuběspo. Sa kanyŕ y sinábi nang pári` na sya y
hindí makapagmísa, sapagkŕt ang manga ulňl na táo ay nagŕŕlísan sa
simbáhan paguumpisŕ nya nang mísa.

"Búkas," sinábi pa nyŕ, "ay mŕmŕmasdŕn ninyň ang kanila ng
pagtatakbúhan sa pagbebendisyňn ko pa lámang."

Kinŕbukásan ay linggň at sa pagmimísa nya ay háharap ang
arsuběspo. Umísip sya nang paraŕn nang pagliligtŕs sa kanya ng
saríle. Kanyŕ`, bágu sya nagumpisŕ nang pagmimísa ay nagpakuló sya nang
langěs. Hábang sya y nagběbíhis ang manga táo namŕn at ang arsuběspo
ay nŕůupú na sa simbáhan. Ang arsuběspo ay malápit sa altŕr at hábang
sya y nagběbíhis ang langěs namŕn ay kasalukúya ng kumúkulň`. Nang
makapagbíhis na syŕ ay ibinúhus nya sa lalagyŕn nang túbig na bendíta
ang kumúkulu ng langěs. Ang ugálě nya ay magbendisyňn múna bágu
magmísa, kanyŕ` pagpások nya sa simbáhan ay sya nyŕ ng iniwisěk sa
manga táo ang kumúkulu ng langěs sa lugŕr nang ŕgwa-bendíta. Ang manga
táo ng dinapúan nang maiínit na patŕk nang langěs ay nagsipagtinděg at
úbus-lŕkása ng nagsipagtakbúhan papalabŕs sa simbáhan. Nang mŕkíta itň
nang arsuběspo ay hindí nya ipinatulňy ang pagmimísa sa áraw na iyňn,
sapagkŕt wala ng nátira sa simbáhan ní isa mŕn sa manga táo.

Sinábi nang arsuběspo sa párě` na sya y hindí mŕŕalěs sa báya ng iyňn
at hindí na nyŕ pŕpansiněn ang anu mŕ ng ipagsumbňng nang manga táo.





28. ANG PŔKUMPISÁLAN.

Si Párě Mundň ay sya ng nŕdistínu ng ilŕ ng taňn sa
báya-ng-Marikína. Sya y isa ng táo ng maibigěn sa pagliliwalěw. Sa
pagtupŕd sa kanya ng manga tungkúlin sya y hindí nagkůkúlang
káylan mŕn. Araw-áraw sya y nagměmísa at kung linggň ay makálawa
sya ng magmísa. Gayon děn sya y nagbíbinyŕg nang manga báta`,
nagbčbendisyňn nang patŕy, nagháhatid nang biyátiko, nagpŕpakumpisŕl,
at nagpakinábang. Ang lahŕt nang kanyŕ ng tungkúlin ay sinúsunod
nyŕ ng mabúte, dátapuwat ang pagpapakumpisŕl ay nilalúan nya nang
kauntě`. Sa ganŕ ng kanyŕ sigúro ng itň y mabúte úpang pauntiěn ang
manga kasalánan nang kanya ng kinúkumpisŕl, dátapuwat sa ibŕ sa kanya
ng manga kinúkumpisal itň y may nagěng masamŕ ng dúlo.

Mínsan máy-ro ng isŕ ng babái ng dalága na mapagsimbŕ at
mapagkumpisŕl. Nang dumatěng ang dalága ng itň sa dalawa ng pů ng taňn
ang gúlang ay iníwan na nyŕ ang kabŕnála ng pagkukumpisŕl, gayon děn
bihíra ng magsimbŕ. Nang mínsan usisáin ang babáye ng itň ay nagsábi
nang ganitň:

"Noo ng úna ang boň ng akálŕ ko si Párě Mundň ay isa ng sŕnto, dátapwat
ngayň y nŕpagkěkilála nang marámi na sya y isa ng buwísit na táo. Kung
bahŕ` at ang manga táo y nagsěsipamangkŕ` sa bahŕ`, sya y sa bangkŕ`
nang manga babáe nakíkisakŕy at hindí sa manga laláki. Kung umága
pagkamísa nya ay mŕkěkíta na sya ng nakatalungkň sa kanya ng pátyo na
ang ábito y nagůgúmun sa lúpa` at sya y humŕhágod nang manňk kaharŕp
nang ibŕ ng sabungéro.

"Noo ng úna akň y madalŕs magkumpisŕl sa kanyŕ, dátapwat dumatěng
ang isa ng áraw na panŕy na kaululŕn lámang ang ipagtatanňng nya sa
ákin sa kumpěsálan. Súkat ba ng itinanňng nya sa ákin kung ilŕn ang
manlilígaw sa ákin, kung síno ang áki ng iněíbig, at kung saŕn akň
makěkipagtagpň`? Sa loob-loňb ku lámang ay nŕpakawala-ng-hyŕ` ang
pári ng itň. Kanyŕ` iníwan ku sya agŕd sa kumpěsálan at mulá noon ay
hindí na akň nangumpisŕl."





29. SI HWŔ NG BÍBAS.

Si Hwŕn ay isa táo ng mapaggawá nang kaululŕn, dátapuwat itň y hindí
nya sinásadyŕ` úpang magpagálit nang kápwa táo, kung hindí yon ay
talagŕ ng sya nyŕ ng ugáli` na átas sa kanya nang kanya ng pagiísip.

Mínsan sya y naparňn sa fiyčsta nang isa ng báyan. May pasŕn sya
ng tatlň ng biěk, úpang ipagbilč sa báyan. Nang sya y dumating nŕ,
nŕkíta nya sa pátyo nang simbáhan ang marámi ng táo ng nalělípon at
nakíkiněg nang biníbigkas na talumpáti` nang kápitan sa báyan. Masikěp
ang pagkakátayo nang manga táo, dátapwat sya y nálapit děn sa
paanŕn nang entabládo na kinŕtŕtayuŕn nang nagtŕtalumpáti`. Hábang
nakěkipagsiksíkan syŕ, ang tatlň ng biěk ay wala ng lubŕy nang
pagyŕk. Nang syŕ y makarating nŕ sa harapŕn nang kápitan, tinúkup
nya ang manga biběg, úpang silŕ y patahaněn, dátapwat walá sya ng
magawŕ`. Náino nang kápitan ang manga ěyákan nang biěk at tiningnan
nyŕ kung síno ang máy dala doňn nang manga biěk.

Nang mŕkíta nya si Hwŕn ay sinábi nya ang ganítň: "Huwán! Anň
ang gustu mň ng sabíhin sa pagpapaiyŕk mo díto nang iyo ng manga
biěk? Lumáyas ka ngayon děn, at hwag kŕ ng makŕtuntong-tuntňng káylan
mŕn sa lúpa-ng-Bůstos!"

Si Hwŕn ay umalěs at umwč` sa kanya ng báyan sa San-Ildepňnso. Nakaraŕn
ang isa ng taňn at dumatěng na mulě` ang fyčsta sa báyan nang
Bůstos. Iníbig ni Hwŕn na pumaroňn, dátapuwat nŕalaála nya na tinangáan
sya nang kápitan sa báya ng iyňn na, pag sya y nŕkíta ng mulě` sa
lúpa-ng-Bůstos, ay sya y ipabíbilanggň` at pahěhirápan. Umísip si
Hwŕn nang paraŕn úpang makaparňn.

Nang dumatěng ang fiyčsta ay máy-roo ng isŕ ng mísa ng malakě na
dinaluhŕn nang líbo-líbo ng táo. Si Hwŕn ay isŕ sa manga táo ng itň at
syŕ ang nŕpŕpansěn nang marámi ng táo, dahilŕn sa anyň nang pagkálagay
nyŕ doňn sa loňb nang simbáhan. Dí nalaúnan at isŕ sa manga táo ng
nagmámasid sa kanyŕ ay nagsumbůng sa kápitan at sinábi na si Hwŕn ay
násŕsa loňb nang simbáhan at nakasakŕy sa isa ng karéta na hiněhíla
nang kalabŕw, at ang lahŕt, karéta, kalabŕw, at si Hwŕn ay násŕsa
loňb nang simbáhan. Si Hwŕn ay hindí nanŕnáog sa karéta ng kanya
ng tinůtuntungŕn.

Pumarůn ang kápitan sa simbáhan úpang hulíhin si Hwŕn. Nang málapit
syŕ díto ay sinábi nyŕ: "Huwán! Sumunňd ka sa ákin at ibíbilanggú
kitŕ. Hindí ba sinábi ko nŕ sa iyň t hwŕg kŕ ng tútuntong nang
lúpa-ng-Bůstos?"

Isinagňt namŕn ni Hwŕn: "Ginoň ng Kápitan! Sinábi ngŕ` po ninyň sa
ákin iyŕn. Kanyŕ` akň y hindí makaalěs sa áki ng karéta. Nŕkěkíta
pú ba ninyň itň ng lúpa ng lúlan nang áki ng karéta at sya kň
ng tinůtuntungŕn? Ito pň` ay hindč lúpa-ng-Bůstos kung hindí
lúpa-ng-San-Ildepňnso. Doňn ko pň` sa áki ng báyan kinúha ang lúpa
ng itň."

Pagkŕsábi ni Hwŕn nitň ay hindí nŕpigílan nang kápitan ang pagtáwa,
at sinábi na lámang nya sa kanya ng saríli na syŕ y wala ng magágawa
kay Hwŕn, sapagkŕt itň y nása katwíran.





30. TATLŇ NG MAGKAKAYBÍGA NG MAGNANÁKAW.

Si Hwŕn, si Andrčs, at si Dyégo ay tatlň ng magagalěng na
magnanákaw. Silŕ y balíta ng balíta`, at marámi ng táo ang nagsěsihúle
sa kanilŕ, dátapuwat sa galěng nilŕ nang pangingílag at pagnanákaw
ay hindí sila mŕhúle. Ang tatlň ng itů y nagtěpána ng mínsan na
magtatagpň` sila sa isa ng lugŕr na tahímik at líhim úpang pagusápan
nilŕ ang kanilŕ ng pamumúhay at manga mabubúti ng bágo ng paraŕn nang
pagnanákaw. Silŕ ng tatlň ay nabůbúhay sa pagnanákaw lámang. Ní isa
mŕn sa kanilŕ ay walŕ ng paghahánap na mabúte. Mulá pa sa pagkabátŕ`
ay ganito nŕ ang kanila ng pamumúhay, kanyŕ` silŕ y nagěng matalíno
at lubhŕ ng makínis sa gawa ng itň.

Nang dumatěng ang áraw nang kanilŕ ng těpánan, madali ng áraw pa
lámang ay nŕrňroňn na silŕ. Malakě ng pamamalíta` nang báwat isŕ at
hindí magkŕmáyaw ang kanila ng pagbabŕlitaŕn.

Itinanňng ni Hwŕn kay Dyégo: "Gánu ka na bŕ kakínis ngayňn sa áti
ng trabáho?"

"Sa damdam kň," ang sagňt ni Dyégo, "ay akň ang pinakamakínis sa áti ng
tatlň, sapagkŕt akň y nakapagnŕnákaw nang manga itlňg na hinŕhalimhimŕn
nang manňk na hindí nŕlŕláman nitň. At hindí itu lámang," idinugtung
nyŕ, "ang manga háyop mŕn na mababagsěk ay nŕnŕnakáwan ku nang kanila
ng inakŕy nang walá sila ng málay."

"Ganyŕn ba lámang ang kínis mo?" isinabŕd pagdáka ni Andrčs, "Akň
ay nakapagnŕnákaw sa háyop at gayon děn sa táo. Ang manga aláhas
nang táo na íbig ko ng nakáwin ay ninŕnákaw ko, káhit na natůtúlog o
naglálakad ang may áre`. Mínsan ay ninákaw ko ang isa ng singsěng na
hiněhigŕn nang may ári` úpang hwag mŕnákaw, dátapwat itň y nŕnákaw
ko nang walá sya ng málay."

"Ganyŕn ba lámang ang kínis ninyň?" itinanůng ni Hwŕn, "Walá sa
kalahátě nang kínis ko sa pagnanákaw ang inyů ng manga nagágawŕ`. Akň
y nakapagnŕnákaw nang táo měsmo at hindí nang kanila lámang na manga
pagaáre`."

Nŕpagúlat ang dalawŕ nya ng kaúsap, sapagkŕt hindí nila inakála ng ang
isa ng táo ng buhŕy ay maŕári ng mŕnákaw nang hindí nito nŕlŕláman,
at úpang subúkan nilŕ ang galěng ni Hwŕn ay nakipagpustáhan silŕ
ng dalawŕ kay Hwŕn. Sinábi nilŕ ng nakáwin nya ang párě` sa báyan
at ihatid nyŕ sa lugŕr na kanila ng kinŕdňroonŕn ngayňn. Kung itů y
magawá nya, bŕbayáran sya ni Andrčs at ni Dyégo nang limŕ ng daŕ ng
píso. Dátapuwat kung hindí nya magawŕ`, bŕbayáran nya si Andrčs at
si Dyégo nang isa ng daŕ ng píso. Umáyon si Hwŕn sa pustáha ng itň
at silŕ y naghiwá-hiwalŕy.

Si Hwŕn ay napatúngu sa báyan at pinakibalitáan nya kung saŕn nŕtětirŕ
ang párč`. Nang mŕláman nya itň ay nagisěp sya nang paraŕ ng gágawin
nyŕ na pagnákaw sa párč`. Sya y pumásuk na alíla` sa pári ng itň. Sa
kanya ng pagkŕpaalíla ng itň ay nŕkilála nya ang manga ugáli nang
páre`. Isŕ sa kanya ng ugáli` na hindí nabŕbáli` káylan mŕn ay ang
pagdadasŕl nang rosáriyo sa harapŕn nang isa ng poňn. Ang poň ng itň
ay nayŕyárě nang káhoy, at itň y si Sang-Hwŕn. Ang lakě nang poň ng
itň ay kasingpantŕy nang isa ng táo.

Ang ginawá ni Hwŕn ay nagpagawá sya sa isa ng mandurúkit nang isa ng
poň ng gáya rin nitň, dátapuwat hukŕy at wala ng lamŕn ang loňb. Ang
bútas na itň sa loňb nang katawŕn nang poň ng itň ay maŕári ng
sootŕn nang isa ng táo. Nang mayárě na ang poň ng pagawá ni Hwŕn,
ay pinalitan nyŕ ang poň ng si Sang-Hwŕn na túnay naárě nang párč`.

Isa ng hápun bágu dumatěng ang orasyňn ay kumúha sya nang isa ng
sáko nang bigŕs at napaloňb sya sa loňb nang sŕnto ng ipinagawá
nya. Pagkahápon nang párě` itň y pumaroňn sa kwŕrto ng kanya ng
pinagdŕdasalŕn úpang magrosáryo. Nang magkákalahatí na ang kanya ng
pagdadasŕl at kátaon namŕ ng nangŕngáwit na si Hwŕn sa pagkátayň`, ay
nagsalitŕ ito: "Ihintú mu nŕ, Párě Lúkas, ang iyo ng pagdadasŕl. Ako
y pinŕparíto sa iyň úpang ihatěd kitŕ sa lángit."

Nang úna ay siniglŕn nang tákot ang páre`, dátapuwat inakálŕ nya ng
ang kanya ng poňn ay nagměmilágro at totoo ngŕ ng sinúsundú sya úpang
ihatěd sa kalangitŕn.

Sa kanyŕ ng hindí pagkibň` ay nagsalitŕ ng mulí si Hwŕn nang ganitň:
"Marámi nŕ ang kabŕnála ng iyů ng ginawŕ`. Matagŕl ka nang namůmúhay
nang mabába`, at dáhil díto y nŕtŕtaŕn sa iyň ang lahŕt nang
kaginhawáhan sa lángit. Sumáma ka sa ákin at iháhatid kitŕ."

Isinagňt nang páre`: "Papáno ang gŕgawin kň ng pagsáma sa iyň? Aků
y matandá na at hindí ako makalŕlákad mulŕ díto sa lúpa` hanggŕng
sa lángit."

Isinagňt namŕn ni Hwŕn: "Yňn ay hwag mů ng alalahánin. Máy-ron ako ng
isa ng sáko. Sumilěd ka díto at pŕpasanin kitŕ sa pagpuntŕ sa lángit."

At pagkŕsábi nya nitň y iniladlad nyŕ ang sáko nang bigŕs. Pagkásilid
nang páre` ay tinalía ng mahigpět ni Hwŕn ang sáko. Lumabŕs sya sa
loňb nang poňn at pinasan nyŕ si Párě Lúkas patúngo sa báhay na kanya
ng pinagtipanŕn sa dalawa ng kaybígan. Tiwalŕ ng tiwalá si Párě Lúkas
na sya y papuntŕ sa lángit, kanyŕ` walá sya ng kibň` sa loňb nang sáko.

Dátapwat, nang nagbŕbátis na si Hwŕn sa isa ng mabábaw na ílog, ay
inakálŕ nya ng sya y nŕlňlóko lámang at hindí sa lángit ang punta nilŕ.

Kanyŕ itinanůng nya kay Hwŕn: "Anu ng ílog itň, at bákit táyo dápat
tumawěd nang ílog sa pagpuntŕ sa lángit?"

Isinagňt ni Hwŕn: "Sssst! Hwag kŕ ng maíngay! Itň y ílog nang Hňrdan."

Ang párě ay nagtahŕn nang pagsasalitŕ`. Ipinatúloy ni Hwŕn ang
paglákad.

Nang sya y pumápanhik nŕ sa báhay na kanila ng tagpúan, nŕpagúlat na
mulě` ang páre`, at tumanůng sya ng mulě`: "Anu ng hagdánan itň? Ganito
bŕ ang hitsúra nang hagdána ng papuntŕ sa lángit?"

"Sinábi ko nŕ sa iyň at hwag kŕ ng maíngay", ang isinagňt ni Hwŕn,
"Ito ngŕ` ang hagdána ng paakyŕt sa lángit."

Nang mápanhik nŕ silŕ sa báhay ay sinalúbong silŕ ni Dyégo at ni
Andrčs. Inilapŕg ni Hwŕn ang kanya ng dalŕ, at sinábi nya sa dalawŕ:
"Dala ko ríto ang iniyútos ninyo sa áki ng nakáwin. Dala ba ninyň
ang lima ng daa ng píso?"

Ang dalawŕ y hindí naniwála ng agŕd. Kanyŕ` ang ginawá nila y binútas
nilŕ ang sáko at sinílip nilŕ ang lamŕn. Sa loňb ay nŕkíta nila ang
úlo nang párě` na may satsŕt. Kanyŕ` iniyabňt nila kay Hwŕn ang lima
ng daa ng píso, at sila ng lahŕt ay nanáog pagdáka. Iníwan nilŕ ang
páre` úpang sya ay magpakawalŕ` sa kanya ng saríle.





31. ANG PANGHUHÚLI NANG MANGA UNGGŇ`.

Hindí bihíra` sa manga gúbat na mŕtagpuŕn ang malalakě ng káwal nang
manga unggň`. Kung walŕ ng armŕs ang isŕ ng nŕpápasa kanila ng lugŕr,
silŕ y mababagsěk, at may pangánib na patayěn nilŕ ang táo ng kanila
ng mŕpagkalipumpunŕn. Silŕ kung nagŕgálit ay nagsěsipanáog sa manga
púnů nang káhoy at pinagtůtulůng-tulúnga ng kinákagat ang táo ng
násŕsa kapangyaríhan nilŕ. Dáhil díto ang isa ng táo ng naglálakad
sa manga gúbat na marámi ng unggň` ay hindí magpŕpabáya ng magdalŕ
nang barěl. Ang manga unggň` kung pinůputukan nŕ nang barěl ay wala ng
tákot. Karamíhan ay hindí nagtŕtakbúhan, dátapuwat tinětingnan nilŕ ang
pinanggŕgalíngan nang íngay at nang asň. Ang manga dinŕratnan namŕn
nang bála ay sinásangga itň nang kanya ng kamŕy, pára ng sumásangga
sa isa ng pukňl lámang. Kanyŕ` ang manga pálad nilŕ ay nŕbůbútas děn
nang bála kung silŕ y tamaŕn.

Hindí bihíra` ang manga táo y nanghůhúle nang buhŕy na unggň` úpang
kanila ng aliláin at ipagbilě sa manga taga iba t ibŕ ng lupaěn
na nagsěsipuntŕ sa Filipínas. Ang panghuhúle nang buhŕy na unggň`
ay hindí nangŕngailángan nang malakě ng págod, dátapuwat ang paraŕn
nang paghúle sa kanila ay isŕ ng panglolóko lámang sa kanilŕ. Ito ng
sumúsunňd ay isa ng halimbáwŕ nang paghúle sa kanilŕ.

Kung ang isa ng táo ay íbig humúle nang unggň`, karanyúan ay
naglůlúto` o nagpŕpalúto sya nang kakaněn, at itň y hinŕhalúan o
pinahŕhalúan niya nang balasěng. Ang balasěng ay isa ng butň nang
haláman na nakalálasěng o nakapagáantňk nang malálim na antňk sa
manga háyop na makŕkáin. Gayon děn ginŕgámit itň sa panghuhúle
nang isdá sa ílog. Pagkalútň nang kakaněn itň y dinádala nang táo
sa lugŕr na kinŕdňroonŕn nang káwal nang manga unggň`. Dátapuwat
kung itň y ilagay nyŕ nang mahúsay sa lúpŕ` ang manga unggň` ay
hindí magsěsipanáog úpang kumáin. Hiněhinálŕ nilŕ na ang kakaně ng
iyňn ay páin lámang sa kanilŕ úpang silŕ y hulíhin o patayěn. Dáhil
díto ang ginágawa nang táo ay nagtŕtakut-takútan pagkátanaw nyŕ sa
manga unggň`, at sya y nagtátakbň na súnong ang biláo nang kakaně
ng may balasěng. Sa kanya ng pagtakbň ay nagdŕdapa-dapáan syŕ, at
dáhil díto y ang súnung nya ng kakaněn ay nŕpŕpalagpŕk at nŕsŕsábog
sa lúpa`. Kung itů y mangyári nŕ, ipinatůtúloy din nyŕ ang kanya ng
pagtakbň, at sya y nangúngublč sa isa ng lugŕr, úpang tanawěn nya ang
pagkakŕínan nang manga unggň`. Pagkŕkíta nang manga unggň` sa patakbň
ng pagalěs nang táo at pagkákubli nitň, silŕ y nagsěsipanáug sa manga
púno-ng-káhoy at nagsěsipagagawŕn nang kakaněn. Nagkŕkŕdagŕn-dagŕn
silŕ sa pagaagawŕn, at lubhŕ ng malakě ang íngay, sapagkŕt ang báwat
isa ng káwal nang unggň ay máy-roo ng limŕ ng daŕn o isŕ ng líbo ang
bílang. Pagkakáin nilŕ hindí nalŕláon at sinúsumpong silŕ nang antňk,
nagsěsipanghína` at hindí makaakyŕt sa káhoy. Isa ng nakŕtŕtawa ng
panoorěn ang manga unggň ng itň, matandŕ` at bátŕ`, ay nangŕtŕtalungkň
sa lúpa` at nagsěsipagyukayňk báwat isŕ. Ang ibŕ ng hindí nagkapálad na
makŕágaw nang kakaněn ay nagsísiyakyŕt sa púno-ng-káhoy at pinanónood
ang kanila ng manga lasěng na kasamahŕn. Pagaanyň` nang ganitň nang
manga unggň`, ang táo ng nŕkůkublě ay saká pa lámang lumŕlápit at
isa-isŕ ng sinůsunggabŕn ang manga natůtúlug na unggň`. Hindí maláo
ng panahňn ang pagubrŕ nang balasěng na itň, at ang manga unggň y
nagsěsihúsay pagkaraŕn nang ilŕ ng áraw.

Ang ikalawŕ ng karanyúa ng gawěn sa panghuhúli nang unggň` ay ang
pagpapáin sa kanila nang nyňg. Ang isa ng boň ng nyňg ay nilŕlagyan
nang bútas. Ang lakě nang bútas na itň ay hustň lámang na mŕipásuk
nang unggň` ang kanya ng kamŕy kung walŕ ng tángan. Sa loňb nang
báo nang nyňg ay inilálagay ang isa ng pirásu-ng-lamŕn nang nyůg, at
ang lahŕt na itň y inilálagay sa lugŕr nang manga unggň`. Ang manga
unggň` ay magustúhin sa nyňg, at pagkŕkíta nilŕ díto ay dinůdúkot
nilŕ ang lamŕ ng nása loňb nang báo. Kung masunggabŕn na namŕn nilŕ
ang lamŕn nang nyňg, ang kanila ng kamŕy ay hindí nila mŕilabŕs sa
bútas, ní íbig namŕn silŕ ng bitíwan ang lamŕn nang nyňg. Dáhil díto
silŕ y pára ng nakapangŕw at paglápit nang táo ng manghuhúle ay hindí
sila makaalěs, sapagkŕt ang niyog namŕn ay mabigŕt at kung mínsan
ay máy-roo ng pabigŕt. Kanyŕ` paglápit nang manghuhúle, ay wala ng
hírap nya ng nasůsunggabŕn ang manga unggň` o matsěng na nangŕpŕpangŕw.





32. ANG FIYČSTA NI SANG-HWŔN.

Ang abéynte-kwátru nang Húnyo ay sya ng áraw na kapyestáhan
ni Sang-Hwŕn, at itň y ipinagdědíwang sa manga bayŕn-bayŕn sa
lalawígan nang Bulakŕn. Sa bwŕn nang Húnyo ay kasalukúyan ang ulŕn
at mapútik. Ang paniwálŕ nang manga táo si Sang-Hwŕn ay sya ng sŕnto
ng nagpŕpaulŕn, dáhil díto y maibigěn sa túbig at pútik. Kanyŕ`
ang manga pagdiríwang na ginágawŕ` sa kanya ng kaarawŕn ay lubhŕ
ng malakě ang pagkáiba sa pagdiríwang na ginágawa sa kaarawŕn nang
ibŕ ng sŕnto. Sa báya ng malalápit sa dágat kung bwŕn nang Húnyo ay
bumábahŕ`, at ang túbig ay umŕáhon sa báyan. Sa manga báya ng malaláyo`
sa dágat ay lubhŕ ng maulŕn děn, at karanyúwa y ang manga pagbahŕ ng
itň at pagulŕn ay nŕtŕtaňn sa kaarawŕn ni Sang-Hwŕn. Ang manga táo
ng kasáli sa pagdiríwang ay nagsěsipagbasŕ` sa bahŕ` o sa ulŕn. Sa
manga báyan nang Malólos at Hagúnoy kung nŕtŕtaňn ang fyčsta ng itň sa
isa ng bahŕ ng malakě, hálos lahŕt nang táo ay naglúlublob sa túbig
o kayŕ y nagsěsipamangkŕ`. Kung hindí namŕn bahŕ`, ang manga táo y
nagsěsipaglibňt lámang sa ulŕn. Marámi ng taga búkid at taga báriyo ay
nagsěsipagpalimňs sa kaarawŕ ng itň. Karamíhan sa kanilŕ ay manga báta`
o kayŕ y manga bináta`. Bihíra ng máy manga babáye. Pangkat-pangkŕt
sila ng nagsěsipagpalimňs, at báwat isa ng pangkŕt ay máy manga kasáma
ng músiku ng bungbňng. Ang manga hindí nagsísitugtňg ang katungkúlan ay
kumantŕ o kayŕ y sumayŕw. Sila ng lahŕt ay uwalŕ ng pamamáro` hálos,
gáya nang manga Igoróte, dátapuwat ang boň ng katawŕn mulá sa paŕ
hanggŕng úlo, patě manga matŕ at taínga, ay nŕkůkulapúlan nang pútek.

Ang manga pangkŕt na itň ay tumŕtáwag sa bahay-bahŕy. Naghíhintó sila
sa harapŕn nang báhay, at díto y tumútugtog silŕ o kayŕ y nagsěsikantŕ
o nagsásayŕw. Ang karanyúa ng kanila ng kantahěn ay úkol sa nagěng
pamumúhay ni Sang-Hwŕn o kayŕ y nang iba ng sŕnto ng kaybígan nitň. Sa
kanila ng pagtutugtúgan ang kanila ng áyos ay makahiléra ng pabilňg,
kung mínsan ay nakatayň`, kung mínsan ay nakatalungkň`, o kayŕ y
nakaluhňd. Kung máy-roo ng nagkákantŕ o sumásayŕw, itň y násŕsa loňb
nang bílog nang manga mŕnunugtňg, at doňn nya ginágawŕ ang kanya
ng pagkantŕ o pagsayŕw. Pagkaraŕn nang dalawŕ o tatlň ng tugtúgan,
kantáhan, o sŕyáwan, sila y nagsěsipaghintň` at sabŕy-sabŕy na
nagsěsipanghingě` nang limňs sa manga táo ng nanúnood sa kanilŕ. Kung
sila y hindí limusŕn, kumůkúha silŕ nang pútik sa kanila ng katawŕn
at pinúpukul nilŕ ang manga táo ng mararámot.

Ang boň ng maghápun ay inůúbus nilŕ sa ganitň ng pagdiríwang. Ang manga
manglilímos na itň ay lubhŕ ng marámi rěn, kanyŕ` silŕ y nakatůtúlung
na magpasiglŕ sa báyan káhit na lubhŕ ng maulŕn.

Sa manga pagbabangkáan namŕn ay hindí bihírŕ` ang magkalunňd ang
manga táo. Kanyŕ ang ugáli ng itň ay unti-untě ng nawáwalŕ`. Gayon
děn sa manga panahň ng itň ang manga táo y nagíging kuríput at bihíra
ng maglimňs. Kanyŕ` ang manga manghihingí nang limůs sa kaarawŕn ni
Sang-Hwŕn ay untě-untě ng nawáwalŕ`.





33. ANG MANGA PANGINGÍLIN NANG MANGA KAMAGÁNAK NANG ISA NG NAMATŔY.

Ang isŕ ng angkŕ ng namŕmatayŕn ay hindě` ang kanila ng loňb at
káluluwa lámang ang nagtátamu nang hírap, kung hindě` patě ang bulsŕ
rěn nilŕ. Itů y dahilŕn sa lubhŕ ng malalakě ng dámi nang ginůgúgul
nang namŕmatayŕn sa pagdadáos nang sarě-sári ng kaugaliŕn.

Sa áraw nang pagkamatŕy nang isa ng táo, sa angkŕn nitň ay marámi ng
lubhŕ` ang nagsěsidálaw, at ang manga nagsěsidálaw namŕ ng itň ay hindí
nasěsyahŕn nang pakikipagdalamhátě lámang sa kamaganákan nang namatŕy,
dátapuwat silŕ y nagtútumirŕ sa báhay nang namatayŕn. Dáhil díto
ang angkŕn nang namatŕy ay napěpilíta ng maghandá nang pangpakáin sa
manga dálaw. Karanyúwa y hindí inilílibing agŕd ang patŕy, dátapuwat
ibinůbúrol múna ng dalawŕ o tatlo ng áraw mulá sa pagkalagůt nang
hiningŕ. Sa manga áraw na itň áraw-gabě ay walŕ ng patěd ang dálaw
nang manga táo. Karamíhan ay manga kamagának at ibŕ y manga kaybígan,
kápit-báhay, o ibŕ ng kakilála sa báyan. Kung ang namatŕy ay isa ng
táo ng marámi ng kaybígan o kamaganákan sa iba ng báyan sila mŕn ay
dumŕdálaw rěn, at silŕ y dápat na bigyŕn nang těráhan at pagkáin nang
angkŕn nang namatŕy. Itň y ganitň sapagkŕt sa manga bayŕn-bayŕn sa
prověnsiya ay walŕ ng báhay-tůlúyan.

Sa pagpapakáin sa marámi ng dálaw na itň hindí bihíra ng nakaůúbus
silŕ nang kabyŕk na báka at ilŕ ng túpa, kambčng, at hindí mabílang
na manga manňk. Ang kosinéro karanyúwa y upahŕn, at ang malalápit
na kamagának nang namatŕy ay nagsěsitúlung na maglúto`. Dáhil díto
sa báhay nang namatayŕn ang lugŕr na kinŕbůburúlan nang patŕy ay
tahímik na tahímik at káhit na marámi ng táo ang nŕrňroňn, pabulňng
lámang kung silŕ y magsŕlitáan. Dátapuwat sa kainŕn at lutuŕn ang
íngay ay hindí karanyúan. Isa t isŕ y nagůútos sa manga alíla`, may
naghůhúgas nang pinggŕn o kayŕ y manga palayňk, may nagpŕpakintŕb
nang manga tinidňr at kutsílyo, may nagháhandŕ` sa lamésa, at iba
pŕ. Sa kusínŕ namŕn ang sagitsět nang kawále` ay wala ng lubŕy. Ang
pagtatadtŕd nang karnč ay wala ng patěd at ang tiněg nang kosinéro
at kanya ng alagŕd ay sya na lámang nŕrěriněg.

Dátapuwat sa isa ng silěd namŕn nang báhay ay doňn nŕrňroňn at
nŕlůlugmňk sa pagdadalamháte` ang manga angkŕn nang namatŕy. Sila y
nagsísiyŕk nang úbus-lakŕs at kung mínsa y nagdúduklŕy-duklŕy silŕ
nang kung ano-anň ang mangyŕyári sa kanila ng pamumúhay dahilŕn sa
pagpánaw nang namatŕy.

Kung mayáman ang namatŕy, itň y ipinadŕdápit sa párč` at iniháhatid
sa simbáhan. Pagdatěng doňn sa simbáhan binčbendisyunŕn nang párč` ang
patŕy at pagkatápos ay iniháhatid děn nya sa lěbíngan. Ang lahŕt nang
manga dálaw ay kasáma sa pagliliběng na itň at kadalasŕ y nŕsŕsakay
silŕ sa manga karumáta. Ang manga karumáta ng itň namŕn ay upahŕn,
líban na lámang sa ilŕ ng árě nang manga dálaw.

Pagkálibing nang patŕy ang manga dálaw na taga iba ng báyan ay doon
děn ang wč` sa báhay nang namatŕy. Kadalasŕn silŕ y nagsěsialěs agŕd,
dátapuwat kung magkŕbihíra` ay silŕ y nagtítira na tatlu ng áraw úpang
makŕsále sa pagtatatlo-ng-gabč. Ang tatlů ng gabč ay idinŕdáos sa
báhay nang namatŕy. Díto ay dumŕdálaw ang manga kamaganákan at silŕ y
nagsísipagdasŕl. Sa pagdadasŕl na itň ay ang manga matatandá lámang
ang kasáli, at ang manga binátŕ at dalága ay nagsěsipagbugtúngan
namŕn. Ang ganitň ng pangingílin ay ginágawa sa loňb nang tatlu ng
gabč. Sa katapusŕ ng gabč karanyúa y lubhŕ ng marámi ang táo, at ang
handŕ` ay malakě káy sa dalawŕ ng gabě ng nagdaŕn. Marámi rěn namŕn
sa manga nagsísidalň ang nagbíbigay nang limůs sa namatayŕn. Karanyúwa
y manga pangpakáin sa manga dálaw.

Sa manga angkŕ ng mahihírap ang manga pangingíli ng ito ay ginágawá
rěn, dátapuwat ang pagdápit at paghahatěd lámang nang pári sa patŕy
ay walŕ`. Sa pagbebendisyňn nang patŕy ang isa ng táo y makabŕbáyad
sa páre` nang gustuhěn nyŕ. Ang pinakamúra ay ang pagbebendisyňn
sa patŕy sa pintúan lámang nang simbáhan at sa sahěg nŕlŕlapŕg. Ang
sumúsunňd ay ang pagbebendisyňn nang patŕy sa pintúan děn, dátapuwat
nŕpŕpátung lámang ang ataňl sa isa ng altŕr. Ang manga mahahalagŕ ng
pagbebendisyňn ay ginágawŕ` sa tabě nang altŕr. Mulá sa isa ng daŕ
ng píso hanggŕng sa lima ng daŕn ang manga halagŕ nitň.





34. ANG TAKBÚHAN SA AMERIKÁNO.

Ang manga táo sa San-Migčl ay nagěng pára ng manga káwal nang háyop
na uměílag sa manga pamálo` nang manga pastňl at panghahábol nang
manga áso ng mababagsěk. Silŕ y lubhŕ ng maibigěn sa katahimíkan
at kapayapaŕn. Gayon děn sila y lubhŕ ng pŕniwalaěn sa sabi-sabě,
at itň ng manga bágay na yitň ay sya ng hindí ikinŕpátag nang marámi
sa kanilŕ sa báyan sa panahňn nang manga paghihěmagsíkan lában sa
Kastíla` at sa Amerikáno. Totoň rěn namŕn na marámi sa kanilŕ ay
nangagsipagtakbň dahilŕn lámang sa katakútan o kadwágan.

Nang mangyári ang paghihěmagsíkan lában sa Kastíla` nang taň ng isa
ng líbo walu ng daŕn at siyŕm na pu t ánim, akň y ŕápat na taňn pa
lámang sa gúlang. Áyon sa sinábi sa ákin nang áki ng nánay, kamě ay
nagsipuntŕ sa Mayníla` sa lugŕr nang umáhon sa bundňk. Walá ako ng
marámi ng natŕtandaŕn nang manga nangyári sa panahň ng yaňn, kung
hindí ang bágay nang ámi ng pagpuntŕ sa estasyňn nang trčn. Pagdatěng
sa Mayníla` ay hindí kami nakapások sa loňb nang báyan kung hindě`
may pahintúlot nang isa ng pinúno` sa báya ng iyňn.

Ang sumúsunod na bágay na nátalŕ` sa áki ng pangalaála ay ang
pagkátira námin sa Bigaŕ, sa báhay nang isa ng mŕnananggňl na ang
pangála y si Don-Nasáryo. Ang dahilŕn nang ikinalípat námin sa báya
ng itň ay ang pagílag sa paglalabanŕn nang manga Katipúnan at manga
Kastíla` sa Mayníla`. Sa Bigaŕ ay manga sundálo ng Tagálog sa kanila
ng pagsasánay sa pakikipaglában.

Hindí nalaúnan at kamě ay nápasa báyan nang Bůstos. Ang báya ng itň
ay nasŕsákup děn sa manga panahň ng iyňn nang manga Katipunéros. Ang
báya ng iyňn ay lubhŕ ng magandŕ dahilŕn sa sarě-sáre ng hitsúra
nang manga bágay-bágay na nŕkěkíta. Ang ílug ay lubha ng maláwak,
ang pasígan ay malápad, may manga buntňn nang batň at buhángin sa
pasígan. Ang ámi ng manga kaybíga ng tinulúyan ay mababaět na táo. Akň
at ang áki ng kapatěd na babáye ay kanila ng paráti ng ipinalílibŕng,
at ang paglilibŕng na itň ay ang pagpapasísid nang páto sa malínaw
na túbig sa ílog.

Kung anň ang nangyári sa manga paglalabanŕn nang manga panaho ng iyňn
ay hindí ku nŕalamŕn, dahilŕn sa kaliitŕn at kawalŕn pa nang málay.

Nang dumatěng ang takbúhan sa Amerikáno, akň y may gúlang na
nang kauntě`, at marámi aků ng natŕtandaŕn sa ámi ng pagtakbň sa
bundňk. Nang ang manga Amerikáno ay nagsěsipanálo na lában sa manga
sundálo ni Aginŕldo ang manga táo sa báya-ng-San-Migčl ay pinagsisiglŕn
nang tákot. Lumagánap sa báyan ang balíta` na ang manga Amerikáno ay
manga táo ng salbáhe, malulupět, at mababagsěk at wala ng pětágan
sa káhit anu pa mŕn. Itň y sigúru ng isa ng balíta ng pakálat nang
manga Kastíla` at lálů na nang manga kúra sa Filipínas.

Dáhil sa pagkatákot nang manga táo sa manga Amerikáno hálus kami ng
lahŕt na namŕmáyan ay nagsipagbalůt at nagsiáhun sa bundňk. Kamě ay
nŕtětirŕ noňn sa báhay nang isa ng áli nang áki ng nánay, at doňn
ay kasúno rěn námin ang angkŕn nang kúya nang áki ng nánay. Áki ng
natŕtandaŕn na máy-roň ng mahigět na sŕ m pu ng áraw ang pagbabastáan
at ang paghahŕkútan nang manga kasangkápan námi ng magkakasúno`. Ang
manga karitňn na máy lúla ng kasangkápan ay gabě kung ipalákad, úpang
ang manga kalabŕw na huměhíla ay huwŕg magsisáyad sa kainítan nang
áraw. Ang manga karitňn ay půnúan hanggŕng sa ituktňk nang kárang nitň
at ang manga kalabŕw ay lubhŕ ng nahirápan sa paghíla nang mabibigŕt
na lúlan. Nang walá na ng nŕtětirŕ sa manga abúbot ay kamě namŕ ng
manga táo ang nagsilúlan sa karitňn úpang ihatěd sa bundňk.

Ang lugŕr na ámi ng pinarunŕn ay tinŕtáwag na Paŕ-ng-Bundňk,
kalaháti-ng-áraw na lakárin mulá sa Sibňl. Doňn ang dinatnŕn
námi ng titirhŕn ay isa ng kúbo lámang na may atěp na kúgon at
lubhŕ ng maliět. Ang sahěg ay manga sangŕ nang káhoy na pinutúlan
nang manga maliliět na sangŕ, dátapuwat hindí makikínis ní hindí
pantay-pantŕy. Gayon děn lubhŕ ng maliět at pinŕpások nang hángin at
laměg. Ganoňn ang ámi ng tinirhŕn na may ila ng bwŕn, sa lugŕr nang
báhay na tablŕ nang áli nang áki ng nánay.

Doňn sa Paŕ-ng-Bundňk ay nakátagpu kamě nang marŕmi ng kababáyan na
nagsiílag děn, at ang manga náhuli ng nagsidatěng ay nagbalíta ng ang
lahŕt nang táo sa báyan ay nangása bundok nŕ o kayŕ y nangása ibŕ
ng báyan nŕ. Ang báya-ng-San-Migčl ay nawalŕ`, dátapuwat ang manga
báhay ay sya lámang nŕrňroňn.

Pagkaraŕn nang ila ng bwŕ ng pagtitirŕ námin sa Paŕ-ng-Bundňk ay
lumípat kamě sa isa ng lugŕr na líhim. Ang lugŕr na iyňn ay isŕ
ng kaingěn sa kagubátan. Walŕ ng nakŕŕalam ní sínu man sa ámin ang
pangálan nang lugŕr, at ang ibŕ ng nakŕŕalŕm ay inilíhim na lubhŕ`,
úpang hwag mŕpagalamŕn nang iba ng táo ang ámi ng kinŕtŕtagúan. Iyňn ay
paraŕn nang pangingílag hindí sa kaáway lámang, dátapuwat sa tulisŕn at
magnanákaw děn. Ang báhay na tinirhŕn námin doňn ay lubhŕ ng malakě,
mahába ng mahába` sa ilálim nang isŕ ng bubungŕn. Ang kabahayŕn ay
hináti nang magkakasinglakě ng kwŕrto. Máy-roo ng walň ang bílang
nitň. Sa báwat kwŕrto ay isŕ ng angkŕn ang nátirŕ. Díto ay máy-roon
dě ng ila ng bwŕn ang ámi ng ikinŕpagtirŕ.

Nang mŕlŕlapit nŕ sa báya-ng-San-Migčl ang manga Amerikáno, nŕbalitáan
námin na ang manga táo ng itň y hindí gáya nang manga sabě-sabč, kanyŕ`
umuntí nang umuntě` ang ámi ng tákot sa kanilŕ. Dáhil díto y umalěs
kamě sa ámi ng malálim na taguŕn, at naparoňn kamě sa Páho`. Itň y isŕ
ng lugŕr sa bundok děn, dátapuwat malápit nang kauntě` sa báyan. Díto
y lubhŕ ng marámi kamě ng dinatnŕn nang manga kababáyan at tagŕ iba
t ibŕ ng lugŕr. Karamíhan sa kanilŕ ay máy manga sakět, dahilŕn sa
pagtitirŕ sa bundňk. Díto nagkaroňn nang malakě ng kagamitŕn ang manga
gamňt na ipinaáhon ni Nánay sa bundňk, at hindí iníwan sa báyan. Ang
manga gamňt na itň y árě ni Tátay at kanya ng iníwan sa pagkapatápun
sa kanyŕ nang manga kúra sa Holň. Isa ng umága máy-roo ng tumáwag sa
ámi ng báhay úpang bumilě nang gamňt. Hinánap ni Nánay ang kahň ng
kinŕlŕlagyŕn nang gamňt. Nang itň y mabuksan nŕ ay nŕkíta námin ang
isŕ ng áhas na nakaíkid at natůtúlog sa ibábaw nang ipŕ na nŕtŕtábon
sa manga bóte. Malaki ng twŕ` nang ibŕ ng táo ng nakŕkíta, dátapuwat
si Nánay ay natákot lámang. Hindí nya nŕlŕláman ang kahulugŕn nang
áhas na iyňn. Pagkaraŕn nang kŕtwáan ay itinanůng ni Nánay kung
anň ang dáhil at silŕ y nagkŕkŕtwáan. Isinagňt nilŕ kay Nánay na
ang kahulugŕn nang áhas na iyňn ay ang pagpatúngo sa pagyáman nang
may árě nang gamňt. Si Nánay ay nŕpatawŕ lámang sa kanilŕ ng sábi,
at hindí sya naněniwálŕ sa manga bágay na iyňn.

Nang makaraŕn ang ilŕ ng bwŕn ay iníwan námin ang Páho` at umwí kamě sa
báyan. Nang kamě ay dumatěng na doňn, marámi sa ila ng kasangkápan na
naíwan námin ay pinagnakŕw nang ila ng táo ng nangaíwan sa báyan. Ang
tablŕ na sahěg nang báhay nang áli ni Nánay ay walá na, at hindí nila
nŕláman kung síno ang kumúha.

Hindí nalaúnan ang ámi ng pagdatěng sa báyan at nŕbalíta ng ang
manga sundálo ng Amerikáno ay malápit na sa báya-ng-San-Migčl. Kamě
ay hindí nabagábag sa balíta ng itň, at hinintŕy námin ang kanila
ng pagdatěng. Isŕ ng katanghalían ay matahímik ang báyan. Ang manga
sundálu ng nangása báyan ay nangagsialěs at ang ibŕ ng hindí umalěs
ay ipinagtapňn ang kanila ng manga barěl. Ang dahilŕn nang bágay na
iyňn ay ang pagpások nang manga sundálo ng Amerikáno. Sa dulúhan nang
bakúran nang báhay na ámi ng kinŕtirhŕn ay nŕkíta ko ang paglápit nang
manga sundálo. Ang salawŕl nilŕ ay káki at ang kamiséta asůl. Bitbět
nilŕ ang manga barěl at nakahiléra sila nang pagtakbň sa bukirěn at
patúngo silŕ sa daŕn.

Nang ang manga Amerikáno y sya nŕ ng namŕmahála` sa báyan, may ila ng
bwŕ ng ang manga útos ay mahihigpět. Ang manga ílaw ay ipinapápatay
sa alasčs nang gabě, at wala ng táo ng pinahěhintulúta ng maglakŕd
pagkaraŕn nang óras na itň. Sa manga bundňk na malápit sa San-Migčl
ay marámi ng manga sundálo ng Tagálog at madalŕs nila ng sinalakáyan
ang báya-ng-San-Migčl. Dáhil sa manga pagsalákay na itň, ang manga
báhay sa San-Migčl ay pinagsunňg nang manga Amerikáno. Kung gabi-gabě
ang pagsalákay nang manga sundálo, gabi-gabě rěn namŕn ang ginawŕ
ng panunúnog nang manga báhay. Ang ámi ng manga kápit-báhay ay
nagsěsilípat sa ámin gabi-gabě úpang doňn makitúlog, sapagkŕt sa ámi
ng báhay ay hindí lubhŕ ng malakě ang pangánib sa manga bála nang
nagsěsipaglabanŕn. Ang manggagamňt nang manga sundálo ng Amerikáno
na násŕsa báya-ng-San-Migčl ay nagěng kaybígan nang áki ng tátay,
at dáhil díto y náligtas sa súnog ang ámi ng těráhan. Mínsan ay
sinábi nang manggagámot na itň kay Tátay na madalŕs sya ng sumáma
sa manga patrúlya at sinŕsábi nya ríto na hwag sunúgin ang ámi ng
báhay. Sa kalaúnan, nang hindí mapaalěs nang manga sundálo ng Tagálog
ang manga Amerikáno sa báyan, ay hinintuŕn na nilŕ ang pananalákay,
at ang báya y tumahímik nŕ.









TRANSLATION


1. THE FOOLISH MONKEY AND THE CLEVER TURTLE.

Once upon a time, when the turtle was swimming in the river, he
saw a banana-tree adrift and being carried along by the current. He
dragged it to the beach, but was not able to carry it up to the solid
ground. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey, and offered him
a half of the banana-tree, if he would plant his part for him. The
monkey agreed, and they divided the banana-tree at the middle,
half-way from either end. The monkey took the half which had leaves,
because he thought it would grow better than the half which had none.

When a few days had passed, the monkey's tree died, while that of the
turtle grew until it bore fruit. The bananas grew ripe, but the turtle
could not climb for them. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey,
and offered him some of the fruits of the banana, if he would climb
the tree. The monkey climbed up and ate for all he was worth.

Said the turtle: "Throw me some."

But the monkey answered: "Though sweet the skins, I'd throw you none."

The turtle got angry and scattered spines round the foot of the
tree. When the monkey jumped down, he landed on the spines. He
suspected the turtle and looked for him, in order to punish him. He
found the turtle behind a stump.

Said he to the turtle: "I am going to punish you. Choose between the
two: shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in the river?"

The clever turtle began to shout and begged the monkey, if it were
possible, to bray him in a mortar.

But the monkey answered: "I shall give you the punishment you don't
want."

And he threw the turtle into the river.

When the turtle arrived in the water, he set up a shout and said to
the monkey: "Thank you, friend! This is my home."



Note. p. 16, l. 2 ang pagňng hábang nalělígo` is unusual and no
doubt traditional for hábang ang pagňng ay nalělígo`. Similarly,
p. 16, l. 18 Balat mŕn at malinamnŕm ... is traditional (proverbial)
for modern Káhit na malinamnŕm ang manga balŕt.





2. THE RACE OF THE DEER AND THE SNAIL.

A deer, grazing in the jungle, came upon a snail that was creeping
over the leaf of a bamboo-plant. The deer ceased from his grazing
and watched the slow creeping of the snail.

When a few moments had passed, he said to the snail: "How slowly you
walk! Why don't you learn to walk faster? Look at me,--I am often
pursued by dogs, but my swift running is what saves my life. But
look at you,--if you should be pursued by any foe, what will ever
save your life? Surely you will get killed."

When the snail had heard these words, he looked at the deer and scanned
his fine physique, his long legs, and his strong muscles. He wished
that he too might be like the deer, so that he could run fast. However,
he thought that if he forced himself to run, he should not remain
far behind the deer.

Accordingly he answered the deer: "You are overweening. You do not
suspect what can be done by one who has a strong will. I challenge
you to race with me from here to the river that lies west of here."

The deer laughed loudly and answered the snail: "How can you think
you will defeat me? I suppose you are going to cheat."

The snail answered that he was not going to cheat, and, so that
there might be someone to watch them and be judge over their race,
he suggested that they call one of their friends to be judge.

The deer agreed, and they called an owl to be judge.

When they began to run, the snail was soon left far behind. On his
course the deer came upon a flourishing grass-field. He stopped to
graze, since his start over the snail was so great. He planned that
when he saw the snail coming, he would start running again. However,
when he had done feeding, he was attacked by laziness. He went to
sleep, with the thought that he would wake up before the snail arrived.

However, while he was asleep, the snail passed by. When he awoke,
it was already late in the afternoon. He ran with all his might to
the river, and there he was met by the snail and their judge, the owl.

"You are defeated," said their judge at once.





3. A GOOD FRIDAY.

Juan and his friend Pedro were canoeing on the river toward the town
Baliwag. In their canoe they had an image of Christ which they were
conveying to a priest to be used in the celebration of a Good Friday
Mass. Juan was filled with terror.

Said he to Pedro: "This man of ours in the canoe is all chopped up
with wounds and no longer breathing. I think this man is a corpse. I
am afraid we shall be suspected by the priest to whom we are delivering
him."

Pedro answered: "We shall tell him that when this man was loaded into
our canoe, he was already in this condition. We have many witnesses,
so don't be afraid."

When they reached the priest they gave him the image. The priest
told them to come to church the next day in the afternoon to hear
the sermon.

Juan was again filled with terror, for he could not make out why the
priest wanted them to go to the church. He had often heard of men being
summoned to the church and there seized by the gendarmes. However, he
did not say anything to Pedro, for he saw that the latter had no fear.

On the next day in the afternoon they went to church, and there they
saw a Christ nailed to the cross.

Said Juan: "That man, if you remember, is the one we delivered to
the priest. We had better go to some place out of sight of the priest."

So the two of them went under the pulpit, to hear the sermon from
there. The Good Friday Mass began, and the priest was already getting
to the last part of his sermon.

In his sermon the priest said: "Repent ye of your sins, cruel
people! Behold the wounds which you struck in the body of our Savior!"

When Juan heard this, he was again filled with terror, for he thought
that he had fallen under suspicion.

Therefore, what he did was to come out from under the pulpit, face
the priest, and say: "Father, we are not the ones who wounded this
man! When he was loaded into our canoe he was already wounded."

When he had said this, he went back under the pulpit. The priest paid
no attention to the speech he had heard, and went on with his sermon.

"The day has come now, when ye sinners must repent. The portals
of Heaven are open now through the death of our Savior, and every
sinner can enter Heaven, if he repent. But if ye do not repent, ye
shall come to be punished with sufferings without end in the flames of
Hell for the sufferings which ye caused our Savior to undergo. Behold
His body sweating blood, His hands and feet nailed to the cross, and
His wounds from head to feet. No one other caused Him to suffer and
wounded His dear body, than you, ye sinners, and if ye do not repent,
ye shall fall into Hell."

Juan could not remain in his place, for he thought that the priest
was overflowing with anger against him.

So he again faced the priest and said, as loudly as he could: "Father,
only a moment ago I told you that I had no part in wounding this man,
so do not send me, sir, to Hell."

The priest was filled with great anger and said to the congregation:
"What sort of people are you, foolish folk? Is there not one among
you who can take hold of this fellow and choke him?"

When Juan heard this, he ran with all his might, trampling without
regard the people who were kneeling and weeping in repentance of
their sins. He was followed by Pedro, and the two ran together,
without stopping, until they reached their home town. And there they
told the story of their narrow escape.





4. THE HUNCHBACK AND THE BLINDMAN.

A hunchback and a blindman were close friends. When they walked, the
hunchback led the blindman; the blindman, on the other hand, carried
the hunchback on his shoulders, when they had a hard road to travel,
for the hunchback was weak of body.

Once they came upon a cocoanut-tree. They wanted to pick some of the
fruits, but they did not know which of the two of them should be the
one to climb the tree. The blindman said that he should not be able
to climb, because he should not be able to see which fruits to pick,
since there were many unripe fruits. The hunchback also did not want
to climb, on account of his weakness. However, he was very eager to
eat of the cocoanuts, so, finally, he said to the blindman that he
would do the climbing.

"To prevent your being robbed of the fruits which I shall throw down,
do you count out loud the thud on the ground of the fruits as I drop
them, so that I may keep track of the number."

The hunchback began to climb, but when he was half-way up, he fell
down.

"One!" said the blindman.

The hunchback told him that it was he who had made the thud and not
a cocoanut.

He climbed again. After a few moments he took another fall.

"Two!" shouted the blindman.

The hunchback got angry and told the blindman that he was stubborn.

He said: "That first thing that made a thud was I, and the second
one was I again; I haven't yet picked any cocoanuts."

But the blindman planned to make fun of the hunchback's falls. So he
decided that, when he again heard a thud, he would cry "Three!"

The hunchback climbed again, but again fell. The blindman cried
"Three!" and laughed.

The hunchback grew hot with anger. He went up to the blindman and
slapped him in the face. The slap hit the blindman's eyes, and through
it his eyes came open. To take revenge he kicked the hunchback. He
struck him on the back, and through this his hump was straightened out.

They both rejoiced at what had happened, and their friendship grew
all the closer, instead of their becoming enemies.





5. THE KING WHO HAD HORNS AND JUAN.

On a group of islands there ruled a man who had two short horns hidden
in his thick hair. This was not known to his subjects, but the secret
began to spread among the people by way of the barbers who had cut
his hair.

On account of this he conceived a great anger against barbers and
planned to exterminate the barbers in his kingdom. He ordered four
deep wells dug in front of his residence, and in the center between
the four pits he had a seat placed. One day he sat down on the chair
between the four pits, and asked everyone who passed whether he knew
how to cut hair. Whenever anyone said "Yes," he stopped him, gave
him a pair of shears, and had him cut his hair. After a little while
he asked each hair-cutter what he saw on his, the king's, head. The
hair-cutters all told the truth, and each one of them answered that
he saw horns. Every one who answered thus was pushed by the king into
one of the pits that were round him.

A few days passed and two of the pits were already filled with barbers
and were ordered by the king to be filled up with earth. The passers-by
who knew how to cut hair grew scarce, and the king thought he had
already killed all the barbers in his kingdom.

One day he waited on his seat until mid-day, before a man came by
who said he knew how to cut hair.

The king asked him: "What is your name?"

The man answered: "My name, sir, is Juan."

"Cut my hair, Juan," commanded the king.

Juan approached the king and began to cut his hair.

After a short time the king asked: "What do you see on my head, Juan?"

His reply was thus: "Your Majesty, I see on your head the crown."

This made the king glad. Therefore he got up from his seat and led
Juan into his palace and made Juan barber royal. He gave Juan large
wages and had the remaining pits filled up.





6. THREE STUDENTS.

Juan, Pedro, and Andrés were three students from the same town who were
friends. When the opening of the schools came, they knew that they
would part: each one of them was to go to a different town. Before
they parted, they appointed a place where they would meet at the
beginning of the vacation.

A year passed, the closing of the schools arrived, the students
returned to their home towns, and the three friends, Pedro, Juan,
and Andrés met in the town where Pedro had been brought up, to spend
the vacation there.

When they came together, after discussing various matters, they
inquired how much each of them had learned in his study of the Spanish
language. Pedro said that he knew a great many Spanish words, but
that which he remembered best was the word "Vamos."

Juan in turn answered: "I too know a great deal, but what I recall
just now is the word 'Matar.'"

Andrés said that he had learned nothing except the word "Si."

After their conversation Pedro suggested that they go boating on the
river and take a bath.

When they were boating on the river, they saw on the bank a Spaniard
who wanted to bathe. Pedro said it would be a good idea to speak to
the Spaniard, so that each one of them might show his knowledge.

Pedro began and said "Vamos!"

Juan answered "Matar!"

And last came Andrés with his "Si!"

When the Spaniard heard this, he was filled with terror, for he thought
that the three canoers were going to kill him. Therefore, even though
he did not know how to swim, he jumped into the river and was drowned.





7. A SOLDIER WHO KNEW LATIN.

Three friends, a priest, a physician, and a soldier, went together to
shoot wild game in a deep jungle. As the jungle was far from the town,
they carried plenty of provisions, so as not to be in want of food. A
few days passed without their bagging anything. Their provisions grew
less and less, until there was nothing left except one raw egg. There
came to them the day of great hunger, but the three had no food except
the egg that was left.

The priest said that, if they divided the one egg, it would do them
no good, for it would not slacken their hunger. Therefore the priest
suggested that only one of them should eat the remaining egg, and
in his selfishness he suggested that whichever of them was best at
speaking Latin should eat the egg all by himself. He thought that the
soldier did not know Latin, and the doctor alone would be his opponent,
and his knowledge he held in contempt.

The doctor agreed to the advice of the priest, but the soldier did
not want to consent, for he had not studied like the priest and the
doctor, but there was nothing for him to do.

The priest took the egg and tapped it against a stone. When the egg
was broken, he said: "Coronatum est," and looked at his two companions.

The doctor took the broken egg, removed the broken part of the shell,
put on some salt, and said: "Saltum est."

The physician handed the egg to the soldier, and the priest and he
waited for what the soldier would say.

The latter did not know what to say, for he really did not know a
single iota of Latin. In his cogitation he remembered that once,
when he went to church to hear the Good Friday Mass, he heard from
the priest that the meaning of the words "Consummatum est" was "It
is all over now." So he poured the egg into his mouth and, when he
had swallowed it, he said: "Consummatum est."

His two companions were greatly astonished at the learning of the
soldier, which they had by no means suspected.





8. THE SEVEN DWARVES.

A certain married couple had seven children who were dwarves. The
father was out of work and could not find any. The mother also was
not earning any money, for her body was weak and often sick.

One noon they were sitting on a bench and discussing the life they
were leading. The man asked what they had better do with their many
children. The woman suggested that they should look for work for their
children, so that they might earn money. But the man answered that,
in his opinion, they would not be able to find any work, since he
himself had not been able to find any. Therefore he suggested that
they had better abandon their children.

This made the woman grieve and weep. She would not consent to abandon
the children. But her husband made it clear to her that, if they did
not do this, they would all die of hunger. Finally the woman consented
and they agreed that they would take their children for a walk and
leave them on the way.

While they were discussing this, the seventh child was in a crack
of the bench on which they were sitting and heard what their parents
were going to do to them. After they had finished talking, the child
at once looked for his brothers and sisters and told them what he
had heard. They all wept, because their parents had not told them
that they were a burden to their life. They thought that, if they had
known this, they would have done anything whatever to help them gain
a living. However, they agreed that they would go along, if they were
asked to go walking, and would allow themselves to be led astray.

On the next day their father came to them, told them to get dressed,
gave them some cakes, and told them that they should all go for a
walk. When they started out, the seventh child did not eat his bread,
but, starting at their gate, he crumbled it and scattered it along
the road which they were walking. When they had gone some distance,
he ran out of bread and asked his brothers and sisters for some. But
they did not give him any. He did not tell them why he had run out
of bread so soon. When he could get no bread, he picked up stones
and these he dropped one by one on their path.

When they came to a jungle, their parents left them, telling them
to wait for them there and that they would soon come back. Their
parents left them, but they knew that their parents would not come
back to them.

When a short time had passed, they heard a noise. They went toward the
place from which the noise came. There they saw a great giant bathing
by the side of a well. They looked round about the place, and by the
side of a tree they saw the clothes of the giant. The seventh child
sent his brothers and sisters away and told them to hide, and he would
steal the giant's shoes. They did this and the child stole the shoes.

When the giant had finished bathing and was getting dressed, he
could not find his shoes. He got angry and cursed. He called for
help. When the one who had stolen the shoes heard this, he quickly
approached. When the giant saw him, he did not suspect him, for,
on account of his smallness, the giant thought that he would not be
able to carry the shoes.

Therefore the giant said to him: "If you will carry this bag of money
of mine to my wife and tell her to buy some shoes and to bring them
to me, I shall pay you much money."

He said further that he could not walk without shoes, and therefore
he should hurry. Taking the bag of money, the child promised to
return at once. However, when he had gone some distance, he called
his hidden brothers and sisters, and when they were assembled, he
suggested that they go home. But his brothers and sisters answered
that they did not know the way home. He however answered that they
should follow the stones and bread he had dropped on the way.

One of his brothers said that, if he had known what he had done with
the bread, he would have given him some when he asked for it. They
were sorry for the stinginess they had shown toward their brother.

It was not long before they came upon the trail of stones along their
way. This they followed and arrived at their house, bringing with
them the bag of money, which they at once gave to their parents. The
latter rejoiced and were sorry for their bad conduct toward their
children,--they rejoiced because they had now the means of living
for a long time to come.





9. A POLICEMAN WHO PLAYED VAMPIRE.

In the summer of the year 1902, when the ripe fruits of the fruit-trees
were hanging from the branches, there circulated all through the town
of San Antonio the rumor that a vampire was going about the town.

The people of San Antonio in those years believed in ghosts, vampires,
dwarves, and other objects of terror. Most of them had not been
fortunate enough to get an education, but, in spite of this, they
were kindly, quiet, and industrious people.

The houses in this town were built of nipa-fibre and bamboo. There
were also some frame houses. Most of them stood in large enclosures,
and the rear part of these yards was planted with trees that have
tasty fruits, such as the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol, mabolo,
mango, and the like.

These fruits were just getting ripe, when the rumor spread that,
for several nights back, some women had caught sight of the vampire
in various back yards. The women and children were filled with great
terror; accordingly, as soon as darkness came down, they staid still in
their houses. Most of the men also were afraid, but there were some who
said that they were not afraid, because they had not yet come across a
vampire and therefore did not know whether it was really to be feared.

A vampire is a being of great power. It changes its body into
various forms. At some times it has a body like a human being,
but black, at others it is a large dog or pig. It eats people,
especially children. But its favorite food, by far, and that which
it most commonly eats, is the child yet unborn and still in its
mother's womb. Therefore the pregnant women in the town had great
fear. They did not allow their husbands to sleep, for watching at
their side. A vampire is hard to kill with knife or gun, because it
has but one place which one must hit or wound in order to kill it,
and this place is secret. The only thing it flees from is garlic,
which therefore is much used in driving off vampires.

A surprising thing, however, about this vampire was its habit of
keeping itself in back yards. Strange was also the fact that it was
mostly young girls who said that they had caught sight of this vampire
in back yards, up in grape-fruit trees and other trees. A few bold men
said that they suspected that this spook was a thief and no vampire.

It was a certain policeman of more than usual courage who spied upon
this vampire in a back yard in which it had recently been seen. When
darkness came, he went to his hiding-place. It was not long before
the vampire came and climbed on a grape-fruit tree, and he heard it
picking many fruits. It came down and went away, but was followed by
the policeman to a house which it entered.

Great was the surprise of the policeman, when he saw here his fellow
policeman wrapped up in a black sheet and just putting down on the
floor a black bag full of grape-fruit.

He summoned his fellow policeman to the town hall and there on the
next day accused him before the judge. The policeman who had played
vampire was put in jail for the crime of theft.





10. A VAMPIRE THAT GOT KILLED.

One evening in a students' boarding-house in the town of Malolos I
heard an old man, ninety years of age, tell a company the following
story:

When he was still a young unmarried man, he lived in the country. There
were only a very few neighbors. One day there was a death in the
house of a neighbor. Following an ancient custom, he went to the
house of mourning.

When he arrived there it was not long before he was told that there
was a vampire in the place. He had a great and inherited hatred of
vampires and therefore decided to watch that night.

Late in the evening he left the house and in a wagon not far from
the house, there he lay down. There was a full moon that night, so
that he had a clear view of things round about. As he saw nothing
that could be suspected of being a vampire, he went to sleep.

At midnight he woke up, and the first thing that struck his eyes
was a black object on the roof of the house where there had been a
death. This black thing had not been there before he went to sleep, so
he suspected that this was the vampire he had been told about. Vampires
eat dead people, so he concluded that the dead person was the thing
for which the vampire had come there.

Carrying a bolo-knife, he went up to the house. The people were
asleep. Up above he saw something hanging down from the roof of
the house. It was like the intestine of a chicken. It got longer
and longer, until the end of it went into the mouth of the dead
person. The corpse stood up from the place where it lay, when this
thing went into its mouth.

What the young man did was to walk up to the upright corpse and, with
the bolo he was carrying, cut the thing that was like the intestine
of a chicken. When he had cut this, something came down with a thud at
the side of the house. He went down, and there he saw the dead vampire.





11. SORCERERS.

In some places in the Philippines the people have a firm belief in
sorcerers. According to their belief a sorcerer is a person of great
power, and this power comes from a demon or else is inherited from
one's parents. Before one may gain this power one must first become
friends with a demon and serve it. However, there are some also who
believe that one may find or snatch up this power in a jungle or some
uncanny place that is hard to reach and usually full of terror.

The kulam is that seized, inherited, or given by the demon, and it is
the source of the possessor's power. The appearance of the kulam is
not always the same. Sometimes it is a stone or a small doll of ugly
appearance. In the dark this kulam glows like a firefly, but this
glow disappears when the kulam desires it. The kulam and the person,
man or woman, who possesses it, do not separate even for a moment,
and even when bathing the sorcerer carries his kulam. Therefore,
curious people, when they wish to find out whether a person whom they
suspect is really a sorcerer or not, watch him at his bath. If the
sorcerer is not careful and has no suspicion that he is being watched,
the watcher sometimes succeeds in seeing the kulam.

The sorcerer has also the power of concealing the kulam inside his
body, and the people are not rare who have seen a sorcerer at his
death. At the last moment, before breathing ceases, he spits out
the kulam.

This happens only when the sorcerer does not wish to bequeath his
kulam. If, however, he wishes to bequeath it, then, long before the
sorcerer dies, he calls the person to whom he wishes to bequeath it
and in all secrecy gives him the kulam.

The great power of the sorcerer is used by him against his enemies,
against people who have incurred his anger; or against their live
stock, in case he wishes to make this latter the object of his
vengeance. He also uses his power in playing jokes on a person or
animal that has gained his liking.

His victim usually acts like crazy. Sometimes the person he has
bewitched complains that his whole body is sore, keeps shouting, and
cannot keep quiet even for a moment. In the case of animals,--usually
the pig most valued by the owner,--the punishment he gives is like
the disease of cholera, but more severe than this. The bowel-movement
of the animal does not stop, and after a few hours, no matter how
fat the animal, it becomes skin and bone. The bewitched person eats
mightily, like two men, and keeps asking for tasty food. Therefore
people believe that the sorcerer who is punishing him shares in the
eating of the sick person.

The sorcerer has the power of entering the body of the person
bewitched. This is the belief, but in what way the sorcerer effects
his entrance or at what point he enters the body of the person he
is bewitching, there is no one who knows. However the place where he
comes out is the forefinger. This fact is of great importance for the
cure of people who have been bewitched and also for the punishment
of sorcerers.

Although the power of the sorcerer is great, yet there are some
things which he fears, usually strong people who are bold and have no
faith in the powers of sorcerers and other things that terrify other
people. Therefore it is not rare that, after the first or second time
he cures a person of this disease, some man receives the title of
"witch-doctor."

I once heard someone who had seen the cure of a bewitched person tell
the story. The narrator had a neighbor who had a young daughter. This
young lady had many suitors, and one of them was suspected of being
a sorcerer. He had the bad fortune to be one of those who were not
accepted. In his great anger he bewitched, one after the other,
the betrothed man and woman.

He began with the woman, and her parents at once called in a
witch-doctor for her. When the doctor arrived and saw the patient,
he said that the woman was really bewitched.

He told the people who were there not to let the bewitched person know
that he was in the house. If the patient knew this, the sorcerer who
was inside her body would have a chance to go away at once. The doctor
went up to the woman without her being aware of it and suddenly seized
her two forefingers in a tight grip. She shouted all the louder and
trembled like one in terror.

The sorcerer, according to people's belief, feels any pain that is
given to the body of the person he is bewitching while he is within
the latter's body. Likewise, when one speaks with the patient, it is
he who answers.

Therefore the doctor suddenly asked: "What are you doing here,
you brute?"

The patient did not utter a word, but tried to get free. The strength
she displayed was not the usual strength of a woman.

But the doctor did not let her go, and asked her again: "What are
you doing here? Why have you come here? If you do not answer, I shall
torture you."

The woman answered in a pitiful tone: "No, sir, I shan't do it again;
let me go, sir; you are torturing me already."

"Shall I let you go?" asked the doctor at once. "Promise me first
that you won't come back."

"No, I shan't come back, sir," answered the woman.

"If I catch you here again, I shall kill you. Don't be
troublesome. Stay still in your house."

"Yes, sir; yes, sir; I shan't come back, sir. Please, let me go!"

While this dialogue was taking place, the woman was struggling to get
loose and trying to make the doctor let go of her forefingers. When
the woman had made her promise, the doctor let go of her two
forefingers. The face of the woman, which just before had been
expressing great suffering, now became quiet, and she was like a
madwoman who has got back her reason. She became quiet, stopped
shouting, and was able to converse intelligently.

The man lived in a near-by town. When he was bewitched his brother
called a physician for him. In his extreme anger, this brother called
a physician who was fierce and cruel in his treatment of sorcerers.

The physician came secretly to the sick man's house. From his
hiding-place he first determined at what time the sorcerer was in the
body of the sick man. This showed itself in the shouting, movements,
and senseless talking of the patient. The physician sharpened a
bolo-knife and, when he had done this, quickly ran to the side of the
patient. He then seized the latter's two forefingers, leaned over his
body, and cut several deep gashes in his face. The patient screamed
and tried to get away, but when he did get away there were wounds in
his face and the blood was flowing in a stream. The physician left
him without a word. He sought out the brother of the wounded man and
told him not to heed his brother's wounds, for tomorrow they would
go away and be transferred to the sorcerer, for it was the latter
whom he had reached in the body of his brother. On the next day the
doctor went to the man whom he had cured with the knife and was much
pleased when he found him well and without the marks of wounds in his
face. A few days later they heard that a sorcerer in the neighboring
town was in a serious condition, owing to the unceasing flow of blood
from some wounds in his face.

There are also, however, some sorcerers who are quick and have not
been caught by physicians. The physician, too, must be skilful and
quick. Anyone at all can cure a person who has been bewitched, since
there is no other method of cure than that of inflicting pain on the
body of the bewitched person. The danger, however, is great, since,
if the one who is attempting the cure is not quick, owing to lack of
practice, the sorcerer will be able to get away. In this event it is
the bewitched person himself who will suffer from the punishment. It
is related that there once happened something like this which follows.

One of two brothers was bewitched by his rival in courtship. There
was no witch-doctor within call. In his great pity for him, the older
brother decided to cure him, even though he had had no practice. He
was not practised, to be sure, but he had often heard from physicians
the manner of cure. One evening, when he thought that the sorcerer was
inside his brother's body, he quickly seized a bolo, and, stepping up
to his brother, cut him without care. On the next day, instead of his
finding his brother well and unwounded, the latter was a corpse. The
sorcerer had got away.





12. THE GAME OF FOOTBALL IN THE PHILIPPINES.

The games of football in the United States and in the Philippines are
very different. Instead of the players belonging to two contending
sides, as in American football, in "sipa" the players form but one
party. In sipa the aim of the players is not to defeat an opponent,
but to prevent the ball or sipa from falling to the ground. The ball
used is also very different. It is made of split rattan woven into the
shape of a sphere. The inside is hollow and the eyes of the weave are
large. Therefore the sipa, unlike the ball used in baseball, is light.

The number of players is from two to twenty. When they are many,
they stand in a circle. To begin the game, one of the party throws
the sipa ball up into the air and toward one of the players, usually
toward one opposite him. The one to whom the ball is tossed returns it
to the one who threw it to him, not with his hand, but with his foot.

When the players are skilful, they direct the ball to each one
of the party, so that each one of them is alert and ready for the
coming of the ball. Each one is careful not to let the ball fall to
the ground. Often the players display various manners of sending
the ball. The graceful bendings of the legs forward and backward,
the quick and light leaps, the gentle and light kicking of the ball,
and the sending of the ball in every possible direction, are features
which give beauty to the game of sipa. Sometimes the shoulder, the
elbow, the knee, or the hand is used in returning the ball.

How is there any contest in this game? This can consist only in the
test of endurance in keeping the ball from falling to the ground.

When, for instance, one team of football-players or siperos wants
to contend with another team, the former challenges whatever team
it has picked out. If the challenge is accepted, the day, hour,
and place of the game are at once announced in the newspapers.

At the time of the game thousands of people look on. The challenging
party usually hires a band of musicians, and each team is played for
during its innings. Usually there are two bands, for, if the challenged
party has any pride, it wants to show it and so brings its own band.

After the game the judge announces to the spectators which team has
won. When the announcement of the judge has been heard, there begins at
once the yelling and the honoring of the victorious team. The winning
team and their friends and followers, accompanied by the music of their
band, at once begin to parade through the places near to the field
of the game. On the next day the whole story appears in the newspapers.

Such games of sipa as these are not common in the little towns in
the provinces, but only in the large cities, such as Manila.





13. THE PRIEST PATUPAT.

In the last years of the Spanish time there dwelt in the town of
San Miguel a certain man. This man was educated and was intelligent
enough to understand the evil ways of the priests, who were really
little kings in their towns.

In San Miguel the priest who had the parish was a violent and
hot-headed man. The people called him "Patupat."

One Sunday the man above mentioned went to church to hear the sermon
of the priest. As this priest thought that the people to whom he was
preaching were uneducated people, he took no pains to speak Tagalog
correctly. His speech had neither beginning nor end and was mixed up
like rice-pudding. Moreover, what he preached about was never other
than Hell, Purgatory, what brutes the people of the town were, and
the End of the World.

When the sermon began, our friend Francisco entered the church.

As usual, the priest began his sermon with this utterance: "Brezren
and faylow-Christiannes!" Although he had been for almost forty years
now in the Tagalog country, he had not yet learned to say correctly
"Brethren and fellow-Christians."

Francisco stood in a place near the pulpit and listened carefully
to the sermon, which on that day contained nothing except what had
already been a thousand times repeated by the priest, namely about
the sufferings in Hell and Purgatory, the offering of candles and the
giving of money to the church in order to escape from these sufferings.

Francisco was filled with great anger, for he saw that the priest
was fooling his people and had no other aim than to frighten the
townspeople so that they should enrich the church and priests.

After the sermon Kiko did not go home as usual, but waited until mass
was over. After mass he staid in the church until he was alone. He
took some pieces of paper and wrote to the priest as follows:

"Father, I heard your sermon this morning. It is apparent to me that
you believe that there is a Hell and that there is a Purgatory. I do
not believe in these things. Next Sunday, if you wish, you may prove to
the people in your sermon that there is a Hell and a Purgatory. When
you are done, I shall try to prove to them that there is no Hell and
no Purgatory. If the people believe you, I do not mind if you have
me hanged for my defeat and my unbelief, but, if I am the victor,
all I ask of you is to allow me to say to the people at large that
there is neither a Hell nor a Purgatory."

Several copies of this letter he pasted to the walls of the church,
and one he sent to the priest.

When Patupat read it, his blood boiled and his anger knew no bounds. He
had the gendarmes called, and on the evening of that very Sunday he
had all the houses in the town entered and searched, so as to catch
Kiko. But they did not catch Kiko. That same afternoon Kiko told
some of his intimate friends what he had done, and they were all
astonished. They asked him why he had done this thing and whether he
could not see what would happen to him.

One of them spoke thus: "Pack up some clothes and go away right now, if
you don't want to be caught by Patupat's soldiers and shot tomorrow."

Kiko refused to follow his advice, because he thought that Patupat
would accept his challenge about showing the people that there was
neither a Hell nor a Purgatory and that these things were merely a
device of the priests for getting money. Therefore he allowed himself
to be overtaken by night in the house of a friend of his.

Not until it was dark and the town was upset with the searchings
of the gendarmes did he recognize the great danger which he was
incurring. Since he had heard of this at once, he had time to hide
in a secret corner of his friend's house.

When the house-searchings were over, he went out from his hiding place,
went home, wrapped up some clothes, had a wagon hitched up, and,
taking some rifle-bullets, shouldered his gun, got into the wagon,
and had himself driven out of town. After a few days he went to the
mountains together with several townsmen who could not stay in the
town because they had incurred the anger of the priest or of some
other Spanish official of the town.

There, in his stay in the mountains, he was overtaken by the revolution
against the Spaniards in the year 1886.





14. MARIANO AND THE PRIEST PATUPAT.

Mariano was one of the very few apothecaries in the town of San
Miguel. He was one of the people who fell into misfortune through
disobeying the orders of the priest Patupat. He had a family; beside
his wife he had two children, one two years old and one new-born.

One day his servant fell sick. He had a brother-in-law who was a
doctor, so he had him treat the servant without charge, and he gave
the servant medicine without charge. After some days the servant got
well and decided to rest for a while in the country. Accordingly
he paid his debt and took his leave of Mariano for a stay in the
country. His stay in the country did not last long, before he fell
sick anew, and the end was his death.

In the Philippines in those days it was not allowable to bury a dead
person without first having him blessed by a priest. The priests did
not allow this, but they did not much mind the living together of a man
and woman not married, for the reason that they did this themselves.

The deceased servant of Mariano was very poor and his relatives
also were poor and had not the means to pay the price demanded by
Patupat. Thus there was no one to see to the burial of the servant's
body.

When Patupat learned this, he had Mariano called and said that
it was his place to have the dead man buried and to pay the
costs. In Mariano's opinion Patupat's insolence was getting beyond
bounds. Therefore he said that he would not pay him for the burying
of the dead man, no matter what happened.

Patupat boiled with rage. He had the dead man buried and on the
same day went to court and sued Mariano for the cost of blessing the
dead man.

When the session of the court came, Mariano was present, and when the
judge asked what he had to say to this accusation, he spoke as follows:

"Your Honor, this man who died was no longer in my care, for he was
no longer my servant when he died. When he was still sick, I had him
treated without charge and gave him medicine without charge. I have
done my duty to my fellow-man and the duty placed upon me by the
Lord. One of the duties of the priests is to provide burial for the
dead. Now this man is dead, why cannot this priest do his duty without
receiving pay, since even this would not happen, if the relatives of
the deceased had means?"

After asking some further questions of the priest and of Mariano,
the judge closed the hearing and announced that Mariano was in the
right and that the priest would have to put up with having blessed
the dead man without payment.

When this had happened Patupat's wrath against Mariano greatly
increased, and after a few days he again entered a charge against
Mariano. This time he made a different accusation. He complained to
the court that Mariano was a Mason, because he did not come to church,
did not confess, and did not kiss the priest's hand. The Masons are
enemies of the Catholic Church and, in consequence, were enemies also
of the government in the Philippines in those days; and therefore he
suggested that Mariano be deported.

When Mariano heard of this accusation of Patupat, he decided that
his only hope was to hide or to escape from those who were to arrest
him. Accordingly what he did was to go down to Manila, and there
he hid.

But even there he was caught by the gendarmes. Together with seven
or eight men from various towns he was put into a steamboat and they
were taken to the southern part of the Philippine Islands. And when
they arrived there some of their number were shot by the soldiers
who accompanied them, for this was ordered by the officials who sent
these men into banishment.

However, Mariano was not one of those who were shot. He staid there
until, after the victory of the Americans, he was given the liberty
of returning to his family. When he came back to the latter, his one
child was seven years old and the second, five.





15. THE STORY OF THE CHINESE CARPENTER.

Juan was a carpenter who had for neighbor a Chinaman who also was a
carpenter. This Chinaman was a skilled carpenter and his cleverness
showed itself in his skilful use of the plane. One day he bought a
piece of wood forty feet in length. This he proceeded to smoothe. He
tried to see if he could obtain shavings without a break for the
whole length of the wood. What with the excellence of his tools and
his skill at carpentry, this feat went off as if there was nothing
to it. Every time he pushed his plane he obtained a shaving without
a break, forty feet in length. In order to show this his skill to
his neighbor, the Tagalog carpenter, he sent him one shaving every day.

The Tagalog carpenter, Juan, marvelled at the skill of the Chinaman. In
order to make return for the shavings he had received, he too tried
to use the plane and to send the shavings to the Chinaman. However,
the longest shavings he succeeded in getting were only fifteen
feet. These it would have been humiliating to send to the Chinaman.

Juan was skilled in the use of the daras, and he was able to smoothe
boards by the use of the daras alone. Any piece of wood which he had
chopped smooth with the daras did not require the use of the plane;
but the pieces he chopped off were only short splinters, not suited
to show his skill, and he could not send them to the Chinaman.

While Juan did not know what to do, the Chinaman did not stop sending
long shavings. Juan was filled with anger. He took his daras and went
over to the Chinaman's. The latter was surprised and frightened when
he saw Juan.

The latter said: "What do you mean to say by sending me those
shavings? You are offensive to me and you shall pay for it. I am
going to cut your hair with this daras."

The Chinaman was frightened, for he knew that if that daras struck
his head, he would surely not survive. He tried to escape, but Juan
seized him, tied him to a bench, and began to use the daras on the
Chinaman's head.

The daras is a large tool, the size of a pick, and heavy, but in Juan's
skilful hand it was like a mere pair of scissors. The descent of the
daras on the Chinaman's head was very gentle, and only the hair was
cut by the edge.

The Chinaman in his fright shouted and said: "Wapelo! Come helpee me,
Juan bad man, not Chlistian!"

This was heard by the neighbors and passers-by.

Accordingly they came into the Chinaman's workshop, but there Juan
said to them: "Don't you mix in here! I am not hurting this Chinaman. I
am just cutting his hair."

And he kept on with his chopping.

When the Chinaman's hair was completely cut, the onlookers were greatly
astonished, for the Chinaman's hair was as if cut by the shears of a
skilful barber. The Chinaman too, when he saw in the looking-glass
that his head was unhurt, was greatly astonished and did not stop
praising Juan's skill in the use of the daras.





16. A MAN WHO HAD THE POWER OF A DEER.

In a certain town in the Philippine Islands there once became
celebrated the name of a certain man, both among his fellow-townsmen
and the people of the neighboring towns, on account of his unusual
strength in running and jumping.

He was not a proud man, but he had some astuteness in money matters
and also some courage. He did not let his rare good fortune make him
proud, nor did he lie about the source of his unusual strength. He
told those who were curious that the source of his strength was the
power of the deer which he had made his own.

He did not tell how this power had come into his possession, but he
was not stingy about doing favors by helping with his strength both
friends and strangers.

Like most people, he wanted to get rich, and it was toward this end
that he used his strength. He often entered into races, and these
races were always means of winning much money. He always made large
bets. He refused no one that wanted to race with him. Sometimes he
ran races with people, sometimes with horses, with dogs, and with
other animals that are fast at running.

After a few days the money he had won in bets made up a large sum. His
friends also, who had bet on him, got much money. When people came
to know that he had the power of a deer, they did not want to run
against him. Therefore, so as not to stop winning and making money,
he gave large handicaps to his opponents. The handicaps which he gave
were so great that many people contended with him. Still he always
came out the winner. In jumping-matches also he was always victorious.

However, though the advantages which he gained through this power
were great, yet there were also some disadvantages which he obtained
through it. On account of these disadvantages he did not manage to
keep this power as his own through all his life. Through this power
he had become very nervous. The sounds of falling bodies, noises,
and the barking of dogs at night, did not allow him to sleep. These
noises often made him start up with a jump from his sleep. Especially
when the barking of a dog, for instance, woke him up, he jumped high
up from his bed, and before he recovered his wits he was running at
full speed. He could exercise no care about his involuntary jumping
up and usually went way up to the ceiling, and, since this was low,
his body got full of bruises and his head full of bumps from striking
against the ceiling. Likewise in his unintentional running whenever
he woke up with a start, his whole body got knocked again and again
against the walls of his house.

This was hard to bear, and he thought that he should not live long,
what with not sleeping of nights. Therefore he decided to get rid of
this power in a few days. When the seventh day of his possession of the
power came, he was very sore and thought he should die of soreness. His
head was covered with bumps. His face was full of black and blue marks,
and though he had broken no bones, his muscles were badly bruised.

Therefore, without saying a word, he went to a forest and there
abandoned the power which he had got hold of, seeing that he had
already won much money.





17. THE PET MONKEY.

Andrés had a pet monkey which he prized very highly, because this
monkey gave him much service. At night the monkey spread out his
sleeping-mat for him; in the morning it handed him his water for
washing, and whatever order he gave was obeyed by the monkey.

Every night this monkey slept underneath the bedstead on which
its master slept. This was not pleasing to the latter, for owing
to its great value, Andrés wanted to give it a good place to sleep
in. However, no matter what efforts Andrés made to force it, his pet
monkey could not be brought to sleep in any other place.

Andrés was a man who feared and loved God. Therefore, every night,
before he went to sleep, he made the Sign of the Cross and called
upon God. At his bed-time every night he found that his monkey was
already under his bedstead. Not once did he get ahead of the monkey
in going to bed.

One day the priest of the town visited Andrés in his house. After some
time had elapsed in conversation, Andrés told the priest that he had
a pet monkey which was very useful, because it served him well and
obeyed his every command, and he also said that this monkey was more
diligent than his other servants.

The priest was much surprised and asked that the monkey be shown to
him. So Andrés called the monkey. Usually the monkey came at once at
a single call by Andrés, but on this occasion it did not appear even
when he had called ten times. Andrés got angry, arose, and looked
for the monkey in the nooks and corners of the house.

He found it in a corner, clinging tightly to a post. He called it and
tried to get it out of the corner, but the monkey would not come away,
no matter what Andrés did to it. Therefore he called the priest to
look at his pet monkey there in the corner.

At the approach of the priest the monkey trembled with fear. The priest
conceived the suspicion that this monkey was an evil spirit. So he
made the Sign of the Cross, and blessing a little water, sprinkled
it over the monkey.

When the water struck the latter's body, there was a report like that
of a gun, and in the place of the monkey they saw only some smoke,
which soon disappeared.

Thereupon the priest questioned Andrés concerning his faith in
God. Andrés said that his firm faith had not changed and that he
prayed every night before going to sleep. The priest then asked where
the monkey used to sleep. Andrés answered that it slept every night
under his bedstead.

Thereupon the priest informed him that this monkey was an evil spirit
which had been lying in wait for him, and that if he had ever failed
to call upon God before he went to sleep, on that very night the evil
spirit would have thrown him into Hell.





18. THE OLD MAN OF THE ANT-HILL BY LIGHT OF DAY.

Pedro was a brave man. He had often heard stories about vampires,
dwarves, sorcerers, and old men of the ant-hill, but what made Pedro
wonder was why he had never chanced to meet even a single one of
these creatures. He wanted to get a sight of at least one of them,
so that he might know whether it was true that they had powers not
common to most persons.

One night he walked about in a dark and haunted place, because he
had heard that many people had there seen an old man of the ant-hill.

The cigar of such an old man is of terrifying size, and when he draws
at it, the light given forth is like the light of a bonfire.

On this night he had gone some distance on his ramble, when he saw a
flare of light. His hair stood on end and he thought of going back,
but he overcame his fear and continued on his walk.

He was met by the smoker. When he approached, Pedro examined the old
man's figure, but as he did not succeed in gratifying his curiosity,
he was taken with the desire of seeing the old man by daylight. To
bring this about, he would have to hold the old man fast, for these
spirits return to their abode in Hell or some other place of the kind
as soon as morning comes.

Therefore what he did was suddenly to seize hold of the old man. The
latter began to wrestle with him. Sometimes Pedro was below, sometimes
he was on top, but he did not let go of the old man. He held him as
tightly as possible and made up his mind that he would follow no matter
where the old man bore him, should the latter prove stronger than he.

They wrestled till three o'clock. By this time Pedro was as tired
as can be and ready to sink to the ground, but he did not let go of
his fellow-wrestler. When four o'clock came his opponent ceased to
move. When another half hour had passed, the rays of the sun began
to fall upon them, but it was not yet light enough for Pedro to make
out what sort of thing it was he had hold of. When five o'clock came,
he was greatly surprised to see that he was embracing a post which
was not much higher than he. It was, however, firmly fixed in the
ground and completely charred.





19. JUAN'S GOBLIN.

One night Juan while rambling about, crossed a river. While he
was still on the bank and just walking on the sandy beach, he felt
some sand being showered on his back. He thought he would watch for
the person who was throwing sand on him and catch him, so, while
walking, he kept turning suddenly right about at short intervals,
but he saw nothing.

This frightened him a little, and he began to wonder if he was
not perhaps dealing with some old man of the ant-hill or some
goblin. Therefore he hastened his running, but the faster he went,
the more frequent grew the striking of sand on his back. His fear
increased and he returned home running with all his might.

When he got there he was out of breath and unable to speak. It was
only when he had rested a while that he was able to answer the many
questions of his father and the other members of the household. He
told his father that he had been pursued by dwarves on his walk and
showered with sand.

His father asked him where the scene of this was, and he said on the
bank of the river. His father burst into peals of laughter and said
that these were no dwarves, but only his own feet, which sent the
sand up on his back at every stride he made.

But Juan refused to believe this, and for several days he did not
leave the house. His father therefore wanted to show him the truth
of what he had said, so one night he told Juan to go for a walk to
that same place, and he would accompany him.

Juan consented and they both went to the river-bank. When they got
there, Juan's father dropped behind. When Juan walked on the sandy
beach and felt the sprinkling of sand on his back, he was again filled
with terror and shouted to his father that they were already starting
to throw sand on his back.

He made Juan come back and walk on again. This time he followed at his
back. Accordingly Juan's father saw that every time Juan took a step,
the sandals he was wearing carried along some sand, and when he raised
his foot the sand thus carried along was sprinkled on his back.

His father now had him take off the sandals he was wearing and made
him walk on again. This time, no matter how much ground Juan walked
over, he felt no scattering of sand on his back.

From this time on he had no more fear of old men, dwarves, vampires,
and other spooks.





20. JUAN THE SUITOR.

Young Maria was famed for beauty in her district. She had no suitors,
however, except only Juan. But Maria's father had a great dislike
for Juan. Juan could converse with the girl he was courting only in
secret, for when Maria's father knew of it, he would punish them both
with his stick.

Sometimes, when the father's anger was great, he used a club on Juan,
so that he was in danger of getting his bones broken whenever they
were caught talking together.

One dark night Maria's father had gone out. When Juan found this out,
he went to Maria's to talk with her. They forgot themselves in their
conversation, and so were surprised by Maria's father on his return.

He was at once filled with anger and in a loud voice addressed Juan:
"What do you want, you brute? I've told you not to set foot in my
house here. What do you mean by coming here?"

And when he had said this he seized a bamboo cane and made ready to
give Juan a caning. In his terror the latter jumped out of the window,
but he was followed by the father. So he took to running with all
his might.

The night was dark as coal and he could not make out which way to go,
but he kept running nevertheless. He fell on his face again and again
as he ran, but he got up quickly and kept on running.

It was not long before he came upon a large black object. He recognized
it as a carabao, so he leaped quickly on its back and made it run.

Riding on a carabao is not very difficult, owing to the breadth of
its back and the slowness of its pace. Therefore, even though he had
no reins, Juan was not afraid to ride. Owing to the darkness of the
night it happened that in his mounting he faced the tail-end of the
carabao and not the head.

He urged on the carabao. Now it happened that this carabao was owned
by Maria's father. It was not long before Juan saw a lighted house
in the direction toward which the carabao was going. He confidently
expected that this house was his neighbor's. Therefore he got down
from the carabao and went up into the house on the run.

Great was his surprise and terror when, upon entering, he was met by
Maria's father and beaten all over his body and addressed: "What have
you come back for? Haven't I got rid of you yet, you shameless rascal?"

When Juan came to himself he jumped from the porch and ran toward home,
but this time he did not ride on anything.





21. MARIA THE MISER.

When Maria was still alive, she lived in her pleasant house in the
middle of wide grounds with beautiful gardens and trees. As she was
very rich, her life was one constant pleasure.

She had not reached the age of forty years, when she died. All
her wealth she divided between her sister and the church. She did
not remember the poor acquaintances and those of her neighbors who
were poor.

The sister who was left had a series of masses said during the seven
days after death, so that Maria's soul might be admitted by Saint
Peter at the gates of heaven.

When her sister Maria was still alive, she was known far and wide for
her avarice. She herself rarely had masses said or made offerings of
candles. When beggars asking for alms called on her, she had them
driven away and gave them no alms. Often also she had them chased
with dogs. She forced her peons to work without pay, and when she
gave them rations it was without meat or vegetables,--only boiled
rice with salt. To propitiate her, her peons, whenever they went home,
brought chickens, eggs, young pigs, and vegetables or fruits to give
to Maria. They did not make these presents for love of Maria, but as
a kind of bribe, so that they might not be too harshly treated during
their stay in her house. But when Maria went to the country to her
workmen, she appropriated without saying a word and without paying
for it, everything she saw in their house that took her fancy. When,
for instance, she saw at her workmen's a new basket, tray, sieve,
sack, mat, pot, cup, dipper, brazier, or other household utensil,
she took it and carried it off to her house. When she could not make
use of the things she had taken, she sold them. She acted in the same
way about animals that belonged to her servants. In this way she had
quickly grown rich.

When she had been dead about three days, her sister was at her house,
spending the period of mourning. One evening, when she was walking in
the garden she came to the side of a well that was in the yard. She was
surprised, for from the depth of the well she heard someone calling
her name. She turned her head toward the well and there she again
clearly heard the calling, although she could see nobody whatever.

The voice said: "My sister, I am Maria. I am paying now for my life
of avarice, selfishness and cruelty. I am here in the Lord's place of
punishment for all sinners. If it may be, do not follow my example,
but seek some means to save me from the boiling oil here which is
now my place of dwelling."

Her sister was much grieved then and went at once to the priest
to ask to what means she could resort to rescue her sister from
Hell. The priest advised her to go to a certain town where there was a
wonder-working image of Saint Peter. This image of Saint Peter talked
with people and advised various means of getting into Heaven. This
was its miracle.

Maria's sister went immediately to the town where stood the miraculous
Saint Peter. When she got there and talked with Saint Peter, she
told him the whole story. She said that her sister had told her that
her avarice, selfishness, and cruelty had caused her to be thrown
into Hell.

"In that case," said Saint Peter, "find you but one single person,
animal, or plant that was the object of an act of kindness on the part
of your sister. When you have managed to find it, come back to me,
and I shall give you a means to rescue your sister from damnation."

Maria's sister went home to their town at once and there she inquired
of all the townspeople which of them owed any debt of gratitude to
her sister, or which of them had been well treated or kindly spoken
to by her. But not one of them was able to answer. The animals also
of the neighbors and on Maria's own grounds were interrogated by her,
but here she found none that had been done a kindness by her sister.

One dog, a creature of skin and bones, said to her: "One afternoon
I was very hungry. I found a bone in her yard. I seized it and was
carrying it off, when she saw me. She had me chased at once, and when
I dropped the bone she had it buried in the ground. Was that an act
of kindness?"

The grief of Maria's sister became much greater, and her hope of
rescuing her sister from damnation was gradually failing. She began to
question the plants in her sister's yard. She took one by one all the
gourds, pumpkins, cucumbers, chile peppers, melons, sincamas, peanuts,
egg-plants, cow-peas, and onions and garlic, and other vegetables. She
did not find among them that which she sought. She also went through
the trees. She made inquiry, one after the other, of the chico, anona,
custard-apple, mabolo, grape-fruit, orange, lime, and casoy trees. But
here too her labor gave no result; only the group of the garden-plants
she had not yet questioned, and if here she did not find what she
sought, there would be nothing for her to do about the punishment
her sister was undergoing. She went to them all, but there were not
any who could say that they had received any kindness from Maria.

At the very last the sister went to the side of the well, and there
she questioned all the blades of grass. When night came there was only
one head of grass which she had not yet questioned. Full of fear and
hope she approached it.

She asked the head of grass which grew by the side of the well:
"When my sister was alive, did she ever do you an act of kindness?"

"Oh, your sister?" answered the grass, "Yes, it was she who gave me new
life. Last summer my blades were all withered and I was near to dying,
but your sister bathed one evening by the side of this well. As she
bathed, some water was sprinkled on me, so that I grew again and my
withered blades became fresh once more."

Maria's sister could not contain the joy which arose in her, and
that very night she returned to Saint Peter. Saint Peter gave her
a rosary and told her to go home and to hang this rosary down into
the well. She was to call Maria and let her take hold of the rosary;
by this means her sister could be rescued from damnation.

She went home at once, and hardly was the sun shining, when she came
to the yard of the deceased Maria. She approached the well, let down
the rosary, and called her sister. Maria emerged from under the water
and took hold of the rosary. Her sister began to pull at the rosary
and she was slowly lifted up.

As she was thus being rescued, some other souls too wanted to escape
from Hell. So they all took hold of Maria's feet, when they saw that
she was being rescued from damnation. But when only Maria's feet were
still under water, she shook her two feet, so that the souls who had
hold of her should have to let go.

When she did this the rosary broke and she at once fell into the well,
and from that time on her sister was never again able to communicate
with her.

The sister went back to Saint Peter and told him what had happened,
but Saint Peter said that there was no longer anything that they
could do to save her sister from Hell.





22. THREE SOULS WHO CALLED UPON SAINT PETER.

Juan was a gay bachelor. But when he reached the age of twenty-two
he fell very sick and it was not long before he died. His soul went
to Heaven and knocked at its gate.

Saint Peter answered his knock and asked: "Who are you? What brings
you here?"

Juan's soul answered: "I am Juan's soul. Open the door, for I want
to come in."

The door-keeper opened the gate, but before he allowed Juan's soul to
enter, he questioned him as follows: "Why have you come here? What
acts of piety have you performed on earth that you think you are
entitled to the joys of Heaven? Have you left a wife behind you?"

Juan's soul said: "When I was still on earth I often went to church,
prayed, and gave alms, but I did not have the good fortune to get
married."

The door-keeper answered: "You are not fit to partake of the joys
of Heaven."

And when he had said this he closed the door. Juan's soul was not
able to enter Heaven.

When Juan had gone away, another soul arrived.

"Who are you? And why do you wish to come into Heaven? Did you get
married when you were still on earth?" asked the door-keeper.

The soul answered: "I am the soul of Andrés. I took a wife when I
was yet on earth. Open the gate for I want to come in."

At once Saint Peter opened the gate of Heaven, and when he saw the
soul of Andrés he said: "Oh, pitiable soul! For such as you the joys
of Heaven are reserved and fitting. Enter!"

The soul of Andrés was overjoyed and entered the abode of bliss.

When the door was closed there was another knock.

"Who are you?" the keeper asked again.

"I am the soul of Mariano," answered the one who had knocked.

"Why have you come here? Why do you think that you deserve to partake
of Heaven? Did you get married when you were still on earth?"

To these questions the soul of Mariano answered: "When I was still
on earth I often had masses said. Half of my wealth I gave to the
Church for the saying of masses and the ringing of bells. The candles
I offered up could not be drawn by three carabao, and as to getting
married," continued the soul, "I was married twice. I became a widower
and married again."

"I am very sorry that I am not able to let you in. There is no place
for madmen like you in the Kingdom of Heaven."

And he closed the door.





23. JUAN THE CANOER.

One day a Spaniard was having Juan ferry him across the river
in his canoe. The Spaniard, Juan's fare, was able to speak
Tagalog. Accordingly, while they were still far from shore, he began
a conversation with Juan.

This Spaniard was a learned man, no doubt a famous scholar in Spain,
and this showed itself in his discourse to Juan regarding geography,
arithmetic, and various languages of Europe.

When his discourse was ended, he asked Juan: "Have you studied
geography?"

"No, sir," answered Juan,--and in truth, Juan had no education,
for he had grown up in poverty, so that his life at all times was
nothing but ceaseless work.

The Spaniard was astonished at Juan's answer and said at once: "I
am sorry, friend, that you do not know geography, for in consequence
half your life, as it were, is lost."

Juan did not utter a word, and kept on paddling.

It was not long before the Spaniard again asked: "Have you studied
arithmetic?"

"No, sir," answered Juan.

"If that is the case, friend, a fourth of your life is lost to you,
as it were."

Juan became a little frightened, for he could not make out what the
Spaniard was trying to say.

He said to himself: "You poor fellow, Juan, only a fourth of your
life is left now."

When their canoe had got to a deep part of the river, and while
the Spaniard was reflecting upon the great ignorance of the working
people in the Philippines, Juan asked his passenger this question:
"Do you know how to swim, sir?"

"No," answered the Spaniard at once.

"In that case," answered Juan, "you have lost your whole life, not
only as it were, but you have lost it in all truth."

And while he spoke these words he tipped over the canoe they were
riding in. Juan swam to the shore, but the Spaniard was carried away
by the stream.





24. KINDNESS TO ANIMALS.

One dark night Juan was walking in some forests far from any towns. He
was on his way to his home town. Before he could arrive there, he had
to pass through some uncanny places. One night, when he was walking
in such a place, he was suddenly startled by the arrival of a black
cat which purred and scratched at his leg. What he did was to kick
the cat with all his might, and it was tossed a good distance. He
kept on walking, but it was not long before the cat came back to
him. His anger greatly increased, and he kicked the cat again. He
thought that this cat was the plaything of some goblin or vampire. He
kept on walking. It was not long before the black cat again came back
to him. This time, instead of kicking the cat, he took hold of it,
lifted it up on his arm, stroked it and patted it, and said to it:
"Good little cat, what do you want? Are you going to come along with
me on my journey?" and he continued walking.

After a while he was attacked by sleepiness. He saw a house by
the way, but the people in his town believed that this house was
enchanted. However, Juan had no other place to sleep, so he entered
the house to sleep there.

He fell sound asleep, but at midnight he was awakened by the pattering
of rats. He set about kicking and striking at the rats to kill them
or drive them away. But the rats became more and more numerous until
the room became full and they bit him and gnawed at him.

It was then that Juan took his black cat and told it to kill the
rats. The cat miewed and began to chase the rats. Great fear seized
the rats, and those that were not killed by the cat ran to their
holes. When Juan saw that there were no rats left except only a single
pair, he stopped the cat. He caught the two rats and petted them and
decided to take them along on his journey, just like the cat.

On the next day he continued his journey. He was overtaken by night
in a place where there were no houses, so he walked on toward a house
owned by a certain old man. Now it happened that this old man was an
enchanter. He took Juan in and gave him an alcove to sleep in. Juan
went to sleep without suspecting anything.

However, when he woke up on the next day, he was surprised and
frightened when he saw that he was locked up in a box without any
opening. He kicked at the walls of the box, but was not able to do
anything: he could not open it. Great was his despair, and he did not
know what to do, when he remembered that he had a cat and two rats with
him in his prison. He took the two rats, petted them, and told them to
make a hole in the box in which they were confined. The rats began to
gnaw at the boards, and gradually they succeeded in making a hole in
the thick board, until it was pierced through. When they had pierced
it, they returned to Juan, and Juan had them again pierce the wall
of the prison. When they had made holes again and again, they finally
succeeded in making a large opening, and Juan was able to escape.

Juan looked for the old man, but did not find him anywhere. So he
continued on his way home, and when he arrived there, he told of
the great service which had been done him by his three friends,
a cat and two rats.





25. JUAN THE SCULPTOR.

I once read, in a Spanish novel entitled La tumba de hierro, the
following story:

Juan was a child of five years, the son of a workman of the wealthy
Andrés. Juan was dumb from birth, but not deaf. Moreover, his dumbness
was not complete, for often he was able to cry out, though his voice
was not like that of a normal child.

One evening Andrés visited the house of his workman, Juan's father,
and on this visit he brought along his daughter, who also was five
years old. In spite of his dumbness, Juan made friends with his
master's child, and the two played together while their fathers were
discussing matters of farming. He showed Maria (this was the name of
his playmate) his toys, which he had made by his own hand and skill.

His toys were all kinds of faces of people which he had made, and
they were made of clay. There were also many whole figures of people
in all kinds of positions. Some were planting, some were dancing,
some were lying down, and there were also some wrestling, running,
and in many other positions. He also had animals; some were made of
clay and others were made of wood.

The two children became good friends and were engrossed in play. When
their fathers had finished their conversation, Andrés called Maria
to go home, but Maria first asked her father to come to where Juan's
toys were, so that he might see them. When Andrés beheld the toys, he
was astonished at the great ability shown by the one who had shaped
these manikins. Andrés told Juan's father that Juan was gifted and
ought to be sent to school. But Juan's father answered that he had
no money with which to let Juan study.

"In that case," said Andrés, "I will pay the teacher. Tomorrow Maria's
teacher is coming to our house. I shall have him go on here to you,
to begin the teaching of Juan and the opening up of his mind."

Juan's father thanked him profusely, and they parted. Juan was very
sorry when his playmate left.

From that day on Maria's father often sent for Juan that he might
play with Maria there in his house.

One afternoon when the two were playing in the garden in the wide
grounds of Andrés, a butterfly came flying past the two children. They
ran after it. Maria ran ahead and Juan followed. As they were running,
Maria fell into a shallow pool which Andrés used as a fishpond. Juan
gave a loud cry, and, as he cried out, a muscle in his throat broke
and his mouth bled. He paid no attention to this and jumped into the
pool to save Maria from drowning. As the pool was shallow, the two
children did not drown, only Maria was filled with great fear, which
caused her to faint while still in the water. So what Juan did was to
take hold of Maria by her back and lift her up, so that she should
not swallow any water,--he himself meanwhile being immersed. They
were in this position when a servant of Andrés came upon them and
rescued them from the pool.

Great was the surprise of Andrés and great was the joy which came
to Juan's father, when they heard Juan talk and tell them what had
happened. What with Juan's talking, his progress in his studies became
much greater and his friendship with Maria grew much stronger.

There came the day when his teacher said that he ought to go to another
town to continue his studies, for he could teach him nothing more. He
told this also to Andrés. Andrés sent Juan to a school for sculptors,
and there he studied for about six years.

Juan and Maria grew up and their friendship turned into love. Every
vacation Juan went home to their house on Andrés' estate, and there
he passed the days at Maria's side.

There came a day for the exhibition of the sculptures of the artists,
and Juan had planned a design which he was going to carry out for that
day. The victor among the contestants was to be given a prize that
was to be accompanied by much money, in addition to a celebration in
honor of the winner. For about a year Juan worked at his composition.

The day for presenting the statues arrived. Juan, his father, Andrés,
and Maria went to the building where the statues were. Many people
were there, but they were all crowding round Juan's statue. Andrés
did not know what to say in his admiration. The hour came when the
judges announced who was the winner, and Juan's statue was that named
as having won the prize.

It was a group with a standing woman. Her left hand held a torch and
her right a crown of leaves. At the right of the woman and under the
crown of olive a youth was kneeling on his right foot. In his left
hand he was holding a book, and in his right a hammer. At their feet
lay scattered various implements of a student.

On the way home the two lovers revealed their secret to their
parents. Juan's father was merely grieved, for he knew that the
marriage of the two was not possible, for their position was like
that of a slave or thrall and a lord or king. When Andrés learned of
the matter, he was filled with great anger. He had Juan called to him
and scolded him. He told him he was shameless and did not know how to
appreciate favors,--did not know how to repay the man who had given him
his education, and told him that he could not marry Maria. Accordingly
Juan at once went away without anyone's knowing his destination.

Five or six years passed, and Juan at his sculpture did not forget
Maria.

Maria passed these six years in her house. She was sunk at all times
in a deep grief, and it was always Juan of whom she was thinking. Maria
fell seriously ill and was near to death.

Her physician advised Andrés that, if he wanted to save his daughter,
he would have to follow her desire regarding marriage to Juan. But
when Andrés consented, it was already too late. Maria's sickness went
from bad to worse, and he did not even know where Juan was. He sent
many messengers to the large towns to look for Juan, but even when
many days had passed, not one of them had succeeded in finding Juan.

At last one of them came upon him in the town of Kamalig in his
workshop. When he was told that he was being sent for by Andrés that
he and Maria might be married, his joy was very great. But he was also
much afraid that he might not find his loved one alive. He went home
with all possible speed, and when he arrived at the house of Andrés,
he found there the body of Maria, mere bone and skin, stretched out
on her couch. That very moment Andrés sent for a priest, and Juan and
Maria were married. While the marriage-ceremony was being performed
by the priest, Maria's breath ceased. When they were married, Juan
had but time to kiss his wife before her breath left her, her face
glad and her mouth smiling.





26. MARQUITA.

Marquita was a good and beautiful young woman, but poor. She was
betrothed to a man who also was poor, but had a position with the
Government in Manila and received good pay.

Marquita had a rich neighbor. His house was of wood, with an iron
roof, and his estate was large. This neighbor had a great liking for
Marquita, but we cannot say whether his love was true, for he had a
screw loose. He paid every attention to Marquita, but Marquita was
not a girl of fickle heart and paid no heed to all his attentions.

So great was the desire of this suitor to win Marquita that he
decided to employ force. One afternoon he went into the yard of
Marquita's family and hid in a banana-tree. It happened that on this
afternoon Marquita's yard was dirty. Accordingly she went and swept the
yard. When she came near the banana-tree in which the man was hiding,
he suddenly dropped down, seized her by the hand and kissed her.

As you know, among reputable people in our country a single kiss is
a great stain on a girl's honor. Therefore, when Marquita came into
the house weeping and her parents found out that she had been roughly
handled or kissed by this man, they decided that there was no other way
of covering up this disgrace than marrying their daughter Marquita to
this man. No matter how much Marquita objected, and although they knew
that she had a sweetheart, they nevertheless prepared for the marriage.

Marquita was a daughter very obedient to her parents, so she could
not actually disobey them now. All she did was to write her betrothed
what had happened and what was going to happen and to tell him that
her coming marriage was only an act of obedience to her parents, and
that she loved only him. To her parents Marquita said that they would
get no joy from her, for her marriage to the man whom she abhorred
would soon be the death of her.

They were married. It was not long before Marquita was stricken with
fever. From the day of her marriage she was not able to eat anything,
and she shed tears day and night. The skilful physicians of the town,
all the wealth of her husband, and all the prayers of her parents,
failed to save her from death. Seven days after her wedding she
died. This caused much grief to her former betrothed and contributed
to his misfortune in his later life.





27. THE IGNORANT PRIEST.

To the town of Baliwag there was once assigned a priest who had no
education whatever. The people surmised that he was only a grass-cutter
in Spain, who had been cast hither by chance and assigned as priest
to their town so that he might have some income and so be saved from
dying of hunger. Every Sunday he said mass, but those who heard the
mass could hear nothing from him, except only the word "Mass, mass,
mass," and so on. He would walk round in front of the altar; at times
he faced the people, brought his hands together, and, while making
all these movements, he would keep saying his "Mass, mass, mass,"
and so on.

The people got angry and reported him to the archbishop. The answer
of the archbishop was that he would come some Sunday and hear the
mass to see if their accusation was really true.

The archbishop arrived. The priest told him that he was not able to
perform mass, because the silly people all left the church as soon
as he began mass.

"Tomorrow," he added, "you will see how they all run away as soon as
I give the blessing."

The next day was Sunday and at his mass the archbishop was to be
present. He planned a way of saving himself. Accordingly, before
beginning the mass, he caused some oil to boil. While he was putting
on his vestments the people and the archbishop were seated in the
church. The archbishop was near the altar, and, while the priest
was putting on his vestments, the oil was boiling. When he had put
on his vestments, he poured the boiling oil into the vessel for holy
water. It was his custom to give the blessing before saying mass, so,
when he entered the church, he sprinkled the boiling oil on the people
instead of holy-water. The people, struck by the drops of hot oil,
all jumped up and ran with all their might out of the church. When the
archbishop saw this, he did not have the mass gone on with on that day,
for there was not a single one of the people left in the church.

The archbishop said to the priest that he would not have to leave
the town and that hereafter he would not heed any accusation that
the people made.





28. THE CONFESSIONAL.

Father Mundo was the priest assigned for some years to the town of
Mariquina. He was a man who liked amusements. He was never deficient
in the fulfilment of his duties. Every day he said mass, and on Sunday
he said mass twice. Also, he christened children, said blessings over
the dead, carried the sacrament, heard confession, and gave holy
communion. He performed all his duties well, but the confessing he
overdid a little. From his point of view this was perhaps useful in
lessening the sins of those whom he confessed, but for some of the
latter it had its bad side.

Once there was a young woman who was fond of going to church and to
confession. When this young woman reached the age of twenty years,
she abandoned the pious duty of going to confession, and also went
to church but rarely. Once when this woman was questioned, she spoke
as follows:

"At first I really thought that Father Mundo was a saint, but now the
people realize that he is a horrid man. At flood-time, when the people
are all canoeing on the flood, he rides along in the women's canoe,
and not with the men. In the morning, after saying mass, he is seen
squatting in his courtyard with his vestments trailing on the ground,
petting fighting-cocks, in company with the other cock-fighters.

"At first I often confessed to him, but there came a day when
the things he asked me in the confessional were nothing but
foolishness. Was it right for him to ask me how many suitors I had,
whom I liked, and where I met them? What I thought was that this priest
was extremely impudent. So I left him at once in the confessional,
and since that time I have not been going to confession."





29. JUAN THE JOKER.

Juan was a man given to doing nonsensical things, but he did not do
them intentionally to anger his fellow-men; it was merely his natural
habit, prompted by his character.

Once he went to the festival of a certain town. He was carrying three
young pigs to sell in the town. When he got there, he saw many people
gathered in the courtyard of the church and listening to a speech
which the mayor of the town was delivering. The people stood in a dense
crowd, but he succeeded in getting close to the foot of the platform
on which the orator was standing. While he took part in the crowding,
the three pigs kept squealing. When he had arrived in front of the
mayor, he held his hand over their mouths to make them keep quiet,
but he did not succeed. The mayor took notice of the squealing of
the pigs and looked round to see who had brought the pigs there.

When he saw Juan he addressed him as follows: "Juan! What do you mean
by making your pigs squeal here? Get out of here at once and never
again dare to set foot on the ground of Bustos!"

Juan departed and went home to his town of San Ildefonso. A year
passed, and the festival in the town of Bustos came round again. Juan
wanted to go there, but he remembered that the mayor of that town had
threatened him that, if he were seen again on the ground of Bustos,
he would have him imprisoned and tortured. Juan thought of a way of
going there none the less.

When the festival arrived, there was a high mass, which was attended by
thousands of people. Juan was one of these people, and he it was whom
all the people were watching, owing to the manner of his appearance
there in the church. It was not long before one of the people who
were watching him complained to the mayor, saying that Juan was in
the church mounted on a wagon drawn by carabao, and that the whole
thing, wagon, carabao, and Juan, was inside the church. Juan had not
got down from the wagon on which he was standing.

The mayor went to the church to arrest Juan. When he got there he said:
"Juan! Follow me, I am going to imprison you. Didn't I tell you not
to set foot on the ground of Bustos?"

But Juan answered: "Mr. Mayor! You certainly did tell me that. That
is why I cannot get out of my wagon. Do you see this earth, sir, with
which my wagon is loaded and on which I am standing? This is not the
ground of Bustos, sir, but earth of San Ildefonso. I got this earth
in my town."

When Juan had said this, the mayor could not restrain his laughter
and only said to himself that he could do nothing to Juan, for the
latter was in the right.





30. THE THREE THIEVES.

Juan, Andrés, and Diego were three expert thieves. They were
very famous, and many people were trying to catch them, but their
cleverness at dodging and stealing kept them from being caught. The
three once made an appointment to meet at a certain quiet and secret
place to discuss their means of livelihood and new good methods of
thievery. Not one of them had an honest trade. This had been their
mode of life from childhood on, so they had become skilful and very
clever at this activity.

When the day of their meeting came, they were there already at
dawn. Each one of them had much to tell, and, as they were all talking
at once, their stories were indistinguishable.

Juan asked of Diego: "How skilled are you now at your work?"

"In my opinion," answered Diego, "I am the most skilful of us three,
for I am able to steal the eggs a hen is brooding on without its
knowing it. And not only this," he continued, "I am able to rob wild
animals of their young without their noticing it."

"Is that all your skill?" Andrés quickly interrupted, "I am able to
rob animals and men too. I have stolen all of people's jewelry that I
wanted to steal, whether the owner was asleep or up and about. Once
I stole a ring that the owner was sleeping on to keep it from being
stolen,--but I stole it without his noticing."

"Is that all the skill you two have?" asked Juan. "The things you
do don't come halfway up to my skill at stealing. I can steal people
themselves, and not only their property."

The two he was talking to were surprised, for they did not think
that a live man could be stolen without his knowing it, and, to test
Juan's ability, the two made a bet with Juan. They told him to steal
the priest of the town and to bring him to the place where they now
were. If he succeeded in doing this, Andrés and Diego would pay him
five hundred pesos. But if he could not do it, he was to pay Andrés
and Diego one hundred pesos. Juan agreed to this bet, and they parted.

Juan went to the town and found out by inquiry where the priest
lived. When he had found this out, he figured out the plan he would
pursue in stealing the priest. He entered the priest's household as
a servant. During his stay as a servant he became acquainted with the
habits of the priest. One of his habits, from which he never deviated,
was praying a rosary before the image of a saint. The image was made of
wood, and it represented Saint John. The size of this image was equal
to that of a man. Juan had a carver make an image just like this one,
but with an opening, and hollow inside. This opening inside the body
of the image of the saint was such that a man could enter it. When
the image which Juan had had made was ready, he replaced with it the
image of Saint John which belonged to the priest.

One afternoon before prayers he took a rice-sack and went into the
inside of the saint he had had made. When the priest had eaten supper
he went into the room in which he prayed, to say a rosary. When he
was halfway through his prayers, and just about as Juan was getting
tired of standing up, the latter spoke: "Cease your praying, Father
Lucas. I have been sent here to conduct you to Heaven."

At first the priest was filled with fear, but then he thought that his
saint was doing a miracle and was really calling for him in order to
take him to Heaven. As he did not say anything, Juan again spoke as
follows: "Many are the works of piety which you have done. You have
been patient in living a lowly life, therefore all the joys of Heaven
have been reserved for you. Come with me, and I shall conduct you."

The priest answered: "How shall I manage to come with you? I am old
and cannot walk from here on earth as far as Heaven."

Juan answered: "Never you mind that, I have a bag here. Get into it
and I will carry you on my way to Heaven."

When he had said this, he spread out the rice-sack. When the priest
had got into it, Juan tied the bag tightly. He got out from inside
the image and carried Father Lucas on his shoulder toward the house
where he had his appointment with his two friends. Father Lucas
really believed that he was going to Heaven, and so he staid still
in the sack.

However, when Juan was wading through a shallow river, it occurred to
him that he was being fooled and that they were not going to Heaven
at all.

Therefore he asked Juan: "What river is this, and why must we cross
a river on the way to Heaven?"

Juan answered: "Shhh! Don't make any noise! This is the river Jordan."

The priest desisted from speaking. Juan kept on walking. When he was
already going up into the house that was their place of meeting,
the priest was again surprised and again asked: "What stairway is
this? Is this the way the staircase of Heaven looks?"

"I have told you already that you must not make any noise," answered
Juan, "This is the stairway that leads to Heaven."

When they had come up into the house, they were met by Diego and
Andrés. Juan dropped his burden and said to them: "I have brought here
what you told me to steal. Have you brought the five hundred pesos?"

The other two did not believe him at once. So what they did was to
make a hole in the bag and peep at the contents. In it they saw the
head of the priest with the tonsure. Accordingly they handed Juan
the five hundred pesos and they all quickly left the house. They
abandoned the priest, leaving him to get free as best he could.





31. HOW MONKEYS ARE CAUGHT.

In the jungle one not rarely meets with large herds of monkeys. When
the one who comes into their haunts is unarmed, there is danger of
their killing the man whom they overpower by their numbers. When angry,
they climb down from the trees and all bite at the man who is in their
power. Therefore a man who is going into jungles where there are many
monkeys will not neglect to carry a gun. When the monkeys hear the
noise of the gun, they are unafraid. Most of them do not run away,
but look at the place where the noise and smoke come from. Those
who are reached by a bullet try to ward it off with their hand, like
one who is warding off a mere throw. Therefore, when they are shot,
their palms too are pierced by the bullet.

Not infrequently people catch live monkeys, so as to domesticate
them and sell them to the various foreigners who come to the
Philippines. The catching of live monkeys does not involve much labor,
for the method of catching them is simply to trick them.

When one wants to catch monkeys, one usually cooks or has cooked
some sweetmeats, and into these one mixes or has mixed some
balasing. Balasing is the seed of a plant which intoxicates or puts
into a deep sleep the animals which eat it. It is used also in
catching fish in rivers. When these sweetmeats have been cooked,
the man carries them to where the herd of monkeys is. However,
if he should place it carefully on the ground, the monkeys would
not climb down to eat it. They suspect that these sweetmeats are
only a bait for them, that they may be caught or killed. Therefore
what the man does is to pretend that he is frightened and when he
sees the monkeys, he starts running, carrying on his head the tray
of drugged sweetmeats. While running he pretends to take a fall on
his face, so that the sweetmeats he is carrying on his head fall
down and are scattered over the ground. When this happens, he keeps
on running just the same, and hides somewhere or other to watch the
monkeys eat. When the monkeys see the man running away, and when he
is hidden, they climb down from the trees and all start grabbing the
sweetmeats. They all crowd on top of one another in their greed, and
the noise is very great, for each herd of monkeys is about five hundred
or a thousand strong. When they have eaten it is not long before they
are attacked by sleepiness. They get weak and cannot climb into the
trees. It is a laughable sight to see these monkeys, old and young,
squatting on the ground and nodding, everyone of them. The ones who
did not succeed in grabbing any sweetmeats climb up into the trees
and look down at their drunken companions. When the monkeys are in
this state, and not before, does the man who is hidden come up and
take the sleeping monkeys one by one. The effect of the drug is not
of long duration, and the monkeys get well after a few days.

Another common way of catching monkeys is to use cocoanuts as bait. A
hole is made in an unopened cocoanut. The size of this hole is just
large enough for a monkey to put in his hand when it is not holding
anything. Inside the cocoanut-shell is placed a piece of the meat
of the cocoanut, and the whole thing is placed in a spot where there
are monkeys. Monkeys like cocoanut, and when they see it, they grasp
the meat that is inside the shell. But when they have hold of the
cocoanut-meat, they can no longer take their hand out through the
opening, but they will not let go of the cocoanut-meat. Consequently
they are as though in stocks, and when the man who is catching them
approaches, they cannot get away, for the cocoanuts are heavy and
sometimes are weighted in addition. So when the catcher comes up,
he is able without difficulty to capture the handcuffed monkeys,
grown or young.





32. THE FESTIVAL OF SAINT JOHN.

The twenty-fourth of June is the festival of Saint John, and it is
celebrated in the various towns of the province of Bulacán. In the
month of June there is usually rain and mud. The people believe that
Saint John is the saint who makes the rain fall, and therefore is fond
of water and mud. Hence the celebrations performed on his day are
very different from those performed on the days of other saints. In
the towns near the sea there are floods in the month of June and the
water comes up into the town. In the towns farther from the sea it is
also very rainy, and usually these floods and rains fall on the day of
Saint John. The people who take part in the celebration get themselves
drenched in the flood or in the rain. In the towns of Malolos and
Hagúnoy, when this holiday falls into a time of large flood, almost
all the people get into the water or else go canoeing. If there is no
flood, the people walk about in the rain. Many people from the country
and the suburbs go about collecting alms on this holiday. Most of them
are boys or young men; rarely are there any women. In separate groups
they go about collecting alms, and each group has with it a band that
plays on bamboo instruments. Those who do not play are supposed to
have the task of singing or dancing. All of them are almost without
clothing, like Igorots, but their whole body, from head to foot,
including even the eyes and ears, is caked over with mud.

These groups go calling from house to house. They stop in front of a
house and there they play music or sing or dance. They usually sing
about the life of Saint John or of some other saint who was a friend of
his. While their music is playing, their order is in single file in a
circle, sometimes standing, sometimes squatting or kneeling. When there
is a singer or dancer, he is within the circle of musicians and there
performs his singing or dancing. After two or three pieces of music,
songs, or dances they stop and all go round asking alms of the people
who are watching them. If they receive no alms, they take mud from
their body and throw it at the stingy people. They spend the whole
day in such celebration. As these alms-gatherers are very numerous,
they help to make the town gay, even though it is very rainy.

When there is canoeing it is not uncommon for people to get
drowned. Consequently this custom is gradually disappearing. Moreover,
in these days people are getting stingy and rarely give alms. Hence
the gatherers of alms on the festival of Saint John are gradually
disappearing.





33. FAMILY CELEBRATIONS AFTER A DEATH.

A family that has suffered a loss by death suffers not only in its
mind and soul, but also in its purse. This is on account of the great
expense borne by the bereaved ones in conforming with various customs.

On the day when someone has died very many people call on his
family, and these visitors do not content themselves with condoling
with the dead person's family, but make a long stay in the house of
mourning. Consequently the bereaved family is compelled to serve food
to the visitors. Usually the dead person is not buried at once, but
is first placed in state for two or three days from the time when he
ceased to breathe. During these days people's visits stop neither by
day nor by night. Most of them are relatives and others are friends,
neighbors, and other acquaintances in town. If the deceased had
many friends or relatives in other towns, they too come to visit,
and they have to be given board and lodging by the dead person's
family. This is because in the small towns in the provinces there
are no hotels. In feeding all these guests they often use up half
a cow, several sheep and goats, and innumerable chickens. The chef
is usually hired, and the near relatives of the deceased help with
the cooking. For this reason in the house of death the place where
the deceased is lying in state is very quiet, and even when many
people are there, when they talk it is only in whispers. But in
the dining-room and kitchen the noise is extraordinary. Everyone
is giving orders to the servants, some are washing dishes or pots,
some are polishing knives and forks, some are serving at the table,
and so on. In the kitchen the sputtering of the frying-pans never
stops, and one can hear only the voices of the chef and his assistants.

But in one chamber of the house stays the immediate family of the
deceased and is plunged in grief. They all cry as hard as they can
and from time to time blurt out questions as to what will happen to
them because of the departure of the one who has died.

If the deceased is wealthy, a priest comes to get him and escorts
him to the church. Arriving at the church, the body is blessed by the
priest and after this the priest escorts it also to the cemetery. All
the visitors are present at the burial, and usually they ride in
carriages. These carriages are hired, except for a few which belong
to some of the visitors.

When the dead has been buried the guests who come from other towns
go along back to the house of mourning. Most commonly they soon
depart, but sometimes they stay three days, to take part in the
Three Nights' Celebration. The Three Nights are celebrated in the
house of the deceased. At this time the relatives call and all pray
together. In this praying only the older people take part, and the
young men and young women tell each other riddles. These ceremonies
are performed during the Three Nights. On the last night there are
usually many people, and the entertaining is more elaborate than on
the two preceding nights. Many of those who come give presents to
the bereaved ones. Usually these are things to eat for the guests.

In poor families these ceremonies are also performed, but the priest's
calling for and escorting the corpse does not take place. For the
blessing of the corpse one may pay the priest whatever one desires. The
cheapest thing is the blessing of the corpse at the door of the church
and placed on the ground. The next in order is the blessing of the
corpse also at the door of the church, but with the coffin placed
on an altar. The most expensive blessings are performed right by the
altar. The price of these is from one-hundred to five-hundred pesos.





34. FLEEING FROM THE AMERICANS.

The people of San Miguel were like herds of animals fleeing before the
whips of the herdsmen and the pursuit of savage dogs. They are very
fond of peace and quiet. Also they are very credulous toward hearsay,
and these circumstances are what did not allow most of them to stay
at ease in the town during the time of the revolutions against the
Spaniards and the Americans. It is also true, however, that many of
them ran away merely from fright or cowardice.

When the revolution against the Spaniards of the year 1896 took place,
I was only four years old. According to what my mother has told me,
we went to Manila instead of going up into the mountains. I do not
remember much of what happened at that time, except the fact that
we went to the railroad station. When we arrived at Manila we were
not able to enter the city unless we had a permit from an official
of this city.

The next thing which has become fixed in my memory is our stay in
Bigaá, in the house of an attorney, whose name was Don Nasario. We went
to this town to escape the fighting of the forces of the Katipunan
and the Spaniards in Manila. In Bigaá were Tagalog soldiers drilling
to take part in the fighting.

A little later we went to the town of Bustos. This town also was at
that time in the hands of the Katipunan. This town is very pretty
because of the various aspect of the things one sees. The river is
very broad, the banks are wide, and on the banks are hills of stone
and sand. The friends with whom we stayed were kind people. They
often played with my sister and me, and the game was to make ducks
dive in the clear waters of the river.

What took place in the fighting of those times I did not find out,
for I was still small and had not yet any understanding.

When the flight from the Americans came, I was already a little older,
and I remember much of our flight to the mountains. When the Americans
had defeated the soldiers of Aguinaldo the people of San Miguel
were filled with terror. The report circulated in the town that the
Americans were wild people, cruel and fierce, and without respect for
anything. This no doubt was a rumor which the Spaniards caused to be
spread, and especially the Spanish priests in the Philippines. Owing
to people's fear of the Americans, almost all of us townspeople packed
up our belongings and went up into the mountains. We were living at
that time in the house of an aunt of my mother's, and there dwelt
with us also the family of my mother's oldest brother. I remember
that the packing and hauling of the goods of all of us who lived in
the house took more than ten days. The wagons laden with our goods
were despatched at night, so that the carabao that drew them should
not get exhausted in the heat of the sun. The wagons were filled up
to the top of the covering, and the carabao were much wearied by the
drawing of the heavy loads. When no belongings of ours were left,
we ourselves got into the wagon to be carried to the mountains.

The place we went to was called Paang-Bundóc, half a day's walk from
Sibul Springs. The dwelling we came to there was a mere hut with a
roof of cugon-grass, and very small. The floor consisted of branches
of trees with the twigs cut off, but not smooth or even. It was very
small and was penetrated by wind and cold. Such was the place we lived
in for several months, instead of the frame house of my mother's aunt.

There in Paang-Bundóc there came to us many fellow-townspeople who
were also fleeing, and the last comers reported that all the people
of the town were by now in the mountains, or at any rate gone, and
only the houses were left.

After several months' stay at Paang-Bundóc we went from there to a
secret place. This place was a clearing in the jungle. Not one of
us was allowed to know the name of the place, and those who knew it
kept it very secret, so that our hiding-place should not be known by
any outsider. This was a way of escaping not only the enemy, but also
robbers and thieves. The house we lived in there was very large, a very
long building, all under one roof. The building was cut up into rooms
of equal size. The number of these was about eight. In each room one
family lived. Here too we were compelled to stay for several months.

When the Americans were already near the town of San Miguel, it was
reported to us that these people were not as hearsay described them, so
that our fear of them gradually gave way. Accordingly we left our deep
concealment and went to Paho. This too is a place in the mountains,
but nearer to the town. There we were met by many fellow-townsmen
and people from various other places. Most of them were sick from
staying in the mountains. Here the medicines which Mother had taken up
into the mountains instead of leaving them in the town, were of great
use. These medicines belonged to Father; he had left them behind when
he was banished to Sulu by the Spanish priests. One morning someone
called at our house to buy some medicine. Mother went to the chest in
which the medicine lay. When it was opened, we saw a snake coiled up
and sleeping on the rice-hulls that covered the bottles. The people
who saw this rejoiced greatly, but Mother was only frightened. She
did not know the meaning of the snake. When the rejoicing was over,
Mother asked why they were all so glad. They answered that the
meaning of the snake was that the owner of the medicine was going
to get rich. Mother only laughed at what they said, for she did not
believe in these things.

After a few months we left Paho and went home to our town. When we got
there, most of the few belongings we had left there had been stolen
by the few people who had been left in the town. The boards of the
flooring of the house of Mother's aunt were gone, and they did not
know who had taken them.

Not long after our arrival in town it was reported that the American
soldiers were now near to the town of San Miguel. We were not made
uneasy by this news, and awaited their arrival. One noon the town was
quiet. The soldiers who were in the town went away and those who did
not go away threw away their guns. The reason for this was the entry
of the American soldiers. From the back yard of the house in which
we were living I saw the approach of the soldiers. Their trousers
were khaki and their shirts blue. They carried their guns and ran in
single file across the fields and came toward the road.

When the Americans were in possession of the town, orders for some
months were strict. Lights were ordered extinguished at six o'clock
in the evening, and no one was allowed to walk about after this
hour. In the mountains near San Miguel were many Tagalog soldiers,
and they often attacked the town of San Miguel. On account of these
attacks the Americans set fire to houses in San Miguel. Night after
night when the soldiers attacked, the houses were regularly set fire
to. Our neighbors came to us every night to sleep with us, because in
our house the danger from the bullets of the contestants was not so
great. The doctor of the American soldiers who were in the town of
San Miguel had become a friend of my father's, and for this reason
our house escaped being burned. Once this doctor told Father that
he often accompanied the patrols and told them not to burn down our
house. Finally, as the Tagalog soldiers did not succeed in driving
the Americans out of the town, they stopped their attacks, and the
town became quiet.









II. GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS.


Note.--The following grammatical analysis of Mr. Santiago's speech
can, of course, lay no claim to completeness: he surely uses some
constructions and very many forms which I have not heard or have
failed to note. Such fulness as will be found is due to Mr. Santiago's
intelligence and patience under questioning and in conversation. A
very few of the examples represent his form of sentences in MacKinlay's
Handbook. The full representation of derivatives of the root pútol cut
is due to Mr. Santiago's kindness in listing these forms, wherever they
seemed possible to his speech-feeling, in accordance with my list of
morphologic elements, and in then forming sentences to illustrate them.

In the use of accent-marks and of the symbol y I have deviated from the
practice of the International Phonetic Association. Where roots did
not occur as independent words, I have prefixed a hyphen and given a
theoretical meaning. In the explanation of constructions I have allowed
myself the use of distorted English; although this time-honored device
does not really reproduce the foreign expression (substituting, as
it does, impossible constructions for natural ones), it does enable
the reader to follow the general trend of the foreign idiom.





A. PHONETICS.

1. Distinctive sounds.

1. The distinctive sounds are the following:


                        Labial   Dental   Palatal   Velar    Laryngeal

  Stops: unvoiced          p        t                 k          `
  Stops: voiced            b        d                 g
  Spirants (unvoiced)               s                            h
  Nasals (voiced)          m        n                 ng
  Trill (voiced)                    r
  Lateral (voiced)                  l

  High vowels                    i(e,y)             u(o,w)
  Low vowel                               a


2. a is a low unrounded vowel, as in Standard English far, but more
tense and with the corners of the mouth (lips) slightly drawn back:
hŕlamanŕn garden.

3. i and u, in what may be regarded as the normal form, are about
as high as the Standard (American) English vowels in pit and put,
but more tense; moreover, the lips are well drawn back for i and well
rounded for u: ínit heat, lutúin be cooked.

4. In the final syllable of a phrase (or of a word spoken alone)
the tongue position of i and u is as a rule lowered, often all the
way to mid position; the tenseness and lip position are, however,
kept, so that the resulting sound often resembles French č and lower o.

5. u is nearly always so lowered: bágo new, buhňk hair. It is not
lowered in pů` ten.

6. i is not lowered before dentals: káhit though, ákin my, pígil
compulsion. It is usually kept high also before velars: sahěg flooring,
singsěng ring. Some words ending in velars more or less regularly
have the lowering: pútik, pútek mud; so especially some proper names:
Intsčk Chinese, Lóleng Lola.

Even in other cases the higher variants of i are commoner than the
lower; hindě` not, kamě we, gabě night, mulě` again are commoner
than these words with e; a very few words, such as ulč` again have
oftener e than i; others, such as itčm black are fairly regular in
their variation.

7. Within a closely unified phrase the lowering is as a rule omitted:
ulí sya again he (ulč`), Hintú na! Stop! (hintň`). In this regard the
habits are variable; the form chosen depends mostly on the speaker's
momentary attitude toward the closeness of joining of the words.

A dissimilative factor also seems to be involved: a following i or
u favors the lowering:

Natůtúlug ang áso. The dog is sleeping.

Natůtúlog si Hwŕn. Juan is sleeping.

8. o occurs in a number of words as the vowel in the last two
syllables: in all of them the intervening consonant is the glottal
stop: ó`o yes, do`ňn there; bo`ň` whole has occasionally bu`ň`. The
raised variant is not used within the phrase: Ó`o pň`. Yes, sir. Yes,
ma'am. do`ňn sya there he.

e occurs in the same way in le`čg neck, beside li`ěg.

9. In word-formation, when, by the addition of suffixes, the i or u is
no longer final, it is not lowered: lúto` cook, lutúin be cooked; itčm
black, itimŕn be made black. Occasionally, however, the lowered vowel
is retained: táo human being, ka-taó-han mankind, beside kataúhan,
tao-taó-han manikin, pupil of the eye, beside tautaúhan.

The words with o`o (§ 8) keep the lowered vowel when uncontracted:
pina-ro`on-ŕn was gone to (do`ňn there); these words are also
reduplicated with o: kinŕ-dň-ro`on-ŕn is been in.

10. e and o occur also in unassimilated loan-words: bčsbol baseball,
Silŕ y nag-bč-bčsbol, They are playing baseball, estudiyŕnte,
istudiyŕnte student, polěs, pulěs policeman, sipéro football player,
bangkéro canoer (both with Spanish suffix -éro added to Tagalog words:
sípa` football, bangkŕ` canoe).

For e see also § 29.

11. As the variation between i and e and between o and u is thus never
distinctive, there is no need of indicating it in transcription; I
have, however, used the characters e and o wherever I heard markedly
lowered variants.

12. i and u occur also as non-syllabics; I use, respectively, the
characters y and w: yaňn that, gáya like, wíka` speech, word, táwag
call. In final position they are always lowered: thus in patŕy dead
person, ikŕw thou, y represents non-syllabic e, w non-syllabic o.

13. In word-formation before suffixes vowels are in certain cases lost,
see Morphology: kánin be eaten, -káin eat with suffix -in.

14. The laryngeal (glottal) stop occurs as a distinctive sound only
after a vowel at the end of words: báta` child, boy, girl, hindě`
not, hintň` stop.

As a non-distinctive sound it is used as a vowel-separator wherever
syllabic vowels follow each other without an intervening distinctive
non-syllabic. In this use I shall not indicate it in transcription, as
it may be taken for granted wherever vowels are written together. Such
words as those in § 8 will therefore from now on be transcribed without
the sign for glottal stop: doňn, óo, boň`. So táo (§ 9) means tá`o,
etc. Cf. below.

15. The distinctive final glottal stop is usually lost before a
following word in the phrase: hindí sya not he, Hintú na! Stop!

It is always lost before the words ng, t, and y: ang báta ng mabaět
the good child.

16. p, t, k are unvoiced fortis stops; they differ from the
corresponding English sounds primarily in that they are only slightly
aspirated. In sentence-final the implosion only is made.

t (in contrast with the English sound) is postdental, often near
to interdental.

k is always articulated in back velar position (as in English coo), no
matter what sound follows. The closure of k is occasionally imperfect,
so that a rather open velar spirant (resembling Slavic x) is heard:
malaxŕs for malakŕs strong; this variation has not been noted in
transcription.

In word-formation p, t, k alternate, respectively, with m, n, ng;
see Morphology.

17. b, d, g correspond in position to p, t, k. They are fully voiced
lenis stops; in sentence-final often implosive only, and then weakly
voiced.

The closure of b is occasionally imperfect, so that a bilabial spirant
is produced: túVig for túbig water; this variation has been ignored
in transcription.

In word-formation b alternates with m; see Morphology.

Final d in word-formation is always replaced by r before the vowel
of a suffix: lákad walk, lakar-ŕn walking-party.

Initial d becomes r in the sentence frequently after the final vowel
of a preceding word and occasionally even after a final non-syllabic,
in the words daŕn hundred (not in daŕn road), damň, dŕw, děn, díne,
díto, diyŕn, doňn; e. g. ako rěn I too.

In word-formation some words frequently change d to r after the vowel
of a prefix or a reduplication, and others do not: pa-raŕn means
(daŕn road, way), but i-pa-dalŕ be sent (dalŕ bring, carry). The
words (or roots) that have changeable d- are those mentioned in the
preceding paragraph and daŕn, -dáka, damdŕm, dámi, dámot, dangŕl,
dapŕ`, dápat, dáti, -dátig, -datěng, dikět, -diněg, -díwang, -dúkit,
-dumč, dúnong, dúsa.

18. s is the normal unvoiced sibilant, spoken in postdental
position. Before y and iy it is somewhat palatalized (more, for
instance, than Russian palatalized s),--a variation that is not
distinctive and need not be noted in transcription: siyŕ, syŕ he,
she, pronounced with palatalized s.

s alternates in word-formation with n; see Morphology.

In the affricate combination ts, which is felt and treated as a single
sound, the s is always palatalized: Intsčk Chinese.

19. h is the unvoiced glottal spirant; as in English, it occurs only
in syllable-initial: hindě` not, báhay house, mukhŕ` face.

In word-formation h is often spoken before the initial vowel of a
suffix that is added to a final vowel: -bása read, basa-hŕn reading
room. See Morphology.

20. The nasals m, n, ng correspond in position to the stops. In
word-formation they alternate, respectively, with p, t, k; m also
with b, and n also with s; ng is often prefixed to an initial vowel;
see Morphology.

Both in word-formation and in the phrase the nasals are occasionally
assimilated in position to a following consonant: sŕ m pů` ten (m
for ng), Saŕng ka páparon? Where are you going? (for saŕn).

In the sentence, final n is lost before the words ng, t, and y:
ang áki ng amŕ my father (for ákin my).

21. r is the voiced tongue-tip trill, postdental. It occurs between
vowels within simple, underived words: áraw sun, day,--no doubt as
a substitute for d, which never occurs in this position; everywhere
else r is merely a variant of d (§ 17).

22. l is postdental; the timbre is much as in Standard French or
German, the mid-tongue not lowered.

23. f and v (both labiodental) occur in unassimilated foreign words;
they are occasionally replaced (especially in derivatives) by p and
b. Filipínas the Philippines, infiyčrno, impiyčrno Hell, fiyčsta,
piyčsta fiesta, but always ka-piyestá-han day of a festival, sivěl,
siběl civil, prověnsiya province, bintána` window, báso drinking-glass.

r occurs freely in all positions in foreign words (cf. § 21): trčn
train, trabáho work, krůs cross, relňs watch, sombréro hat, beside
Tagalized sambalílo.

The occurrence of ts (§ 18) is probably limited to foreign words.

24. When in word-formation a vowel is lost before a suffix (§ 13),
the non-syllabics thereby brought together are subject to various
changes: sigl-ŕn be filled, silěd with suffix -an. See Morphology.



2. Syllabication.

a. In the word.

25. If a single non-syllabic follows a stressed vowel, the latter
is spoken with open syllable accent, and the non-syllabic begins the
following syllable: bá-hay house, sů-sú-lat will write.

If a single non-syllabic follows an unstressed vowel, the latter has
close syllable accent,--that is, no stress-division is made between
the syllables (just as in English): itň this, kasakimŕn selfishness,
sumú-lat wrote.

If two non-syllabics intervene between two syllabics, the
syllable-division is made between the non-syllabics: luk-sň jump,
muk-hŕ` face, In-tsčk Chinese. Stressed ay seems, however, to have
open syllable accent: káy-lan when?

Syllabics never follow each other without an intervening
non-syllabic. If no other non-syllabic intervenes, a non-distinctive
glottal stop is spoken. I have not written the glottal stop in this
position, as it may always be taken for granted (§ 14). Hence daŕn
road is pronounced da`ŕn, siěk young pig si`ěk, doňn there do`ňn,
táo human being tá`o.

Nor do more than two non-syllabics ever follow each other in a native
word. The following are examples of unusual combinations in foreign
words: An-drčs, Pé-dro, beside Tagalized Píro, ká-tre bedstead,
sčr-mon, trabá-ho work, but in reduplication mag-tŕ-trabá-ho will
work, krůs cross, but in reduplication nag-kú-kurůs crosses himself,
cf. baráso arm, lóbo balloon (Sp. globo).

26. In frequently used words, especially in more rapid speech, the
intervocalic glottal stop is often lost.

If like vowels thus meet, they coalesce into a single vowel of no
more than normal length: pumarňn went there beside pumaroňn. When
oo is thus contracted, the resulting o may be raised to u (cf. § 9):
pinarunŕn was gone to, beside pinaronŕn and pinaroonŕn.

If unlike vowels meet, the non-syllabic corresponding to the higher
vowel (i. e. y with i, e and w with u, o) takes the place of the
glottal stop. So táwo beside táo. The combinations so resulting are
treated in every way like those discussed in the next §.

27. If the non-syllabic intervening between two vowels is y or w,
the combination involves no peculiarity, provided that neither
of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic: bá-yan town,
pag-dirí-wang celebration, gayňn thus.

If, however, one of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic
(i. e. i, e with y and u, o with w) and is not stressed, it is
spoken shorter than a normal unstressed vowel: in such words as iyňn
that, buwŕn moon, month the i, u are spoken shorter than in other
positions. So also in táwo (see preceding §) the o.

After consonants these short vowels are often entirely omitted: bwŕn
beside buwŕn, syŕ he, she beside siyŕ. The syllable-division remains,
however, as in the longer form: kápwŕ` fellow- beside kápuwŕ` is
pronounced ká-pwŕ` (not kap-wa`).

Even in other positions these reduced vowels are often omitted,
especially in frequently used combinations: Ano yňn? What's
that? beside Ano iyňn?, occasionally táw for táwo, táo.

28. Conversely, one hears now and then a superfluous short i, e with
a y, and an u, o with a w: iyaňn for yaňn that, máye for máy having,
uwalŕ` for walŕ` without.

29. The combinations ay and ai are occasionally replaced by a long
open e: kélan beside káylan when?, mé báhay beside máy báhay wife,
housewife, me áre` beside may áre` master, owner, ténga beside
taínga car.



b. In word-formation.

30. When in word-formation affixes or reduplicative syllables are
added to a root, the syllabication is as in a simple word: sulá-tan
be written to (súlat writing with suffix -an), sumú-lat wrote (same,
with infix -um-), umuwč`, umwč` (§ 27) went home (-uwč` go home,
with prefixed -um-).

When vowels meet, they are as a rule separated by the non-distinctive
intervocalic glottal stop: maŕ-á-re` will be possible (áre` property
reduplicated and with prefix ma-).

31. The intervocalic glottal stop is rarely reduced, except in
certain much-used combinations, the commonest being those with the
prefix i- and with the prefix ka- and the suffix -an in certain uses
(see Morphology): iniútos was commanded (útos command with prefixes
in- and i-), usually iniyútos; laruŕn, toy (larň` play, game with
suffix -an), usually laruwŕn, larwŕn, but (with a different use
of the suffix -an) lŕrúan playground; kayibígan, kaybígan friend
(íbig love, desire, with prefix ka- and suffix -an), but kaěbígan
sweetheart and kaibigŕn affection. For -íwan abandon with prefix i-
only the contracted form íwan be abandoned is spoken. Cf. further
ikaápat, ikápat fourth (ápat four with prefixes i- and ka-).

32. Conversely, an original y or w is sometimes under emphasis
replaced by glottal stop; thus, for patayěn be killed (patŕy dead
person, kill with suffix -in), occasionally pataěn.

33. When a word is doubled, when two words are united in a compound
word, and after the prefixes that end in g, the syllable-division is
however made as though separate words were meeting in a sentence,--that
is, according to the rules in the following paragraphs.



c. In the phrase.

34. When words come together in the phrase, the word-division is
maintained (as in English) as a syllable-division.

In the case of initial consonants the division is thus like that within
a word: Sumúlat ka. Write (thou), Sumúlat siyŕ, Sumúlat syŕ. He wrote,
Sumáma ka. Go along, Sumáma siyŕ, Sumáma syŕ. He went along.

Before a vowel-initial the word-division is maintained as a
syllable-division by the use of a non-distinctive glottal stop (as
in German): Sumúlat akň. I wrote, i. e. sumú-lat-`akň; Sumáma akň. I
went along, i. e. sumá-ma-`akň.

Doubled words, compound words, and forms with prefixes ending in
g (namely, mag-, nag-, pag-, tag-) are similarly treated (§ 33):
agŕd-agŕd immediately (agŕd at once doubled), i. e. agŕd-`agŕd;
báhay-aklátan library-building (compound of báhay house and aklátan
place for books), i. e. bá-hay-`ak-lá-tan; pagsúlat an act of writing
(súlat writing with prefix pag-), i. e. pag-sú-lat; nagáral studied
(áral teaching with prefix nag-), i. e. nag-`á-ral.

Occasionally, in emphatic speech, the same division is made within
other formations: umakiyŕt, umakyŕt climbed (-akiyŕt climb with
prefixed -um-), occasionally, but rarely, um-`akiyŕt, usually umakiyŕt,
umakyŕt (by § 30).

35. Reduction of the glottal stop and contraction of vowels occur
only in a few much-used combinations of words: si Andrčs (si is the
article of proper names), also siy Andrčs, sy Andrčs; Ano iyŕn? What's
that?, also Ano yŕn? and even An yŕn?; na itň this (na is a particle
expressing attribution), also na yitň, na ytň.

36. Occasionally such reductions go even farther, as in anň in the
preceding paragraph, and occur where the glottal stop is not involved:
as, sŕ for isŕ one in sŕ m pů` ten, for isŕ ng pů`.

37. The words at, ay, and na have also a shorter form, t, y, and ng,
respectively, which occurs only (but not always) after a final vowel,
glottal stop, or n. When these forms are used, the final glottal stop
or n is lost (§§ 15, 20) and the t, y, or ng is treated in every
way exactly as though it were part of the preceding word: butň at
balŕt, butň t balŕt bone and skin, i. e. butňt-balŕt; Iyňn ay mabúti,
Iyň y mabúti. That's good, i. e. iyňy-mabú-ti; ang báta` na mabaět
(clumsy, as in the speech of a child just learning to speak, for:)
ang báta ng mabaět the good child, i. e. ang-bá-tang-maba`ět.



3. Accentuation.

a. Word-accent.

38. In a word of more than one syllable at least one syllable is
normally spoken with a greater degree of stress than the others.

The unstressed syllables have short vowels (about as long as the
vowel in English pit or put) and close syllable-stress (§ 25).

39. A non-final syllable ending in a non-syllabic (i. e. a closed
non-final syllable) never has the stress; such words as luk-sň jump,
muk-hŕ` face, ak-lŕt book are therefore always oxytone. The only
exceptions are syllables ending in ay; this combination seems to
be felt as a unit capable of open syllable-stress: káy-lan, ké-lan
when; further, the words mín-san once, pín-san cousin, and nŕn-don,
by-form of ná-roňn is there; and, finally, unassimilated foreign
words: bčs-bol, sčr-mon, kwŕr-ta, kwŕl-ta money (Spanish cuarto),
but also Tagalized kwaltŕ.

Words like ká-pwŕ` (beside ká-puwŕ`) are not exceptions, for the
first syllable is not closed (§ 27).

40. The stressed syllables fall into two grammatical classes which
are only in part phonetically distinct; we may call them primary and
secondary word-accent.

41. The primary word-accent on a final syllable or (in the cases
mentioned in § 39) on a closed non-final syllable, consists merely in
greater stress than that of an unaccented syllable, accompanied by
a pitch-rise of about half a note. [4] I use the grave accent-sign:
gabě night, hindě` not, kamŕy hand, buhňk hair, nŕndon is there,
sčrmon sermon.

42. On a non-final open syllable the primary word-accent involves an
increase of stress (less than in English), a pitch-rise of two notes,
lengthening of the vowel to about one and one-half times the duration
of an unstressed vowel, and open syllable-stress (§ 25). I use the
acute accent-mark: báhay house, báyan town.

So also, irregularly, syllables in ay: káylan, kélan when?, and even
finally: káy, ké than, máy, mé having; also mínsan, pínsan.

If an unaccented syllable precedes, the pitch-rise really begins on
the latter: in sumúlat wrote, for instance, the first syllable is
spoken above the usual pitch, and the two-note pitch-rise is merely
completed in the accented syllable.

43. The secondary word-accent on a final syllable has weaker stress
than the primary accent in the same place, and ordinarily lacks the
pitch-rise. Grammatically, it is recognizable by the presence of
the primary accent on another syllable; I use the grave accent-mark:
áakiyŕt, áakyŕt will climb, náriněg was heard.

44. On a non-final open syllable the secondary accent differs from the
primary accent in similar position in two respects: its pitch-rise is
less marked, varying from three-quarters to one and three-quarters
notes, and its vowel-lengthening is greater, reaching twice the
length of an unstressed vowel. I use the grave accent-mark: sůsúlat
will write.

When the primary accent is on the last syllable and therefore weak (§
41), the secondary accent often approaches a non-final primary accent
in character: the first syllable of a word like nŕbuksŕn came open is
often phonetically the same as that of a word like náriněg was heard.

If an unaccented syllable precedes the secondary accent, the pitch-rise
really begins in the former: in such a word as sumůsúlat is writing
the first syllable is spoken with higher than normal pitch, in the
second syllable the pitch is brought up to a note and three-fourths
above normal, and in the third the two-note rise is completed.

Of two secondary accents following each other the preceding is
the more marked: nŕrŕramdamŕn is felt (nŕ- has more marked accent
than rŕ-). This helps to make the primary accent distinct, for it
is stronger than a preceding secondary accent: sůsúlat will write
(the second su- is stronger, not weaker, than the first); nŕlŕláman
is known (if the third syllable had a secondary accent, it would be
less marked than the first and second, but its pitch and stress are
actually higher).



b. Sentence-accent.

45. Certain words are atonic, i. e. are always spoken unstressed in
the phrase: e. g. ang áso the or a dog, sa ákin to me.

The atonic words are: ang, at, ay, kay to (not káy, ké than), kung,
na attributive (not nŕ already), nang, ni of (not ně nor), o or
(not ň oh), pag, sa, si.

The short variants of at, ay, and na, namely t, y, and ng (§ 37),
having no vowel, cannot be stressed; they are treated in every way
as though they formed part of the preceding word.

46. In closely united phrases the last word keeps its accent, while
the preceding ones often weaken theirs. Especially a final syllable
often loses its accent before another word in the phrase:

dáhil díto on account of this, often: dahil díto,

ang mangŕ báhay the houses, often: ang manga báhay,

ang kanyŕ ng báhay his or her house, ang kanya ng báhay,

ang malakě ng báhay the large house, ang malaki ng báhay.

47. Opposed to the preceding rule is the treatment of certain words
which we may call enclitics. These very frequently, to be sure,
receive the normal treatment: that is, they are stressed and the
preceding word either keeps its stress or, if oxytone, often loses it;
but frequently, instead, the enclitic loses its accent:

Umakyŕt siyŕ, Umakyat syŕ. He climbed, but also Umakyŕt sya.

Áakyŕt siyŕ, Áakyat syŕ. He will climb, but also Áakyŕt sya.

Gánu ka na bŕ kakínis? How clever are you now? (kŕ, nŕ, bŕ are all
enclitic).

Enclitics have the further (and more easily recognized) peculiarity
that they follow the first orthotonic (i. e. neither atonic nor
pretonic, § 48) word of the expression to which they belong (either
as modifiers or as subject):

ang mahahába nya ng paŕ his (niyŕ, enclitic) long legs.

When several enclitics come together the last one is often
stressed. Monosyllabic enclitics precede disyllabic:

Nahánap na nyŕ ang sombréro. He has already looked for the hat. (nŕ
and niyŕ are enclitics; the latter is treated as disyllabic even when
in the contracted form nyŕ).

The enclitics are:

(1) always: the monosyllabic forms of the personal pronouns, namely
kŕ, kň, mň, and the words (particles) bŕ, bagŕ, dŕw, děn, mŕn, múna,
nŕ, namŕn, nawŕ`, ngŕ`, pŕ, palŕ, pň`, sána, tulňy.

(2) frequently or in certain senses: the disyllabic forms of the
personal pronouns (including siyŕ, syŕ and niyŕ, nyŕ) except ikŕw
(which is never enclitic), the demonstrative pronouns, and the words
díne, díto, diyŕn, doňn, kayŕ`, lámang, ulč`; occasionally short
phrases (§ 88).

For details about these words see Syntax.

48. Opposed to the rule in § 46 are also certain words (particles)
which we may call pretonics. Their treatment is often regular: that
is, the pretonic as well as the following word keeps its accent, or
the pretonic loses its accent before a following word; but sometimes
the pretonic keeps its accent and the following word, if oxytone,
is unaccented:

máy sakět, may sakět having sickness, i. e. sick, but also máy
sakit. Only máy and nása actually appear with this accentuation.

The other pretonics are so classed because they share with these
two words the peculiarity that an enclitic belonging to the phrase
follows not the pretonic word, but the first orthotonic word:

Máy katawŕn sya ng pára ng táo. He has a body like a human being. (siyŕ
he, enclitic follows not máy, which is pretonic, but katawŕn body,
the first orthotonic word of the predicate).

The pretonics are the particles báwat, káhit, kapŕg, kinŕ, mangŕ,
máy, nagěng (together with its other forms, § 250), nása (together
with its other forms, § 212), ně nor (not ni of), ninŕ, pagkŕ, sinŕ,
tagŕ (tigŕ). See Syntax.

49. A final syllable ending in glottal stop (§ 14) often receives
a higher degree of stress than a corresponding syllable with a
different final.

If the syllable ending in glottal stop has not the word-accent, it
often receives an accent resembling the secondary accent on a non-final
syllable; this is especially common if the glottal stop is lost before
another word in the phrase: páre`, párč` priest, Párě Hwŕn Father Juan.

If the syllable has a word-accent and the glottal stop is lost in the
phrase, its accent is often spoken like a primary word-accent on an
open syllable: Walá sya. He has none (walŕ`), Naglálarú sya. He is
playing (naglálarň`).

If, however, the glottal stop is lost before t, y, or ng, this
heightening of accent does not take place, since the syllable
is then treated as ending in t, y, or ng: Syŕ y walŕ ng aklŕt
(i. e. walŕng-`ak-lŕt), Sya y wala ng aklŕt. He has no book or
no books.

50. In a succession of otherwise unstressed syllables a rhythmical
movement is usually produced by means of grammatically insignificant
stresses weaker than a secondary word-accent; the distribution, and,
indeed, the occurrence of these is so variable that I have not tried
to indicate them in transcription, especially as they are never
distinctive. Thus, in the phrases in § 46 an accent of this kind
may fall on the next-to-last syllables of the words that lose their
normal word-accent: ang mŕnga báhay, ang kŕnya ng amŕ his father,
ang malŕki ng báhay.

51. The successive accents in a sentence bear a well-marked relation
to each other: the early and especially the middle ones have higher
absolute pitch than the last; an accent on the last syllable of a
sentence often entirely loses its pitch-rise. As a consequence of
this rather fixed melody, the differences of pitch-movement between
statements, questions, commands, and exclamations of various kinds are
not so marked as in English; the higher stress of emotionally dominant
(emphatic) words, also, is less marked than in English.

In exclamation or under emphasis the accent of a final syllable may
be like that of a medial syllable, and may, in addition take on a
falling accent after the rise: Hwán! (with rising-falling stress and
pitch) Juan!, for normal Huwŕn, Hwŕn. Other disturbances of accent
also occur in exclamation.





B. SYNTAX.

1. Sentence and word.

a. Syntactic relations.

52. The sentence consists of one or more words:
Aráy! Ouch! Umúulŕn. It's raining. Ina kň! Mother of mine! (as
exclamation). Sya y sumůsúlat. He or she is or was writing.

53. The relations between the words in a sentence are the usual ones:
(1) Attribution: Ina kň! Mother (of) mine! (2) Predication: Sumůsúlat
syŕ. Literally: Is-writing he. (3) The serial relation: butň t balŕt
bone and skin.

54. Some of the particles (§ 55) seem, however, to stand in none of
these relations, but rather to express these relations themselves. Thus
the particle t and in the preceding example is expressive of the serial
relation. So further: malakě ng báhay large house; the particle ng
expresses the attributive relation; Sya y sumůsúlat. The particle y
expresses the predicative relation.

It is to be remarked, further, that the sphere of attribution includes
some cases in which the attribute markedly alters the sense: sakět
sickness: máy sakět (máy is an attribute) having sickness, sick. [5]



b. Parts of speech.

55. Tagalog distinguishes two parts of speech: full words and
particles.

The particles either express the syntactic relations between full words
(as illustrated in § 54) or act as attributes of full words (so máy
in the example in § 54): Hindí sya sumůsúlat. He is not writing. The
particle hindě` not is an attribute of sumůsúlat.

In contrast with the particles, full words act not only as attributes,
but also as subject or predicate, and any full word may, in principle,
be used in any of these three functions:

(1) Subject: Ang sumůsúlat ay si Pédro. The person writing is
Pedro. Ang pulŕ nang panyň ay matingkŕd. The red of the handkerchief
is intense.

(2) Predicate: Sya y sumůsúlat. He is writing. Pulŕ ang panyo ng
itň. This handkerchief is red.

(3) Attribute: ang báta ng sumůsúlat the writing child, the child
who is writing; ang pulŕ ng panyň the red handkerchief.

56. Independent of this classification into parts of speech are
certain less important groupings of words and certain phrase types,
some of which will appear in the course of the analysis. Others,
however, demand mention at the outset.



c. Static and transient words.

57. Transient words express an element of experience viewed as
impermanent, i. e. belonging to some limited portion of time, so
sumůsúlat above, as opposed, e. g., to siyŕ, pulŕ, panyň, báta`,
Pédro. Words which are not transient may be called static. Only a few
particles are transient; among the full words the transient group is
large and important.



d. Personal names.

58. Except in exclamations and in address, names of persons (or
animals) are distinguished from other words by being always (but see
§ 78) preceded by the atonic particle si: Hwŕn! Juan! si Hwŕn Juan,
si Salaměn Glass, Mirror (as name of a dog).

59. Many terms of relationship and titles may be used in place of the
name of an individual and then belong to the personal name class: ang
amŕ the father, ang áki ng amŕ my father, but: si Amŕ Father. Thus
are used, further: si Inŕ Mother, si Tátay Papa, si Nánay Mama, si
Kúya or si Kúyang Oldest brother, si Atč Oldest sister, si Ingkňng
Grandfather, si Indŕ` or si Impň Grandmother, si Áli or si Tiyŕ Aunt,
si Máma` Uncle; si Bathála` God, but: ang Dyňs.

So also phrases in which these and other titles as attributes precede
a name, see § 256.

60. The particle sinŕ or silŕ, pretonic, in place of si forms an
expression denoting the person named together with his family or group
of adherents: sina Hwŕn or sila Hwŕn Juan and his family or Juan and
his crowd. With a series of names sinŕ implies that those named form a
group: si Hwŕn, si Andrčs, at si Mariyáno Juan, Andrés, and Mariano;
sina Hwŕn, Andrčs, at Mariyáno the group consisting of Juan, Andrés,
and Mariano; sina Hwŕn, sina Andrčs, at sina Mariyáno Juan, Andrés,
and Mariano, each with his group.



e. The object construction.

61. When a word or phrase denotes an element of experience viewed
as an object, it is, with certain exceptions, preceded by the atonic
particle ang: ang báta` the or a child, boy, girl; children, ang báhay
the, a house; houses, ang báyan the, a town, ang kabŕítan goodness,
kindness; an act of kindness, ang kataúhan mankind, ang pagsúlat the
or an act of writing, ang mabúte that which is good, the best thing.

The following are the exceptions:

62. Personal names preceded by si or sinŕ (silŕ) do not take ang; they
always, of course, denote an object idea. See the examples in § 58 ff.

63. The personal pronouns (which always express an object idea) do
not take ang. They are: akň I; kitŕ we, i. e. thou and I, inclusive
dual; táyo we, i. e. thou (or ye) and I (or we), inclusive dual and
plural; kamě we (but not you), exclusive dual and plural; ikŕw, kŕ
thou (singular); kayň ye, you (dual, plural, and polite singular);
siyŕ he, she; silŕ they.

All of these except ikŕw are often enclitic; kŕ is always so: Ikŕw
ay talúnan. You are defeated. Sumúlat ka. Write (thou).

Siyŕ is used only of living beings, except for a single peculiar
construction to be described below (§ 106 f.).

Kitŕ in the sense here given is not much used, táyo being commoner:
Palět kitŕ nang sombréro. Let's trade hats. Kitŕ ay pumaroňn sa
teyátro. Or, more commonly: Táyo ay pumaroňn sa teyátro. Let us go
to the theatre. Kitŕ is more used in another meaning, as we shall see
(§ 182).

Kamě differs from these two words in excluding the person or persons
addressed: Kŕkáin táyo. We shall eat. Nakitúluy kamě kina Pédro. We
asked hospitality of Pedro's. In both of these sentences (as also
in that with táyo already given) two or more people may be meant. It
will be seen, therefore, that the distinction between dual and plural
is not categoric (obligatory).

That between singular and plural is categoric in these pronouns;
everywhere else it is not obligatory; the idea of plurality is inherent
in many words and forms, but these are used only where the idea of
plurality is explicitly prominent.

64. The demonstrative pronouns as object expressions also reject
ang. They are: irč this (on the person of the speaker or within his
immediate reach); itň this (more generally, of anything nearer to the
speaker than to the person addressed); iyŕn, yŕn that (nearer to the
person addressed); iyňn, yaňn, yoňn, yňn that (of things distant from
both speaker and person addressed).

Itň and iyňn are used also anaphorically: the former--the latter.

The demonstrative pronouns are often enclitic.

Ang is omitted also before an object expression in which a
demonstrative pronoun stands first as a modifier, see § 130.

65. Similarly before object expressions in which an interrogative
pronoun stands first as a modifier, see §§ 131.168.

66. The use of ang is optional before the numerative pronouns. The use
of ang seems sometimes to lend these greater definiteness, sometimes
to be indifferent.

The numerative pronouns used as object expressions are: ibŕ other,
ilŕn few, karamíhan most, lahŕt all. (The other numerative pronouns,
namely boň` whole and the particles bála any and báwat every are not
used as object expressions).

ibŕ others; ilŕn a few; Ang ilŕn ay malalakŕs at ang ibŕ ay
mahihína`. Some are strong and others are weak. Lahŕt nang táo
sa báya ng itň ay dápat umalěs. All people (who are) in this town
ought to leave (nang táo of people, of the people is an attribute
of lahŕt). Ang lahŕt nang táo sa báya ng itň ay máy sakět. All the
people in this town are diseased. karamíhan sa kanilŕ most of them;
ang karamíhan the majority.

The use of ang is optional also before object expressions in which
a numerative pronoun stands first as an attribute, see § 132.

67. The use of ang is optional before the cardinal numerals: isŕ sa
kanilŕ, or: ang isŕ sa kanilŕ one of them.

The simple cardinal numerals are: isŕ one, dalawŕ two, tatlň three,
ápat four, limŕ five, ánim six, pitň seven, walň eight, siyŕm,
syŕm nine.

Similarly, the use of ang is optional before an object expression in
which a cardinal numeral stands first as a modifier, see § 133.

In dates and for the hours of the day the Spanish numerals are commonly
used; these demand ang: ang abéynte-kwátru nang Húnyo the twenty-fourth
of June.

68. Ang is omitted, further, before object expressions beginning with
the particle ně (§ 253) and optionally before those beginning with the
particle káhit (§ 248). All object expressions lack ang when forming
an indefinite object predicate (§ 109), in expressions of indefinite
quantity (§ 69), when used indefinitely after pára (§ 275), hanggŕng
(§ 293), patě (§ 305), and in exclamation or address (§§ 75.78). [6]



f. Expressions of indefinite quantity.

69. Object expressions are used (without ang, § 68) to express
indefinite objects (roughly speaking such as would lack the article
the in English) or indefinite quantities of objects, when preceded
by certain modifiers. These modifiers are the pretonic particle
máy, expressing existence or forthcomingness (§ 252), and the
full words máy-roňn, equivalent with máy; walŕ` the negative of
these; malakě great; maláon long; marámi much, many (§ 138). The
phrases so formed may be described as expressions of indefinite
quantity. Beside the omission of ang before the object expression,
they have the peculiarity that in certain constructions they express
(without further accompaniments) the possessor of that designated:
may súngay there are horns or having horns, horned; máy-roo ng aklŕt
there are books or having a book, books; wala ng aklŕt there are no
books or without a book, having no books; malakě ng kagamitŕn great
usefulness, there is great use, or having great usefulness; maláo
ng panahňn long time or taking a long time; marámi ng salapč` much
money, there is much money or having much money; marámi ng kaybígan
many friends, there are many friends or having many friends.

Máy expresses also approximateness (where the object expression is
one of number): may ápat na pu ng paŕ about forty feet or having,
measuring about forty feet.

70. An expression of indefinite quantity may, as a unit, stand in
object construction; in this case the first three have possessive
value, but not the others: ang máy sakět the or a person having
sickness, the or a sick person; ang máy-roo ng aklŕt the (a) person
who has a book or books; ang wala ng hiyŕ` the (a) shameless person;
but: ang malakě ng báhay the, a large house; ang marámi ng bágay the
many things.

71. Marámi may by itself stand in object construction; it then has
the meaning: ang marámi the many, the crowd, the people, hoi polloi.



2. Subject and predicate.

72. Most sentences consist of a subject and a predicate, showing the
construction of Sumůsúlat syŕ, Sya y sumůsúlat (§§ 53, 54). Indeed,
this goes farther than in English; many commands, for instance,
have the subject-and-predicate structure: Sumúlat ka. Write thou,
i. e. Write.

Nevertheless, much of the syntax is determined by the use of
constructions which lack subject-and-predicate structure.



a. Non-predicative sentences.

73. The sentences which lack subject-and-predicate structure are of
two general types: (1) exclamatory, and (2) impersonal-anaphoric.

74. To the exclamatory type belongs the use in independent
sentences of certain particles, the primary interjections:
Abŕ! Ah! Aráy! Ouch! Ó! Oh!

As in other languages, some of these violate the normal phonetic
structure, that is, are "inarticulate": Sss! Whew!, uttered when the
weather is very hot. One whistles when one wants the wind to blow.

75. To the exclamatory type belong, further, words and phrases used as
secondary interjections: Anň! What! (unpleasant surprise). Inŕ ko! or:
Ina kň! Mother of mine! Ano ng hína mo! What weakness of-you! i. e. How
weak you are!

As the second example shows, object expressions are here used without
ang (§ 68).

76. Certain words with the prefix ka- expressing high degree of
a quality (see Morphology), with their attributes: Kaitěm nang
gabi! What-blackness of-the night! i. e. How black the night is!

77. Certain words with the prefix ka- and reduplication expressing
recent completion of an act (see Morphology), with their modifiers:
Karárating ko pa lámang! Just-arriving by-me still only! i. e. I have
only just arrived.

78. Vocatives, in calling or address: Kayň ng manga makasalánan! Ye
sinners! In this use personal names lack si and all object expressions
lack ang (§ 68): Hwŕn! Juan! Máma`! Sir! Áli! Madam! Wala ng
hiyŕ`! Shameless one!

79. Commands of certain brusque or familiar types, used, e. g.,
to children, servants, animals, in haste or excitement: Hintú
na! Stop! Ílag na! Get out of the way! Súlong! Go ahead! Hurry
up! Panáog nŕ sa báhay! Come down from the house! Come on out! Tŕbí po`
Look out please! (Cry of drivers to people on the street. The accent
is irregular by § 51 for tabě).

80. Certain set expressions, such as greetings: Maganda ng áraw
pň`! Good-morning! Salámat. Thanks. Salámat sa iyň. Thank you.

81. Expressions of affirmation and negation: Óo. Yes. Oo ngŕ`. Yes
indeed. Táma`. That's right, Exactly. Hindě`. No. Walŕ`. None, Nothing,
There isn't.

82. The mere naming of an idea, as in counting or giving the title
of a story: Isŕ, dalawŕ, tatlň, ápat, limŕ.... One, two, three,
four, five....

83. (2) Of the impersonal-anaphoric type are many answers to questions
or continuations of dialogue: Kahápon. Yesterday. Akň. I, It's I,
It was I. (Never "Itň y akň," or the like).

84. Certain occurrences, especially meteoric phenomena,
are not analyzed into subject and predicate: Umúulŕn. It's
raining. Kabilúgan nang bwŕn. Roundness of-the moon, i. e. There is
a full moon. Bumábahŕ`. There is a flood. Naŕáre`. It is possible,
allowable. Hindí nalaúnan. It did not take long, It was not
long. Taginit nŕ. It is summer already.

85. Very common in impersonal construction are expressions of
indefinite quantity (§ 69). In this use they express existence or
forthcomingness (or the opposite) of indefinite objects: Mŕy manga
babáye. There are women. Máy-roo ng aswŕng sa báyan. There was a
vampire in the town. Walŕ ng papčl. There is no paper. Walŕ ng anu
mŕn! There is nothing. Also: Not at all! You're welcome! Malaki ng twŕ`
nang iba ng táo. There was great rejoicing by the other people. Sa
dalága ng itň y marámi ng manglilígaw. For this young woman there
were many suitors.

86. Less common in impersonal construction are expressions of
occurrences involving indefinite or indifferent persons or things:
Humúkay. One should dig. Nagumpisa nŕ nang pagsábuy. "They" have
already begun to throw.

87. There is great freedom as to presence or absence of anaphorically
determined elements (i. e., such as have been recently mentioned or,
less commonly, are about to be mentioned), including the subject;
when this is wanting, the subject-and-predicate structure is, of
course, lost: Hiníla nya sa pasígan. Was-dragged by-him to-the shore,
i. e. He dragged it or the tree (sc. itň, or: ang púno`, from the
preceding sentence) to the shore. Hindí makabůbúti sa kanilŕ. (It,
the scheme mentioned) will do them no good.

Many constructions later to be noticed depend on this habit of
omitting anaphorically determined elements, cf. e. g.: Ang púno`
ay tumúbo hanggŕng sa magbúnga. The tree grew until (sc. it) bore
fruit. Pagdatěng niya ay sabíhin mo ng maghintŕy. At-the-coming of-him
be-said (impersonal) by-you that (sc. he) should-wait, i. e. When he
comes, tell him to wait.



b. The subject.

88. The subject of a sentence is always an object expression. The
only exceptions are complex sentences with entire predications (§
115) or quotations (§ 329) as subject.

89. The subject may have two positions:

(1) Non-enclitic: it precedes or follows the predicate; in the
former case the predicate is introduced by the atonic particle ay,
y (y often after syllabic vowel, n, or `; see Phonetics): Sumůsúlat
ang báta`. The child is writing; or: Ang báta` ay sumůsúlat. Ang
báta y sumůsúlat. Siyŕ ay sumůsúlat. Sya y sumůsúlat. He, she is
writing. Here siyŕ, syŕ is not enclitic.

(2) Enclitic: it follows the first orthotonic word of the
predicate: Hindí sya sumůsúlat. Not he is-writing, i. e. He is not
writing. Sumůsúlat sya nang líham. He is writing a letter, letters. In
these examples siyŕ is enclitic.

Not only enclitically used pronouns (§§ 63. 64), but even short phrases
are thus used: Pinapútol nila si Hwŕn nang káhoy. Was-ordered-to-cut
by-them Juan (subject) some wood, i. e. They ordered Juan to cut
wood. Here the position of si Hwŕn after the first orthotonic word
of the predicate (pinapútol) but before the rest of the predicate
(nang káhoy) shows it to be (like nilŕ) an enclitic element. With the
same subject not enclitically used the sentence would be: Pinapútol
nila nang káhoy si Hwŕn, and this, indeed, is the more usual locution.

90. On the use or non-use of an anaphoric subject (siyŕ, silŕ, itň)
see § 87.



c. The predicate.

91. The predicate may be (1) a transient word with its modifiers,
(2) a static word with its modifiers, or (3) an object expression.



(1) Transient predicate.

92. Transient words fall into four classes according to the four
relations which a subject may bear to them when they are used as
predicate. We may designate these classes by the following names:

1. active: the subject is viewed as an actor: Sumůsúlat sya nang
líham. He (subject) is writing a letter, letters. Sya y pumútol nang
káhoy. He (subject) cut some wood. Umalěs syŕ. He went away.

2. direct passive: the subject is viewed as an object fully affected
or produced: Sinúlat nya ang líham. Was-written by-him the letter
(subject), i. e. The letter was written by him, He wrote the
letter. Pinútol nya ang káhoy. Was-cut by-him the wood (subject),
i. e. He cut the wood.

3. instrumental passive: the subject is viewed as a means, an
instrument, something given forth or parted from: Isinúlat nya ang
kwčnto. Was-written-down by-him the story (subject), i. e. He wrote
the story. Ipinútol nya ang gúlok. Was-cut-with by-him the bolo
(subject), i. e. He used the bolo for cutting, He cut with the bolo.

4. local passive: the subject is viewed as an object partly
or less fully affected, as a place or sphere: Sinulátan nya
akň. Was-written-to by-him I (subject), i. e. He wrote me. Pinutúlan
nya ang káhoy. Was-cut-from by-him the wood (subject), i. e. He cut
a piece off the wood.

For a detailed description of these classes of transient words,
see Morphology.

93. In general the choice between these four constructions is made
in accordance with the logical situation: the definite, known object
underlying the predication as starting-point of discourse is chosen
as subject: Binigyŕn nya akň nang aklŕt. Was-given-to (local passive)
by-him I (enclitic subject) a book, books, i. e. He gave me a book,
books. Ibinigay nyŕ sa ákin ang aklŕt. Was-given (instrumental passive)
by-him to me the book (subject), i. e. He gave me the book. In the
first example the speaker is talking about himself, in the second
about a certain book.

94. However, the active construction is avoided whenever any object
other than the actor is available as subject. Especially are active
constructions with an anaphoric subject (siyŕ, silŕ, itň) avoided
wherever a passive construction is at hand. Thus, in the instance in §
93, even if "he", the actor, were the real subject of discourse, one
would rarely use the active construction: Sya y nagbigŕy sa ákin nang
aklŕt. He (subject) gave (active) me a book, books. Even elements which
we should look upon as somewhat indefinite are preferred as subjects
to an actor: Kinúha nya ang isa ng aklŕt. Was-taken (direct passive)
by-him a book (subject), i. e. He took a (certain) book (he knew,
or I know which one or what kind).

The active construction is thus confined to instances in which the
object-ideas other than the actor are entirely vague and undetermined
or lacking: Umalěs syŕ. He went away. Sya y kumúha nang aklŕt. He
took a book, some books (no matter to him or to me which one or what
kind). Sumůsúlat sya nang líham. He is writing a letter, letters. Sya
y pumútol nang káhoy. He cut some wood. Kumáin sya nang kánin. He ate
some boiled rice; but: Kináin nya ang kánin. Was-eaten (direct passive)
by him the boiled rice (subject), i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

If, in spite of the presence of other definite objects, the actor is
very decidedly emphasized, a different construction (§§ 104.107.) is
used.



(2) Static predicate.

95. The predicate may consist of a static word with its modifiers:
Ang bátŕ ay mabaět. The child is good. Iyŕ y masamŕ`. That's bad,
wrong. Pulŕ ang panyo ng itň. This handkerchief is red.

96. This type of predicate is regular in word-questions: the
question word is used as predicate; it precedes the subject: Páno
ang pagkágusto ninyň sa trabáho-ng-kanyunéro? How (predicate) your
liking for (i. e. How did you like) the artillery-service? Papáno ang
pagsasábi sa wíka ng Tagálog nang salitŕ ng Inglčs na "scissors"? How
(predicate) the saying in the Tagalog language of the English word
"scissors"? i. e. How does one say "scissors" in Tagalog? Gaáno
ang pagkakagalět nila? How great, How serious was (predicate)
their quarrel?

97. This is the construction of the interrogative pronouns in questions
asking for the identity of an object,--unless, indeed, these belong
rather under type (3). The interrogative pronouns are the following:

(a) síno who? (singular and plural), síno-síno (explicit plural, § 63,
end) is used of persons only, and then only when the answer expected
is a name or the equivalent; it asks for the identity of a person:
Sínu ka? Who are (predicate) you (subject)? Sínu yŕn?--Akň. Who's
that? i. e. Who's there?--I. Sínu ya ng tumútuktók? Who's that
knocking? Síno ang nagbigŕy sa iyň? Who (predicate) the one-who-gave
(sc. it, anaphoric) to you (subject)? i. e. Who gave it to you? Síno
ang nagsábi sa iyň? Who told you? Who told you so? Síno sa kanila ng
dalawŕ ang nagnákaw? Which of the two committed the theft? The two are
known by name or, at any rate, as personalities. Síno-síno sa manga
báta` ang iyo ng nŕhúle sa panguumět? Which ones of the children
(predicate) did you catch pilfering? literally: the ones caught by
you at pilfering, subject.

(b) anň what? what kind of? how?, explicit plural anň-anň, asks for
the identity of a thing or for the description, character, condition
of a person or of a thing: Ano yŕn?--Itň y librň. What (predicate)
is that you have there (subject)?--This is a book. An yňn?--Yo y
súnog. What's that over there?--It's a fire. Anň ang ngálan mo? What
is your name? Ano ang sábi mo? What do you say? Ano ang íbig mo? What
do you want? Ano-anň ang pinagsabč ni Hwŕn sa iyň? What things did
Juan tell you?, literally: What things (predicate) the things said
by Juan to you? Anu kŕ? What sort of person are you? Anň ang lagŕy
nang manga báta`?... nang asáwa mo? ... nang mé báhay? What (or How)
is the condition of (i. e. How are) the children? ... your husband
or wife? ... your wife?

(c) alěn which? which one? which ones?, explicit plural alěn-alěn,
is used of persons and things; it asks neither for identification
(persons, síno; things, anň) nor for characterization (anň), but
for indication, by pointing or by description of the place or some
other unessential feature, of persons or things: Alěn ang gustu
mň? Which one, Which ones do you want? Alěn sa kanila ng dalawŕ ang
nagnákaw? Which of the two (e. g., of these two strange men) committed
the theft? Alin-alěn sa manga púnu-ng-káhoy ang iyo ng tinagŕ`? Which
ones of the trees did you cut down?

98. Of the numerative pronouns (§ 66), boň`, ibŕ, and ilŕn (in this
use interrogative) are used as static predicates: Itň y buň`. This
is entire, complete, unbroken. Hindí ko gusto iyŕn; ibŕ ang áki ng
gustň. Not by-me wanted (static predicate) that (subject); different
(predicate) that by-me wanted (subject), i. e. I don't want that; what
I want is different, I want something else. Ilŕn ang manglilígaw? How
many are the suitors?

99. Of the modifiers of indefinite quantity (§ 69) several are used
as static predicates: Sya y walá na. He is or was gone already. Itň y
walŕ`. This does not take place, does not appear, falls away. Malakě
ang súnog. The fire was great. Marámi ang nagsŕsábi nitň. Many are
they who say this.

100. For the disjunctive forms of personal pronouns and of síno as
static predicates, see § 169. For local expressions, see § 211. For
entire predications as static predicates, § 112 f., quotations, § 114.



(3) Object expression as predicate.

101. If the predicate is an object expression, it may have three
different forms: (A) definite, (B) circumlocutory definite, and
(C) indefinite.

102. (A) A definite object predicate consists simply of a word or
phrase in the object construction (§ 61 ff.); it has therefore the
same structure as a subject. Usually this predicate precedes and
is emphatic (emotionally dominant): Itň ang áki ng těráhan. This is
(predicate) my dwelling (subject), i. e. Why, it's here I'm at home!

103. The definite object predicate is especially emphatic in sentences
that have as subject a transient word (with or without modifiers)
in object construction: Si Hwŕn ang nagnákaw. It was Juan who did
the stealing. Siya rěn ang kanya ng iněíbig. It was he whom she
loved. Both nagnákaw and iněíbig are transient.

104. When an emphatic actor cannot be used as subject of a transient
predicate (owing to the presence of other definite object ideas, §
94), it is often used as the predicate in this construction,--the
transient part of the sentence being put into object construction and
used as subject. Thus, if, in the sentence: Itň y ginawá ni Hwŕn. This
(subject) was-done (direct passive) by Juan, the idea of "Juan", the
actor, should become dominant, one would not use the active transient
predicate ("Si Hwŕn ay gumawá nitň"), for the idea of "this" is too
definite to allow of the actor's functioning as subject; one says
instead: Si Hwŕn ang gumawá nitň. It was Juan who did this, with
"Juan" as definite object predicate and the rest of the sentence,
objectivized, as subject. So: Siyŕ ang nagbigŕy sa ákin nang aklŕt. It
was he that gave me the (or a) book, books. (cf. § 93). Ikaw ngŕ`
ang nagsábi niyŕn. It was you yourself who said that.

105. Less commonly the subject precedes the predicate. In this
case the construction is quite normal and unemphatic; if there is a
transient element it usually stands in the predicate: Itň y ang áki ng
těráhan. This (subject) is my dwelling. Si Hwŕn ay ang nagnákaw. Juan
is the one who did the stealing.

106. (B) In the circumlocutory definite object predicate the
central element is the pronoun siyŕ (in this use never enclitic),
which is followed by modifiers which express the real content of the
predicate. In this use siyŕ may apply to inanimate objects and to
two or more objects (§ 63). The subject, which has always a moderate
degree of emphasis, usually precedes: Itň ay sya kň ng těráhan. This
is what is my home, i. e. This is where I live. In most cases the
real content of the predicate is a transient word (with or without
modifiers): Si Pédro ay sya ng tumútuktňk. Pedro is the one (siyŕ)
who is knocking. (Less emphatic than the violently transposed Si
Pédro ang tumútuktňk. It's Pedro who is knocking, of type A). Ang
pagkátahol nang áso ay syŕ ng ikinágising nang báta`. The barking of
the dog is what woke up the child. Ang manga pangparikět ay sya kň ng
pinamutúlan. The kindlings are what I have cut up. Occasionally the
predicate precedes: Baká sya ng ikapútol nang pinggŕ ang kabigatŕn nang
buhángin. Perhaps that which may break the carrying-pole (predicate)
the weight of the sand (subject), i. e. See that the weight of the
sand doesn't break the carrying-pole.

107. This construction, like that of type (A), is often used when a
transient predicate is not permissible with an actor-subject; here,
however, the sentence is not, as in (A), reversed, but the actor
is used as subject and the rest of the sentence as true content of
the circumlocutory predicate: Si Hwŕn ay syŕ ng gumawá nito. Juan
is the one who did this. Si Pédro ay syŕ ng nagbigŕy sa ákin nang
aklŕt. Pedro is the person who gave me the book.

108. A predicate of this type may, in its entirety and as a unit,
be objectivized with ang and used as subject of a sentence of type
(A): Ang médiko lámang ay sya nyŕ ng mŕkŕkatálo. The doctor alone will
be the one to oppose him (literally: he by-him who will-be-opposed,
direct passive): Ang médiko lámang ang sya nyŕ ng mŕkŕkatálo. It is
the doctor alone who will be the one to oppose him. Ang bintána ng
iyŕn ang syŕ ng kahůhulúgan nang báta`! It's that window that will
be the place where the child will fall out!

109. (C) The indefinite object predicate has the structure of an object
expression, but lacks ang (§ 68). In meaning it corresponds, roughly,
to an English noun-predicate without the: Itň y librň. This (subject)
is a book (predicate). Yo y súnog. That's a fire. Itň y mabúti ng
librň. This is a good book. Si Hwŕn ay isa ng magnanákaw. Juan is
a thief. Masípag na táo itň. Industrious people (predicate) these
(subject), i. e. These are industrious people.

110. As indefinite object predicates occur especially the expressions
of indefinite quantity (§ 69). In this use they have possessive
value: Sya y máy famílya. He has a family. May ápat na pu ng paŕ ang
hába`. Having forty feet (predicate) the length (subject), i. e. The
length is about forty feet. Sya y máy-roo ng aklŕt. He has a book,
books. Sya y wala ng aklŕt. He has no book, no books. Sya y marámi
ng salapč`. He has much money. Hindí maláo ng panahňn ang kanya ng
paghihimatŕy. Her fainting-spell did not last long. Itň y malakě ng
kagamitŕn. This has great use, is much used.

It is to be noted that all the modifiers of indefinite quantity, except
máy, which is pretonic, are orthotonic and therefore followed by an
enclitic subject (§ 89): Máy-roon sya ng aklŕt. He has no book. But:
May dalawŕ sya ng anŕk. He has two children.



d. Subordinate predications.

111. An entire predication may be used as subject, predicate,
or attribute in a longer sentence. The use of such subordinate
predications is, however, limited (as opposed, e. g., to English usage)
by the habit of freely using transient words (with their modifiers)
as attributes: ang súpot nang kwaltŕ na kanila ng ibinigŕy pagdáka
sa kanila ng magúlang the bag of money by-them given at once to their
parents, i. e. ... which they gave.... It is limited, further, by the
freedom of omitting anaphoric elements (§ 87): Ang púno` ay tumúbo
hanggŕng sa magbúnga. The tree grew until (sc. it, subject) bore fruit.

112. Predications as predicates occur very frequently. Ang ginawá
nya ay umalěs sya. That done by-him (subject) was went-away he
(predication, as predicate), i. e. What he did was, he went away. Ang
mabúti ay itápun nilŕ ang manga báta`. The best thing (to do) was
that they should abandon the children. Ang ísip ko y balat lámang nang
itlňg itň. My thought was (i. e. I thought) this was only an egg-shell.

113. Especially common is a whole predication as a predicate describing
or characterizing the subject: Ang kúba ay mahína` ang katawŕn. The
hunchback was: weak was his body, i. e. was weak of body. Ang ikapitu
ng báta` ay hindí kináin ang kanya ng tinápay. The seventh child
was: not was-eaten his bread, i. e. did not eat his bread. Ang isa
nyŕ ng anŕk ay pitň nŕ ng taňn ang gúlang. His one child was now
seven years of age. This construction, together with the use of
impersonal expressions (§ 84) makes possible such a sentence as:
Ang manga karitňn ... ay gabě kung ipalákad. The wagons ... were:
it-was-night when (sc. they, anaphoric subject) were-made-to-go,
i. e. The wagons were driven at night.

114. Direct quotations as predicates are frequent: "Isŕ!" ang sábi
nang bulŕg. "One!" was what the blindman said. "Túnay bagŕ ng akň y
iněíbig mo?" ang tanňng nang dalága ni Andrčs sa kanyŕ. "Is it really
true that you love me?" was the question of Andrés' young lady to him.

115. A predication as subject is rare: Mabúti táyo y dumoňn sa isa
ng lugŕr.... It is best (predicate) that we go to a place.... Hindí
bihíra` ang manga táo y nanghůhúle nang buhŕy na unggň`. It is not
rare that people go catching live monkeys. It will be noted that
these predications are not objectivized, cf. § 88.

116. Occasionally, however, the predication used as subject is
objectivized: Hindí bihíra` ang magkalunňd ang manga táo. It is
not rare that people get drowned, or The occurrence that people get
drowned is not rare. Súkat nŕ ang ikŕw ay magpasalámat. It is fitting
now that you be thankful.

117. For predications as attributes see the section on attribution.



e. Omission of predicate.

118. The use of a predicate, or of the central element of a predicate
is (like that of any other element, § 87) optional when, if used, it
would be anaphoric: (Si Hwŕn namŕn ay sumagňt: "Matŕr!" at sa hulč)
si Andrčs ang kanya ng "Sě!" (Then Juan answered "Matar!" and last)
Andrés his "Si!" The form of the sentence with the predicate (which
is anaphoric from the preceding sumagňt answered) would be: ... si
Andrčs ay isinagňt ang kanya ng "Sě!" ... Andrés was: was-answered
his "Si!", i. e. Andrés answered his "Si!",--a sentence of the kind
described in § 113.



3. Attributes.

119. We may distinguish four constructions in which an attribute
may stand: 1. Conjunctive attribution: the attribute is joined by
means of the particle na or ng: isa ng táo a person, one person;
2. Disjunctive attribution: the attribute, which is always an object
expression, stands in a special disjunctive form, ang, for instance,
being changed to nang: ang púno nang unggň` the tree of the monkey;
3. Local attribution: the attribute, which is always an object
expression, stands in a special local form, ang, for instance,
being always changed to sa: nalělígo sa ílog bathing in the river;
4. Absolute attribution: the attribute merely precedes or follows:
hindí táma` not correct.

In a sense the last three constructions, which do not employ the
particle na, ng, stand opposed to the first, which does. Constructions
2 and 3 make it possible to speak, in a very wide sense, of three
"cases" in which an object expression may stand: "subjective" ang
ílog the river, "disjunctive" nang ílog of the river, and "local"
sa ílog in the river; but it is to be observed that these "cases"
are not confined to any class of words, but appear in any word or
phrase when it stands in the object construction. [7]

120. In position attributes may be:

A. Loosely joined. In this position occur only attributes of a
predicate (or of an entire non-predicative sentence). Their treatment
resembles that of a non-enclitic subject (§ 89): they either precede
the rest of the sentence with ay, y, or follow at the end of the
sentence: Doňn ay syŕ y nahigŕ`. There (doňn, loosely joined) he lay
down. Nahánap ko nŕ ang sombréro sa lahŕt nang súlok. I have looked
for the hat in every corner. The phrase beginning with sa is loosely
joined; it follows all the rest of the sentence, including even the
subject, ang sombréro.

In the placing of enclitics a loosely joined attribute is ignored:
Pagulŕn ay gamítin mo ang kapóte. When it rains use your rain-coat. The
enclitic mň follows the first orthotonic word of the predicate (which
it modifies), not counting the loosely joined pagulŕn.

When a loosely joined attribute precedes, the ay, y is in some cases
left off: Dahil díto tináwag nya ang kaybígan nya. Therefore he called
his friend. The position of the enclitic niyŕ shows that dahil díto
is loosely joined, but ay, y is not used.

Occasionally a loosely joined attribute is preceded by the subject
and only one ay, y is used: Karanyúwa y ang kosinéro y upahŕn. Usually
(loosely joined) the cook is hired; but also: Ang kosinéro karanyúwa
y upahŕn.

B. Closely joined. The attribute immediately precedes or follows that
modified: hindí táma` not correct; ang púno nang unggň` the tree of
the monkey.

C. Enclitic. They follow immediately on the first word of the
expression modified, counting closely joined attributes, but not
loosely joined: Hindí ko nŕlŕláman. Not by-me (it) is-known, i. e. I
don't know. ang mahahába nya ng paŕ his (niyŕ enclitic) long legs.

121. Some attributes always precede (so e. g. hindě`, § 239); others
always follow (so, for instance, disjunctive attributes, § 171).



a. Conjunctive attributes.

122. A conjunctive attribute is connected with the word or phrase
which it modifies by the atonic particle na. Normally ng takes the
place of na after a vowel, n, or the glottal stop (see Phonetics):
mabúti ng aklŕt good book, or: aklŕt na mabúti.

However, na and ng are not exactly equivalent. Predications, longer
phrases, and, frequently, transient expressions are joined with na
even where ng is possible: isa ng malakě ng higŕnte na nalělígo`
a big giant who was bathing.

On the other hand, some constructions use na rarely or not at all:
where ng cannot be used the particle is then omitted and we have
absolute attribution. These constructions will be described under
the latter heading.

In the formation of compound words (see Morphology) na is never used,
while ng is a regular element. This latter circumstance sometimes
makes it difficult to determine whether a given expression is a
conjunctive phrase or a compound word.

123. Conjunctive attributes are closely joined and either precede
or follow; for this reason it is sometimes undetermined which of the
elements connected is the attribute, which the element modified.

124. The elements connected by conjunctive attribution are viewed
as constituting a single larger element. Conjunctive attribution is
the normal and general relation between modifier and modified and
includes relations that in many other languages (such as English)
are viewed in manifold ways. We may divide the construction roughly
into three types, although these actually merge into each other:
(1) quality, (2) manner, and (3) complement.

Not included in this division are the cases where conjunctive
attribution alternates with absolute (§ 122), which will be treated
of under the latter heading, and a type which in meaning is so closely
parallel with disjunctive attribution that it will be more economical
to treat it under this head (§§ 165.168).



(1) Conjunctive attributes of quality.

125. Conjunctive attributes of the quality type are used chiefly in
object expressions. They have no fixed order: ang mabúti ng aklŕt the
(a) good book, or: ang aklŕt na mabúti. ang sumůsúlat na báta` the
writing child, the child that is writing, or: ang báta ng sumůsúlat.

126. When they precede a personal name the whole expression is preceded
by ang, but when they follow si suffices: ang báta ng si Hwŕn the
child Juan, little Juan, si Hwŕ ng Talúnan Juan who is always defeated
(as a nickname).

127. Conjunctive attributes of quality tend to precede when they are
emphatic or in contrast; when fixed they tend to follow: Ang marúnong
na pagňng at ang ulňl na unggň`. The clever turtle and the foolish
monkey. Si Hwŕ ng Pípe ay nŕkíta námin sa tulŕy. We saw Dumb Juan on
the bridge. ang báo ng babáye the lower half of the cocoanut shell, ang
báo ng malambňt the soft shell of the cocoanut, ang wíka ng Kastíla`
the Spanish language. Especially those expressing material tend to
follow: ang báhay na batň a stone house, ang koróna ng tiněk a crown
of thorns, ang atsára ng papáya papaw salad, pickled papaw, ang tinóla
ng manňk chicken stew, ang sáko ng pálay a sack of rice. A modifier
expressing the special kind always follows: ang sála ng pagnanákaw
the crime which is (i. e. of) theft, ang bísyo ng paginňm the vice
of drinking, ang larň ng taguŕn the game which consists of hiding,
the game of hide-and-seek, kanína ng umága a little while ago in the
morning, i. e. this morning, ilŕ ng óras na pagsasŕlitáan a few hours
of conversation, ang bandŕ ng kataasŕn (or: itaŕs) the direction
(which is) north, i. e. the north; so: ang bandŕ ng kababáan (or:
ibabŕ`) the south, silángan (or: sělangánan) the east, kalunúran the
west, ang gawě ng kánan the right-hand side, kaliwŕ` the left.

128. Titles and the like precede: ang báo ng si Maryŕ the widow Maria.

129. The personal pronouns precede their conjunctive attributes:
sila ng tatlň they three, Si Pédro ay syŕ ng tumútuktňk. Pedro is
the one who is knocking (§ 106 ff.).

130. The demonstrative pronouns as conjunctive attributes usually
follow: ang táo ng itň this person, this man, ang tatlň ng itň these
three, Ang korbáta ng irč ay bágo. This necktie is new.

Occasionally, however, they precede, especially with a longer
expression. In this case ang is not used (§ 64, end): ito ng súpot ko
nang kwŕlta this bag of money of mine; iyo ng úna ng kumalabňg that
first thing which made a thud; Itň ng báhay ang binili kň. This house
is what I bought, It's this house I've bought, This is the house I've
bought (§ 102 ff.).

Under emphasis the demonstrative pronoun may both precede and follow:
ito ng táo ng itň this man here, iyo ng táo ng yaňn that man over
there.

131. The interrogative pronouns precede; ang is not used (§ 65). See
also kaníno, § 168. The meanings of the interrogative pronouns as
conjunctive attributes are:

síno which? (of several known people): sínu ng táo? which one? which
ones?

alěn which? (of several known things): alě ng lugŕr which place,
which places? alě ng bandŕ? which way? (e. g. at a cross-roads)
alě ng manga búnga? which fruits? which ones of the fruits?

anň what? what kind of? (of persons or things not known), also, in
exclamations, what...! what great...! Anu ng ílog itň? What river
is this? ano ng bandŕ? what direction? which way? (of all possible
points of the compass) anu ng táo what sort of a person? what sort
of people? who? Ano ng hína`! What weakness!

132. The numerative pronouns mostly precede, and the use of ang
is optional (§ 66, end); ibŕ other, however, requires ang when, as
conjunctive attribute, it begins an object phrase. Of the others,
karamíhan most and the particle báwat every are not used in this
construction, and lahŕt all occurs only as modifier of the personal
pronouns, which (by § 129) precede. The particle bála any, on the
other hand, occurs only as conjunctive attribute: ang iba ng báhay
the other house, another house, sila ng lahŕt they all, all of them,
bála ng táo any person, anyone, ang bála ng táo any one (of a given
group), boň ng báyan all the town, everybody in town, ang boň ng báyan
the entire town, everybody in the town, ilŕ ng táo ng matalíno a few
intelligent men, ang ilŕ ng sandalč` a few moments.

133. The cardinal numerals usually precede; ang is optional (§ 67):
isa ng itlňg one egg, an egg; ang isa ng itlňg the one egg.

134. The tens, hundreds, etc. of the cardinal numerals are always
modified by isŕ one or a higher unit. The phrase so formed precedes
that counted. The higher numerals are: pů` ten, daŕn, raŕn hundred,
líbo thousand, laksŕ` million, yúta` billion: isa ng pů ng táo,
sŕ m pu ng táo ten men, ápat na raŕ ng báhay four-hundred houses.

135. The teens are expressed by labě preceding the simple numerals
as conjunctive modifier: labě ng isŕ ng aklŕt eleven books, labě ng
tatlň ng áraw thirteen days.

136. The Spanish numerals, however, (used in dates, § 67) follow:
ang taň ng míle-nobisyčntos-dňs the year 1902.

137. saríle self (see § 175) is used as a conjunctive attribute in
the sense of own: Walá sya ng saríli ng baět. He has no self-respect
(literally: own respect).

138. Of the modifiers that form expressions of indefinite quantity
all except máy precede as conjunctive attributes; for examples see §
69 f. In object expressions maláon, malakě and marámi do not differ
from normal conjunctive attributes; examples in § 70.

139. Expressions of indefinite quantity as units may stand in
conjunctive attribution. They then have possessive value: ang háre
ng may súngay the king who had horns; ang kapútol na wala ng dáhon
the part without leaves.

140. Conjunctive attribution includes many cases which in English
would be envisaged rather as appositions of two objects: ang báta
ng si Hwŕn the boy Juan, si Hwŕ ng Bíbas Juan the Jester, Sya y may
tánga ng pamálo`. He has hold of a stick. Tángan that grasped, thing
grasped is conjunctive attribute of pamálo` club, stick. ang magának
na sina Bantňg the Bantog family, tatlň ng magkakayibíga ng estudyŕnte
ng magkababáyan three friends (ng) students (ng) fellow-townsmen,
i. e. three student friends from the same town; ang tatlú ng
magkakaybíga ng si Pédro, si Hwŕn, at si Andrčs the three friends,
Pedro, Juan, and Andrés; ang salitŕ ng "bámos" the word "vamos".

141. When a longer expression is used as a conjunctive attribute
of quality, it usually follows, and na is often preferred to ng:
ang parúsa na hindí mo gustň the punishment not by-you liked,
i. e. the punishment you don't like; isŕ ng usŕ ng nangěngináin sa
gúbat a deer grazing in the jungle; ang isŕ (sa manga kaybígan nilŕ)
na sya ng magíging hukňm one (of their friends) who will be judge;
cf. the predicates described in § 106. ang manga kúra na sya ng manga
maliliět na háre` the priests (who are) those (who are) little kings,
i. e. the priests, those veritable little kings.

142. An object expression is frequently followed by an entire
predication of the type described in § 113, as conjunctive attribute:
Ang tagahúle ay isa ng táo ng ang katungkúlan ay humúle nang ano mŕn o
síno mŕn. A catcher is a person (whose) duty is to catch anything or
anyone. ang manga púno-ng-káhoy na masasarŕp ang búnga trees (whose)
fruits are tasty; isa ng táo ng malakě ang kapangyaríhan a person
(whose) power is great.



(2) Conjunctive attributes of manner.

143. Conjunctive attributes of manner precede or follow. When they
precede a predicate they stand as the first orthotonic word and are
immediately followed by enclitics (such as an enclitic subject pronoun,
§ 89), after which comes the na or ng, and then the central element of
the predicate: Syŕ y mabúte ng tumugtňg. She plays (music) well. This
example illustrates the identity of conjunctive attributes of manner
and of quality, for mabúte ng tumugtňg may be looked upon indifferently
as a transient predicate (§ 92) with mabúte well as attribute of
manner, or as an indefinite object predicate (§ 109) a good player,
in which mabúte good is an attribute of quality. Other forms of
the same sentence are: Mabúti sya ng tumugtňg. (siyŕ enclitic),
Syŕ y tumugtňg na mabúti. So further: Isípin mo ng mabúti. Consider
it well. Literally: Be-considered by-you (mň enclitic) well. Iyňn
ay tůtúbo na mabúti. It will grow well. Silŕ y magkakasáma ng
nagsipamarěl. They as-companions (i. e. in company, together) went
hunting. Or: They were companion (quality) hunters. Madalí sya ng
tumakbň. Quickly he ran. Talagŕ ng mahigpět ang tapňn nang bóte ng
iyŕn. The stopper of that bottle is certainly tight. Mahigpět tight,
as central element of the predicate, is modified by talagŕ fated,
by fate, by nature, certainly. Putikŕ ng dumatěng si Salaměn sa
báhay. "Mirror" (as name of a dog) came home all muddy. Or: ... was a
muddy comer. Paputňl nya ng tinagŕ` ang bisěg ni Hwŕn. He cut Juan's
arm transversely. Kinalaykay kň ng patipňn ang manga sangŕ ng maliliět
nang káhoy. I raked into-a-heap the twigs of-the trees.

144. A phrase of more than one word usually follows that modified;
frequently na is used instead of ng: Nádala nyŕ na hindí sinásadyŕ`
sa kanya ng pagalěs ang áki ng páyong. Was-taken by-him not intendedly
in his departing my umbrella, i. e. In leaving he inadvertently took
my umbrella.

145. The numerative pronoun lahŕt is used as a conjunctive attribute of
manner in the sense of entirely, completely. It follows that modified:
Ang manga lalagyŕn ay půnúa ng lahŕt. The containers are entirely full.

146. Expressions of indefinite quantity as conjunctive attributes
of manner follow: Ang manga táo ay nagtakbúha ng walŕ ng túto. The
people all ran without order, in disorder.

147. The particles lubhŕ` very and lálo` more usually precede: Lubhŕ
ng malakě ang gálit ni Pédro. Pedro's wrath was very great. Lálu ng
lumakě ang kanya ng gálit. His wrath grew still greater.

148. The particle mulí` again follows: Tátakbo sya ng mulě`. He will
run again. Ang kamakalawŕ ay hindí na dárating na mulč`. The day
before yesterday will never come again.

149. A conjunctive attribute of manner may express the time throughout
which: Syŕ y nanggupět at nangáhit na maláo ng panahňn. He did
hair-cutting and shaving for a long time. Silŕ y nagtítira na tatlu
ng áraw. They stay three days. May ila ng bwŕ ng ang manga útos ay
mahihigpět. For several months (literally: having several months, §
69, end) the orders were strict.

150. A word repeated as its own conjunctive attribute of manner
expresses a high degree (intensity): Sya y bingě. He is deaf. Sya
y bingě ng bingě. He is stone deaf. Inět si Pédro. Pedro is hot,
is angry. Inět na inět si Pédro. Pedro is in a rage. líhim na líhim
very secretly, malakě ng malakě very large.



(3) Conjunctive attributes as complements.

151. The general sphere of conjunctive attribution includes cases where
one element involves another as result or content. The latter follows
and is in many instances plainly viewed as the attribute. In some
instances, however, the former may just as well be looked upon as a
modifier, usually of quality, sometimes also of manner. The transition
from these latter types to that of the complement appears, indeed,
in all possible stages, and no real boundary can be drawn. Sya y
mabúti ng tumugtňg (nang piyáno). She is a good player (of the piano),
or She plays (the piano) well,--see § 143--can be analyzed also: She
is good that (she, anaphoric subject omitted, § 87) plays the piano;
and in some instances this last analysis is the only possible one.

Other examples illustrating the merging of the three types we
have set up are the following: Malápit na siya ng makatápos nang
karéra. He was already near that (he) end his course, i. e. near
ending his course, almost through his course; or: a near ender,
cf. isa ng báya ng malápit a near-by town. Ang pagmamarúnong ni Hwŕn
ay ginágawa ng katatawanŕn nang manga nakŕkŕkilála sa kanyŕ. Juan's
pretending to be wise is made fun of by those who know him, literally:
... is-being-made (ginágawŕ`) that (it) is a laughing-stock, or else:
... a being-made laughing-stock. Cf. ang gawě ng húkay the to-be-made
ditch, i. e. the ditch that is to be made, where only the quality
interpretation is possible. Magtúlin ka ng lumákad. Walk faster. This
can be interpreted as Be a fast walker, or Walk faster, or Be-quick
that (you) walk; and this last interpretation comes nearest to the
original in so far as magtúlin is an active transient form used
in commands rather than an expression suited to an idea of quality
or of manner. Sya y nagdŕdahilŕ ng may sakět. He alleges that (he)
is sick. Ang pagsakŕy sa kabáyo ay hindí magaŕ ng pagarálan. Riding
horseback is not easy that (it) be-learned, i. e. not easy to learn,
or: not an easy thing-to-be-learned. ang pinakamahúsay na magsalitŕ`
nang Latěn the best that (he) should speak Latin, or: the best speaker
of Latin; Hwag kŕ, Hwŕn, pumásuk na sekréta. Don't go as a spy (or to
be a spy), Juan. Ginawá nya si Hwŕn na barbéro nang háre`. Was-made
by-him Juan that (he) be barber of-the king, i. e. He made Juan barber
royal. Si Hwŕn ay pinamŕmagatŕn nang marámi na isa ng doktň. Juan is
reputed by the people that (he) is (i. e. as) a learned man.

152. The simplest cases are those where both of the expressions
connected by na, ng refer to the same person or thing, as in the
above examples. The following are less doubtful cases of complement
construction of this kind: Nagpůpumílit sya ng mŕtúto. He strives to
get educated. Si Hwŕn at si Maryŕ ay nagkásundo ng pakasŕl. Juan and
Maria have agreed that they (i. e. to) get married. Inanyáhan silŕ
ni Hwŕn na magpasyŕl. They were invited by Juan that they (i. e. to)
go walking. Maári mo ngŕ ng ihúlug sa koréyo ang áki ng súlat? Can
you please mail my letter? Literally: maári ... ng ihúlug a possible
thing-to-be thrown or capable that (it) be thrown. Naŕári akň ng malígo
makálawa maghápon. I am able that (I) bathe (i. e. to bathe) twice
a day. Pinabayáan niya kamě ng umalěs. We were permitted by him to
depart. Hinantŕy nya ng matápus ang mísa. The mass was-awaited by-him
that it end, i. e. He waited until the mass was ended. Anň ang gustu mu
ng sabíhin? What is desired by-you that (it) be-said? i. e. What do you
mean to say? Hindí ko gustň ng mŕkatálo si Hwŕn. Not by-me desired that
(he) be-opposed is Juan, i. e. I don't want Juan to be my opponent.

153. Clear cases of the complement construction are those in which
the two elements connected refer to different persons or things:
Nagyayá sya ng umuwč`. He advised that (they, anaphoric) go home. (34,
12.) Ang pagkámasěd nya sa lángit ay syŕ ng nagpakilála sa kanyŕ na
úulŕn. His glance at the sky was what showed him that (it, see § 84)
was going to rain.

154. When the former of the two elements is an object expression (or
similar element) the complement construction is evident: ang kaibigŕ
ng mŕtúto the desire that (he) get educated, i. e. the desire to
get an education. ang pagkágusto nyŕ na kumáin nang nyňg his desire
that (he) should-eat cocoanuts, i. e. to eat.... Anu ng tagŕl nya ng
sumísid! What endurance of-him that (he) stay under water! i. e. How
long he stays under water! Ano ng hína mo ng lumákad! What slowness
of-you that (you) walk! i. e. How slowly you walk! Ang tagasulsč ay
isa ng babáye ng may katungkúla ng manahě` o manulsč nang manga púnit
nang damět. A darning-woman is a woman having the duty that (she) patch
or mend the small holes in clothing, i. e. ... whose duty is to....

155. A further sign that the speech-feeling envisages the complement
construction as different from the constructions of quality or
manner appears when enclitics follow the first word of the complement
(i. e. of the second of the connected elements) rather than the first
word of the sentence: this shows that the complement is viewed as a
relatively independent element within the sentence: Maári ngŕ ng ihúlug
mo sa koréyo ang áki ng súlat? Should-be-capable that (it) be-thrown
by-you into the mail (predicate) my letter (subject)? i. e. Can you
please mail my letter? Cf. under § 152 above.

156. Very frequently the complement is an entire predication: ang
panukála` na ang púno` ay tůtúbo` the thought that the tree will
grow; pagkátanaw nyŕ na dumárating ang susň` (at the) seeing by-him
i. e. when he sees that the snail is arriving; ang áraw na kayň ay
dápat magsipagsísi the day that (i. e. when) you ought to repent;
Nagkŕkapálad ang manůnúbok na mŕkíta nya ang kúlam. The spier has the
good fortune that be-seen by-him the magic principle, i. e. ... to
see....

157. A predication as complement is often parallel with a disjunctive
object modifier, i. e. with an object expression used as direct,
instrumental, or local object (§ 184 ff.): Sya y nagsábi ng sya
y marúnong gumupět nang buhňk. He said that he knew how to cut
hair. Ang bulŕg ay nagakála ng gawě ng katatawanŕn ang pagkahúlog nang
kúba`. The blindman thought that the falling of the hunchback should
be made (sc. niyŕ by-him, anaphoric) that (it) be a laughing-stock,
i. e. decided to make fun of the falling ...; that which one says or
thinks, with sábi and akála`, is also expressed as a direct object.

158. Similarly, predications as complements are, in impersonal
constructions, parallel with a subject: Sinábi nya ng sya y marúnong
gumupět nang buhňk. Was-said by-him that he was able to cut hair,
i. e. He said he knew how to cut hair. Hindí bihíra` na ang isa ng
táo y pamagatŕ ng médiko-ng-mangkukúlam. It is not rare that a man is
reputed as a witch-doctor. Cf. the example of predication as subject
in § 116. Hinilěng nya sa unggň` na dikdikěn sya sa lusňng. It was
begged by him of the monkey that he be brayed in the mortar, i. e. He
begged the monkey to bray him in the mortar. Pinabayáan niya na kamě
y umalěs. It was allowed by him that we depart, i. e. He allowed us
to depart, a less usual form than that in § 152. Totoo ngá na akň
y naparoňn sa Balíwag. It is true that I went to Baliwag. Maŕári pú
ba ng kayň y maghintň`? Will it be possible please that you should
stop? i. e. Can you please stop? Inísip nya ng magnákaw sa isa
ng tindáhan. It was planned by him that (he) rob a shop, i. e. He
planned to.... Iniyútus nya ng humúkay. It was ordered by him that
(one, see § 86) should dig, i. e. He ordered people to dig. Hindí
mo gustň ng mŕhúle ka. Not by-you it-is-desired that you be-caught,
i. e. You don't want to be caught.

159. A direct quotation may have the same construction as a
predication: Sinábi nya ng "Bámos!" It-was-said by-him, namely
"Vamos!" i. e. He said "Vamos!"



b. Disjunctive attributes.

160. Only object expressions are used as disjunctive attributes,
and all object expressions have a special form for this use.

161. Those beginning with ang substitute for this particle the atonic
particle nang: ang púno nang unggň` the tree of the monkey, ang laruwŕn
nang báta ng si Hwŕn the toy of the boy Juan; little Juan's toy, toys.

162. Those beginning with si (§§ 59. 126) substitute for this
the atonic particle ni; those beginning with sinŕ (or silŕ, § 60)
substitute nilŕ (or ninŕ), pretonic: ang amŕ ni Hwŕn Juan's father,
ang báhay nila Hwŕn the house of Juan and his family.

163. The personal pronouns as disjunctive attributes take the
following forms: kň my, nitŕ of us two, nátin our (inclusive),
námin our (exclusive); mň thy, niniyň, ninyň your; niyŕ, nyŕ his,
her, nilŕ their.

The monosyllabic forms kň and mň are always enclitic, the others
usually: Hindí ko nŕlŕláman. I don't know, literally: Not by-me (it)
is-known. ang báhay nya his, her house, ang mahahába nya ng paŕ his
long legs, ang hindí karanyúwa ng talíno nyŕ his unusual talents
(niyŕ not enclitic).

164. When these enclitics meet an enclitic subject, they precede,
unless by the general rule (§ 47) the monosyllabic subject kŕ
precedes a disyllabic disjunctive (including niyŕ, nyŕ): Saŕn mo sya
nŕkíta? Where by-you he was-seen? i. e. Where did you see him? Binigyŕn
nya akň nang aklŕt. Was-given by-him I a book, i. e. He gave me
a book. Baká mo iyŕn mŕbúlag. Perhaps by-you it might-be-blinded,
i. e. See that you don't blind it. Hindí ka námin dinatnŕn. Not you
by-us were found-there, i. e. We did not find you in.

165. The personal pronouns have another form, which is used as
a conjunctive attribute of quality (cf. § 124, end) and always
precedes that modified: its meaning, however, is the same as that of
the disjunctive forms just given. These prepositive forms are: ákin
my, kanitŕ thy and my, átin our (inclusive), ámin our (exclusive);
iyň thy, iniyň, inyň your; kaniyŕ, kanyŕ his, her, kanilŕ their,
kaní-kanilŕ their respective, several, various.

Examples: Anň ang iyo ng ngálan? What is your name? or: Anň ang ngálan
mo? ang áki ng amŕ my father, or: ang ama kň, ang kanya ng báhay his,
her house, ang kanyŕ ng mahahába ng paŕ his long legs, ang kanitŕ
ng kwaltŕ our money (i. e. thine and mine), ang kaní-kanilŕ ng báhay
their several houses.

Only a demonstrative pronoun modifier precedes these prepositive forms:
iyŕ ng iyo ng sambalílo ng lúma` that old hat of yours. Exceptions
are rare: ang karanyúwa ng kanila ng kantahěn their usual song;
what they usually sing.

166. The demonstrative pronouns, whether standing alone (§ 64)
or as modifiers at the beginning of an object expression (§ 130),
have the following disjunctive forms: nirč of this (right here),
nitň of this, niyŕn, nyŕn of that, niyňn, nyňn, noňn of that (over
there). Ang kúlay nirě ng korbáta ng irč ay nŕpŕpagítan sa itčm at
sa pulŕ. The color of this necktie (I have on) is between black and
red. ang dúlo nitň the end of this, ang anŕk niyňn that one's child
(e. g. with pointing gesture), ang báhay niyo ng táo ng yaňn the house
of that man over there, ang anŕk noo ng táo ng iyňn the child of that
man over there. The form noňn is used chiefly when the disjunctive
attribute expresses time (§ 192).

167. The interrogative pronoun síno, whether used alone or standing
first in an object expression as attribute (§ 131), has the disjunctive
form níno whose? This form, however, is little used, for, while the
interrogative pronoun is usually emphatic and tends to come first
(§ 96), a disjunctive attribute follows that modified (§ 171). Hence
the form níno is used only under peculiar conditions of emphasis: Ang
sambalílo níno? Whose hat (did you say)? Ibinigŕy sa iyň níno? Given
to you by whom? Sinábi sa iyo níno? Told to you by whom?

168. Instead of níno a prepositive form, kaníno, explicit plural
kaní-kaníno, is ordinarily used; like the prepositive forms of
the personal pronouns it stands in conjunctive attribution and
precedes that modified. Before it the use of ang is optional (§§
65.131); when ang is used the expression is more definite: Kaníno
ng sambalílo? Whose hat? (the ownership of a given hat is inquired
after) Ang kaníno ng sambalílo? Whose hat? (the ownership of each
hat is known; the question asks merely which of them is involved)
Kaníno ng aklŕt iyŕn? Whose book have you there?

169. The prepositive forms of the personal pronouns and of síno are
used also as static predicates expressing possession: Ang librň ng
binŕbása mo kahápon ay ákin. The book you were reading last night is
mine. Kaníno ang aklŕt na iyŕn? Whose is that book? Kaní-kaníno ang
manga báhay na itň? Whose are these houses? The personal pronouns
may be followed by saríle own (cf. § 137): Ang laruwŕ ng itň y áki
ng saríle. This toy is my own.

170. All other expressions which lack ang,--that is, the remaining
interrogative pronouns, the numerative pronouns, the cardinal numerals,
and object expressions in which these as modifiers stand first (§
131 ff.),--prefix nang, atonic, when used as disjunctive attributes:
Sa itaŕs nang anň? On top of what? Takěp nang alě ng kahňn itň? Of
which box is this the cover? ang panukálŕ nang karamíhan the opinion
of the majority; Nakŕkíta akň nang isa ng táo. I saw a man.

171. All disjunctive attributes are closely joined and follow that
which they modify. The only exceptions are the enclitic pronoun forms
and expressions of time (§ 192). A disjunctive attribute precedes a
subject: Binigyŕn nya nang aklŕt si Hwŕn. He gave Juan some books. When
the subject is enclitic, it of course precedes: Binigyŕn nya si Hwŕn
nang aklŕt. Real exceptions, in which a non-enclitic subject precedes
a disjunctive attribute, are not common: Ipinakěkipagpútol ni Hwŕn si
Pédro nang labňng. Juan is asking someone to cut some bamboo-shoots
for Pedro.

172. In meaning disjunctive attribution includes almost all cases
in which an object element is viewed as the attribute of another
element in the sentence. The only exception is the sphere of relations
expressed by local attribution (§ 195 ff.). The meanings may, very
roughly, be divided into seven groups: (1) possessive-partitive, (2)
agent, (3) direct object, (4) instrumental object, (5) local object,
(6) manner, (7) time.

173. (1) Possessive-partitive modifier: ang kanya ng báhay, ang
báhay nya his house, ang púno nang unggň` the tree of the monkey,
ang púno nang káhoy the tree (literally head of wood), ang púno nang
ságing the banana-tree, Sa itaŕs nang anň? On top of what? Nasúnog
ang kalahátě nang púno`. Half of the tree got burned up. Ang báyad
sa útang ni Pédro ay lábis nang dalawŕ ng píso. The payment made to
settle Pedro's debt is too great by two pesos. ang óras nang alaskwátro
the hour of four o'clock, Isŕ ng sundálo ng marúnung nang Latěn. A
soldier who knew Latin, literally: having-knowledge of Latin. ang
sáko nang pálay a rice-sack (cf. § 127), ang larú nang baráha a game
of cards, cf. ang larň ng taguŕn (§ 127) a game consisting of hiding,
hide-and-seek, ang katapusŕn nang gabě the end of the night; cf. ang
katapusŕ ng gabě the night which was the end, the last night, ang
ilŕ ng sandalě nang pagsasŕlitáan a few moments of the conversation;
cf. ang ilŕ ng sandalě ng pagsasŕlitáan a few moments (which consisted)
of conversation. Note: ang báyan nang Balíwag the town of Baliwag,
ang prověnsya nang Pampŕnga the province of Pampanga.

174. The pronoun lahŕt as an object expression is followed by this
kind of attribute: lahŕt nang táo all (of) the people.

175. As an object expression saríle self is modified by disjunctive
pronouns: ang kanyŕ ng saríle his self. Similarly saríle as conjunctive
attribute, in the sense of own: Walá sya ng baět sa kanya ng saríli. He
does not do even himself any good. ang saríle nila ng bŕnda nang
músika their own band of music; Ang kanya ng saríli ng barěl ang
kanya ng ginámit. It was his own gun he used, What he used was his
own gun. Cf. §§ 137 and 169, end.

176. The modifier may be an entire predication: sa lugŕr nang magkasirá
silŕ in place of the (occurrence that) they should become enemies,
i. e. instead of their becoming enemies.

177. Here belongs further the disjunctive attribute with words
expressing association, companionship, or equality: Si Hwána ay
siyŕ ng kabůlúngan ni Maryŕ. Juana is the one with whom Maria is
whispering. Ang mésa ng itň ay kasingkúlay nang kahňn. This table is
of the same color as the chest. Si Hwŕn ay kapantŕy ni Pédro. Juan
is of the same height as Pedro. Kalákip nang súlat ko ng itň ay limŕ
ng píso. Enclosed with this my letter are five pesos. gáya ko like me.

178. Similar is the use of a disjunctive modifier expressing one of
the objects, with expressions involving dual or plural ideas: silŕ
ni Maryŕ they with Maria, i. e. Maria and he (88,42), silŕ ng dalawŕ
ni Maryŕ (92,17).

179. Here belongs the disjunctive attribute in exclamatory sentences
expressing the high degree of a quality; these are formed with anň
(§ 131) and with words with prefix ka- (§ 76): Ano ng hína mo! What
weakness of-you! i. e. How weak you are! Anu ng luwŕt nang hindí
nya pagdatěng! What duration of his not arriving! i. e. How long he
is getting here! Kapulŕ nang panyo ng iyňn! What-great-redness of
that handkerchief! i. e. How red that handkerchief is! Karúnong nang
báta ng si Hwŕn! How much little Juan knows! Kaytipěd na báta` ni
Hwŕn! How-saving a child of Juan! i. e. What an economical boy Juan is!

180. In the preceding and related constructions the attribute may be an
entire predication: Kamuntí nang mŕtamaŕn ang báta`! What-little-lack
of the (occurrence that) the child should-be-hit! i. e. How near
the child came to being hit! Muntí nang máliguwak ang dala nyŕ ng
pulňt. Little-wanting of-the (occurrence that) should-be-spilled
the borne by-him honey, i. e. The honey he was carrying came near
being spilled.

181. (2) A disjunctive attribute expressing the agent corresponds
in sense to the subject of an active transient predicate. When it
modifies a transient word, the corresponding active can be formed:
Sinúlat nya ang líham. He wrote the letter; literally: Was-written
by-him (agent) the letter. Isinúlat nya ang kwčnto. He wrote down the
story. Sinulátan nya akň. He wrote to me. The corresponding active
is: Syŕ y sumúlat.... He wrote.... Cf. § 92. So further: Pinútol
nya ang káhoy. The wood was cut by him; active: Syŕ y pumútol nang
káhoy. He cut some wood. Kinúha nya ang librň. The book was taken
by him; active: Syŕ y kumúha nang librň. He took some book. Áki ng
binitíwan ang bóte. By-me was-let-go-of the bottle, i. e. I let go of
the bottle; active: Bumitěw akň.... Ang hinirŕm nya ng kampět ay iyo
ng kúnin. The borrowed by-him (agent) kitchen-knife by-you (agent)
is to be taken, i. e. Take the kitchen-knife he borrowed.

When the word modified is not transient no clear line can be drawn
between disjunctive attributes of agent and of possessor: ang kanyŕ
ng pagdatěng his arrival, his arriving, or: the arriving by him,
ang gámit nya ng librň the book used by him, ang paupó ni Hwŕ ng
sůgálan the gambling-party invited by Juan, ang dala nyŕ ng pulňt
the honey he is or was carrying, Ang larň ng taguŕn ay gustň nang
manga báta`. The game of hide-and-seek is liked by children. Hindí ko
gustň ang librň ng itň; ibŕ ang áki ng gustň. I don't want this book;
it is a different one I want.

182. When disjunctive agent is the speaker (kň by me or its substitute
áki ng) and the subject is the person addressed (ikŕw, kŕ thou), the
pronoun kitŕ usually takes the place of both. This is the commoner
value of kitŕ (cf. § 63): Sůsungangáin kitŕ. I'll smash your face; the
subject of this direct passive expression is the person addressed, the
agent the speaker: Ikŕw ay áki ng sůsungangáin would be an unidiomatic
equivalent. Ipaglálaba kitŕ nang damět. I shall wash your clothes for
you. The predicate is instrumental passive, with you, the person for
whom, as subject. Hŕhatdan kitŕ nang gátas. I shall deliver milk to
you; local passive.

Occasionally the agent is redundantly added: Kitŕ ay áki ng
parůrusáhan. I shall punish you.

183. A disjunctive agent is used with the words expressing recent
completion of an act with prefix ka- and reduplication: (§ 77):
Karárating ko pa lámang! I have only just arrived. Kakŕkáin ko pa
lámang! I have only just finished eating.

184. (3) A disjunctive attribute expressing the direct object
corresponds to the subject of a direct passive transient predicate: Sya
y kumáin nang kánin. He ate some boiled rice. Passive: Kináin nya ang
kánin. Was-eaten by-him the boiled rice, i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

It will be seen that when the direct object is definite it is more
likely to serve as subject of a passive predicate (§ 94); hence
the disjunctive attribute expressing a direct object has often an
indefinite partitive value. Syŕ y sumúlat nang líham. He wrote some
letters. Syŕ y pumútol nang káhoy. He cut some wood. Bigyŕn mo akň
niyŕ ng túbig. Give me some of that water. Katátagpi ko niyňn! I
have just finished mending that! Sya y naghintŕy nang sŕsabíhin nang
sundálo. He awaited that which was going to be said by the soldier.

185. (4) A disjunctive attribute expressing the instrument corresponds
to the subject of an instrumental passive transient predicate:
Syŕ y sumúlat nang kwčnto. He wrote down a story, stories. Passive:
Isinúlat nya ang kwčnto. Was-written-down by-him the story, i. e. He
wrote down the story.

The indefinite value of the disjunctive attribute is here due to the
same relation as in the preceding type. Pinútol nya nang gúlok ang
káhoy. The wood was cut by him with a bolo; instrumental passive:
Ipinútol nya nang káhoy ang gúlok. Was-used-for-cutting by-him of
wood the bolo, i. e. He cut wood with the bolo. Binigyŕn nya akň nang
aklŕt. He gave me a book.

186. So a direct quotation or an entire predication: Ang bulŕg
ay sumigŕw nang "Tatlň!" The blindman shouted "Three!"; passive:
Isinigŕw nang bulŕg ang "Tatlň!" Ang báwat isa sa kanilŕ ay sumagňt
nang súngay ang kanila ng nŕkěkíta. Each one answered that horns were
what they saw.

187. (5) Disjunctive attributes of place correspond to the subject of
a local passive transient predication: Syŕ y pumanhěk nang báhay. He
entered a house; passive: Pinanhikŕn nya ang báhay. He entered the
house. Ang pagňng ay nagumpisŕ nang pagsisigŕw. The turtle began (a)
shouting; passive: Inumpisahŕn nang pagňng ang pagsisigŕw.

These attributes are in meaning rather close to local attributes
(§ 203); as opposed to the latter they are, however, the real
correspondents of the subject of a local passive transient predication,
expressing a real participation of the object in the action or
occurrence,--whereas the local attributes express the place of the
action as something more or less unaffected and independent.

188. (6) Disjunctive attributes of manner do not correspond to any
kind of subject. When they are used with a transient word the sentence
may, however, be reversed so as to make of the attribute a transient
predicate of a sentence in which the action (as subject) is spoken
of as being "made such and such". Tumakbň sya nang matúlin. He ran
fast. The words nang matúlin are the disjunctive form of an object
expression, ang matúlin, which would resemble German das schnelle. Our
sentence corresponds to: Tinulínan nya ang pagtakbň. Was-made-fast
by-him his running, He ran fast. Syŕ y tumáwa nang malakŕs. He
laughed aloud, cf. Inilakas nyŕ ang pagtáwa. He made his laughing
loud. ... mŕnákaw nang hindí nito nŕlŕláman should be stolen in the
manner of not by-him known, i. e. should be stolen without his knowing
it. mataŕs nang kauntč` higher by a little, a little higher.

189. Expressions of indefinite quantity are used in this way: Silŕ
y nagtakbúhan nang wala ng hintň`. They ran without stopping. This
construction is in rivalry with that of conjunctive attribution
(§ 146).

190. The demonstrative pronouns and the interrogative pronoun anň are
not used as attributes of manner; for this value they have separate
derivatives: ganitň, ganiyŕn, gayňn or ganoňn, and gaáno or gáno. These
forms, moreover, occur also as static predicates and as conjunctive
attributes of quality: ang báwat sumagňt nang ganitň every one who
answered in this way; this could be viewed also as an instrumental
object. Ganitň ang kalŕgáyan nilŕ. Their condition was like this. ang
ganitň ng manga paglalarň` such games as this; Ganyŕn ba lámang ang
kínis mo? Is your skill merely like that? Nakŕsúlat akň kay Hwŕn nang
gayňn dahilŕn sa malakě ko ng pagkagálit. I came to write like that
(or such things, cf. instrumental object) to Juan through my great
anger. Ganoňn ang áki ng pagkáriněg. That was the way (i. e. the form
in which) I heard the thing. Ang gayů ng pananalitŕ` that manner of
speaking, that expression. gánu ng pagpílit? how much effort? Gaáno ang
pagkakagalět nila? How great, how serious is their quarrel? (Cf. § 96).

191. A special case of the disjunctive attribute of manner is the
repetition of a word as its own disjunctive modifier, expressing
continuity or insistence of action: Humábŕ nang humába`. It grew
longer and longer. Ang kanila ng báon ay umuntí nang umuntě`. Their
provisions grew less and less. Si Hwŕn ay táwa nang táwa. Juan laughs
and laughs. Bilě nang bilě si Hwŕn nang pálay. Juan keeps buying rice.

192. (7) Disjunctive attributes of time express the time when of an
occurrence in the past. They differ from other disjunctive attributes
in being often loosely joined, in which case they may precede. Pumaroňn
sila nang hápon. They went there in the afternoon. So: nang umága
in the morning, noň ng tagáraw (nang taň ng míle-nobisyčntos-dňs)
in the summer (of the year 1902). Nang umulŕn ay ginámit ko ang
kapóte. When it rained I used my rain-coat. Nŕlákad sina Pédro nang
hindě óras. Pedro and his party had to start at a time not planned;
literally: when not time.

193. Complete predications as disjunctive attributes of time are
common. It is as though the whole predication were objectivized:
Nang dumatěng ako doňn ay sya y walá na. When I arrived there he
was already gone. Noo ng sya y bágo ng táo pa lámang.... When he was
still but a young man....

194. Anaphorically determined disjunctive attributes are often
omitted. Íbig nya ng kánin ang súha`. Desired by-him that
be-eaten (by-him) the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the
grape-fruit. Nanghingí sya sa kanya ng manga kapatěd. He asked his
brothers and sisters (for some). Hindí nila sya binigyŕn. He was not
given (any) by them, They did not give him any.



c. Local attributes.

195. An object expression in local attribution expresses a local
circumstance of that which is modified, such as the place in, to,
or from which, that from whose midst, that about which or owing to
which, the person to whom, etc.

196. In this construction initial si is replaced by kay (atonic),
sinŕ by kinŕ (pretonic), and ang by sa (atonic); object expressions
which begin with none of these particles take sa: Si Pédro ay galět
kay Hwŕn. Pedro is angry at Juan. Nakitúluy kamě kina Pédro. We asked
hospitality of Pedro's family. Syŕ y nanáog sa báhay. He came out of
his house. sa boo ng báyan in the whole town.

Rarely both sa and kay precede a personal name: Itň y nŕtúto sa kay
Mayčstro ng Hwŕn. This one got his training from Teacher Juan. ang
pagkŕbúhay nang médiko sa kay Hwŕn the doctor's saving of Juan's life.

197. The personal pronouns and síno take their prepositive forms after
sa: Ibinigŕy nya sa ákin ang aklŕt. Was-given by-him to me the book,
i. e. He gave me the book.

198. In a peculiar construction these prepositive forms are preceded
by the particle ganŕ as a conjunctive attribute, in the sense of so
far as ... is concerned: Sa ganŕ ng ákin sya y maŕári ng umalěs. So
far as I am concerned he may leave.

199. The demonstrative pronouns and anň never stand in local
attribution, see § 263 f.

200. Whole predications are rarely used as local attributes:

Dumatěng ang dalága ng itň sa dalawa ng pů ng taňn ang gúlang. This
young woman arrived at (the time when) her age was twenty years,
i. e. reached the age of twenty years.

201. Local attributes are mostly closely joined and as a rule follow
that which they modify, taking precedence of a disjunctive attribute
or of a subject: ang nagbigŕy sa ákin nang aklŕt na itň the giver to
me of this book, the one who gave me this book (Bayad nŕ) ang útang
sa ákin ni Hwŕn. Juan's debt to me (has been paid). Ibigŕy mo kay Hwŕn
ang librň. Be-given by-you to Juan the book, i. e. Give Juan the book.

Often, however, a disjunctive attribute which is felt to belong closely
to what precedes, comes before a local attribute: Bayad-útang ni Hwŕn
sa ákin ang relňs na itň. This watch is Juan's debt-payment to me.

Occasionally the local attribute precedes the expression modified:
Syŕ y sa bangkŕ` nang manga babáe nakíkisakŕy. He goes along into the
canoe of the women. Sa kabilŕ ng bandŕ mo ibwŕl ang púno ng iyŕn. Make
that tree fall in the direction away from me.

202. Very frequently, however, local attributes are loosely joined,
preceding or following; in the former case ay, y is sometimes omitted:
Sa Báya-ng-San-Migčl ay nangyáre ang isa ng nakawŕn. In the town of San
Miguel a robbery took place. Hindí makadádala si Pédro nang kahňn sa
kabigatŕn nilŕ. Pedro will not be able to carry any boxes, on account
of their heaviness. Sa ganŕ ng ákin sya y maŕári ng umalěs. So far
as I am concerned he can go. (§ 198).

203. We have seen that disjunctive attribution expresses the relation
of objects (direct object, local object, instrumental object, §§
184, 185, 187) to an action, provided that these objects are more
or less indefinite. If they are quite definite, they are preferably
made subjects in a passive construction. Frequently, however, they
are instead put into local attribution, which thus competes with these
types of disjunctive attribution, but involves a more definite object:
Ang báhay na batň ay ang áki ng pinaghŕhatdŕn nang gátas. The stone
house is the place to which I am delivering milk (instrumental object),
i. e. I am delivering milk to the stone house; but: Ang báhay na batň
ay ang áki ng pinaghŕhatdŕn sa báta`. The stone house is where I am
bringing the child. (nang báta` would be a child or children).

It follows that the personal pronouns, which always refer to definite
persons, cannot stand as disjunctive objects of transient words,
but stand instead in local attribution: Ang báhay na batň ay ang áki
ng pinaghŕhatdŕn sa kanyŕ. The stone house is the place where I am
taking him.

Similarly a personal name: Ibigŕy mo kay Hwŕn ang librň. Give Juan
the book; cf. Bigyŕn mo nang librň si Hwŕn. Give Juan a book; "Juan"
could not figure as disjunctive local object.

204. In many cases, however, these local attributes differ from
disjunctive attributes and from the corresponding subjects of passive
constructions: the local attribute represents the object as more
externally involved and less thoroughly concerned in the occurrence:
Humúkay sila nang bakúran. They dug up some yards. Hinukáyan nilŕ ang
bakúran. They dug up the yard. In both sentences a serious change,
such as unauthorized tampering, is implied; but: Humúkay sila sa
bakúran. They dug in the yard, merely tells where they did their
digging. Sya y pumanhěk nang báhay. He entered a house (or houses),
perhaps illicitly; the house is viewed as in some way affected
or intimately involved in the action; so also: Pinanhikŕn nya ang
báhay. He entered the house; but: Sya y pumanhěk sa báhay. He went
into the house, He went into his house.

205. In other cases, where a transient predicate is not involved,
the same difference appears: the local attribute is a mere scene or
attendant circumstance, the disjunctive a real factor: Ang pagtatábon
nang manga húkay na itň ay tapus nŕ. The filling up of these ditches
is now finished, i. e. These ditches are filled up now; but: Ang
pagtatábon sa manga húkay ay mahírap. Filling earth into ditches is
hard work. karamíhan nang manga táo most of the people; karamíhan sa
kanilŕ most of them; sa ganitň under these circumstances; nang ganitň
(§ 190) thus, in this manner.

206. Expressions of time as local attributes denote future time when;
occasionally also past time: Páparoňn akň sa makalawŕ. I shall go
there the day after tomorrow. So: sa lúnes next Monday, cf. noň ng
lúnes last Monday. Pího akň ng páparoňn sa alasěngko. I will surely
go there at five o'clock. Sa gabi ng iyňn.... That night....

207. With jussive words with prefix pa- (see Morphology) the person
ordered to do so-and-so is viewed as a local feature: Ipinagupět ko sa
barbéro ng si Hwŕn ang buhňk ni Andrčs. Was-ordered-to-be-cut by-me
of-the barber Juan the hair of Andrés, i. e. I ordered the barber
Juan to cut Andrés' hair.

208. Rarely an expression in local attribution is used as a conjunctive
attribute in an object expression: it precedes and has the meaning
of a disjunctive attribute of possessor: ang sa ibŕ ng táo ng kawáyan
other people's bamboo, or: ang kawáyan nang ibŕ ng táo.

209. This construction is much commoner when that owned is
anaphorically omitted: ang sa pagňng that of the turtle, the turtle's,
i. e. ang púno nang pagňng. So: ang sa kanyŕ his, hers.

210. In other cases anaphoric omission of an element modified by a
local attribute is less common: ang pagsakŕy sa trčn sa lugŕr nang sa
karumáta the riding on the train in place of the (sc. pagsakŕy riding)
in the carriage.

211. A static predicate may have the form of a local attribute: Sa
linggň ang áki ng lúlan sa trčn. On (next) Sunday my embarking on the
train, i. e. Next Sunday I shall take the train. Ang uupŕ ng itň ay
sa háre`. This seat is for the king.

212. The particle sa has a number of derivatives which are transient
in meaning, but otherwise have the same construction as sa; they are
pretonic. Sya y nása Mayníla`. He is in Manila. Sya y nása kanya
ng báhay. He is in his house. Ang tinterúhan ay nása bíngit nang
lamésa. The inkwell is at the edge of the table. For these forms
see Morphology.



d. Absolute attributes.

213. Absolute attribution, in which no particle is used, is confined to
certain expressions and types of expressions. Some absolute attributes
and some of the particles introducing absolute attributes end in -ng
or -t; these may contain the particle ng or at (§ 313).

We may divide the cases of absolute attribution into six types,
although these are not fully distinct from one another: (1) enclitic
particles, (2) prepositive particles, (3) single words used as
attributes of manner and time, (4) absolute complements, (5) words
used with disjunctive and local attributes, (6) words introducing
subordinate phrases or predications.



(1) enclitic particles.

214. The enclitic particles which are used as absolute attributes
follow a monosyllabic enclitic pronoun (kŕ, kň, mň) but precede a
disyllabic enclitic pronoun (including niyŕ, nyŕ, siyŕ, syŕ). Among
themselves they follow the general rule: monosyllabic enclitics
precede disyllabic enclitics (§ 47).

215. bŕ is expressive of interrogation in yes-and-no questions
and often in others: Máy-roon ba silŕ ng ginawŕ`? Have they
done anything? Máy-roon ka bŕ ng gŕgawěn? Have you anything to
do? Ipinůpútol mo ba akň nang tubň? Will you cut some sugar-cane for
me? Pinapagpůpútol ba nila syŕ nang káhoy? Does he get ordered by them
to cut wood? i. e. Do they have him cut wood? Ano bŕ ang inilůlútu
mo? What is it you are cooking? Anu ba kayň? What sort of people are
you? Hindí mu ba nŕkíta si Hwŕn sa teyátro? Didn't you see Juan at
the theatre? Ang iyo bŕ ng kapatěd? Your sister? See §§ 223. 229.

216. bagŕ throws more stress on the interrogation: Ikŕw bagŕ y
nagasáwa? Did you (ever) get married? See §§ 290. 317.

217. dŕw, rŕw expresses that the sentence represents the saying of
someone other than the speaker; the person so quoted may be the agent
of the sentence itself: Pagkŕ pinapagpútol mo rŕw sya nang kawáyan ay
lŕláyas syŕ. When he is ordered by you to cut bamboo, he will leave,
I am told, or: he will leave, he says. Ang paguupú raw nya sa damň ay
mabúti sa kanyŕ. He says (or: They say) his habit of sitting on the
grass is good for him. It is sometimes used pleonastically, see the
example in § 278.

218. děn, rěn expresses that the expression modified (which may
be the whole sentence or an element within the sentence) is like a
corresponding earlier idea: Ako rěn ang nagpalígo sa báta`. It was I,
too, that bathed the child (beside the other things I did), i. e. I
also bathed the child. Si Hwan děn ang naglínis nang kabalyerésa. Juan
also cleaned a stable or stables (beside the other things he did). Si
Hwŕn ay naglínis rěn nang kabalyerésa. Juan, too, cleaned stables. Here
děn is an attribute of naglínis nang kabalyerésa: this act has been
performed by Juan even as by others previously spoken of or known
of. Si Hwána ay naglúto nang estopádo; kamakalawŕ naglútu rin akň
nang estopádo. Juana cooked meat-stew; day-before-yesterday I too
cooked meat-stew. Iyo ng úna ng kumalabňg ay akň, ang ikalawŕ ay ako
rěn. That first thing which came down with a thud was I, the second
was I again. Nahúlog děn syŕ. He fell down again. Káhit na madilěm
ang gabě ay nagpasyal děn si Pédro. Although the night was dark,
Pedro none the less (i. e. even as at other times) took a walk.

Thus děn is especially common in expressions of identity: Kahápon
ay nakŕkíta ako nang isa ng táo sa Mayníla`, at ngayňn ay nŕkíta ko
ang táwo rě ng iyňn sa báya ng itň. Yesterday I saw a man in Manila,
and today I saw the same man in this town.

In some instances děn modifies an element not actually identical
with another. Nagtalňn sya sa bintána`, dátapuwat sinundŕn din syŕ
nang amŕ. He jumped out of a window, but he was followed, too, by
the father. See §§ 221. 227. 238. 239. 262, (11).

219. kayŕ` expresses doubt or possibility of choice: Anň kayŕ`
ang ipinagútos mo sa kanyŕ? What perchance did you order him to
do? Mŕpŕpagkúro` kayá nya sa súlat na iyŕn ang íbig mo ng gawěn
nya. Perhaps he may be able to make out from this letter of yours what
you want him to do. Baká kayŕ` magkaputňl ang manga tubň sa kalakasŕn
nang hángi ng itň. I am afraid that perhaps the sugar-cane may all
break off, what with the strength of this wind.

For another use of kayŕ` see § 297; cf. §§ 317. 321.

220. lámang only: Isŕ lámang ang mansánas na nátira sa lamésa. Only one
apple is left on the table. So: íisa lámang only a single one. Sila ng
tatlň ay walŕ ng pagkáin kung hindí ang itlňg lámang na nŕtětirŕ. The
three had no food except only the egg that was left.

Occasionally lámang follows the expression it modifies: isa ng ikápat
na partč lámang only a fourth part.

Sometimes a na is left off after lámang: Ákin lámang pinůputlŕn nang
buhňk. By-me (for ákin ... na, ng) only (he, anaphoric) is-getting-cut
of hair, i. e. I am only cutting his hair. siya lámang kŕkáin nang
itlňg he (who; normally this relation is expressed by na, ng) will-eat
the egg, i. e. the one who is alone to eat the egg. See §§ 227. 243.

221. mŕn expresses contrast with what precedes; it is the opposite of
děn, and the two are often used in one sentence to emphasize the point
of difference and that of identity: Si Hwan mŕn ay naglínis (rěn)
nang kabalyerésa. Juan, too, cleaned stables (as did others). Lálů
nŕ lumakě ang gálit ni Hwŕn, nang mŕbalitáan niya ng ang ikalawŕ mŕn
nya ng anŕk ay nagsundálo rěn. Juan's anger grew even greater when he
learned that his second son too had (like the other) become a soldier.

With interrogatives mŕn produces indefinites: Walŕ ng anu mŕn. There
is nothing at all; also: Not at all, i. e. You're welcome. ang ano
mŕ ng pasákit any kind of injury; ang alin mŕ ng pangkŕt any team;
sínu mŕn any person whatever, anyone at all. See §§ 227. 248. 262,
(7. 10). 290. 317.

222. múna expresses that that modified precedes another thing:
Magŕwítan múna táyo, bágo táyo maghiwá-hiwalŕy. Let's sing a song
together (first) before we part. Mangáko ka múna... First promise....

223. nŕ takes into view the maturity of a situation (cf. German
schon): Ang librň y gamit nŕ. The book is used already, i. e. is
second-hand. Agad nŕ ng lálaměg. It will soon be cold now. Paálam na
akň (sa iyň). Good-bye (to you). Nahánap ko nŕ ang sombréro. I have
already looked for the hat. Nahánap na nyŕ ang sombréro. He has.... ang
maláon na nila ng pagpupuyŕt gabi-gabě their long staying up now
every night, i. e. the fact that they have staid up late every night
now. íisa na lámang pangkŕt only a single group now. It precedes bŕ (§
215): Nakahandá na ba ang áki ng pangpalígo`? Is my bath ready? Gánu
ka na bŕ kakínis? How clever are you by this time?

It is used also in brusque or familiar commands: Pálů na sa
kanya ng kamŕy! Hit him on his hand! Sáma na sa ákin. Come
to me (to a child). Ílag ka na riyŕn! Be off there! See §§
224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244.

224. namŕn expresses transition to another subject, hence often
also mild contrast: Hábang si Hwána ay naglůlúto`, si Hwŕn namŕn
ay naglělínis nang báhay. While Juana is cooking, Juan cleans the
house. Anu ka ba namŕ ng táo? What sort of person are you, anyway? Ibŕ
namŕn ang gawěn mo ng lúto sa manňk. You are to cook the chicken in a
different way. siya rěn namŕn nyŕ ng karanyúwa ng kinŕkáin that which,
however, is usually eaten by him.

The combination nŕ namŕn means again: Maínit na namŕn. It's hot again.

225. nawŕ` pray, please expresses imprecation: Kaawaŕn nawŕ` ninyo
kamě, poo ng Dyňs! Take pity on us, O Lord!

226. ngŕ` is assertive and emphasizing: Oo ngŕ`. Yes indeed. Ikaw
ngŕ` ang nagsábi niyŕn. You yourself are the one who said that. It
is used in polite requests: Itúru nga ninyň sa ákin ang daŕn. Please
show me the way. Ipakipútol mo ngŕ`, Hwŕn, ang tinibŕn sa áki ng
bakúran. Please, Juan, cut down for me the banana-stump in my yard. It
follows nŕ: Pakipútol na ngŕ` ang sinúlid na itň. Please cut this
string for me. See § 229.

227. pŕ expresses the immaturity or continuance of a situation
(cf. German noch) and stands in contrast with nŕ. Its meaning is
often emphasized by lámang: mabúti pŕ better yet, Íbig ko pŕ nang
kánin. I should like some more rice. Hampasěn mo pa syŕ. Whip him some
more. Saríwŕ pa ang damět. The clothes are still wet. It precedes děn
and mŕn (cf. § 248): ang isa pa rě ng káluluwa another (i. e. one more)
soul; Hindí pa rěn lubhŕ ng maliwánag. It was, however, not yet light
enough. Kagěgísing ko pa lámang. I have only just waked up. See §§
243. 248.

228. palŕ, used after hindě` (§ 239), expresses contrast with one's
expectation, reversal: Ang ísip ko y balat lámang nang itlňg itň, hindí
palŕ, kun dí` itlňg na boň`. I thought this was only an egg-shell,
but no, it was a whole egg.

229. pň` is expressive of politeness toward the person addressed:
Oo pň`. Yes, sir; Yes, ma'am. Patŕtawárin pň`! Pardon me; used also
in refusing to give alms. Patŕtawárin po nang ilŕ ng sandalč`. Excuse
me for a few moments, please. Maghintú pu kayň. Please stop (plural
or polite singular). Magsihintú pu kayň. Please stop (explicit
plural). Umupú po kayň. Please sit down. Maupú po kayň. Please be
seated. Ikinalúlungkot ko pň` ang kasawiŕ-ng-pálad na nangyáre sa
inyň. I lament the misfortune which has come to you. ang iyo pň
ng Kamŕhálan your Majesty. pň` precedes bŕ and follows nŕ and ngŕ`:
Kaawaŕn na pň` ninyo kamě, poo ng Dyňs! Take pity on us, O Lord! Maŕári
pu bŕ ng kayň y maghintň`? Can you please stop? Occasionally pň`
follows that modified: Magandŕ ng áraw pň`! Good day; How do you do?

230. sána expresses unreal futurity in the past or doubtful futurity
in the present; in the latter sense it expresses modesty in a request:
Ipaglálaba sána kitŕ nang iyo ng damět, ngúnit walŕ` ako ng sabňn. I
would wash your clothes for you, but I have no soap. Isinúlat ko sa
kanyŕ ng pilítin sána niya ng mŕparíto sa átin, pag sya y nŕrěritň
sa báya ng itň. I wrote to him to try to get round here to us when
he gets to this town.

231. tulňy further, in continuation: Sinábi tulňy niyŕ.... He said
further....

232. ulč` again, equivalent with mulě` (§ 148), has two irregularities:
it is often not enclitic but closely joined postpositive, and, in
this case, it may, entirely like mulě`, be conjunctive instead of
absolute: Nahúlog ulí sya. He fell again; but: Umakyŕt sya ulč`. He
climbed again; and even: ... nang magdaŕn sya ng ulč` sa pasíga ng
itň.... when he again walked on this beach.



(2) prepositive particles.

233. Certain particles used as absolute attributes always precede
that modified. They fall into two groups: (A) regular closely joined
modifiers, and (B) particles which immediately precede single words
or short phrases.

234. (A) The closely joined particles usually receive regular
treatment, being followed, for instance, by enclitics. Occasionally,
however, the feeling seems to be that the particle is, as it were,
placed before the whole sentence; in this case a non-enclitic subject
or a loosely joined attribute or a second closely joined attribute may
follow the particle, and the last-named may (instead of the particle)
be followed by some or all of the enclitics.

In the case of huwŕg (§ 240) we meet for the first time alternation
of absolute and conjunctive attribution, which mostly follows the
principle that the latter construction is used where ng (as opposed
to na) is possible (§ 122).

235. bakŕ` is expressive of an undesired contingency; it is the
negative of wishes and fears: Baká ka maputúlan nang dalíri`, Hwŕn. You
might get your finger cut off, Juan, i. e. See that you don't ... or I
hope you won't.... Baká nya ikátawŕ ang iyo ng sŕsabíhin. Perhaps what
you intend to say will only make him laugh. Baká táyu ang pagbintangŕn
nang páre`. I am afraid the priest may suspect us. See § 317.

236. bákit why? Bákit ka naparíto? Why have you come here? Bákit
mo inakála`...? Why do you think...? Bákit hindí ka magáral...? Why
don't you learn...?

237. dě` not is often used instead of hindě` (§ 239) before shorter
expressions: dí maláyo` not far, dí karanyúwan unusual, Si Hwŕn ay
dí natákot na sumakŕy. Juan was not afraid to mount. See § 301.

238. gayňn (§ 190), in this use always followed by děn (§ 218), also,
furthermore: Sya y isa ng táo ng may kauntě ng talíno at gayon děn
may kauntě ng tápang. He was a man of some cleverness and also of
some courage.

239. hindě` not is used where the specific negatives áyaw (§
267), bakŕ` (§ 235), huwŕg (§ 240), and walŕ` (§§ 61. 81. 89)
are not applicable. Occasionally it is replaced by dě` (§
237). Hindě`. No. Hindí akň. (It is, was) not I; I don't, didn't,
etc. Hindí bále. It doesn't matter. Hindí ko nŕlŕláman. I don't
know. Hindí ko sya nŕkíta. I didn't see him. Hindí ko mabása iyŕn. I
can't read that. Ang túnay na lakě nang buwŕn ay hindí sya ng nŕkěkíta
nang manga táo kung gabč. The real size of the moon is not that which
people see at night. ang kanya ng tákot na baká hindí nya abúta ng
buhŕy ang kanya ng iněíbig his fear that (perhaps) he should not see
his loved one alive.

Hindě` negates only the material part of a word, not its grammatical
(affixal) elements: Ang kamahalŕn nang manňk ay sya ng hindí ikabilě
nitň nang marámi ng táo. The high price of chicken is that which
not causes-to-buy it many people, i. e. causes many people not to
buy it; the idea of buying is the material element of i-ka-bilě (see
Morphology); the causal idea, which is expressed by the prefixes i-ka-
is not negated. Ang pagkukublě nang manga sundálo ay siyŕ nilŕ ng
hindí ikinamatŕy. The hiding of the soldiers is what caused them not
to be killed, i. e. saved them from death.

Note hindí rěn (§ 218) also not, nor, and gayňn děn hindě` (§ 238):
Ang dalága ng si Mariyŕ y sumayŕw sa bála ng táo ng humilěng sa kanyŕ
sa sŕyáwa ng pinaroonŕn niya kagabč: sya y hindí namíli nang kanya ng
sinamáhan at hindí rin namŕn namíli nang tugtňg na kanya ng sinayawŕn;
gayon děn hindí nya ininň ang bílang at ang kadalasŕn nang kanyŕ
ng pagsayŕw. Miss Maria danced with any man that asked her at the
dance to which she went last night: she chose neither her partners
nor the music to which she danced; nor did she mind the number and
the frequency of her dances. See §§ 228. 237. 301. 319.

240. huwŕg, hwŕg is the negative of commands, purpose,
obligation. Where ng is possible conjunctive attribution takes the
place of absolute: Ang hangŕd ay ang huwŕg bayáa ng lumagpŕk sa lúpŕ
ang bóla. The aim is not to let the ball fall to the ground. (46,
36) Sinŕsábi nya ríto na hwŕg sunúgin ang ámi ng báhay. He told
them not to burn our house. Ang túro sa ákin nang mayčstro ay hwŕg
akň ng mapagawŕy. The teacher's order to me is that I must not be
quarrelsome. Hwag mň ng tawánan si Hwŕn. Don't laugh at Juan. Hwag
kŕ ng umyŕk. Don't cry. Hwag kŕ, Hwŕn, pumásuk na sekréta. Don't go
as a spy, Juan. See § 239.

241. kaniyŕ`, kanyŕ` therefore, as a result, consequently: Bumitěw
ang báta` sa lúbid, kanyá náparapŕ` ang kanyŕ ng kahatakŕn. The
child let go of the rope, and so the one he was pulling against
fell. Kanyŕ` hindí tulŕ` ang kanya ng kinantŕ. Therefore what he sang
was disconnected. Kanyŕ` sa katapusŕn ay sinábi nya... Therefore in
the end he said.... Occasionally it is loosely joined: Kanyŕ y sya
y umalěs. Therefore he went away. See §§ 295. 324.

242. lálo` (§ 147), in this use always followed by nŕ (§ 223),
especially, very: Lálů na kung isa ng tahňl nang áso ang makŕgísing sa
kanya, sya y nŕpŕpaluksň. Especially when the barking of a dog awoke
him, he would involuntarily jump. Sya y nangŕngáin nang táo lálů nŕ
nang manga báta`. It makes its food of people, especially children.

243. sakŕ` after that, then: Pagkŕ pinapagpůpútol ko nŕ sya nang
káhoy ay saká sya nagdŕdahilŕ ng may sakět. As soon as I order him
to cut wood, (then) he alleges that he is sick.

Especially saká pa lámang (§ 227) only then, not till then: Kapag
ipinamůmútol na nya nang káhoy ang lagári` ay saká mo pa lámang kúnin
itň sa kanyŕ. When he uses the saw for cutting wood, only then do
you take it from him.

244. tuwč` when followed by nŕ (§ 223) is used as a loosely
joined prepositive attribute: every time: Tuwí nŕ y syŕ ang nagěng
mánanalň. He turns out victorious every single time. See §§ 307. 317.

245. (B) The particles of the second group are mechanically prefixed,
as it were, to that modified.

246. The pretonic particle báwat every precedes that modified, forming
an object expression with or without ang (§ 66, end): Báwat marúnung
nang leksyňn ay makaáalěs pagdatěng nang alasěngko. Everyone who knows
the lesson will be allowed to leave at five o'clock. Ang báwat hindí
marúnung nang leksyňn ay mŕtětirŕ hanggŕng alasčs. Every one of those
who do not know the lesson will have to stay till six o'clock. báwat
táo everyone, each person.

247. gaáno, gáno how? (§ 190) is used absolutely before words with
prefix ka- expressing high degree of a quality (see Morphology and
cf. §§ 76. 179): gáno katabŕ`? How fat? gáno kaláyo`? How far? Gánu
ka na bŕ kakínis? How clever are you now?

248. The pretonic particle káhit precedes interrogatives and isŕ one
absolutely or with na; its force is generalizing, more emphatically
than mŕn (§ 221). The expression so formed is an object expression
used with or without ang (§ 68): ang káhit na síno, ang káhit síno,
káhit na síno, káhit síno anyone, anyone whatever, no matter who,
káhit anň anything whatever, káhit na anu ng táo any sort of person
whatever, káhit na sínu ng táo any person whatever, sa káhit alě ng
bandŕ in any direction, káhit isŕ anyone whatever, even one.

These expressions are often strengthened by mŕn (§ 221) or pŕ mŕn (§
227): Hindí na sya sumakŕy sa káhit ano pa mŕn. This time he did not
ride on anything. káhit sínu mŕn anyone at all.

Expressions beginning with káhit have the peculiarity that in the
two normally conjunctive constructions in which they stand na, ng is
often omitted before them:

After walŕ` (§ 138): Walá káhit anň. There isn't a thing. Walá
sila káhit anň. They haven't a thing. So even when walŕ` does not
immediately precede: Nŕbuksŕn ang pintú nang wala ng nakŕmálay káhit
sínu mŕn. The door came open without anyone noticing it. Walá pa sila
ng nŕhůhúli káhit anň. They had not yet caught anything, literally:
anything that was caught. Walá sya ng nŕlŕláman káhit isa ng hóta. He
did not know a single iota. Occasionally na, ng is used: Walá sya ng
mŕkíta ng táo ng káhit anň. He saw no person whatever.

As (normally conjunctive, § 149) attribute of time during which:
Sya y hindí mŕtahímik káhit isŕ ng sandalč`. He cannot keep quiet
even for a single moment. See §§ 253. 294.

249. kápuwŕ`, kápwŕ` fellow-, equally, applied to one of a pair,
is sometimes used with personal pronouns: in this case it follows
(cf. § 129): Si Pédro at si Hwŕn ay dalawa ng kápwa magnanákaw. Pedro
and Juan are two fellow thieves. ang kápwa nya magnanákaw his
fellow-thief, Kápuwa maínam ang tiněg nila ng dalawŕ. The voices of
the two are equally pleasant. Kápwa sila malakŕs. They are equally
strong. Sinŕsaktan silŕ kápuwa`. They both get hurt. Redundantly:
Namílog si Hwŕn nang úlo nang kápwa nya kalarň`. Juan fooled
(literally: rounded the head of) his (fellow) playmate.

The word modified may be anaphorically omitted: Ang táwo y hindí
dápat sumakět nang kanya ng kápwa`. One must not injure one's fellow
(sc. táo man).

250. The transient pretonic particle magěng and its other transient
forms (see Morphology) express that the word or phrase modified is
something coming into being, arising, at the time specified by the
tense-form of the particle: Sya y nagěng hukňm. He became judge. ang
nagěng pagkáhulč the falling-behind which arose, Nagěng isa syŕ sa
manga hindí nátanggŕp. He turned out to be one of those who were
not accepted.

251. The pretonic particle mangŕ is the sign of explicit plurality
with object expressions. It precedes the central element immediately,
not even the na, ng necessitated by a preceding conjunctive attribute
comes between; only ibŕ may come after mangŕ: ang kanyŕ ng magúlang,
or: ang kanyŕ ng manga magúlang his, her parents, ang manga ibŕ
ng táo other people. Redundantly: Sa tapŕt nang báhay ni Pédro ay
marámi ng manga bulaklŕk. In front of Pedro's house there are many
flowers. Ang áraw ay sya ng pinópoon nang ilŕ ng manga salbáhe sa
Áfrika. The sun is worshipped by some savages in Africa. And even:
ang manga ilan pŕ ng manga tanňng several further questions. With
mangŕ compare the prefix of the same form, see Morphology.

252. The pretonic particle máy belongs here. For examples see §§
69. 70. 85. 110. 139.

253. ně pretonic, is a frequent substitute (Spanish) for káhit (§
245) in negative sentences. The object expressions which begin with it
never take ang (§ 68): Ní isa y walŕ ng nátira. There isn't a single
one left. Walá ní isa. There isn't a single one. Nŕbuksŕn ang pintú
nang wala ng nakŕmálay ně sínu mŕn. The door came open without anyone
noticing it. Walŕ ng nátira ní isa nang manga péras sa mésa. Not one
was left of the pears on the table.

Occasionally ně seems to take the place of nang before káhit: Bákit
hindí sya makátagpo ně káhit isŕ nang manga bágay na itň? Why could
he not meet even a single one of these things? Cf. § 319.

254. The pretonic particle tagŕ, tigŕ preceding an expression of place
forms an expression denoting a person from that place: Sya y isa ng
taga Kapampángan. He is a Pampangan. ang taga búkid, ang tiga búkid:
ang isa ng táo ng túbo sa búkid a country-man: a person raised in the
country, ang mayáma ng taga iba ng báyan the rich man from another
town, stranger, foreigner, ang manga taga iba t ibŕ ng lupaěn people
from various countries. So: taga báyan, tiga báyan townsman, taga
Filipínas Filipino, taga Amérika American, taga Espánya Spaniard
(beside Amerikáno, Kastíla`). Cf. in Morphology, the prefix taga-.

255. Numerative pronouns and cardinal numerals are used as absolute
attributes before katáo persons, men: sa m pú katáo ten people, ten
men; or: sa m pů ng táo; Ilŕn katáo (or: Ilŕ ng táo) ang bumúhat sa
báhay? How many men lifted at the house?

256. The terms of relationship and titles which are treated as personal
names (§ 59) precede a name as absolute attributes; after most of those
that end in a syllabic, n, or `, ng is however used. Some titles occur
only in this construction: si Kúya ng Pédro my oldest brother Pedro,
si Atč Lóleng my oldest sister Lola, si Ingkňng Píro Grandfather Pedro,
si Indŕ ng Hwána, or: si Impň ng Hwána Grandmother Juana, si Áli ng
Maryŕ, or: si Tiyŕ Maryŕ Aunt Maria, si Mŕ ng Andrčs Uncle Andrés,
Don Andrés, si Ginoň ng Polikŕrpiyo Mr. Policarpio, si Gíning Mŕrkes
Miss or Mrs. Marques, si Párě Hwŕn Father Juan, si Mayčstro ng Pédro
Teacher Pedro, Master Pedro, si Báo ng Mariyŕ Widow Maria, si nasíra
ng Mariyŕ the deceased Maria.



(3) words used as absolute attributes of manner and time.

257. The words used as absolute attributes of manner and time resemble
in meaning conjunctive attributes and are frequently used in the latter
construction. As a rule they are loosely joined and absolute. In this
way are used:

258. Derivatives by doubling of words of time, in the sense of every
(day, night, etc.). With these goes the compound áraw-gabč day and
night. For both formations see Morphology. Hinŕhatdan nyŕ akň nang
gátas áraw-áraw. He delivers milk to me every day. Gabi-gabě ay
tinůtulúgan nang bantŕy ang áki ng báhay. Every night the sentry
makes our house his sleeping-place.

259. Words with prefix ka- referring to past time (see Morphology):
Ang pŕtáya ng nangyári kagabě ay paglalasěng ang nagěng sanhč`. The
killing that occurred last night had drunkenness as its cause. Ang
manga áso sa báya ng itň ay nagtŕhúlan kagabč. The dogs in this town
all bayed last night. Ang kabáyo ay namatŕy kahápon. The horse died
yesterday. Pumaroňn akň kamakalawŕ. I went there day before yesterday.

These may be followed by a disjunctive attribute telling the specific
time when: Nagsipútol kamě nang tubň kahápon nang hápon. We cut
sugar-cane yesterday afternoon. So: kahápon nang umága yesterday
morning.

260. Words of time with prefix kinŕ- and suffix -an expressing actual
past time (see Morphology): Kinŕháti-ng-gabihŕn ay nágising syŕ. When
midnight came he woke up. Kinŕbukásan hinánap silŕ nang kanila ng
amŕ. On the next day they were called by their father.

With disjunctive attribute telling the special time: Kinŕbukásan nang
hápun ay naparoňn sila sa simbáhan. On the next day in the afternoon
they went to church.

261. Words of time preceded by the pronouns boň` and isŕ as conjunctive
modifiers: Sila y nagsipagsugŕl gabi-gabě boň ng magdamŕg. They
gambled all night every night. Isa ng áraw naupó sya sa taburéte. One
day he sat down on his chair. Ang iyň ng kapatěd ay nalígo isa ng
hápon. Your sister bathed one afternoon. Isa ng gabě ay nárinig
ko.... One evening I heard.... So: isa ng katanghalían one midday,
isa ng linggň one Sunday, isa ng tanghále` one noon, isa ng umága one
morning. As conjunctive attributes: Sya y naglálakad na isa ng gabě. He
was walking one night. Páparoon sya ng isa ng linggň. He will come
one Sunday. Those with boň` also as local attributes: Nakatahul nŕ
ang manga áso sa boň ng magdamŕg. The dogs have been barking all night.

262. Various words of time:

(1) antimáno beforehand (Spanish).

(2) búkas tomorrow: Magpŕpapútol ba táyo nang káhoy búkas? Are we
going to have some wood cut tomorrow? With disjunctive attribute of
specific time: Magsěsipútol kamě nang tubň búkas nang umága. We are
going to cut sugar-cane tomorrow morning.

(3) dáti for a long time already; formerly; it is sometimes closely
joined: ang mukhá nang babáye, na dáti y nagpŕpakilála nang malakě ng
paghihírap the face of the woman, which before had been showing great
suffering; Dáti náriyŕn ang mansŕ ng iyŕn. That spot has been there
for a long time. As conjunctive attribute: Dáti sya ng napŕparíto sa
áki ng báhay. He has been coming to my house since long ago.

(4) kadalasŕn often, usually: Ang kanya ng pinasŕsakítan kadalasŕ y
nagáanyo ng pára ng ulňl. The person he is injuring usually acts as
if crazy.

(5) kanína a little while ago, just now: Sinábi ko na pň sa inyo
kanína, na.... I just told you a little while ago that....

With a conjunctive attribute of the specific time in the phrase
kanína ng umága this morning, which may be closely joined: Kumáin ka
ba kanína ng umága nang karnč?--Hindí ako kumáin nang karnč kanína ng
umága. Did you eat meat this morning?--I did not eat meat this morning.

(6) karanyúwan mostly, usually: Ang kosinéro karanyúwa y upahŕn. The
cook is usually hired.

(7) káylan, kélan when? Káylan ako malělígo`? When shall I
bathe? Káylan pa kayŕ panghěhinayángan nang manga táo ang manga áni
ng taňn-taň y nŕsěsíra nang luktňn o nang túyot? When, pray, will
the people regret the harvests every year destroyed by locusts or
by drought? So káylan mŕn at any time, ever, always (§§ 221. 317):
Káylan mŕ y hindí nilělimútan si Maryŕ. Maria was never forgotten.

(8) makálawŕ twice, when with maghápon per day: Naŕári ako ng malígo
makálawa maghápun, dahilŕn sa kainítan. I can bathe twice a day
on account of the heat. Alone makálawŕ is a conjunctive attribute:
Makálawa ko ng itinanůng kung saŕn sya páparoňn, dátapuwat hindí nya
ako sinagňt. I asked him twice where he was going, but he did not
answer me. Maghápon does not occur alone.

(9) mámayŕ`, mámyŕ` after a while, soon, with a disjunctive attribute
of the specific time when: Mámyá nang kauntě` ay áalis akň. In
a little while I am going. As conjunctive modifier; the phrase so
formed is used like mámayŕ` alone: Mámaya ng gabě ay pŕpások táyo sa
teyátro. This evening we shall go to the theatre.

(10) mínsan once, once upon a time: Mínsan sila y nakáraŕn nang isa ng
púno-ng-nyňg. Once upon a time they came across a cocoanut-tree. With
mŕn at any one time (§ 221): Mínsan mŕn ay hindí sya náuna. Not a
single time did he succeed in getting ahead. As conjunctive attribute:
Ang tatlo ng itů y nagtěpána ng mínsan. These three once made an
appointment.

(11) ngayňn now, just now, today (cf. § 302): Sya y nása Mayníla
ngayňn. He is in Manila today. Ngayňn ay mangŕkŕkatúlog silŕ. Now
they will be able to sleep. So ngayon děn right now (§ 218): Umalěs
ka ngayon děn. Go away this minute.

(12) paráti often: Mahína ang kanyŕ ng katawŕn at paráti sa sakět. Her
body was weak and often in sickness. Also conjunctive: Akň y paráti
ng nŕhŕhábol. I am often pursued.

(13) siyčmpre (Spanish) always: Ang paggalŕw na pagtagílid ay syčmpre
(or: káylan mŕn ay) sa kaikliŕn nang bangkŕ`, dátapuwat ang pagtikwŕs
ay sa kahabáan. The movement of rocking is always along the short
axis of a boat, but pitching is along its length.

263. Four words of place, which serve also as local forms of the
demonstrative pronouns (§ 199). They are, corresponding to the four
demonstrative pronouns: díne, ríne; díto, ríto; diyŕn, dyŕn, riyŕn;
doňn, roňn. They occur in every position which an attribute can have:

Loosely joined, preceding: Doňn ay sinalúbong sya nang susň`. There
he was met by the snail. Díto nŕmálas nya ng.... Here he perceived
that....

Loosely joined, following: Taginit nŕ nang sya y dumating díto. It
was already summer when he arrived here. Ang alíla` ay ipinagamůt
nya díto. The servant was-ordered-to-be-cured by-him of-the-latter,
i. e. He had the latter cure the servant. Alis dyŕn! Get away
there! (e. g. to a dog). Alěs na riyŕn, Pédro. Go away from there,
Pedro. Mátira ka dyŕn. Stay there.

Closely joined, preceding: Díne ako maúupň`. I am going to sit right
here. Díto ka na makikáin sa ámin. Eat here with us. Díto nya ginámit
ang kanya ng lakŕs. For this he used his strength. Doňn sila magpalípas
nang bakasyňn. There they are to spend the vacation.

Closely joined, following: Hwag mň ng ilagay díto ang palatňn. Don't
put the plate here.

Enclitic: Dalhěn mo ríto iyň ng librň ng binŕbása ko kagabě. Bring
here the book I was reading last night. Magdalŕ ka díto nang
kasapwégo. Bring some matches.

These words often precede a local attribute: Ílag ka dyŕn sa daŕn. Get
out of the road there. Nakitúloy silŕ sa ámin doňn sa búkid. They
asked us to take them in out there in the country. Note also: Sa isa
ng karitň ng dí maláyo sa báhay, doňn sya nahigŕ` In a cart not far
from the house, there he lay down.

264. Similarly saŕn where? which serves also instead of a local form
of anň (§ 199). It is closely joined and, as a question-word, precedes:
Saŕn nároon ang kanya ng kapatěd?--Hindí ko nŕlŕláman kung saŕn nároon
ang kanya ng kapatěd. Where is his brother?--I don't know where his
brother is. Saan nŕndon sya? Where is he? Saŕn mo sya nŕkíta? Where
did you see him? Saŕng ka maúupň`? Where are you going to sit? Saŕng
ka gáling? Where do you come from? (Cf., for the local value, the
answer, e. g.: Gáling ako sa Mayníla`. I come from Manila.) Saŕn ka
nanggŕgáling? Where are you coming from? Saŕn ka nanggáling? Where
have you come from? Saŕng ka páparon? Where are you going? Saŕn ka
púpunta? Where are you bound for? So: káhit saŕn anywhere at all
(§ 248): Itň y hindí nya mŕkíta káhit saŕn. He could not find the
latter anywhere.

As local form of anň, saŕn stands also in conjunctive attribution (§
131): Saŕ ng gawč` mulá ríto ang báya-ng-Kamálig?--Sa gawě ng kánan
mulá ríto ang báya-ng-Kamálig. In what direction from here is the town
of Camalig?--The town of Camalig is to the right of here. Pagkaísip mo,
Hwŕn, kung saŕ ng báyan ka maghŕhánap-búhay ay sabíhin mo sa ákin. When
you have decided, Juan, in what town you will try to earn your living,
tell me.

As a question-word, further, saŕn may form a static predicate (§
96): Saŕn ang lŕgáyan mo nang iyo ng sapátos? Where is your place
for putting away your shoes?

265. Several words of manner:

(1) The particle agŕd at once and its doubled form agad-agŕd
immediately (see Morphology) are closely joined; where ng can be
used, they are mostly conjunctive: Tumakbň sya agŕd. He ran at once,
or: Tumakbň sya ng agŕd. Minulŕn nya agŕd ang pagtatalumpáte`. He
at once began his speech. Agad nŕ ng lálaměg. It will soon be cold
now. Agad-agŕd inůumpisahŕn ang pagsisěgáwan. At once the yelling
begins.

(2) halimbáwa` for example, for instance is loosely joined: Kung
halimbáwa y makŕkíta sya nang isa ng bákol.... When, for instance,
she saw a basket ... isa ng tahňl nang áso halimbáwa` the barking of
a dog, for instance.

(3) hálos almost is closely joined: hálos lahŕt nang táo almost all
the people, walŕ ng pamamáro` hálos almost without clothing.

(4) isa-isŕ one by one is closely joined; it is more often conjunctive
than absolute: Siniyásat nya isa-isŕ ang manga púno`. She questioned
the trees one by one. Itň y sya nyŕ ng isa-isŕ ng inilaglŕg. These
he dropped one by one.

(5) karáka-ráka right away, quickly (cf. pagdáka, pagkaráka, below):
"Hindí akň!" winíka nya karáka-ráka. "It wasn't I!" he said at once.

(6) katunáyan truth, as absolute attribute, loosely joined, truly; in
this sense also conjunctive: Katunáya y uwalŕ ng mwŕng si Hwŕn. Really
Juan was ignorant. Katunáya ng walá sya ng nŕlŕláman káhit isa ng
hóta. He really did not know a single iota.

(7) měsmo (Spanish) himself, herself, intensive: ang nŕkůkúlam měsmo
the bewitched person himself; siya měsmo he himself, she herself.

(8) palibhása` is loosely joined and precedes. It expresses that
what follows is stated as a reason; the construction is apparently
not subordinating, but parallel with that of halimbáwa` above: Ang
pagsasáma ... ay hindí nila pinápansěn, palibhása y gawá rin namŕn
nilŕ. The living together ... was not minded by them, the reason
being that they did it themselves.

(9) pagdáka and pagkaráka immediately, quickly (synonymous with
karáka-ráka above): Pagdáka y tinangnan nyŕ ang dalawŕ ng hintutúro`
nang babáye. He quickly seized the woman's two forefingers. Also
closely joined: Itinanňng pagdáka nang médiko.... The doctor at
once asked....



(4) absolute complements.

266. After certain words which are followed by a complement
construction, as described in § 151 ff., the conjunctive particle is
often omitted, especially where the form na is required; where ng is
possible its use is preferred. They are:

267. íbig desired, synonymous with gustň (of whose regular construction
examples have been given in §§ 152. 158), and áyaw the negative
of íbig. These are usually accompanied by a disjunctive agent:
Anň ang íbig nya ng sabíhin? What is that desired by-him that
(sc. by-him it, both anaphoric) be said? or: What is the desired
by-him thing-to-be-said? i. e. What does he want to say? Anň ang
íbig mo ng gawěn nya? What do you want him to do? Hindí na sya íbig
labanŕn. He was no longer sought as an opponent. Itň y íbig na gawě
ng úna. This is desired to be done first, i. e. One wants to do this
first. Ang áyaw ko ng mŕkíta ay isa ng núno`. What I don't want to
see is a ghost. Itň y áyaw nya ng gawěn. He does not want to do this.

Very frequently the construction is impersonal, in which case
the complement (and quasi-subject, § 158) may consist of an entire
predication: Íbig nya ng kumáin nang súha`. It-is-desired by-him that
(he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some grape-fruit. Íbig
nya ng kánin ang súha`. It-is-desired by-him that be-eaten (by-him)
the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the grape-fruit. Áyaw ipamána
nang mangkukúlam ang kanya ng kúlam. The sorcerer does not want to
bequeath his magic power.

When the person desiring is at the same time the agent of the
complement, the whole expression may serve as predicate or attribute
of the person desiring; this construction is rarely used with other
than active complements: Sya y íbig kumáin nang súha`. He is desired
(by-him) that (he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some
grape-fruit, equivalent to Íbig nya ng kumáin nang súha`. Ang kúba` ay
hindi rěn íbig umakyŕt. The hunchback too did not want to climb. isa ng
Kastíla` na íbig malígo` a Spaniard who wanted to bathe. Ang sundálo
ay áyaw pumáyag. The soldier did not want to consent.

Without complement (or with anaphorically omitted complement): Anň ang
íbig mo? What is it you want? Íbig ko pŕ nang kánin. There-is-desire
by-me still of boiled rice, i. e. I want some more boiled rice. Ang
larň ng taguŕn ay íbig nang manga báta`. Children like the game of
hide-and-seek. Áyaw ko. I don't want to; less commonly: Áyaw akň.

268. dápat proper, necessary and súkat fitting, right: Itň y dápat
gawěn. This ought to be done. Sya y dápat palúin. He ought to be
thrashed. Anň ang dápat nya ng gawěn? What ought to be done by
him? i. e. What ought he do? Ang isŕ y dápat múna ng magsilbč sa
dimóniyo. One must first serve the demon. Hindí mo súkat ikagálit ang
manga tuksň. It is not right for you to get angry at jokes, literally:
Jokes are not by-you a fitting cause of anger.

Without complement: Itň y súkat nŕ. This is right, sufficient.

269. Words with prefix ma-, expressing the possessor of a quality,
and their derivatives (see Morphology), have occasionally an absolute
instead of a conjunctive complement. Those so used are:

(1) madalŕs often, frequent, regular: Akň y madalŕs magkumpisŕl. I was
regular at going to confession, or: a regular confessor. But: Madalŕs
nila ng sinalakáyan ang báyan. They frequently attacked the town.

(2) magalěng skilful, clever, polite: Si Hwŕn ay magalěng gumámit
nang darŕs. Juan was clever at using the adze, or: a clever user of
the adze, or: cleverly used the adze. But: Magalěng sya ng tumugtňg
nang piyáno. She plays the piano well.

(3) mahírap suffering, destitute, difficult (i. e. having hardship,
actively or passively): Ang aswŕng ay mahírap mápatay. A vampire
is hard to-be-killed, i. e. hard to kill. Regular constructions:
Ang pagabůt nang búnga ng itň ay mahírap. The reaching this fruit
is hard, i. e. The fruit is hard to reach. ang mahírap na kasamŕ the
poor laborer.

(4) mahúsay able, good (at doing something), in good shape: Ang manga
táo sa báyan ay mahuhúsay sumunňd sa kautusŕn. The people in the town
are good law-abiders. But: ang pinakamahúsay na magsalitŕ` the best
at speaking; Ang lípŕ nang lúpa` ay mahúsay. The smearing (with sticky
mud) of the ground (in the threshing-room for rice) is well done.

(5) maínam pleasant, tasty, good: Ang manňk na kawalŕ` ay hindí maínam
patayěn. Chickens that run free are not good for killing. Cf.: isa
ng maínam na singsěng a pretty ring.

(6) malakŕs strong, powerful, loud: Sya y malakŕs kumáin. He is
great at eating, or: a great eater; also: malakŕs na kumáin. Cf.:
ang manga táo ng malalakŕs strong men, Sya y tumáwa nang malakŕs. He
laughed aloud.

(7) maluwŕt, malwŕt long (in time), slow: Ang pagpútol nang buhňk
ay maluwŕt mŕtutúhan. Hair-cutting takes long to learn. Cf.: Syŕ
y nagkalatimbŕ ng maluwŕt. He squatted on heels (as exercise or
punishment) many times. Natůtúlog akň nang maluwŕt. I sleep late.

(8) marúnong wise, knowing how: Sya y marúnung gumupět nang buhňk. He
knew how to cut hair. But: Marúnong sya ng sumakŕy sa kabáyo. He
knows how to ride horseback. ang marúnong na pagňng the clever turtle;
Isa ng sundálo ng marúnung nang Latěn. A soldier who knew Latin.



(5) words used with disjunctive and local attributes.

270. Certain words form with their attributes phrases that are
used as absolute attributes, for the most part loosely joined. The
phrase-forming attributes are either (A) disjunctive or (B) local.

271. (A) akála` a thought followed by a disjunctive possessor: as
so-and-so thinks: Akála ko y gamit nŕ ang sombréro ng itň. I think
this hat has been used already, is second-hand. More commonly these
phrases are used as local attribute: Ang harangŕ ng iyňn na nangyári
kagabč sa akála ko y pahárang ni Andrčs. The hold-up which took place
last night was, in my opinion, planned by Andrés.

272. gáya like, resembling, in the manner of; for the disjunctive
attribute cf. § 177: ang manga púno-ng-káhoy, gáya nang tsíko trees
like the custard-apple; Gáya nang karanyúwan inumpisahŕn nang kúra
ang kanya ng sčrmon. As usual, the priest began his sermon. Magaŕn
ang sípa`, hindí gáya nang bóla ng gámit sa bčsbol. The football
is light, unlike the ball used in baseball. These phrases occur
also as conjunctive attributes: Hindí umuwé si Kíko na gáya nang
karanyúwan. Kiko did not go home as usual. Normal constructions: Ang
húni nang íbo ng pipět ay gáya nang isa ng sutsňt. The chirp of the
humming-bird is like a whistling. ang manga gáya mo those like you,
people like you.

273. kasáma (in normal constructions companion): as companion of,
in company with: Namundok syŕ kasáma nang ilŕ manga táo-ng-báyan. He
took the mountains along with a few fellow-townsmen.

274. Abstracts of action with prefixes in p- (see Morphology) express
the time when or (so pagka- and pagkŕ-) the time immediately after
which. They sometimes occur without a disjunctive modifier. Cf. §
300. Pagulŕn ay gamítin mo ang kapóte. When it rains use your
raincoat. Pagdatěng niya ay sabíhin mo ng maghintŕy. When he arrives
tell him to wait, literally: At the arriving of him be-it-said by-you
that (he) wait. Pagkasúnog nang báhay ay hinánap nilŕ ang aláhas. When
the house had burned down they looked for the jewelry. Pagakpakan
mň si Hwŕn pagkaraŕn nang kanyŕ ng talumpáte`. Applaud Juan when his
speech is done.

275. pára like is followed by a conjunctive (instead of a disjunctive)
object expression whenever an indefinite object is meant (§ 68). The
phrase so formed is often a conjunctive attribute. It is closely
joined: Si Pédro mŕn pára ni Hwŕn ay nábilanggň`. Pedro too, like Juan,
was put in jail. But: May katawŕn sya ng pára ng táo. He has a body
like a human being. Normal constructions: Pára ka ng kúra. You are
like a priest. Ang laměg nang kanya ng kamŕy ay pára ng sa patŕy. The
coldness of his hand is like that of a dead person. (Cf. § 209).

276. sábi saying, that said: Sábi daw nyŕ ay malakě ang súnog. He says,
I am told, that the fire was big.

277. (B) alintána despite: Nŕbálot ko nŕ ang manga librň, alintána
sa karamíhan nitň. I have managed to pack the books, in spite of
their number.

278. áyon according to (giving the source of a statement): Áyon sa
sábi nang marámi ay mŕpŕpaghuli na rŕw ang manga magnanákaw. According
to what people say, the robbers are now near to being caught.

279. bukňd beside, in addition to: Bukňd sa asáwa ay may dalawŕ sya
ng anŕk. Beside his wife, he had two children.

280. dáhil reason, cause and its derivative dahilŕn, both here in
the sense: on account of: Hindí nakatahňl ang áso dáhil sa kanya ng
kahináan. The dog was not able to bark, on account of his weakness,
i. e. was so weak that he could not bark. Hinúle si Hwŕn nang pulěs
dahilŕn sa paghárang na ginawá nya kina Andrčs at kanila ng manga
kaybígan. Juan was arrested by the policeman for having held up Andrés'
party and their friends. Dahilŕn sa kanya ng pagkŕgúlat ay nápaupú
sya. In his surprise he sank down on his chair.

Note especially dáhil díto, dahil díto on account of this, therefore;
the omission of ay, y is especially frequent, see § 120, A, and
the example there given. Dáhil díto ay nadílat ang kanya ng manga
matŕ. Through this his eyes were opened.

281. The particle káy, ké than, more than: Ang búnga ng itň y mataměs
káy sa asúkal. This fruit is sweeter than sugar. malakŕs ké sa kanyŕ
stronger than he.

The combination káy sa has so much unity that the sa is often repeated
or used where unnecessary: so always before a proper name: Ang báta
ng si Pédro ay mataŕs nang kauntč` káy sa sa lamésa. Little Pedro
is a bit taller than the table. lálu ng mabagsěk káy sa ríto more
fierce than this; Ang báta ng si Pédro ay mataŕs nang kauntč` káy
sa kay Hwŕn. Little Pedro is a bit taller than Juan. Sya y mabúte
ng tumugtůg ké sa kay Hwána. She plays better than Juana. Si Hwŕn ay
magúlang káy sa kay Pédro. Juan is older than Pedro.

Owing to the construction described at § 120 this construction may be
ambiguous: Lálo ng malakě ang gálit ni Hwŕn káy sa kay Pédro. Juan's
anger is greater than Pedro's.

282. lában against: ang gálit lában sa kanyŕ anger against him, Ang
kapangyaríhan ay ginŕgámit nya lában sa kanya ng manga kaáway. He
uses his power against his enemies.

283. líban except: Ang manga karumáta ng itň ay upahŕn, líban na
lámang sa ilŕn. These carriages are hired, except only for a few.

284. The particle mulŕ` from and its derivative magmulŕ` starting from:
ang gitnŕ` mulá sa magkábila ng dúlo the middle from both ends; ang
kanyŕ ng manga súgat mulá sa paŕ hanggŕng úlo his wounds from feet to
head; mulá ríto from here. With disjunctive attribute of time instead
of local attribute: mulá noňn from then on, from that time.

285. Words of manner with prefix pa- (see Morphology): Ang manga táo
ay nagsipagtakbúhan papalabŕs sa simbáhan. The people ran leaving
(i. e. out of) the church. Ipinatúluy nya ang paglalakŕd papuntŕ sa
isa ng báhay. He continued walking (directed) toward a certain house.

Commonest is patúngo directed towards, aiming for: Tumakbo syŕ patúngu
sa ílog. He ran towards the river.

Regular construction: Sya y papuntŕ sa lángit. He was on the way
to Heaven.

286. The particle parŕ, pára (Spanish) for, equivalent to úkol (§ 288):
Nagbwŕl sila nang isa ng báka pára sa fiyčsta. They slaughtered a cow
for the fiesta. Humúkay sila nang malálim parŕ sa patŕy. They dug a
deep pit for the corpse. Pumútol ka bŕ nang damň parŕ sa kabáyo? Have
you cut any grass for the horse? Also as conjunctive attribute,
modifying an object expression: Sulat nŕ ang líham na pára kay
Hwána. The letter for Juana is written.

287. tungkňl about, concerning: Nasiyásat nang hukňm ang lahŕt nang
bágay tungkňl sa kanila ng úsap. The judge inquired into all the
matters relating to their suit. Cf.: ang tungkůl sa súnog the details
about the fire.

288. The particle úkol is synonymous with parŕ (§ 286) and tungkňl:
Humúkay sila nang malálim úkol sa patŕy. This phrase as predicate:
Iyň y úkol sa manga hírap sa infiyčrno. This was about the sufferings
in Hell.



(6) words introducing subordinate phrases or predications.

289. Certain words precede words, phrases, and whole predications which
are thereby subordinated to the main sentence as absolute attributes,
loosely joined.

The syntactic relation of these words to the expressions which they
introduce seems to be the peculiar one described in § 54. However,
some of them are plainly joined to their phrase by na, ng, and others
end in -ng or -t. Most of them merely precede the phrase, others are
closely joined.

Finally, in a few cases predications apparently not introduced by
any subordinating word are used as absolute attributes.

290. bagŕ (§ 216), in this sense always followed by mŕn (§ 221),
although, is less used than káhit (§ 294). See also § 317. Baga mŕn
nakapagpasyŕl si Pédro, nátira kamě sa báhay. Although Pedro managed
to take a walk, we staid home.

291. bágo, in this use before (in point of time), has closely joined
position as regards its phrase: Ang manga kabáyo ng ginŕgámit nang
manga kanyunéros nang gubyčrno ay pinaíinum múna, bágo pakánin. The
horses used by the artillery of the government are watered first,
before they are fed. Nagkantáhan silŕ bágo naguwían. They sang
together before they went home. Bágo sya y sumúlat ay makipagúsap
ka sa kanyŕ. Before he writes have a talk with him. Magísip ka bágo
ka sumagňt. Think before you answer. Balatan mň ang manggŕ bágu mo
kánin. Peel the mango before you eat it. maluwat pŕ bágo mamatŕy ang
mangkukúlam long before the sorcerer dies.

In normal constructions bágo has the sense of new, recent: ang bágu
ng báhay the new house; ang bágo ng táo an unmarried man, a youth;
ang manga manňk na bágo ng bilč the chickens just bought; Bágu ng
gáling sya sa sakět. He is recently recovered from an illness.

292. hábang throughout, during, while probably consists of hába` length
plus ng. Hábang sya y natůtúlog ay nakaraŕn ang susň`. While he was
sleeping the snail passed. Hábang pinagusápan nilŕ itň ang ikapitů ng
báta` ay nása isa ng bitŕk nang bangkň`. While they were discussing
this, the seventh child was in a crack of the bench. Nŕlůlugmok
syŕ hábang panahňn sa isa ng malálim na kalungkútan. She was sunk
constantly (literally: throughout time) in a deep sadness. A short
phrase with hábang may be closely joined: Hindí nya natagalŕ ng
angkiněn hábang búhay nya ang birtůd na iyňn. He did not succeed in
keeping this quality as his own throughout (his) life. [8]

293. hanggŕng as far as, to, until may be hanggŕn limit, end plus ng;
instead of the absolute construction the phrase is, however, often
in local form. For lack of ang in the phrase see § 68. Naghintŕy
sya hanggŕng katanghalían. He waited till noon. Ang púno` ay tumúbo`
hanggŕng sa magbúnga. The tree grew until (it) bore fruit. Silŕ ay
nagtakbúhan hanggŕng sa dumatěng sila sa kanila ng báyan. They both ran
until they arrived in their town. As predicate: Ang kúlang nang gátas
ay hanggŕng sa lečg nang bóte. The lack of milk is as far as the neck
of the bottle, i. e. The milk goes only up to the neck of the bottle.

294. káhit (§ 245), with or without na, in the sense of although, no
matter (cf. §§ 290. 317). The subordinate word or phrase has usually
the form of a question; when it is an entire predication the predicate
stands first: Tinalaga nyŕ ng sumáma, káhit na saŕn sya dalhěn. He
decided to go along, no matter where he was carried. Káhit na anň ang
iyútos nya ay sinúsunňd. No matter what it was he ordered, (it) was
obeyed. Káhit na madilěm ang gabě ay nagpasyal děn si Pédro. Though
the night was dark, Pedro nevertheless took a walk. Káhit na bahagyŕ
ang ulŕn ay nakabasŕ` nang karsáda. Though the rain was scanty,
it sufficed to wet the streets. Káhit ulňl ang áso ay áyaw nya ng
patayěn. Although the dog was mad, he did not want to kill it.

Note the following instance, in which káhit na precedes its phrase as
a closely joined attribute: Nŕramdaman kň ang kalabět nya sa ákin,
káhit na akň natůtúlog. I felt his touch against me, even though I
was asleep.

Phrases with káhit may be closely joined to the main sentence:
Nŕpůpútol nya káhit na walá sya ng kasangkápan ang bákal nang kanya
ng bělanggúan. He managed, even though he had no tools, to cut the
iron of his prison. ang táo káhit laláki o babáye na nagŕári sa kanyŕ
the person, man or woman, who owns it.

295. kaniyŕ`, kanyŕ` (§ 241) expressive of result, may with its phrase
be subordinated. It then stands as a closely joined attribute of its
phrase: Kanyá nya iníwan ang páyong ay sapagkŕt nagtígil ang ulŕn at
lumiwánag ang lángit. The reason he left his umbrella (quasi-subject)
was because the rain let up and the sky cleared. Accordingly we may
analyze as subordinate such clauses as the following: Náupó sya sa
tiněk, kanyá sya nápatinděg agŕd. He sat down on a spine, so as to jump
at once, i. e. that is why he jumped up at once. Cf., however, § 324.

296. The particle kapŕg if, in case (of single events viewed as
completed in the future, synonymous with pagkŕ, § 304), see § 300:
Ang hinirŕm nya ng kampět ay iyo ng kúnin, kapag ipinůpútol na nyŕ
nang káhoy. Take away the knife he borrowed if he uses it to cut wood.

297. kayŕ` (§ 219) is sometimes used exactly like kaniyŕ` (§ 295):
Kayŕ` aku naparíto ay kůkúnin ku ang hinirŕm mo ng librň. I am going
to take the book you have borrowed, so that I have come here, i. e. I
have come here to.... The act is expressed as a subordinate element,
the purpose as the principal sentence. Nagpůpútol si Hwŕn nang káhoy,
kayá sya y wala ríto. Juan is cutting wood now, that is why he is
not here.

298. The atonic particle kung preceding an expression of time
states the time when of repeated occurrences: Gumŕgámit kamě nang
makapŕl na damět kung tagulŕn. We use thick clothing in the rainy
season. Nagtětípon nang pagkáin ang manga langgŕm kung tagáraw. The
ants collect food in summer. Ang hůníhan nang manga íbon kung
umága ay nakalěligáya. The chirping of the birds in the morning is
gladdening. Ang iba ng táwo y mabúti pa ng makisáma káy sa isŕ ng
kapatěd kung mínsan. An unrelated person is better to associate
with than a brother at times. So: kung gabč at night, of nights,
kung fiyčsta nang báyan during the (periodic) fiesta of the town,
kung madilěm at dark, when it is dark, kung bahŕ` at flood-times,
kung buwŕn nang Húniyo in June.

Occasionally the phrase with kung is closely joined: Hindí hasŕ`
kung mínsan ang manga bágu ng patalěm sa Filipínas. In the Philippines
new cutlery is sometimes without an edge (i. e. sold without an edge,
to be sharpened by the purchaser).

299. With phrases in the form of a question (minus bŕ § 215 or bagŕ §
216) kung expresses indirect question. The expression so formed stands
as quasi-subject or quasi-object (cf. §§ 157. 158) or as predicate:
Naalaála nya kung papáno ang paggawŕ` nang salamangkŕ. He managed
to recall how the trick was done. Ipináyu nya na kung sínu sa kanilŕ
ang pinkamahúsay na magsalitŕ` nang Latěn ay siya lámang kŕkáin nang
itlňg. He advised that whoever (kung síno) among them was the best at
speaking Latin should be the one who alone ate the egg. Si Pédro ay
nagíisěp kung saŕn nya naíwan ang kanya ng páyong. Pedro is trying
to recall where he left his umbrella. Nŕlŕláman mo bŕ kung saŕn sya
nároon? Do you know where he is? Ang manga táo-ng-báyan ay nagsiyásat
kung maŕári sila ng magtayň nang isa ng mákina nang běgásan sa kanila
ng báyan. The townspeople considered whether they could put up a
machine for thrashing rice in their town. Ang siyásat ni Hwŕn sa kanya
ng pagparíto ay kung ilŕ ng kúra ang nŕrěritň sa áti ng báyan. Juan's
inquiry when he got here was how many priests there are in our town.

300. Introducing other phrases kung has the sense of if, whenever
(of non-actual occurrences viewed as unreal, hypothetical, or
repeated); compare disjunctive attributes of time (§ 192, single actual
occurrence), pag (§ 303, single non-actual occurrence, simultaneous),
kapŕg and pagkŕ (§§ 296, 304, single non-actual precedent occurrence),
words with prefixes in p- (§ 274, single occurrence, actual or
non-actual), tuwč` (§ 307, repeated actual): Kung dumatěng si Hwŕn
ay umalis kŕ. If Juan comes, go away. Kung dumatěng sya ay sabíhin mo
ng maghintŕy. If he comes, tell him to wait. Kung úulŕn ay gamítin mo
ang kapóte. If it rains, use your raincoat. Běbilhin kň ang kabáyo ng
iyňn kung máy-roon akň ng marámi ng kwaltŕ. I should buy this horse,
if I had enough money. Note: Kung sa pagaasáwa namŕn, akň y nagkaroňn
nang dalawŕ. And as to (literally if) taking a wife, I had two.

301. In the same sense kung with dě` (§ 237) or hindě` (§ 239) if not,
precedes the second, positive member of a contrast: unless, but rather,
beside, except (Cf. palŕ § 228): Hwag kŕ ng makŕpakikáin-káin kung
hindí ka inŕanyáhan. Don't be taking meals with people unless you are
invited. Walŕ ng ibŕ ng nagpŕpahírap sa kanyŕ kung hindí kayň. There
is no one else who causes suffering to him, beside you.

302. ngayňn (§ 262), when subordinating, is conjunctively joined to
its clause: Ngayň ng áraw na yitň y dárating silŕ. On this very day
they will arrive. Ngayň ng táo ng iyňn ay patay nŕ, bákit namŕn...? Now
that this man is dead, why...?

303. The atonic particle pag gives the time when of a single
non-actual occurrence; cf. § 274 and see § 300. Pag akň ay pagňd,
natůtúlug akň nang maluwŕt. When I am tired, I sleep late. Pag paputňl
mo ng hiníwa` ang pakuwŕn ay hindí mŕběbilě ang banda ng púno`. If
you cut the watermelon crosswise, you will not be able to sell the
stem-end. Magmůmurahŕn sila ng dalawŕ pag nagkíta. The two will revile
each other when they meet.

304. The particle pagkŕ (synonymous with kapŕg, § 296) gives the
time immediately after which of a single non-actual occurrence; cf. §
274 and see § 300. Pagka ikŕw ay nahúlog ay masŕsaktan kŕ. When you
have taken a fall you will be hurt.

305. The particle patě including; cf. § 68. ang boň ng katawŕn patě
manga matŕ at taínga the whole body, including eyes and ears.

306. The particle sapagkŕt (sa pagkŕ at ?) because, for: Sapagkŕt ang
pári ng itň ay nagakála ng manga walŕ ng pinagarálan ang kanyŕ ng
sinčsčrmunan ay hindí sya nagpílit.... Because this priest thought
his hearers were uneducated people, he took no pains.... Ipinapútol
nya ang kanya ng dalíre`, sapagkŕt tinubúan nang kŕnser. He had his
finger amputated because there was a cancer on it. For a phrase with
sapagkŕt as predicate see example under kanyŕ`, § 241.

307. The particle tuwč` (§ 244) in this use tells the time when
always of actual repeated occurrences: whenever, every time. It
is conjunctively joined to its clause: Pinaghŕhatdan nyŕ nang
gátas ang báyan twě ng umága. He delivers milk in the town every
morning. Pumŕparíto ang médiko twi ng makalawŕ. The doctor comes
every other day. Si Hwŕn ay nakěkipagluksúhan twi ng idinŕdáos ang
manga palarň` kung fyčsta nang báyan. Juan takes part in the jumping
contest whenever games are held in the fiesta of the town. Twě ng
papásuk akň sa síne sa áki ng kúyang ay áyaw sya. Every time I ask
my brother to take me to the moving-picture show, he refuses.

308. úpang in order to, so that (úpa pay, wages ?): Sila y naúupo pa
lámang úpang mananghále`. They are just sitting down to eat the noon
meal. Syŕ y tumayň` sa bubungŕn nang báhay úpang tanawěn ang súnog. He
stood up on the roof of the house to watch the fire. Kantahŕn ninyň ang
máy sakit úpang sya y malibŕng. Sing for the sick man so that he may be
cheered. Tináwag nilŕ ang isa ng kálaw úpang siya ng magěng hukňm. They
called an owl so that (it) might be the one who served as judge.

309. yámang while, as: Ang púno nang unggň ay namatŕy yámang ang
sa pagňng ay tumúbo`. The tree of the monkey died while that of the
turtle grew.

310. Predications and similar phrases (impersonal or anaphoric) as
absolute attributes, in the meaning of disjunctive attributes of time,
are not uncommon: Madali-ng-áraw pa lámang ay nŕrňroňn na silŕ. (When)
it was still but dawn, they were already there. Makása-m-pu ng táwag nŕ
ay walá pa syŕ. (At) the tenth call he was still not there. Makaraŕn
ang ila ng sandalě` ay sinábi nya sa susň`.... (When) a few moments
had passed, he said to the snail.... May ápat na pu ng taňn na
sya sa lúpa ng Katagalúgan ay hindí pa nya nŕtutúhan ... (When)
he had already been in the Tagalog country for about forty years,
he had not yet learned.... Mínsan pumásuk sya sa simbáhan ay nárinig
nya.... Once (when) he went to church, he heard.... Other examples
at 26,21. 28,11. 66,15. 9213.



4. Serial groups.

311. The serial relation is expressed in part explicitly by particles
and in part by parataxis, parenthesis, and anacolouthic constructions.



(1) coordinating particles.

312. The most important of the coordinating particles is at, t; as
some of the others end in -t, they may be felt to contain at; cf. the
similar ending in other particles, § 213; t is used after syllabics,
n, and ` (see Phonetics), but even here at is commoner.

When a sentence begins with a coordinating particle, the latter
gives expression to the connection with the preceding sentence (as
in English sentences beginning with And ... or But ...)

313. at, t and connects words, phrases, or entire predications. báro
t salawŕl blouse and trousers (native costume), ang tapunŕn nang
béha at upňs the place for throwing cigarette-ends and cigar-stubs,
dalawa ng, pů t dalawŕ twenty-two, kung mínsan at malakě ang gálit
nang amŕ ... sometimes, when the father's anger was great ... (kung
goes with both of the members connected by at).

When more than two elements are connected, at is used generally between
the last two: sina Pédro, Hwŕn, at Andrčs the group consisting of
Pedro, Juan, and Andrés. isa ng líbo, walo ng daŕn, walo ng pu t
ánim 1886.

314. at is used in a few common phrases: isŕ t isŕ everyone ibŕ t ibŕ
various: ang mangŕ taga ibŕ t iba ng báyan people from various towns;
Iba t ibŕ ang kúlay nang kanya ng pananamět. His clothes are of various
colors. at ibŕ pŕ and so forth, and other; ang tsíko, súha`, santňl,
... at iba pŕ the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol, and so forth;
ang manga háyop at iba pŕ ng árě nang pŕmahalaŕn the live stock and
other belongings of the government.

315. at has occasionally a decidedly adversative tone; so, for
instance, at 78,31.

316. Frequently at has subordinative coloring, the second of the
members joined expressing:

cause: Hintŕy ka múna t hindí pa akň nakapápahingŕ. Make a halt first,
for I am not yet rested. Íbig mo bŕ ng kumáin sa ámin?--Salámat, áyaw
ko t kakŕkáin ko pa lámang. Do you want to eat with us?--Thank you,
no, for I have only just eaten. Buksan mň ang pintň` at íbig ko ng
pumások. Open the door, for I want to go in.

result: Ano t dí ka lumákad nang matúlin? Why don't you walk
fast? Ano ang íbig mo t nŕrěrito kŕ? What do you want that you have
come here? i. e. What have you come here for? So especially: anň ang
dáhil at...? what is the reason that...?

purpose: Umalěs sya t makěkipútol nang damň. He has gone to help
cut grass.

temporal succession: Hindí sya nakaratěng nang ápat na pu ng taňn sa
gúlang at sya y namatŕy. She had not reached forty years in her age,
when she died.

a subordinate quasi-subject: Sinábi nang manghuhúla sa iyň t hindi
maláyo ríto ang kawŕwalan nang iyo ng singsěng. The fortune-teller
told you that the place where you would lose your ring is not far
from here. Sinábi ko nŕ sa iyň at hwag kŕ ng maíngay. I have told
you already not to make any noise. [9]

317. The subordinating value of at appears especially in certain
expressions which it forms with other particles:

(1) at bakŕ` lest (cf. § 235): Hwag kŕ ng magpatihúlog diyŕn sa
kátre at baká ka masaktŕn. Don't throw yourself from that bed, for
you might hurt yourself.

(2) at nang so that (cf. § 192 f.): Magiinům ka nang gátas at nang
ikŕw ay tumabŕ`. Drink milk so that you may grow stout.

(3) bagŕ mŕn at although (cf. § 290): Baga mŕn at umúulŕn ay
nagsísipaglarň silŕ. Although it is raining they are at play.

(4) kayŕ` at so that (cf. § 297): Napapúpunta nilŕ ang pelóta kayŕ t
báwat isa sa kanilŕ ay nakaabŕng. They direct the ball so that every
one of them is on guard.

(5) káylan mŕn at every time that, whenever, synonymous with tuwč ng,
§ 307 (cf. káylan mŕn § 262): Si Hwŕn ay táwa nang táwa káylan mŕ t
márinig nya ang manga katatawanŕ ng bahági nang kwčnto. Juan laughs
and laughs every time he hears the funny parts of the story.

318. dátapuwat but is the commonest adversative coordinating
particle. It is used also when the two members are not logically
but only formally in contrast: Ang húni nang pipět ay mahína`,
dátapuwat mataŕs ang tóno. The chirping of the stone-sparrow is
weak, but high-pitched. Půputúlin ko ang lúbid kung máy-roon akň ng
laséta, dátapuwat walá ako. I should cut the rope if I had a knife,
but I have none. Si Pédro ay hindí dumatěng, dátapuwat iba ng táo
ang naparíto. Pedro did not arrive; it was someone else who came here.

319. The particles ně hindě` (§§ 253. 239) connect coordinate
elements in the sense of nor: Sya y hindí nagsísimbŕ ně hindí
nangúngumpisŕl ně hindí rin nagmŕmáno sa páre`. He neither went to
church nor confessed nor kissed the priest's hand. The hindě` may,
as an anaphoric element, be left off after another hindě`: Ang kanila
ng kamŕy ay hindí nila máilabŕs sa bútas ně ibig namŕn sila ng bitíwan
ang lamŕn nang nyňg. They cannot take out their hands from the opening,
nor are they willing to let go the cocoanut-meat.

320. The particle ngúnit is equivalent with dátapuwat, but is less
common: Hindí sya nagísip, ngúnit sumagňt karáka-ráka. He did not
reflect but answered at once.

321. The atonic particle o or (probably Spanish): isa ng malakě ng
áso o báboy a large dog or pig; Dikdikěn kitŕ sa lusňng o lunúrin
kita sa ílog? Shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in the
river? Frequently the combination o kayŕ` (§ 219) is used; it is
loosely joined: Ang kapangyaríha ng itň y gáling sa dimóniyo o kayŕ y
mána sa magúlang. This power comes from a demon or else is inherited
from one's parents.

322. The particle subálit but is less common than its equivalents
dátapuwat and ngúnit: Aku sána y páparoon sa Balíwag, subálit hindí
ako nátulňy, dahilŕn sa isa ng karamdáman. I was going to Baliwag,
but I did not keep on, on account of an illness.



(2) paratactic sentences.

323. A vocative joins another sentence: Hintú na kayň, manga
báta`! Stop, children! Té na, baláe! or: Tara nŕ, baláe! Come on,
old man!

324. Contrast, cause, result, detail, etc. are sometimes paratactically
expressed; in some cases it seems uncertain whether the second element
is paratactic or subordinate, so especially when it begins with kaniyŕ`
(§§ 241. 295): Sina Pédro, Hwŕn, at Andrčs ay magkakasamahŕ ng nagtánod
sa isŕ ng dúlo nang tulŕy; sina Felípe, Andůy, at Mariyáno sa ikalawŕ
ng dúlo. Pedro, Juan, and Andrés are standing guard together at one
end of the bridge; Felipe, Andoy, and Mariano at the other. Hindí ko
gustň iyŕn, ibŕ ang áki ng gustň. I don't like that, I want something
else. Hwag kŕ ng umyŕk, Maryŕ, baká ka himatayěn. Don't weep, Maria,
you might have a fainting-fit. Ang kantŕ nang báta ng si Hwŕn ay kanya
ng nalimútan, kanyŕ hindi tulŕ` ang kanya ng kinantŕ. Little Juan
forgot his song, that is why what he sang was disconnected. Siya ngŕ`,
siyŕ ang nagbigŕy sa ákin nang bágo ng búhay. Yes, she; it was she
who gave me new life. Sya y may famíliya; bukňd sa asáwa ay may dalawŕ
sya ng anŕk. He had a family; beside his wife he had two children.



(3) parenthesis.

325. Not infrequently explanatory elements are inserted into a
sentence parenthetically: Tatlň ng magkakaybígan, isa ng páre`,
isa ng manggagámut, at isa ng sundálo ... Three friends, a priest,
a physician, and a soldier ... sa háyop namŕn, karanyúwa y ang bábuy
... against animals, usually a pig ... wala ng ulŕm, asěn at kánin
lámang there was no meat, only salt and boiled rice. Further cases
at 54,5. 86,21. 100,23. 108,29.

326. Often the parenthetic element is descriptive: malakŕs kumáin,
katimbŕng nang dalawŕ katáo great at eating, a match for two persons;
nang pinagkatamŕn na walŕ ng patěd, ápat na pu ng paŕ ang hába`
shavings without a break, forty feet in length. Similar cases at
80,39. 86,29. 118,43. 120,2.

327. Especially common are parentheses describing the temporary
state or situation of something: Ang mŕnanalň ng pangkŕt at ang
kanila ng manga kaybígan, magkakasáma ng tinůtugtugŕn nang kanila ng
bŕnda nang músika, ay agad-agŕd na nagpŕpaséyo. The winning team and
their friends, all together accompanied by the playing of their band,
at once form a parade. Nakaratěng sila sa kanila ng báhay, dalŕ nila
ang súpot nang kwaltŕ. They arrived at their house, bearing the bag
of money. Other cases at 92,22. 98,21. 114,42.



(4) anacolouthon.

328. In other cases a breaking off of the construction rather than
an insertion seems to take place: Ang manga hindí nagsísitugtňg
ang katungkúlan ay kumantŕ. Those who do not play, their duty is to
sing. Gáya ko, akň y paráti ng nŕhŕhábul nang manga áso. Like me, I am
often pursued by dogs. Pabulňng lámang kung silŕ y magsŕlitáan. In
whispers only (predicate) when they talk together. The organic
construction would probably be: Pabulňng lámang ang kanila ng
pagsasŕlitáan. Their conversation is only in whispers. Kung kanya
ng pakánin ay wala ng ulŕm. When (they, anaphoric) are fed it is
without meat.

329. While direct quotations often enter into normal constructions
as predicate (§ 114), as conjunctive complement (§ 159), or as
disjunctive object (§ 186), they are often joined by a breaking
off of construction. In this case their relation to the rest of a
sentence may resemble that of a subject; this happens especially
when the sentence begins with the quotation or with part of it. If
ay, y were used many of these sentences would be regular: "Magáral
ka ng mabúti," sinábi ni Hwŕn sa kanya ng anŕk. "Study well" was
said by Juan to his son. "Dalawŕ!" isinigŕw nang bulŕg. "Two!" was
shouted by the blindman. "Sa damdam kň," ang sagňt ni Dyégo,
"ay akň ang pinakamakínis." "In my opinion," was Diego's answer,
"I am the cleverest." Similarly their relation may resemble that
of a disjunctive object (instrumental type, § 186), but nang is not
used. This happens if the quotation follows active words of saying:
Si Hwŕn namŕn ay sumagňt: "Matŕr!" Juan then answered: "Matar!"

330. This peculiar construction of direct quotations is extended to
some cases that are not exactly quotations but may be viewed as such:
Ang boň ng ása ko ang kandidáto ng si Manikěs ang nŕgůgustuhŕn nang
manga táo; hindí palŕ, kung hindí ang kandidáto ng si Sŕntos. It
was my whole expectation that the candidate Maniquís would be the
one chosen by the people; but no, it was the candidate Santos. Ang
paniwála nang manga táo si Sang-Hwŕn ay sya ng sŕnto ng nagpápaulŕn. It
is the belief of the people that San Juan is the saint who makes rain.





C. MORPHOLOGY.

1. Composition.

331. Compound words (i. e. words resembling in form a succession of
two or more words, but diverging in meaning from such a succession) are
treated phonetically like groups of words in the phrase (§§ 33. 34).

If the first member ends in syllabic, n, or glottal stop, the particle
ng appears before the second member.

In meaning, compound words resemble a phrase in which the word
corresponding to the first member is modified, in disjunctive
attribution, by the word corresponding to the second: báhay-aklátan
library-building: báhay nang aklátan. The meaning of the compound is,
however, more specialized than that of the phrase.

Exceptions as to meaning are: (1) the copulative compound áraw-gabě,
formed on the model of doubled words, such as áraw-áraw, gabi-gabě
(§§ 258. 343.); (2) kapatěd-kongkristiyános, a foreign product;
(3) máy-roňn, equivalent to máy, which has been viewed as a compound
because its construction (§ 138) differs from that of the phrase máy
roňn (which would not require the particle ng, §§ 252. 263).

Similar in form to compound words are words derived from a phrase
(§ 332).

Examples of regular compounds: ang báhay-báta` the womb, báhay-gúya`
the womb of an animal (gúya` the young of an animal), báhay-pŕhayagŕn
newspaper office, publishing house, Báhay-Paníki Bat-House (name of a
town, paníki a bat), báhay-pintáhan paint-shop; Itň y bigay-loňb lámang
nya sa ákin. This is merely a concession he makes to me as a favor; ang
lalawíga-ng-Pampŕngga, ang prověnsiya-ng-Pampŕngga Pampanga Province,
cf. ang prověnsiya nang Pampŕngga; pilěk-matŕ eyelash (pilěk fin,
lash); ang Sŕmáha-ng-Sumúlong the Sumulong Company; ang tánud-báhay
the watchman of a house, tánud-pálay watchman of a rice-field.

A member of a compound may consist of an entire phrase (cf. §
332): Běgása-ng-Sumúlong-at-Kasamahŕn Rice-mill of Sumulong and
Company (equivalent to Běgásan nila Sumúlong at Kasamahŕn); ang
dúlo-ng-bandŕ-ng-kánan the right-hand end (ang bandŕ ng kánan the
right).

Specialization and transference of meaning are especially marked
in hampas-lúpa` (literally: beating of the ground) tramp, vagabond;
kápit-báhay not only neighboring house, but also neighbor: Ang báhay
ni Hwŕn ay áki ng kápit-báhay, but also: Si Hwŕn ay áki ng kápit-báhay;
kápit-báyan neighboring town, but also person from a neighboring town;
Sawi-ng-pálad siyŕ. He is unlucky (literally unhandy of the palm).

For the other occurrences of compounds see Index under báhay, bakŕs,
bŕnda, bantŕy, básag, báyad, báyan, búnga, bútas, daŕn, hánap, ílog,
kalabŕw, kapuluŕn, kasamaŕn, kasawiŕn, kasiraŕn, kinamatayŕn, lúpa`,
médiko, paŕ, pamatŕy, pantŕy, piráso, púno`, sŕmáhan, táo, trabáho,
úbos.



2. General features of word-formation.

332. Many words are analyzed into (1) recurring affixes, (2) doubling,
(3) reduplication, and (4) a recurring unanalyzable element bearing
the material meaning, the root. The place of the root may be taken by
a word in turn showing derivation by these processes, or by a compound
word, or even by a phrase. Other words, root-words, contain only the
unanalyzable element.

Other modifications affecting the meaning are shifting of the accent
toward the end of the word, and the use of secondary accents.

Modifications not affecting the meaning, but merely accompanying those
already named, are sound-variation and retraction of the accent toward
the beginning of the word.

The same morphologic elements may be variously distributed; it is
most convenient and corresponds most nearly to the speech-feeling
to describe these differences as though they were due to different
successions in which the modifications are applied: sumůsúlat is
súlat reduplicated and with infix -um-; but (nag-)tůtumirŕ is tirŕ
with infix -um-, then reduplicated (plus prefix nag-).

The part of a word to which a modification is (in this sense)
said to be added will be called the underlying word (or phrase): in
sumůsúlat the infix -um- is added to the underlying word sůsúlat, in
(nag-)tůtumirŕ reduplication is added to the underlying word tumirŕ;
in ikasa-m-pů` the tenth the prefixes ka- and i- are successively
added to the underlying phrase sa m pů` ten.

Roots not actually occurring in this book as independent words will
be written with a hyphen prefixed (-káin), except in unmistakable
lists of roots.

333. The root. Except for some pronoun forms and particles, the roots
have two or more syllables and are almost always accented either on
the last (oxytone roots) or on the next-to-last (barytone roots):
báhay house, kamŕy hand.

Some disyllabic roots are formed as though a single syllable were
repeated: bitbět, budbňd, bungbňng piece of unsplit bamboo, damdŕm,
dibděb chest (part of body), dikděk, dingděng (dinděng, § 20), gága,
hinhěn, ladlŕd, laglŕg, lingkěng, lublňb, mangmŕng, ningněng, padpŕd,
pangpŕng, pukpňk, satsŕt, siksěk, singsěng, sísi, súso breast, nipple,
sutsňt, tadtŕd, tiktěk, tingtěng (tintěng), tugtňg, tuktňk, tungtňng
(tuntňng), ulňl.

Of the roots of more than two syllables some similarly repeat one
or two syllables: alaála, babáye (see § 345), bulaklŕk, lipumpňn
(beside lípon).

Others appear as though a syllable -al- or -ag- were infixed (or
prefixed) before the first syllabic: alagŕd (cf. agŕd`), balahíbo
fur, hair on the body, balíkat, balíta`, Balíwag, balúbad, baluktňt,
dalága, dalamháte`, dalandŕn, dalanghíta`, dalángin, halakhŕk,
haláman, halíge, halimbáwa`, halimhěm, kalabňg, kalákal, kalasěng,
kalaykŕy, kaluskňs, palakŕ`, salakŕb, salákay, salakňt a rain-hat of
palm-leaves, salapč`, salawŕl, salaysŕy, salitŕ`, salúbong, salúkoy,
talastŕs, talungkň`,--bagábag, bagáso bare stalk, of sugar-cane or corn
(Spanish brazo, whence Tagalog baráso arm, assimilated to this type?),
Hagúnoy, lagablŕb, lagánap, pagakpŕk, sagása`, sagitsět.

In some instances roots of the same or similar meaning resemble each
other in form. This is commonest in loan-words, where different degrees
of assimilation exist side by side: biróke, bitóke blow-gun bullet
(Spanish bodoque); palŕnsa, pirěnsa flatiron (Spanish plancha). It
occurs also, however, in native (or anciently assimilated) roots:
aniyáya`, yáya`; ánib, sánib (for sa ánib?); balíta`, salitŕ`; bitŕw,
bitěw; bugňk, bulňk; bungánga` mouth, maw (nang hurnň of the oven,
nang kalŕn of the stove), sungánga` a blow on the mouth; diněg,
kiněg; ípon, lípon (lipumpňn, above), típon; laŕn, taŕn; luhňd, túhod;
manghŕ`, tanghŕ`; matŕy, patŕy; hantŕy, hintŕy.

When syllables of a root resemble affixes, there is always
possibility that the root may be interpreted as a derived word by
the speech-feeling, no matter whether historically it be such or
not. Thus the Index will show many roots whose initial syllables are
identical with prefixes; the other cases will be mentioned under the
various affixes.

334. Affixation. Prefixes are added to the initial of the underlying
word: nag-tirŕ; infixes before the first syllabic: t-um-irŕ, um-alěs;
suffixes to the end: těrá-han.

Affixes are occasionally accompanied by retraction of accent: itň,
d-íto. See §§ 343,c. 358,c.e. 481,c. 485,a. 523. 528,d.

In the following cases affixes are accompanied by sound-variation:

(a) prefixes:

(1) The prefixes ending in g are treated phonetically as though they
were separate words; this happens occasionally with other prefixes
(§ 34).

(2) Initial d of the underlying word becomes r after the syllabic of
a prefix in the roots listed in § 17. The change is constant only
in the commonest formations: always pa-raŕn, but naká-daŕn beside
naká-raŕn. Striking irregularities at §§ 407,a. 468.

(3) The prefix i- and in some formations the prefix ka- contract with
a following syllabic (§ 31): iy-ánib (for i-ánib), íwan (for i-íwan),
ka-yibíg-an (for ka-ibíg-an), kŕwáwa` (for ka-áwa-áwa`). See §§
368. 401. 421. 426,b. 475,a. 481,c. 485,a.

(4) The prefixes ending in ng (mang-, nang-, pang-) alter a following
initial, always in much-used words, frequently in others.

Before an initial syllabic the ng is treated as though it belonged
to the underlying word and not to the prefix. This appears in
reduplication (§ 336).

Initial p, b, t, d, s, are often, initial k is always changed
to the corresponding nasal: pamálo` (pálo` with pang-), but also
pang-pa-rikět; pamilmět (bilmět), but also pang-bambň; panáli` (táli`),
but also pang-takěp; panalángin (dalángin), but also pang-dilěg;
na-naríwa` (saríwa`), but also pang-sakŕy; nangapŕ` (kapŕ`). Where
the change is not made, the ng may be assimilated to dentals (§ 20):
mandurúkit beside mangdudúkit.

Before nasals the ng is usually lost: namahála` (mahála` with nang-).

See pang- and mang- in List of Formations.

(5) The prefix hin- and its compounds give rise to a few similar
changes, see §§ 357,b. 376,a. 518.

(6) For occasional irregularities of prefixes see §§ 347,b. 481,d. 528.

(b) infixes:

(1) Where -in- is infixed in a word beginning with l, w, or y, this
initial is usually interchanged with the n, so that, practically,
we have a prefixed ni- instead of an infixed -in-: ni-lúto` (beside
less common l-in-úto`), ni-walěs (beside w-in-íka`), ni-yáya`. See §§
359 ff. 374 ff.

(2) Where words beginning with syllabic, h, l, w (and y) have
the prefix i- and the infix -in-, the latter is almost always
used as a prefix, preceding the i-: in-iy-útos, in-íwan (for
in-i-íwan), in-i-hatěd, i-ni-lúto` (beside less common i-l-in-úto`),
in-i-wisěk. See § 368.

(3) On -um- see § 348,b.

(c) suffixes:

(1) The suffixes (-an and -in) after a syllabic take an initial h:
luksú-han.

(2) Final d always becomes r before a suffix: lakar-ŕn (lákad).

(3) When used in the formation of transient derivatives, as well as
in some other of their uses, the suffixes are accompanied by irregular
modifications of certain roots.

Some roots ending in syllabic are treated as if they ended in glottal
stop; they are amŕ, kíta, matŕ: ama-ěn, kitá-an, matá-an.

Others are treated as though they ended in n; they are paŕ, tálo,
táwa: paa-nŕn (beside regular paa-hŕn), talú-nan, tawá-nan.

Other roots lose the syllabic of the last syllable, as well as a
final glottal stop which may follow this; if the syllabic is final,
the suffix adds h: asěn asn-ŕn, bigŕy bigy-ŕn, bilě bil-hŕn, mulŕ`
mul-ŕn. The roots so treated are: asěn, bigŕy, bilě, bukŕs, dalŕ,
hatěd, higŕ`, ibŕ (but also regular iba-hŕn), eskuwéla, gawŕ`, káin,
kamět, lagŕy, lakě, likňd, masěd, mulŕ`, punň`, pútol (but also
regular putúl-an), sakŕy, sákit, subň, sunňd, tángan, tibŕ`, tingěn,
tirŕ (but also regular tirá-han), ulě`, upň`, walŕ`.

Still other roots add assimilation, dissimilation, or metathesis of
consonants to the loss of vowel: ának angk-ŕn, atěp apt-ŕn, daněw
(? see § 421) ka-raniyúw-an, datěng datn-ŕn, gílid ta-ligd-ŕn (beside
regular ta-gilír-an), halěk hagk-ŕn, hanggŕ hangg-ŕn (i. e. the
h of -han is lost), kiněg kingg-ŕn, silěd sigl-ŕn, taněm tamn-ŕn,
tuwěd ka-tu-tur-ŕn.

Entirely irregular are the following: alaála alala-hánin (-hánin
for -hin), aniyáya anyá-han, hári` ka-hariy-ŕn ka-hary-ŕn (beside
regular pag-harí-an), íhip híp-an, ílag inlag-ŕn (for ilag-nŕn? but
also regular ilág-an), kawáyan kwayan-ŕn (beside regular kawayan-ŕn),
kilála kilan-lŕn (for kilal-nŕn?), kúha kú-nin, larň` laruw-ŕn larw-ŕn
(beside regular laru-ŕn), pulň` ka-puluw-ŕn ka-pulw-ŕn (beside regular
ka-pulu-ŕn), sála sang-lŕn (for sal-nan? also ka-salá-nan and regular
salá-han), sundň` pagkŕ-sunduw-ŕn (beside regular -sundu-ŕn), táo
ka-taw-ŕn (? see § 422, also regular ka-taú-han), totoň tňto-hánan
(-hánan for -hŕn).

335. Doubling. In certain formations the underlying word,
if disyllabic, is repeated; the phonetic treatment is the same as
that of successive words in a phrase (§ 34): agad-agŕd, gabi-gabě,
ápat-ápat, pa-lígid-lígid.

If the underlying word has more than two syllables, only the beginning
of it, inclusive of the second syllabic, is repeated, and the final
syllabic of this repeated part has a primary accent: kaní-kaníno,
kaní-kanilŕ, nag-kagá-kagalět (underlying word ka-galět).

336. Reduplication. In some formations the beginning of the
underlying word, including the first syllabic, is repeated, sů-súlat,
á-akiyŕt. Words with reduced i or u (§ 27) reduplicate with i, u:
maka-sí-siyŕ, maka-sí-syŕ.

Note the foreign words: krůs nag-kú-kurůs, trabáho nag-tá-trabáho.

Initial d of the roots listed in § 17 often becomes r after the
reduplication: k-in-ŕ-dň-roon-ŕn (doňn), nag-dá-daŕn (daŕn).

When a prefix which involves change of initial comes before a
reduplicated form, the latter has the changed initial both in the
reduplicative syllable and in the underlying part: nŕ-rň-roňn (doňn),
pa-ngu-ngumět (umět with pang-, § 334, a, 4; also: pang-u-umět)
pútol pa-mu-mútol (pútol with pang-).

337. Accent-shift. In certain formations the accent is displaced one
syllable toward the end of the word: súlat sulŕt. This is especially
the case before suffixes forming transient words: súlat sulát-an. In
some formations with suffixes the accent moves two syllables toward
the end of the word: súlat sulat-ŕn.

Certain roots are especially given to this change and show it in
formations where it is not regular. In these roots the accent-shift
is more or less clearly and regularly connected with a modification
of meaning. The roots are: ábot overtake, with shift: reach for,
take hold of, pass, hand; e. g. pa-ábot let oneself be overtaken,
pa-abňt something caused to be handed, ákay, álam, áwa`, áyaw, bába`,
báhay, báya`, búlag, gálit, gísing, háyag, húli, lápit, láyo`, múra,
sákit, sáma, síra`, tálo, táma`, táwa, túloy, úna. See Index. A few
pairs of roots differing only in accent may possibly belong here,
e. g. -ának family and anŕk child.

338. Secondary accents. (1) In some formations a secondary accent is
spoken on the initial syllable of the underlying word: alěs ŕlís-an,
ka-galět kŕgalít-an, iyŕk ěyák-an. If the first syllable is closed, the
secondary accent is omitted: luksň luksú-han; so also if it is followed
by consonant plus reduced vowel (§ 27): taniyŕg tanyŕg tanyág-an; and
also if its own vowel is reduced: niyňg nyňg niyúg-an nyúg-an. There
are some irregularities. See §§ 377,b. 383. 421. 421,b. 426,b.

(2) Prefixes and reduplications often take a secondary accent: nŕ-pútol
(different in meaning from na-pútol), sů-súlat.

These secondary accents have phonetically the quality of primary
accents when they come before short oxytone underlying words: ná-riněg,
á-akiyŕt. If, however, the word is accented on a suffix, the accent on
this is more audible and the secondary accent remains: nŕ-buks-ŕn. So
also if there are two secondary accents: nŕ-rě-riněg. Longer oxytone
words not accented on a suffix vary; they have been transcribed as
heard in each case: nag-sě-si-pag-larň` nag-sí-si-pag-larň`.

339. Indications. In the following description formations will be
indicated as follows:

prefixes thus: nag-; infixes: -um-; suffixes: -an; secondary accent
on prefixes: nŕ-;

doubling by "D", e. g. nag- D -an represents the formation seen in
nag-aswŕng-aswáng-an;

reduplication by "r", with secondary accent by "R", e. g. pag- r
(pag-pu-pútol), nag- R (nag-pů-pútol), -um- R (s-um-ů-súlat), nag-
R -um- (nag-tů-t-um-irŕ);

secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word by "S",
e. g. S -an (ŕlís-an);

accent-shift by "(1)" or "(2)", e. g. (1) describes the formation of
sulŕt from súlat; (1) -an (sulát-an); (2) -an (sulat-ŕn).

340. Summary of formations. The various formations group themselves
into eight classes: 1. simple formations without characteristic
prefix, expressing simple actions, objects, etc.; 2. formations with
characteristic prefix pag-, expressing chiefly transitive actions;
3. characteristic prefix pang-, deliberate actions; 4. si-, action
by more than one actor; 5. paki-, action along with others; 6. ka-,
reciprocal, involuntary, and accidental; 7. pa-, causative; 8. pati-,
reflexive.

These indications are a mere rough guide: neither the characteristic
prefix nor the meaning indicated runs through the entire group. The
first three groups are the most important, and, to a large extent,
each formation of the other five groups belongs also to one of the
three primary groups.

In each group there are four types of words: simple static, transient,
abstracts of action, and special static. The simple static words
involve no idea of active or passive; the transients are accompanied
by abstracts, in which the transient occurrence is viewed as a
static concept, and by special static words, which, though static,
involve the idea of voice: simple static súlat a document, writing,
letter; transient sumúlat wrote, sulátan is to be written to; abstract
pagsúlat an act of writing; special static sulatŕn a writing-desk
(with idea of local passive).

Each (active or passive, § 92) transient formation exists in two modes,
actual and contingent, and each of these has two aspects, punctual
and durative; the durative always has accented reduplication. The
actual mode envisages the occurrence as actually having taken place
or taking place: in the punctual aspect the occurrence is viewed in
its entirety, without regard to duration, and hence always as past:
nagáral studied, learned; in the durative aspect of the actual
the occurrence is viewed as a process going on in time, past or
present: nagŕáral was studying, is studying, used to study, studied
(repeatedly), studies. The contingent mode views the occurrence as
not having actually taken place: the punctual aspect views it as
possible, hypothetical, or commanded: magáral should study, study
(as command); the durative as future from the point of view of the
past or present: magŕáral will study, was going to study. The punctual
contingent form is used not only in commands and hypothetical clauses,
but in subordinate predications and complements generally, even, for
instance, after nang (§ 192 f.), and often, in such constructions, in
competition with actual forms. It is often used, further, after hindě`
(§ 238). When objectivized with ang, it expresses the possibility or
circumstance of the occurrence: ang magáral a hypothetical studier,
the circumstance that one might study.

The abstracts of action are much used in the construction described
at § 274.

In addition to these more or less regular and systematized forms,
there are various isolated formations, which will be discussed after
the others.

A systematically arranged list of formations precedes the Index.



3. Description of formations.

I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, pang-).

A. Simple static forms.

(1) Root-words.

341. The uses of root-words cover a wide range of meanings, the
diversity of which is due to the various material meanings of the
roots. The rough grouping here made is a matter of convenience; the
speech-feeling seems not to distinguish classes of roots or diverse
employments of root-words.

While a complete list of the examples occurring in the Texts and
illustrative sentences will be given for nearly all other formations,
the root-words are so numerous that it will be expedient merely to
refer to the Index.

(1) Root-words in many cases express object-ideas which are viewed
as simple: ang báhay house, ang táo human being.

(2) If the words containing a root have in common the idea of a
quality rather than of an object, the root-word may express either
the quality itself, or an object possessing the quality.

(a) In the former case, it is generally a single occurrence of the
quality that is expressed, not the quality in general, which is
expressed rather by a collective with ka- and -an (§ 421 ff.), but
this distinction is not fully carried out. The root-word generally
stands in object construction. Examples: Ang búte ni Hwŕn ay walá sa
kanya ng úlo, dátapuwat násŕsa kanya ng púso`. Juan's good quality
lies not in his head, but in his heart. Si Pédro ay táo ng wala ng
dangŕl. Pedro is a person without honor. ang ínit nang tagáraw the heat
of summer. Ang lálim nang balňn ay isŕ ng pantay-kawáyan. The depth
of the well is the length of a bamboo-tree. Ang laměg sa Amérika ay
masyádo. The cold in America is excessive. Ang ligsč nang usŕ ay hindí
gáya nang sa áso. The speed of the deer is not equal to that of the
dog. Ang samá nang ságing na itň ay nása ugŕt. The trouble with this
banana-tree is at the root. ang taŕs nang káhoy the height of the tree.

(b) When expressing an object endowed with a quality, the root-word
is in competition with words formed with the prefix ma- (§ 454). It
usually stands as a predicate or as conjunctive attribute of another
word. ang túbig na álat salt-water, ang dágat na álat the salt-sea, the
ocean. Ang páko` ay baluktňt. The nail is crooked. Ang patalěm ay báwal
sa manga báta`. Children are not allowed to have sharp tools. Ang itlůg
na yitň y bugňk (or: bulňk). This egg is rotten. Sya y bugňk. He is
crazy. ang buwísit na alíla` a repulsive servant. Ikŕw ay bwísit. You
are a bore. Manga gíliw ko ng ginoň! Honored sirs! isa ng táu ng
hámak a no-account person. ang táu ng lasěng the drunken man. Sya
y lasěng. He is drunk. ang pulúbe ng lumpň the lame beggar. Sya y
lumpň. He is lame. Si Hwŕn ay isa ng mahŕl na báta` sa kanya ng manga
magúlang. Juan is a child dear to his parents. Múra ang manga síle sa
panahň ng itň. Peppers are cheap at this time. Hindí pansěn ang piklŕt
sa mukhŕ nang dalága ng si Maryŕ. The scar on young Maria's face is not
noticeable. ang táo ng panňt a bald-headed man. isa ng báya ng payápa`
a tranquil town. Sya y pípe. He is dumb. Ang pintŕ nang bintána` ay
putč`. The window is painted white. Sagŕd ang kanya ng gupět. His
hair-cut is close. Sina Hwŕn ay salŕt sa pananamět. Juan and his
family are short of clothing. Akň y sawí sa pagsusúbo` sa báta`. I
am in an awkward position for feeding the child. Sáyang ang báta ng
si Hwŕn. Little Juan is to be regretted. Isa ng táo ng sinungáling
si Pédro. Pedro is a liar. Si Hwŕn ay isa ng táo ng tanyŕg. Juan is
a renowned man. Tanyŕg sya sa kanya ng kláse. He is at the head of
his class. ang tigŕs nang káhoy the hard part of the log. ang daŕ ng
tumpŕk the right road. si Untč` Shorty (as nickname).

(3) If the words containing the root refer rather to an action or
occurrence, the uses of the root-word are more varied.

(a) The root-word may refer to the action itself; it is used of
a single instance rather than of the action in general, which is
expressed rather by abstracts of action, though the distinction
is not always clear. The root-word so used is mostly in object
construction. Examples: Ang anyáya sa ákin ni Hwána ay áki ng
tinanggŕp. I accepted Juana's invitation. May bálě` ang kawáyan. The
bamboo has a break in it. May búhay pa ang púsa ng itň. This cat is
still alive. Ang dalamhátě nang kanya ng inŕ ay malakě. His mother's
grief is great. Sa damdam kň y nagumpisa nŕ ang malalaměg na áraw. I
think (literally: In my feeling) the cold days have begun. Si Hwŕn ay
sya ng pumáyag sa hilěng nilŕ sa kanya ng sasakyŕn. Juan was the one
who acceded to their request for his vehicle. Ang húgas nang pinggŕn
ay marumč. The washing of the dishes is dirty, i. e. The dishes have
been poorly washed. Ang kantŕ nang íbon ay maínam. The bird's song is
pleasant. Ang kasŕl ni Pédro at ni Maryŕ ay sa linggň. The wedding
of Pedro and Maria will be on Sunday. ang áki ng lúlan sa trén my
embarking (with all my goods) on the train. Ang pagakpŕk nang manga táo
ay nakabíbingi. The applause of the people was deafening. Ang páso`
sa paŕ ni Pédro ay malakě. The burn on Pedro's foot is large. Ang
pútol nang buhňk ni Hwŕn ay bakěl-bakěl. Juan's hair-cut is uneven. Sa
lúnes ang tagpú nila sa daŕ-ng-Balíwag. They are to meet on the Baliwag
road next Monday. ang tahňl ni Batň ng Bákal the barking of Iron Stone
(name of a dog). Ang támŕ nang báta` ay sa úlo. The child was struck
on the head. Binigyŕn ni Hwŕn nang isŕ ng tapěk ang kaybígan nya ng
si Pédro. Juan gave his friend Pedro a nudge. Ang kanya ng túlog ay
mabábaw. His sleep is light. Ang upú nang Intsěk ay patalungkň`. The
Chinese sit squatting. Butíhan mo ang yárě nang sambalílo. Put a good
finish on (the making of) the hat.

(b) The root-word may express an object by virtue of which the
action becomes possible or has concrete manifestation; this use
closely approaches transient passives of various kinds. Root-words
in this use are most commonly conjunctive attributes, but the object
construction, especially in the predicate, is frequent. Ang ágaw nya
ng laruwŕn ay inilagay nyŕ sa kahňn. The toys he snatched were put by
him into a box. Síno sa manga táo ang ináko ni Mariyáno? Ang áko ni
Mariyáno ay si Pédro. Which one of the men did Mariano relieve?--The
one whom Mariano relieved is Pedro. Hwag kayň ng mamútol nang kawáya
ng hindí ninyo ári`. Don't make a cutting of bamboo not owned by you;
ang ári` property, ang may ári` the owner or master. Ang bigay nyŕ sa
ákin nang Paskň nang Panganganŕk na nagdaŕn ay isa ng tabakéra. For
last Christmas he gave me a tabatiere. ang bíhis nya ng damět the
(good) clothes she has put on (in place of her others). isa ng bíro`
a joke. ang byŕy na isdŕ` sa palŕisdáan the fish allowed to swim
free in the fish-reservoir. ang dalŕ that carried; Dalŕ ni Hwŕn ang
lumbň. Juan is carrying the cup. ang dikět nang apňy the blazing of the
fire. Ang orasŕn ni Hwŕn ay gáling sa Parěs. Juan's watch comes from
Paris. Ang tornělyo ng itň y gámit sa mákina. This screw is used in
the machine. ang gantě nya ng pála` the gift he gave in return. Ang
kwáko ng itň ay ganti ng pála` sa ákin ni Hwŕn. This cigar-holder
is a return-gift to me from Juan. May hálo ng iba ng bágay ang gátas
na itň. This milk has something else mixed in with it. háti ng gabě
midnight. Ang hampŕs na tinanggŕp ni Hwŕn sa kanya ng panginoňn ay
isŕ ng kabŕn. The whipping Juan got from his master was twenty-five
strokes. May hárang na púno-ng-káhoy ang daŕ ng patúngo sa báriyo
nang San-Visčnte. The road toward the district of San Vicente has a
tree obstructing it. Húle si Hwŕn nang pulěs. Juan was arrested by the
policeman. Ang igěb nya ng túbig ay marumč. The water he dipped from
the spring is dirty. Ang binŕbása nya ng librň ay kathŕ ni Risŕl. The
book he is reading was written by Rizal. Laŕn (or: taŕn) kay Pédro ang
alaála ng itň. This present is reserved for Pedro. Ang lákad ni Hwŕn
ay ang panghihirŕm. Juan's errand is to borrow something. Ang lúlan
ni Hwŕn sa kanya ng karitňn ay manga kahňn nang álak. Juan's load
on his wagon is cases of liquor; ang lúla ng kasangkápan the loaded
utensils. Ang manňk na yitň y lúto sa durúan. This chicken is roasted
on the spit. Nŕhúle si Hwŕn sa tabě nang kanya ng nákaw na kabáyo. Juan
was caught with the horse he stole. Ang pásak nang bangkŕ` ay bunňt
nang nyňg at pagkět. The boat is calked with cocoanut fibre and
wax. Ang pígil ni Hwŕn ay ang kabáyo. Juan is trying to restrain the
horse. Ang pintŕs ko kay Hwŕn ay ang kanya ng bísyo ng paginňm. What
I don't like about Juan is his vice of drunkenness. ang púlot anything
picked up; an adopted child. ang isa ng pútol na púno-ng-káhoy a tree
that has been cut up; Ang pútol nang káhoy ay nŕpakaiklč`. The wood has
been cut too short. Ang librň ay ang sadyá ko sa báhay ni Hwŕn. The
book is what I went to Juan's house for. Ang sakŕy sa trčn ay limŕ
ng kompanyŕ ng sundálo. The people in the train are five companies
of soldiers. Ang sangkŕp nang manňk ay kalabása. The chicken is
cooked with pumpkin. "Magsipagsísi kayň, manga táo ng makasalánan,"
ang sigŕw nang kúra mulá sa půlpito. "Repent, ye sinners," was the cry
of the priest from the pulpit. isa ng súbo` a mouthful. Marámi sya ng
tágo ng kwaltŕ. He has much money saved away. Ang taněm nang búkid
ay pálay na malagkět. The field is planted with a sticky rice. Ang
tanggŕp nya ng bílin ay lubhŕ ng marámi. The commissions he received
were numerous. Malakŕs ang táwa ni Hwŕn. Juan's laughter was loud. Ang
táwag sa lugŕr na itň ay Kinamatayŕ-ng-Kabáyo. They call this place
Dead Horse. ang tungtňng that on which something stands; a mat on
which dishes are set (specific name: dikěn). Ang túrů nang báta`
ay ang mansánas sa mésa. The child is pointing at the apple on the
table. Ang usísa` sa ákin ni Hwŕn ay kung saan nŕndon ang kanya ng
sombréro. What Juan asked me was where his hat was. Walá sya ng uwě
ng manga librň. He did not bring home any books. Ang talěm nang gúlok
ay yári sa Yurúpa. The cutting-edge of the bolo is made in Europe.

(c) Especially with the particle nŕ (§ 223) the root-word often
expresses a brusque command; in this use it is in competition with
transient forms. Dalí ka nang iyo ng pagtakbň. Hurry your running,
i. e. Run faster. Hampŕs na kayň, manga báta`, sa manga langgŕm. Whip
at the ants, boys. Hátě na nang mansánas. Divide up the apples. Hintú
na kayň, manga báta`. Stop, children. Ísip na kayň kung anň ang
kahulugŕn nang áki ng bugtňng. Guess the meaning of my riddle. Láyas
na! Get out! Lígů na! Take a bath! Luksu nŕ sa tiněk na iyŕn. Jump
across those spines. Sáma nŕ sa kanyŕ. Go to him. Táwag na nang manga
polěs. Call the police. Tayň`. Stand up. Upú na. Sit down.

(d) Repeated with nang (§ 191) root-words, as predicates, denote an
actor in repeated and continuous action: Nŕkíta ko ng pútol nang pútol
si Hwŕn nang tubň. I saw Juan cutting away at the sugar-cane. Similarly
(see Index) bilě and táwa.

342. Root-words with accent-shift. Barytone roots are used as
root-words with shift of accent to the last syllable to denote
something which has been affected by the action, quality, or (in
fewer cases) thing, which is denoted by the root. The particle nŕ
is usually added. Agaw nŕ sa súnog ang manga laruwŕn. The toys have
been snatched from the fire. Awá na si Hwŕn sa kanya ng pinarůrusáha
ng anŕk. Juan is already overcome with pity for his child, whom he
is punishing. Ang áso ni Hwŕn ay bahŕy. Juan's dog is grown up in the
house, is completely domesticated. Ang báta ng si Hwŕn ay bahŕy. Little
Juan is shy, is unused to strangers. Bayad nŕ ang útang sa ákin ni
Hwŕn. Juan's debt to me is paid now. Bihis nŕ ang báta`. The child's
clothes have been changed, The child is dressed up now. Bilang nŕ
ang manga itlňg na itň. These eggs are already counted. Ang úlo
ni Hwŕn ay bilňg. Juan's head is round; or: Juan has been fooled;
ang bilňg na tábo` the round dipper. Buhŕy ang áki ng inŕ. My mother
is living. Sya y bulŕg. He is blinded; or: He is blind; ang babáye
ng bulŕg the blind woman. Daing nŕ ang isdŕ`. The fish has been laid
open. isa ng táo ng gutňm a hungry (or: gluttonous) person. Hatí na ang
tubň. The sugar-cane is cut in two. Huli nŕ si Hwána sa trén. Juana is
late for the train. Ang karnč ay ihaw nŕ. The meat is done. Init nŕ ang
gátas. The milk is heated. Kayas nŕ ang kawáya ng itň. This bamboo is
already smoothed. Ang pagkůkúnan nya nang itlňg ay ang kahň ng kulang
nŕ. He will take eggs from the box that is already started (literally:
incomplete, cf. Ápat na sčntimos ang kúlang nitň. This lacks four
cents, is four cents too little). Lakŕd kamě ng umwč`. We went home
on foot. Lipas nŕ ang gamňt (ang pabangň`). The medicine (the perfume)
is stale, has lost its strength. Lipas nŕ ang áki ng gútom. My hunger
has disappeared. Pasň` ang lugŕr na itň nang kanya ng kamŕy. This spot
on his hand is burned; ang pasň` a pottery dish. Ang pagkakŕgalítan
ni Hwŕn at ni Pédro ay pawí nŕ. The quarrel between Juan and Pedro is
now allayed. Pigil nŕ ang kabáyo. The horse is under control now. Ang
káhoy ay putul nŕ. The wood is now cut. Itň y sirá na. This is already
ruined. Sunňg ang damět na kanya ng pinirěnsa. The clothes which she
ironed are scorched; sunňg na asúkal burnt sugar. Tamá na ang iyo
ng pagkwčnta. Now you have figured it correctly. Tipun nŕ an manga
kalabŕw. Now the carabao are rounded up. Tulis nŕ ang lápis. The
pencil is sharpened. Turň` ang kanya ng dalíre`. His finger is stiff.

This form occurs, in this book, also from the following roots (see
Index): básag, búnot, gálit, gámit, hása`, kilála, lápad, límang,
págod, sákop, sánay, súlat, tápos, tiwála`, túloy.

(a) In the case of some roots this form is used like a simple root-word
without accent-shift; these are roots in which the accent-shift
expresses a modification of the material meaning; see § 337. So:
alŕm that known (see Index); Babá na riyŕn sa iyň ng kinŕůupŕn! Come
down from your perch! Ang sakět na kanya ng tinítiis ay ang lagnŕt na
típus. The sickness from which he is suffering is typhoid fever. (ang
sákit na kanya ng tinítiěs the grief he is enduring). Sama táyo
sa pagbilě nang pálay. Let us be partners in buying rice. Cf. also
hulě, above.

(b) In oxytone roots, where the accent-shift cannot occur, our form
is homonymous with the simple root-word: Bigti nŕ si Pédro. Pedro
is now strangled. Bukas nŕ ang láta. The can is opened. Busug nŕ ang
manga háyop. The animals have been fed their fill. Hintú na ang trén
nang akň y sumakŕy. The train had stopped when I got on. Hubad nŕ ang
báta`. The child is undressed now. Ang manga Igoróte ay hubŕd. The
Igorote go naked. Hungkuy nŕ ang bigŕs. The rice is fanned now. Sya
y kasŕl. He (she) is married. Pantay nŕ ang lúpa`. The ground has
been levelled. Nŕkíta ko ng patěd ang sampáyan nang damět. I saw that
the clothes-line was broken. Punú na ang bóte ng itň. This bottle is
already full. Tayú na ang báhay. The house is already erected. Tikwas
nŕ ang káhoy. One end of the log is down.

Similarly are used: angkěn, bilě, tadtŕd, tuwŕ`.



(2) Doubling.

343. Simple doubling. Simple doubling expresses explicit plurality or
repetition, often with the idea of variation, intensity, or diminution:
ápat-ápat four by four, four at a time, ang mata-matŕ trellis-work. Ang
dúrů nya nang karáyom ay hindi parč-parého. Her stitches with the
needle are not even. Sabŕy-sabŕy sila ng umalěs. They all went away at
the same time. Similarly from: agŕd, alěn, anň, áraw, bágay, bakěl,
baluktňt, barŕ, gabě, gibŕ`, halň`, isŕ, lahŕt, líbo, linggň, loňb,
pantŕy, sári`, síno, sunňd, tulŕ`, untě`.

(a) The simple root does not occur and the meaning is discrepant in
paru-parň butterfly.

(b) From derived words, in the same meaning: kaní-kanilŕ (ka-n-ilŕ §
528), kaní-kaníno (ka-n-í-no § 528), dalá-dalawŕ two by two, two at
a time (da-lawŕ § 345), tatlu-tatlň three by three, three at a time
(ta-tlň § 345).

(c) With retraction of accent: Dálě-dáli sya ng tumakbň. He ran off
like a flash.

344. (1) D. In some cases the accent is shifted; the meaning is the
same: Putňl-putňl ang katawŕn ni Hwŕn nang áki ng mŕkíta. Juan's body
was all cut up when I saw it. This form from: báhay, báyan, púnit,
sábi, súlok.



(3) Reduplication.

345. Simple reduplication. In a very few cases the place of the
root-word is taken by the root with reduplication. The only clear
case is tutulč ear-wax, root -tulč. The numerals dalawŕ two and tatlň
three seem to be irregularly reduplicated forms of roots -lawŕ and -tlň
(for -talň?), as a few of the derivatives seem to indicate. A number
of words, treated in the following as simple roots, have, however,
the aspect of this formation: babáye, bibingkŕ, bubuwět a kind of
mouse, gagambŕ, laláki, papáya (Spanish), tutubč, totoň.

346. Accented reduplication. Accented reduplication is used chiefly
in transient forms (§ 348); distinct from this use seems to be that
of numerals, in the meaning of only so many: ŕápat, íilŕn, íisŕ;
similarly dá-dalawŕ only two (from da-lawŕ) (§ 345).

mámayŕ`, mámyŕ` seems to be felt as a simple root-word and has been
treated as such.



(4) pang-.

347. Of the two prefixes round which primary forms are grouped (§
340), pag- is used only for abstracts of action (§§ 348. 350. 351);
with pang- are formed words denoting the thing used for doing so
and so, or as such and such: Nawalŕ` ang kanyŕ ng pangakála`. His
power of thought left him. ang pangatěp that used for roofing, a
shingle. Magpapútol ka, Pédro, nang manga kawáya ng pangbákod. Have
some bamboo cut for a fence, Pedro. ang pangbambň a stick or club used
for beating. pangbayň instrument for pounding rice, pestle. pangdilěg
implements used for sprinkling. panggápas a slicer, a curved knife
with saw-toothed edge. Ang ginámit nya ng panggupět na guntěng
sa damět ay mapurňl. The scissors he used for cutting cloth were
dull; also simply: ang panggupět scissors, shears, ang panghampŕs
a whip. Ang ginawŕ ng panghárang sa daŕn nang manga tulisŕn ay
isa ng gibŕ ng karitňn. The robbers used a broken-down wagon to
make the obstruction on the road. Ang laséta ng itň ay pangháte`
nang dáyap. This knife is used for cutting limes. ang panglípa` the
sticky mud used for smoothing the threshing-floor. ang pangagínip a
dream. pamitěk a single rein (one guides the animal by flicking it
in various ways, cf. pitěk a fillip, a flick, a snap). pamatŕy in
pamatay-kúto thumb, literally: that with which one kills head-lice
(kúto). Pamútol nang buhňk ang guntěng na itň. These shears are
used for cutting hair. Ang salawŕl na yitň y sya kň ng pangsakŕy sa
kabáyo. These are my trousers for horseback-riding. Ang manga pintň ng
may pangsarŕ na gámit ay sumásara ng kúsa`. Doors that have closing
attachments close themselves automatically. ang panáli` a halter or
rope for tying up an animal. Ang kulilěng na ytň y sya ků ng panáwag
nang alíla`. This bell is what I use for calling the servants; also:
pangtáwag. Ang pangtayň nang halíge ay hindí dumating. The instruments
for setting up posts (i. e. the cranes) did not arrive. Ang kalaykŕy
ay sya kň ng ginámit na pangtípon nang manga bunňt na damň. I used
the rake for piling up the uprooted grass. ang panúro` a pointer,
anything used for pointing. Sya y may salawŕl na pangupň sa damúhan
at gayon děn máy-roon syŕ ng pangupň sa sůgálan. He has trousers for
sitting on the lawn and others for when he sits at the gaming-table.

Similarly from, the following roots: áhit, áko`, alaála, anŕk, bilě,
bilmět, dalángin, gamňt, hilámos, húli, ísip, ngalán, pálo`, pukpňk,
sábong, takěp, taněm, tiwála`.

(a) This derivative from numerals denotes a thing used to fill such
and such a place: ang pangápat that used as fourth, as: the fourth
horse in a team; of similar meaning: panglimŕ fifth, pangánim sixth,
pamitň seventh, pangwalň eighth, pangsiyŕm ninth. From the ordinal
(§ 416,a) is formed pangúna first. From phrases the higher numbers:
pangsa-m-pů` the tenth (sa m pů` ten), panglabi-ng-isŕ the eleventh
(labi ng isŕ), pangdalawa-ng-pů` twentieth, pamito-ng-pů` seventieth.

(b) A few formations show irregularities: panukála` equivalent to
pangakála` above, is felt to belong with akála`; cf. the similar
insertion of u in paubáya` (§ 481,d); panginoňn master, does not seem
to be felt as a derivative of ginoň and has therefore been treated
as a separate root.

Second and third are derived from the reduplicated form (§ 345) and
show phonetic irregularity: ang pangalawŕ the second; one's second
in a duel; pangatlň third, third horse in a gun-carriage; similarly
pangatlo-ng-pů` the thirtieth.

(c) From root with accent shift (§ 337) only panghulč the last (of
an established series).



B. Transients, abstracts, and special static words.

(1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag-.

348. Of the active forms of the primary groups, that of the type with
prefix zero expresses the actor in a simple action or process. Both of
the punctual forms, actual and contingent, are made with infix -um-;
the actual durative consists of the root reduplicated, with infix
-um-; the contingent durative is reduplicated, but lacks the infix;
the reduplication is in both cases accented. The abstract of action
consists of the root with prefix pag-. Thus the forms are: p-um-útol,
p-um-ů-pútol, p-um-útol, pů-pútol, pag-pútol. Examples:

Umabang kŕ nang maglalakň nang gátas. Watch for a milkman. Sya y umágaw
nang manga laruwŕn. He snatched some toys. Sya y umáhon sa ílog (sa
bundňk, sa gulňd). He went up the river (up into the mountains, up
the hill). Pumútol ka, Hwŕn, nang búho`, pagáhon mo sa bundňk. When
you go up into the mountains, Juan, cut some slender bamboo. Umámin
sila Pédro sa harapŕn nang hukňm. Pedro and his band confessed before
the judge. umámot sold, of other than a regular merchant. Umánib
ka kay Pédro. Let your mat overlap Pedro's, i. e. Sleep next to
Pedro. Umangkěn ka nang laruwŕn. Take some toys for yourself. Ang
pagáyaw nya ng kumáin nang karnč ay sya ng nakabůbúte sa kanyŕ. His
not being willing to eat meat is what does him good. Ang halíge nang
báhay ay bumába` sapagkŕt hindí káya nang lúpa` ang bigŕt na kanya
ng dinádala. The post of the house sank because the weight it was
bearing was too great for the ground. Bŕbábag si Hwŕn nang kanya
ng kalarň`. Juan will fight with one of his playmates. Bumaluktot
kŕ nang yantňk. Bend a piece of rattan. Ang áhas ay bumaluktňt. The
snake doubled itself up. Bumálot ka nang súman (nang sigarělyo, nang
kúmot). Roll up some suman (sticky rice cooked in banana-leaves; some
cigarettes, a blanket). Ang pagbása ay mahírap. Reading is hard. Sya
y bumigtě nang táo. He choked a man to death. Ang pagbigtě ay isa
ng pagpatŕy sa kápwa táo sa pamamagítan nang pagsakŕl. Strangling
is killing a person by means of choking. Bumílog si Hwŕn nang isa
ng turumpň. Juan turned out (on a lathe) a spinning-top. Bumíngit
sya sa malaki ng pangánib. He went (voluntarily) to the brink of a
great danger. Bumitěw sa lúbid ang isŕ sa inyň. One of you let go
of the rope. Bumúbukŕs ang manga bulaklŕk sa hŕlamanŕn. The flowers
in the garden are opening. Sya y bumúnot nang damň. He plucked up
some grass. Lahŕt nang táo sa báya ng iyňn ay bumóto sa kandidáto
ng si Manikěs. All the people in that town voted for the candidate
Maniquís. Ang halíge ay dumádala nang tahílan. The post bears up
girders. Dumamdŕm si Hwŕn nang isa ng mabigŕt na sakět. Juan felt a
severe pain. Sya y dumapŕ`. He lay down on his face. Ang kanitŕ ng
kwaltŕ sa bangkň ay kasalukúya ng gumŕgána nang buwěs. Your money
and mine in the bank is even now earning interest. gumantě act
in retaliation. gumápas cut with the panggápas. Ang máy sakět ay
guminháwa. The patient became more comfortable ... ay guměginháwa
nŕ ... is getting more comfortable now. Sya y humalěk sa kanya ng
nánay. She kissed her mother. Ang báta ng si Hwŕn ang humampŕs sa
anŕk ni Áli ng Maryŕ. It was little Juan who hit Aunt Maria's little
boy with a whip. ang paghánap a seeking (especially of one's daily
bread). Sya y humárang nang manga táo ng nagháhatid nang kabáyo sa
báya-ng-San-Migčl. He held up some people who were taking horses to
the town of San Miguel. Akň ay humátě nang mansánas. I cut an apple in
two. Humátě ako nang manga itlňg na binilč ni Hwána. I took half of the
eggs Juana bought. Ingátan mo ang pagháwak sa mákina ng iyŕn, sapagkŕt
baká ka maputúlan nang dalíri` na gáya nang nangyári sa ibŕ. Be careful
how you take hold of that machine, for you might get your finger cut
off like others before you. Humínŕ nang pagtakbň ang kabáyo. The
horse lost its speed as a runner. ang paghingě` a requesting, a
request. Híhiram kamě nang librň sa libreríya. We shall borrow books
from the library. humúla` predicted, prophesied. umigěb get water by
dipping from a well, spring, or stream. Akň y uměíhip nang píto. I
was blowing the small flute. Uměíhip ang hángi ng habágat. The spring
wind is blowing. Umílag ka. Get out of the way. Ang kanyŕ ng manga
pagilŕng ay lubhŕ ng makínis. His little dodges are very clever. Umínit
ang plŕnsa. The flatiron became hot. Umínit ang túbig. The water got
hot. Ang paginům nang álak ay masamŕ`. Drinking liquor is harmful. Sya
y uminům nang gátas. He drank some milk. Umísip ka, Nánay, nang
isa ng kwčnto. Try to think of a story, Mother. Ang pagísip nang
bugtňng na itň ay mahírap. This riddle is hard to solve. ang kanyŕ
ng pagiyŕk her weeping. kumabiyŕw press sugar-cane. Kumaluskňs sa
súlok ang dagŕ`. The rat pattered in the corner, i. e. I heard the
pattering of a rat in the corner. Ang íbon ay kumákantŕ. The bird is
singing. Kumapá si Hwŕn nang itlňg sa púgad nang manňk. Juan felt out
some eggs in the hen's nest. Kumákapá sya nang isa ng palakŕ`. He felt
around for a frog. Sya y kumáyas nang isa ng kawáyan. He smoothed a
stick of bamboo. Hwag kŕ ng kumurňt ngayňn! Don't pinch now! Si Pédro
ay lumabŕs. Pedro went out. Ang áso y lumŕlámon. The dog is feeding. Si
Pédro ay lumŕlámon at hindí kumŕkáin. Pedro is eating like an animal,
not like a human being. Lumáyag si Manuwčl sa Amérika. Manuel sailed
(i. e. voyaged) to America (ang láyag a sail). Ang bantay-pálay ay
lumáyas. The watchman of the rice-field left his post. Isa ng sundálo
ay lumáyas sa ínit nang paglalabanŕn. A soldier deserted in the heat
of the battle. Sya y lumíbot. He went for a walk. Magpútol ka, Pédro,
nang manga kúgon, úpang lumínis ang búkid. Cut the cugon-grass, Pedro,
so that the field may become clear. Si Pédro ay lumípat sa iba ng
báyan. Pedro moved to another town. Lumuhod kŕ, Hwán. Kneel down,
Juan. Si Hwŕn ay lumuhňd sa harŕp nang háre`. Juan knelt down before
the king. Sya y ngumíngitě`. She is smiling. Pumagítan sya sa dalawŕ
ng dalága. He placed himself between two young ladies. Akň y pumána
nang usŕ. I shot an arrow at a stag (pána` an arrow). Pumánaw ang
kanya ng hiningŕ. His breath departed, i. e. He gave up the ghost. Si
Hwŕn ang pumáso sa áki ng kulugň. It was Juan who burned out my
wart for me. Huwŕg kŕ ng pumatěd nang sampáyan! Don't you break
the clothes-line! Si Hwŕn ay sya ng pumáyag sa paraŕ ng itň. It was
Juan who agreed to this plan. Sya y pumŕpáyag. He is willing. Pumíli
akň nang malakě ng mansánas. I chose a big apple. Puměpílit sya ng
magbukŕs nang kabŕ ng bákal. He was trying hard to open an iron
safe. (But punctual: Pumílit sya ... He forced open...). pumitěk
give a fillip, snap at with one's finger. Sya y pumúpukpňk nang
bunňt nang nyňg. He is pounding cocoanut husks. Pumůpútol nang
kawáyan si Mariyáno. Mariano is cutting bamboo. Půpútol ... will
cut.... Ang sumŕsábuy na túbig ay nanggŕgáling sa bubungŕn nang
báhay. The water that was splashing on us came from the roof of the
house. sumagása` jostle. sumaguwŕn paddle. sumáhod put something under
to catch what flows or falls. Sya y sumásakay sa bangka` nang akň y
dumatěng. He was getting into the canoe when I arrived. Sumála siyŕ
sa singsěng. He missed the ring (in the juego de anillo, in which
one tries to catch a ring on a stick). sumálok dip out water (ang
sálok a dipper, a basket for catching fruit when it is cut from the
tree; a net for catching insects). Sya y sumandňk nang sináing. She
dipped out some boiled rice. Sumánib ka kay Pédro, (same meaning
as umánib above). Sumíkad ang kabáyo. The horse struck out, gave a
kick. Sumikěp ang daŕn sa karamíhan nang táo. The road became crowded
with the multitude of people. Sumikěp ang damět. The garment shrank
and became tight. Sumiksěk si Hwŕn sa púlong nang manga táo. Juan
crowded his way into the gathering of people. Sumilakbň ang apňy (ang
kanya ng gálit, ang kanya ng tuwŕ`). The fire (his anger, his joy)
welled up. Ang pagsintŕ ni Pédro ay hindí tinanggŕp nang dalága. The
young lady did not accept Pedro's proffer of love. Siyŕ ang sumuklŕy
sa kanya ng anŕk. It was she herself who combed her child's hair (ang
suklŕy a comb). sumúlid spin thread. sumúlong push ahead, progress;
also as family name: Sumúlong. Si Pédro ay sumundň` nang páre`. Pedro
fetched a priest. Hindí sya nagkapálad sa pagsundň nang médiko. He did
not succeed in fetching a doctor. Pagsuntok nyŕ ay tumakbo kŕ. When
he strikes you, run (suntňk a blow on the head). Sya y sumúsutsňt. He
is whistling. Ang báta y tumahímik. The boy quieted down. Tumátahňl
ang áso. The dog was barking. Sya y tumámŕ sa hwéting. He won in
the lottery. Tumátandá siyŕ. He is getting old. Sya y tumánod sa
báhay sa boň ng magdamŕg. He guarded the house all night. Tumanůng
akň kay Hwŕn. I asked Juan. Tumanůng akň nang kwŕlta kay Hwŕn. I
asked Juan for money. tumanghŕ` wonder. Sya y tumátangň`. He
is willing, He assents. Tumŕtáwa siyŕ. He is laughing. Ikŕw ang
tumáwag kay Hwŕn. Do you call Juan. Nárinig ko ang iyň ng pagtáwag
sa ákin. I heard you calling me. Sya y tumayň`. He stood up. tumibŕ`
cut bananas off the tree. tumilŕd cut wood small along the grain,
shave off, cut into small parts. Sya y tumimbá nang túbig. He drew
water with a bucket. ang pagtingěn the act of looking at something,
observation. Ang pagtipěd sa kwaltŕ ay ginágawa nang marámi. Many
people practise economy in the matter of money. Ang pagtípon sa manga
káhoy kung tagulŕn ay mahírap, sapagkŕt mapútik. It is hard to collect
logs in the rainy season, on account of the mud. Tumirŕ si Hwŕn na
isa ng taňn sa báya-ng-Balíwag. Juan lived one year in the town of
Baliuag. tumukŕ` pick with the beak (tukŕ` the beak of a fowl). Sya y
tumúlak sa isinůsúlong na kahň ng bákal. He pushed (i. e. took part in
pushing) at the iron safe they were moving. Also: Sya y tumúlak. He
"shoved off", i. e. He went away. Si Hwŕn ay tumúlog sa báhay ni
Pédro. Juan went and slept in Pedro's house. Ang kanya ng pagtúlog ay
mabábaw. His sleep is light. Tumúngo sya sa báya-ng-Balíwag. He went
toward Baliuag. Ang pagubrŕ nang manga barěl na ytň sa pamamarěl nang
kalabŕw-ramň ay hindí pinakamabúte. These guns are not the best for
shooting wild carabao. Umubrŕ ang ininům nya ng purgŕ. The purge he
drank took effect. Umubrŕ sa kakanŕn ang kanya ng ginawŕ ng lamésa. The
table he made was suitable for the dining-room. Umubrŕ ng nagámit
ang tornělyo ng bákal sa lugŕr nang tansň. It was possible to use
the iron screw instead of the copper. Sya y umupň`. He sat down. Ang
pagupň` sa hángin ay isa ng mahírap na parúsa. "Sitting on the air"
(standing in sitting position with the forefingers pointing up) is
a hard punishment. Umůúrung ang trčn. The train is backing. Umútang
ka nang salapě kay Pédro. Borrow some money from Pedro. Umuwé si
Hwŕn. Juan went home, Yumáyŕ si Hwŕn nang kanya ng mangŕ kaybígan. Juan
invited some of his friends. ang pagyáya` the invitation.

Other roots occurring in these forms (and roots occurring above
out of their alphabetical order): abála, ágos, ákay, akiyŕt, alěs,
ása, áyon, bábaw, bahŕ`, balěk, bílang, bilě, búhat, bútas, daěng,
dála, dalŕs, dálaw, dalň, dámi, dápit, dápo`, darŕs, datěng, dilěm,
dúkit, dumě, doňn, galŕw, gámit, gamňt, gápang, gastŕ, gawŕ`, gúlang,
gupět, gustň, hába`, hábol, hágod, hakbŕng, hángo`, harŕp, hátak,
higŕ`, híla, hilěng, hingŕ, húkay, húli, húni, íbig, kagŕt, káin,
kalabňg, kápit, katŕm, kibň`, kilála, kílos, kiněg, kíta, kúha,
kulňng, kuwčnta, lában, lagánap, lagpŕk, lákad, lakŕs, lakě, laměg,
lampŕs, langňy, lápit, lígaw, lindňl, lipŕd, litŕw, liwánag, lubňg,
lúha`, luksň, luwŕs, nákaw, ngiyŕw, panhěk, pasŕn, pások, patŕy, páwis,
píhit, pitŕs, pukňl, púri, putňk, sagňt, sakŕl, sákop, salákay, sáma,
sanggŕ, sápit, sarŕ, sayŕw, sigŕw, síkat, silěd, sípa`, sísid, subň,
súgat, súlat, sumpňng, sunňd, suwŕy, súyo`, tabŕ`, tagŕ`, takbň, tálik,
talňn, tanŕw, tanglŕw, taráto, tawěd, tíbay, tiktěk, tikuwŕs, túbo`,
tugtňg, tuktňk, túlong, tungtňng, tupŕd, ulŕn, ulě`, untě`, úpa, yáman.

(a) Kumusta kŕ? How d'you do? may be felt to belong here. [10]

(b) An irregular inflection in which variation of the initial
consonant takes the place of the infix is known to Mr. Santiago from
a few traditional phrases: Hwag kŕ ng matŕy (for: pumatŕy) nang kápwa
táo. Thou shalt not kill.

(c) Forms with accent shift owe this feature to the root (§ 337):
Umabňt ka nang isa ng mansánas. Help yourself to an apple. Ang
sumunňd na silakbň nang lagablŕb ay siya ng umabňt sa bubungŕn. The
next leap of the flame reached the roof. Ang pagabůt nang búnga ng
itň ay mahírap. This fruit is hard to reach. Nárinig ko syŕ sa kanya
ng pagayŕw sa sinábe ni Hwŕn. I heard him disagree with what Juan
had said. Nagálit akň sa kanya ng pagayŕw sa lamésa. I was angered
at his leaving the table. Si Pédro ay umayŕw na. Pedro has left the
table. Similarly from bába` and sákit.

(d) From a phrase: Hindí marúnong gumanti-ng-pála` si Hwŕn. Juan does
not know how to make return for kindness (gantě ng pála`).

(e) From derived words: tumagílid, pagtagílid (ta-gílid § 523);
tumalíkod, pagtalíkod (ta-líkod § 523). See also §§ 404. 488.

349. The doubled root with the same formation is used of actions
aimlessly repeated at intervals. Nátinik syŕ sa kanya ng pagtakbň-takbň
sa bakúran. In his constant running about the yard, he got a splinter
into his foot. Tumŕtáwa-táwa si Hwŕn hábang nagbíbigkŕs nang talumpáte
si Pédro. Juan kept laughing at intervals while Pedro was making his
speech. Si Hwŕn ay tumŕtáwa-táwa nang sya y hampasěn ni Pédro. When
Juan kept laughing every little while, Pedro finally struck him with
the whip.

(a) From a root with accent shift (§ 337): Tumátawa-tawŕ si Hwŕn twě ng
ákin sya ng mŕmasdŕn hábang nagbíbigkas nang talumpáte si Pédro. Juan
kept snickering every time I happened to look at him while Pedro was
delivering his oration.



(2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag-r.

350. Many roots form their active with the prefix mag- for the
contingent, nag- for the actual mode; the durative is reduplicated
before the prefix is added. The corresponding abstract of action
has unaccented reduplication and prefix pag-. Thus: nagpútol,
nag-pů-pútol, mag-pútol, mag-pů-pútol, pag-pu-pútol. These actives
express, generally, a more deliberate action than those with -um-;
often also one involving more effect on external objects than do those
with -um-. We take up first those roots from which forms with -um-
do not occur in our material:

Akň y nagáantňk. I am sleepy. Ang lúsong kay Hwŕn sa kanya ng pagaaráro
ay nagsidating nŕ. The helpers for Juan in his plowing have arrived
(ang aráro a plow). Si Pédro ay magŕasáwa. Pedro is going to take
a wife. Si Pédro ay magŕasáwa kay Hwána. Pedro is going to marry
Juana. Silŕ y nagŕáway. They are fighting. magbáhay build a house. Akň
y nagbastŕ nang áki ng damět. I packed up my clothes. Sya y nagbáyad
nang kanyŕ ng manga útang. He paid off his debts. magbayň pound rice
in a mortar. magbigŕs hull rice (i. e. make bigŕs, hulled rice, out
of pálay, rice in the grain). Sya y nagbigŕy nang librň sa ákin. He
gave me some books. Sya y nagbíhis kanína ng umága. She put on her
good clothes this morning. Ang pagbibiyábo ay isa ng ugáli nang
manga Intsčk. Swinging the feet when sitting is a habit of the
Chinese. Nagbiyŕy si Hwŕn nang isdŕ` sa kanya ng palŕisdáan. Juan
put some fish into his fishpond. magbuhňl tie a knot. Nagbwŕl
sila nang isa ng púno-ng-káhoy. They felled a tree. Ang ságing ay
nagdŕdáhon. The banana-tree is putting out leaves. Ang paghahása`
nang pangáhit ay mahírap. Sharpening razors is difficult. Sya y
nagháhatěd nang manga laráwan sa simbáhan. He is delivering images
to the church. Maghubad kŕ nang damět. Take off your clothes. Sya
y naghůhúgas nang pinggŕn. She is washing dishes. Naghungkňy
sya. He fanned rice. magíhaw roast (something). Nagkamět sya nang
marámi ng túbo`. He obtained much profit. Sya y nagkúkuble. He is in
hiding. maglakň` peddle (something). Maglálarú na siyŕ. He is going to
play after all. Naglarú na akň. I have played enough now. Naglálaro
silŕ. They are playing. Naglawět akň nang lúbid sa bintána`. I hung
a rope out of the window. maglúgaw prepare rice-broth. Naglůlúto
siyŕ nang gúlay. She is cooking vegetables. Sya y magpápasyŕl. He
is going to take a walk. Nagpůpúnas sya nang sahěg. He is scrubbing
floors. Nagpúyat akň kagabě. I staid up last night. magsáing cook
rice dry (with little water). Nagsampŕy sya nang damět. She hung
out some clothes. Sya y nagtábon nang isa ng húkay. He dammed up a
ditch. Magtahŕn ka nang paglalarň`. Stop playing. Nang nárinig nya
iyňn ay malakě ang kanya ng nagěng pagtatakŕ. When he heard this,
his surprise was great. Sya y nagtálě nang bábuy sa halíge. He
tied a pig to the post. Magtúrů ka nang wíka ng Kapampángan sa
iyo ng pŕaralŕn. Teach the Pampanga language in your school. Sya y
nagtůtúro`. He is teaching. Támŕ ang kanya ng pagtutwěd. His reckoning
is correct. Sya y nagusísa`. He made inquiry. Sya y nagusísa nang
marámi ng bágay. He inquired into many things. Hindí ba akň nagútos
sa iyň ng gumawá itň? Didn't I order you to do this? Ang pagwawalá
nang mangŕ bíhag ay pinarůrusáhan nang kamŕtáyan. The escaping of
captives is punished with death. Sya y nagwáwalěs. She is sweeping.

Other roots so used: akála`, alaskuwátro, alsŕ, aluwáge, aniyň`, ári`,
balíta`, bantŕy, bángon, bátis, baňn, bigkŕs, bendisiyňn, biniyŕg,
bintŕng, bunň`, búnga, daŕn, dalamháti`, dasŕl, dáos, dáya`, díwang,
dugň`, dúsa, rosáriyo, hágis, handŕ`, hári`, hátol, hinála`, hintŕy,
hintň`, hírap, hiwalŕy, íngat, kasŕl, kúlang, kumpisŕl, kurůs,
kuwčnto, lasěng, libŕng, liběng, ligtŕs, limňs, litsňn, liwalěw,
lubŕy, lublňb, mahŕl, máno, masěd, milágro, mísa, mulŕ`, ningněng,
pasiyčnsiya, paséyo, sábi, sábog, sábong, sadiyŕ`, salitŕ`, sánay,
silbč, simbŕ, sísi, siyásat, súbo`, sugŕl, sumbňng, sundálo, tabáko,
tadtŕd, tágo`, tálo, talumpáti`, tamň, taniyŕg, tangŕy, tanggňl,
tígil, tinděg, trabáho, túlin, túlos, umpisŕ, úsap, wíka`.

351. When a root is used both with -um- and mag-, the latter form
usually differs by adding another object affected (dumalŕ bear, bear
up: magdalŕ carry to someone, to a place; bumalěk go back; magbalěk
return to a place, to someone); in some instances the added object
is the actor himself (reflexive); in others the mag- form expresses
a general activity, that with -um- a specific act (so, in part,
pútol). Examples:

Sya y nagŕáral. He is studying (umáral is known as an archaic word
for teach morals, instruct; ang áral that taught, precept, moral
doctrine). Magbaluktot kŕ nang yantňk. Curve some pieces of rattan
(bumaluktňt, § 348, intransitive or of a single specific transitive
action). Magbálot ka nang súman, nang sigarělyo. Roll up some suman,
some cigarettes (more general than -um-); Magbálot ka nang kúmot. Wrap
yourself up in a blanket (cf. -um-, § 348). Si Hwŕn ay nagbigtě. Juan
hanged himself; ang pagbibigtě suicide by hanging. Nagbilč si Hwána
nang marámi ng sombréro. Juana sold many hats. Nagbíbile si Hwána
nang sombréro. Juana is selling hats (bumilě buy). Siya y nagdádala
nang túbig sa kabáyo. He is bringing water to the horse. Ang báta` ay
nagdádala nang káhoy. The boy is bringing wood. Hwag kŕ ng magdamdŕm
sa hindí ko pagkatupŕd nang áki ng pangáko`, sapagkŕt iyň y hindí ko
sinadyŕ`. Don't feel bad about my not having fulfilled my promise,
for I did not do it intentionally (dumamdŕm feel something). Si Hwŕn ay
naghampŕs noň ng Byerne-sŕnto ng nagdaŕn. Juan performed flagellation
last Good Friday. Maghánap kayň nang inyo ng ikabůbúhay. Go and find a
living for yourselves. Sya y naghárang nang púno-ng-káhoy sa daŕn. He
blocked the road with a tree. Ang paghahárang sa daŕn ay báwal. It
is forbidden to make obstructions on the roads. Naghátě ako nang
manga bunga-ng-káhoy sa manga báta`. I distributed fruits among the
children; ... nang damň sa manga kabáyo ... grass to the horses. ang
paghaháti nang manga búnga-ng-káhoy sa manga báta` the distribution
of fruits to the children. Naghínŕ sya nang pagtuktňk sa pintň`. He
made his knocking at the door gentle. Sya y nagěínit nang gátas. She
is heating some milk. Magísip ka. Bethink yourself, Be reasonable. Si
Hwŕn ay nagísip na nakáwan si Pédro. Juan planned to rob Pedro. Ang
kanya ng pagiísip ay matálas (mahína`). His thinking-power is acute
(weak). Silŕ y nagkŕmáyan nang magkíta. They shook hands when they
met. Maglabas kŕ nang manga sělya. Bring out some chairs. ang
paglalákad the drawing of something on foot; Naglákad ang manga
estudyŕnte nang isŕ ng karósa. The students drew a float. Sya y
naglíbot nang isa ng bandíla`. He walked about bearing a flag. Sya
y naglělínis nang mésa. He cleans tables. Ang pagnanákaw ay isa
ng kasalána ng mabigŕt. Thievery is a serious offense (numákaw of
a single theft). Nagpěpílit sya ng magbukŕs nang kaba ng bákal. He
tries (often) to force open safes. Pagpupútol ni Hwŕn nang búho` ay
pumaroňn ka t tulúngan mo syŕ. When Juan cuts bamboo (as an occupation
throughout a longer period of time), go along and help him. Magpůpútol
kamě nang manga kawáya ng gŕgamítin sa pagtatayň nang báhay. We shall
cut bamboo for use in building houses. Magpůpútol akň nang kukň. I
am going to cut my fingernails (reflexive). Nagpútol nang buhňk ang
Intsčk na si Yŕp. The Chinaman Yap cut his queue. Nagsakŕy sya sa kanya
ng bangkŕ nang dalawa ng estudyŕnte. He took two students into his
canoe. Nagsikěp ang daŕn. The road grew crowded (apparently equal to
-um-, but cannot be used of a garment). Nagsísiksik si Hwŕn nang bigŕs
sa sáko. Juan was stuffing rice into the sack. Sya y nagsuklŕy. She
combed her hair. Ang pagtatahňl nang áso ng itň sa manga nagdŕdŕánan
ay masamŕ ng ugále`. This dog's way of barking at passers-by is a
bad habit. Ang Kastíla` ay nagtátanňng. The Spaniard was asking
questions. Nagtanůng akň kay Hwŕn kung saŕn ang daŕn. I asked
Juan where the road was (mag- with indirect questions or questions
implied). Si Hwŕn ay syŕ ng nagtáwag nang bágo ng léyi. It was Juan
who announced (as town crier) the new law. Ang pagtatáwag ni Hwŕn ay
hindí márinig nang karamíhan dahilŕn sa mahínŕ nya ng tiněg. Juan's
announcement was not audible to the majority, owing to his weak
voice. Sya y nagtayó nang bágu ng báhay. He built a new house. Ang
pagtatayó nang manga báhay díto ay lubhŕ ng mahalagŕ. The building
of houses here is very expensive. Nagtikwŕs si Pédro nang manga
suléras nang báhay. Pedro put some of the joists of the house out of
level. Ang pagtitipěd nang kwŕlta ay ginágawá nang maráme. Many people
save money. Nagtipěd si Hwŕn sa kanya ng pananamět. Juan was saving
of his clothing. Ang pagtitípon nang manga ŕrmas ay báwal. Storing up
arms is forbidden. Magtípun ka nang káhoy. Store up some wood. Sila y
nagtípon nang káhoy sa likňd nang kanila ng báhay. They stored up wood
in the rear of their house. Nagtípon siya nang manč` sa isa ng súlok
nang bakúran. He kept a pile of peanuts in a corner of his yard. Sya
y nagtúlak nang isinůsúlong na kahň ng bákal. He did the shoving of
the iron chest that was being moved (-um- shoved at, took part in the
shoving). Magúubra ang karitň ng itň sa mahírap na daŕn. This wagon
will be suitable for difficult roads. Nagupó sya nang manga báta sa
bangkň`. He seated some children on the bench.

Similarly: balěk, bukŕs, kantŕ, sáboy, sáma, sarŕ, sayŕw, takbň,
talňn, tánod, tirŕ, yáya`.

352. Transients with mag- are much used with derived words; in so
far as these belong to secondary groups, they will be treated below;
see §§ 384. 405. 410. 427,a. 430,a.b.c. 453,a. 489. 489,a. 513.

(a) From phrases: Nagmŕmadali-ng-áraw. The day is dawning (madalě ng
áraw proximate day, i. e. dawn, daybreak), nagmčmč-ári` is possessing,
has mastery of (may ári` owner, master). naghŕháti-ng-gabě. It is
midnight (háti ng gabě midnight). pagtatatlo-ng-gabě the three nights'
celebration (tatlň ng gabě).

(b) From compound words: pagbibigŕy-loňb (bigŕy-loňb); Ang
maghampas-lúpa` ay nakasěsíra` nang púri. Being a vagabond is
dishonorable (hampŕs-lúpa`); maghŕhánap-búhay (hánap-búhay).

(c) From derived words: Transients with mag- from the contingent of
transients with -um- express insistent and prolonged action: Káhit na
walá sya ng talíno ay nagpůpumílit sya ng mŕtúto. Although he has no
gifts, he is trying very hard to get educated. Sya y nagpůpumílit na
pumaroňn sa pěknik. He is trying hard to be able to go to the picnic
(pumílit). Similarly, nagtůtumirŕ (tumirŕ).

From words with prefix ma- (§ 454) in the sense of making something
or making (claiming) oneself to have a quality: Magmámadalě táyo
nang paglákad, úpang hwŕg táyo ng máhuli sa trčn. We will hurry our
pace, so as not to be late for the train (madalě`). Nagmámaligsě
si Kulŕs sa pagsunňd sa manga útos sa kanyŕ. Nicolás is quick about
obeying the orders that are given him (maligsě). Nagmalwŕt sya nang
pagparíto. He took a long time coming here. Hwag kŕ ng magmaluwŕt nang
pagparíto. Don't take too long about coming here (maluwŕt). Similarly,
pagmamarúnong (marúnong).

From various words: Sila y naghimagsěk. They came to an armed conflict
(-himagsěk § 518). Si Hwána ay naghíhimatŕy. Juana is fainting
(himatŕy). Si Hwána ay nagkŕkakaněn. Juana makes sweetmeats (for
sale) (kakaněn, § 367,e). Sya y nagkalatimbŕ nang marámi. He did the
well-bucket exercise many times (kala-timbŕ`, § 519).

(d) Especially common are transients with mag- from special static
words with suffix -an; they express mutual or concerted action by
two or more actors.

From the forms in S -an (§ 377): Nagŕlísan ang mangŕ aluwáge
no ng lúnes nan hápon. The carpenters all left last Monday
afternoon (ŕlís-an). Naglŕlŕbásan silŕ. They were all going
out. Silŕ y nagpětásan nang manga biyábas. They all picked guavas
together. Magsěsěgáwan múna táyo bágo tapúsin ang míting. We will
all give a yell together before we close the meeting. Ang manga áso
sa báya ng itň ay nagtŕhúlan kagabě. The dogs in this town all barked
last night. Similarly, from: bangkŕ`, bastŕ, daŕn, hukňm, iyŕk, kamŕy,
kantŕ, salitŕ`, takbň, tampň, taniyŕg, tipŕn, tugtňg, uwě`. The form
in S -an is itself from a derived word in: Naghěmagsíkan ang mangŕ
sundálo ng Tagálog at Kastíla`. The Tagalog and Spanish soldiers
fought each other (hěmagsíkan from -himagsěk, § 518).

From the forms in S (1) -an (§ 378): Nagŕŕwítan silŕ nang akň y
dumatěng. They were singing in chorus when I arrived. Magěbígan
kayň. Love one another. Nagěěbígan si Pédro at si Hwána. Pedro
and Juana love each other. Ang ginawá nya ng pagmumůráhan nang
kanyŕ ng mangŕ kalákal ay dahilŕn sa kanya ng pangangailángan nang
kwŕlta. His putting down the prices of his goods was due to his need
of money. Similarly: hákot, káin.

From forms in (2) -an (§ 379): Hwag kayň ng magmurahŕn sa daŕn. Don't
abuse each other on the street. Nagmůmurahŕn silŕ. They were engaged
in an abusive quarrel. Ang kŕgalítan ni Pétra at ni Kulása ay natápus
sa hŕyága ng pagmumurahŕn. The hostility between Petra and Nicolasa
ended in an abusive quarrel in public. Nagpurihŕn ang dalawa ng
magkaybígan sa kanila ng pagtatalumpáte`. The two friends praised
each other in their speeches. Nagpůpurihŕn ang manga kaybíga ng
itň sa pŕhayágan. This group of friends praise each other in the
newspapers. Si Hwána at si Maryŕ ay nagputulŕn nang kukň. Juana and
Maria cut their fingernails. Silŕ y nagsŕgasaŕn. They all jostled
one another. Ang pagsasŕgasaŕn nang manga táo ay lubhŕ ng magulň. The
jostling of all the people was most confused. Nagsugatŕn silŕ. They
inflicted wounds on one another. magtaanŕn flee. Ang kanila ng
pagtutulungŕn ay hindí nátulňy. Their plan to help each other was
not carried out. Similarly: ágaw, balíta`, dáhil, hánap, haráng, lában.

From diminutives in D -an (§ 381): Magŕaswang-aswángan daw si
Pédro sa karnabŕl. Pedro says he will dress up as a bogey-man
for the carnival. Hwag kŕ ng magaswŕng-aswángan. Don't play
bogey-man. Nagmanňk-manúkan si Hwŕn sa karnabŕl. Juan masqueraded as
a rooster at the carnival. Silŕ y nagůunggú-unggúan. They are playing
at being monkeys. Nagusŕ-usáhan siyŕ. He pretended he was a deer. So
also: dapŕ`. From (1) D -an: Sya y nagbabá-babayíhan. He went dressed
as a woman. So also from tákot.

353. Transients with accent shift and mag- may owe the shift to the
root; so from ábot (§ 337): Nagáabňt si Hwŕn nang sigarělyo sa kanya ng
manga kaybígan. Juan is passing cigarettes to his friends. Ang pagaabňt
nang sigarělyo ay isa ng ugáli ng magálang. Passing cigarettes is a
polite custom (umabňt, § 348,c, does not involve a person to whom). So
also múra.

In the great majority of instances, however, the accent shift is not
peculiar to the root, but constitutes a special formation, which
expresses a more plentiful and diverse action than the transient
with -um- or simple mag-. Silŕ y nagbábabŕg. They are fighting
each other. Magbarú ka. Get dressed, Put on your clothes. Sya y
nagbunňt nang damň. He plucked up a lot of grass. Maghanŕp kayň
nang manga bulaklŕk sa párang. Go and look for flowers in the
woods. Pabayaŕn nawá ninyň na sya y maghanŕp. Please allow him to
make an inspection. Naghatí ako nang manga itlňg na pinatigasŕn ni
Hwána. I halved a quantity of eggs which Juana had hard-boiled. ang
paghahatč nang manga mansánas the halving of the apples. Magisip kŕ
nang manga lugŕr na maŕári ng kinaiwánan mo nang iyň ng librň. Think
of the various places where you may have left your book. Si Hwŕn ay
nagíisip nang manga iháhandá nya sa fiyčsta. Juan is thinking of
what things he will serve at the fiesta. Hwag kŕ ng magputňl nang
abakŕ, Hwŕn. Don't cut up any hemp, Juan. Magpúputol kamě nang búho`,
yantňk, at bayúgin, pagdatěng námin doňn. We shall cut slender bamboo,
rattan, and thick bamboo when we get there. Nagputňl si Hwŕn nang
tubň sa pinások nya ng tubúhan. Juan cut down a lot of sugar-cane in
the cane-field he got into. Nagpúputol nang kawáyan na hindí nya árě
si Hwŕn. Juan cuts down bamboo that does not belong to him. Nagpuyŕt
akň sa manga gabě ng nagdaŕn. I have repeatedly staid up late the
last few nights. Hindí ko mŕputúlan nang tahěd ang kátyaw, sapagkŕt
itň y nagsísikŕd. I couldn't cut the rooster's spur, because it
kept struggling with its feet. Sya y nagsísinungalěng. He is telling
lies. Pagsusulŕt nya nang manga súlat ay pumaroňn ka t linísin mo ang
kanyŕ ng aralŕn. While he is writing all his letters, go and clean his
study. Ang panginoň y nagtawŕg nang manga alíla`. The master called
various servants. Nagtátawag syŕ nang manga kitč`, nang ákin sya ng
datnŕn sa bakúran. She was calling to a lot of little chicks when I
came upon her in the yard. Ang pagtatawag nyŕ sa manga kitč` at ang
manga půtákan nang manga manňk ay nakabíbingě. Her constant calling
to the chicks and the clucking of all the hens made a deafening
noise. Ang báta y nagtúturó nang kanyŕ ng gustň. The child points
at the various things it wants. Hwag kŕ ng magutŕng. Don't go about
asking for credit. Ang magutŕng sa marámi ng tindáhan ay hindí maínam
na ugále`. Buying on credit in many shops is a bad habit. Similarly
from: bálot, íngay, lákad, láyag, líbot, tágo`.

(a) When transients with mag- are made from derived words, the
accent of the underlying word is occasionally shifted, apparently
without change of meaning: Sya y nagmayabŕng. He boasted (mayábang,
§ 454). Similarly: magkákalahatč` (kalaháti` § 519).

(b) In one such case there is not only accent shift, but also
secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word: Sya
y nagmápuri. He praised himself. Sya y nagmŕmŕpurě. He is praising
himself. Ang pagmamápuri ay hindí magandŕ ng ugáli`. Praising oneself
is not a becoming habit (ma-púri, § 454).

354. The corresponding form from oxytone roots is made with unaccented
reduplication of the underlying word: mag-si-sigŕw, mag-si-si-sigŕw,
nag-si-sigŕw, nag-sí-si-sigŕw; the abstract, however, lacks the extra
reduplication, coinciding with that of §§ 350. 351: pag-si-sigŕw.

Sya y naggugupět nang manga papčl. He cut some pieces of paper
into bits. Sya y naggúgugupět nang manga papčl. He is cutting up
some pieces of paper. Ang báta ng si Hwŕn, kung walŕ ng mágawa`,
ay sya ng nagháhahampŕs sa manga púnu-ng-ságing. It is little Juan
who goes whipping at the banana-trees when he can't find anything
to do. Hwag kŕ ng magpupukňl nang batň, sapagkŕt baká mo tamáan ang
bintána ng salaměn. Don't be always throwing stones; you might break
a window. Nagpúpuputŕk ang inahě ng manňk na nása kulungŕn. The hen
in the crate keeps up a constant cackling. Ilágan mo ang dumárating
na kabáyo na nagtátatakbň. Look out for the horse that's coming there;
it's a run-away. Nagúuupú sya sa damň. He always sits on the grass. So
also: dugň`, inňm, lundŕg, sigŕw, tagpň`.

(a) In one instance a barytone root has this reduplication with
explicit plural meaning: magkikíta see one another, meet (of more
than two people, cf. magkíta).

355. Accent shift and reduplication of the root appear in barytone
roots in the same sense as accent-shift alone, with perhaps a
somewhat greater intensity of the action: Nagpúpuputňl nang retáso ang
báta`. The child was cutting some rags into small bits. Ang kátyaw
ay nagsísisikŕd. The rooster kept struggling with its legs. Sya y
nagtátatawŕg nang manga kitč`. She kept calling to the chickens.

356. With doubling of the root, transients in mag- express either
action repeated at intervals or reciprocal action of explicitly more
than two actors: Nagisŕ-isŕ ang manga báta` nang paglápit sa ákin. The
children came to me one by one. So from: duklŕy, hiwalŕy, úlit.

(a) In one instance the root has accent shift: Naguna-unŕ ang manga
báta` nang paglápit sa ákin. The children vied with each other for
the first place in coming to me.



(3) Active with mang- and abstract with pang- r.

357. The active with mang- has the forms: ma-mútol, ma-mů-mútol,
na-mútol, na-mů-mútol, pa-mu-mútol (from pútol); it expresses action
more deliberate, selective, or in larger quantity (professional,
habitual) than mag-; like the latter, but more clearly, it is used
for the making or using of such and such an object. Examples:

Sya y nangabála sa ámin. He made trouble for us. Nangano kŕ nang
iyo ng manga kalarň`? What did you do to your playmates? Nangáyap
lámang ang báta`. The child ate only relishes. Sya y nangbábambo
nang áso. He is a caning a dog. ang pamamangkŕ` canoeing. Namilě akň
sa báya-ng-Malólos. I shopped in Malolos. Sya y nangdídilig nang
karsáda. He sprinkles streets. ang pangdidilěg street-sprinkling
(as vocation). Ang kasalatŕn nina Hwŕn sa pananamět ay nanggálin
sa pagsusugŕl ni Hwŕn. Juan's family's want of clothing is due to
his gambling. Hwag kŕ ng manghampŕs. Don't go whipping people. Sya
y nanghárang nang manga táo. He made a practice of holding people
up. Sya y hinúli nang pulěs dahilŕn sa panghahárang nang manga táo. He
was arrested by the police for highway robbery. Nangháte si Hwána nang
kalákal. Juana shared orders for goods. Ang panghaháte ni Hwána nang
kalákal na ipinagbíbili nyŕ ay sya nyŕ ng ikinalúge. Juana's getting
her stock of goods for sale by sharing in orders of fellow-retailers
is what made her lose money. Nanghínŕ nang pagtakbň ang kabáyo sa
kalaúnan nang pagkŕgámit sa kanyŕ. The horse slackened its pace
because it had been driven too long. Silŕ y nanghína`. They grew
faint. Manghirŕm ka nang palakňl. Go borrow a hatchet. manghúla`
practise fortune-telling. Nanghůhúli kamě nang isdŕ` sa kagamitŕn nang
dála. We catch fish by means of nets. Ang kanya ng manga pangingílag
sa sakět ay lubhŕ ng malakč. His precautions against sickness are
elaborate. Sya y nangŕngabáyo. He rides horseback. Nangapá si Pédro
nang isdŕ`. Pedro caught fish in his hands (by feeling for them in
mud-holes). Sya y nangŕngaséra. He eats in a boarding-house. mangáwit
cut twigs with the káwit (a small, hook-shaped pruning-knife);
also: get tired of a position or occupation. Ang báta ng si Hwŕn
ay nangŕngáya nang manga kápwa nya báta`. Little Juan lords it
over the other children. Sya y nangúngublč. He is keeping himself
in hiding. Hwag kŕ ng mangurňt, Pédro. Don't be pinching people,
Pedro. Ang kanya ng pananagínip ay hindí nátuloy, sapagkŕt nágising
syŕ sa kalabňg nang púsa`. His dream was interrupted by his being
awakened by the falling of the cat. Sya y nanŕnagínip. He is
dreaming. Aků y nanagínip kagabč. I had a dream last night. Namáso
sya nang dalíri nang kápwa nya báta`. He scorched his playmate's
finger. Pamumútol nya nang kawáya y sundŕn mo syŕ t baká magliwalěw
lámang sa kalakhŕn nang panahňn. When he goes bamboo-cutting, follow
him to see that he doesn't loaf most of the time. Ang pamumútol
nang kawáyan ay mahírap. Bamboo-cutting is hard work. Namútol si
Hwŕn nang kawáyan. Juan cut bamboo. Namůmútol kamě nang damň úpang
ipagbilč. We are cutting grass for sale. Mamůmútol kamě nang tubň
sa bakúran ni Áli ng Pétra. We are going to cut sugar-cane in Aunt
Petra's yard. Ang báta ng may sakět ay namůmúyat sa kanya ng inŕ. The
sick child keeps its mother awake. Ang maláwig na pananalitŕ` ay
hindí maínam. Roundabout speeches are not pleasant. Pédro, hwag kŕ ng
manyásat nang gawá nang máy gawŕ`. Pedro, don't be inquiring into other
people's business. ang panunúlat writing in quantity, clerkship. ang
pananahč` the occupation of sewing, the being a seamstress. Silŕ y
nanahímik. They quieted down. Ang bŕta y nanahímik. The boy quieted
down to take a rest. manáwag call, summon (people). ang panunúro` the
act of pointing things out. Sya y nangúna. He went first, He led. Sya
y mangůngúna. He will be in the lead. Ang báta y nangupň sa buntňt
nang sáya nang babáye. The boy went and sat right down on the lady's
train. Ang panguupň nang báta sa buntňt nang sáya ay ipinahintú sa
kanyŕ nang kanya ng nánay. The boy's trick of sitting down on people's
trains was put a stop to by his mother. Sya y nangusísa nang manga
babáye. She interrogated a number of women. Nangútang sya sa ákin
nang limŕ ng píso. He made a loan of five dollars from me.

Similarly from: áhit, áko`, anŕk, báhay, balíta`, barěl, báro`,
báyan, bílog, bíro`, búhay, bundňk, damět, dúkit, gamňt, gupět, hábol,
hámon, hingě`, igěb, ílin, káin, kumpisŕl, latŕ`, lóko, mahála`, noňd,
pagítan, píli`, púlot, salákay, saríwa`, singěl, súbok, sulsč, súnog,
súyo`, tálo, tangháli`, tiwála`, umět, yári.

(a) From derived words: ang panghihěmagsíkan in the same meaning
as paghihěmagsíkan (from hěmagsíkan, § 377,a); so from kalaháti`
(§ 519), kináin (§ 365). See also §§ 421,a. 422,a.

(b) From words with prefix hin- (§ 518) we may derive, theoretically,
the transients with prefix manghin-, though the underlying word in most
cases does not exist. For the phonetic irregularities see § 334,a,5.

Sila y nanghimagsěk. They came to an armed conflict (bagsěk). Hwag
kŕ ng manghigantě sa kanilŕ, Hwŕn; ang kababáan nang loňb ay lálo ng
magandŕ. Don't take revenge against them, Juan; meekness of spirit is
more becoming. Manghíhigantě kamě dahilŕn sa manga kalupitŕ ng ginawá
nila sa ámin. We will take vengeance on them for the many cruelties
they have committed against us. manghinukň cut the fingernails
(kukň). Nanghěhináyang silŕ sa pagkamatŕy ni Del-Pilŕr. They were
mourning the death of Del Pilar. Malakě ang kanila ng panghihináyang
sa namatŕy na báta ng si Hwŕn, dahilŕn sa hindí karanyúwa ng talíno
nya. Their grief at little Juan's death was great, on account of
his unusual talents. (sáyang). manghiningŕ pick the teeth (ang tingŕ
foreign substance between the teeth). manghinulč clean out the ears
(tu-tulč earwax, § 343).

(c) In one instance the root is doubled; its accent shift is due
to the meaning of the root: Nanawŕ-nawŕ si Pédro nang márinig nyŕ
na sya y nŕpíli ng magěng bóbo sa larň`. Pedro could not keep from
snickering when he heard that the choice had fallen on him to be
clown in the play.



(4) Special static words.

358. A few individual forms of the preceding group have static value;
of transients, umága morning (§ 348) and ang mamáso` a blister
(páso`); of abstracts, ang pagkáin food (beside the act of eating),
cf. also pagdáka, § 265,9. The following are the regular formations
of special static words of this type:

(a) Dual collectives with mag-: ang magáli aunt and niece
or nephew. Ang magamŕ ng si Maryŕ at si Pédro ay naparoňn sa
búkid. Pedro and his daughter Maria have gone to the country. Ang
magasáwa ng Pédro at Hwána ay naparoňn sa teyátro. Pedro and his
wife Juana have gone to the theatre. Ang magatč ng si Maryŕ at si
Maryáno ay nagsipagpasyŕl. Mariano and his oldest sister Maria
went for a walk. Sila y magatč. She is his oldest sister. ang
magbaláe ng si Hwŕn at si Andrčs Juan and Andrés, whose children
have married each other. magbayŕw two men, one of whom has married
the other's sister. magbilŕs two men who have married two sisters
(ang bilŕs the husband of one's wife's sister). maghípag two women,
one of whom has married the other's brother (each of the two is the
other's hípag). magimpň grandmother and grandchild. maginŕ mother
and child. magkúya the oldest brother and a younger brother or
sister. magnánay mother and child. magtátay father and child.

Slightly divergent is magának: it includes the whole family, a given
person plus his angkŕn (§ 379): Nagsimbŕ ang boň ng magának. The
whole family went to church. ang magának na sina Hwŕn Krůs the Juan
Cruz family. Irregular in meaning are also magdamŕg and maghápon,
of periods of time.

From a compound word: ang magkápit-báhay two neighbors.

From a phrase: Sila y magkápwa-táo. They act toward each other as
fellow men should (kápuwŕ táo).

From a derived word: magamaěn uncle and nephew or niece (ama-ěn, §
367,a); see also §§ 408. 412,a. 490.

(b) mag- r similarly forms explicit plurals: ang magaamŕ the group
of a father with two or more of his children. ang magbabaláe a
group of three or more people whose children have intermarried. ang
magiinŕ mother and children. ang magkukúya a group of brothers
and sisters including the oldest brother. magnanánay mother and
children. magpipínsan a group of cousins. magtatátay father and
children.

From a compound: magkakápit-báhay.

From a derived word: magkakasinglakě (kasinglakě, § 520). See also §§
412,a. 427,d.

(c) mag- r also forms static words denoting a professional agent:
ang magaaráro a plowman, magbibistŕy woman who sieves the rice in a
mill, magnanákaw thief.

From oxytone roots also with retraction of accent: ang magbabáyo a
rice-pounder, magbibígas a dealer in hulled rice.

(d) Barytone roots usually shift the accent: ang maghuhugŕs a
dish-washer, maglalakŕd traveller, magliliněs a cleaner, maglilipŕ`
plasterer, maglulutň` cook; Si Hwŕn ay isa ng magpuputňl nang
káhoy. Juan is a wood-cutter; ang magsusulŕt a clerk scribe, magsusuyňd
a harrower (súyod a harrow), maguutŕng a habitual borrower. So also
from: láko`, táwag.

(e) mŕng- r has the same value. The accent of the prefix can appear
only in an open syllable (§ 338); ang mŕngingisdŕ` a fisherman;
mŕnanalakŕb fish-trapper (salakŕb an inverted basket used as a
fish-trap). So: dúkit, hámon, húla`, kúlam, lígaw, sákop, sípa`,
tanggňl, tugtňg.

Oxytone roots often have retraction of accent: manggagámot manggagamňt;
manggugúpit manggugupět; Sya y mŕngingínum nang álak. He is a drunkard;
also: mangiínom (with the prefix kept apart by glottal stop, § 34,
and no effect on initial vowel); mángangatŕm mŕngangátam; mŕnglilímos;
ang mŕnanáhe` a seamstress (ang tahč` a seam); ang mŕnanánim a planter.

(f) Barytone roots usually have accent shift: ang manghuhugŕs
a dish-washer, manglalagarě` a wood-sawer, mámumulňt a gleaner
(púlot); Ang manga mámumutňl nang káhoy ay nagsiáhon nŕ sa bundňk. The
wood-cutters have already gone up into the mountains. ang mánunulŕt a
scribe, clerk, ang mŕngungutŕng a habitual borrower, a "sponger". So
also from: káyo, tálo.



(5) Direct passive.

359. The simple direct passive has suffix -in with accent shift of
one syllable in the contingent, infix -in- (§ 334,b,1) in the actual:
putúl-in, pů-putúl-in, p-in-útol, p-in-ů-pútol. It corresponds to
actives with -um- and abstracts with pag- and, to a large extent,
also to actives with mag- and abstracts with pag- r. It expresses,
transiently, an object viewed as fully affected, taken in by the actor,
or created by a simple action.

Irregularities of form are as listed in § 334,c.

Ináko ni Hwŕn ang útang ni Pédro. Pedro's debt was taken over (pledged
for) by Juan. Inŕalaála ni Pédro ang kanya ng inŕ. Pedro was thinking
of his mother. Hindí nya inŕalaála iyňn. He does not mind that. Hindí
nya ŕalalahánin iyňn. He won't mind that (§ 334,c,3). Inŕámin nya
na ginawá nya iyňn. He admits that he did it. Ŕamínin nya ang
kanya ng kasalánan. He will own up to his misdeeds. Ináangkin
nang báta ng si Hwána ang manga laruwŕn ni Maryŕ. Little Juana
appropriates Maria's toys. Angkinin mň ang laruwŕn. Take the toy for
yourself. Pag úulŕn ay ararúhin mo ang punláan. When the rains come,
plow the germinating-plot. Inŕáso nang inŕ ang kanya ng báta`. The
mother is running and shouting after her child (áso a dog). Ináyap
námin ang atsára. We used the mixed pickles as a condiment. (ang
áyap condiment). Ang aklŕt niya ng kaybígan mo ng binanggět ay áki
ng nabása. I have read the book of that friend of yours whom you
mentioned. Binátis nya ang ílog. He forded the river. Ang gúlok na yŕn
ay bŕbawíin ko sa iyň, kapag ipinamútol mo nang kawáyan. I shall take
back this bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo. Ang tábo`
ay binílog ni Hwŕn. Juan turned the dipper (on a lathe). Ang úlo
ni Hwŕn ay biněbílog nang kanya ng manga kalarň`. Juan's playmates
are fooling him (literally: turning his head). Binyŕk ni Hwŕn ang
kawáyan. Juan has split the bamboo. Dináing nya ang isdŕ`. He laid
open the fish. Ang manga isdŕ ng itň ay dinála niyŕ sa ílog-Pásig. He
caught these fish with the net in the Pasig river. Yňn ay áki ng
dináramdŕm. I am very sorry, That's too bad. Diligěn mo ang manga
haláman. Sprinkle the plants. Durúin mo ang áki ng mamáso`. Prick my
blister for me. Ginágabi kamě. We were overtaken by night. Hanápin
mo ang magnanákaw. Look for the thief. Hinápis nya akň. He made me
sad. Hinátě ko ang manga búnga-ng-káhoy sa manga bátŕ`. I distributed
the fruits among the children. Iníhaw nya ang karnč. He roasted
the meat. Inísip nya ng magnákaw sa isa ng tindáhan. He thought
of stealing from a store. Isípin mo kung saŕn mo naíwan ang iyo ng
sombréro. Think where you left your hat. Ang kabutě ng itň ay hindí
kinŕkáin. One does not eat this mushroom. Ipatipěd mo sa bátŕ` ang
kinŕkáin nya. Make the child be moderate in its eating. Kinapá ko
sa kadilimŕn ang áki ng hěgáan. I fell out my bed in the dark. Kúnin
mo ang aklŕt sa báta`. Take the book from the child. Hwag mň akň ng
kurutěn. Don't pinch me. Nilákad námin ang lahŕt nang daŕn. We walked
all the way. Laruin mň ang báta`. Play with the child. Nilělínis nya
ang mésa. She is cleaning the table. Nilúsong mo bŕ ang balňn? Did
you go down into the well? Lusúngin mo ang balňn. Go down into the
well. Nilůlúto niya ang gúlay. She is cooking the vegetables (also:
linůlúto`). Minámahŕl nang manga magúlang ang báta`. The parents love
the child. pinalŕnsa was ironed (palŕnsa). Pinána ko ang usŕ. I shot
the stag with an arrow. Hindí nya pinápansěn iyňn. He doesn't pay any
attention to that. Pinatŕy ko ang manňk. I killed the chicken. Ang
pinílě nya ng manňk ay matabŕ`. The chicken she picked out is a
fat one. Pinílit nya ng gumawá nang páyong ang alíla`. He forced
the servant to make an umbrella. Pitasin mň ang manga búnga nang
manggŕ. You pick the mangoes. Pinútol ni Hwŕn ang tanikalŕ`. The chain
was cut by Juan. Pagka pinútol mo ang lúbid na iyŕn ay lálagpak ang
tulŕy. When you have cut that rope the bridge will fall. Pag pinútol
mo ang buntňt nang túta` ay malápit iya ng mamatŕy. If you cut off
the puppy's tail, it is likely to die. Pinůpútol ko ang káhoy. I
was cutting the wood. Putúlin mo ang lúbid. Cut the rope. Půputúlin
nya ang búho`. He will cut the bamboo. Pinúyat nya akň. He kept me
up late. Hwag mň ng sagasáin, Lúkas, ang kainítan nang áraw sa iyo
ng paglabŕs sa búkid. Don't hit upon the hottest part of the day for
going out to the field, Lucas. Sinísintŕ ni Pédro ang dalága. Pedro is
in love with the young woman. Akň y sinípŕ nang kabáyo. I was kicked
by a horse. Sinuklŕy nya ang buhňk nang kanya ng anŕk. She combed
her child's hair; also: Sinuklŕy nya ang kanya ng anŕk. Ang gámit
nya ng librň ay sinúlat ni Daruwěn. The book he uses was written
by Darwin. Kung sinuntňk nya ang báta` ay suntukěn mo siyŕ. If he
hits the boy, do you hit him. Sinúsuntok nyŕ ang báta`. He hits the
boy on the head. Tagpuěn mo akň sa estasyňn nang trčn. Meet me at
the railroad station. Tanawin mň ang súnog! Look at the fire! Ang
tábon sa ílog ay tinangŕy nang ágos. The dam in the river was carried
away by the current. Hwag mň ng tanggapěn ang úpa. Don't accept the
pay. Tawágin mo si Hwŕn. Call Juan. Tinipěd ni Hwŕn ang ibinigŕy
ko ng ságing. Juan was saving with the bananas I gave him. Ang dúsa
ng kanya ng tinítiěs ay hindí lubhŕ ng mabigŕt. The suffering he is
undergoing is not very severe. Tinísod ko ang bakyŕ`. I kicked away
the sandal. Inúna si Hwŕn nang hukňm. Juan was dealt with first by the
judge. Inusísa akň ni Hwŕn. Juan questioned me. Ang inusísa sa ákin
ni Hwŕn ay kung saan nŕndon ang kanya ng sombréro. What Juan asked
me was where his hat was. Inútang ko iyň ng salapě ng ibinigŕy ko sa
kanyŕ kahápon. I borrowed that money I gave him yesterday. Niwáwalis
nyŕ ang alikabňk sa mésa. She is sweeping the dust from the table
(also: wináwalěs). Ang niyáyŕ ko ng magpasyŕl ay si Hwŕn. The one I
invited to come for a walk was Juan.

Similarly from: ágaw, akála`, ákay, akiyŕt, alíla`, alintána,
alipustŕ`, alěs, ámo`, anínaw, ásal, bálak, bambň, bása, batň, báwi`,
bigkŕs, bigtě, bílang, bilě, bitbět, búhat, bútas, buwísit, dalŕ,
darŕs, dikděk, dúkit, dúkot, gámit, gamňt, gantě, gawŕ`, gúgol, gupět,
gustň, gútom, hábol, hágod, hampŕs, hámon, hantŕy, hángo`, hárang,
harŕp, hátak, híla, hilěng, hinála`, hintŕy, hirŕm, hitět, híwa`,
húkay, húli, íbig, inň, inňm, kagŕt, kalaykŕy, kámot, kantŕ, kúlam,
kumbidŕ, kumpisŕl, lála, lóko, lúnod, loňb, matŕ, múra, nákaw, pálo`,
pasŕn, pások, pígil, pího, piráso, pirěnsa, pukňl, sábi, sadiyŕ`,
sagňt,  salúbong, sampŕl, sanggŕ, sapantáha`, sílip, singěl, siyásat,
sumpňng, sundň`, sunňd, súnog, sungánga, tagŕ`, tákot, talagŕ, tálo,
tampálas, tápos, túkop, tuntňn, úbos, ugáli`, úlit, wíka`.

(a) From derived words: Inůumága silŕ sa kanila ng pagsasŕlitáan. They
were being overtaken by their morning in their conversation (um-ága,
§ 358). Si Hwána ay hinimatŕy. Juana was attacked by a fainting-fit
(himatŕy, § 518).

(b) From root with shifted accent: Ináabůt nang báta` ang góra. The
boy was reaching for his cap.

(c) Accent shift lacking: Mínsanin mo, Hwŕn, ang paginňm nang
gamňt. Take the medicine all at one swallow, Juan.

(d) From doubled root, with meaning of repeated action: see isŕ;
barytone root with accent shift: ámo`.

360. A few roots which have actives with mag- form the direct passive
from the root with pag- prefixed. On the analogy of other forms
(cf. § 369) one should expect this to be the case with roots whose
active with mag- stood in contrast with -um- (§ 351); this is clearly
the case, however, only in pag-isíp-in, pag-ě-isíp-in p-in-ag-ísip,
p-in-ag-ě-ísip: Pinagísip nya ng magnákaw sa isa ng tindáhan. He laid
plans for robbing a store (cf. in-ísip, § 359). The other roots which
have pag- in the direct passive are: barěl, doňp, kúro`, tapěk.

361. To the active with mag- (1) (§ 353) corresponds a direct passive
with pag- and accent shift: pag-putul-ěn, p-in-ag-putňl, etc. (pútol):
Pinaghatí ko ang manga itlňg na pinatigasŕn ni Hwána. I halved each
of the eggs Juana had hard-boiled. Pinagisěp nya ang kahulugŕn nang
manga sčnyas na nŕkíta nya ng ibiníbigay nang isa ng sundálo sa isa
nyŕ ng kasamahŕ ng nŕhúle nang kaáway. He figured out the meaning of
the signals he saw a soldier make to a comrade who was captured by
the enemy. Pinagpúputul nang báta` ang sinúlid. The child is cutting
the thread to bits. Pagputulin mň, Hwŕn, ang manga siět. Cut out the
bamboo-spines, Juan. Pinagusisá nang hukňm ang manga magnanákaw. The
judge cross-examined the robbers. Similarly from kúha, nákaw, sábi,
sípa`, súnog.

362. Likewise, corresponding to the active with mag- r (§ 354),
is a direct passive with pag- r; see gawŕ`, kagŕt.

Passive with pag- (1) r (cf. § 355) from sípa`.

363. Passive with pag- (1) D (cf. § 356): Pinagsabě-sabi nyŕ sa ibŕ
t ibŕ ng táo na si Pédro ay nŕhúli sa pagnanákaw. He told various
people on various occasions, that Pedro was arrested for thievery.

364. The direct passive is made from the root with prefix pang- to
correspond to actives with mang- (§ 357): pa-mitas-ěn, pa-mě-mitas-ěn,
p-ina-mitŕs, p-in-a-mí-mitŕs (pitŕs). Examples: Inamútan ko si Hwŕn
nang pinamilě ko ng manga librň. I let Juan purchase from me some of
the books I had bought up. Pinamímitas nilŕ ang manga kamatsilč. They
picked the fruits of the tannic acid tree. Paměmitasěn námin ang manga
búlak. We shall pick the capoc cotton. Pinamůlot námin ang manga
laglŕg na búnga. We picked up the fallen betel-fruits. Pinangútang
ko iyŕ ng salapě` sa kanyŕ. I had to borrow that money you have there
from him. Also from noňd.



(6) Special static words.

365. The infix -in- produces static words denoting things which are
produced by such and such a process or treated so and so: ang pinítak
each of the small sections into which a rice-field is divided by the
irrigation trenches (pítak divide; as root-word, division). So from
báta`, hingŕ, káin, lúgaw, púno`, sáing, súlid.

(a) With accent shift: inakŕy.

(b) A number of roots (here treated as simple) have the form of words
with infix -in- (cf. § 333): hinála`, kinábang, linamnŕm, sinungáling,
tinápay, tinóla.

366. -in- R: ang ináamŕ godfather, iníinŕ godmother; cf. § 412,a.

367. Suffix -in with secondary accent on the first syllable of the
underlying word forms static words denoting something which undergoes
such and such an action: Ang kalasěng nang kwŕlta sa ibŕ y pára ng isa
ng tugtúgin. The clinking of money is for others (than the spender)
like music. So from bandŕ, damdŕm, tiěs (only here does the S show
itself), tungkňl.

(a) Static words with (1) -in, with irregularities (§ 334,b), person
or animal like something: amaěn uncle; so from inŕ. Also of things
consumed: inuměn drinking water, kánin (káin) boiled rice ready to eat.

(b) The same with pang- in pa-naú-hin guest, if from táo.

(c) (2) -in, collective, of places: bukirěn estate, fields, terrain;
lupaěn country, part of the world. Of animate creatures, tendency:
gulatěn scary, shy.

From derived word, in the latter sense, with S on the first of three
syllables: pŕniwalaěn credulous (paniwála`, § 347).

(d) -in with reduplication, from numerals, in the sense of with so
many: lilimáhin; from da-lawŕ (§ 345), da-dalawá-hin.

(e) r (2) -in, with irregularity: ka-kan-ěn sweetmeat (káin).

(f) The following roots end in -in (§ 333): bayúgin, buhángin,
dalángin prayer, kaingěn, muláwin, salaměn.



(7) Instrumental passive.

368. The instrumental passive corresponding to the active with -um-
and, to a large extent, to that with mag-, is formed with the prefix
i- (§ 334,a,3); the actual taking also the infix -in- (§ 334,b,2):
i-pútol, i-pů-pútol, i-p-in-útol, i-p-in-ů-pútol. It denotes,
transiently, an object given forth, parted from, or used as instrument
or the person for whom in such and such an action or process.

Iniyalěs nilŕ ang hárang nang daŕn. They removed the obstruction on the
road. Iyánib (or: isánib) mo ang iyu ng baněg sa kay Pédro. Make your
sleeping-mat overlap Pedro's, i. e. Sleep next to Pedro. Ibinŕbágay
nang mangkakayň ang damět sa namímilč sa kanyŕ. The cloth-merchant
is suiting the cloth to her customer. Ibinŕbágay ni Hwŕn sa kanyŕ
ng kalŕgáyan ang kanya ng paggastŕ. Juan adapts his expenses to his
situation. Ibinilanggň nang hukňm si Hwŕn. The judge has put Juan
into prison. Ibiníngit nya sa lamésa ang orasŕn. He put the clock
on the edge of the table. Idaan mň sa báhay ni Pédro ang bábuy na
itň. Leave this pig at Pedro's house as you pass. Ang bantáyan sa
púno nang tulŕy ay inihágis nang manga lasěng na táo sa ílog. The
sentry-box at the head of the bridge was thrown into the river by the
drunken men. Ihásŕ mo ang pangáhit na ytň. Sharpen this razor. Ihinúkay
nila nang malálim ang patŕy. They dug a deep grave for the dead. Íwan
mo díto ang báta`. Leave the child here (so: ě-íwan will be left,
in-íwan was left, in-ě-íwan is being left). Inilálaŕn ko kay Pédro
ang ságing na itň. I am putting aside this banana for Pedro (also:
itinátaŕn). Inilůlúto nya ang gúlay. She is cooking the vegetables
(also: ilinůlúto`). Ipinagítan sya sa dalawŕ ng dalága. He was placed
between two young women. Ipináyag ko sa hinilěng nilŕ ang áki ng
sasakyŕn. At their request I let them have my vehicle. Ipinútol nya
akň nang sinúlid. She cut off some thread for me. Ipútol mo akň nang
maěs. Cut some corn for me. Ipůpútol nya ikŕw nang tubň. He will cut
some sugar-cane for you. Ang kampět na iyŕn ay mapúpurol kapag ipinútol
mo nang káhoy. That kitchen-knife will grow dull, if you cut wood with
it. Kawáyan ang isinásahěg ni Pédro sa kanya ng báhay. Pedro is using
bamboo for flooring his house. Pag pinůpútol ko nŕ ang liěg nang manňk,
ay isáhod mo ang mangkňk na lalagyŕn nang dugň`. When I am cutting the
chicken's neck, hold under the basin to catch the blood. Isinále nya si
Hwŕn. He included Juan. Isáli mo si Hwŕn. Take Juan along. Isinampŕy
nya sa kanya ng balíkat ang kúmot. He slung the blanket across his
shoulder. Isigang mň ang sináing. Put the rice on the fire. Isilid mň
sa bóte ang álak. Put the wine into the bottle. Pagulŕn ay isoot mň ang
kapóte. When it rains put on the rain-coat. Itináwag nang magpapatawŕg
ang bágo ng kautusŕn. The crier cried out the new law. Itinayú nya
ang báhay. He erected the house. Itinira nyŕ sa ákin ang tinápay. He
left the bread for me. Itúru mu sa kanyŕ ang simbáhan. Show him the
church. Itúru mo sa ákin ang larň`. Teach me the game. Iwalá mo iyŕ
ng iyo ng sambalílo ng lúma`. Get rid of that old hat of yours.

Similarly, from: álay, átas, bagsŕk, balíta`, bigŕy, budbňd, búhos,
bulěd, búrol, buwŕl, dáos, dikět, distíno, dugtňng, gápos, hánap,
handŕ`, hatěd, hintň`, hitsŕ, húlog, kasŕl, kawŕg, labŕs, ladlŕd,
lagŕy, laglŕg, lákad, lakŕs, lalŕ`, lapŕg, lawět, liběng, ligtŕs,
líhim, lúlan, luwŕ`, páyo, sabŕd, sáboy, sagňt, sakdŕl, sánib, sarŕ,
sigŕw, sčrmon, súlong, sunňd, taŕn, taŕs, tágo`, táli`, taněm, tángi`,
tápon, tuktňk, túloy, túngo, úbos, útos, wisěk.

(a) From root with shifted accent: Iniyáabůt nya sa ákin ang librň. He
was handing me the book. Iyabůt mo sa ákin ang librň. Hand me the book.

369. The instrumental passive is made from the root with prefix pag-
when it corresponds to an active with mag- which stands in contrast
with an active with -um- from the same root (§ 351); it is used also to
express the instrumental relation more explicitly than the simple form,
especially the person for whom. Forms: i-pag-pú-tol, i-pag-pů-pútol,
i-p-in-ag-pútol, i-p-in-ag-pů-pútol.

Ito ng báhay ang ipinagbili kň. This house is the one I have sold
(cf. bumilě buy, magbilě sell). Ang áraw nang kapangŕnákan ni Risŕl
ay ipinagdědíwang sa boň ng Filipínas. Rizal's birthday is celebrated
all over the Philippines. Síno ang ipinaglůlúto mo? Whom are you
cooking for? (inilůlúto` in preceding section). Ipagpútol mo ngŕ`
akň nang yantňk. Please cut some bamboo for me. Ipagpůpútol kitŕ
nang tubň. I will cut you some sugar-cane. Ipinagpútol mo ba akň
nang pamilmět? Did you cut me a pole for fishing? Ipinagpůpútol niya
akň nang siět na gŕgawě ng pípa. He is cutting me some bamboo reeds
for cigarette-holders. Ang guntěng na iyŕn ay mapúpurul agŕd, kapag
ipinagpútol mo nang damět. Those scissors will get dull very soon,
if you keep using them to cut cloth with. Iyo ng kúnin ang guntěng,
kapag ipinagpůpútol nya nang káyo. Take the scissors, if he uses them
for cutting cloth. Ang paupó ni Hwŕ ng sůgálan ay ipinagsábi sa pulěs
nang kanya ng kápit-báhay. The gambling party Juan invited was exposed
to the police by his neighbor (sinábi was said). Ipinagsakay kň si
Hwŕn sa áki ng karumáta. I took Juan into my carriage. Ang bágo ng
léyi ay ipinagtáwag ni Hwŕn. The new law was called out by Juan. Hindí
ko bŕ ipinagútos sa iyň ng gawěn mo itň? Didn't I order you to do this?

Also from: kayilŕ`, labŕ, látag, sakdŕl, sumbňng, takŕ, tanňng, tapŕt.

(a) From derived words: ipinaghimatŕy (himatŕy, § 518);
Ipinagúbus-lŕkásan niya ang pagtakbň. He exhausted all his strength
in his running (úbus-lŕkásan, § 377,b).

370. i-pag (1), corresponding to mag- (1), § 353: from tápon; also
from derived word ma-yábang (§ 454, cf. § 353,a).

371. i-pag r, corresponding to mag- r (§ 354), from tanňng.

372. The instrumental passive from the root with prefix pang-
corresponds to the active with mang-: Ipinanghárang nila Pédro ang
manga barěl na inágaw nilŕ sa manga pulěs nang báyan. In holding people
up Pedro's gang used the guns they had snatched from the police of
the district. Ipinamútol ko nang yantňk ang gúlok. I used the bolo for
rattan-cutting. Ipinamůmútol nya akň nang kawáyan. He is cutting bamboo
for me. Ipinamůmútol nya nang kawáyan ang bágo ng gúlok. He is using
the new bolo for bamboo-cutting. Ipamútol mo nang tubň ang kampět na
itň. Use this kitchen-knife for cane-cutting. So also: áko`, balíta`.



(8) Special static words.

373. Special static words with prefix i- express the part of something
in such and such a direction, or the direction: ibábaw, ibáyo, ilálim,
itaŕs, ituktňk; with shifted root: ibabŕ`.



(9) Local passive.

374. The simple local passive, corresponding to the active with -um-
and largely to that with mag-, has the suffix (1) -an with the
irregularities described in § 334. The forms of the actual mode
have also the infix -in-: putúl-an, pů-putúl-an, p-in-utúl-an,
p-in-ů-putúl-an. The local passive denotes the thing affected as
place in which or the person to whom.

Inabútan akň nang ulŕn. I was caught by the rain. Agáhan mo ang
iyo ng pagparíto. Make early your coming here, i. e. Come here
early. Pagkagupět nang áki ng buhňk ay inahítan nya akň. When he
had cut my hair he shaved me. Alisan mň nang manga tiněk ang áki ng
salawŕl. Take the thorns out of my trousers. Inanyáhan silŕ ni Hwŕn
na magpasyŕl. They were invited by Juan to go for a walk. Arálan
mo ang manga Kapampángan. Teach morals to the Pampangas. Asnan
mň ang dáing na isdŕ`. Salt the fish you lay open. Aptan mň nang
páwid ang báhay. Roof the house with nipa-palm. Awítan mo ang manga
panaúhin. Sing for the guests. Bakúran mo ang sagíngan sa tabě nang
ílog. Fence in the banana-grove by the river. Bakúran mo ang báhay. Put
a fence round the house. Binalitáan ko si Hwŕn nang manga nangyári sa
ákin sa labanŕn. I related to Juan my adventures in the war. Bantayan
mň ang pálay. Guard the standing rice. Basáhan mo akň nang manga
kwčnto. Read me some stories. Bigasan mň ang tinóla ng manňk. Make
the chicken-stew with rice. Si Pédro ang binilhŕn ko nang kabáyo ng
itň. It was Pedro I bought this horse from. Sa katapusŕn ay kanya
ng nŕpagkilála ang malaki ng pangánib na kanya ng biningítan. In
the end he recognized the great danger into which he had betaken
himself. Binuksŕn ni Hwŕn ang pintň`. Juan opened the door. Dinaanŕn
nang trčn ang báboy. The pig was run over by the train. Dinaanŕn ko
si Hwŕn. I called for Juan on the way (and took him with me). Dalhŕn
mo nang túbig ang kabáyo. Bring water to the horse. Dalian mň ang
pagdadala ríto nang librň. Bring the book here soon. Ang pabása sa
bisíta nang San-Antňnyo ay dinaluhŕn nang marámi ng táo. The reading
at the chapel of San Antonio was attended by many people. Dinamíhan
nya ang kinúha nya ng ságing. He took many bananas. Dinamuhŕn nyŕ
ang damúha ng malápit sa simbáhan. He cut grass on the pasture near
the church. Dinapúan nang manga íbon ang sangŕ nang káhoy. Birds
alighted on the branch of the tree. Dinatnŕn kamě nang ulŕn. We were
overtaken by the rain. Diniláan nya akň. She stuck out her tongue
at me (ang díla` the tongue); also: Diláan mo ang mansánas. Lick
the apple. Hwag mň ng durúan nang karáyom ang áki ng panyň. Don't
leave needles sticking in my handkerchief. Hagkan mň si Nánay. Kiss
Mother. Hinalúan nang álak ang gátas. Some wine was mixed into the
milk. Hinampasŕn ni Pédro ang mukhá ni Hwŕn. Pedro hit Juan in the face
with a whip. Ang daŕn ay hinarángan. The road was obstructed. Hasáan mo
ang gúlok na itň. Sharpen this bolo. Hintuan mň ang iyo ng pagsusugŕl,
Pédro, kung íbig mu ng yumáman ka. Put a stop to your gambling, Pedro,
if you want to get rich. Hinůhugásan niyŕ ang manga pinggŕn parŕ sa
manga babáye. He is washing dishes for the women. Hulíhan mo nang
isdŕ` ang palŕisdáan. Catch fish in the fish-pond. Ang manga sampŕy
na damět ay hinípan nang hangin, kanyŕ` nahúlog sa lúpa`. The clothes
on the line were blown by the wind and fell to the ground. Hinípan ko
ang píto. I blew the whistle. Hinípan ko ang apňy úpang palakihěn. I
blew on the fire to make it larger. Inilágan nya ang simbáhan. He kept
away from the church. ... ang kabáyo. He got out of the way of the
horse. Inlagan mň ang dumárating na tumátakbo ng kabáyo. Get out of
the way of the horse that is coming on the run. Itiman mň ang lubňg
nang damět. Make the dye of the garment black. Iněiyakŕn ni Hwána
ang kanya ng namatŕy na kaybígan. Juana is weeping over her dead
friend. Hwag mň ng kurutŕn, Pédro, ang isdŕ ng nása dúlang. Don't you
take a pinch from the fish on the table, Pedro. Hwag mů ng labánan,
Pédro, ang kapatid mů ng matandŕ`. Don't oppose your older brother,
Pedro. Ang landŕs na gawě ng kaliwŕ` ay ang iyo ng lakáran. You
must take the path which goes to the left. Lakasan mň ang túlak sa
bangkŕ`. Push hard on the boat. Lakhan mň, Hwŕn, ang pirasúhin mo ng
mataměs. Break off a big piece of the sugar, Juan. Nilalíman nilŕ ang
húkay nang patŕy. The grave for the corpse was made deep by them. Ang
bantŕy nang manga kanyňn ay nilayásan ang kanya ng lugŕr. The guard
of the cannon deserted his post. Ligsihan mň ang pagílag sa lugŕr
na iyŕn. Get out of that place quickly. Hwag mň ng luksuhŕn ang
tiněk na iyŕn. Don't jump on that spine. Lulánan mo nang manggŕ ang
karitňn. Load up the wagon with mangos. Luluran mň si Pédro pagbababŕg
ninyň. Kick Pedro in the shin when you fight him. Nilusúngan mo bŕ si
Pédro? Did you help Pedro? Lutúan mo nang bigŕs ang manňk. Cook some
rice in with the (already cooked) chicken. Masdan mň ang bwŕn. Look at
the moon. Minŕmasdan kň ang manga nagdádaa ng táo. I am looking at the
people who pass by. Minuráhan nya akň sa pagbibilě nang talňng. He
made me a low price on the egg-plant. Muráhan mo ang pagbibilě
nang labanňs. Sell your large radishes cheap. Ang tanggápan nang
manga sanglŕ` sa báhay-sangláan ni Pédro ay ninakáwan kagabč. The
receiving-place of pledges in Pedro's pawn-shop was robbed last
night. Nakáwan mo syŕ nang kanyŕ ng salapč`. Rob him of his money. Sa
pagbubunň` ni Hwŕn at ni Pédro si Pédro ay pinaahŕn ni Hwŕn. Juan
caught Pedro by the leg (or: hurt Pedro in the leg) as they wrestled
together; but: Pinaanan nyŕ ang kanya ng kapatěd na natůtúlog. He lay
down with his feet toward his sleeping brother. Hwag mň ng paanŕn sa
iyň ng paghigŕ` ang kapatěd mo ng natůtúlog. When you go to bed don't
lie with your feet toward your sleeping brother. Pinanáwan sya nang
pagiísip. He lost his mind. Patayŕn mo nang pitsňn ang nilúgaw. Kill
a pigeon for the stew. Patisan mň ang isdŕ` ng itň. Put shrimp-sauce
on this fish. Pinayágan nya ang paraŕ ng itň. He agreed to this
plan. Pilikŕn mu ang isdŕ`. Cut the fins off the fish. Pintahan mň
ang padčr na ytň. Paint this wall. Hwag mň ng pintasŕn ang damět na
yŕn. Don't find fault with that garment. Pitasan mň nang búnga ang
manggŕ. Pick some fruits from the mango tree. Ang pinulútan nilŕ nang
manč` ay ang bakúran ni Hwána. The place where they gathered peanuts
was Juana's yard. Pinůpunásan nya ang sahěg. She is scrubbing the
floor. Punan mň, Pédro, nang isŕ ng salapč` ang kwŕlta ng ibinigŕy mo
sa ákin. Add half a dollar to the money you gave me, Pedro. Putíkan mo
ang kanya ng salawŕl. Put mud on his trousers. Pinutúlan ko nang usbňng
ang manga kamóte. I cut shoots from the sweet-potatoes. Pinůputlan nyŕ
nang manga sangŕ ang káhoy na nabwŕl. He is cutting the branches off
the tree that was blown down. Putúlan mo nang ténga ang áso. Cut the
dog's ears. Putlan mň nang súngay ang kalabŕw. Cut the horns of the
carabao. Půputúlan ko nang súngay ang usŕ. I shall cut off the stag's
horns. Půputlŕn dŕw nya nang buntňt ang áso. He says he will cut off
the dog's tail. Sinakyŕn námin ang bangká ni Hwŕn. We rode in Juan's
canoe. Sakyan mň ang bangka ng itň. Get into this canoe. Hwag mů ng
saláhan ang iyo ng mangŕ pagpások sa eskwčlhan. Don't skip going to
school, Don't play hookey; but: Sinanglan nyŕ ang singsěng. He missed
the ring (in the juego de anillo). Hwag mů ng sanglŕn ang usŕ. Don't
fail to hit the stag. Samáhan mo si Pédro. Go with Pedro. Sayawan
mň kamě, Hwána. Dance for us, Juana. Sinigawŕn nang páre` ang kanyŕ
ng munisilyň. The priest yelled at his sacristan. Sinikáran nang
kabáyo ang karumáta. The horse kicked at the carriage. Siglan mň nang
álak ang bóte. Fill the bottle with wine. Untě-untí mo ng subúan ang
pitsňn. Feed the squabs little by little. Sinugátan sya ni Pédro. He
was wounded by Pedro. Sinukláyan nya ang kanya ng anŕk. She combed
her child's hair. Sulátan mo si Pédro. Write to Pedro. Tinabúnan na
ni Pédro ang húkay. Pedro has already filled up the hole. Tagalan mň
ang pagkábitbit nang tablŕ. Keep holding the board that way. Tagalan
mň ang pagtitira díto sa ámin. Stay here with us a long time. Tagpian
mň ang báro ng itň. Mend this shirt. Tagpuan mň nang iba ng káyo ang
kaluwángan nang sáya. Fill out (literally: cause to meet) the width
of the skirt with other cloth. Tamnan mň nang manga púno-ng-nyňg ang
bakúran. Plant the yard with cocoanut trees. Tinanúran nya ang báhay sa
boň ng magdamŕg. He guarded the house all night. Hwag mů ng tanggapŕn
nang úpa ang kaybígan ko ng iháhatid mň sa estasyňn nang trčn,
sapagkŕt akň ang ůúpa sa iyň. Don't take any fare from my friend whom
you will bring to the railroad station, for I shall pay you. Tapunan
mň ang bóte. Cork up the bottle. Hwag mň ng tawánan si Hwŕn. Don't
laugh at Juan. Tawágan mo si Bathála`. Call on the Lord. Tinayuan nyŕ
nang kamálig ang bakúran. He erected a granary in his yard. Tigasan
mň ang lúto nang halayŕ. Cook the jelly hard. Tinirhŕn nya akň nang
tinápay. He left some bread for me. Tirhŕn mo akň nang inúyat. Leave me
some molasses; but: Hwag mň ng tirahŕn ang báhay na iyŕn. Don't live in
that house. Ang báhay na iyňn ay ang kanya ng tinětirahŕn. That house
over there is where he lives. Tinulínan nya ang paglákad. He hurried
his pace. Tulísan mo ang tasŕ nang lápis. Sharpen the point of the
pencil. Untian mň, Pédro, ang ibíbigay mň ng damň sa kabáyo. Give the
horse less grass, Pedro. Ůupŕn nang manga panaúhin ang manga bangků
ng itň. The guests will sit on these benches. Orásan mo ang iyo ng
pagkáin. Have your meals at stated times. Utángan mo nang salapí
si Pédro. Borrow money from Pedro. Oóhan mo ang tanňng. Answer the
question in the affirmative. Niwŕwalisŕn niyŕ ang sahěg. She is
sweeping the floor.

Other roots: akmŕ`, ámot, apňy, balŕt, báya`, báyad, bigŕy, bendisiyňn,
búti, dagán, retráto, gámit, gawŕ`, gupět, halimhěm, hatěd, háwak,
higŕ`, hitsŕ, húkay, húlog, íngat, kamět, kantŕ, labŕs, lagŕy, lálo`,
lápit, lígaw, ligtŕs, limňs, mulŕ`, pagakpŕk, palět, panhěk, pások,
prubŕ, puntŕ, putňk, sabŕy, sáboy, sagása`, sákit, salákay, silakbň,
subň, súbok, sunňd, sunggŕb, soňt, táli`, táma`, tánga`, tángan,
tíbay, tibŕ`, tingěn, túbo`, tugtňg, túlad, túlog, túlong, tungtóng,
umpisŕ, úpa, útos, wisěk.

(a) From derived words: Sya y tinagilíran ni Pédro. Pedro hit him in
the side (ta-gílid, § 523), but: Tinaligdŕn ni Hwŕn si Pédro pagdadaŕn
nitň sa kanya ng harapŕn. Juan turned away from Pedro when the latter
came before him. Tinalikdŕn ni Hwŕn si Pédro. Juan turned his back
on Pedro (talíkod, § 523).

(b) Irregularly without accent shift before the suffix: Áki
ng binitáwan (or: binitíwan) ang bóte. I let go my hold on the
bottle. Bitíwan mo ang lúbid. Let go of the rope. Dinaánan siyŕ nang
isa ng silakbň nang gálit. A fit of anger came upon him. ... nang
isa ng masamŕ ng pagiísip. An evil thought came to him. Dinŕdaánan
sya nang isa ng malakě ng kalungkútan. A great grief is upon
him. ... nang pagkaulňl. He is under an attack of madness. Cf. daanŕn,
above. Minatáan nang bágo ng táo ang aswŕng. The young man looked
round for the vampire. Matáan mo ang magnanákaw. Keep an eye open
for the thief. So from: sčrmon.

(c) From root with accent shift (so that the total shift is two
syllables): Ang utusŕn nang kapitŕn ay tinamaŕn nang bála. The
captain's orderly was hit by a bullet. Ang lulňd ni Pédro ay tinamaŕn
nang bála. Pedro got shot in the shin. Tinamaŕn nang kulňg (nang
lintěk) ang isa ng púnu-ng-manggŕ. A mango tree was struck by the
thunder (by lightning). Tamaŕn ka nang lintěk! May the lightning
strike you! (curse.)

375. The local passive is formed from the root with pag- when it
corresponds to an active in which mag- is contrasted with -um-
(§ 351) or when the local relation, especially of person for whom,
is highly explicit: pag-putúl-an, pag-pů-putúl-an, p-in-ag-putúl-an,
p-in-ag-pů-putúl-an. Examples: Ang pagsakŕy sa kabáyo ay hindí magaŕ
ng pagarálan kung salbáhe ang kabáyo. Riding horseback is not easy
to learn if the horse is unruly. Hindí káya ni Hwŕn ang kanya ng
pinagŕarálan. Juan's studies are too hard for him. Pagbŕbalikŕn
kitŕ. I will come back to you. Pagbalikŕn mo akň. Come back to
me. Ang útang ni Maryŕ ay pinagbayáran nang kanya ng kapatěd na
babáye. Maria's debt was paid off by her sister. Ang áki ng kapatěd
na laláki ang pinagbilhŕn ko nito ng báhay. I sold this house to my
brother. Napatěd ang lúbid na kanya ng pinagběbiyabúhan. The rope
on which he was swinging broke. Ang pinagharángan kina Hwŕn ay isa
ng lugŕr na malápit sa manggáhan sa daŕ-ng-Balíwag. The place where
Juan and his company were held up was a spot near the mango-grove
on the Baliuag road. Pagharían mo ng mabúte ang pulň ng itň. Rule
righteously over this island. Paghasáan mo nang manga pangáhit ang
hasaŕ ng itň. Use this whetstone to sharpen razors on. Ang pinaghatdan
kň nang gátas ay maláyo`. The place to which I delivered the milk was a
long way off. Sa pasíga ng itň y walŕ ng lugŕr na pinaghůhubarŕn nang
damět. At this beach there is no place for undressing. ang pinagibhŕn
the point of difference, the difference. Pagingátan mo ng dalhěn ang
túbo ng kristŕl na iyŕn, sapagkŕt baká magkŕputňl-putňl iyŕn kung
hindí ka maíngat nang pagdadalŕ. Carry that glass tube carefully,
because it might get smashed if you are not careful about the carrying
it. Pinagkabyawŕn nilŕ ang lugŕr na itň. This place is where they
pressed sugar-cane. Ang pinagkŕkabyawŕn námin ay isa ng lugŕr na
mataŕs káy sa tubúhan. The place where we press sugar-cane is a place
higher than the cane-field. Pagkabyawŕn ninyň nang tubň ang bágo ng
kabyáwan. Press the cane in the new press. Pagkŕbyawŕn nilŕ ang bágo
ng tayň ng kabyáwan. They will press sugar-cane in the newly-erected
press. Ang hwátaw ang sya mň ng pagkánan. The Chinese bowl is what
you are to eat from. Si Pédro ang pinagkúnan nang manga kasangkápa
ng itň. Pedro is the one from whom we got these tools. Si Migčl ang
pinagkůkúnan nya nang kwŕlta ng pangbilč nang kalabŕw. Miguel is the
one from whom he gets money to buy carabao. Ang pagkúnan mo nang pálay
ay ang sáko ng may kúlang. The place for you to take rice is the sack
that is already broken. Hwag mň ng paglaruwŕn, Hwŕn, ang kutěng,
sapagkŕt baká mo iyŕn mŕbúlag. Don't play with the kitten, Juan,
for you might inadvertently blind it. Paglarwan mň ang bóla. Play
(with the) ball. Ang kutěng ay nŕbálot sa pinaglŕlaruwŕn nya ng
damět. The kitten got wrapped up in the piece of cloth with which it
was playing. Pagmasdan mň ang bwŕn. Look carefully at the moon. Hwag
mň ng pagputúlan nang ano mŕn ang sangkála ng iyŕn. Don't cut anything
on that cutting-block. Pinagsalitaŕn ni Hwŕn ang kanyŕ ng manga báta
ng kapatěd. Juan gave his little brothers a talking-to.

Similarly: bintŕng, daŕn, darŕs, dasŕl, háti`, hinála`, katŕm, kublě,
patŕy, pílit, sábi, silbě, sísi, tagpň`, tipŕn, úsap.

(a) From a phrase: pinagsa-ulŕn (sa ulč`).

(b) From a derived word: Mangŕ pinagpěpětagánan ko ng ginoň! Respected
sirs, Dear sirs (in oral or written address).

(c) Irregularly without accent shift: pinagdaánan (daŕn), cf. § 374,b.

(d) With extra accent shift, corresponding to active with mag- (1):
Pagputulŕn mo, Hwŕn, nang manga usbňng ang kalabása. Cut a bundle of
shoots from the pumpkin, Juan.

As bitěw lacks the accent shift before -an (§ 374,b), the form with
pag- and shift of one syllable belongs here: Pinagbitiwan nyŕ ang
manga manůk na kanya ng tángan. She let go of all the chickens she
was holding.

(e) With reduplication of the root, corresponding to the active with
mag- r (§ 354): pinagsisiglŕn (silěd).

(f) With both extra accent shift and reduplication, corresponding to §
355: Pinagdŕdadagukŕn nya ang manga kaáway niyŕ. He was dealing blows
to his enemies right and left (dágok a blow with the fist).

(g) From doubled root (cf. the active, § 356): pinagtůtulůng-tulúngan
(túlong).

376. The local passive with pang- corresponds to actives with mang-:
pa-mutúl-an, pa-mů-mutúl-an, p-in-a-mutúl-an, p-in-a-mů-mutúl-an.

Saŕn ang pinanggalíngan mo?--Ang pinanggalíngan ko ay an
báya-ng-Mayníla`. Where have you come from?--I come from Manila. Ang
manga pinítak na kadátig nang sápa` ay sya nyŕ ng pinanggágapásan
(or: sya nyŕ ng pinamůmutúlan nang pálay). The sections of the
rice-field bordering on the ditch are the ones he is cutting rice
from. Pinangitlugŕn nang manňk ang kahň ng itň. The hen laid its eggs
in this box. Hwag mň ng pamitasŕn nang búnga ang átis na nása tabě
nang balňn. Don't pick the fruits from the atis tree by the side of
the well. Siya kň ng paměmitasŕn nang búnga ang byábas na nása gitná
nang bakúran. I shall pick fruits from the guava tree in the middle
of the yard. Ali ng lugŕr ang iyo ng pinamutúlan nang damň? Which
place did you cut grass from? Sinundó ni Pédro ang kapatěd na babáye
sa báhay na pinanŕnahían. Pedro fetched his sister from the house
where she was working as seamstress. So also from: tálo, tiwála`.

(a) With pang-hin- the local passive corresponds to the active
with mang-hin- (§ 357,b); the reduplication affects the hin- which,
theoretically, we may regard as part of the underlying word. "Magáral
ka ng mabúti at panghinayángan mo ang mahalagŕ ng panahňn," sinábi ni
Hwŕn sa kanya ng anŕk. "Study hard and take account of the precious
time," said Juan to his son. Káylan pa kayá panghěhinayángan nang
manga táo ang manga áni ng taňn-taň y nŕsěsírŕ nang luktňn o nang
túyot? When will the people at last regret the harvests that are
every year destroyed by locusts or by drought? Pinanghinayángan nilŕ
ang nálubog na bangkŕ`. They were sorry about the canoe that had
sunk. Pinanghěhinayángan námin ang marámi ng búhay na ginúgol nang
báyan sa pagtatanggňl sa katwíran. We regret the many lives lost by
the country in the defense of its rights. (sáyang); similarly from
gantě: panghigantihŕn.



(10) Special static words.

377. With S -an special static words are formed from oxytone roots,
without the irregularities described in § 334. In meaning they fall
into two types, which, however, are not always clearly distinct.

(a) They express an action by two or more actors, a kind of plural of
root words of the type described at § 341,3,a. Ang ŕlísan nang manga
aluwáge ay sa lúnes nang hápon. The leaving of the carpenters is
fixed for Monday afternoon. ang ěnúman a drinking party. Ang ěyákan
nang manga báta` ay nárinig ko sa kalsáda. I heard on the street
the crying of the children. Ang kŕlabúgan nang manga nalaglŕg na
nyňg dahilŕn sa malakŕs na hángin ay nárinig hanggŕng sa maláyo ng
lugŕr. The thud of the cocoanuts that were thrown down by the strong
wind was audible for some distance away. Ang kŕlasíngan nang manga
kwaltŕ ng laglŕg sa bulsŕ ni Hwŕn ay sya ng nakŕgísing kay Pédro. The
rattling of the coins falling from Juan's purse was what woke Pedro
up. Ang kantáhan nang manga íbon ay ginágawŕ nila kung umága. The
birds sing together in the morning. Ang kůrútan nilŕ sa nilúto ko ng
isdŕ` ay lubhŕ ng madalŕs. They often pinched pieces out of the fish
I had cooked. Ang litsúnan nila Hwŕn ay hindí nátulňy. The barbecue
of Juan and his friends did not come off. Ang luksúhan nang manga
luktňn ay totoň ng maiiklč`. The leaps of the small grasshoppers are
very short. Ang pŕgakpákan nang manga táo pagkaraŕn nang talumpáte`
ay lubhŕ ng mahába`. The applause of the people after the speech
was very long. Ang pintásan ni Hwána at ni Maryŕ ay parého ng hindí
totoň. The criticisms of Juana and Maria make of each other are
equally untrue. Ang kanyŕ ng manga lalagyŕn nang tuba` ay půnúa ng
lahŕt. His containers for the sap are all full. Ang kanila ng sŕkáyan
sa trčn ay sa linggň nang umága. They are all to take the train Sunday
morning. Naparoňn akň kagabč sa isa ng sŕyáwan. I went to a dance last
night. Ang sěgáwan nang manga báta` sa kalsáda ay nakabíbingě. The
shouting of the children on the street is deafening. ang tŕhúlan
nang manga áso the baying together of the dogs. ang tŕyáan a staking,
a putting up of stakes (ang tayŕ` a stake in a bet or game). Nárinig
sa isa ng ůpúan nang manga Intsčk ang kwčnto ng itň. This story was
heard in a gathering of Chinamen.

Similarly, from: kaluskňs, patŕy, pustŕ, putŕk, salitŕ`, sugŕl, takbň,
tipŕn, tugtňg, umpňk.

From derived word: Ang hěmagsíkan sa Filipínas ay natápus nŕ. The
fighting in the Philippines is over. (as though from a form -himagsěk,
see § 518).

This formation underlies further derivatives, see §§ 352,d. 357,a.

(b) The other meaning of the formation S -an is that of an object
viewed, rather explicitly (cf. § 380), as the scene of plural action
or the place of things. So: ang běgásan the place where hulled rice
is made, threshing floor for rice, rice-mill. Si Hwŕn ang běgáyan
nilŕ nang kanilŕ ng manga ninákaw na aláhas. Juan is the one to whom
they give the jewelry they have stolen. ang bělangúan a prison (ang
bilanggň` a prisoner). Ang kanila ng bělíhan nang pálay ay sa kamálig
ni Hwŕn. The place where they buy rice is in Juan's storehouse. Ang
dŕánan nang manga sundálo ay ang landŕs na itň. The usual route of
the soldiers is this path. ang hampásan the whipping-bench. Ang manga
magkakápit-báhay na si Andrčs, Kulŕs, at Pédro ay nagtŕtálo tungkůl
sa kaní-kanilŕ ng hanggáhan nang bakúran. The neighbors Andrés,
Nicolás, and Pedro are disputing about the boundaries of their
grounds. Sa pagítan nang báya-ng-Balíwag at báya-ng-San-Migčl ay
máy-roo ng isa lámang na hintúan ang manga naglálakad. Pedestrians
have only one stopping-place between the towns of Baliuag and San
Miguel. Si Pédro ay sya ng hěráman nang salapě` nang manga táo sa
báyan. Pedro is the one from whom the people in the town borrow
money. ang hungkúyan a machine for fanning the pounded rice. Ang isa
ng taburéte lámang ang ginawá nila ng lŕgáyan nang kanila ng manga
sombréro, sapagkŕt ang sabitŕn ay punú nŕ. A chair was all they had
to lay their hats on, for the hat-rack was already full. Ang lŕngúyan
sa ílog ay bumábaw. The swimming-place in the river grew shallow. ang
lŕrúan the playground. Ang lěbángan sa manga báta` sa manga bapňr na
naglálayag sa dágat nang Pasífiko ay lubhŕ ng malilínis na lugŕr. The
play-rooms for children on the steamers that ply on the Pacific Ocean
are very neat places. ang nyúgan a cocoanut grove. Ang pŕtáyan nang
bábuy ay nasúnog. The pork slaughter-house burned down. ang pŕtísan
a factory for shrimp-sauce (patěs, made of the small shrimp called
hípon). Ang báro ng punět-punět ay sya nyŕ ng ginawŕ ng tagpían nang
manga retáso. She sewed the patches all on to the ragged blouse. Ang
kanila ng tagpúan ay ang daŕ-ng-Balíwag. Their meeting-place is the
Baliuag road. ang tanyágan an exhibition, exposition. ang timbángan
a pair of scales. ang tindáhan a shop, store (ang tindŕ the goods
for sale in a store).

Similarly, from: aklŕt, bantŕy, bigtě, biniyŕg, bukŕs, buntňt, dasŕl,
gawŕ`, hagdŕn, higŕ`, hukňm, kabiyŕw, kublě, kulňng, liběng, luksň,
manggŕ, pintŕ, pintň, pitŕg, punlŕ`, sampŕy, sanglŕ`, simbŕ, sahŕn,
tanggŕp, tarangkŕ, tirŕ, upň`.

A very few show irregularities: eskwčl-han, paá-nan, tňto-hánan the
truth (totoň); the secondary accent is lacking in damú-han, tubú-han;
irregular in kumpěsál-an.

From a compound word: úbus-lŕkásan (úbos-lakŕs).

From a phrase: sŕ-lawáhan changeable, fickle, as though from sa lawŕ;
for the latter see § 345.

From derived words: ang ěnumínan place for drinking-water, water-shelf
(inum-ěn, § 367,a); ang sělangán-an the east (silang-ŕn, § 379.

378. The formation (1) S -an is made from barytone roots and
corresponds in meaning to (a) in the preceding type; the suffix is
added as a rule without irregularity.

Ang ěbígan ni Maryŕ at ni Hwŕn ay natápus sa pagtatampúhan. The
love-affair of Maria and Juan ended through their contrariness. Ang
lŕyásan nang manga sundálo ay hindí maampŕt nang kanila ng manga
pinúno`. The deserting of the soldiers could not be stopped by their
officers. Sa miyčrkules ang lůlánan nilŕ sa trčn. On Wednesday they
are to embark on the train. Ang půlútan nilŕ nang kwaltŕ ay náhintň`
nang márinig nilŕ ang putňk. Their scrambling for money ceased when
they heard the crash. ang těpúnan a meeting.

So: háyag, húni, káin, kílos, sáma, túloy.

Irregular in form is: Ang tŕwánan nila Hwŕn ay náhinto dahilŕn sa
kanila ng pagkŕgúlat. The laughter of Juan's crowd stopped on account
of their surprise (táwa).

Irregular in meaning, as though local instead of plural, is: Ang
gulňd na itň ay sya ng sělángan nang áraw. This hill is the place
where the sun rises (sílang).

379. The form from barytone roots corresponding to the type in §
377,b and often also to type a, is: (2) -an, without irregularities:
Ang agawŕn nang manga unggň` ay magulň. The grabbing by the monkeys
was confused. ang basahŕn a reading-room, library. Bulakŕn Bulacán
(name of a province, if from búlak a cluster of capoc cotton). Ang
maliět na úna ng itň ay sya kň ng duruŕn nang manga aspilč. This little
cushion is where I stick my needles. ang haluŕn a mixing-vessel. ang
hugasŕn a place for washing dishes. ang hulihŕn nang isdŕ` a
fishing-expedition. Si Hwána ay isa ng babáye ng kutuhŕn. Juana is a
lousy woman. Ang labanŕn nang manga Tůrkos at Inggléses ay kasulukúyan
pa lámang. The warfare between the Turks and the English is only now
taking place. Ang kanila ng lakarŕn ay lubhŕ ng masayŕ. Their walking
party is very merry. Ang kanila ng lusungŕn ay hindí natápus na mabúte,
sapagkŕt marámi sa manga táo ay matamŕd. Their cooperative scheme did
not turn out well, because most of the people were lazy. Ang murahŕn
ni Hwána at ni Maryŕ ay nárinig nang boň ng báyan. The revilings of
Juana and Maria were heard by the whole town. Sa báya-ng-San-Migčl
ay nangyáre ang isa ng nakawŕn. In the town of San Miguel a robbery
took place. Ang tablŕ ng itň ay ginawŕ ng pakuŕn nang manga báta`
sa manga páku ng aspilč na kinúha nilŕ. The children used this board
for hammering in the tacks they had taken. Ang bútas nang bangka`
ay sya ng ginawŕ ng pasakŕn ni Pédro nang pagkět. The leak in the
canoe was where Pedro calked in the wax. ang putikŕn a clay-pit; a
person or thing covered with mud. Ang isŕ ng labangŕn ay syŕ ng nagěng
silangŕn kay Hesůs. Jesus was born in a manger; ang kátri ng silangŕn
ni Hwána the bed in which Juana's children were born. Sya y sugatŕn
He is wounded; ang sugatŕn the wounded (as, after a battle). ang
sulatŕn a writing-desk. Ang sílong nang báhay ay sya nyŕ ng taguŕn
nang manga kasangkápan sa pagaalwáge. The ground-floor of his house
is where he keeps his carpentry tools. Ang kuwŕrto ng itň ay sya kň
ng tulugŕn. This room is my sleeping-place. Ang tulugŕn nang báhay
ni Hwŕn ay nása bubungŕn. The sleeping-quarters in Juan's house are
on the roof. ang utusŕn a servant, a waiter, an orderly.

Similarly: áral, búkol, dáhil, hárang, hása`, íhaw, ílaw, káin, lúto`,
sábit, sábong, tápon, túlis, úlo, úpa, óras.

With irregularities: hŕlamanŕn garden, flower-pot (haláman) has
secondary accent on the first of three syllables; angkŕn the members of
a given person's immediate family, not including himself: ang angkŕn
ni Hwŕn Krůs Juan Cruz' wife and children (from -ának, cf. mag-ának,
§ 358,a); kwayanŕn, beside kawayanŕn (kawáyan).

With irregularity and reduplication: ka-kan-ŕn (-káin).

380. (1) -an with irregularities forms static words denoting objects by
the action for which they are locally used or by the things they are
the place of; the local meaning is less explicit, and the object has
more fixed identity apart from its local relation than is the case in
the preceding forms. This distinction is very clear where both forms
occur from the same root (cf. kulňng, lagŕy); it may disappear where
only one form is made (sagíngan, atísan have the same value as nyúgan).

ang atísan a grove of atis trees. Ang asuhŕn nang báhay ni Pédro ay
nasúnog. The chimney in Pedro's house burned out. Bigasŕn ang kanya ng
sináing. Her boiled rice has raw rice in it, is not done. Ang kanya ng
damět ay pulahŕn. Her clothes are all red. Sya y isŕ ng pulahŕn. He
is a Red, a member of the Red party. ang silángan the east, also
Silángan Silangan (name of a town). ang taanŕn a fugitive. ang manňk
na talúnan the defeated game-cock; lúto ng talúnan a dish in which the
defeated game-cock is cooked with ginger. Similarly: bákod, bubňng,
dúlo, gawŕ`, hanggŕ, harŕp, kulňng, labŕng, larň`, likňd, lulňd, paŕ,
ságing, tintéro.

(a) Some roots which begin with l and most of those whose irregularity
involves contraction, have reduplication in this form: Ang lalagyŕn
ko nang librň ay ang mésa ng itň. This table is my bookstand. Ang
uupŕ ng itň ay gŕgamítin nang manga panaúhin. The guests will sit
on these seats. Ang uupŕ ng itň ay sa háre`. This seat is for the
king. lulurŕn shin. Similarly: hihigŕn (higŕ`), lalamúnan (lámon),
lalawígan (láwig), sasakyŕn (sakŕy), titirhŕn (tirŕ).

(b) From derived words: Napútol nilŕ ang púno-ng-káhoy sa
kalahatían. They cut the tree at the middle. Nalagňt ang lúbid sa
kalahatían. The rope broke at the middle. (kalaháti`, § 519). Ang
bútas nang bangkŕ` ay nása tagilíran. The leak in the canoe is in
the side. Nilagyŕn ni Hwŕn nang tagilíran ang kanya ng báhay. Juan
put side-walls on his house. (tagílid, § 523).

381. D -an, with accent shift if the root is barytone, forms words
denoting an object which is an imitation or miniature of such and
such: ang dagat-dagátan a lake; ang kabá-kabayúhan a play-horse; ang
tao-taúhan a manikin, doll; the pupil of the eye; ang baril-barílan
a toy-gun. Further derivatives from this formation, see § 352,d.

382. Many roots here treated, because felt, as simple, end in -an:
bangŕn, batalŕn, dalandŕn, hagdŕn, haláman, kánan, kápitan, kapitŕn,
kawáyan, laráwan, pagítan, pakuwŕn, pangnŕn a hand-basket, pasígan
(Pásig is the name of a river), pinggŕn, saguwŕn a paddle, sangkálan,
tampalásan, tahílan.

383. Similar formations with pang- prefixed add the element of
meaning present in the transient formations with mang- and pang-;
they have secondary accent on the prefix, as though it formed part
of the underlying word:

(a) pŕng- -an (cf. § 377): Ang kahň ng itň ay sya ng pŕngitlúgan nang
manňk. This box is the place where the hen lays its eggs.

(b) pŕng- (1) -an (cf. § 378): Si Hwŕn ay sya ng paráti ng pŕmunúan
nang básag-úlo. Juan is the one who always starts the fighting.

(c) pŕng- (2) -an (cf. § 379): pŕngaserahŕn boarding-place.



II. Secondary groups.

1. Prefix si-.

384. The prefix si- is used only in active transient forms, and
is always preceded by mag- or nag-: mag-si-pútol, mag-sě-si-pútol,
nag-si-pútol, nag-sě-si-pútol. In meaning these forms are explicit
plurals of the primary active forms. Occasionally the plural value
is emphasized by infixation of -ang- into the mag- or nag-.

385. From the simple root the explicit plural with si- corresponds to
the primary actives with -um- or, in many cases, with mag-. Nagsiílag
sila sa báyan nang itň y pasúkin nang manga kaáway. They all fled from
the town when the enemy entered it. Ang manga áso ay nagsěsilámon. The
dogs are eating. Magsiligáya kayň. Rejoice, Be glad. Ang manga langgŕm
ay nagsěsilipumpňn (or: nagsěsilípon) sa nápatay nila ng gagambŕ. The
ants are crowding all over the spider they have killed. Nagsěsipútol
sila ng lahŕt nang tubň nang kamě ay dumatěng. They were cutting
sugar-cane when we arrived. Magsipútol kayň nang tubň. Do you all
cut sugar-cane.

So from: akiyŕt, alěs, dálaw, dalň, datěng, húli, húsay, iyŕk, kantŕ,
kápit, lakě, lípat, lúlan, pígil, puntŕ, pustŕ, sáyad, tinděg, tugtňg,
túlong, túngo, uwě`.

(a) Plurality emphasized: Nangagsiúrong ang manga sundálo. The soldiers
retreated. So also from alěs.

386. This formation is made from the root with pag- prefixed when
it corresponds to primary actives with mag- in contrast with -um-
(§ 351). Nagsěsipagáral silŕ. They are studying. Magsipagáral
kayň. Study. Ang manga báta` ay áyaw magsipagbíhis. The children don't
want to change their clothes, get dressed up. Ang manga langgŕm ay
nagsěsipagípon (or: nagsěsipaglípon) nang pagkáin kung tagáraw. The
ants store up food in the hot season. Magsipagpútol kayň, Pédro, nang
káhoy na gŕgamítin sa paglilitsňn. Pedro, do you folks cut some wood
to be used in the barbecue. "Magsěsipagpútol dŕw sila nang dikóla,"
ang sábi ni Hwána. "They say they are going to cut off the trains
of their skirts," said Juana. Napsipagpútol nang buhňk ang manga
Intsčk. The Chinamen cut off their queues. Nagsěsipagpútol nang buhňk
ang manga Intsčk na si Yčng at Tsŕng, nang sila y datnŕn ko sa kanila
ng tindáhan. The Chinamen Yeng and Chang were cutting their queues
when I came upon them in their shop. Nagsipagtipěd ang sundálo. The
soldiers economized.

So from: basŕ`, dasŕl, hintň`, larň`, pasiyŕl, sísi, sugŕl, takbň,
tinděg, yukayňk.

(a) Plurality emphasized: nangagsipagtakbň.

(b) The pag- is used when the underlying word is a derived word: Ang
manga sundálo ng Tagálog ay nagsipaghimagsěk. The Tagalog soldiers
revolted (-himagsěk, § 518). Nagsipaghěmagsíkan silŕ. They fought each
other (hěmagsíkan, § 377,a). So from: agawŕn (§ 379), -bugtúngan (§
377,a), labanŕn (§ 379), takbúhan (§ 377,a). Cf. § 406.

(c) The same formation with accent shift of the root corresponds
to primary actives with mag- (1), § 353. It occurs from: bálot,
lákad, líbot.

387. With pang- prefixed to the root, this formation corresponds to
the primary active with mang- (§ 357). Magsipamangká táyo. Let's all
go canoeing. Magsěsipamiyábas kamě sa manga gúbat na malápit. We are
going guava-picking in the jungles near here. Si Pédro at si Hwŕn ay
umáhon sa bundňk úpang magsipamútol nang káhoy na asanŕ`. Pedro and
Juan went up into the mountains to cut asana. Ŕáhon kamě sa bundňk at
magsěsipamútol kamě nang muláwin. We are going up into the mountains
to cut molave.

So from: barěl, hína`, hingě`, noňd, tahímik, tálo.

(a) With pang-hin-, cf. § 357,b: Silŕ y nagsipanghimagsěk. They made
a revolution.



2. The prefix paki-.

388. The prefix paki-, which forms simple static forms, transients,
and abstracts, expresses that the subject of the sentence performs
or undergoes the action along with others that were involved in it
before,--this either through interference or by favor of someone else.

389. Simple static form: ang pakikinábang the obtaining of profit
(kinábang) in trade with others; also: holy communion. So pakipútol,
in command (cf. § 341,3,c), cut as a favor.

390. The active transient and the abstract have the forms: maki-pútol,
makě-ki-pútol, naki-pútol, nakě-ki-pútol, paki-ki-pútol, i. e. the
reduplication affects the syllable -ki-.

Ang kapitŕn ay nagpadalŕ nang isa ng sekréta sa lúpŕ nang kaáway
úpang makiramdŕm nang kanila ng kělúsan. The captain sent a spy to
the enemy's country to spy out (literally: perceive along) their
movements. Makěkikáin akň kina Lílay. I am going to Lilay's for a
meal. Si Pédro ay nakikáin kina Hwŕn. Pedro took a meal at Juan's
house. Nakipútol akň nang damň sa lúpŕ ni Mariyáno. I obtained
permission to cut grass from Mariano's land. Sila y nŕrňroňn sa búkid
ni Pédro at nakěkipútol nang damň. They have gone to Pedro's field
and are cutting grass there by his permission. Pumaroňn ka t makipútol
nang damň. Go and ask them to let you cut some grass. Pakikipútol díto
ni Hwŕn nang damň ay singilěn mo ang útang nya. When Juan asks to be
allowed to cut grass here, dun him for his debt. Sila y nakisúno kay
Mariyŕ. They had Maria let them live in her house with her.

So: sakŕy, sáma, túloy, túlog.

(a) With accent shift of the root (§ 337): makialŕm look after someone,
nose into others' affairs (álam).

391. The root has pag- when the formation corresponds to a primary
active with mag- in contrast with -um- (§ 351): Nakěkipagáway ang
báta ng itň, kanyŕ` hindí dápat pahintulúta ng madalŕs na manáog
nang báhay. As this boy gets into fights, he should not often be
allowed to leave the house. Nakipagáway si Pédro. Pedro got into the
fight. Nasaktŕn si Hwŕn sa kanya ng pakikipaglarň`. Juan got hurt
when he joined into the game. So from: bunň`, dalamháti`, lában,
tagpň`, úsap.

(a) From derived words: Hwag kŕ ng makipaglŕngúyan, Hwŕn, at baká
ka malúnod. Don't go swimming with the crowd, Juan, I am afraid
you might get drowned. Makěkipaglŕngúyan ka bŕ, Pédro? Are you
going along swimming, Pedro? Nakipagluksúhan si Hwŕn nang idáos ang
manga larň`. Juan entered in the jumping-contest when the games were
held. Similarly, from: pustá-han, siksík-an, takbú-han. All these
belong under § 377,a. See also § 427,b.

(b) Corresponding to primary active with mag- (1) § 353: Nakipagbabŕg
si Pédro. Pedro got into a free fight (bábag).

392. The root has pang-, corresponding to a primary active with mang-:
Sya y hindí pinahintulútan sa kanya ng pakikipamútol nang tubň. His
request to be allowed to cut cane was not granted.

393. In the passive the paki- expresses that the subject undergoes the
action along with others, often as a favor on the part of the actor. So
direct passive: paki-putúl-in be cut, as a favor on the part of the
one who does the cutting; the recipient of the favor is the speaker.

394. In the instrumental passive the meaning is similar; sometimes,
however, the instrumental passive is used with the person asking the
favor as agent.

Maárě mo ngŕ ng ipakihúlog sa kuréyo ang súlat? Will you please
mail my letter for me? (literally: Can my letter please be
thrown-along-with-yours or thrown-as-a-favor into the mail by
you?). Ipinakihúlog ni Pédro ang áki ng súlat. Pedro mailed my letter
(along with his or as a favor) for me. Ipinakěkihúlog ko lámang kay
Pédro ang áki ng manga súlat. I am asking Pedro to mail my letters
for me; here ipinakěkihúlog is not that thrown as a favor, but that
asked to be thrown as a favor. Ipakěkipútol daw ni Hwŕn ang buhňk
nang alílŕ nya ng Intsčk. Juan says he will ask someone to cut his
Chinese servant's hair; ipakěkipútol is here that asked to be cut as
a favor, and the relation of asking is the only thing expressed by
the instrumental (rather than the direct) passive.

395. The root has pag-, corresponding to § 351: Ipakipagpútol mo ngŕ`
nang buhňk ang guntěng na itň, úpang áti ng masubúkan ang húsay nang
talěm. Please use this shears in cutting hair, so that we may test the
quality of the edge (genuine instrumental passive). Ipakěkipagpútol
daw nya akň nang búhň` pagáhon nya sa bundňk. He says he will cut
some bamboo for me when he goes up into the mountains. (genuine
instrumental passive). Ipinakipagpútol akň ni Hwŕn nang tubň. Juan had
someone cut me some sugar-cane (literally: I was asked to be cut for
as a favor). Ipinakěkipagpútol daw ni Hwŕn si Pédro nang labňng. Juan
says he is having someone cut bamboo-shoots for Pedro.

396. Local passive with paki-: pinakibalitáan was ascertained by the
actor getting people to tell him as a favor.

(a) From shifted root: pinakialamŕn.

(b) With pag- (cf. § 352): pinakěkipagtakbuhŕn.



3. The prefix ka-.

397. Secondary forms with the prefix ka- are of most varied meaning;
the principal types express association of two individuals or groups
and involuntary action. In accented form the prefix kŕ- expresses
chiefly accidental occurrence. In certain passives associated with
this group the prefix itself does not appear.



(1) Simple static forms.

398. Words with prefix ka- denote objects (or groups) standing in
such and such a relation to another object (or group). Sya y áki
ng nagěng kabaláe. He (she) has become my fellow-parent-in-law,
i. e. Our children have intermarried; the form ka-baláe merely
makes explicit the element of relation present in the simple word:
Si Bantůg ay áki ng baláe. Bantug's son (daughter) has married my
daughter (son). Ang manga áso ay nása kabilá nang bákod. The dogs
are on the other side of the fence (the simple -bilŕ` does not occur;
the idea of other side is always envisaged as relative). Ang búkid ni
Hwŕn ay karátig nang kay Pédro. Juan's field borders on Pedro's. Ang
mésa ng itň y kakúlay nang kahňn. This table is of the same color
as the chest. Si Hwŕn ang kalában ny Andrčs sa larň ng dáma. Juan is
Andres' opponent at checkers. Kamatŕ si Hwŕn ni Pédro. Juan and Pedro
took to each other from first sight. Ang tagpí nang báro ni Pédro ay
hindí kamukhá nang báro`. The patch on Juan's blouse does not match
the blouse. ang áki ng kapatěd na si Hwŕn my brother Juan. ang áki
ng kapútol na si Hwŕn my brother Juan; ang kapútol nang tubň a piece
(broken off) of the sugar-cane. Ang kasánib nang áki ng baněg ay ang
baněg ni Manuwčl. Manuel's sleeping-mat and mine overlap (kasánib
one of two things of which one overlaps the other). walŕ ng kasangkŕp
without accompaniments, trimmings, affixes. Si Mariyáno ang kasunod kň
ng lumŕlákad sa kalsáda. Mariano was the one who was walking behind
me on the street; ang kasunod kň ng naparoňn sa simbáhan the one who
followed me in going to church (kasunňd one of two persons one of whom
is following the other). ang katúngo the person one is dealing with,
the other party. Si Pédro ang kaugáli nang kanya ng kaybíga ng si
Hwŕn. Pedro has the same habits as his friend Juan.

Similarly from: áway, báyan, biyŕk, bunň`, ribŕl, harŕp, kilála, kláse,
lákip, larň`, pantŕy, partč, sabuwŕt, sáli, sálo, sáma, súno`, tapŕt,
timbŕ`, untě`, úsap, walŕ`.

Divergent in meaning are katáo (§ 255), kagabě, kahápon (§
259). Cf. also § 520.

(a) From derived words: Syŕ y isa kň ng kamagának. He is a relative
of mine (mag-ának, § 358,a), and kamakalawŕ (§ 259, from maka-lawŕ,
§ 453).

(b) From a phrase: ang kasa-ng-báhay a person dwelling in the same
house with another, a housemate (isŕ ng báhay).

(c) From shifted root (§ 337): Si Hwŕn ay kagalět ni Pédro at ni
Kulŕs. Juan is at odds with Pedro and Nicolás. ang kanyŕ ng kagalět
the person or persons with whom he is at odds. Si Pédro ang nagěng
kasirá ni Hwŕn. It is Pedro with whom Juan is angry. Hindí ko katalň
si Párě Hwŕn. I don't play winning-and-losing games with Father
Juan. Similarly from álam, sáma.

(d) The root is reduplicated in a few cases: Si Pédro ang áki ng
kababáyan. Pedro is my fellow-townsman (beside kabáyan); katutúbo`
native, ingrown, inborn, inherited.

399. kŕ-ka-. With accented reduplication of the prefix these forms
emphasize the incompleteness of the correlative object: Kŕkapútol
lámang na tubň ang áki ng nŕkúha. I got only a little piece of the
sugar-cane. So also kákauntč`.

400. ka- R. With accented reduplication of the underlying word ka-
forms words expressing the recent completion of an act; they are
used impersonally (§ 77) or as conjunctive attributes. Kaŕáway pa
lámang ni Hwŕn sa kanya ng kalarň`. Juan has only just now quarreled
with his playmate. Kabŕbángon ko. I have just got up. Kagŕgáling sa
báyan nang kapatěd ko ng babáye. My sister has just come back from
town. Kahíhiga ko pa lámang. I had just then lain down. Kalŕlarú ku pa
lámang sa báta`. I have just finished playing with the child. Kapůpútol
ko pa lámang nang yantňk. I have only just now cut some rattan. So
gísing, káin.

(a) ka-pag- R, with the usual value of pag- (§ 369, etc.): Kapagpůpútol
lámang ni Hwŕn nang kawáyan. Juan has just come from cutting bamboo.

(b) ka-pang- R, corresponding to active with mang- (§ 357): kapamůmútol
(pútol).

401. ka- D. With doubling of the root ka- has causative value: it
expresses that which causes such and such an involuntary action,
specifically, such and such an emotion: Ang dumatěng na bálang
ay katákot-tákot ang dámi. The locusts that came were frightful in
quantity. So from hiyŕ`, takŕ. Vowel-contraction in kŕwáwa` pitiable,
piteous (for ka-áwa-áwa`). Slightly divergent in meaning is karáka-ráka
(§ 265,5).

402. In a different use ka- has the form kay- in some words; these
formations express a remarkable degree of a quality; they are used
impersonally (§ 76), as predicate (§ 247), occasionally as conjunctive
attributes: kaálat kayálat what saltiness! (of water); kay-asůl what
blueness! Katáyog nang púno-ng-niyňg na iyňn! How tall that cocoanut
tree is! Kayuntě` nang ibinigŕy nya ng laruwŕn sa ákin! How few toys
he gave me! So: kay-dámot, ka-rámot, ka-rúnong, ka-itěm, kakínis,
ka-láyo`, ka-muntě`, ka-pulŕ, ka-tabŕ`, kay-tipěd.

(a) With reduplication of the root, this form refers to the quality
in an explicit plurality of objects: kaiitčm what blackness! (of
several things); Kalalaměg nang paŕ nang manga báta`! How cold the
children's feet are!

(b) With doubled root these forms intensify the quality: Kaydámot-dámot
nang báta ng itň! What a terribly stingy child! (kaydámot, karámot
what stinginess! ang dámot stinginess).

403. A few forms with accented ka- prefixed to the root envisage the
accidental nature of the reciprocal relation: Ang manga damět na
itň ay kásiya sa baňl. These clothes will fit into the trunk. Akň
ang kásundo` ni Pépe sa pagpapalarň` nang bčsbol sa manga báta`. I
am at one with Pepe as to letting the children play baseball. Hábang
akň y nagdádaŕn, kátaon namŕ ng isinábuy nya ang túbig. He threw out
the water at the very time, it happened, that I was passing by. ang
kŕtiwála` a confidential agent, manager, overseer.

The words káluluwŕ and kápuwŕ`, which resemble this formation, seem
to be felt as simple roots and have been so treated here.



(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

404. k-um-a-. An active with -um- is made from ka-úsap as underlying
word: Si Hwŕn ay kumŕkaúsap sa ákin. Juan was talking at me,
haranguing me.

405. mag-ka- pag-ka-ka-. Actives with mag- and abstracts with pag-
r from underlying words with ka- express a partial affection of the
actor or of a group of actors; ka- here has its involuntary force:
the actor is not a rational and voluntary agent. Nagkaroňn ako nang
trabáho kanína ng umága, sapagkŕt nagpasakŕy akň sa trčn nang manga
kamátis nang tátay ko. I was kept busy this morning, for I attended
to the shipping by train of my father's tomatoes. Nagkaroňn sya
nang gálit. He harbored ill-feeling. Nagkagulň ang manga Amerikáno
sa pagdatěng nang Dňytsland. The Americans were surprised at the
coming of the "Deutschland". Nagkagustň sya ng kumáin nang súha`. He
conceived a desire of eating grape-fruit. Nagkŕkalípon ang manga
langgŕm sa púto. The ants are getting all over the cake. Akň y
nagkamálay pagkaraŕn nang ilŕ ng sandalě ng paghihimatŕy. I returned
to consciousness after a few moments' fainting-spell. Nagkapálad si
Hwŕn na makaratěng díto ng maluwalháti`. Juan was fortunate enough to
get back here safe and sound. Ang pakwŕn ay nagkasíra`. The watermelon
got partly spoiled. Ang manga ságing ay nagkasíra` sa kalaúnan nang
pagkŕtágo` sa lalagyŕn. Some of the bananas got spoiled on account
of the long time they were kept stored. Nása simbáhan. silŕ nang
magkasúnog. They were at church when a fire occurred. Twi ng papasúkin
ko sa kurŕl ang manga kalabŕw ay nagkákawalá silŕ. Every time I put
the carabao into the corral, they get away.

So: búkol, hinňg.

406. mag-ka- (1) pag-ka-ka- (1). Accent shift in this formation serves
various uses:

(a) It may be due to the root: Si Hwŕn ay nagkasakět noo ng bwŕ ng
nagdaŕn. Juan had a sickness last month. Si Hwŕn ay hindí makapútol
nang káhoy, sapagkŕt mahínŕ pa sya dahilŕn sa pagkakasakět. Juan cannot
cut wood, because he is still weak on account of his recent illness.

(b) It expresses plurality: Magkákaputňl ang manga tubň. The sugar-cane
will get broken in numbers. Nagkaputňl ang manga tubň sa lakŕs nang
hángin. The sugar-cane broke in quantity under the violence of the
wind. Nagkákaputňl ang manga tubň sa kalakasŕn nang hángin. Much
sugar-cane is breaking under the force of the wind.

So also from lúnod.

(c) The form is really a simple active with mag- from an underlying
word of the form ka- (1), § 398,c; three words of this kind occur:
Sila y nagkagalět. They quarreled. ang pagkakagalět the quarrel. Ang
Hapňn at ang Tsína ay nagkasirŕ`. Japan and China had a break. Silŕ
y nagkatalň. They played a winning-and-losing game. Nagkatalu nŕ ang
manga nagsúsugŕl. The gamblers have lost and won, have finished their
winning-and-losing game.

In accordance with § 356, the underlying word is doubled with
distributive plural meaning: Sila ng ápat ay nagkagá-kagalět. The
four of them all got angry at one another.

Similarly, an explicit plural with mag-si-pag- is formed (cf. §
386,b): Nagsipagkasirá silŕ. They had a falling out.

407. (a) mag-ka- r pag-ka-ka- r. The reduplication of the root
expresses repeated action in a form with retraction of accent and
irregular insertion of ng after the prefix: Sya y nagkŕkangdadápa`. He
kept falling on his face.

(b) mag-ka- D pag-ka-ka- D. Doubling of the root seems a more regular
expression of the same value: nagkŕkaumpňg-umpňg.

408. Special static words with mag-ka- are simply dual collectives with
mag- (§ 358,a) from underlying words with ka- (§ 398): Ang baněg ni
Hwŕn at ni Pédro ay magkaánib (or: magkasánib) sa pagkŕlátag. Juan's
and Pedro's sleeping-mats overlap each other as they are spread. ang
magkabaláe a pair of persons related by intermarriage of their
children (more insistent on the relational element, but practically
equal to magbaláe, § 358,a). Ang dalawa ng manňk ay magkabukňd nang
kulungŕn. The two chickens were in separate crates. Ang búkid ni Hwŕn
at ni Pédro ay magkarátig. Juan's field and Pedro's border on each
other. Si Pédro at si Hwŕn ay magkapantŕy. Pedro and Juan are of the
same height. ang magkapatěd two brothers or sisters, a brother and
a sister. ang magkapútol na si Andrčs at si Rafayčl the brothers
Andrés and Rafael. Magkapútol kamě ni Hwŕn nang báro`. Juan and I
have blouses made of the same cloth. dalawŕ ng bágay na gŕgawi ng
magkasunňd two things that are to be done one after the other.

(a) From kababáyan (§ 398,d): dalawŕ ng estudyŕnte ng magkababáyan
two students from the same town.

409. mag-ka-ka. As the explicit plural corresponding to these duals
reduplicates the underlying word (§ 358,b), the syllable ka- is
repeated in this meaning: ang magkakapatěd a group of three or more
brothers and (or) sisters; in the same meaning ang magkakapútol. So
also from: bukňd, sáma, súno`.

(a) The form magkababáyan (§ 408,a) rejects the extra reduplication,
and is therefore plural as well as dual: tatlo ng estudyŕnte ng
magkababáyan three students from the same town.

410. mag-kŕ- pag-ka-kŕ-. The transient with mag- and abstract with
pag- r from underlying words with kŕ- have the accidental value of
the latter prefix, usually with a dual reciprocal meaning. Sa kabilŕ
ng bandŕ mo ibwŕl ang púno ng iyŕn, sapagkŕt kung irč ay ibuwal kň y
baká magkádagan ang dalawa ng púno`. Fell your tree in the direction
away from me, so that if I fell this one, the two trees won't fall one
on top of the other. Magkŕkŕdagŕn ang dalawa ng púno ng itň, kapag
hindí mo ibinwŕl sa kabilŕ ng bandŕ iya ng pinůpútol mo. These two
trees will fall one on top of the other, if you don't make the one you
are cutting down fall the other way. Nagkádagan ang dalawa ng báta`
nang mahúlog sila sa hagdŕn. The two children landed one on top of
the other when they fell from the ladder. Ilabas mň sa búkid, Kulŕs,
ang dalawa ng sáko ng pálay na nagkŕkŕdagŕn na nása bangŕn. Nicolás,
take out to the field the two bags of rice that are lying one on top
of the other in the granary. Ang pagkakáiba nang ugáli ni Pédro at ni
Hwŕn ay gáya nang pagkakáiba nang túbig at nang apňy. The difference
in character between Pedro and Juan is like the difference between
water and fire. magkáhiwalŕy part from each other (by force of
circumstances, of two people). Ang ikinahátě nang palayňk ay ang
masamŕ ng pagkakálagay nitň. What caused the rice-pot to break was
the bad way it was placed. magkŕmáyaw harmonize. ang pagkakásabŕy the
happening at the same time of two events. Sya y nagkŕsála. He sinned
(against the moral order, God, etc.) Ang pagkakŕsála kay Bathála`
ay pinarůrusáhan sa infiyčrno. Sinning against God is punished in
hell. Běbilhin kň ang kabáyo ng iyňn, kung magkŕkŕsya ang áki ng
kwaltŕ. I shall buy this horse, if my money is sufficient. Walá sila
ng pagkakásundň`. The two don't agree on anything. ang pagkakátaňn
the coincidence in time of one event with another, of two events. ang
pagkakátayň` the standing up together (even of more than two people).

(a) Somewhat different are kung magkŕbihíra` at odd times; kung
magkágayňn when things turn out thus, when this is the state of
affairs. So also, with static value: Ang magkábila ng dúlo nang lápis
ay matúlis. Both ends of the pencil are sharpened.

411. mag-kŕ- D pag-ka-kŕ- D. With doubled root plurality is expressed:
Nagkŕhiwá-hiwalŕy ang manga dáhun nang librň. The leaves of the book
came apart. Ang manga ginágawá nya ng pangísip nang manga makabuluhŕ
ng fétsa nang istňriya ay ang pagkakŕsunňd-sunňd at pagítan nilŕ. He
remembers the important dates of history by their sequence and their
intervals.

(a) With accent shift, from a barytone root: Nagkŕputol-putňl ang
katawŕn nang táo ng nŕsagasáan nang trčn. The body of the man who
was run over by the train got all mangled. Nagkŕkŕputol-putňl ang
katawŕn nang bála ng táo ng mŕsagasáan nang trčn. The body of a person
run over by a train is cut to pieces. Magkŕkŕputol-putňl ang túbo ng
kristŕl na iyŕn kapag iyo ng ibinagsŕk. If you drop that glass tube,
it will break into a thousand pieces.

412. ka- (1) -in, k-in-a-. The simple direct passive is formed from
an underlying derived word with ka- with normal meaning. So from
ka-lában, ka-úsap.

(a) A special static word corresponding to those in § 366 is ang
kinákapatěd the child of one's godparents (from ka-patěd).

From it are derived the dual collective (§ 358,a) magkinákapatěd a
pair of such, and the plural (§ 358,b) magkikinákapatěd three or more,
as a group.

413. i-ka- i-k-in-a-. The instrumental passive with prefix ka-
has a specialized meaning: it expresses transiently, an inanimate,
or at least irrational and involuntary, object or circumstance which
causes such and such an action: and this latter action is in turn
also involuntary or out of control of the actor (as, for instance,
the ability to do a thing), see § 432 ff.

Ang kawalŕn ni Andrčs nang hánap-búhay sa báya ng itň ay sya nyŕ ng
ikinaalěs. Andrés' inability to make a living in this town is what
forced him to leave. Ang malě ng anyň nang pulúbe ay siyŕ ng ikinaáwa`
sa kanya ni Hwŕn. The bad condition of the beggar was what made Juan
pity him. Ang pagsasakŕy nang kutséro nang manga táo ng may sakět
na nakŕhŕháwa ay sya ng ikinabáwě nang kanya ng pahintúlot. The
driver's taking people with contagious diseases into his carriage
was what caused his license to be withdrawn. Ang ikinahárang nang
mangŕ naglálakŕd ay ang pagkáalam nang manga tulisŕn na silŕ y may
dalŕ ng kwaltŕ. What caused the wayfarers to be held up was the
robbers' happening to know that they had money with them. Ikinaháte
ni Hwŕn sa búnga ang kanya ng laséta. Juan's knife enabled him to
cut the betel fruit. Ang pagkasála nya sa singsěng ay ang hindí niya
ikinakúha nang ganti ng pála`. His missing the ring is what kept him
from winning the prize. Yňn ay áki ng ikinalúlungkňt. I am sorry,
I am sorry to hear that. Ang pangungublě nang manga sundálo ay sya
nilŕ ng hindí ikinamatŕy. The soldiers' keeping in hiding is what
saved their lives. Ikinapútol nang yantňk na pamálo` ang pagkŕpálu
kay Hwŕn. The caning Juan got broke the rattan that was used on
him. Ikinapůpútol nang marámi ng tubň ang malakŕs na hángin. The
strong wind is making much sugar-cane break. Ikapůpútol nang manga
sangŕ nang káhoy ang malakŕs na hángi ng itň. This strong wind will
cause many branches of trees to break off. Ikapůpútol nya sa manga
kawáyan ang paggúlang nitň. The aging of the bamboo plants will force
him to cut them down. Ang pagkalúnod nang Kastíla` ay ikinatákot nang
tatlň ng magkakaybígan. The drowning of the Spaniard frightened the
three friends. Ang kanyŕ ng pagmamasěd sa manga tála` sa gabě ay sya
nyŕ ng malakě ng ikinatútuwŕ`. His observation of the stars at night
is his great source of pleasure.

Similarly, from: bingě, búhay, búti, gálit, hángo`, húlog, káya,
lípat, lúgi, túlong, walŕ`.

414. i-pag-ka- i-p-in-ag-ka. With pag- this instrumental passive
corresponds to the active with magka- (§ 405). The reduplication of
the durative forms affects the ka-.

Ang ipinagkagusto nyŕ ng kumáin nang sorbétes ay ang kainítan. It
is the heat which makes him want to eat ices. Ipagkákamatŕy nang
manga manňk ang masamŕ ng túbig. The bad water will make the chickens
die. Ang kalamigŕn sa tagulŕn ay sya ng ipinagkŕkamuň nang túbig sa
ílog. The cold weather in winter is what makes the water in the river
congeal. Baká ipagkawalá nang manga manňk sa kulungŕn ang pagpapapások
mo doňn niyŕ ng áso. See that your putting that dog into the enclosure
doesn't make the chickens try to get away. Ipagkákawalŕ nang bíhag
ang pagkŕbalíta` sa kanyŕ nang parúsa ng kŕkamtan nyŕ. The captive's
being told of the punishment he will get, will make him try to
escape. Ipinagkawalá nya sa kůlúngan ang pagpapahírap sa kanyŕ. Their
torturing him made him escape from his confinement. Ipinagkákawalŕ
nya sa bělanggúan ang masamŕ ng pagpapakáin sa kanya díto. The bad
food they gave him in the jail made him try to escape.

415. Similarly, with accent shift this passive corresponds to the
active with mag-ka- (1), § 406,b. Ipinagkŕkabalč` (or: ipinagkŕkaputňl)
nang manga sangŕ nang káhoy ang bagyň ng itň. This hurricane is
breaking off many branches of trees. Nang ipagkaputňl nang áki ng
manga tubň ang hángin ay nalungkůt akň. When the wind broke down my
sugar-cane I was dismayed. Ipinagkaputňl nang manga tubň ang malakŕs
na hángi ng nagdaŕn. The recent strong wind broke down much sugar-cane.

Similarly: ipinagkasakět (sákit).

416. Special static forms with i-ka- are made from the numerals,
with occasional contraction, forming ordinals and fractions: ikaánim
ikánim the sixth; ikaápat ikápat the fourth, a fourth, a quarter;
ikalawŕ the second; ikalimŕ the fifth; ikapitň the seventh; ikatlň
the third. Cf. § 347,a.

(a) The ordinal corresponding to isŕ one is however the independent
root úna first; half is kalaháte`, § 519.

(b) From phrases, of course, the higher numbers: ikaisa-ng-daŕn
hundredth; ikaisa-ng-laksŕ` millionth; ikaisa-ng-líbo thousandth;
ikasa-m-pů` tenth; ikalabi-ng-isŕ eleventh; ikadalawa-ng-pů` twentieth;
ikadalawa-ng-pů-t-isŕ twenty-first.

417. i-kŕ- i-k-in-ŕ-. The instrumental passive from the root with
accented kŕ- differs from that with unaccented ka- (§ 413) in that
the action or occurrence caused is not only involuntary but accidental
and entirely out of the control of the actor (see § 458 ff.).

Ang ikinŕgůgusto kň sa kayibígan ko ng si Hwŕn ay ang kanya ng mabaět
na ugáli`. What makes me have a liking for my friend Juan is his
lovable character. Ang ginawá nya ng paggugupět sa manga retáso ng
itinŕtágo nang kanya ng nánay ay sya nyŕ ng ikinŕpálo`. His cutting up
the patches his mother was saving is what made it necessary to thrash
him. Ang ikinásakay nyŕ sa kabáyo ng bara-barŕ ay ang kawalŕn nya
nang iba ng kabáyo. What made him get on the wild horse was his lack
of other horses. Ikinátahol nang áso ang pagkádapá ni Hwan. Juan's
falling down made the dog bark.

So also from: iyŕk, pátag.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Ang pagkátahol nang áso ay sya ng
ikinágising nang natůtúlug na báta`. The barking of the dog was what
made the sleeping child wake up. Ikŕtŕtawa nyŕ ang iyo ng sŕsabíhin. He
won't be able to keep from laughing when you say that. Ikinŕtŕtawŕ ni
Hwŕn ang sinábi ni Pédro. What Pedro said makes Juan laugh in spite
of himself.

418. Corresponding to primary actives with mag- contrasted with -um-,
and with mang-, we should expect pag- and pang- to be retained before
the root in these formations; the only example is: ikinápagtirŕ,
corresponding to magtirŕ, in contrast with tumirŕ (§§ 348. 351).

419. ka- (1) -an, k-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with ka- is
used when the action is an involuntary one, especially an emotion,
of a rational actor, or when the actor is inanimate or irrational.

Ang hulihŕn nang manga kinagalítan ni Patúpat ay idináos nang manga
gwŕrdiya-siběl kagabč. The arrest of the people who have incurred
Patupat's anger was carried out by the gendarmes last night. Kahiyaŕn
mň ang táo ng matandŕ`. Reverence the aged. ang kinahulúgan nang báta`
the place from which the child fell. Ang bintána ng iyŕn ang syŕ ng
kahůhulúgan nang báta`, pag hindí mo isinarŕ. The child will fall
out of that window, if you don't shut it. Baká ninyo kalunúran ang
ílog, manga báta`. See that you don't get drowned in that river,
children. Ang kanya ng kalůlunúran ay ang ílog na itň. He will
get drowned in this river some day. ang báhay na kinamatayŕn the
house where someone died, ang báhay nang kinamatayŕn the house in
which someone died, the house of the bereaved family. Kinapatirŕn
nang lúbid ang lugŕr na malápit sa dúlo-ng-bandŕ-ng-kaliwŕ`. The
rope broke at a point near the left-hand end. Ang kapŕpatirŕn nang
sinúlid ay malápit sa buhňl. The place where the thread will break
is near the knot there. Kinatakútan nya ang báhay na pinagpatayŕn sa
kúra`. He was afraid of the house where the priest was killed. Ang
kinatŕtakútan nang manga báta` ay ang núno`. The children are afraid
of the ghost. Katakútan ninyň ang núno`. You had better be afraid
of ghosts. Kinatamarŕn ni Hwŕn ang kanyŕ ng pagaáral. Juan became
neglectful about his studying. Nang katamarŕn ni Hwŕn ang kanya
ng pagaáral ay malápit na syŕ ng makatápos nang karéra. When Juan
became lazy about his studies, he was already near the end of his
course. Katŕtamaran nyŕ ang kanyŕ ng pagaáral, pag binigyŕn mo syŕ
nang marámi ng salapč`. He will be lazy about his studies, if you
give him too much money.

Similarly from: buwísit, íwan, kíta, walŕ`.

(a) With shifted root: Isa ng pulúbe ang kinaŕawaŕn ni Hwŕn. It was
a beggar who aroused Juan's pity.

420. pag-ka- (1) -an, p-in-ag-ka- (1) -an; pag-ka- (2) -an, p-in-ag-ka-
(2) -an. Local passives with pag- before the ka- involve a plurality
of actors. The durative reduplication affects the ka-; barytone roots
have an extra accent-shift.

Ang kináin nang usŕ ay malakě ng pinagkŕkagustuhŕn nang
manga Ilóko. The Iloco are very fond of the contents of deers'
stomachs. Pinagkŕkalipumpunŕn nang manga langgŕm ang púto. The ants
are swarming all over the cake. Ang pinagkamatayŕn nang manga kambčng
ay ang lugŕr na itň. This is the place where the goats perished. Hwag
mň ng dalhěn sa bundňk ang manga manňk, sapagkŕt iyň y kanilŕ ng
pagkŕkamatayŕn. Don't take the chickens into the hills, for they
would die there.

Barytone roots: Pinagkatakutŕn nilŕ ang báhay na pinagpatayŕn
sa kúra`. They were afraid of the house where the priest was
killed. Pinagkŕkatakutŕn nilŕ ang manga mababagsěk na háyop. They
are afraid of wild animals. Hwag mň ng ipamalíta` ang nŕkíta nátin
díto, sapagkŕt baká ang lugŕr na itň y pagkatakutŕn. Don't tell what
we have seen here, for this place would be feared. Pagkŕkatakutŕn
nilŕ ang lugŕr na itň, pag nŕláman nilŕ ang nangyári ng paghaharangŕn
díto. They will be afraid of this place when they know of the hold-ups
that occurred here. ang pinagkatalunŕn that which was the occasion
of winning by many (tálo).

421. ka- S -an. Special static words, corresponding to those with S
-an (§ 377) are formed with prefix ka- from oxytone roots; in meaning
they are collectives and abstracts of quality: ang kasŕyáhan gladness;
Ang katŕmáran ni Patrísiyo ay katutúbo` sa kanya ng láhi`. Patricio's
laziness is inborn in his family. So from the roots: baět, banŕl,
damdŕm, dangŕl, duwŕg, lagŕy, lungkňt, luwŕng, mahŕl, malě`, matŕy,
pintŕs, sangkŕp, tungkňl, tuwŕ`, tuwěd.

Divergent in meaning is ang Kapampángan a Pampanga, if from pangpŕng.

The secondary accent is lacking, irregularly, in kalayáan (layŕ`); with
contraction in kayilángan, kaylángan (beside kailángan, from ilŕng).

(a) This latter word underlies an active with mang-, an abstract with
pang- r, and a simple direct passive: nangŕngayilángan requires; ang
pangangayilángan need, necessity; Kŕkayilangáni ng magdaŕn si Pédro
ríto bágu sya umalěs. Pedro will have to come here before he leaves.

(b) From a derived word, with the secondary accent irregularly
placed: Boo ng báyan ay nagdíwang sa kapangŕnákan ni Risŕl. The whole
country celebrated Rizal's birthday; also: ang áraw nang kapangŕnákan
birthday,--from panganŕk (§ 347).

422. ka- (2) -an. Barytone roots have, in the same sense, an accent
shift of two syllables, corresponding to § 379. Boň ng kabahayŕn ang
nŕkíta námin sa gitnŕ nang daŕn. We saw a whole set of household goods
in the middle of the road; also: ang kabahayŕn a house containing
several dwellings. Marámi sa manga táo ang nakŕkěkilála nang kanila
ng karapatŕn, dátapuwat nakalělímot nang kanila ng katungkúlan. Many
are the people who know their rights but forget their duties. Ang
karamútan nang páre` ay nagěng kasabihŕn. The stinginess of the priest
is proverbial. Ang katakutŕn sa Dyňs ay isa ng kabŕítan. Fear of
the Lord is a virtue. Ang pagbibigŕy nang sigarělyo ay isa sa manga
matatandŕ ng kaugaliŕn sa Filipínas. Giving cigarettes is one of the
old customs in the Philippines. ang kawikaŕn a proverb.

So from abála, áraw, búlo, gámit, húlog, íbig, lángit, payápa`, síra`,
tápos, útos.

With contraction: kahariyŕn, kaharyŕn (hári`), and, if from táo,
katawŕn body.

(a) From the latter word there is an abstract of action, with pang-
r: ang pangangatawŕn physique (cf. pananamět, etc., § 357).

423. ka- (1) -an. Corresponding to the formation (1) -an (§ 378), the
collective-abstracts of this type with ka- have formal irregularities
and, where there is any contrast (e. g. mahŕl), less explicit and
more specialized meaning than the preceding two groups.

ang kaalátan saltiness (of water). Sa gabě ng itň ang kabilúgan nang
buwŕn. The fullness of the moon is tonight. Ang kadalamhatían ay
isa ng damdámi ng hindí nŕrŕrápat sa táo. Grief is an emotion not
becoming to a man or woman. ang karunúngan wisdom. ang kahangalŕn
foolishness (ang hangŕl a fool). ang kaibhŕn the difference. ang
kalinísan cleanness, cleanliness. ang kamatsingŕn monkey-tricks,
naughtiness. ang kamuráhan cheapness. Sawě` ang kanya ng kapaláran. His
luck is bad. Sa kapanayŕn nang ulŕn kung tagulŕn ay hindí masiglŕ ang
báyan. The town is not cheerful during the unabated rains of the rainy
season. Ang manga táo y marámi ng kasalánan. People have many sins. ang
kasamaŕn badness. kasawiŕn poor position, awkwardness. kasinungalíngan
falsehood, a lie. kasipágan diligence. Ang desgrásya ng nangyári
kay Hwŕn ay isa ng hampŕs nang katalagahŕn. The misfortune which
has come to Juan is a blow of fate. Ang kanila ng pagílag ay hindí
katapángan. Their fleeing was not a brave act. ang boň ng kataúhan
all mankind. ang katipúnan a meeting, Katipúnan a secret society
organized against the Spaniards; a member of this. kayabángan pride.

So from: bába`, bábaw, bigŕt, buhángin, búhay, búti, dalŕs, dámi,
dámot, dániw (if karaniyúwan is so to be analyzed), dilěm, ginháwa,
gúbat, hába`, hína`, hírap, iklě`, ínit, lakŕs, lakě, laměg, lápad,
láon, liět, lóko, lúnod, lupět, mahŕl, mangmŕng, párang, fiyčsta,
pulň`, sakěm, salŕt, salbáhi, salúkoy, taŕs, Tagálog, tahímik, tákaw,
tákot, talíno, tampalásan, tangháli`, túlin, túnay, totoň, ulňl,
walŕ`, yáman.

(a) From a phrase: Iyň y kawala-ng-hyaŕn ni Pédro. That was a shameless
action of Pedro's (walŕ ng hiyŕ`).

(b) From derived words: ang Kakapampangánan the Pampanga country
(Kapampángan, § 421).

ang boň ng kamaganákan nina Krůs, Bantňg, at iba pŕ the whole
relationship of the Cruz's, Bantogs, and so on; ang boň ng kamaganákan
ni Pédro Vyóla the whole family of Pedro Viola (magának, § 358,a).

ang kapangyaríhan power (-pangyári, as though by § 347).

424. ka- r (1) -an, ka- r (2) -an. With reduplication of the root and
accent shift of one syllable for an oxytone root, of two in barytone
roots, ka- and -an form special static words denoting something
surprising or provocative of such and such an emotion.

Itů y kagagawŕn ni Hwŕn! This is some of Juan's work! cf. Itů y gawá
ni Hwŕn. Juan did this, made this. Ang pagkáupo ni Pédro sa sůgálan ay
kagagawŕn nang isa nyŕ ng kaybígan. Pedro's sitting at the gaming-table
was the work of one of his fine friends. Ang pŕtáya ng nangyári kagabě
ay kagagawŕn ni Pédro. The killing which occurred last night was some
of Pedro's doing. So: katuturŕn a correct outcome (tuwěd).

Barytone roots: Ang katatakutŕn nang báta` ay ang núno`. The thing
that arouses the child's fear is a ghost. Ang kanya ng katatawanŕn
ay ang unggň`. His source of laughter is the monkey. ang salitŕ ng
katatawanŕn a jest-word, a funny expression.

425. With secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying
word, ka- and -an form also words denoting one of two reciprocal
actors. This is the form for oxytone roots, ang kaběgáyan a person
with whom one exchanges gifts. Si Hwána ay siya ng kabůlúngan ni
Maryŕ. Juana is the one Maria whispers with. ang kahampásan one of
two who perform mutual flagellation, kahěráman one of two who borrow
from each other. kaěnúman person one drinks with. kakŕlabítan one of
two who touch each other. Ang kapŕtáyan ni Hwŕn ay si Pédro. Juan is
engaged in a mortal conflict with Pedro. Ang kapŕtíran ni Hwána nang
sinúlid ay ang kanya ng kaybíga ng si Maryŕ. Juana cuts thread with
her friend Maria. ang kasŕlitáan the person with whom one converses. Si
Hwŕn ay kaůlúlan ni Pédro. Juan and Pedro fool each other. ang kaůpúan
one of two who sit together.

426. Barytone roots add accent shift of one syllable. Ang kahůlúgan nya
nang súha` ay ang kanyŕ ng kapatěd. The one with whom he takes turns at
dropping down grape-fruit from the tree is his brother. ang kahůníhan
one of two birds that chirp at each other. ang kaěbígan one of two
who love each other. ang kakŕínan one of two who eat together. Si
Hwána ay siya ng kapůtúlan ni Maryŕ nang kukň. Juana and Maria cut
each other's fingernails. ang kasůlátan one's correspondent. ang
katŕlúnan one's opponent in a dispute.

(a) The shift is due to the root in: Si Maryŕ ay syŕ ng kaŕbútan ni
Hwána nang manga mabangů ng bulaklŕk. Maria and Juana hand each other
fragrant flowers (as in some ceremony or game).

(b) With contraction and lack of secondary accent: ang kayibígan,
kaybígan a friend (contrast kaěbígan above).

(c) In a few instances barytone roots have accent shift of two
syllables without secondary accent. Si Maryáno ay kahatakŕn ni Kulŕs
nang lúbid. Mariano is pulling at the rope against Nicolás. ang
kamurahŕn one of two who curse at each other (with meaning ordinarily
peculiar to the shifted root, § 337). Sumúlong at Kasamahŕn Sumulong
and Company. kasulatŕn one's correspondent (equal to kasůlátan,
above). Ang katuruŕn ni Pédro ay ang báta ng si Hwŕn. Pedro and little
Juan are pointing at each other.

427. These formations serve as underlying words of a few derivatives:

(a) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r (§ 352): ang
pagkakayibígan the joining in friendship of two people.

(b) Secondary active with maki- from the preceding: makipagkayibígan
win one's way into someone's friendship, become friends with someone.

(c) Dual collective with mag- (§ 358,a): Si Pédro at si Hwŕn ay
magkahěráman nang sambalílo at sandŕlyas. Pedro and Juan lend each
other hats and sandals. magkaěbígan a pair of lovers. magkaybígan a
pair of friends.

(d) Where the dual value of the underlying form is weak, explicit
plurals of the preceding with mag- r (§ 358,b) occur: ang magkakaybígan
a group of three or more friends. ang magkakasamahŕ ng si Pédro, si
Hwŕn, at si Andrčs the party consisting of Pedro, Juan, and Andrés. ang
magkakasamahŕ ng sina Pédro the party of Pedro and his followers. Ang
magkakasamahŕ ng nagsipagpasyŕl ay sina Maryŕ, Hwána, Pédro,
at Kulŕs. The party that went for a walk consisted of Maria, Juana,
Pedro, and Nicolás. Ang magkakasamahŕ ng napasa húlo` at napaluwásan
ay sinŕ Mariyáno, Pépe, at Kulŕs at sina Pédro, Húlyo, at Andrčs. The
groups that went upstream and downstream were, respectively, Mariano,
Pepe, and Nicolás and Pedro, Julio, and Andrčs. Ang tatlo ng manňk na
ytň y magkakasamahŕ ng inihatid díto, ang ibŕ y magkakabukňd. These
three chickens were brought here together, the others each by itself.

428. kŕ- (1) -an, k-in-ŕ- (1) -an. Local passives with kŕ- denote the
place where someone or something happens to be. Hwag kŕ ng kumibň`
sa iyň ng kinŕdňroonŕn. Don't stir from the spot (where you happen
to be). Sa alě ng bandŕ ang kinŕdňroonŕn nang báya-ng-Kamálig?--Sa
bandŕ ng kaliwŕ`. In which direction is the town of Camalig?--Toward
the left. Ang báya-ng-Balíwag ay ang kinŕmahalŕ ng úna ng úna nang
pálay. The town of Baliuag was the first place where rice got dear. Ang
kŕpŕpatayŕn sa táo ng iyŕn ay ang bigtíhan. This man will end on the
gallows. Ang báya-ng-Balíwag ang iyu ng kŕtůtungúhan pag tinuntůn mo
ang landŕs na iyŕn. You will get to the town of Baliuag if you follow
that path.

Similarly from: bíngit, búrol, kulňng, lagŕy, tágo`, tayň`, tirŕ, upň`.

Divergent in meaning are kinŕbukásan (§ 260) and, from a phrase,
kinŕháti-ng-gabihŕn (§ 260, háti ng gabě).

429. pag-kŕ- (1) -an, p-in-ag-kŕ- (1) -an. Local passives of this
type with pag- reduplicate the kŕ-; they refer to other local passive
relations than place in which; so: pagkŕkilanlŕn be the occasion of
showing something; pagkŕsyahŕn be the container of something that
fits in; pagkŕsunduwŕn, pagkŕsunduŕn be agreed upon.

430. Special static words with kŕ- and -an are few and differ in
meaning.

(a) Ang kŕgalítan nila Andrčs, Hwŕn, at Mariyáno ay napáwě na. The
quarrel between Andrés, Juan, and Mariano has been appeased; this
is no doubt merely a plural with S -an (§ 377,a) from the underlying
word kagalět (§ 398,c).

It forms the underlying word of a simple active with mag- and abstract
with pag- r: ang pagkakŕgalítan a quarrel (of two or more people).

(b) Si Pédro ay kŕibígan ni Maryŕ. Pedro is liked by Maria. Sina
Pédro, Kulŕs, at Hwŕn ay sya ng manga kŕibígan ni Mariyáno. Pedro,
Nicolŕs, and Juan are the ones whom Mariano likes. This is probably
a real special static word corresponding to the transient with kŕ-
(1) -an (§ 428).

Derived active with mag-: Nagkŕkŕibígan si Pédro at si Hwána. Pedro
and Juana are in love with each other, have come to like each other.

(c) Ang kŕtwáan ay náhintň` sa pagdatěng nang isa ng magnanákaw. The
rejoicing was stopped by the coming of a robber. This is, in form
at least, a plural with S -an from an underlying -katuwŕ`, which is
not known.

Derived active with mag-: magkŕtwáan rejoice together, be merry
together.

The same form is seen in kŕlingkíngan; little finger, fifth finger;
if this is from a root -lingkěng.

431. ka- (1) D -an. With doubling of the root and radical accent shift:
Kŕunŕ-unáha ng dumatěng si Hwŕn. Juan got there the very first. So:
kŕhulě-hulíhan the very last.



(3) Additional transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

432. The prefix ka- in its involuntary meaning and the prefix kŕ- in
its accidental meaning appear in an additional set of transients and
abstracts with maka-, makŕ- prefixed for the active, ma-, mŕ- for the
passives, and pagka-, pagkŕ- for the abstract. The meanings of these
forms are most varied; especially in the direct passive, where the
involuntary or accidental character of the actor sometimes reaches
the point where an actor is entirely left out of view or lacking,
and the passive borders closely on active meaning. For this reason
it will be convenient to divide the uses into a number of somewhat
arbitrarily defined groups. The forms are as follows:

433. The active forms with ka- are: maka-, maka- R, naka-, naka- R;
abstract pagka-.

The active expresses an inanimate object or circumstance causing an
emotion or feeling; the meaning, then, is the same as in the forms
with i-ka- (§ 413), except that here the thing causing the emotion is
viewed as an actor. Nakabůbúlag ang ílaw. The light is blinding. Ang
gamňt na itň ang nakaginháwa sa máy sakět. This medicine is what
relieved the patient. Itň y makapŕpáwě nang gútom (úhaw, ginŕw,
ínit, págod). This will relieve the hunger (thirst, cold feeling,
hot feeling, fatigue). Ang áwit nang manga íbon ay nakatútuwŕ`. The
song of the birds is gladdening. Similarly from: bigŕt, bingě, búti,
lasěng, ligáya, síra`, tákot.

434. The active expresses, further, an inanimate object which has got
(in the past) into such and such a condition or position.

Ang bangkŕ` ay nakaáyon sa ágos. The canoe is righted with the
stream. Ang pagkáin ay nakahandá nŕ. Dinner is served. Nakasábit sa
páko` ang áki ng amerikána. My coat is hanging on the nail. Nakasigŕng
ang palayůk nang sináing. The rice-pot is on the fire. Hindí
ko běbilhěn ang kabáyo ng iyňn, káhit na makasísiya ang áki ng
kwaltŕ. I would not buy this horse, even if my money should be
sufficient. Similarly: daŕn, lawět, táli`, túlong.

435. Very similar is the use of the active to describe an animate
actor in such and such a position (into which he has got): Nakadapŕ`
ang manga táo sa kanila ng báhay hábang lumílindňl. The people lay
prone in their houses during the earthquake. Si Pédro ay nakaháwak
sa taburéte nang sya y retratúhan. Pedro had hold of a chair when
he was photographed. Nakasakŕy ang báta ng si Hwŕn sa áso nang
sya y mŕkíta ko sa bakúran. Little Juan was mounted (i. e. riding)
on the dog when I saw him in the yard. Nakatayó si Pédro nang ákin
sya ng mŕkíta. Pedro was standing up when I saw him. Nakaupó sya sa
bangkň`. He was seated on the bench. So from: abŕng, hiléra, íkid,
kápit, luhňd, pangŕw, talungkň`, tinděg.

436. The active may denote an animate actor who is able, succeeds
in doing so and so; the involuntary element inheres in the matter of
ability, which is not dependent on the actor's will: Sa gana ng ákin
sya y makaáalěs. So far as I am concerned, he may go. Sa tigŕs nang
kanya ng loňb ay walŕ ng makabále`. There is no one (or, under the type
in § 433, nothing) can break the firmness of his will. Nakagágawŕ` ang
alílŕ nang páyong. The servant is able to make umbrellas. Nakagupět
sya nang makapŕl na damět. He succeeded in cutting thick cloth. Si
Pédro ay hindí makaháwak nang palakňl, sapagkŕt masakět ang kanya ng
kamŕy. Pedro cannot hold an ax, because his hand is sore. Naŕári ng
sya y makahigŕ`. He may lie down. Hindí ako makahingí nang kwaltŕ kay
Hwŕn. I cannot (bring myself to) ask Juan for money. Nakahúlog sya nang
isa ng nyňg sa kanya ng pagpukňl sa kumpňl. He succeeded in bringing
down a cocoanut, in his throwing at the cluster. Ang báta` ay hindí
makakáin, sapagkŕt kumáin sya nang marámi ng kakaněn. The child can't
eat because he has eaten so many sweets. Si Pédro ay hindí nakapůpútol
nang káhoy, sapagkŕt bágu ng gáling sya sa sakět. Pedro cannot cut any
wood, for he has just recovered from sickness. Sa tantyŕ raw nyŕ ay
makapůpútol na sya nang káhoy, sapagkŕt sya y malakas nŕ. He reckons
he will be able to cut wood, for he is strong again. Nakasásakay
syŕ sa kabáyo. He is able to mount the horse. Ang báta y nakasůsúlat
nŕ. The child is already able to write. Hindí ako makasúlat. I can't
write. Ang máy sakit ay nakatátayú nŕ. The patient is already able
to stand up. Hindí ako nakatípon nang manga dáhon, sapagkŕt walá ako
ng kalaykŕy. I was not able to pile up the leaves, because I had no
rake. Ang húle ng isdá ni Hwŕn ay nakawalŕ`. The fish Juan caught got
away. Similarly from: akiyŕt, balěk, báyad, dalŕ, datěng, kílos, kúha,
lákad, pások, sagňt, sigŕw, suwŕy, tahňl, takbň, tirŕ, úbos, úsap.

Abstracts: Ang mákina ay syŕ ng dahilŕn nang pagkagawá ni Pédro
nang páyong. The machine is the cause of Pedro's ability to make
umbrellas. Ang pagkasakáy nyŕ sa kabáyo ng bara-barŕ ay hindí dahilŕn
sa kanya ng tápang, dátapuwat dahilŕn sa marámi ng iba ng táo ng
nagsipígil sa kabáyo. His ability to get on the wild horse was not
due to his courage, but to the many other people who controlled the
horse. Ang kanya ng pagkatípon sa manga kalabŕw ay nanyári dáhil sa
marámi ng túlong. His success in rounding up the carabao was due to
much aid.

437. Closely bordering on the preceding type is the active,
mostly with the particle nŕ, expressing the actor of a completed
action. Nakaalěs na siyŕ. He has already (succeeded in going,
i. e.) gone away. Nakapútul nŕ si Pédro nang káhoy. Pedro has now
finished cutting wood. Si Pédro ay nakapútul nŕ nang káhoy, bágo ko
ng inutúsa ng mangigěb. Pedro had already cut the wood, before I asked
him to fetch water. Similarly from: bútas, datěng, kúha, límot, tápos.

The abstract lends itself especially to the use as absolute attribute
(§ 274): Pagkagawá nya nang bákod ay naglasěng siyŕ. When he had
finished making the fence, he got drunk. Pagkahárang nang manga
tulisŕn sa koréyo ay nagsitúngo silŕ sa bundňk. When the bandits
had robbed the mail, they took to the hills. Pagkaháte ni Hwŕn nang
manga mansánas ay umalěs sya. When Juan had distributed the apples,
he went away. Pagkahúli nang pulěs sa magnanákaw ay dinala nyŕ itň sa
bělanggúan. When the policeman had caught the thief, he took him to the
jail. Pagkapatŕy nya sa táo ng kanyŕ ng hinárang ay tumakbo syŕ. When
he had killed the man he had held up, he ran away. Pagkapútol ni Hwŕn
nang tahěd nang kátyaw ay nagdudugň` ang paŕ nitň. When Juan had cut
the spur of the rooster, its foot kept bleeding. Pagkasakŕy sa kabáyo
ay naparoňn akň sa hŕlamanŕn at pumitŕs ako nang isa ng pakwŕn úpang
áki ng kánin. When I had had my horseback ride, I went to the garden
and picked a melon to eat. Pagkasakŕy ni Hwŕn sa trčn ay lumákad ito
ng agŕd. When Juan had got on the train, it soon started to move. Ang
pagkasúnog nang báyan ay ikinalungkňt nang marámi. The people grieved
at their town having burned down. Pagkatanŕw nang unggň` sa pagňng
ay nagbalik syŕ sa púno-ng-ságing. When the monkey had looked at the
turtle, he went back to the banana tree. Pagkatáwag nang pagňng sa
unggň` ay sumunňd itň agŕd. When the turtle had called the monkey,
the latter came at once. Pagkatayó nya sa kanya ng ůpúan ay minulŕn
nya agŕd ang pagtatalumpáte`. When he had stood up from his seat he
at once began making his speech. Pagkatípon mo nang manga bayábas ay
umuwí ka. When you have piled up the guavas, go home. Pagkaúna nya
sa takbúhan ay naghintú sya. When he had got ahead in the running,
he stopped. Similarly from: alěs, bendisiyňn, gupět, hápon, ísip,
káin, kúha, lagňk, lúto`, mísa, sábi, sánay, tápos, típon, tupŕd.

438. The forms of the direct passive are: ma-, ma- R; na-; na- R.

The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active in § 436,
and denote the object directly affected by an action which an actor
is able to perform.

Hindí nya mabásag ang bóte. He did not succeed in breaking the
bottle. Sa kalakasŕn ni Páblo ay nadala nyŕ ang kabŕ ng bákal. Pablo,
with his strength, managed to lift the iron chest. Nadalŕ nang báta`
ang káhoy. The boy managed to carry the wood. Hindí madalŕ ni Pédro ang
kahňn sa kabigatŕn. Pedro cannot lift the box; it is too heavy. Hindí
ku magámit ang páyong na itň. I can't use this umbrella. Hindí nakáin
nang báta` ang matigŕs na tinápay na iyŕn. The child was not able
to eat that hard bread of yours. Nakáya ko ng buhátin ang isŕ ng
maliět na púno-ng-káhoy. I managed to lift one small tree. Nakŕkáya
ko ang pagaáral nang Ingglčs. I manage to get along with the study of
English. Nakáyas ni Pédro ang báo. Pedro managed to smooth the cocoanut
shell. Nalákad námin ang lahŕt nang daŕn. We managed to walk the whole
way. Nalělípon nang manga langgŕm ang kanila ng pagkáin. The ants
succeed in amassing their food. Hindí ko mapatŕy ang báta ng itň. I
cannot (get myself to) kill this child. Hindí ko mapútol nang kamŕy ang
bákal na itň. I can't break this iron with my hand. Mapůpútol daw nyŕ
ng wala ng túlong ang lahŕt nang kawáya ng magúlang. He says he will
be able to cut all the old bamboo without any help. Hindí nya masíra`
ang kandáro nang pintň`, káhit na iniyúbus nya ang kanya ng lakŕs. He
did not succeed in breaking the lock of the door, although he used up
all his strength. Natátalastŕs mo bŕ ang sinŕsábi ko sa iyň? Do you
understand what I am saying to you? Similarly: ágaw, akiyŕt, alaála,
ampŕt, gawŕ`, hángo`, híla.

439. Similarly, the direct passive may correspond regularly to the
active of the type in § 437 and denote an object directly affected
by an action which has been (successfully) completed by an actor.

Naáso ko nŕ sa boo ng báyan ang báta`. I have hunted and called the
child all over town. Nabálot ko nŕ ang manga librň. I have already
wrapped up the books. Nabása ku nŕ ang diyáriyo. I have finished
reading the paper. Nahampŕs ko nŕ ang báta`. I have already whipped
the child. Nahánap na nyŕ ang librň. He has already looked for the
book. Napatŕy ku nŕ ang manňk. I have already killed the chicken. Kapag
napůpútol na nyŕ ang púno-ng-káhoy ay saká mo hatákin ang lúbid na
nakatáli sa sangŕ nitň. When he is getting the tree cut, then do you
pull at the rope that is tied to the branch. Natipěd nya ang pagkáin
nang kánin. He has been saving of the rice. Natípon ko nŕ ang manga
dáhon. I have already heaped up the leaves. Natísod ku nŕ ang bakyŕ`. I
have kicked off the sandal. Naúnat ku nŕ ang baluktňt na káwad na
ibinigŕy mu sa ákin. I have straightened the bent wire you gave
me. Nausísŕ ku nŕ si Hwŕn. I have already questioned Juan. Similarly
from: ágaw, gawŕ`, ípon, íwan, líbot, sákop, siyásat.

440. We come now to direct passives which do not correspond regularly
to any active; these have their own abstracts with pagka-.

The commonest type expresses an object which undergoes or has
undergone a process due to an inanimate actor or to no actor
in particular; it differs from the simple direct passive in the
involuntary and often perfectic nature of the action. Nabále` ang
sangŕ nang káhoy. The branch of the tree is broken. Ang túlis nang
lápis ay nabále`. The point of the pencil is broken. Hwag mň ng
ilagay dyŕn ang palatňn, sapagkŕt baká mabásag. Don't put the plate
there, for it might get broken. Ang kanila ng kŕínan ay nagambála
sa pagdatěng nang manga pulěs. Their dinner-party broke up when the
police arrived. Ang boo ng báyan ay nagulň. The whole town became
riotous. Naháte` ang mansánas. The apple is in halves. Nalagňt ang
lúbid. The rope broke. Ang kanya ng dalíri` ay napáso`. His finger
is blistered. Napatěd ang lúbid. The rope broke. Ang batň ng hasaŕn
ay napiráso. The whetstone went to pieces. Napitas nŕ ang manga
bulaklŕk. The flowers have been picked. Napůpútol ang manga sangŕ
nang káhoy sa lakŕs nang hángin. The branches of the trees are being
broken off by the force of the wind. Napútol nŕ ang káhoy. The tree
has been cut down. Napútol ang dúlo nang káhoy. The end of the log is
cut off. Napútol ang sangŕ nang káhoy. The branch of the tree broke
off. Nasáyang ang trabáho ni Hwŕn. Juan's work went for naught. Ang
búkid ay nasíra`. The field is waste. Similarly, from: ári`, bágo,
buwŕl, dílat, gúmon, hinňg, laglŕg, lamňg, láon, páwi`, punň`, purňl,
súnog, tápos, úbos, utŕs, walŕ`, yári`.

The abstract is regular: daŕn, hinňg, lagňt, pások, súnog, walŕ`.

441. The passive is used, further, to denote the animate performer
of an involuntary act, which, then, is looked upon rather as an
undergoing than as a performing.

This is the clearest where the subject is undergoing an emotion or
sensation: Naáwŕ si Hwŕn sa pulúbe. Juan pitied the beggar. Ang báta
ng si Hwŕn ay nadúdungň. Little Juan is bashful. Naginŕw sya sa kanya
ng pagpalígo`. He got cold while taking his bath. Akú y nagůgútom. I am
hungry; isa ng táo ng nagůgútom a hungry person. Nahŕhápis siyŕ. He is
sad. Nahíhiyá ka bŕ? Are you ashamed? Nahíhiyá sya. He is ashamed. Aků
y nailŕng. I was nonplussed, I didn't know what to do. Akň y naíinip nŕ
nang paghihintŕy kay Hwŕn. I am impatient with waiting for Juan. Sya y
nalímang sa kanya ng pagbílang. He got confused in his reckoning. Sya
nalúlungkňt. He is sorry. Akň y naůúhaw. I am thirsty. So: bagábag,
gálit, libŕng, tákot, tuwŕ`.

This form is used also of processes of life, especially physiological
and morbid: Nalumpň syŕ. He got lame. Napípe sya. He got dumb. So:
naári` got the ability, nabáo got widowed, nabúhay lived, naíngay was
noisy, nakiněg heard, nalúnod got drowned, namatŕy died, natúlog slept.

It is used, finally, in nahúlog fell (from a place to the ground),
and, strangely enough, for two voluntary actions which consist of a
relaxing of the muscles: Sya y nahigŕ` He lay down. Sya y nahíhigŕ`. He
was in the act of lying down. Naupó sya sa bangkň`. He sat down on
the bench. Naúupó sya sa taburéte. He was in the act of sitting down
on the stool.

Further, irregularly, in: Sya y nalígo`. He took a bath. Sya y
nanáog. He came down from the house. See § 488,c.

Abstracts: Ang pagkaáwŕ ni Hwŕn sa pulúbe Juan's pity for the
beggar. ang pagkabáta` one's childhood. ang pagkabúhay ni Hesůs
the resurrection of Jesus. Ang pagkagúlat ni Hwána ay sya nyŕ ng
ipinagkasakět. Juana's scare was what made her sick. Pagkalúnod
nang Kastíla` ay lumáyas ang manga estudyŕnte. When the Spaniard
had got drowned, the students hurried away. ang kanya ng pagkamatŕy
his death. ang kanya ng pagkasála sa singsěng. his missing the
ring. Pagkaupú nya sa bangkň` ay minulŕn nya ang pagkukwčnto sa manga
báta`. When she had sat down on the bench, she began her story-telling
to the children. So: ári`, hápis, húlog, litň, lóko, pípi, tákot,
tálo, ulňl.

442. An explicit plural of both active and direct passive is formed
by the infixation of -ang- into the prefix.

In the active the syllable after this infix often receives a secondary
accent: Nangŕkaupú na silŕ sa pagkáin, nang kamě ay dumatěng. They
had already sat down to their meal when we arrived. So also from:
bitŕw, biyábit.

With reduplication of the ka- instead of root initial: Nangŕkŕkaupó
silŕ sa pagkáin. They are able to sit up for their meals.

Direct passive: Ang dinala nyŕ ng manga manňk ay nangamatŕy. The
chickens he brought all died. Nangapútol ang tubň sa lakŕs
nang bagyň. The sugar-cane broke under the strength of the
typhoon. Nangapůpútol ang karamíhan nang tubň nang kasalukúyan ang
bagyň. During the typhoon most of the sugar-cane got broken. So from:
bulňk, íwan, lúnod, lungkňt, tákot, tuwŕ`.

443. From a compound word, passive: nasawi-ng-pálad (sawě ng pálad).

From a derived word, active: makataanŕn (taanŕn, § 378).

444. Accent shift is due to the root. Si Pédro ay nakaayŕw nŕ. Pedro
has left the table. So from ábot, sákit.

Passive: Naabut nyŕ ang ilawŕn. He managed to reach the lamp. Hindí
nya maabůt ang itlňg. He can't reach the egg. Ang báta ng si Hwŕn ay
nabábahŕy. Little Juan is shy.

Abstract: Pagkaabňt nang bátŕ nang kanyŕ ng laruwŕn ay tumakbň sya
ng agŕd. After reaching for his toys, the boy at once ran.

445. With pag- before the root, this active is made from roots whose
primary active has mag-. The reduplication affects either the ka-,
or the pag-, or the root initial: makŕ-ka-pag- or maka-pŕ-pag- or
maka-pag- R.

Ang báta` ay nakapagdalŕ nang káhoy. The boy managed to bring the
wood. Ang báta` ay nakapagdádalŕ (or: nakŕkapagdalŕ, or: nakapŕpagdalŕ)
nang káhoy. The boy is able to bring the wood. Nakŕkapaglasěng
si Ánong, káhit na sya y hindí binŕbayáan nang kanya ng asáwa na
makapagpabilč nang álak. Anong manages to get drunk, even though his
wife does not allow him to have liquor purchased for him. Nakapagpútol
na si Hwŕn nang káhoy. Juan has finished cutting wood. Nakapagpůpútol
nŕ si Hwŕn nang káhoy. Juan is already able to cut wood. Hindí
makapagpútol nang káhoy si Hwŕn, dahilŕn sa súgat nya sa kamŕy. Juan
cannot cut wood, on account of the wound on his hand.

Similarly: antňk, áral, bíhis, ligtŕs, mísa, nákaw, pasiyŕl, sábi,
salitŕ`, tágo`, takŕ.

446. Direct passive: ma-pag-; ma-pag- R or ma-pŕ-pag-. Hindí ko
mapagáyos ang manga damět na itň. I can't straighten out these
clothes. Mapŕpagáyos nya ang manga lipŕs sa úso ng damět na itň. She
will be able to fix these out-of-date clothes. Hindí ko mapagkúro`
kung anň ang íbig nya ng sabíhin. I couldn't make out what he wanted
to say. Nang mapagkúrň ni Hwŕn kung anň ang mangyŕyári, ay hindí nya
itinúloy ang kanya ng bálak. When Juan saw what was going to happen,
he did not carry out his plan. Hindí ko mapagkúro ang kahulugŕn nang
súlat na itň. I can't get at the meaning of this letter. Napagtalastŕs
ko ang manga sinŕsábi mo sa iyo ng súlat. I understand all you say
in your letter. Napagtátalastŕs (or: napŕpagtalastŕs) kň ang íbig mo
ng sabíhin. I understand what you mean.

447. maka-pag- (1), cf. § 353. Nang nakapaghanap syŕ ay umuwé sya sa
kanya ng báhay. When he had finished searching, he went home. Kung
makapaghanap syŕ ay úuwé sya. When he has finished searching, he will
go home.

448. maka-pang-, corresponding to mang-, § 357. Nakŕkapanghirŕm
kamě nang kwaltŕ kay Áli ng Kulása. We can borrow money from
Aunt Nicolasa. Makŕkapanghirŕm ka ng wala ng sála kay Hwŕn nang
isa ng sombréro. You will surely be able to borrow a hat from
Juan. Nakapangŕngabáyo sya ng patayň`, sapagkŕt hindí gulatěn ang
kanya ng kabáyo. He is able to ride standing up, because his horse
is not given to shying.

Abstract: pagkapangáko` (áko`).

(a) The root is reduplicated for plurality: Ang pagkapanghahárang
nila Hwán ay hindí nila sána magawŕ`, kung hindí sa karamíhan nang
táo nila na máy barěl. The highway robberies by Juan and his gang
could not have been perpetrated by them, if it had not been for the
number of them that had guns.

(b) From a derived word: makapangináin (kináin, §§ 365, 357,a).

449. ma- D; expressive of slow activity: Hindí sya mamatŕy-matŕy. He
is lingering on the death-bed. Ang pŕgakpákan nang manga táo ay hindí
matápus-tápus. The applause of the people could find no end.

450. In the instrumental passive, which seems to occur only with pag-
and pang-, the i- follows the ma-: Ang pagkŕtáwag nang kúra sa manga
pulěs ay hindí nya ikinabúte, sapagkŕt silŕ y kŕkauntí lámang úpang
maipagtanggňl sya sa manga magnanákaw. The priest's having called in
the police did him no good, for they were too few to defend him from
the thieves.

With pang-: naipangánganŕk (anŕk, cf. § 357).

451. The local passive has the prefix ma- and the suffix (1) -an.

Namatayŕn sina Hwŕn. Someone has died in Juan's family. Namatayŕn
sa báhay ni Hwŕn. There has been a death in Juan's house. Naputúlan
si Hwŕn nang dalíre` sa pagpapalákad nang mákina. Juan got a finger
cut off in running the machine. Napůputúlan nang médiko ang manga táo
nang kanila ng kamŕy o paŕ kung kayilángan. When necessary, people get
their hands or feet cut off by a doctor. Mapůputúlan ka nang dalírě`,
pag hindí ka nagíngat sa iyo ng pagtatrabáho sa mákina ng iyŕn. You
will get your finger cut off, if you aren't careful about the way you
work that machine. Nasakyŕn ko nŕ ang kabáyo ng bara-barŕ. I have
succeeded in mounting the wild horse. Naskyŕn ko nŕ ang bangka ng
itň. I have already been in this canoe. Nawalŕn nang málay ang babáye
sa kanyŕ ng paghihimatŕy. The woman lost consciousness in her swoon.

Similarly: báli`, bukŕs, halěk, hírap, láon, límot, luwŕt, patěd,
pílit, sákit, síra`, siyŕ, súbok, súgat, sunggŕb, tagŕl, tandŕ`, úbos.

(a) bitěw lacks accent shift: mabitíwan, cf. § 374,b.

452. Local passive with explicative pag-: Hindí námin mapaglagarían
nang káhoy ang kabáyo ng káhoy na ginawá mo. We cannot saw wood on the
saw-buck you have made. Napagputúlan námin nang kawáyan ang bágo ng
gawá mo ng kabáyo ng káhoy. We were able to cut bamboo on the sawbuck
you have just made.

453. Special static words resembling the active; the following occur:
Si Bantůg ay isa ng táo ng makabáyan. Bantog is a patriotic man. damň
ng makahyŕ` the sensitive plant, Mimosa pudica.

Of irregular use are makalawŕ (§ 262,8), and makatuwěd (tuwěd).

(a) From a word of this kind an active with mag- is derived in:
nagmŕmakaáwa` provoking pity (as though from makaáwa`).

(b) The abstract is like a special static word in: Ang bigŕs ay sya ng
pinakamahalagŕ ng pagkabúhay nang táo sa Filipínas. Rice is the most
important staple food in the Philippines. Cf. also pagkaráka, § 265,9.

454. ma- forms special static words denoting that which by nature or
circumstance possesses such and such, usually a quality. Maalikabok
nŕ ang mésa. The table is dusty already. Maásim ang súka ng itň. This
wine is sour. ang púno-ng-káhoy na mabába` a low tree; isa ng mabába ng
táo a humble person. Ang labŕng ay mabábaw. The trough of the manger is
shallow. Madálang ang manga lindňl díto. Earthquakes are rare here. Sya
y isa ng ginoň ng magálang. He is a polite gentleman. Maginháwa ang
umupó sa sělya ng itň. This chair is comfortable to sit in. Si Maryŕ
ay isa ng babáye ng mapúri. Maria is a decent woman. Maluwŕng ang
báro ng itň. This blouse is too loose. mataměs sweet, ang mataměs
sugar. Matipěd na báta` si Hwŕn. Juan is a saving child.

The plural is made with ma- r: Ang manga táo sa báyan ay mahuhúsay
sumunňd sa kautusŕn. The people of the town are all good law-abiders.

These forms are made from so many roots that the Index will be as
convenient as a list.

Derivatives: §§ 352,c. 353,a.b. 370. 499,a. 500,b.

(a) Note masiyádo excessive, extreme, as though from a root -siyádo
(and so listed), still felt by Mr. Santiago to be from Spanish
demasiado.

(b) Accent shift due to the root in masakět.

(c) From derived words: Ang pagtayú sa bubungŕn ay mapangánib. It is
dangerous to stand on the roof. So from kasalánan (§ 423), kabuluhŕn
(§ 422).

455. ma-pag- someone given to doing so and so: Ang inŕ ni Pédro ay
mapagbigŕy sa kanya ng manga kaululŕn. Pedro's mother always gives in
to his foolishness. Sya y mapagtipěd. He is very economical. So from:
gawŕ`, kumpisŕl, simbŕ, siyásat, usísa`.

(a) From a phrase, probably: Ang táo ng si Hwŕn ay
mapagpáku-m-babŕ`. That man Juan is overmodest (páko ng babŕ`
low peg?).

(b) With accent shift: Mapaghuně ang manga kabáyo ng itň, kanya
hindí dápat dalhěn sa labanŕn. These horses are given to neighing
and therefore should not be taken to war. So also: mapagawŕy.

456. In the same sense, but transitive in value, ma-pang-: mapanggúlat
given to surprising or frightening people, mapanghágis given to
flinging things; Ang táo ng si Hwŕn ay mapanghirŕm. The fellow Juan is
a great borrower. mapanghiyŕ` given to embarrassing people. mapamukňl
given to throwing things. So from: hilěng, matŕ.

457. In similar meanings, with suffix -in:

(a) ma- S -in: So magustúhin, masůnúrin.

(b) ma- (2) -in: Ang manga táo y hindí maibigěn sa pagkakŕsála. People
are not fond of sinning.

(c) ma- r (2) -in: matatawaněn easily made to laugh; Sya y
matutulugěn. He is a sleepy-head. So also: magugulatěn.

458. The transients with kŕ- refer to accidental actions. The active
has the forms: makŕ-, makŕ- R, nakŕ-, nakŕ- R, but the reduplication
sometimes affects the kŕ- instead of the root initial. The abstract
has pagkŕ-. The meanings are various, much like those of maka-.

459. The active sometimes expresses an inanimate object as the agent
of an accidental action: Ang guntěng nang manggagamňt ay nakágupit
nang isa ng ugŕt na malakč, kanyŕ` namatŕy ang kanya ng ginágamňt. The
physician's scissors accidentally cut a large artery, in consequence
of which his patient died. Similarly, from gísing, háwa.

460. More frequent is a rational actor of an accidental action; as such
is viewed any action the exact form of which is out of the actor's
control. Si Pédro ay nakŕháwak nang káwad na mŕy elektrisidŕd. Pedro
got hold of a charged wire. Hindí nya kilalŕ ang manga kwayanŕ ng
iyňn, kaniyŕ nakŕpútol sya nang sa iba ng táwo ng kawáyan. As he
did not know those bamboo-groves, he inadvertently cut some bamboo
that belonged to other people. Sundan mň silŕ sa kawayanŕn, sapagkŕt
baká sila nakŕpůpútol nang kawáya ng hindí nasŕsákop nang áti ng
lúpa`. Follow them to the bamboo-grove, for they may be cutting some
bamboo that is not included in our land. Hwŕn, usisáin mo ng mabúti
ang hanggáhan nang kawayanŕn, bágo ka tumagá nang kawáyan, sapagkŕt
baká ka makŕpútol nang kawáya ng hindí átin. Juan, find out exactly
the borders of the bamboo-grove before you cut any bamboo, for else
you might cut some bamboo that is not ours. Pího ng makŕpůpútol
silŕ nang kawáya ng hindí sakňp nang lúpa`, kapag hindí mo sila
pinakialamŕn, sapagkŕt ang hanggáhan nang lúpa ng iyňn ay lubhŕ ng
balú-baluktňt. They will surely cut some bamboo not included in the
piece of ground, if you don't look after them, for the boundary of
the land is very irregular. Nakŕtísod akň nang isa ng áhas. I hit a
snake with my foot. Nakŕtúlog si Hwŕn sa báhay na gibŕ-gibŕ`. Juan
hit upon a broken-down house as a place to sleep in, was constrained
by circumstances to sleep in a broken-down house. Nakŕusísŕ sya nang
nawalŕ ng kwaltŕ. It came to her mind to inquire about the lost
money. Nakŕusísŕ sya nang isa ng táo ng nakŕŕalŕm nang líhim. He
happened to ask a man who knew the secret. Similarly: bilě, daŕn,
inňm, káin, súlat, tagpň`.

Abstract: In the abstract the element of accident often takes the form
of expressing the way something turned out. Limŕng ang pagkŕbílang
nya sa manga itlňg na itň. His count of these eggs has turned out
wrong. Ang pagkágawá ni Hwána sa páyong ay masamŕ`. The umbrella Juana
made turned out poorly. Ang pagkágupět sa úlo nang báta` ay hindí
pantŕy-pantŕy. The boy's hair-cut isn't (hasn't turned out) even. Ang
pagkŕháti nang mansánas ay hindí parého. The halving of the apple is
not exact. Ang pagkŕísip nya sa bugtňng ay hindi táma`. His guess
at the riddle is not correct. Ang pagkálagok nyŕ sa itlňg ay kanya
ng pinagsisíhan. He repented his having (in a moment of weakness)
swallowed the egg. Ang pagkŕpások ni Hwŕn nang tapňn sa bóte ay
malálim. Juan got the cork too deep into the bottle. Ang pagkápatay
sa magnanákaw ay hindí sinadyŕ`. The killing of the thief was not
done on purpose. Ang pagkápatay sa manňk ay masamŕ`. This chicken has
not been slaughtered in the proper manner. Ang pagkŕpútol nang pálong
nang kátiyaw ay hindí sagŕd. The cock's comb is not cut off clean. Ang
pagkátahul nang áso ay sya ng inilalá nang sakět nya sa lalamúnan. The
dog's barking made the pain in its throat worse. Ang pagkátanaw kň sa
púno-ng-káhoy ay itň y may madidilŕw na dáhon. The way I looked at that
tree made it seem as if it had yellow leaves. Ang kanya ng pagkátayň`
(or: pagkátinděg) ay dahilŕn sa kanya ng pagkŕgúlat. He jumped to his
feet because of his surprise. Ang pagkŕtípon nang manga dáho ng itň
ay hindí mabúte. These leaves have not been well heaped up. So from:
bendisiyňn, bitbět, hampŕs, higŕ`, pálo`, tágo`, tirŕ, upň`.

461. The active may denote a rational actor successful, thanks to outer
circumstances, in such and such an action. Nakáhampas ang báta ng si
Hwŕn nang isa ng tutubč. Little Juan succeeded in hitting a dragon-fly
with his whip. Nakŕháte si Hwŕn nang manga mansánas. Juan got a chance
to divide up the apples. Nakŕkŕkapá sya nang isa ng palakŕ`. He has
got hold of a frog (as, in grasping for frogs in mud-holes). Nakŕpána
akň nang usŕ. I hit a deer with an arrow. Nakŕtípun nŕ akň nang
manga dáhon, nang pumarňn si Tátay. By the time Father got there,
I had already had time to get some leaves heaped up. So also: ágaw,
hingě`, sáli.

Abstract: Ang pagkŕbúhay nang médiko sa kay Hwŕn ay isŕ ng malakě ng
ikinatwá nang kanya ng kababáyan. The doctor's saving of Juan's life
was a cause of great gladness to his fellow-townsmen. Ang pagkŕtáwag
nyŕ sa médiko ng nagligtŕs nang búhay nang kanya ng anŕk ay dahilŕn
sa pagkŕgámit nya nang teléfono. His chance of calling the doctor who
saved his child's life was due to the use he was enabled to make of the
telephone. Ang nagěng pagkágupit nyŕ sa makapŕl na damět ay nangyáre
dahilŕn sa paggámit nya nang guntěng nang láta. The fact that he was
able to cut the thick cloth was due to his using the tin-shears. Ang
pagkáhampas nyŕ sa manga bátŕ` ay dahilŕn sa kahabáan nang kanya
ng pamálo`. He can hit the children because of the length of his
stick. Ang pagkŕhárang kina Hwŕn ay sya nilŕ ng ikinawalá nang kanila
ng salapč`. Juan and his party's having been held up was what deprived
them of their money. Ang pagkŕháti nya sa tubů ay hindí mangyŕyáre
kung gumámit sya nang mapurůl na gúlok. He would not have been able
to slice the sugar-cane down its length (as a game or trick), if he
had used a dull bolo. Pagkŕísip nya kung anň ang dápat nya ng gawěn
sa magnanákaw na nŕhúli nya, ay ginawá nya iyňn agŕd. When he had at
last hit upon the idea of what to do with the thief he had caught,
he immediately carried it out. Nanghináyang ang boo ng báyan sa
pagkápatay kay Risŕl nang manga Kastíla`. The whole country mourned
over the killing of Rizal by the Spaniards. Ang ámi ng pagkásakay sa
bangkŕ` ay syŕ ng nagligtŕs sa ámi ng búhay. Our having been able
to get into the canoe is what saved our lives. Ang pagkŕsúnog nang
manga magnanákaw sa báyan ay pinarusáhan nang gubyčrno. The thieves'
burning the town was punished by the government. Ang pagkátayo nang
isa ng báhay-pŕmahaláa ng batň ay dahilŕn sa pagpapaalaála ni Hwŕn
nang pangánib sa súnog. The fact that a stone government-building
came after all to be built, was due to Juan's calling attention to
the danger from fire. Anu ng pagkátipid ni Hwŕn! How saving Juan has
been! So from: sábi, táwag.

462. The active is used of certain acts of sensation whose
occurrence is out of the control of the subject: ang nakŕkěkilála,
ang nakŕkŕkilála one who has got knowledge of a person or thing,
has come to know his habits, recognizes his nature. Ang pagkŕgúlat
ni Hwána ay syŕ ng ikinátawŕ nang marámi ng nakŕkŕkíta. Juana's
astonishment amused many who saw it. With kilála compare nakáramdŕm
felt; with kíta, nakŕmálay, nakátanŕw, and nakáriněg heard.

Abstract: Malínaw ang pagkŕkíta ko sa nangyáre. I had a clear view
of what took place. So: diněg, masěd, tanŕw.

463. The direct passive has the forms mŕ-, mŕ- R, nŕ-, nŕ- R.

It may correspond regularly to the active type in § 460, and denote
an object undergoing an accidental action of a rational actor.

Nŕáso ko sa boo ng báyan ang báta`, káhit na hindí ko gustň. I
was forced to go shouting after the child all over town, though I
didn't like to do it. Hindí mu ba nŕbása sa diyáriyo ang tungkůl
sa súnog? Haven't you come across the details of the fire in
the paper? Baká mo mŕbásag, Hwána, iyŕ ng pinaglŕlaruwan mň ng
kandeléro. See that you don't break that candlestick you're playing
with, Juana. Nádala nyŕ nang hindí sinásadyŕ` sa kanya ng pagalěs
ang áki ng páyong. When he went away he inadvertently carried off
my umbrella. Nŕgambála ku ang pagaáral ni Hwŕn dahilŕn sa áki ng
pagdatěng na walá sa óras. I disturbed Juan in his studying by my
untimely arrival. Nŕgámit ni Hwŕn ang áki ng, sombréro dahilŕn sa
kanyŕ ng pagmamadalí nang pagalěs. Juan used my hat in the haste of
his departure. Nŕgísing nya sa kanya ng pagiingŕy ang manga báta`. What
with his racket he woke up the children. Náhampŕs nang hindí sinásadyá
ni Pédro ang bábuy nang kanya ng kápit-báhay. Pedro inadvertently hit
his neighbor's hog with his whip. Nŕíwan din nyŕ sa ákin ang kanyŕ
ng anŕk, káhit na itň y áyaw nya ng gawěn. She was also forced to
leave her child with me, although she disliked to do this. Nápatŕy
ko nang barěl-barílan ang manňk. I accidentally killed the chicken
with my toy-gun. Kánin mo ang milňn, kung iyu ng gustň, o kayŕ` ang
ságing, kung sya mo itň ng nŕpěpíle`.--Nŕpěpíli ko ang milňn. Eat the
banana, if you like, or the melon, if you prefer it.--I prefer the
melon. Nápitas nyŕ ang bulaklŕk nang hindí sinásadyŕ`. She picked the
flower without intending to. Nŕpútol ko nang hindí sinásadyŕ` ang lúbid
na itň. I chanced, without intending it, to cut this string. Baká mo
mŕsíra`, Hwŕn, ang patágo sa iyů ng kwŕlta nang iyu ng kapatěd. See
to it, Juan, that you don't do away with your brother's money that
is entrusted to you. Nŕusísŕ ni Hwána ang inumět na singsěng nang
kanyŕ ng kapatěd. Juana happened to inquire for the ring her sister
had filched. So from: angkěn, búlag, bútas, hábol, patŕy, púlot.

464. The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active
described in § 461, and denote an object undergoing an action which a
rational actor was enabled to perform by virtue of outer circumstances.

Ang úlo ni Hwŕn ay nŕběbílog nang kanya ng kalarň`. Juan's playmates
are succeeding in making a fool of him (literally: in rounding his
head). Nágupit nyŕ ang makapŕl na damět. It turned out that he was
able to cut the thick cloth. Hindí ku mŕípon ang manga karáyum na
nangŕsábug sa lúpa`. I did not succeed in gathering up all the needles
that were scattered over the floor. Hindí ko mápatay ang púsa ng
itň. I cannot kill this cat (i.e. its life is tough, it gets away,
etc.) Kapag nŕpútol mo ang bákal na iyŕn, ikŕw ay makawáwalŕ`. If
you can get a chance to cut through that iron, you can make your
escape. Nŕpútol nya ang káhoy. He got the wood cut all right. Hindí nya
mŕpútol ang lečg nang manňk. He couldn't get the chicken's neck cut
through. Mŕpůpútol na raw nyŕ ang púno nang káhoy na nabwŕl. He says
he will be in a position to cut through the tree that has fallen. ang
kanyŕ ng násingěl the money he was able to collect. Similarly, from:
bálot, gawŕ`, húli, kúha, kúlam, nákaw, pitŕs, sábi, taŕs, táwag.

465. Similarly, the direct passive is regularly used to correspond
to the active in § 462, of objects of sensation. Nŕkilála ko si Hwŕn
doňn sa sŕwáyan. I got acquainted with Juan at that dance. So from:
alaála, diněg, inň, kíta, málas, pansěn.

466. Other uses of the direct passive do not regularly correspond to
any active, cf. § 440 f.; these have their own abstract with pagkŕ-.

The direct passive is used to denote an object which has accidentally
got into such and such a condition; the actor is either indifferent
or entirely lacking. There seems to be no abstract principle clearly
separating this form from the passive with na- described in § 440;
where position of the object is involved, the accidental form is
preferred.

Nŕbúte ang kanyŕ ng pagkatákot. His fear reached a high point. Ang
kanya ng bangkŕ y patúngo sa bandŕ ng kalunúran, dátapuwat pagkaraŕn
nang ilŕ ng sandalě` ay náiba ang kanya ng bandáhin. His canoe was
headed toward the west, but after a while his direction changed. Ang
ěnumínan nang báhay ay dápat málagay sa lugŕr na malílim. The shelf
for drinking-water of a house should be in a shady place. Násakay
sa trčn ang ipinahatěd mo ng manga dalanghíta`. The tangerines you
sent have been shipped. Nŕtúlin ang pagpapadulŕs nang báta ng si Hwŕn
sa pútek. Juan's sliding on the mud got faster and faster (in spite
of him).

Similarly from: bágay, balíta`, baňn, dápat, doňn, hintň`, húsay,
kápit, lapŕg, látag, ligtŕs, liguwŕk, lípat, lubňg, lúlan, mána,
nákaw, pagítan, páko`, patŕy, pátung, sábog, taŕn, tábon, tágo`,
talŕ`, taněm, taňn, tayň`, tirŕ, túlos, únat.

Abstract: Pagkásakay nang manga sáko nang kamóte sa trčn ay lumákad
itň agŕd. As soon as the bags of sweet-potatoes had been put on board
the train, the latter started to move. So from: balíta`, gámit, ibŕ,
látag, liběng, sarŕ.

466a. This irregular passive is used also of animate, rational
subjects, whose actions, then, are viewed rather as an accidental
undergoing; this type is not clearly definable from that with ma-
in § 441, except where both forms are used in contrast (-higŕ`);
the habit with regard to each root is, however, entirely fixed.

In some cases the accidental actor is imaginable: Náakyŕt si Pédro
sa itaŕs nang lángit dahilŕn sa ginawá nya ng pagkápit sa pinalipŕd
na lóbo. Pedro got carried up into the air owing to his grip on the
loosed balloon. Nŕhárang sina Hwŕn sa daŕ-ng-Balíwag. Juan and his
company chanced to get held up on the Baliuag road. Hwag kŕ, Hwŕn,
pumásuk sa sekréta, sapagkŕt baká ka máhigŕ` sa ihawŕn, kung ikŕw
ay mŕhúle. Don't go as a spy, Juan, for you might get laid on the
gridiron, if you got caught. Similarly: banggět, barěl, bilanggň`,
distíno, húli, ligtŕs, píli`, tanggŕp, táwag.

Processes of life: Sya y nábingě. He got deaf. Nŕbúte si Hwŕn sa kanya
ng pagkatákot. Juan was bettered by his fright. Si Pédro at si Maryŕ
ay mŕkŕkasŕl. Pedro and Maria will get married some day. So: himběng,
lóko, tahímik, tiněk, túto, wíli.

Abstract: Ang pagkŕgúlat ni Hwána sa maíngay na putňk nang kanyňn ay
sya nyŕ ng ikinabingě. Juana's shock at the loud report of the cannon
was what made her deaf. Malakě ang kanila ng nagěng pagkŕgúlat. Their
astonishment was great. Ang pagkŕsúnog sa manga sundálo sa loňb
nang báhay ay nangyári dáhil sa pagkásara nang manga bintána`. The
fact that the soldiers were burned in the house was due to the
circumstance that the windows had been closed. Ang pagkátiněk sa
lalamúnan nang báta` ay sya nyŕ ng ikinamatŕy. The boy's getting a
fishbone into his throat was what killed him. Pagkátinik nang unggň`
ay sya y nagálit. When the monkey had got a spine into his foot he
got angry. Ang pagkŕwíle ni Hwŕn sa báhay ny Andrčs ay dahilŕn sa
anŕk na dalága nitň. Juan's being spell-bound in Andres' house was
due to the latter's daughter. So: gustň, kasŕl, manghŕ`.

Movements, especially the resultant position: Sya y nárapŕ`. He fell on
his face. Náriyan kamě sa iyo ng báhay kahápon nang umága, dátapuwat
hindí ka námin dinatnŕn. We were at your house yesterday morning, but
we did not find you there. Náluhod sya sa kanyŕ ng harapŕn. He knelt
down in front of her. Nŕpŕpagítan si Hwŕn sa dalawŕ ng dalága. Juan
chanced to get placed between two young ladies. Sila y nŕůupň`. They
are seated. Similarly from: ákap, alěs, bálot, díne, díto, dulŕs,
doňn, harŕp, kublě, kulňng, lákad, lugmňk, padpŕd, panhěk, sakŕy,
sísid, tabě, tágo`, tayň`, tirŕ, tungtňng.

Abstract: Ang ikinátahol nang manga áso ay ang pagkádapá ni Hwŕn. What
made the dogs bark was Juan's falling on his face. Pagkásakay ni Hwŕn
sa trčn ay lumákad ito ng agŕd. When Juan was on board the train,
it soon started to move. So also: dulŕs, kublě, lagŕy, panhěk, silěd,
tabě, tayň`.

467. The passive forms an explicit plural in which -ang- is infixed
into the nŕ-: Tibáyan mo ang manga itátayú mo ng kúbo sa búkid,
sapagkŕt baká iyo y mangágibŕ` kung lumakŕs ang hángin. Prop up the
huts you are going to build in the fields, for otherwise they might
break down when the wind gets stronger. Mangŕgěgibŕ` ang manga báhay na
itň, sapagkŕt hindí táma` ang pagkátayň`. These houses will break down,
because they are not built right. So from: pangŕw, sábog, talungkň`.

468. An irregular form is nŕndon beside ná-roňn.

469. Accent shift is due to the root: Ang pagpapatahňl ni Hwŕn sa
kanya ng áso ay nakŕtŕtawŕ. Juan's making his dog bark is a funny
sight. So álam, túloy.

Passive: Náabut nyŕ sa kanyŕ ng paglulundŕg na may tánga ng pamálo`
ang ilawŕn, kanyŕ` itň y nabásag. In his climbing with the stick in
hand, he accidentally reached the lamp, and so it got broken. Sya y
nábulŕg. He went blind. So: gísing, háyag, húli, lápit, láyo`, túloy.

Abstract: Ang pagkáhuli nang susň` ay malakč. The snail was left way
behind. Ang pagkáabot nyŕ sa bóte ay hindi magálang. The way he reached
for the bottle was not polite. So: álam, áyaw, gísing, lápit, úna.

470. From phrases: Ang paánan nang hěgáan ay nŕbŕbandŕ-ng-kataasŕn,
dátapwat dápat mŕbanda-ng-ibabŕ`. The foot of the bed is turned toward
the north, but should be turned to the south (bandŕ ng ibabŕ`, bandŕ
ng kataasŕn).

From derived words: Passive: Nŕtŕtagílid ang bangkŕ`. The boat has
a list to one side (ta-gílid, § 523).

(a) Passives from words with prefix ka- (§ 398) are frequent. Ang
búkid ni Hwŕn ay nŕkŕkarátig nang kay Pédro. Juan's field borders
on Pedro's. Nŕkasále nya sa kanya ng paglalarň` ang kanya ng
pínsan. He took his cousin for playmate. Si Maryáno ay nŕkatálo ni
Hwŕn. Mariano was Juan's opponent. Si Narsíso ang lági ng nŕkŕkatálo
ni Pédro sa manga pagtatálo ng idinŕdáos linggo-linggň sa kanila ng
sŕmáhan. Narcisso is always Pedro's opponent in the debates which they
hold every Sunday at their club. Si Lúkas ang mŕkŕkatálo ko. Lucas
will be my opponent. nŕkŕkatúngo the person one happens to be dealing
with. nŕkaúsap be by chance able to be conversed with.

Underlying word non-existent: Nŕkatúlog si Hwŕn sa panunoňd nang
teátro. Juan fell asleep while watching the play. Umulŕn kagabě at
lumaměg, kaniyŕ` ako nŕkatúlog nang mahimběng. Last night it rained and
got cool; in consequence I fell sound asleep, got a sound sleep. Hindí
ako mŕkatúlog. I couldn't get any sleep. Abstract: ang pagkŕkatúlog.

(b) Explicit plural of the preceding: Nangŕkŕkatúlog sila ng lahŕt,
nang pumások sa báhay ang magnanákaw. They had all fallen asleep,
when the thief came into the house. Pagpilítan ninyň ng hwag kayň
ng mangŕkatúlog sa inyo ng pagbabantŕy sa manga háyop at iba pŕ ng
árě nang pŕmahalaŕn. See to it that you don't fall asleep when on
guard over the animals and other property of the government. Ngayňn
ay mangŕkŕkatúlog silŕ, dahilŕn sa maláon nila ng pagpupuyŕt
gabi-gabě. Now they will be able to sleep, owing to their staying up
late night after night.

471. Passive with pag- (cf. § 445): the reduplication affects the
pag-. Hindí ko mŕpagáway ang taměs at ang ásim nang limonáda ng itň. I
cannot produce a balance of sweet and sour in this lemonade. Sa
kalaúnan ay nŕpagkilála ni Hwŕn ang kanya ng kamŕlían. Finally
Juan saw where he was wrong. Hindí nya nŕpagkúro` agŕd kung anň ang
gŕgawin nyŕ. He was not able to decide at once what he was going to
do. Nŕpŕpagkúrů mo bŕ ang lahŕt nang sinábi ko sa iyň kahápon? Are
you able to figure out all I said to you yesterday? Hindí ko mŕpagkúro
kung anň ang íbig nya ng sabíhin. I simply couldn't make out what he
was trying to say.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Áyon sa sábi nang marámi ay
mŕpŕpaghuli na rŕw ang manga magnanákaw. According to what people say,
the thieves will soon be caught.

472. Passive with pang-: Nŕpanagínip niya ng nŕkíta nya ang kanya ng
amŕ. He dreamt he saw his father.

473. makŕ- D is used in prohibitions: Hwag kŕ ng makŕláyas-láyas! Don't
ever run away! So from tungtóng.

(a) with paki-: Hwag kŕ ng makŕpakikáin-káin kung hindí ka
inŕanyáhan. Don't ever take a meal with people unless they invite you.

474. The instrumental passive is rare: badiyŕ, mŕilabŕs, mŕipások,
mŕitúro`.

475. Local passive with mŕ-.

Nŕmŕmasdan kň mulá sa banda ng itň nang bintána` ang báhay ni Áli
ng Maryŕ. I get a view of Mistress Maria's house from this side of
the window. Pagingátan mo ang iyo ng kwaltŕ sa bulsŕ pagluwŕs mo sa
Mayníla`, at nang hwag kŕ ng mŕnakáwan. Look carefully to the money in
your purse when you go to Manila, so as not to get robbed. Nŕpasúkan
nya sa kwŕrto ang magnanákaw. In entering the room he came upon the
thief. Nŕputúlan ku nang tahěd ang kátyaw. I managed to cut the
game-cock's spur. Nŕpůputúlan ko nŕ nang pálong ang kátyaw. I am
succeeding in cutting off the game-cock's comb. Mŕpůputúlan daw nyŕ
nang manga pálong ang manga kátyaw nya ng pangsábong. He will manage
to cut off the combs of his pit game-cocks, he says. Nŕsagasáan nang
trčn ang isa ng táo. A man got run over by the train. Nŕsakyan námin
ang bangká ni Hwŕn. We happened to get into Juan's canoe. Ang kamŕtáya
ng mŕtagpuŕn nang isa ng magnanákaw ay lági ng hindí mabúte. The death
a robber meets is usually not good. Baká mu mŕtamáan ang úlu nang
báta`. See that you don't hit the child's head (and disfigure him).

Similarly: balíta`, bukŕs, damdŕm, datěng, gustň, intindě, kamět,
kulápol, ligtŕs, málay, pígil, taněm, túlog, tumpŕk, túto, wisěk.

(a) With contraction of prefix and initial: mŕláman (álam).

(b) Accent shift lacking: nŕmatáan (matŕ).

(c) Extra accent shift is due to the root: Kamuntí nang mŕtamaŕn nang
kanya ng pukňl ang báta`. He nearly hit the child with his throw. Baká
mu mŕtamaŕn ang báta`. See that you don't hit the child. So also:
nŕalamŕn (álam).

476. Local passive with mŕ-pag-: Nŕpaghěhinaláan nang kápitan
ang mabaět na si Hwŕn. Even honest Juan falls under the mayor's
suspicion. Nŕpŕpaghinaláan nilŕ si Kulŕs sa pagkawalá nang aláhas. They
are capable of suspecting Nicolás in connection with the disappearance
of the jewelry. Mŕpŕpaghinaláan ka ng kasabuwŕt nang manga sundálo sa
bundňk, kapag hindí ka tumahímik sa báhay. You will risk suspicion
as having connection with the soldiers in the mountains, if you do
not stay quietly in your house. Similarly: álam, bintŕng.

(a) Extra accent shift (plural): mŕ-pag-alam-ŕn.

477. Local passive with mŕ-pang-; the only example lacks accent shift:
nŕ-pang-aginŕldo-han.

478. Local passive with mŕ- from underlying word with ka- (cf. §
398): nŕkagalítan, mŕkatuwaŕn.

(a) with pagka-, corresponding to an active with magka- (§ 405):
mŕpagkalipumpunŕn (lipumpňn).

479. Special static words with makŕ- are formed from numerals in the
sense of so many times: makŕánim six times; makálawŕ twice; makálimŕ
five times; makásiyŕm nine times. So: makáilŕn several times.

From phrases, the higher numbers: makása-m-pů` ten times.

With irregularities: makáitlň, makáyitlň three times; makŕápat,
makŕípat four times.

Reduplicated: makŕlělíbo a thousand times.



4. The prefix pa-.

480. The general sense of the prefix pa- is to denote something
caused or ordered to undergo such and such an action. With accent pŕ-
an increase of the action is expressed.



(1) Simple static forms.

481. The root with prefix pa- denotes an object or person ordered,
caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action. The person
caused to undergo may be the same as the person ordering or allowing.

Ang paakyŕt ni Hwána na púno nang kakŕw ay ang nása súlok nang
bakúran. The cocoa-tree Juana ordered climbed is the one in the corner
of the yard. Ang panyo ng itň ay paalaála sa ákin niy Áli ng Maryŕ sa
anŕk nya ng dalága. This handkerchief is a souvenir to me from Aunt
Maria which she sent by her daughter. Inihandá nang ámi ng kaséra
ang atsára ng papáya úpang siya námi ng magěng paáyap. Our landlady
served some pickled papaws for us to use as condiment. Pabalěk ni
Hwŕn ang lěbru ng itň. Juan sends this book back. Itň ang paháti` sa
ákin ni Pédro. This is what Pedro ordered me to deal out. Ang manga
tubň ng itň ay papútol sa ákin ni Pédro. Pedro ordered me to cut this
sugar-cane. Ang táo ng itň ang pasakŕy ni Hwŕn sa karumáta ko. This
is the man whom Juan asked me to take into my carriage. Ang binása
ni Hwŕ ng kautusŕn ay patáwag nang kúra. The ordinance Juan read was
given out for proclamation by the priest. Ang báhay na ytň y patayó
ni Hwŕn. Juan had this house built. Patípon ni Hwŕn sa ákin ang manga
nyňg na itň. Juan ordered me to gather up these cocoanuts. Ang pauwé
ni Hwŕn sa kanya ng inŕ ay isa ng maínam na singsěng. What Juan sent
home to his mother was a beautiful ring.

As conjunctive attribute the word with pa- may express manner: ang
daŕ ng pabalěk sa Balíwag the road back to Baliuag. Papások sya ng
lumŕlákad sa gitná nang báhay. He was going farther in toward the
inside of the house. Pasakŕy sya ng lumuksň sa kabáyo. He jumped on
the horse as if mounting to ride. Nang mahúlug ang báta` sa káhoy,
ay paupó sya ng lumagpŕk sa lúpa`. When the boy fell from the tree, he
landed on the ground in a sitting position. Paurňng sya ng lumákad. He
went backwards.

With movements pa-, reflexive, is often weakened to a mere indication
of direction: Paakyŕt sa púnů nang káhoy ang unggň` nang sya y abútan
nang lóbo. The monkey was just climbing the tree, when he was overtaken
by the wolf. Pabalěk si Hwŕn. Juan is going back. Patúngo si Hwŕn sa
báya-ng-Balíwag. Juan was headed for the town of Baliuag.

Similarly: álam, biglŕ`, bulňng, gawŕ`, hárang, kálat, lági`, lalŕ`,
puntŕ, sigŕw, tágo`, takbň, talungkň`, tayň`, túloy.

(a) From a derived word: paitaŕs (itaŕs, § 373).

(b) The peculiar meaning is weakened in some words: ang paága a kind
of rice which matures early, ang pakinábang profit, advantage, ang
palabŕs a theatrical performance, ang palígo` a bath, ang pamagŕt an
appellation, a nickname. So from: bangň`, bása, bayň, bigŕt, daŕn,
dúsa, háyag, hintúlot, lákad, lígid, lúgit, sákit, talěm.

(c) With retraction of accent and contraction: páno (anň).

(d) Irregular: Ang pagkáparoon kň sa bčsbol ay paubáya` nang áki ng
gurň`. My going to the baseball game was by permission of my teacher
(báya`).

482. pa- (1) is made from barytone roots when they express manner, or,
more especially, direction: Ang bangkŕ` ay hindí paayňn sa ílog. The
boat is not headed with the stream. Pahagěs nya ng iniyabňt sa ákin ang
aklŕt. He handed me the book by tossing it. Iníwan nya ng paharŕng sa
daŕn ang karitňn. He left the wagon blocking the road. Paharŕng nya ng
inihágis sa ílog ang púno-ng-ságing. He threw the banana tree crosswise
into the river. Ang paglakč nang lámat nang pinggŕn ay pahatč`. The
increase in the crack of the dish is going towards halving it. Ang
búnga ng itň y pahatč` kung mapiráso pagkahinňg. This fruit goes into
halves when it breaks on ripening. Similarly: líhim, pútol.

(a) The accent shift is due to the root and the value of the
formation is as in § 481, in: Ang paabňt mo ng súlat ay tinanggŕp
ko. I have received the letter you sent to me. Si Hwŕn ay isa ng báta
ng pabayŕ`. Juan is a neglectful boy.

(b) The accent shift is like that of a root word in: Paligú na ang
manga báta`. The children are bathed now (pa-lígo`).

483. pa- r, as explicit plural: see ábot.

484. pa- D. The action is repeated at short intervals; the reflexive
value is frequent. Sya y lumŕlákad na pahintň-hintň`. He goes on,
stopping every little while. Pamalí-malě` ang kanya ng pagbílang. His
count contains repeated errors. Alam nyŕ ang manga pasíkot-síkot sa
báya-ng-Balíwag. He knows all the ins and outs of the district of
Baliuag. So from: iyŕk, lígid, mínsan, pasiyŕl, túlog.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Patúlog-túlog at pagisěng-gisěng
siyŕ. He sleeps and wakes by fits and starts. Patawŕ-tawŕ at
paiyŕk-iyŕk siyŕ. She giggles at one moment and weeps the next.

485. pa-pa- has durative-iterative meaning: Papaalěs sya nang akň
y dumatěng. He was just going away when I arrived. Papaurňng sya ng
lumŕlákad. He was going backwards. So from labŕs.

(a) papáno (anň) seems equivalent to páno (§ 481,c).

486. As appears in the example of paligň` above (§ 482,b), the forms
with pa- are apparently capable of all the modifications that are
found in simple roots: Thus:

(a) with prefix pang- (§ 347): Pangpakáin sa báta` ang gátas na
itň. This milk is for the children's food. Pangpakáin sa panaúhin ang
pinatay kň ng túpa. The sheep I have slaughtered is for serving to the
guests. Pangpatukŕ sa manňk ang pálay na itň. These rice-grains are to
be given to the chickens to pick (tukŕ` the beak of a fowl). So from:
dikět, lígo`.

(b) with ka- R (§ 400): Kapŕpapútol ko pa lámang nang manga káhoy na
itň. I have just had this firewood cut.

(c) with ka-pag- R (§ 400,a): Kapagpŕpapútol ko lámang nang siět kay
Hwŕn. I have just ordered Juan to cut up the bamboo spines.



(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static words.

487. The root with pa- is sometimes used as a transient contingent
punctual, with the value of a reflexive passive; more commonly the
form with ma-pa- (§ 506) fulfils this function. There are three types:

(a) Genuine reflexive passive: Paábut ka sa mangŕ nagsěsihábul sa
iyň. Let yourself be overtaken by your pursuers. Paakyat kŕ kay Hwŕn
sa itaŕs nang káhoy. Ask Juan to take you up into the tree. Twě ng
papásuk akň sa síne sa áki ng kúyang, ay nasěsiráan ang mákina. Every
time I ask my oldest brother to take me to the moving-picture show,
something goes wrong with the machine. So: kasŕl, ligŕw.

(b) Reflexive of interest: one who orders that something undergo
such and such an action for him: Paakyŕt ka kay Hwŕn nang isa ng
búnga-ng-nyňg. Ask Juan to climb for a cocoanut for you.

(c) Reflexive of motion; the pa- has faded value; thus are used
the local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns and a few other
words. Paríni ka. Come here. Tuwě ng aku y paroňn sa kanya ng báhay
ay hindí ku sya inŕabútan. Every time I go to his house, I fail to
find him in.

(d) If the pa- is accented, the action is more intense: Pŕága ka nang
pagparíto. Be very early in your coming here.

(e) A contingent durative is formed with pa- R. (a) Paáakyat akň kay
Hwŕn sa itaŕs nang káhoy. I shall ask Juan to take me up into the
tree with him. Papŕpások akň sa síne sa áki ng kúyang. I shall ask
my brother to take me to the moving-picture show. (b) Paáakyat akň
kay Hwŕn nang isa ng búnga-ng-nyňg. I shall ask Juan to climb for a
cocoanut for me. Papůpútol akň nang buhňk kay Hwŕn. I shall ask Juan
to cut my hair.

488. For the reflexive of motion (§ 487,c) a set of transients and
an abstract are formed with -um- and pag-. These also are equivalent
to the forms with ma-pa- (§ 506).

(a) Regularly from the four roots serving as locals of the
demonstrative pronouns. Pumaríni ka! Come here! Pumaríne ka sa áki
ng tabě. Come close here to my side.

Madálang ang pagparíto nang manga bálang. Locusts come here but
rarely. Pího ako ng pŕparíto sa alasěngko. I will surely come here
at five o'clock.

Pápariyŕn sána kamě, dátapuwat nagkaroňn kamě nang malakě ng
kaabalahŕn, kanyŕ hindí kami nátuloy. We were coming to you, but we
had so much trouble that we did not carry out our intention.

Pagparoňn ko ay sŕsabíhin ko sa kanyŕ ang ibinalítŕ mo. When I get
there I shall tell him what you have told me. Kitŕ ng dalawŕ ay
páparon sa teyátro. We two are going to the theatre.

(b) Occasionally from loňb: pumaloňb.

(c) Also the abstracts pagpalígo`, pagpanáog; these form the transient
with ma- from the root (§ 441); and pagpatúngo, which forms its
transient with -um- from the root.

(d) Plurals: magsipalígo`, nagsěsipanáog.

489. mag-pa-, pag-pa-pa-. Active with mag- from the root with pa-
denotes one who causes, orders, or allows such and such an action to
be performed on something else or (reflexively) on himself.

Nagpaáyap ang ámi ng kaséra. Our landlady served a relish. Si
Hwŕn ay nagpabáya` sa kanya ng tungkúlin. Juan grew lax about his
duties. Nagpabyŕy si Hwŕn nang isdŕ` sa kanya ng palŕisdáan. Juan
had some fish put into his fishpond. Ang médiko ang nagpaginháwa sa
máy sakět. The doctor made the patient feel comfortable. Nagpagupět
akň sa barbéro. I had the barber cut my hair. Ang pagpapagupět ko sa
barbéro ng si Hwŕn ay hindí ko lubhŕ ng gustň. I don't like very much
to have my hair cut by barber Juan. Paráti ang manga pagpapahárang
ni Andrčs sa manga táo ng naglálakŕd. Andrés often orders travellers
to be held up. Si Pédro ay nagpaháte sa ákin nang pálay. Pedro had
rice dealt out to me. Ang kŕtiwála y syŕ ng nagpahátě nang pálay sa
manga kasamŕ. It was the agent who ordered rice distributed to the
field-workers. Ang pagpapaháte nang kŕtiwála sa manga lariyň sa manga
magkakápit-báhay ay hindí iniyútos nang panginoňn nya ng si Hwŕn. The
agent's having bricks distributed among the neighbors was not in
accordance with the orders of his master Juan. Sya y nagpahíkaw sa
kanya ng alíla`. She had her maid put her earrings on her. (híkaw an
earring). Si Pédro ay nagpápahingŕ. Pedro is taking a rest (literally:
allowing himself to breathe). Ang inŕ y nagpahubŕd (or: nagpahubŕd
nang damět) sa kanya ng anŕk. The mother ordered her daughter to
undress her. Sya y nagpakáin nang gúlay sa manga panaúhin. She
served vegetables to the guests. Sya y nagpŕpakaséra. She keeps a
boarding-house. Sya y nagpŕpalabŕs nang lamňk. He is driving out
the gnats. Nagpápalabŕs nang teyátro ang sŕmáha-ng-ópera. The opera
company is producing a play. Nagpalígo si Hwŕn nang kabáyo. Juan
bathed some of the horses. ang pagpapalígo` the bathing something or
someone. Nagpapútol si Hwŕn nang labňng. Juan had some bamboo shoots
cut. Nagpŕpapútol kamě nang káhoy. We are having some wood cut. Ang
pagpapapútol nya sa Intsčk nang buhňk ay hindí sinunňd nitň. When he
ordered the Chinaman to cut his queue, the latter did not obey. Ang
pagpapasakŕy sa trčn ni Hwŕn nang manga kamátis ay hindí nautŕs bágo
lumákad ang trčn. Juan had not finished having his tomatoes loaded
on the train, when the train started. Si Hwána ay nagpasákit nang
marámi ng manglilígaw sa kanyŕ. Juana caused grief to many who wooed
her. Si Hwána ay nagpasuklŕy sa kanya ng alíla`. Juana ordered her maid
to comb her hair for her. Ang pagpapasundú nya sa ákin sa alíla` ay
ikinagálit ko. His ordering me to fetch the servant made me angry. Sya
y nagpŕpatalěm nang isa ng gúlok. He is sharpening a bolo. Nagpatáwag
akň nang isŕ ng kasamŕ. I had a workman called. Ang pagpapatáwag ko
sa manga alíla ay hindí sinunňd nang báta ng si Hwŕn. Little Juan
did not obey my order to him to call some servants. Ang pagpapatáwag
nang kúra sa léyi ay hindi nátuluy, sapagkŕt binatň nang manga táo
ang magtatawŕg. The priest's order that the law be proclaimed was not
carried out, for the crier was stoned by the people. Nagpatayó sya nang
isa ng kúbo. He had a hut built. Ang pagpapatayó ni Hwŕn nang isa ng
kúbo ay hindí natápus bágo sya nŕtáwag sa pagsusundálo. The hut Juan
was having built was not finished before he was called to military
service. Nagpatipěd sya sa manga kasamŕ nang kanila ng pagkáin. He
had his workers be sparing with their food. Nagpatípon si Hwŕn nang
káhoy sa kanya ng manga kasamŕ. Juan ordered his workmen to gather
wood. Ang pagpapatípon ni Hwŕn sa manga kalabŕw ay hindí sinunňd
nang kanya ng kŕtiwála`. Juan's order that the carabao be gathered
together was not obeyed by his overseer. Sya y nagpatotoň sa úsap ni
Maryŕ at ni Hwána. She gave testimony in the lawsuit between Maria
and Juana. Si Hwána ay naparoňn sa ákin at siyŕ ng nagpatotoň na ikŕw
ay dumalň sa isa ng sabungŕn. Juana came to me and assured me that you
had attended a cock-fight. Ang pagpapatotoň nyŕ ay hindí tinanggŕp nang
hukňm. The judge did not accept his testimony. Sya y nagpaupň` nang ilŕ
ng eskwéla. He had a few of the pupils sit down. Ang pagpapaupň nang
mačstro sa manga eskwéla ay hindí nila sinunňd agŕd. The teacher's
order to the pupils to sit down was not promptly obeyed. Magpaútang
ka nang kwaltŕ sa manga mahihírap. Lend money to the poor. Nagpauwí
ba si Hwŕn nang sělya sa kanya ng inŕ?--Hindě`. Ang kanya ipinauwč`
ay isa ng singsěng. Did Juan send a chair home to his mother?--No,
he sent home a ring.

Similarly: ábot, alaála, balěk, baňn, dalŕ, dulŕs, dúnong, dúsa,
galěng, gálit, gandŕ, gawŕ`, háyag, hírap, húli, ísip, iyŕk, kilála,
kinábang, kintŕb, kíta, kulň`, kumpisŕl, lagŕy, lákad, larň`, láyas,
láyaw, limňs, lípas, lúto`, magŕt, mísa, pások, siglŕ, singkŕw, sísid,
tahňl, tugtňg, túlog, túlos, ulŕn.

(a) Plural with magsi- (§ 386); nagsěsipagpalimňs.

(b) From a derived word: Huwag kayň ng magpaumága sa inyo ng
pagsasŕlitáan. Don't let yourselves be overtaken by the morning in
your conversation (umága, § 358).

(c) Root with accent shift: Sya y nagpaabňt nang súlat sa ákin. He
had a letter handed to me.

(d) The pa- is accented, expressing extreme degree of action; from
shifted root: Nagpáuna si Hwŕn sa lakarŕn. Juan managed to get himself
into the very first place in the walking-party. So from: íwan.

(e) Doubled root, shifted: Nagpáuna-unŕ si Hwŕn sa lakarŕn nang manga
magkakasáma. Juan got himself too far ahead in the boys' walking-party.

(f) Special static word (of the kind in § 358,d): ang magpapatawŕg
a town-crier.

490. pa- (1) -in, p-in-a. The direct passive from words with pa-
denotes the person ordered to do so and so, the thing caused to be
so and so.

Padalángin mo ang iyo ng pagparíto. Make your coming here
infrequent. Pagka pinapútol ka nyŕ nang káhoy ay sumunňd
ka ng agŕd. When he orders you to cut wood, do you obey at
once. Pinapůpútol námin nang tubň si Pédro. We are having Pedro cut
some sugar-cane. Paputúlin mo si Hwŕn nang kúgon. Have Juan cut the
cugon-weeds. Papůputúlin námin kayň nang yantňk. We shall ask you to
cut some rattan. Pinatahňl ni Hwŕn ang kanya ng áso. Juan made his dog
bark. Pinatalěm nya itň. He made this sharp. Pinatayó ni Hwŕn sa kanya
ng pálad ang kapatěd nya ng maliět na si Maryáno. Juan stood his little
brother Mariano up on his open hand. Hindí ako pinatúlog nang pagtahňl
nang áso. The barking of the dog kept me from sleeping. Patulúgin mo
ang báta`. Put the child to sleep. Pinaupú nya ang manga eskwéla. He
had the pupils sit down. Pinaupú ko ang áki ng bisíta. I asked my
visitors to be seated.

Similarly: alěs, balěk, bilě, bútas, díto, hintň`, inňm, káin,
kápit, lákad, láyas, lípad, pások, tahŕn, takbň, táwad, túlin, túloy,
untě`, yáman.

(a) With accented pŕ-: Pŕbusugin mň ang manga háyop. Feed the animals
till they have had enough. Pŕhampasěn mo siyŕ. Whip him harder. Hwag
mň ng pŕputiěn ang pintŕ nang báhay. Don't paint the house too white.

(b) pŕ- with accent shift: Pŕdalangin mň ang iyo ng pagparíto. Come
here very rarely.

491. pa-pag- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-. The direct passive has pag- before
the root when it corresponds to simple actives with characteristic
mag- (§ 351). Mŕpŕpahámak lámang ang báta ng ito, kapag hindí nátin
pinapagáral nang sapŕt. This boy will turn out a mere good-for-nothing,
if we do not make him study enough. Pinapaghubŕd nang inŕ ang kanya ng
manga anŕk. The mother ordered her children to undress. Pinapagpútol
námin nang ságing sina Hwŕn. We asked Juan and his people to cut
bananas. Papagputúlin mo si Hwŕn nang buhňk. Tell Juan to get a
hair-cut. Papagpůputúlin nila kamě nang kanila ng manga kawáyan. They
will order us to cut all their bamboo. Pinapagsuklŕy ni Hwána ang
kanya ng alíla`. Juana told her maid to comb her (the maid's) hair.

Similarly, from: bíhis, hintň`, trabáho.

(a) From a derived word: Sya y pinapagkalatimbŕ`. He was forced to
do the well-bucket exercise (kalatimbŕ`, § 519).

(b) With extra accent shift: papagtůtuluyěn (túloy).

492. With pang-: Paráti ng pinapanghŕhárang ni Andrčs ang kanya ng
manga kampňn. Andrés often orders his companions to commit highway
robberies. Papanghiraměn mo si Pédro nang lúbid. Have Pedro go and
borrow some rope. Papamutúlin mo nang damň si Pédro. Have Pedro cut
grass. Papamůmutúlin silŕ ni Hwŕn nang damň. Juan will order them to
cut grass.

493. pa-pag-pa- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-pa-. With both pag- and pa-
preceding the root the direct passive with pa- denotes someone caused
to cause something: Pinapagpatotoň nang tagapagtanggňl ni Andrčs ang
táo ng si Mariyáno na syŕ ng nakŕkíta sa nangyáre. Andrés' lawyer
called as a witness the man Mariano, who had seen the occurrence
(cf. magpatotoň, § 489).

494. i-pa-, i-p-in-a-. The instrumental passive with pa- denotes the
object ordered, caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action.

Ipinaálam ko sa kanyŕ ang manga báta`. I made known to him the
departure of the children with me. Ipinaalěs nila ang hárang nang
daŕn. They ordered the obstruction of the road to be removed. Ang
ipinadala mň ng súlat ay tinanggŕp ku nŕ. I have received the letter
you sent me. Ang sapátos na may lapŕd na suwélas na yitň ay syŕ ng
ipinagŕgámit na pangtayň` sa báta`. This flat-soled shoe is given
children to be used in learning to stand up. Ang mayáma ng taga iba
ng báyan na pŕparíto ay ipinahárang nang púno nang tulisŕn. The rich
stranger who was going to come here was held up by order of the chief
of the bandits. Ipinahátě sa ákin ni Pédro ang mansánas. Pedro ordered
me to divide the apples. Itň y ipinaháte ni Pédro parŕ sa ákin. This
was ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me as my share. Isinakŕy
sa trčn ang ipinahatěd mo ng manga dalanghíta`. The tangerines you
shipped were put on board the train. Ipinaísip nya sa manga eskwéla
ang fétsa nang pagaáway nang manga Rúso at Hapunčs sa Port-Ŕrtur. He
asked his pupils to think of the date of the fighting between the
Russians and the Japanese at Port Arthur. Ipakíta mo ang díla` sa
manggagamňt. Show the doctor your tongue. Ipinapůpútol ni Hwŕn ang
manga káhoy sa kanya ng bakúran. Juan is having the trees in his yard
cut down. Ipapůpútol ko ang manggŕs nang áki ng báro`. I am going
to have the sleeves of my blouse cut off. Ipapútol mo, Hwŕn, ang iyo
ng kukň. Have your fingernails cut, Juan. Ang ipinasakŕy ni Tátay na
manga súha` sa trčn ay nangabúlok sa daŕn. The grape-fruit Father sent
by train got spoiled on the way. Ipinasundú ko kay Hwŕn ang médiko. I
told Juan to fetch the doctor. Ipinatáwag ko sa alíla` si Hwŕn. I had
Juan called by a servant. Ipinatayó ni Hwŕn ang báhay na itň. Juan had
this house built. Ipinatipěd nya sa bátŕ ang pagkáin nang lansónes. He
made the child eat sparingly of the lansones. Ipinatípon ni Hwŕn sa
kanya ng kŕtiwála` ang manga kalabŕw. Juan had his agent gather the
carabao. Ipinatúluy nya ang pagkantŕ, káhit na maíngay ang mangŕ
nakíkiněg. He went on with his singing although the audience was noisy.

So: áhon, balěk, baňn, bilanggň`, bítay, dápit, dúsa, gamňt, gawŕ`,
gupět, hábol, háyag, hintň`, hintúlot, kasŕl, kilála, lákad, libŕng,
mána, patŕy, sákit, tápon, uwě`.

(a) Different in meaning is the corresponding form from díto; it is the
primary instrumental passive corresponding to pumaríto, etc. (§ 488):
Ang pagsákop niyŕ nang táu ng makasalánan ay sya nyŕ ng ipinaríto. His
saving of sinful man is what he came here for.

(b) Accent shift is due to the root: Ipaalŕm ka sa kanyŕ ang áki ng
patůtungúhan. Let him know where I am going. Ipinaalam nyŕ sa ákin
ang kanya ng nilóloňb. He made his intentions known to me. Ipinatulňy
ni Pédro ang pagpapatayň nang báhay. Pedro had them go on with the
construction of the house. Similarly: ábot.

(c) With pag- (cf. § 491): ipapagáral.

(d) With pa- prefixed to the root, the instrumental passive with pa-
denotes that ordered to be caused. The only example has radical accent
shift: Ipinapatulňy ni Hwŕn sa kanya ng kŕtiwála` ang pagtataněm
nang manga kasamŕ. Juan had his agent order the field-workers to go
on with the planting.

495. i-pag-pa-, i-p-in-ag-pa-. When the relation of the object ordered
to undergo an action is explicitly that of a thing given forth (§
368), a kind of double instrumental passive is made by prefixing
pag- to the pa- (cf. the explicit use of pag- in primary passives,
§§ 369. 375): Ipinagpaháte` sa ákin ni Pédro ang pálay. The rice was
ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me. Ang kwŕlta ng nŕpangaginŕldohan
ni Hwŕn ay sya nyŕ ng ipinagpasakŕy sa tiyobíbo sa kanya ng kapatěd
na maliět. Juan used his Christmas money to treat his little brother
to a ride on the merry-go-round. Ang kautusŕn ay ipinagpŕpatáwag nang
kúra. The law is being called out by order of the priest.

(a) With additional pa- (as in § 494,d): ipinagpapadalŕ.

496. i-paki-pa-, i-p-in-aki-pa-. Before a word with pa- the
instrumental passive with paki- denotes the thing asked (as a favor) to
be caused to undergo such and such an action. Hwag mň ng ipakipapútol
ang púno-ng-káhoy, dátapuwat pakiputúlin mo na měsmo. Don't ask
someone else to cut down the tree for me, but cut it down for me
yourself. Ipakěkipapútol ni Hwŕn sa inyň ang manga tinibŕn sa kanya
ng bakúran. Juan will ask you to have the banana-stumps in his yard
cut down. Ipinakipapútol nya kay Hwŕn ang manga damň sa bakúran. He
asked Juan to have the grass cut in his yard.

(a) The thing asked (as a favor) to be caused to do so and
so: Ipinakipakáin lámang niya ang kanya ng anŕk hábang sya y
walŕ`. She asked someone else to feed her child while she was
away. Ipinakěkipasúso lámang nya kay Maryŕ ang kanya ng anŕk, sapagkŕt
walá sya ng gátas. She is asking Maria to nurse her child for her,
because she has no milk.

497. pa- (1) -an, p-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with pa- denotes
that caused to undergo an action as local object.

Paaláman mo sa kanyŕ kung saŕn ka páparon. Let him know where you
are going. Pinaasuhŕn ni Pédro ang manga púno-ng-manggŕ. Pedro smoked
(i.e. warmed, so as to speed flowering) the mango trees. Pinabayáan ni
Hwŕn ang kanya ng manga tungkúlin. Juan neglected his duties. Pabayáan
mo syŕ. Leave him alone. Ang pagpatŕy sa manga magnanákaw ay hindí
pinarůrusáhan nang hukňm. The judge does not punish one for killing
robbers. Pinahatían akň ni Pédro nang pálay sa kŕtiwála`. Pedro had
the agent give me my share of rice. Pinahubarŕn nang inŕ ang manga
báta`. The mother had her children undressed. Pakinggŕn nawá ninyň
ang áki ng pagtáwag. Pray give hearing to my call. Pinalěligúan
nang pagňng ang ílog. The turtle bathed in the river. Pinalěligúan
nang babáye ang báta`. The woman was bathing the child. Hwag mň ng
pamaláyan sa marámi na ikŕw ay marámi ng kayamánan sa báhay, úpang
hwag kŕ ng nakáwan. Don't let people know that you have many valuables
in your house, lest you be robbed. Pinanaúgan nya ang báhay. He went
down from the house. Pinaputúlan ni Hwŕn nang taínga ang kanya ng
manga biěk, úpang hwag máangkin nang iba ng táo. Juan had the ears
of his little pigs cut, so that they might not be inadvertently
taken by anyone else. Pinapůputúlan ni Hwŕn nang buntňt ang lahŕt
nang kanya ng manga manňk. Juan has all his chickens' tails clipped
(for identification). Paputúlan mo nang kaunti` ang mahábŕ mo ng
buhňk. Have your long hair cut a little. Papůputúlan ko nang buntňt
ang manga manňk na bágo ng bilč. I shall have the tails clipped of the
chickens I have just bought. Ang bangka ng itň ay pinasakyŕn ko kay
Hwŕn. I allowed Juan to ride in this canoe. Pinatunáyan sa ákin ni Hwŕn
na ikŕw ay nagsúsugŕl. Juan proved to me that you are gambling. Ano ng
bandŕ ang kanilŕ ng pinatůtungúhan? What direction are they headed for?

So also: bendisiyňn, dalŕ, hintúlot, hírap, doňn, kinábang, magŕt,
mána, panhěk, sákit, tábon, tigŕs, walŕ`.

(a) Accent shift, due to the root: pabayaŕn, equivalent, however,
to pabayáan.

(b) pŕ-: Pŕagáhan mo ang pagsúlong. Get away very early. Pŕináman mo
ang súlat. Write very neatly. Pŕitiman mň ang kúlay nang túbig. Make
the color of the water very black. Hwag mň ng pŕputian ang pintŕ nang
báhay. Don't put too much white into the paint for the house.

(c) pa- also prefixed to the root: Pinapahatían akň ni Pédro nang
pálay sa kŕtiwála`. Pedro told the agent to have me given my share
of rice. Pinapahatían ni Pédro nang pálay ang manga kasamŕ. Pedro
ordered that the laborers be given their share of rice.

498. Special static words are formed with pŕ- and -an to denote place
or plurality of habitual causative action; barytone roots have accent
shift of two syllables, sometimes optionally of one syllable:

Ang maliět na sápa ng itň ay sya ng pŕbiyáyan ni Alfňnso nang maliliět
na isdŕ ng nŕhůhúli nya sa ílog. This little pool is where Andrés
turns loose the little fish he catches in the river. Ang pŕlangúyan
nang manga páto ni Hwŕn ay malálim. Juan's duck-pond is deep. Ang
kanila ng pŕtagálan nang pagsísid ay ginawá nila sa Sibůl. Their
diving-contest took place at Sibol.

ang pŕrusahŕn penitentiary; hell. ang pŕliguŕn bathroom, bathtub.

So also: pŕkumpisálan, pŕaralŕn, pŕhayagŕn pŕhayágan, pŕmahalaŕn
pŕmahaláan.

(a) Derived from these a transient and abstract in mag-: ang
pagpapŕtagálan a contesting for endurance.



(3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka-.

499. mag-pa-ka-, pag-pa-pa-ka-. The active with mag-pa- (§ 489) from
words with ka- expresses a reflexive actor: Ang pagpapakahírap sa
pagaáral ay máy ganti ng pála`. Exerting oneself at studies has its
reward. Nagpakamatŕy si Lúkas. Lucas committed suicide. Magpápakamatŕy
si Lúkas. Lucas will commit suicide. ang pagpapakamatŕy the act of
suicide. So also from: walŕ`.

(a) From forms with ma-, in more intensive sense than mag- alone (§
352,c): Ang pagpapakamarúnong serious effort at learning things.

With irregularities of accent, as in § 353,a.b.: Sya y
nagpakamápuri. He praised himself very much. Sya y nagpakamayabŕng. He
boasted much.

500. pa-ka- (1) -in, p-in-a-ka-. The direct passive with pa-ka- denotes
something caused to be too much so and so: Hwag mň ng pakalalímin ang
gawi ng húkay. Don't make the hole you are to dig too deep. Hwag mň
ng pakalŕlalímin ang hůhukáin mo ng balňn. Don't make the well you
are going to dig too deep. Pinakalálim ni Hwŕn ang húkay. Juan made
the ditch too deep.

(a) The form with p-in-a-ka- occurs as special static word: pinakamahŕl
most expensive, dearest; pinakamúra cheapest.

(b) More commonly from words with ma- (§ 454): Si Risŕl ay syŕ ng
naging pinakamarúnong na táo sa kapulua-ng-Filipínas. Rizal was
the most learned man in the Philippines. pinakamalakŕs strongest;
pinakamalínis cleanest. So from: búti, hába`, halagŕ, húsay, kínis.

501. i-kŕ-pa-, i-k-in-ŕ-pa-. The instrumental passive with i-kŕ- (§
417) from words with pa- expresses the thing or circumstance causing
someone to be made to do so and so. Ikinŕpaalěs sa kanyŕ sa báhay
ni Hwŕn ang kanya ng pangungumět. His petty thievery caused him
to be ordered to leave Juan's house, to be dismissed from Juan's
house. Ikinŕpŕpaalěs nila sa kanyŕ ang kanya ng pinaggagawŕ ng
katampalasánan sa manga háyop. His constant cruelty to the animals is
forcing them to dismiss him. Ang kaibigŕn nya ng mŕtúto ay sya nyŕ
ng ikináparoon sa Espánya. His desire to get an education is what
made him go to Spain. Baká mo ikŕpahámak ang iyo ng pagparoňn. I am
afraid your going there may cause you to be unfortunate. Ikŕpŕpahámak
nya ang kanya ng pagsusundálo. His military service will cause him
to fall into bad ways.

(a) With pag- either before or after the kŕ- a voluntary actor is
implied who is caused to make someone or something do or be so and
so. Ang ipinagkŕpasakŕy ni Hwŕn sa kanya ng máy sakit na kapatěd sa
trčn sa lugŕr nang sa karumáta ay ang katulínan nang trčn. What made
Juan have his brother ride on the train rather than in a carriage was
the speed of the train. Nagpaísip sya sa kanya ng manga eskwéla nang
manga paraŕ ng ikŕpagpŕpalakč nilŕ sa kanila ng aklátan. He had his
students think of means that would help them to make their library
(get) larger.

502. pa-ka- (1) -an. Local passive with pa- (§ 497) from a word with
ka- (§ 398): pinakawalŕn was allowed to go free.

503. ka-pa- (1) -an. Local passive with ka- (§ 419) from a word with
pa- (§ 481): kapŕpatungúhan the place one will be headed for.

(a) Static words with ka-pa- -an are forms with ka- -an from words
with pa-:

With S (§ 421): Si Hwŕn ang kapŕtagálan ni Maryáno sa pagsísid sa
túbig. Juan contends with Mariano in staying under water as long
as possible.

With S (1), (§ 423); accent irregularly placed: Ang báta ng si Pédro
ang sya ng kŕpakitáan ni Maryŕ nang kanyŕ ng larwŕn. Little Pedro is
the child to whom Maria showed her toys and who showed her his.

With (2), (§ 422): Ang kapabayaŕn nya sa manga tungkúlin ay syŕ ng
malakě nya ng kapintásan. His neglectfulness of his duties is his
great fault.

504. maka-pa-. With maka- in the usual meanings (§ 433 ff.) a few
transients are made from words pa-. Nakapahingŕ sa lílim ang manga
kalabŕw. The carabao rested in the shade (irrational actor). Bayáan
mo ng makapahingŕ ang manga dalŕ mo ng kalabŕw bágu ka bumalěk sa
búkid. Let the carabao that brought you rest before you go back to
the country. Makapŕpahinga nŕ ang manga háyop bágo sya dumatěng. The
carabao will have rested before he arrives. So from: doňn, lígo`.

505. Commoner is maka-pag-pa- (corresponding to mag-pa-); the abstract
has pagkapa-. Nakapagpapútol na akň nang káhoy na gŕgamítin ko sa boň
ng tagulŕn. I have already had wood cut for the entire rainy season. Si
Lílay ay nakŕkapagpapútol nang káhoy sa alílŕ ni Kíka`. Lilay
has permission to order Kika's servant to cut the wood. Hindí ako
makapagpapútol nang tubň kay Hwŕn, sapagkŕt marámi sya ng trabáho sa
ibŕ. I cannot have Juan cut sugar-cane, because he has already too
much work to do for other people. Makŕkapagpapútol akň nang labňng,
kung iyň ng gustň. I can have some bamboo-shoots cut, if you wish.

So from: bilě, kínis, tápon.

506. The passive with ma- from words with pa- varies in meaning,
owing chiefly to the various values of words with pa-.

(a) Genuine passive: Hindí nya napahinňg ang manga ságing. He did
not succeed in getting the bananas to ripen. Mapahíhiram mo ba
akň nang lima ng píso ng gintň? Can you let me borrow five dollars
gold? Napapások ko sa kurŕl ang manga kalabŕw. I succeeded in bringing
the carabao into the corral. Napatátalim ni Pédro ang mapurňl na
gúlok. Pedro is able to sharpen dull bolos. So from: alěs, puntŕ,
sáboy, túlog.

(b) Reflexive passive: Ang máy sakit ay napadapŕ` sa manga nagŕalágŕ
sa kanyŕ, sapagkŕt sya hindí makakílos. The sick man had the people
who were caring for him lay him on his face, because he could not
move. Napagísing si Hwŕn sa kanya ng kapatěd sa óras nang alaskwátro
nang umága. Juan had his brother wake him up at four o'clock in the
morning. Napapások akň sa síne sa áki ng kúyang. I asked my oldest
brother to take me to the moving-picture show. Mapapŕpások.... I shall
ask to be taken in. Silŕ y napatůtúlong. They are asking for help. So:
álam, hatěd, tawěd.

(c) Reflexive of interest: Napaakiyŕt akň kay Hwŕn nang isa
ng búnga-ng-nyňg. I asked Juan to climb for a cocoanut for
me. Napapútol silŕ nang káhoy. They asked to have wood cut for
them. Napapůpútol ang manga anŕk nang kanila ng kukň kay Nánay. The
children ask Mother to cut their fingernails. Napapůpútol akň nang
gŕgawi ng pípa kay Hwŕn. I am asking Juan to cut me some wood for
a cigarette-mouthpiece. Napatilŕd akň nang tubň kay Nánay. I asked
Mother to slice me some sugar-cane.

(d) Movement: Napabíngit sya sa malaki ng pangánib. He got into a
very dangerous situation. Naparíne sa tabi kň ang báta`. The child
came up close to me. Ang magkaybíga ng si Pédro at si Maryáno ay
naparoňn sa Mayníla`. The two friends, Pedro and Mariano, have gone
to Manila. Sya y napaóo. He assented. So from: díto, loňb, salámat,
túngo. Also from the derived word luwásan: napaluwásan.

507. Instrumental passive only in: maipabarěl.

508. Passive with mŕ- (§ 463 ff.) from words with pa-. Bumitěw ang
bátŕ sa lúbid, kanyá nŕparapŕ` ang kanyŕ ng kahatakŕn. As the child
let go of the rope, the one who was pulling against him fell on his
face. Nŕparíto si Hwŕn sa kanyŕ ng pagtatagň` sa manga tiktčk. Juan
happened to come here in his hiding from the spies. Nŕpŕparíto sya
ng madalŕs. He often gets round here. Mŕpŕparíto raw syŕ sa báya
ng itň. He will get round to our town, he says. Nŕpahámak sya sa
ginawá nya ng pagsusugŕl at pagsasábong. He became good-for-nothing
through his gambling and cock-fighting. Nŕpŕpahámak ang báta ng
si Hwŕn, dahilŕn sa lubňs na pagpapaláyaw sa kanyŕ nang kanya ng
manga magúlang. Little Juan is getting spoiled through his parents'
complete indulgence. Hwag kŕ ng duwŕg, Hwŕn, at nang hwŕg ka ng
mŕpahámak lámang sa iyo ng pagsusundálo. Don't be a coward, Juan,
so that you may not merely come to misfortune through your military
service. Mŕpŕpahámak lámang ang báta ng itň, kapag hindí nátin
pinapagáral nang sapŕt. This boy will turn out a good-for-nothing,
if we don't make him study enough. Hindí nŕpahinňg na maága ni Hwŕn
ang manga ságing. Juan didn't get his bananas ripe early enough. Hindí
nya nŕpahinňg ang manga ságing, sapagkŕt naúbus agŕd. He did not get
his bananas ripe, because they were all eaten up too soon. Si Pédro ay
nŕpŕpahingŕ. Pedro is resting. Nŕpatayó si Pédro dahilŕn sa kanya ng
pagkŕgúlat. Pedro leaped to his feet in his surprise. Dahilŕn sa kanya
ng pagkŕgúlat ay nŕpaupú siya. In his surprise he fell into his chair.

So from: gúlat, halakhŕk, hitsŕ, iyŕk, kasŕl, lagŕy, lagpŕk, luksň,
sigŕw, tinděg.

(a) Plural with -ang-: Ang manga kalabŕw ay nangŕpŕpahingŕ. The
carabao are resting. So: nangápamanghŕ`.

(b) Accent shift: Nŕpagisěng si Hwŕn sa kalakasŕn nang putňk nang
barěl. The report of the gun was so loud that Juan woke up. So: táwa.

(c) Abstract, of movements, pagkŕpa-. Ang dáhil nang kanya ng
pagkŕparíto ay ang paniningěl. What brought him here was the collecting
of debts. Ang pagkŕpalígo nang kabáyo ay marumč. The horse has not
been bathed clean. So from: alíla`, doňn.

(d) With makŕ- D (§ 473) from -paríto: Hwag kŕ ng
makŕparí-paríto. Don't you ever come round here!

509. Instrumental passive, mŕ-i-pa-, from: dalŕ, kilála, kíta, túlos.

510. Local passive, mŕ-pa- (1) -an. Mŕpŕparusáhan kitŕ. I shall have
to punish you. So: kiněg.

511. Special static words with nŕ-pa-ka- denote something having a high
degree of such and such a quality. Ang sákit na iyo ng ipinarůrúsa sa
ákin ay nápakabigŕt. The grief you cause me is very severe. Nŕpakabúte
ang kanya ng pagkatákot. Her fear reached a high degree. Ang sakŕy
na táo nang kutséro sa karumáta ay nŕpakatabŕ`. The man the driver
has taken into his carriage is very stout. So also: iklě`.

(a) From a phrase: nŕpakawala-ng-hiyŕ`.



5. The prefix pati-.

512. pati- before a root expresses that such and such a movement
(of one's own person) is suddenly performed.

513. With mag- it denotes the voluntary performer. Barytone roots seem
to have accent shift. Ang báta y nagpatihigŕ` sa sahěg. The child
suddenly lay down on the floor. Nagpatihulňg si Pédro sa bintána`
sa isa ng pagsumpňng nang kanya ng pagkalóko. Pedro suddenly threw
himself from the window in an attack of his madness. Nagpŕpatihulňg si
Hwŕn sa hagdánan kung sinúsumpňng nang kalokóhan, kaniyŕ` sya y itináli
nilŕ sa isa ng halígi nang báhay. They tied Juan to one of the posts of
the house, because when he is assailed by a fit of insanity he throws
himself down the stairs. Magpŕpatihulňg daw sya mulá sa ituktňk nang
kanya ng bělanggúan úpang sya y makataanŕn. He says he will throw
himself from the roof of his prison so as to make an escape. Sya y
nagpatiluhňd. He suddenly knelt down. Ang pagpapatiluhňd nang báta`
ay sya ng nakasakět sa kanya ng túhod. The boy's throwing himself on
his knees is what injured his knee.

514. The passive with mŕ- denotes the involuntary
performer. Nŕpŕpatihigŕ` ang báwat mádulŕs sa lugŕr na itň. Every one
who slips at this place falls on his back. Hwag kŕ ng magpadulŕs,
sapagkŕt baká ka mŕpatihigŕ`. Don't slide, for you might fall
on your back. Sya y nŕpatiluhňd. He fell, landing in a kneeling
position. Nŕpatiupú sya sa kanya ng pagkádulŕs. He fell into a sitting
position when he slipped. Nŕpŕpatiupň` ang báwat táo ng magdaŕn sa
lugŕr na itň, dahilŕn sa madulŕs na lúmot nang lúpa`. Everyone who
comes through this place falls and lands in a sitting position,
owing to the slippery moss on the ground.



III. Irregular Derivatives.

(1) Transients and abstracts of the particles sa and -ging.

515. The particle sa has transient forms as follows:

(a) A normal transient: with pŕ-sa, pá-pŕ-sa, ná-sa, ná-sŕ-sa. Nása
simbáhan silŕ. They are (were) at church. Násŕsa simbáhan silŕ nang
mangyáre ang súnog. They were at church when the fire occurred. Nang
pása simbáhan silŕ.... When they went to church.... Pápŕsa simbáhan
silŕ. They will go to church.

Plural: Nangása simbáhan silŕ. They are (were) at church.

(b) An accidental passive (of movement): má-pa-sa, má-pŕ-pa-sa,
ná-pa-sa-, ná-pŕ-pa-sa-; abstract: pagká-pa-sa. Nang mápasa simbáhan
silŕ ay malálim nŕ ang gabě. When they got to the church, it was
already late at night. Mápŕpasa simbáhan silŕ sa gabě. They will strike
the church at nightfall. ang pagkápasa simbáhan a chance coming upon
the church.

516. The (transient) forms of -ging are ma-gěng, ma-gí-ging, na-gěng,
na-gí-ging; abstract: pa-gi-gěng. Magpůpútol daw nang buhňk ang Intsčk
na si Yčng pagigěng binyágan nya. The Chinaman Yeng says he will have
his queue cut when he gets baptized.



(2) Odd affixes.

517. ba- seems to appear in ba-lasěng.

518. hin-, with irregular nasalization of initials, in one simple
derivative: Ang kanya ng himatŕy ay hindí nalaúnan. Her fainting-fit
did not last long (matŕy). -himagsěk (bagsěk) does not occur, but
underlies many derivatives, especially maghimagsěk (§ 352,c) and
hěmagsíkan (§ 377,a). Many such underlying forms can be postulated
from the various transients with manghin- (§ 357,b).

(a) With r: ang hintutúro` the forefinger (túro`).

519. kala- in ang kalaháte` a half; ang kalatimbŕ` dipping on the
heels and rising, hands holding opposite ears (as trick or imposed
as a punishment), from háti` and timbŕ` a well-bucket; these have
various further derivatives, see Index.

520. kasing- having such and such a quality in common with something
else; hence partly equivalent with ka-: Kasingkúlay nang áki ng
báro` ang kanya ng salawŕl. His trousers are of the same color as my
blouse. Ang bóla ng itň ay kasinglakě nang itlňg. This ball is the
same size as an egg. Si Hwŕn ay kasingpantŕy ni Pédro. Juan is of
the same height as Pedro.

521. mala- (Spanish ?) derogatory: ang malasutsňt a young lout,
a half-grown boy (literally: a bad whistler).

522. pala- expresses extreme tendency to such and such an action:

(a) pala- S -in, from oxytone roots: Sya y isa ng palabintángin. He
is very distrustful. Ang manga isdŕ y palabůlúkin sa tagáraw. Fish
easily spoil in the hot season. ang palalungkútin a melancholy person,
palapůtákin a fowl given to cackling, palasumbúngin tattle-tale,
palasutsútin one who is always whistling, palatuntúnin one who is
always trying to follow up his stolen property, palatuwáin palatwáin
one who is easily amused.

From root with shifted accent: palasŕkítin person who is always
getting sick. Irregularly: palahůníhin an animal given to neighing,
chirping, etc.

Lack of secondary accent: palaiyákin a cry-baby.

(b) pala- (2) -in, from barytone roots: palagalitěn a hot-head,
palagisingěn a poor sleeper, palagutuměn one who is always getting
hungry, palagulatěn nervous person, palahilawěn a kind of rice that
is hard to cook through; Palaputulěn ang manga tingtěng nang walěs
na ytň. The fibres of this broom are very brittle. palatakutěn a
timorous person.

(c) palŕ- -an the place for such and such a thing: ang palŕisdáan
a fish-pond, palŕsingsíngan the ring-finger, the fourth finger,
palŕtuntúnan a set of rules, rules of order.

523. ta- in ta-gílid the side; with retraction of accent: -talíkod.

524. tag- in names of seasons: tagáraw, tagulŕn, the two Philippine
seasons; ang taglaměg cold weather, the (American) winter. With
accent-shift: taginět the hot season.

525. taga- person whose duty it is to do so and so, especially upon
some particular occasion: ang tagaalěs nang gwarnisyňn nang kabáyo
the one detailed to unharness the horses, tagabílang accountant,
counter, tagaíkid sa gawaŕn nang lúbid the one who rolls up a rope
in the rope-factory; Ikŕw ay tagainům lámang. Your job here is only
to drink; so: tagakáin one whose only duty is to eat. Tagapútol nang
káhoy ang katungkúlan niyŕ. He is delegated to cut wood. tagasúlat the
one who does the writing; tagatahč` one who does the sewing. So from:
húli, sulsě.

(a) With pag-: tagapagbigŕy, tagapagtanggňl.

(b) With pag-pa- one whose duty it is to oversee the doing of so and
so: ang tagapagpaalěs nang tapňn nang manga bóte head bottle-opener;
tagapagpainům sa fiyčsta bartender at a fiesta; Isa ng tagapagpainům ay
isa ng tagapagbigŕy nang inuměn sa manga háyop o manga báta`. So: ang
tagapagpakáin who gives food to animals or children, tagapagpalígo` who
bathes children or horses, tagapagpasúlat head writer, tagapagpatotoň
witness.

526. tara-, tra- is felt to be a prefix in: ang táo ng tarabúko,
trabúko a bald-headed person, felt as derivative from búko smooth,
unripe cocoanut.

527. -éro (Spanish) as suffix of agent; final vowel (or vowel plus
n or glottal stop) is lost: bangkéro, sabungéro, sipéro (sipéros,
plural); from derived word: Katipunéros (ka-tipún-an, § 423); from
compound word: básag-uléro a brawler, ruffian (básag-úlo).



(3) Pronoun forms.

528. The various forms of the pronouns and objectivizing particles
show some regular derivation.

(a) n- with irregularities, for disjunctive forms: n-ang, n-i (si),
n-inŕ n-ilŕ (sinŕ silŕ), n-íno (síno), n-irč, n-itň, n-iyŕn, n-oňn
(iyňn, yaňn); n-itŕ (kitŕ), n-iyŕ (siyŕ), n-ilŕ (silŕ). From the
prepositive form: n-átin, n-ámin, n-iniyň.

Similarly, the particle nawŕ`, root áwa` pity.

(b) ka- for local and prepositive forms: ka-y (si), k-inŕ (sinŕ);
from the disjunctive form: ka-níno, ka-nitŕ, ka-niyŕ. ka-nilŕ.

(c) With si compare sí-no, with ang, a-nň.

(d) Local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns (treated as
separate roots): d-íne (irč), d-íto (itň), d-iyŕn, d-oňn.

(e) Words of manner with ga-: ga-áno, gá-no (anň), ga-yňn (iyňn). From
disjunctive forms: ga-nitň, ga-niyŕn, ga-noňn. Cf. also gáya like.

Of similar formation: Ang butň nang haláma ng itň y gabútil nang
pálay. The seed of this plant is as large as a grain of rice (bútil
a kernel of grain).

(f) saŕn (for sa anň?) is felt as a simple word.









III. LIST OF FORMATIONS.


The formations with irregular affixes (515 ff.) have been omitted
from this list.

The following regular features have been ignored:

(1) Prefixes beginning with n-; these are the actual-mode forms of
prefixes beginning with m-, and are treated in the same paragraphs
as the latter.

(2) Forms with doubling or reduplication of the root; also those with
accented reduplication (of root or prefix) expressing durative aspect;
these are treated in the same paragraphs as the corresponding forms
without reduplication.

(3) Secondary accent, when not peculiar to prefixes.

(4) Variations in position of accent.

The numbers refer to paragraphs.





A. FORMS WITHOUT PREFIX.

(1) No affix: 332. 336. 338. 341-346. 348. 358.

(2) Suffix only:
  -an 31. 334,c. 374. 377-381.
  -anan 377,b.
  -han, -hanan see -an.
  -hanin, -hin see -in.
  -in 334,c. 359. 367.
  -inan 377,b.
  -nan see -an.
  -nin see -in.

(3) Infix only:
  -in- 334,b,1. 359. 365. 366.
  -in- -um- 359,a.
  -um- 348. 349. 358.

(4) Infix and suffix:
  -in- -an 374.
  -um- -in 359,a.





B. FORMS WITH PREFIX.

i- 31. 334,a,2.b,2. 368. 373.
    i- -in- 368.
    ika- 413. 416.
    ikŕ- 417.
    ikŕpa- 501.
    ikŕpag- 418.
    ikŕpagpa- 501,a.
    ikin ... see ik ...; the -in- expresses actual mode.
    ini- see i- -in-.
    ipa- 494.
    ipag- 369-371.
    ipag- -an- 369,a.
    ipagka- 414. 415.
    ipagkŕpa- 501,a.
    ipagma- 370.
    ipagpa- 495.
    ipaki- 394.
    ipakipa- 496.
    ipakipag- 395.
    ipang- 372.
    ipapang- 394,c.
    ipin ... see ip ...; the -in- expresses actual mode.

    ka- 31. 76. 77. 179. 183. 334,a,2. 398. 400-402.
    kŕ- 403.
    ka- -an 419. 421-426.
    kŕ- -an 428. 430. 431.
    ka- -anan 423,b.
    ka- -anin 421,a.
    ka- -in- 412.
    kŕka- 399. 404.
    kamag- 398,a.
    kamag- -an 423,b.
    kamaka- 398,a.
    kapa- -an 503.
    kŕpa- -an 503,a.
    kapag- 400,a. 486,c.
    kapang- 400,b.
    kapang- -an 421,b. 423,b.
    kapŕpa- 486,b.
    kay- see ka-.
    kina- 412.
    kina- -an 419.
    kinŕ- -an 260. 503.
    kinŕ- -anin 421,a.
    kinapa- -an 503.
    kuma- 404.
    ma- 438 ff. 444. 449. 454.
    mŕ- 463 ff. 469.
    ma- -an 451.
    mŕ- -an 475.
    ma- -in 457.
    mag- 34. 334,a,1. 350. 353-356. 358.
    mag- -um- 352,c.
    mag- -an 352,d.
    mag- -in 352,d. 358,a.
    magka- 405. 408. 409,a.
    magkŕ- 410. 411.
    magka- -an 427,a,c.
    magkŕ- -an 430.
    magkaka- 409.
    magkaka- -an 427,d.
    magkinŕka- 412,a.
    magma- 352,c. 353,a.
    magmŕ- 353,b.
    magmaka- 453,a.
    magpa- 489.
    magpŕ- 489,d,e.
    magpa- -um- 489,b.
    magpŕ- -an 498,a.
    magpaka- 499.
    magpakama- 499,a.
    magpakamŕ- 499,a.
    magpapa- 489 f.
    magpati- 513.
    magsi- 385.
    magsipa- 488,d.
    magsipag- 386.
    magsipag- -an 386,b.
    magsipagka- 406.
    magsipagpa- 489,a.
    magsipang- 387.
    mŕi- 474.
    maipa- 507.
    mŕipa- 509.
    maipag- 450.
    maipang- 450.
    maka- 433 ff. 444. 453.
    makŕ- 458 ff. 469. 473. 479.
    mŕka- 470,a.
    maka- -an 443. 454,c.
    mŕka- -an 488.
    makapa- 504.
    makapag- 445. 447.
    makapagpa- 505.
    makŕpaki- 473,a.
    makapang- 448.
    makapang- -in 448,b.
    maki- 390.
    makipag- 391.
    makipag- -an 391,a.
    makipagka- -an 427,b.
    makipang- 392.
    mang- 334,a,4. 357. 358.
    mŕng- 358,e. f.
    mang- -in 357,a.
    manga- 442.
    mangŕ- 467.
    manga- -an 421,a.
    mangagsi- 385,a.
    mangagsipag- 386,a.
    mangaka- 442.
    mangŕka- 442. 470,b.
    mangŕpa- 508,a.
    mapa- 506.
    mŕpa- 508.
    mŕpa- -an 510.
    mapag- 446. 455.
    mŕpag- 471.
    mapag- -an 452.
    mŕpag- -an 476.
    mŕpagka- -an 488,a.
    nŕpaka- 511.
    mapang- 454,c. 456.
    mŕpang- 472.
    mŕpang- -an 477.
    mŕpati- 514.
    pa- 207. 481-484. 487.
    pŕ- 487,d. 515,a.
    pa- -an 497.
    pŕ- -an 497,b. 498.
    pa- -in 490.
    pŕ- -in 490,a,b.
    pag- 34. 274. 334,a,1. 348-356.
    pag- -an 352,d. 375.
    pag- -anan 375,b.
    pag- -in 352,c. 360-363.
    pag- -um- 352,c.
    pagka- 274. 404. 433, ff. 444. 453,b.
    pagkŕ- 274. 458 ff. 469.
    pagka- -an 420.
    pagkŕ- -an 429.
    pagkaka- 405. 406. 407,a,b.
    pagkakŕ- 410. 411.
    pagkŕka- 470,a.
    pagkaka- -an 427,a.
    pagkakŕ- -an 430,a,b.
    pagkŕpa- 508,c.
    pagkapag- 445. 447.
    pagkŕpag- 471.
    pagkapang- 448.
    pagkapang- -in- 448,b.
    pagmama- 352,c. 353,a.
    pagmamŕ- 353,b.
    pagpa- 488.
    pagpapa- 489.
    pagpapŕ- -an 498,a.
    pagpapa- -um- 498,b.
    pagpapaka- 499.
    pagpapakama- 499,a.
    pagpapakamŕ- 499,a.
    pai- 481,a.
    paka- -an 502.
    paka- -in 500.
    paki- 389.
    paki- -an 396.
    paki- -in 393.
    pakiki- 390.
    pakikipag- 391.
    pakikipag- -an 391,a.
    pakikipagka- -an 427,b.
    pakikipang- 392.
    pakipag- -an 396,b.
    panu- see pang-.
    pang- 334,a,4. 347. 357.
    pang- -an 376.
    pŕng- -an 383.
    pang- -in 357,a. 364. 367,b.
    pŕng- -in 367,c.
    panganga- -an 421,a. 422,a.
    pangpa- 486,a.
    papa- 485.
    pŕpa- 488.
    papa- -an 497,c.
    papag- -in 491. 491,b.
    papagpa- -in 493.
    papang- 492.
    pau- see pa-.
    pin... see p...; the -in- expresses actual mode.
    puma- 488.









INDEX OF WORDS.


The words are arranged by roots, in accordance with the speech-feeling,
so far as ascertainable. The forms díne, díto, diyŕn, doňn have,
however, been given separate places.

In using the index the sound-variations described in § 334 should
be kept in view. The forms are given with fullest accentuation and
vocalism (iy for y, uw for w after consonant), regardless of actual
occurrence. For e see i, for o see u. Foreign r is under d, f under p,
v under b.

The brief indication of meaning after each form ignores shades of
meaning that would require long definitions; so especially factors
of involuntary or completed action and of ability (ka-, maka-, ma-)
and of accident or ability due to external causes (kŕ-, makŕ-, mŕ-).

The references to occurrence have been limited by considerations
of space; the numbers refer to page and line; when in heavy type,
to paragraphs of the Grammatical Analysis.

The following abbreviations are used: arch.: felt as archaic. C.:
Chinese. disj.: disjunctive form. E.: English. excl.: exclusive. id.:
the same meaning. incl.: inclusive. intr.: English definition to be
taken in intransitive sense. loc.: local. n.: name. pl.: the Tagalog
form is an explicit plural. prep.: prepositive. S.: Spanish [11]. tr.:
English definition to be taken in transitive sense.





A

a- see anň, ang.

abŕ ah 151(14).

abakŕ S. hemp 237(37).

-abála: pagabála a bothering; see Corrigenda.
  nangabála made trouble 239(29).
  kaabalahŕn trouble 302(14).

-abŕng: umabŕng watch for 226(23).
  umáabŕng is lying in wait 64(41).
  nakaabŕng is on guard 48(12).

ábito S. vestment 98(20).

abéynte-kuwátro S. twenty-fourth 110(11).

abúbot belongings 118(23).

-ábot (a) overtake: abútan be reached 92(19). 299(38).
  inabútan was overtaken 52(42). 84(34). 250(30).
  inŕabútan is being reached 301(34).
  paábot let oneself be overtaken 301(21).
  paaábot pl. 46(11).
  nagpaábot let himself be overtaken 52(28).
  --(b) with accent-shift; reach for, take: umabňt reach for
  231(5). 237(20). reached for 231(6).
  umáabňt reaches for 62(14).
  pagabňt a reaching for 231(7).
  nagáabňt is handing 237(17).
  pagaabňt a handing 237(19).
  inabňt was taken 30(10).
  ináabot is being reached for 246(3).
  iyabňt be handed 249(13).
  iniyabňt was handed 30(13). 106(21).
  iniyáabňt is being handed 249(12).
  kaŕbútan one of two who hand to each other 278(4).
  maabňt he reached 286(28).
  maáabňt will be reached 20(27).
  naabňt was reached 286(27).
  pagkaabňt a reaching for see Corrigenda.
  náabňt was reached 296(13).
  pagkáabňt a reaching for see Corrigenda.
  paabňt caused to be handed 300(23).
  nagpaabňt caused to be handed 304(21).
  ipinaabňt was caused to be handed 52(11).

-ága: umága morning
50(40). 62(36). 66(25). 120(19). 163(23). 190(24). 241(39). 262(5).
  inůumága is being overtaken by morning 245(42).
  magpaumága let oneself be overtaken by morning 304(18).
  agáhan be done early 250(30).
  maága early 312(27).
  paága early rice 300(3).
  pŕága be very early 301(36).
  pŕagáhan be done very early 308(36).

agŕd soon 32(22). 42(31). 48(26). 265(1).
  agŕd-agŕd immediately 36(5). 48(37.40). 265(1).

ágaw that snatched 220(17).
  agŕw snatched 222(16).
  umágaw snatched 226(24).
  inágaw was snatched 250(11).
  agawŕn a grabbing together 260(3).
  pagaagawŕn a scrambling 108(25).
  nagsěsipagagawŕn are scrambling 108(24).
  naŕágaw can be seized 40(8).
  makŕágaw seize 108(31).

aginŕldo S. Christmas present; as n. 118(6).
  nŕpangaginŕlduhan was given as a Christmas present 298(26). 307(21).

ágos stream 16(3).
  umŕágos is streaming 44(42).

ŕguwa-bindíta S. holy-water 96(28).

áhas snake 120(21).

-áhit: pangáhit razor 232(17).
  nangáhit did shaving 167(2).
  inahítan was shaved 250(32).

-áhon: umáhon go up 116(18). went up 226(25).
  umŕáhon is going up 110(20).
  ŕáhon will go up 263(26).
  pagáhon a going up 226(27).
  nagsiáhon went up, pl. 118(13).
  ipinaáhon was caused to go up 120(16).

akála` opinion 20(8). 98(15). 271.
  pangakála panukála` thought 16(9). 224(40). 226(1).
  nagakála` thought, planned 24(17). 50(13).
  inakála` was thought 18(17.24).
  inŕakála` is being thought 11(86).
-ákap: nŕŕákap is embracing 66(40).

-ákay (a) lead: umŕákay is leading 22(31).
  inákay was led 26(36).
  (b) with accent-shift inakŕy young of animal 102(20). 247(13).

ákin prep. and loc. of akň: my, me, by me 165. 169. 182.

-akiyŕt: umakiyŕt climb 22(39). climbed 16(15).
  áakiyŕt will climb 22(36).
  pagakiyŕt a climbing 24(6).
  nagsísiakiyŕt are climbing 108(31).
  ŕakiyatěn will be climbed 16(15).
  makaakiyŕt be able to climb 108(28).
  makaákiyŕt will be able to climb 22(37).
  maakiyŕt be able to be climbed 16(13).
  náakiyŕt got carried up 295(3).
  paakiyŕt ask to be climbed with or for; caused to be climbed or
  climbed for; climbing up 106(14). 299(6.37). 301(22.29).
  paáakiyŕt will ask to be climbed with or for 301(38). 302(1).
  napaakiyŕt asked to be climbed for 311(37).

aklŕt book 154(28).
  aklátan library 210(12). See báhay.

-akmŕ`: inakmaŕn was prepared for 70(29).

akň I 16(17). 152(14). 63. Cf. ákin, ko.

áko` person relieved 220(19).
  pangáko` 233(35).
  mangáko` promise 44(13).
  ináko` was pledged for 220(19). 243(31).
  ipinangáko` was promised 34(10).
  pagkapangáko` a having promised 44(22). 287(29).

alaála souvenir, present 72(37). 221(3).
  pangalaála memory 116(24).
  alalahánin be minded 104(33).
  ŕalalahánin will be minded 243(34).
  inŕalaála is being remembered 243(32).
  naalaála was remembered 202(36).
  nŕalaála was recalled 30(16). 72(23). 100(13).
  nŕŕalaála is remembered. mŕalaála be recalled 86(3).
  paalaála caused to be given as a souvenir 299(8).
  pagpapaalaála a causing to be remembered 292(22).

-alága`: nagŕalága` is attending to 311(28).

alagŕd assistant 114(12).

aláhas (S.) jewelry 102(24).

álak wine, liquor 221(6).

-alala see alaála.

-álam (a) know: mŕláman be known 22(35). 298(9).
  mŕlŕláman will be known 42(37).
  nŕláman was known 26(32).
  nŕlŕláman is known 24(32).
  mŕpagaláman be generally known 60(35).
  paálam causing himself to be known (as leaving) 183(17).
  ipinaálam was caused to be known (as leaving) 32(9). 306(4).
  paaláman be made known 308(3).
  paŕaláman will be made known 42(35).
  napaálam caused himself to be known (as leaving) 54(12)
  --(b) with accent-shift: alŕm known 300(32).
  makialŕm interfere 58(42). 264(18).
  pinakialamŕn was looked after 265(32). 290(32).
  kaalŕm accomplice 267(1) and Corrigenda.
  nakŕŕalŕm knows 42(14).
  pagkáalŕm a knowing 82(9). 272(6).
  nŕalamŕn got known 118(1). 298(14).
  mŕpagalamŕn get generally known 118(42). 298(24).
  ipaalŕm be given out to be known 307(3).
  ipinaalŕm was given out to be known 307(4).

alasěngko S. five o'clock 180(7).

alasčs S. six o'clock 122(6).

alaskuwátro S. four o'clock 172 (42).
  magŕalaskuwátro will be four o'clock 66(34).

alastrčs S. three o'clock 66(32).

álat salty 218(37).
  kaálat kayálat what saltiness 267(34).
  kaalátan saltiness 267(27).

-álay: iniyálay was offered 16(5).

áli aunt, madam 118(14). 151(36). 59. 256.
  magáli aunt and niece or nephew 242(1).

alikabňk dust 245(26).
  maalikabňk dusty 289(1).

alíla` servant, domesticated 54(7). 62(32).
  aliláin be domesticated 106(40).
  pagkŕpaalíla` a making a servant of oneself 104(2).

alěn which? 22(37). 48(18.25.36). 97.
  alěn-alěn pl. 97.

alintána in spite 277.
  inalintána was paid attention to 88(29).

alípin slave 90(36).

-alipustŕ`: alipustaěn be mistreated 72(39).

alěs go away 192(36).
  umalěs go away 52(22). went away 20(36).
  áalěs will go away 192(2).
  pagalěs a going away 108(22).
  nagsísialěs are going away 114(27).
  nangagsialěs went away, pl. 120(39).
  inalěs was removed 30(10).
  iniyalěs was removed 248(6).
  alisŕn be removed from 250(33).
  ŕlísan a going away together 257(23).
  nagŕlísan went away together 236(14).
  nagŕŕlísan are going away together 96(15).
  ikinaalěs was the cause of going away 271(41).
  makaalěs be able to go away 78(11).
  makaáalěs will be able to go away 42(38). 281(25).
  nakaalěs has gone away 282(21).
  pagkaalěs a having gone away 80(3).
  mŕŕalěs will be removed 96(34).
  papaalěs going away 300(39).
  pinaalěs was caused to go away 32(34).
  pinaáalěs is being caused to go away 64(23).
  ipinaalěs was caused to be removed 70(4). 306(5).
  mapaalěs be able to be caused to go away 122(21).
  ikinápaalěs was the cause of ordering to go away 310(5).
  ikinŕpŕpaalěs is the cause of ordering to go away 310(8).
  tagaalěs remover 315(33).
  tagapagpaalěs head remover 316(1).

alitaptap firefly 40(15).

Alfňnso S. n. 309(6).

-alsŕ S.: pagaalsŕ a raising 70(2).

altŕr S. altar 96(17).

aluwági (S.) carpenter 56(35).
  pagaaluwági carpentry 58(2).

amŕ father 30(26). 59.
  magamŕ father and child 242(2).
  magaamŕ father and children 242(27).
  amaěn uncle 247(26).
  magamaěn uncle and nephew or niece 242(25).
  ináamŕ godfather 247(17).

ámin prep. and loc. of kamě: our, us, by us excl. 165. 169.
  námin disj. of us, by us 163.
  umámin confessed 226(28).
  ŕamínin will be owned up to 243(36).
  inŕámin is being owned up to 243(35).

Amérika S. America 189(29).

amerikána S. European coat 281(5).

Amerikáno S. American 56(30).

-ampŕt: maampŕt be able to be stopped 46(8). 259(30).

-ámo` (S. ?): inámo` was caressed 84(32).
  inamů-amň` was repeatedly caressed 86(4).

ámong (S.) sir, Father 20(37). 50(40).

-ámot sell, of other than professional merchant: umámot sold 226(30).
  inamútan was sold to 246(41).

an see anň.

-ának: magának family 165(17). 242(17).
  kamagának relative 54(22). 266(34).
  kamaganákan clan 112(26). 277(14).
  angkŕn one's family 112(19). 260(39).

anŕk son, daughter 30(25).
  panganŕk infant 54(6).
  kapangŕnákan birth, birthday 275(43).
  panganganŕk a giving birth 220(24).
  naipangánganŕk has just been born 36(16). 288(4).

Andrčs S. n. 26(30).

Andňy S. short-n. 208(1).

áni harvest 191(32).

-ánib: pangánib danger 46(15).
  mapangánib dangerous 289(21).
  umánib make one's sleeping-mat overlap 226(30).
  iyánib be made to overlap 248(7).
  magkaánib overlapping each other 269(38).

ánim six 52(44). 67.
  pangánim number six 225(38).
  ikaánim ikánim sixth 273(17).
  makŕánim six times 298(32).

-anínaw: inanínaw was scrutinized 66(19).

aniyáya invitation 219(28).
  inaniyáhan was invited 250(34).
  inŕaniyáhan is being invited 203(26).

aniyň` aspect 20(12).
  nagáaniyň` is behaving 40(40).
  pagaaniyň` behavior 108(33).

antimáno S. beforehand 20(39). 262(1).

antňk sleepiness 84(14).
  nagáantňk is sleepy 231(42).
  nakapagáantňk causes to get sleepy 108(8).

anň, an what? what kind of? 18(6). 22(21). 97. 179. 190. 264.
  anň-anň pl. 114(16). 97.
  nanganň did what? 239(29).
  páno how? 155(21). 300(8).
  papáno how? 18(11). 301(1).
  gaáno gáno how great? 28(2). 316(28). 190. 247. See also saŕn.

anúnas S. custard-apple, Anona reticulata L. 76(19).

Ánong S. short-n. 286(38).

ang the, a 45. 61-71. 75. 78. 108. 109. 115. 116. 119. 126. 130-133.
161. 168. 196. 246. 248. 253.
  nang disj. the, a, of the, by the; when
  45. 119. 116-194. 253. 317(2). 340. 341 (3,d).

-angk see -ának.

angkěn appropriated 60(20).
  umangkěn appropriate 226(32).
  angkiněn be appropriated 62(6). 243(39).
  inangkěn was appropriated 16(8).
  ináangkěn is being appropriated 243(37).
  máangkěn get appropriated 308(20).

ápat four 24(37). 67.
  ŕápat only four 116(16).
  ápat-ápat four at a time 223(41).
  pangápat number four 225(36).
  ikaápat ikápat fourth 82(16).
  makŕápat makŕípat four times 298(36).

Áfrika S. Africa 189(4).

-apt see atěp.

apňy fire 22(6).
  inapuyŕn was inflamed 94(29) and Corrigenda.

áral doctrine 140(31). 223(23).
  umáral arch. teach morals 233(22).
  magáral study 18(7). 209(13).
  magŕáral will study 217(28).
  nagáral studied 30(5).
  nagŕáral is studying 90(31). 233(22).
  pagaáral a studying 28(3).
  magsipagáral study pl. 262(34).
  nagsěsipagáral are studying 38(5).
  arálan be taught morals 250(36).
  aralŕn study-room 238(6).
  pagarálan be learned 168(1).
  pinagarálan was studied 18(14).
  pinagŕarálan is being studied 255(4).
  makapagáral be able to study 34(33).
  pinapagáral was caused to study 305(19).
  ipapagáral be used for causing to study 88(11).
  pŕaralŕn school 26(32).

aráro S. plow 232(2).
  pagaaráro a plowing 232(1).
  magaaráro plowman 242(38).
  ararúhin be plowed 243(40).

áraw sun, day 16(11). 66(1). See also madalě`, kalaháti`.
  áraw-gabě day and night 94(31). 257. 331.
  áraw-áraw every day 58(7). 331.
  kaarawŕn holiday 110(17).
  tagáraw sunny season 34(27). 315(29).

arŕy ouch 151(15).

ári` that owned 42(2). 220(22). See also máy.
  nagŕári` owns 40(17).
  pagaári` possession 62(24). 102(31).
  maári` be possible 168(18).
  maŕári` will be possible 16(27). 46(12).
  naári` was owned, became possible 104(12). 285(29).
  naŕári` is possible 152(18).
  pagkaári` possibility 80(30).

aritmétika S. arithmetic 82(1).

ŕrmas armŕs S. arms 106(26). 235(4).

arsuběspo S. archbishop 96(10).

artísta S. artist 90(10).

ása expectation 72(7). 209(24).
  pagása hope 56(19). 76(13).

-ásal: inásal conduct 34(24).

asanŕ` (S. ?) a tree, Pterocarpus Indicus Willd. 263(25).

asáwa husband, wife 30(39). 34(5).
  magasáwa take a wife 78(38). married couple 30(25). 242(4).
  magŕasáwa will take a wife 232(2).
  nagasáwa took a wife 80(6).
  pagaasáwa the taking a husband or wife 80(27). 92(9).

ásim sourness 297(10).
  maásim sour 289(1).

asěn salt 30(11).
  asnŕn be salted 250(37).

aspilč S. pin 260(7.21).

áso dog 18(8).
  inŕáso is being chased 243(41).
  naáso has been chased 284(9).
  nŕáso got chased 292(42).

asň smoke 64(33).
  asuhŕn chimney 261(10) and Corrigenda.
  pinaasuhŕn was smoked 308(4).

asúkal S. sugar 198(31).

asůl S. blue 122(2).
  kayasůl what blueness 267(35).

asuwŕng vampire 34(30).
  magasuwŕng-asuwángan play vampire 237(9).
  magŕasuwŕng-asuwángan will play vampire 237(7).
  nagasuwŕng-asuwángan played vampire 34(26).

at t and; for, that, though
15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 213. 289. 306. 312. 317.

átas that prompted 98(33).
  iniyátas was enjoined 54(42).

ataňl S. coffin 116(1).

atč (C.) oldest sister 59. 256.
  magatč oldest sister with brother or sister 242(5).

átin prep. and loc. of táyo: our, us, by us, incl. 165. 169.
  nátin disj., of us, by us 163.

atěp roofing 118(27).
  pangatěp shingle 224(40).
  aptŕn be roofed 250(38).

átis custard-apple, Anona squamosa L. 76(20).
  atísan grove of átis trees 261(10).

atsára sour preserves 163(17). 299(11).

áwa` (a) pity 46(22).
  kŕwáwa` piteous 80(12). 267(29).
  ikinaáwa` was the cause of pitying 272(1).
  naáwa` pitied 285(16).
  pagkaáwa` a pitying 285(40).
  nagmŕmakaáwa` is calling forth pity 44(11). 288(36).
  (b) accent shifted: awŕ` overcome by pity 222(17).
  kaawaŕn be the object of pity 182(39).
  kinaŕawaŕn is the object of pity 275(1).
  nawŕ` pray 47. 225.

-áway: nagŕáway is fighting 232(4).
  pagaáway a fighting 306(18).
  nakipagáway fought along 264(24).
  nakěkipagáway fights along 264(21).
  kaáway enemy 18(11).
  kaŕáway there has just been quarreling 267(12).
  mapagawŕy quarrelsome 186(33).
  mŕpagáway be matched 297(10).

áwit song 280(39).
  awítan be sung to 250(38).
  magŕwítan sing together 183(11).
  nagŕŕwítan are singing together 236(27).

ay y is; then 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 89. 119.

áyap condiment 244(2) and Corrigenda.
  nangáyap ate relishes 239(31).
  ináyap was used as a condiment 244(1).
  paáyap given to be used as a condiment 299(12).
  nagpaáyap served a relish 302(28).

áyaw (a) not desired 30(5.37). 40(30). 239. 267.
  pagáyaw unwillingness 226(32).
  (b) accent shifted: umayŕw refused, left the table 231(12).
  pagayŕw refusal 94(17). 231(9).
  nakaayŕw has left the table 286(25).
  pagkáayŕw dislike 70(13).

áyon according to 40(3). 278.
  umáyon agreed 30(4).
  nakaáyon has come to be in accordance 281(3).
  paayňn conforming 300(13).

áyos formation 48(4.15) 90(11).
  mapagáyos be able to be straightened 287(6).
  mapŕpagáyos will be able to be put into shape 287(7).





B(V)

bŕ interrogative particle 47. 215. 223. 229. 299.

-bába` (a) bumába` became low 226(35).
  kababáan lowness, south 62(15). 163(26). 241(19).
  mabába` low, humble 104(27). 289(2).
  (b) Accent shifted: babŕ` low; come down 223(16) and see páko`.
  bumabŕ` descended 36(35).
  ibabŕ` south 56(24). 163(26). See also bandŕ.

-bábag: bŕbábag will fight 226(37).
  nagbábabŕg are fighting each other 237(25).
  pagbababŕg a fighting together 252(14).
  nakipagbabŕg fought along 264(37).

-bábaw: bumábaw became shallow 258(40).
  ibábaw top surface 66(28).
  kababáwan shallowness 88(30).
  mabábaw 88(26). 220(8).

babáyi babái female, woman 30(32). 163(13). nagbabá-babayíhan played
woman 237(14).

báboy pig 36(13).

-badiyŕ: náibadiyŕ got spread abroad 24(33).

bagŕ really? 22(21). 47. 216. 290. 219. 317(3).

-bagábag: nabagábag grew uneasy 120(37).

-bágal: mabágal slow 18(4).

bágay thing, circumstance 28(1). 36(22).
  bágay-bágay various things 116(33).
  ibinŕbágay is being adapted 248(9).
  nŕbŕbágay is suitable 78(34).

bagiyň hurricane 273(8).

-bagsŕk: ibinagsŕk was dropped 271(24).

-bagsěk: mabagsěk violent 42(3). 44(30).
  mababagsěk pl. 102(19).
  maghimagsěk come to violence 314(27).
  naghimagsěk came to violence 236(5).
  nagsipaghimagsěk revolted, pl. 263(12).
  nanghimagsěk resorted to violence 241(18).
  nagsipanghimagsěk pl. 263(30).
  hěmagsíkan internal warfare 258(13). 314(28).
  naghěmagsíkan fought each other 236(23).
  nagsipaghěmagsíkan pl. 263(13).
  paghihěmagsíkan internal warfare 52(42). 116(12).
  panghihěmagsíkan id. 241(11).

bágo new; before 18(37). 36(32). 291.
  kabŕbágo newly 54(6).
  nabŕbágo has been changed 64(35).

bahŕ` flood 98(17). 110(23).
  bumábahŕ` there is a flood 110(19).
  pagbahŕ` a flooding 110(21).

bahági part 82(17).

bahagiyŕ slight 201(21).

báhay (a) house 34(21). See also kápit, tánod.
  báhay-aklátan library-building 210(11).
  báhay-báta` womb 210(23).
  báhay-gúya` womb of animal 210(24).
  báhay-pŕhayagŕn newspaper-office 210(25).
  báhay-pŕmahaláan government building 292(21).
  Báhay-paníki place-n. 210(25).
  báhay-pintáhan paint-house 210(26).
  báhay-sangláan pawnshop 252(22).
  báhay-tůlúyan inn 112(38).
  bahŕy-bahŕy various houses 52(15). 110(36).
  magbáhay build a house 232(5).
  pamamáhay household 70(26).
  kabahayŕn house containing several dwellings 120(3). furnishings
  of a house 276(5).
  --(b) Accent shifted: bahŕy tame, shy 222(19).
  nabábahŕy is shy 286(29).

baět good conduct 165(1).
  kabŕítan kindness, virtue 74(41).
  mabaět well-behaved 84(11).
  mababaět pl. 34(35).

báka S. cow 112(40).

bákal iron 201(30). 220(5).

bakŕs mark, in: bakŕs-súgat mark of a wound 46(6).

bakasiyňn S. vacation 26(35).

-bakěl: bakěl-bakěl uneven 220(2).

bákit why? 18(7). 236.

bakiyŕ` sandal 245(20).

bákod fence 266(6).
  pangbákod used in making a fence 225(2).
  bakúran be fenced in 250(40). yard, grounds 34(38).

bákol open bamboo basket without handle 74(5).

bála any 186(18). 271(22). 66. 132.

bála S. bullet 52(36).

balahíbo fur 212(18).

baláe person whose son or daughter one's daughter or son has married;
old friend 207(35). 266(5).
  magbaláe two people whose children have intermarried 242(8). 269(42).
  magbabaláe pl. 240(28).
  kabaláe one's baláe 266(2).
  magkabaláe two fellow baláe 269(40).

bálak plan 287(11).
  binálak was planned 18(34).

bálang locust 267(27).

balŕt skin, shell 16(18). 30(10).

báli S. matter, harm 52(6). 42(5).
  balatŕn be peeled 200(24).

báli` break 219(29).
  ipinagkákabalč` is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7).
  makabále` be able to break 281(26).
  nabále` was broken 284(32).
  nabŕbále` is interrupted 104(4).
  mabalían be broken in 70(18).
  nabalían was broken in 62(27).

-balěk: bumalěk come back 66(17). 233(17). came back 20(40).
  bábalěk will come back 32(27).
  bumábalěk is coming back 66(24).
  magbalěk come back to 233(18).
  nagbalěk came back to 72(11). 283(4).
  pagbalikŕn be come back to 255(5).
  pagbŕbalikŕn will be come back to 32(28). 255(5).
  makabábalěk will be able to go back 56(31).
  pabalěk going back 299(13.27.39).
  pagpapabalěk a causing to go back 48(20).
  pinabalěk was caused to go back 68(41).
  ipinabábalěk is being sent back 48(7).

balíkat shoulder 48(19).

balíta` that reported; famed 34(29). 36(2).
  magbalíta` relate 42(24).
  nagbalíta` related 118(35).
  pamamalíta` a relating of stories 102(12).
  ibalíta` be reported 88(39).
  ibinalíta` was reported 32(8).
  ipamalíta` be related 275(18).
  ipinamalíta` was related 22(27).
  binalitáan was narrated to 250(42).
  pagbabŕlitaŕn a reporting by many 102(13).
  pinakibalitáan was ascertained by report 102(42). 265(30).
  nŕbalíta` got related 46(18).
  nŕbŕbalíta` gets related 48(26).
  pagkŕbalíta` a getting narrated 272(42).
  mŕbalitáan be learned by report 56(18).
  nŕbalitáan was learned by report 38(12).

Balíwag place-n. 173(9). See báyan, daŕn.

balúbad casoy, Anacardium occidentale L. 76(20).

baluktňt crooked 218(38).
  balú-baluktňt variously bent 290(33).
  bumaluktňt bend; bent 226(39). 233(25).
  magbaluktňt bend in quantity 233(24).
  pagbabaluktňt a bending 48(15).

balňn a well 24(37).

-bálot: bumálot roll up 226(40). 233(27).
  magbálot roll up in quantity; wrap oneself up 233(26).
  magbalňt roll up variously 52(21).
  nagbalňt rolled up variously 52(35).
  nagsipagbalňt pl. 118(13).
  nabálot has been wrapped up 284(10).
  nabŕbálot is wrapped up 36(39).
  nŕbálot got wrapped up 198(8). 255(40).

bambň club 70(17).
  pangbambň club for beating 225(2).
  nangbábambň is beating 239(32).
  bambuhěn be beaten 70(29).
  binambň was beaten 72(10).

-banŕl: kabŕnálan act of piety 78(33).

banáyad gentle 48(17).

bŕnda S. band, orchestra 48(31).
  bŕnda-ng-músika band of music 48(30).

bandŕ direction 18(22).
  bandŕ ng ibabŕ` south
  mábandŕ-ng-ibabŕ` get turned towards the south 296(21).
  bandŕ ng kaliwŕ`, kánan see dúlo.
  bandŕ ng kataasŕn north
  nŕbŕbandŕ-ng-kataasŕn is turned toward the north 296(20).
  bandáhin direction headed for 294(24).

bandíla` S. flag 234(14).

baněg sleeping-mat 62(35).

bantŕy watcher 80(18).
  bantŕy-pálay rice-guard 228(17).
  bantŕy-pintň` door-keeper 78(31).
  magbantŕy stand guard 38(14).
  pagbabantŕy a guarding 36(18).
  bantayŕn be guarded 251(2).
  bantáyan sentry-box 248(16).

Bantňg family-n. 165(17).

bangŕn granary 270(33).

-banggět: binanggět was mentioned 90(23).
  nábanggět got mentioned 50(11).

bangkŕ` canoe 20(3).
  mamangkŕ` go boating 28(12).
  magsipamangkŕ` pl. 263(21).
  namámangkŕ` is boating 20(2).
  nagsísipamangkŕ` pl. 98(17).
  pamamangkŕ` a boating 239(32).
  pagbabangkáan boating-party 112(13).
  bangkéro boatman 80(34). 316(11).

bangkŕy corpse 46(30).

bŕngko S. banking-house 227(18).

bangkň` S. bench 30(29).

-bangň`: mabangň` fragrant 278(15).
  pabangň` perfume 222(38).

-bángon: nagbŕbángon is getting up 70(36).
  kabŕbángon there has been getting up 267(13).

bapňr S. steamship 56(24).

-barŕ: barŕ-barŕ unruly 273(37).

baráha S. cards 173(3).

baráso S. arm 138(31).

barbéro S. barber 24(35).

barěl gun 36(20).
  nagsipamarěl went shooting, pl. 28(25).
  pamamarěl a shooting 230(9).
  pinagbábarěl is being shot 56(26).
  barěl-barílan toy-gun 261(35). 293(18).
  maipabarěl be caused to be shot 52(23). 312(9).
  nábarěl got shot 56(29).

báriyo S. district of a town 70(11).

báro` blouse 205(20).
  magbarň` put on one's clothes 237(26).
  pamamáro` clothing 110(33).

-bása: pagbása reading 227(3).
  binása was read 299(18).
  binŕbása is being read 172(6).
  basáhan be read to 251(2).
  basahŕn reading-room 137(16).
  mabása be able to be read 186(2).
  nabása has been read 244(3). 284(11).
  mŕbása get read 52(12).
  nŕbása got read 86(19). 293(2).
  pabása gospel-reading ordered by a communicant 251(13).

-basŕ`: nagsísipagbasŕ` are getting themselves wet 110(23).
  nakabasŕ` caused to be wet 201(22).

básag a breaking, in:
  básag-úlo a head-smashing, free-for-all fight 262(7).
  básag-uléro ruffian 316(13).
  basŕg broken 30(10).
  mabásag be broken 30(8). 283(21). 284(35).
  nabásag has been broken 296(14).
  mŕbásag get broken 293(4).

-bastŕ`: nagbastŕ` packed up 232(5).
  pagbabastáan a packing up together 118(17).

báso S. drinking-glass 137(39).

báta` boy, girl 30(33). See also báhay.
  bináta` young man 90(28).
  pagkabáta` childhood 86(22). 285(41).

batalŕn platform of house 72(14).

Bathála` God 54(42). 59.

-bátis: nagbŕbátis is fording 104(42).
  binátis was forded 244(4).

batň stone 30(7). 220(4).
  binatň was stoned 303(30).

báo cocoanut-shell 108(32). 163(13).

báo widower, widow 163(29). 256.
  nabáo was widowed 80(29). 285(29).

baňl S. box, trunk 268(8).

báon provisions 28(27).

-baňn: pagbabaňn a burying 54(29).
  mábaňn get buried 54(17).
  magpabaňn cause to be buried 54(24).
  ipinabaňn was caused to be buried 54(30).

báwal forbidden 218(39).

báwang garlic 36(22).

báwat every 24(40). 48. 66. 132. 246.

-báwi`: bŕbawíin will be taken back 244(4) and Corrigenda.
  ikinabáwi` was the cause of being taken back 272(3).

-báya` (a) bayáan be permitted 46(37). 48(13).
  binayáan was permitted 78(31).
  binŕbayáan is being permitted 286(38).
  paubáya` permitted 300(9).
  magpŕpabáya` will be neglectful 106(32).
  nagpabáya` was neglectful 302(29).
  pabayáan be left alone 308(7).
  pinabayáan was left alone, not interfered with
  168(23). 169(42). 308(6).
  (b) Accent shifted: pabayŕ` neglectful 300(25).
  kapabayaŕn neglectfulness 310(39).
  pabayaŕn be permitted 52(8). 237(29). 308(34).

bayábas see biyábas.

báyad payment 54(9).
  báyad-útang debt-payment 178(29).
  bayŕd paid 222(22).
  magbáyad pay 54(23).
  nagbáyad paid 232(6).
  bŕbayáran will be paid to 54(29).
  binayáran was paid 54(11).
  binŕbayáran is being paid for 74(3).
  pagbayáran be settled with 54(32).
  pagbŕbayáran will be settled for 58(27).
  pinagbayáran was settled for 255(6).
  pinagbŕbayáran is being atoned for 74(21).
  makabŕbáyad will be able to pay 114(41).

báyan town, district 22(27). See also kápit, táo.
  báya-ng-Balíwag the town of Baliuag 20(3).
  báya-ng-Kamálig 92(15).
  báya-ng-Malólos 38(5).
  báya-ng-Marikína 96(38).
  báya-ng-Mayníla` 256(30).
  báya-ng-San-Migčl 50(14).
  bayŕn-bayŕn various towns 50(8).
  namŕmáyan is dwelling in a town 50(34).
  kababáyan fellow-townsman 60(12). 267(3). 291(37).
  magkababáyan two or more fellow-townsmen 26(31). 270(10.17).
  makabáyan patriotic 288(30).

bayŕw wife's brother, sister's husband 54(8).
  magbayŕw two men, one of whom has married the other's sister 242(9).

-báyo: ibáyo far side 80(36).

-bayň: pangbayň pestle 225(3).
  magbayň pound rice 232(7).
  magbabáyo rice-pounder 242(40).

bayúgin a tree, Pterospermum 237(39).

bayňng palm-leaf sack 74(5).

bíbas jester 98(30).

biběg mouth 30(20).

Bigaŕ place-n. 116(25).

bigŕs hulled rice 104(15).
  magbigŕs hull rice 232(8).
  magbibígas rice-dealer 242(41).
  bigasŕn be supplemented with rice 251(3). containing uncooked
  rice 261(10).
  běgásan rice-mill 203(3).
  Běgása-ng-Sumúlong-at-Kasamahŕn Rice-Mill of Sumulong and Company
  210(34).

bigŕt weight 226(36).
  kabigatŕn heaviness 158(12).
  nakabíbigŕt is making heavy 32(10).
  mabigŕt heavy, grave 58(34).
  mabibigŕt pl. 118(22).
  pabigŕt weighting 110(7).
  nápakabigŕt too severe 313(10).

bigŕy that given 220(24).
  bigŕy-loňb favor 210(27).
  pagbibigŕy-loňb a doing favors 60(23). 235(26).
  nagbigŕy gave 76(35).
  nagbíbigŕy is giving 60(38).
  pagbibigŕy a giving 50(30).
  ibigŕy be given 42(43).
  ibíbigŕy will be given 16(28).
  ibinigŕy was given 20(14).
  ibiníbigŕy is being given 40(11).
  bigyŕn be given to 26(2).
  běbigyŕn will be given to 74(42).
  binigyŕn was given to 32(15).
  běgáyan receiver 258(22).
  kaběgáyan one of two who give to each other 277(36).
  mapagbigŕy over-indulgent 289(25).
  tagapagbigŕy hander-out 315(41).

-bigkŕs: nagbíbigkŕs is pronouncing 231(24).
  biníbigkŕs is being pronounced 98(38).

biglŕ` suddenly 82(40).
  pabiglŕ` in sudden manner 68(10).

bigtě strangled 223(24).
  bumigtě strangled 227(3).
  pagbigtě a strangling 227(4).
  nagbigtě strangled himself 233(29).
  pagbibigtě a strangling oneself 233(29).
  bigtihěn be strangled 22(22).
  bigtíhan gallows 279(19).

béha cigarette-stub 205(21).

bíhag captive 233(1).

bihása` skilled 46(12).

bihíra` seldom, rare 40(26). 42(21). 72(29). 106(39). 110(29). 112(13).
  magkŕbihíra` occur at odd times 114(27). 271(9).

bíhis that donned 220(26).
  bihěs dressed up 222(23).
  nagbíhis dressed himself up 232(10).
  nagběbíhis is dressing himself up 32(37). 96(21).
  magsipagbíhis dress up, pl. 262(35).
  makapagbíhis have dressed oneself 96(24).
  pinapagbíhis was ordered to dress himself 32(14).

biěk young pig 72(36).

-bilŕ`: kabilŕ` other side 16(23). 266(6).
  magkábilŕ` be on both sides 16(7). 271(11).

bílang number 24(5).
  bilŕng counted 222(24).
  pagbílang a counting 285(24).
  běbilángin will be counted 24(4).
  mabílang having a number 114(1).
  pagkŕbílang count 291(2).
  tagabílang counter 315(34).

bilanggň` prisoner 258(24).
  ibíbilanggň` will be put into prison 100(28).
  ibinilanggň` was put into prison 248(12).
  bělanggúan prison 201(31).
  nábilanggň` got jailed 38(2). 198(1).
  ipabíbilanggň` will be caused to be put in prison 100(15).

bilŕs wife's sister's husband 242(11).
  magbilŕs two men whose wives are sisters 242(10).

biláo large flat basket 74(5). 108(17).

bilě that bought 308(26).
  bilě nang bilě keeps buying 177(8).
  pangbilě used for buying 255(34).
  bumilě buy 120(19).
  pagbilě a buying 223(21).
  magbilě sell 249(22).
  nagbilě sold 233(30).
  nagbíbilě is selling 233(31).
  pagbibilě a selling 252(19).
  namilě bought in quantity 239(33).
  namímilě is shopping 249(9).
  běbilhěn will be bought 203(18).
  binilě was bought 163(40).
  pinamilě was bought in quantity 246(41).
  ipagbilě be sold 98(36).
  ipinabilě was sold 249(21).
  ipinagbíbilě is being sold 74(8).
  binilhŕn was bought from 251(5).
  pinagbilhŕn was sold to 255(8).
  bělíhan market 258(24).
  ikabilě be the cause of buying 186(10).
  nakábilě happened to buy 56(38).
  mŕběbilě will get bought 203(37).
  pabilhěn be caused to buy 34(5).
  makapagpabilě be able to cause to be bought 286(39).

bílin commission, errand 221(27).

-bilmět: pamilmět used as fish-pole 249(28).

bílog circle 112(2).
  bilňg rounded, round 222(25).
  bumílog turned on a lathe 227(6).
  namílog turned 188(26).
  binílog was turned 244(5).
  biněbílog is being turned 244(6).
  kabilúgan roundness 38(17). 152(17). 276(27).
  nŕběbílog gets turned 293(36).
  pabilňg in a circle, spherically 46(40). 48(4). 110(41).

-bendisiyňn S.: magbendisiyňn give blessing 96(26).
  nagbébendisiyňn is blessing 98(3).
  pagbebendisiyňn a blessing 54(32).
  binčbendisyunŕn is being blessed 114(19).
  pagkabendisiyňn a having blessed 64(29).
  pagkábendisiyňn a having chanced to bless 56(8).
  pabendisyunŕn be caused to be blessed 54(17).

bendíta S.: holy 96(25).

-biniyŕg: nagbíbiniyŕg is baptizing 98(2).
  binyágan person baptized 314(20).

bintána` S. window 70(30).

bintŕng suspicion 36(29).
  nagbintŕng suspected 38(24).
  pagbintangŕn be suspected 20(9).
  pinagbintangŕn was suspected 16(21).
  nŕpŕpagbintangŕn gets suspected 20(35).
  palabintángin given to suspicion 315(7).

bingě deaf 86(23). 167(8).
  ikinabingě was the cause of being deaf 295(17).
  nakabíbingě causes deafness 219(42).
  nábingě got deaf 295(12).

bíngit edge, brink 180(34).
  bumíngit went to the brink 227(7).
  ibiníngit was put on the edge 248(13).
  biningítan was approached up to the brink 251(7).
  kinŕběbingítan is been on the brink of 52(31).
  napabíngit go to the brink 312(2).

birtůd S. occult quality 60(10).

bíro` joke 220(27).
  pangbibíro` a joking 40(39).

biróke S. blow-gun bullet 212(31).

bčsbol E. baseball 48(2).
  nagbčbčsbol is playing baseball 135(28).

bisěg arm, stick 70(28). 84(10).

bisíta S. visitor, visitors 305(5). chapel 251(13).

bísiyo S. vice 163(21). 221(14).

bistŕy sieve 74(5).
  magbibistŕy screener 242(38).

bitŕk crack 32(5).

-bitŕw: binitŕwan was let go of 66(34). 254(24).
  mangákabitŕw relax their hold 78(15).

-bítay: ipabítay be caused to be hanged 52(6).

bitbět that carried by a part of it 122(2).
  binitbět was carried 52(37).
  pagkábitbět the way of holding 253(24).

-bitěw: bumitěw let go 174(22).
  bitíwan be let go of 76(10). 254(25).
  binitíwan was let go of 44(22).
  pinagbitiwŕn was variously let go of 256(16).
  mabitíwan be let go of 44(21). 288(23).

bitúka intestine 38(30).

bitóke (S.) blow-gun bullet 212(31).

biyábas bayábas S. guava, Pisidium guayava
L. 236(17). 256(38). 283(11).
  magsěsipamiyábas will go guava-picking, pl. 263(22).

-biyábit: nangakabiyábit were hanging 34(28).

-biyábo: pagbibiyábo swinging the feet 232(11).
  pinagběbiyabúhan is being swung on 255(10).

-biyŕk: biniyŕk was split 244(7) Corrigenda.
  kabiyŕk half, side 112(40).

Biyŕrnes-Sŕnto Biyernesŕnto S. Good Friday 20(1).

biyátiko S.: viaticum 98(3).

biyŕy that given liberty in a closed space 220(27).
  nagbiyŕy set loose 232(13).
  nagpabiyŕy caused to be set loose 302(20).
  pŕbiyáyan place for giving temporary liberty 88(26). 309(6).

Viyóla S. family-n. 277(16).

bóbo clown 241(34).

-bubňng: bubungŕn roof 38(22).

bubuwět a kind of mouse 224(27).

-budbňd: ibinudbňd was strewn 32(18).

bugtňng riddle 222(3).
  nagsěsipagbugtúngan tell each other riddles 114(32).

bugňk rotten, crazy 218(40).

buhángin sand 68(4).
  kabuhangínan beach 68(4).

-búhat: bumúhat lifted 189(34).
  buhátin be lifted 283(29).

búhay life 18(10). See also hánap.
  buhŕy alive 92(19).
  namůmúhay is leading a life 104(27).
  pamumúhay way of living 30(30).
  ikabůbúhay will be the means of living 34(25).
  kabuháyan livelihood 32(12).
  mabůbúhay will live 58(30).
  nabúhay lived 285(29).
  nabůbúhay is living 72(17).
  pagkabúhay a coming to life; staple food 285(41). 288(38).
  pagkŕbúhay a lucky bringing to life 291(36).

búho` slender bamboo, Dendrocalamus 18(3).

buhňk hair 24(31).

buhňl knot 274(29).
  magbuhňl tie a knot 232(14).

-búhos: ibinúhos was poured 30(20).

búkas tomorrow 88(13). 262(2).
  kinŕbukásan when the next day came 48(41). 190(27). 279(24).

bukŕs opened 223(26).
  bumúbukŕs is opening, intr. 227(10).
  magbukŕs open, tr. 228(35).
  pagbubukŕs an opening, tr. 26(31).
  buksŕn be opened 78(30).
  binuksŕn was opened 78(31).
  bůkásan aperture 84(43).
  mabuksŕn be opened 86(1). 120(21).
  nŕbuksŕn came open 22(2). 188(9).

búkid field, estate, country 38(8). 74(1). 90(7).
  bukirěn estate, fields 92(35).

búko unripe cocoanut 316(8).
  tarabúko trabúko bald-headed 316(7).

bukňd beside, in addition to 54(5). 279.
  magkabukňd two separately 269(43).
  magkakabukňd pl. 279(9).

-búkol: bukulŕn covered with bumps 62(26).
  nagkŕkabúkol is getting bumps 62(16).

bóla S. ball 46(38).

-búlag (a) nakabůbúlag is causing blindness 280(35).
  mŕbúlag get blinded 255(38).
  (b) Accent shifted: bulŕg blinded, blind 22(29).
  nábulŕg went blind 296(16).

búlak cluster of capoc cotton 247(2).
  Bulakŕn place-n. 110(13). 260(5).

bulaklŕk flower 189(2).

-bulěd: ibinulěd was pushed off 26(7).

bulsŕ S. purse 112(21).

-búlo: kabuluhŕn importance 42(15).
  makabuluhŕn important 271(16). 289(23).

bulňk rotten 218(40).
  nangabulňk became rotten, pl. 306(27).
  palabůlúkin easily decaying 315(8).

-bulňng: kabůlúngan one of two who whisper together 277(38).
  pabulňng in whispers 114(5).

bundňk mountain 116(18). See also paŕ.
  namundňk took to the mountains 52(38).
  pamumundňk a living in the mountains 52(42).

buntěs pregnant 36(17).

buntňn heap 116(34).

buntňt tail, train 240(41). 244(40). 253(8).
  buntútan tail-end 72(3).

-bunň`: nagbunň` wrestled 66(32).
  nagbúbunň` is wrestling 86(40).
  pagbubunň` a wrestling 252(25).
  nakipagbunň` engaged in wrestling 66(27).
  kabunň` person with whom one wrestles 66(34).

-búnot: bunňt plucked up 225(26). cocoanut-fibre 221(11).
  bumúnot plucked up 227(11).
  nagbunňt plucked up in quantity 237(27).

búnga fruit; betel-fruit 16(15). 247(3).
  búnga-ng-káhoy fruit of a tree 36(1).
  magbúnga bear fruit 16(12).

bungánga` maw 212(35).

bungbňng piece of unsplit bamboo 110(31).

-búrol: ibinůbúrol is being laid in state 112(30).
  kinŕbůburúlan is being lain in state in 114(4).

busábos slave 90(36).

bóses S. voice 74(19).

Bůstos S. place-n. 100(12). See also lúpa`.

busňg satiated 223(27).
  pŕbusugěn be well fed up 305(10).

bútas hole, hollow space 86(11). 104(10).
  bútas-karáyom needle's-eye 22(27).
  bumútas make a hole 86(5).
  binútas was pierced 106(20).
  makabútas have made a hole 86(8).
  nabútas has been perforated 86(8).
  nŕbůbútas gets perforated 106(37).
  pinabútas was caused to make a hole 86(9).

bóte S. bottle 120(22).

búti goodness 218(23).
  butíhan be done well 220(10).
  ikinabúti was the cause of improvement 287(43).
  kabutíhan excellence, advantage 58(2). 62(3).
  makabůbúti will cause to improve 28(35).
  nakabůbúti causes to be well 226(33).
  mabúti good, well 16(9).
  mabubúti pl. 102(5).
  nŕbúti got better, reached a high point 294(22). 295(12).
  pinakamabúti best 230(10).
  nŕpakabúti extreme 313(11).

botikáriyo S. apothecary 54(2).

bútil kernel of grain 316(33).
  gabútil as large as a grain 316(31).

-bóto S.: bumóto voted 227(13).

butň bone, seed 42(5). 108(7).

boň` buň` whole, entire 34(29). 66. 98. 261.

-buwŕl: nagbuwŕl felled 199(25). 232(14).
  ibuwŕl be felled 178(33).
  ibinuwŕl was felled 270(27)
  nabuwŕl has been felled 253(4). 294(5).

buwŕn moon, month 38(18). 110(13).

buwěs interest on money 227(18).

buwísit repulsive 98(16). 219(1).
  binuwísit was annoyed 58(26).
  kinŕbůbuwisítan is being abhorred 94(27).





D(R)

daŕn raŕn hundred 52(43). 17. 134.

daŕn way, road 32(3).
  daŕ-ng-Balíwag road to Baliuag 220(3).
  magdaŕn pass by 68(7).
  nagdaŕn passed by, past 24(40). 76(36).
  nagdádaŕn is passing by 26(11).
  pagdadaŕn a passing by 254(20).
  idaŕn be left on the way 248(15).
  dinaanŕn was run over, was called for on the way 251(9). 254(29).
  dinaánan was assailed 254(25).
  dinŕdaánan is being assailed 254(27).
  pinagdŕdaanŕn is being gone through 30(30). 82(7).
  pinagdaánan was traversed 32(24). 256(10).
  dŕánan usual route 258(26).
  nagdŕdŕánan are passing on the way 234(31).
  makaraŕn have passed 16(11).
  nakaraŕn has passed 18(38).
  pagkaraŕn a having passed 24(11).
  nakáraŕn nakádaŕn came upon 18(32).
  paraŕn manner, means 42(12).

dagŕ` rat 84(20).

-dagŕn: dinaganŕn was lain upon 44(38).
  magkádagŕn be one on top of the other 270(24).
  magkŕkŕdagŕn will be one on top of the other 270(26).
  nagkádagŕn were one on top of the other 270(30).
  nagkŕkŕdagŕn are one on top of the other 270(33).
  nagkŕkŕdagŕn-dagŕn pl. 108(24).

dágat sea 110(19).
  dagŕt-dagátan lake 261(34).

dágok blow with the fist 256(23)
  pinagdadagukŕn was variously struck at 84(21) and Corrigenda.
  pinagdŕdadagukŕn is being variously struck at 256(22).

dáhil cause 16(4). 78(33). 143(15). 206(10). 280.
  dahilŕn cause 22(6). 280.
  nagdŕdahilŕn is alleging as cause 187(10).

dáhon leaf 16(9).
  nagdŕdáhon is putting out leaves 232(16).

dáing that laid open 250(37).
  daěng laid open 222(29).
  dináing was laid open 244(7).

-daěng: dumádaěng is complaining 40(41).

-dáka: pagdáka immediately 18(42).
  karáka-ráka at once 207(20). 267(30).
  pagkaráka at once 288(40). 265(5.9).

dála fishnet 240(7).
  dinála was caught with the net 244(8).

dalŕ that borne 34(22) 38(27.34).
  dumalŕ bear up 233(16).
  dumádalŕ is bearing up 227(14).
  magdalŕ bring, carry 106(32). 233(17).
  nagdalŕ brought 28(27).
  nagdádalŕ is bringing 48(33). 72(35). 233(32).
  pagdadalŕ a bringing 251(12).
  dalhěn be carried 32(2).
  dŕdalhěn will be carried 34(4).
  dinalŕ was carried 56(24).
  dinádalŕ is being carried 40(19).
  dalhŕn be carried to 251(11).
  makadádalŕ will be able to carry 178(39).
  nakapagdalŕ was able to bring 286(35).
  nakapagdádalŕ nakapápagdalŕ nakákapagdalŕ is able to bring 286(36).
  madalŕ be able to be carried 16(4). 283(25).
  madádalŕ will be able to be carried 34(31).
  nadalŕ was able to be carried 283(22).
  nádalŕ got carried off 293(6).
  nagpadalŕ caused to be carried, sent 264(3).
  pagpapadalŕ a sending 48(17).
  ipadalŕ be sent 22(19).
  ipinadalŕ was sent 90(32). 306(7).
  ipinadádalŕ is being sent 74(6).
  ipinagpapadalŕ were repeatedly sent 58(25). 307(26).
  pinadalhŕn was sent to 58(6).
  máipadalŕ get sent 58(19).

dalága young woman 36(26).

dalamháti` grief 219(31).
  pagdadalamháti` a grieving 74(13).
  pakikipagdalamháti` a grieving along 112(26).
  kadalamhatían grief 276(28).

dalandŕn orange 76(20).

-dálang: dumálang became infrequent 26(10).
  madálang infrequent 289(4).
  padalángin be made infrequent 304(35).
  pŕdalangěn be made very infrequent 305(14).

dalanghíta` tangerine 294(28).

-dalángin: panalángin prayer 94(33).

-dalŕs: dumádalŕs is growing frequent 68(16).
  kadalasŕn frequency, frequently 40(40). 186(22). 262(4).
  madalŕs frequent 46(24). 269(1).

dálaw visitor 112(29).
  dumálaw paid a visit 64(9).
  dumŕdálaw pays a visit 112(36).
  nagsěsidálaw pl. 112(25).
  pagdálaw a visiting 86(28).

dalawŕ see -lawŕ.

dalě` hasten 221(41).
  dálě-dáli` very quickly 34(1). 224(13).
  daliŕn be done quickly 251(12).
  madalě` quick, soon 94(28). 102(11). 166(16).
  madalě ng áraw: nagmŕmadalě-ng-áraw it is dawning 235(21).
  --magmadalě` be quick 34(9).
  magmámadalě` will hurry 235(38).
  pagmamadalě` a hurrying 293(11).

dalíri` finger 185(21).

-dalň: dumalň come for a purpose, to aid 34(1). 38(11). 304(1).
  nagsísidalň are coming 114(36).
  daluhŕn be succored 58(39).
  dinaluhŕn was attended 100(18). 251(14).

dáma S. checkers 266(12).

-damŕg: magdamŕg the whole night 190(35).

damdŕm feeling 102(16). 219(32).
  dumamdŕm felt 227(15). 233(37).
  magdamdŕm feel oneself hurt 233(34).
  dináramdŕm is being regretted 82(9). 244(10).
  damdámin feeling, emotion 276(29).
  makiramdŕm spy out 264(4).
  karamdáman illness 207(31).
  nakáramdŕm felt 68(3). 292(32).
  nakŕrŕramdŕm is feeling 42(43).
  nŕramdamŕn was felt 201(26).
  nŕrŕramdamŕn is being felt 70(6).

dámi multitude 112(21). 267(27).
  dumámi grew in number 60(32).
  dinamíhan was made numerous 251(15).
  karamíhan numerousness, majority 34(33). 198(9). 66. 132.
  marámi many 20(13). 28(27). 69. 71. 99. 110. 138.

damět garment, cloth 52(22). 169(2).
  pananamět clothing 32(33). 219(14).

damň ramň grass 76(28). See also kalabŕw, púno`.
  dinamuhŕn was cut grass from 251(16).
  damúhan grass-field 18(33). 259(17).

dámot stinginess 268(5).
  kaydámot karámot what stinginess 268(5).
  kaydámot-dámot what great stinginess 268(4).
  karamútan stinginess 34(18).
  marámot stingy 60(22).
  mararámot pl. 112(8).

-dániw?: karaniyúwan karaniyúan usual, usually 36(15). 40(9). 262(6).

dangŕl honesty, honor 218(26).
  karŕngálan honoring 90(13).

-dapŕ`: dumapŕ` lay down on his face 227(17).
  nagdŕdapá-dapáan pretends to fall on his face 108(18).
  nagkangdadápa` sustained repeated falls on his face 70(35). 269(29).
  nagkŕkangdadápa` is falling repeatedly on his face 269(31).
  nakadapŕ` is prone 281(12).
  nárapŕ` fell on his face 295(30). Corrigenda.
  pagkárapŕ` a falling on one's face 295(39).
  napadapŕ` had himself laid on his face 311(27).
  náparapŕ` fell on his face 312(11).

dápat necessary, fitting 22(1). 36(9.20). 268.
  karapatŕn due, right 276(8).
  marápat deserving 80(20).
  nŕrŕrápat is appropriate 80(13). 276(29).

Rafayčl S. n. 270(5).

-dápit: pagdápit a calling for 114(39).
  ipinadŕdápit is being caused to be called for 114(18).

-dápo`: dumápo` struck, landed 16(31).
  pagdápo` a hitting, landing 64(31). 68(16).
  dinapúan was landed on, was hit 96(28). 251(18).

darŕs adze 58(14).
  pagdarŕs a chopping with the adze 60(3).
  darasěn be trimmed with the adze 58(17).
  dinarŕs was trimmed with the adze 58(32).
  pinagdarasŕn was variously hewn off 58(17).

Daruwěn E. family-n. 245(9).

-dasŕl (S.): magdasŕl say prayers 78(37).
  nagdádasŕl is saying prayers 64(36).
  nagsísipagdasŕl pl. 114(30).
  pagdadasŕl a praying 104(4).
  pinagdŕdasalŕn is being prayed in 104(17).
  dŕsálan rosary 76(43).

dátapuwat but 16(4). 318. 322.

dáti formerly; since long ago 44(23). 64(18). 262(3).
  paráti often 18(8). 30(28). 262(12).

-dátig: kadátig karátig bordering on, next to 256(32). 266(9).
  magkarátig bordering on each other 270(2).
  nŕkŕkarátig borders on 296(27).

-datěng: dumatěng arrive 18(37). arrived 20(14).
  nagsidatěng pl. 118(34). 232(1).
  dumáratěng is arriving 18(35).
  dáratěng will arrive 52(2).
  pagdatěn an arriving 48(12). 56(25).
  datnŕn be reached 56(32).
  dinatnŕn was reached 46(3).
  dinŕratnŕn is being reached 64(7).
  karáratěng there has been arriving 151(31).
  makaratěng have arrived 82(38). 100(1).
  nakaratěng has arrived 34(21).
  mŕdatnŕn be come upon 88(36).

-dáos: pagdadáos a performing 20(5).
  idáos be performed 264(32).
  idináos was performed 274(15).
  idinŕdáos is being performed 92(24). 114(29).

dŕw rŕw he says, they say 17. 47. 217.

-dáya`: magdŕdáya` will cheat 18(24).

dáyap the lime 76(20).

dě` not 38(17). 237. 239. 301.

-ribŕl S.: karibŕl rival 46(21).

dibděb the chest 212(9).

-dikděk: dikdikěn be crushed 16(25).

dikěn mat on which dishes are set 221(32).

dikět blaze 220(30).
  pangparikět kindlings 158(10).

-dikět: idinikě was pasted 52(10).

dikóla S. (de cola) train 262(41).

díla` tongue 251(21). 306(21).
  diláan be licked 251(22).
  diniláan was shown the tongue (as insult) 251(20).

-dílat: nadílat came open 24(24).

-dilŕw: madidilŕw yellow, pl. 291(19).

-dilěg: pangdilěg implements for sprinkling 225(4).
  nangdídilěg is sprinkling 239(34).
  pangdidilěg a sprinkling 239(35).
  diligěn be sprinkled 244(11).

dilěm darkness 36(5).
  dumilěm it grew dark 52(29).
  pagdilěm a growing dark 36(32).
  kadilimŕn darkness 72(1).
  madilěm dark 40(15).

Del-Pilŕr S. family-n. 241(25).

relňs S. watch 137(41).

dimóniyo S. demon 40(5).

děn rěn also, again 18(16). 17. 47. 218. 221. 227. 238. 239. 262(11).

dinděng, see dingděng.

díne ríne loc. of irč: here 316 (27). 17. 47. 263.
  nŕrěrinč is here 74(21).
  paríne come here 301(33).
  pumaríne come here 302(8).
  naparíne came here 312(3).

-diněg: makáriněg hear 24(18).
  nakáriněg heard 20(19). 292(33).
  máriněg be heard 28(19).
  náriněg was heard 20(41).
  nŕrěriněg is being heard 114(12).
  pagkáriněg a hearing 18(13). 176(41).

dingděng dinděng wall 62(20).

Risŕl S. family-n., Rizal 275(43).

desgrásiya S. misfortune 276(39).

-distíno S.: idinistíno was assigned to the parish 96(2).
  nŕdistíno got assigned 50(9).

retáso S. patch 239(10).

-retráto S.: retratúhan be photographed 281(14).

díto ríto loc. of itň: here, hither; to him
16(4). 18(22). 316(27). 17. 47. 263. 280.
  nŕrěritň is here 70(26). 184(36). 203(6).
  pumŕparíto comes here 204(18).
  pŕparíto will come here 302(11). 306(11).
  pagparíto a coming here 203(5).
  pinŕparíto is being sent here 104(20).
  ipinaríto was come here for 307(1).
  naparíto came here 44(9).
  napŕparíto comes here 191(16).
  mŕparíto get here 184(35).
  mŕpŕparíto will get here 312(15).
  nŕparíto got here 312(13).
  nŕpŕparíto gets here 312(15).
  pagkŕparíto a getting here 313(1).
  makŕparí-paríto never come here 313(3) Corrigenda.

-díwang: nagdíwang celebrated 275(43).
  pagdiríwang a celebrating 90(13).
  ipinagdědíwang is being celebrated 110(12). 249(23).

diyŕn riyŕn loc. of iyŕn: there, thither, from there
182(27). 316(27). 17. 47. 263.
  náriyŕn went there, was there 191(14).
  pápariyŕn will go there 302(13).

diyáriyo S. newspaper 284(11).

Diyégo S. n. 100(40).

Diyňs S. God 64(4). 182(40). 59.

-dugtňng: idinugtňng was said in continuation 80(28). 102(19).

dugň` blood 22(8).
  nagdudugň` bled profusely 88(28). 282(38).
  pagdudugň` a bleeding 46(8).

-dúkit: dumúkit carved 88(8).
  pangdudúkit sculpture 90(3).
  mangdudúkit mandurúkit carver, sculptor 86(18). 104(8).
  dukítin be carved 90(11).
  dinúkit was carved 90(9).

-duklŕy: nagdůduklŕy-duklŕy keeps blurting out 114(15).

doktň S. learned man 168(9).

-dúkot: idinůdúkot is being scooped out 110(2).

dúlang low table 252(1).

-dulŕs: madulŕs slippery 313(41).
  mádulŕs slip 313(35).
  pagkádulŕs a slipping 313(39).
  magpadulŕs let oneself slide 313(36).
  pagpapadulŕs a letting oneself slide 294(29).

dúlo end 16(7).
  dúlo-ng-bandŕ-ng-kaliwŕ` left-hand end 274(28).
  dúlo-ng-bandŕ-ng-kánan right-hand end 211(1).
  dulúhan end part, back yard 34(38).

Romaněsmo S. Romanism 56(14).

-dumě: pagdumě defecation 42(4).
  marumě dirty 94(7). 219 (36).

Don-Nasáriyo S. n. 116(26).

dúnong knowledge 28(15).
  karúnong what wisdom 173(42).
  karunúngan wisdom 276(30).
  marúnong wise, knowing, knowing how to 16(1). 26(1). 269(8).
  pagmamarúnong a pretending to be wise 167(29).
  pagpapakamarúnong a making oneself wise 309(24).
  pinakamarúnong wisest 309(40).
  marurúnong pl. 48(10).
  nagparúnong caused to be educated 90(40).

-dungň: nagdúdungň is shy 285(17).

dúro` stitch 224(1).
  durúin be pricked 244(1).
  durúan be stuck into 251(22). a spit 221(8).
  duruŕn place for sticking 260(6).

-dúrog: dinúrog was crumbled 32(18).

dúsa suffering 245(18).
  pagdudúsa a suffering 76(24).
  parúsa punishment 16(28).
  nagpŕparúsa is causing to suffer 42(9).
  pagpaparúsa a causing to suffer 42(16).
  ipinarůrúsa is being caused to be suffered 313(10).
  parusáhan be punished 16(22).
  parůrusáhan will be punished 16(24).
  pinarusáhan was punished 292(19).
  pinarůrusáhan is being punished 222(18). 233(1). 308(8).
  pŕrusahŕn place of punishment 74(21). 309(12).
  mŕpŕparusáhan will get punished 22(5). 313(6).

rosáriyo S. rosary 104(4).
  magrosáriyo pray a rosary 104(17).

Rúso S. Russian 306(19).

doňn roňn ron loc. of iyňn: there; to him, to it
18(40). 38(17). 316(27). 17. 47. 263.
  dumoňn go there 20(26).
  magkaroňn get, have 96(3).
  nagkaroňn got, had 24(35). 52(30). 268(25).
  kinŕdňroonŕn is been in 74(33). 90(18). 279(13).
  nároňn nŕndon got there, is there 36(33). 193(15). 39. 468.
  nŕrňroňn is there 42(36). 74(12). 264(10).
  paroňn go there 301(33).
  pumaroňn go there 20(15). went there 76(27).
  páparoňn will go there 88(13). 207(30). 302(18).
  pagparoňn a going there 72(40). 302(16).
  parunŕn be gone to 70(34).
  pinaroonŕn pinaronŕn pinarunŕn was gone to 46(4). 138(37).
  ikináparoňn was the cause of going there 310(11).
  makaparňn be able to go there 100(16).
  naparoňn went there 20(23). 312(5).
  pagkáparoňn a getting there 300(9).

-doňp: pinagdódoňp were brought together (hands) 96(8).

duwŕg coward 312(22).
  kaduwágan cowardice 116(14).

duwčnde S. dwarf, elf 30(24).

Dňytsland E. n. of a ship 268(29).





G.

-gaŕn: magaŕn light, easy 48(2). 255(2).

gaáno, see anň.

gabě night, evening 36(2). See also áraw.
  gabě-gabě every night 62(38). 331.
  ginágabě is being overtaken by night 244(12).
  kagabě last night 190(15). 259.

gága madwoman 44(25).

gagambŕ spider 262(23).

-gálang: magálang polite 237(19). 289(5).

-gálaw: paggálaw a moving 192(20).

gáling coming from 40(5). 193(18).
  nanggáling came from 193(22).
  nanggŕgáling is coming from 193(22).
  pinanggalíngan was come from 256(30).
  pinanggŕgalíngan is being come from 32(30).
  kagŕgáling there has just been coming from 267(14).

galěng skill 58(6).
  gumalěng got well 54(10).
  magalěng skilful; well 46(29). 269(2).
  magagalěng pl. 94(32).
  pagpapagalěng a causing to get well 42(22).

gálit (a) anger 22(15).
  ikagálit be the cause of anger 195(39).
  ikinagálit was the cause of anger 303(24).
  kinagalítan was the object of anger 274(15).
  kinagŕgalítan is the object of anger 40(36).
  nagálit got angry 16(20).
  nagŕgálit gets angry 106(28).
  pagkagálit a getting angry 176(39).
  nŕkagalítan happened to be the object of anger 52(40). 298(28).
  magpagálit cause to get angry 98(32).
  palagalitěn hot-head 315(18).
  --(b) Accent shifted: galět angry 177(39).
  kagalět at odds 266(39).
  nagkagalět had a falling out 269(19).
  pagkakagalět a falling out 155(27). 269(19).
  nagkagá-kagalět got angry at each other, pl. 269(25).
  kŕgalítan quarrel 236(36). 279(34).
  pagkakŕgalítan a quarreling together 222(42). 279(39).

-gambála`: nagambála` was disturbed 284(36).
  nŕgambála` was unintentionally disturbed 293(8).

gámit that used 46(39).
  gamět used, second-hand 183(15).
  gumámit use 58(14). used 94(4).
  gumŕgámit is using 202(17).
  paggámit a using 56(37).
  gamítin be used 161(20).
  gŕgamítin will be used 234(22).
  ginámit was used 60(26).
  ginŕgámit is being used 40(35).
  gamítan be used on 58(16).
  kagamitŕn use, employment 36(23). 120(15).
  magámit be able to be used 20(5). 74(7). 283(26).
  nagámit was able to be used 230(14).
  nŕgámit was accidentally used 293(10).
  pagkŕgámit the way of using, chance ability to use 240(3). 291(40).
  ipinagŕgámit is being caused to be used 306(9).

gamňt medicine 54(9).
  panggamňt means of curing 46(14).
  gumamňt cure 46(13).
  gumágamňt is curing 46(16).
  paggamňt a curing 42(15).
  manggagamňt manggagámot physician 28(24). 44(28.30). 243(10).
  panggagamňt curing 42(25).
  gamutěn be treated 46(23).
  ginamňt was treated 46(4).
  ginágamňt is being treated 290(13).
  ipinagamňt was caused to be treated 54(8).

-gána S.: gumŕgána is earning 227(18).

ganŕ concern 98(6). 281(25). 198.

gandŕ beauty 70(11).
  magandŕ beautiful 48(15). 152(3).
  magagandŕ pl. 72(19).
  nagpápagandŕ is causing to be beautiful 48(18).

ganitň, see itň.

ganiyŕn, see iyŕn.

gantě that given in return 90(12). 200(33). 272(11).
  gantě ng pála`: gumantě-ng-pála` return favors 231(14).
  gumantě act in retaliation 227(19).
  manghigantě take vengeance 24(25). 241(19).
  manghíhigantě will take vengeance 241(21).
  gantihěn be given return for 58(9).
  panghigantihŕn be the object of vengeance 40(38).

gáno, see anň.

ganoňn, see iyňn.

-gápang: gumŕgápang is crawling 18(3).
  paggápang a crawling 18(4).

-gápas: panggápas kind of knife 225(5).
  gumápas cut, slice 227(20).
  pinanggŕgapásan is being cut from 256(32).

-gápos: iginápos was tied down 58(31).

-gastŕ S.: paggastŕ a spending 248(11).

gŕstos S. expense 54(27).

gátas milk 175(1).

gawŕ` that done 54(20). 74(8). 240(34). 277(24).
  gumawŕ` do, make 244(35).
  paggawŕ` a making, doing 86(10). 202(36).
  gawěn be done, made 24(17).
  gŕgawěn will be made, done 32(6). 104(1).
  ginawŕ` was done, made 20(36).
  ginágawŕ` is being done, made 44(3.9).
  pinaggagawŕ` was variously done 310(8).
  ginawaŕn was done to 74(40). 76(3.6).
  gŕwáan workshop 58(41).
  gawaŕn factory 315(35).
  kagagawŕn surprisingly, illicitly done 277(23).
  nakagawŕ` succeeded in making 86(7).
  nakagágawŕ` is able to make 281(28).
  magawŕ` be able to be done 30(6). 56(2).
  magágawŕ` will be able to be done 18(20). 74(27).
  nagawŕ` has been done 54(40).
  nagágawŕ` can be done 102(30).
  pagkagawŕ` a having made, ability to make 282(10.28).
  mapaggawŕ` given to doing 98(31).
  mágawŕ` chance to be done 238(36).
  pagkágawŕ` the way making turned out 291(3).
  pagawŕ` ordered to be made 104(11).
  nagpagawŕ` caused to be made 104(8).
  ipinagawŕ` was caused to be made 104(15).

gawě` direction 163(28). 193(28).

gáya like 18(8). 316(30). 272.

gayňn, see iyňn.

gibŕ` broken-down 225(9).
  gibá-gibŕ` tumble-down 290(36).
  mangágibŕ` collapse, pl. 296(3).
  mangŕgěgibŕ` will collapse 296(5).

gílas energy, enterprise 48(32).

-gílid: tagílid side 315(27).
  tumagílid turned the side to 231(17).
  pagtagílid a moving side-ways 192(20). 231(17).
  tinagilíran was hurt in the side 254(18).
  tinaligdŕn was turned the side to 254(19).
  tagilíran side wall, side part 261(29).
  nŕtŕtagílid is inclined to one side 296(24).

gíliw respected 219(3).

ginŕw cold feeling 280(38).
  naginŕw got cold 285(17).

-ginháwa: guminháwa became comfortable 227(20).
  guměginháwa is getting comfortable 227(21).
  kaginhawáhan comfort, bliss 72(20).
  nakaginháwa caused to be comfortable 280(36).
  maginháwa comfortable 289(6).
  nagpaginháwa caused to be comfortable 302(32).

gíning Miss, Mrs. 256.

gintň gold 311(20).

ginoň Mr., gentleman 54(37). 100(30). 219(3). 289(5). 256.

-gěng 48. 250. 516.: magěng become 18(26). 314(18).
  magíging will become, take place 18(28). 94(23).
  nagěng became, occurred 18(31). 36(38). 144(23).
  nagíging is becoming, arising 42(5). 62(14).
  pagigěng a becoming 314(19).

-gísing (a) awaken, tr.:
  kagěgísing there has been awakening 184(12).
  makŕgísing accidentally awaken 62(11).
  nakŕgísing awakened 257(32).
  nŕgísing was accidentally awakened 293(12).
  napagísing caused himself to be awakened 311(30).
  --(b) With accent shifted: wake up, intr.:
  ikinágisěng was the cause of waking up 158(9).
  mágisěng wake up 18(39).
  mŕgěgisěng will wake up 18(37).
  nágisěng woke up 38(21).
  pagkágisěng a waking up 62(18).
  pagisěn-gisěng waking up now and then 300(36).
  nápagisěng woke up 312(39).
  palagisingěn fitful sleeper 315(19).

gitnŕ` middle 16(7). 24(38).

grúpo S. group 90(25).

gúbat jungle 18(2).
  kagubátan jungle country 118(40).

gubiyčrno S. government 92(32). 200(18).

-gúgol: ginúgol was spent 257(14).
  ginůgúgol is being spent 112(22).

gúlang age 38(6). 56(33).
  paggúlang a growing ripe 272(22).
  magúlang old, mature; parent 32(6). 283(39).

-gúlat: gulatěn scary 247(32).
  pagkagúlat a getting scared 285(42).
  pagkŕgúlat astonishment 36(38).
  mapanggúlat given to scaring 289(36).
  magugulatěn jumpy 62(7). 290(4).
  nŕpagúlat was astonished 30(22). 58(8).
  palagulatěn nervous person 315(20).

gúlay vegetable 72(36).

-gulň: nagkagulň was surprised 268(29).
  magulň confused 237(2).
  nagulň became confused 284(38).
  nagúgulň is confused 52(29).

gulňd hill 226(25).

gúlok bolo 38(27).

-gúmon: nŕgůgúmon is trailing 98(20).

guntěng shears 26(2).

gupět a cutting with scissors, hair-cut 219(13).
  panggupět used for cutting, scissors 225(5).
  gumupět cut 26(15).
  naggugupět cut to bits 238(33).
  naggúgugupět is cutting to bits 238(34).
  paggugupět a cutting to bits 273(33).
  manggupět cut hair 26(1).
  nanggupět did hair-cutting 167(2).
  manggugupět manggugúpit hair-cutter 24(34). 243(11).
  panggugupět hair-cutting 26(19).
  ginupět was cut 60(6).
  gupitŕn be sheared 26(3).
  nakagupět was able to cut 281(29).
  pagkagupět a having cut 250(32).
  nakágupět accidentally cut 290(12).
  nágupět chanced to be cut 293(38).
  pagkágupět a chance cutting 291(4.42).
  nagpagupět allowed himself to be sheared 302(33).
  pagpapagupět an allowing oneself to be sheared 302(34).
  ipinagupět was caused to be cut 180(11).

góra S. cap 246(4).

gurň` teacher 80(40).

gustň S.: desired, liked 16(29). 52(22). 267.
  paggustň a desiring 18(21).
  gustuhěn be desired 114(41).
  nagkagustň conceived a desire 268(31).
  ipinagkagustň was the cause of desiring 272(33).
  ikinŕgůgustň is the cause of liking 273(31).
  pinagkŕkagustuhŕn is being liked by many 275(7).
  magustúhin fond 110(1). 289(42).
  pagkágustň a coming to desire 24(1). 92(36).
  mŕgustuhŕn happen to be liked 74(2).
  nŕgůgustuhŕn is liked 209(25).

gútom hunger 28(32).
  gutňm hungry 76(8).
  gutúmin be assailed by hunger 28(28).
  nagůgútom is hungry 285(19).
  palagutuměn one who easily gets hungry 315(19).

guwŕrdiya-siběl guwŕrdiya-sivěl S. gendarme, gendarmerie 20(20).

guwarnisiyňn S. harness 315(33).

gúya` young of animal, calf 210(24). See báhay.





H.

hába` length 56(39).
  humába` grew long 38(30).
  kahabáan length 192(22).
  mahába` long 120(2).
  pinakamahába` longest 58(11).
  mahahába` pl. 18(15).

habágat spring wind 227(40).

hábang while, during 16(2). 292.

-hábol: nagsěsihábol are pursuing 301(21).
  paghábol a pursuing 84(27).
  panghahábol a chasing 116(7).
  habúlin be pursued 18(10).
  hinábol was pursued 88(24).
  hinŕhábol is being pursued 68(19).
  nŕhŕhábol gets pursued 18(8).
  ipinahábol was caused to be pursued 76(10).
  ipinahŕhábol is being caused to be pursued 72(32).

hagdŕn ladder 270(31).
  hagdánan stairway 106(11).

-hágis: naghágis tossed 48(8).
  inihágis was tossed 16(30). 248(17).
  mapanghágis given to flinging 289(36).
  pahagěs with a toss 300(14) and Corrigenda.

-hagk, see halěk.

-hágod: humŕhágod is stroking 98(21).
  hinágod was stroked 84(10).

Hagúnoy place-n. 110(24).

-hakbŕng: háhakbŕng will take a step 70(1).
  paghakbŕng a stepping 68(29).

-hákot: paghahŕkútan a carting together 118(17).

halagŕ price 54(23).
  mahalagŕ dear 36(14). 234(41).
  pinakamahalagŕ most valued 42(1). 288(38).
  mahahalagŕ pl. 116(2).

-halakhŕk: nápahalakhŕk burst into laughter 68(26).

haláman garden-plant 72(36).
  hŕlamanŕn garden, flower-pot 74(14). 260(38).

halayŕ S. jelly 253(38).

halíge post 64(23).

halěk kiss 94(12).
  humalěk kissed 227(22).
  hagkŕn be kissed 251(24).
  hinagkŕn was kissed 94(10).
  mahagkŕn be able to be kissed 92(26).

halimbáwa` example 48(23). 62(10). 265(2).

-halimhěm: hinŕhalimhimŕn is being brooded on 102(18).

hálo` that admixed 220(35).
  hálů-hálo` confused 50(15).
  hinalúan was mixed with 251(24).
  hinŕhalúan is being given an admixture 108(6).
  haluŕn mixing-vessel 260(8).
  pinahŕhalúan is being caused to be given an admixture 108(7).

hálos almost 110(25). 265(3).

hámak unfortunate, no-account 219(3).
  ikŕpahámak be the cause of coming to grief 310(12).
  ikŕpŕpahámak will be the cause of coming to grief 310(14).
  mŕpahámak come to grief 312(22).
  mŕpŕpahámak will become good-for-nothing 312(24).
  nŕpahámak came to grief 312(17).
  nŕpŕpahámak is getting spoiled 312(19).

hampŕs whipping, whip 220(37). 221(42).
  hampŕs-lúpa` vagabond 211(4).
  maghampŕs-lúpa` be a vagabond 235(27).
  panghampŕs used as a whip 225(8).
  humampŕs hit with a whip 227(24).
  naghampŕs whipped himself 233(38).
  nagháhahampŕs is whipping about 238(36).
  manghampŕs whip people 239(38).
  hampasěn be whipped 184(8).
  hinampasŕn was struck with a whip 251(25).
  hampásan whipping-bench 258(27).
  kahampásan one of two who perform mutual flagellation 277(39).
  nahampŕs has been whipped 284(12).
  nakáhampŕs happened to hit 291(27).
  náhampŕs was accidentally hit with a whip 293(14).
  pagkáhampŕs a chance hitting 62(17). 292(3).
  páhampasěn be whipped harder 305(11).

hámon a challenge 52(25).
  manghŕhámon will challenge 48(24).
  manghahámon challenger 48(29).
  hinámon was challenged 48(32).
  hinŕhámon is being challenged 18(21).

hánap that sought 76(23).
  hánap-búhay livelihood 271(40).
  maghŕhánap-búhay will work for a livelihood 193(32). 235(30).
  humánap seek 74(23).
  paghánap a seeking 227(25).
  maghánap earn 32(11). 233(39).
  paghahánap the earning one's living 60(16). 102(7).
  maghanŕp seek in quantity; search 237(28).
  paghahanŕp a searching 52(29).
  hanápin be sought 92(12). 244(13).
  hinánap was sought out 16(22).
  hinŕhánap is being sought 76(18).
  ihánap be looked for 30(32).
  paghahanapŕn a searching through a place 52(34).
  nahánap has been sought 143(36).
  makapaghanŕp have searched 287(20).
  nakapaghanŕp has searched 287(18).
  pinahanápan was ordered to be sought in 52(15).

handŕ` a serving food 114(34).
  maghandŕ` serve 112(29).
  nagháhandŕ` is serving 114(9).
  iháhandŕ` will be served 237(36).
  inihandŕ` was served 299(11).
  iniháhandŕ` is being served out 62(36).
  nakahandŕ` is served 183(22). 281(4).

-hantŕy: hantayěn be awaited 32(26).
  hinantŕy was awaited 50(37).

hangŕd aim, goal 46(36).

hangŕl fool 276(31).
  kahangalŕn foolishness 276(31).

-hanggŕ: hanggáhan boundary 258(29).
  hanggŕn limit 22(6).

hanggŕng until, up to 16(12). 68. 293.

hángin wind 118(31).

-hángo`: paghángo` a rescuing 78(10).
  hinángo` was rescued 88(36).
  ikahŕhángo` will be the means of rescuing 74(42).
  mahángo` be able to be rescued 74(23).
  mahŕhángo` will be able to be rescued 78(2).
  nahŕhángo` is being rescued 78(12).

hápis grief 38(11).
  hinápis was grieved 244(14).
  nahŕhápis is sad 285(20).
  pagkahápis a grieving 74(25).

hápon afternoon 18(39). 190(23.31).
  maghápon whole day 112(9). 262(8).
  kahápon yesterday 152(13). 172(6). 259.
  pagkahápon a having supped 104(16).

Hapňn S. Japan 269(20).

Hapunčs S. Japanese 306(19).

hárang obstruction 220(39).
  panghárang used as an obstruction 225(8).
  humárang held up 227(26).
  paghárang a holding up 198(21).
  naghárang made an obstruction 233(41).
  paghahárang an obstructing 233(42).
  nanghárang held people up 239(38).
  panghahárang highway robbery 239(40).
  hinárang was held up 282(36).
  ipinanghárang was used in holding up 250(10).
  hinarángan was obstructed 251(27).
  pinangharángan was the place of holding up 255(11).
  harangŕn hold-up 197(9).
  paghaharangŕn a holding up together 275(22).
  ikinahárang was the cause of being held up 272(6).
  pagkahárang a having held up 282(29).
  pagkapanghahárang a having practised highway robbery 287(30).
  nŕhárang got held up 295(6).
  pagkŕhárang a chance holding up 292(5).
  pahárang caused to be held up 197(10).
  paharŕng crosswise 300(15).
  pagpapahárang a causing to be held up 302(36).
  pinapanghŕhárang is being caused to practise highway robbery 305(22).
  ipinahárang was caused to be held up 306(11).

harŕp front 228(25).
  humáharŕp is facing 96(7).
  háharŕp will be present 96(18).
  hinarŕp was faced 20(37).
  harapŕn place in front of 24(37).
  kaharŕp facing 98(21).
  náharŕp came to face 72(2).

harděn S. garden 72(19).

hári` king 24(29).
  naghŕhári` is ruling 24(30).
  pagharían be ruled 255(14).
  pinaghŕharían is being ruled 24(32).
  kahariyŕn kingdom 24(36). 276(18).

-hása`: hasŕ` sharpened 202(30).
  paghahása` a sharpening 232(16).
  ihása` be sharpened 248(19).
  hasáan be given a sharp edge 251(28).
  paghasáan be sharpened on 255(15).
  hasaŕn whetstone 255(15).

-hátak: paghátak a tugging 78(8).
  hatákin be pulled at 284(16).
  kahatakŕn one of two who tug against each other 186(38).

háti` divide; that divided; mid- 222(1).
  háti ng gabě: naghŕháti-ng-gabě it is midnight 84(19). 235(24).
  kinŕháti-ng-gabihŕn was at midnight 38(21). 279(25).
  hatě` divided 222(31).
  pangháti` used for dividing 225(11).
  humáti` divided, halved 227(29).
  nagháti` distributed 234(1).
  paghaháti` a distributing 234(3).
  naghatě` divided up, divided in quantity 237(30).
  paghahatě` a dividing in quantity 237(32).
  nangháti` shared orders 239(41).
  panghaháti` a sharing orders 239(42).
  hináti` was divided 16(7). 244(4).
  pinaghatě` was divided in quantity 246(20).
  paghatían be shared 28(34).
  ikinaháti` was the cause of breaking in two 270(39). of being able
  to divide 272(9).
  naháti` has been divided 284(39).
  pagkaháti` a having divided 282(31).
  nakŕháti` chanced to divide 291(29).
  pagkŕháti` a chance dividing 291(6). 292(8).
  paháti` ordered to be divided 299(14).
  pahatě` tending to halve 300(18).
  nagpaháti` caused to be divided 302(38).
  pagpapaháti` a causing to be divided 302(41).
  ipinháti` was caused to be divided 306(13).
  ipinagpaháti` was caused to be divided up 307(19).
  pinahatían was caused to be given his share 308(9).
  pinapahatían was caused to be caused to to be given his share
  308(41).
  kalaháti` half 80(24). 273(21). 314(32).
  kalaháti-ng-áraw half-day 118(26).
  kalaháti-ng-óras half-hour 66(36).
  magkákalahatě` will be half through 104(17). 238(22).
  pangangalaháti` a being halfway 24(6). 241(13).
  kalahatían middle 261(27).

-hatěd: naghatěd conveyed 56(26).
  nagháhatěd is conveying 98(3).
  paghahatěd an escorting 114(39).
  ihatěd be conveyed 34(6).
  iháhatěd will be conveyed 104(28).
  inihatěd was conveyed 20(26).
  iniháhatěd is being conveyed 20(4).
  hŕhatdŕn will be conveyed to 175(1).
  hinŕhatdŕn is being conveyed to 190(10).
  paghŕhatdŕn will be delivered to 20(9).
  pinaghatdŕn was delivered to 255(16).
  pinaghŕhatdŕn is being delivered to 179(8).
  ipinahatěd was caused to be conveyed 294(28).
  napahatěd had himself conveyed 52(37).

hátol advice 30(4).
  naghŕhátol advises 74(30).

-háwa: nakŕhŕháwa is contagious 272(3).

háwak that grasped 66(35).
  humáwak took hold 78(7).
  pagháwak a taking hold 227(31).
  hinawákan was taken hold of 66(26).
  makaháwak be able to take hold 22(22).
  nakaháwak has taken hold 281(14).
  nakŕháwak got hold of 290(18).

-háyag (a): paháyag that published 48(37).
  nagpŕpaháyag causes to become public, announces 48(35).
  pagpapaháyag an announcing 90(22).
  ipinaháyag was caused to become public, was announced 56(6).
  pŕhayágan páhayagŕn newspaper 48(27). 236(41). See báhay.
  --(b) with accent shift: hŕyágan public affair, public 236(37).
  náhayŕg got widely known 60(11).

háyop animal; carabao 28(26).

-higŕ`: paghigŕ` a going to bed 64(6).
  hiněhigŕn is being slept on 102(26).
  hěgáan bed 244(22).
  hihigŕn couch 62(12).
  kahíhigŕ` there has just been lying down 267(15).
  makahigŕ` be able to lie down 281(33).
  nakahigŕ` has lain down 86(39).
  nahigŕ` lay down 38(17). 285(34).
  nahíhigŕ` is in the act of lying down 285(35).
  máhigŕ` get laid 295(8).
  nagpatihigŕ` suddenly lay down 313(20).
  mápatihigŕ` fall on one's back 313(37).
  nŕpŕpatihigŕ` falls on his back 313(35).

higŕnte S. giant 32(31).

-higět: mahigět with an excess 118(16).

-higpět: mahigpět firm, strict 42(40).
  mahihigpět pl. 122(5).

híkaw ear-ring 303(3).
  nagpahíkaw caused himself to be adorned with ear-rings 303(2).

-híla: huměhíla is dragging 118(20).
  paghíla a dragging 118(22).
  hiníla was dragged 16(3).
  hiněhíla is being dragged 100(23).
  mahěhíla will be able to be dragged 80(27).

-hilámos: panghilámos water for washing hands 62(36).

hilŕw raw 28(31).
  palahilawěn kind of rice 315(20).

hilěng request 219(34).
  humilěng requested 186(18).
  hinilěng was asked for 16(27).
  hiníhilěng is being asked for 52(8).
  mapanghilěng given to demanding 42(7).

hěléra S. row 34(20).
  makahiléra be in single file 110(41).
  nakahiléra is in single file 122(2).

-himběng: mahimběng sound, deep 296(39).
  náhimběng fell sound asleep 84(19).

hína` weakness 18(7).
  humína` became weak, slow 227(34).
  naghína` made gentle 234(5).
  nanghína` slackened up 240(2).
  nagsěsipanghína` are getting weak 108(28).
  kahináan weakness, slowness 22(39).
  mahína` weak, slow 22(33).
  mahihína` pl. 149(20).

hinála` suspicion 40(23).
  paghihinála` a suspecting 84(39).
  hininála` was suspected 30(23).
  hiněhinála` is being suspected 18(20).
  pinaghěhinaláan is the object of suspicion 40(21).
  mŕpaghěhinaláan mŕpŕpaghinaláan will get suspected 38(19). 298(19).
  nŕpaghěhinaláan napŕpaghinaláan gets suspected 298(15).

hindě` not, no 16(4). 152(7). 228. 237. 239. 301. 319. 340.

-hinhěn: mahihinhěn respectable, decent, pl. 94(11).

hintŕy wait 206(1).
  maghintŕy wait 153(4).
  naghintŕy awaited 26(13). 30(14).
  naghíhintŕy is awaiting 48(12).
  paghihintŕy a waiting 285(23).
  hinintŕy was awaited 120(37).

hintň` a stopping; stop 22(26). 222(2). stopped 223(28).
  maghintň` stop 170(3).
  magsihintň` pl. 184(22).
  naghintň` stopped, ceased 18(3). 283(13).
  naghíhintň` stops 110(36).
  nagsísipaghintň` pl. 112(5).
  ihintň` be stopped 104(19).
  hintuŕn be ceased from 251(28).
  hinintuŕn was ceased from 122(22).
  hintúan stopping-place 258(32).
  máhintň` come to an end 60(37).
  náhintň` got stopped 259(34).
  pahintň-hintň` stopping at intervals 300(30).
  pinahintň` was caused to stop 26(2).
  pinapaghintň` was caused to cease 84(31).
  ipinahintň` was caused to be stopped 241(1).

-hintúlot: pahintúlot a permit 116(2). 272(4).
  ipinahěhintúlot is being permitted 54(18).
  pahintulútan be given permission 264(22).
  pinahintulútan was given permission 264(39).
  pinahěhintulútan is being given permission 122(6).

hinňg ripe 34(28).
  nagkákahinňg are in part getting ripe 36(1).
  nahinňg got ripe 16(13).
  pagkahinňg a getting ripe 300(19).
  napahinňg was able to be caused to ripen 311(20).
  nápahinňg came to be caused to ripen 312(27).

-hingŕ: humíhingŕ is breathing 20(8).
  hiningŕ breath 40(28). 228(29).
  makapaghingŕ be able to breathe 68(20).
  magpahingŕ rest 54(11).
  nagpápahingŕ is resting 303(3).
  makapahingŕ be able to rest 311(2).
  makapápahingŕ will have rested 311(4).
  nakapahingŕ has rested 310(43).
  nakapápahingŕ has just rested, is rested 206(1).
  nŕpŕpahingŕ is resting, of animals 312(31).
  nangŕpŕpahingŕ pl. 312(37).

hingě`: paghingě` a requesting 227(35).
  manghingě` beg 34(18).
  nanghingě` begged 32(20).
  nagsísipanghingě` are begging 112(5).
  manghihingě` begger, beggar 112(16).
  makahingě` be able to ask for 281(33)
  makáhingě` get by asking 32(22).

hip, see -íhip.

hípag husband's sister, (woman's) brother's wife 242(13).
  maghípag two women, one of whom is married to the other's brother
  242(12).

hípon kind of shrimp 259(6).

-hirŕm: híhirŕm will borrow 227(36).
  manghirŕm borrow 240(5).
  panghihirŕm a borrowing 221(5).
  hinirŕm was borrowed 174(22).
  hěráman person borrowed from 258(34).
  kahěráman one of two who borrow from each other 277(39).
  magkahěráman two who borrow from each other 278(35).
  makákapanghirŕm will be able to borrow 287(24).
  nakákapanghirŕm is able to borrow 287(22).
  mapanghirŕm given to borrowing 289(37).
  papanghiraměn be caused to go and borrow 305(34).
  mapahíhirŕm will be able to be caused to borrow, will be able to
  be lent to 311(21).

hírap misery 22(5). 50(29).
  hirŕp wearied 62(25).
  maghěhírap will suffer 46(18).
  paghihírap suffering 44(24).
  kahirápan hardship 62(4).
  mahírap difficult, poor 22(32). 36(19). 269(3).
  mahihírap pl. 54(22).
  nahirápan was pained, wearied 118(22).
  nahěhirápan is being pained 44(12).
  nagpŕpahírap is causing to suffer 22(10).
  pagpapahírap a causing to suffer 46(14). 273(1).
  pagpapakahírap a taking pains 309(20).
  pahěhirápan will be caused to suffer 44(10). 100(15).

Hesůs S. Jesus 285(42).

-hitět: hititěn be puffed at 66(13).

-hitsŕ (S. ?): ihiníhitsŕ is being tossed up 48(5).
  hinitsahŕn was tossed to 48(7).
  nápahitsŕ got thrown upward 84(3).

hitsúra S. appearance 40(13). 106(11). 116(33).

-híwa`: hiníwa` was slashed 20(33). 203(37).

-hiwalŕy: maghiwá-hiwalŕy part, separate, pl. 183(11).
  naghiwalŕy parted (two persons) 88(17).
  naghiwá-hiwalŕy pl. 26(34). 102(40).
  naghíhiwalŕy are parting 40(18).
  magkáhiwalŕy go apart (two involuntary actors) 270(38).
  magkŕkŕhiwá-hiwalŕy will part, pl. 26(32).
  nagkŕhiwá-hiwalŕy went apart, pl. 271(14).

hiyŕ` shame 72(12). 90(39).
  kahiyá-hiyŕ` arousing shame 58(13).
  kahiyaŕn be revered 274(18).
  makahiyŕ` given to embarrassment 288(31).
  nahíhiyŕ` is ashamed 285(20).
  mapanghěyŕ` given to embarrassing 289(38).

heyugrafíya hewgrafíya S. geography 82(1).

hubŕd naked 223(29).
  maghubŕd undress oneself 232(19).
  pinaghůhubarŕn is being undressed in 255(18).
  nagpahubŕd had himself undressed 303(5).
  pinapaghubŕd was caused to undress himself 305(21).
  pinahubarŕn was caused to be undressed 308(11).

húgas dish-washing 219(36).
  naghůhúgas is washing 114(7).
  maghuhugŕs dish-washer 242(42).
  manghuhugŕs id. 243(14).
  hinůhugásan is being washed 251(30).
  hugasŕn place for dish-washing 260(8).

húkay hole, ditch 24(38).
  hukŕy hollowed 104(9).
  humúkay dig 24(37). 152(32). dug 179(26).
  hůhukáyin hůhukáin will be dug 309(34).
  ihinúkay was dug for 248(19).
  hinukáyan was dug up 179(27).

hukňm judge 18(26).
  hůkúman court of justice 54(31).
  paghuhůkúman session of court 54(34).

-húla`: humúla` predicted 277(37).
  manghúla` tell fortunes 240(6).
  manghuhúla` fortune-teller 206(16).

húli (a) that caught 220(41). 282(6).
  panghúli means of catching 52(27).
  humúli catch 108(5). 165(34).
  paghúli a catching 108(3).
  nagsěsihúli are catching 102(1).
  nanghůhúli goes catching 106(39). 240(6).
  panghuhúli a catching in quantity 106(24).
  manghuhúli catcher 56(20). 110(6).
  hulíhin be caught 52(16). 68(9).
  hinúli was caught 20(20). 84(31).
  hulíhan be caught from 251(32).
  hulihŕn a catching by many 260(9).
  pagkahúli a having caught 282(33).
  mŕhúli get caught 52(22). 70(19). 102(3).
  nŕhúli got caught 16(22). 44(16).
  nŕhůhúli is getting caught, is caught 28(29). 309(7).
  nagpahúli allowed himself to be left behind 68(36).
  tagahúli catcher 165(34).
  --(b) Accent shifted: hulě late; last 20(30). 28(18). 222(31).
  panghulě last 226(10).
  kŕhulě-hulíhan very last 40(27). 280(17).
  máhulě be late 235(39).
  mŕhůhulě will be left behind 18(18).
  náhulě was last 118(34).
  pagkáhulě a being left behind 18(31). 296(18).
  mŕpŕpaghulě will all be caught 198(12). 297(20).

Húliyo S. n. 279(5).

Holň S. Sulu 120(18).

húlo` source, upstream 279(4).

-húlog: ihúlog be dropped 168(19).
  ihůhúlog will be dropped 64(43).
  hulúgan be dropped to 16(17).
  hůhulúgan will be dropped to 16(19).
  ipakihúlog be dropped along 265(6).
  ipinakihúlog was dropped along 265(9).
  ipinakěkihúlog is being asked to be dropped along 265(10).
  ikinahúlog was the cause of falling 74(38).
  kahůhulúgan will be fallen from 158(30).
  kinahulúgan was fallen from 274(19).
  kahůlúgan one of two who drop to each other 278(6).
  kahulugŕn meaning 30(18). 120(24).
  nakahúlog caused to drop 281(34).
  mahúlog fall down 299(32).
  mahůhúlog will fall down 22(12).
  nahúlog fell down 24(7).
  pagkahúlog a falling down 24(18).
  magpatihulňg throw oneself down 206(23).
  magpápatihulňg will throw himself down 313(28).
  nagpatihulňg threw himself down 313(21).
  nagpápatihulňg throws himself down 313(24).

húni chirp 197(21).
  humúni purred 84(1).
  hůníhan chirping together 202(21).
  kahůníhan one of two that chirp at each other 278(8).
  mapaghuně given to neighing 289(31).
  palahůníhin given to neighing, chirping 315(15).

Húniyo S. June 110(11).

hungkňy winnowed 223(30)
  naghungkňy winnowed 232(21).
  hungkúyan winnowing-machine 258(36).

Hňrdan S. Jordan 106(6).

hurnň S. oven 212(36).

húsay excellence 58(1).
  nagsěsihúsay are getting well 108(36).
  mahúsay in good shape, excellent 46(5). 108(12). 269(4).
  pinakamahúsay most excellent 28(38).
  mahuhúsay pl. 196(22).
  nŕhúsay got well 44(24).

hustň S. just suited 108(40).

hóta S. iota 30(16).

huwŕg not, do not 20(13). 234. 239. 240.

Huwŕn S. n. 20(2).

Huwána S. n. 173(25).

huwátaw (C?) Chinese bowl 255(30).

huwčs S. judge 54(37).

huwéting (C?) lottery 229(26).





I(E).

ibŕ other 22(10). 66. 98. 132. 251. 314.
  ibŕ t ibŕ: nakapagěibŕ-t-ibŕ is able to alter 36(10).
  pinagibhŕn was differed in 255(19).
  pagkakáibŕ a being different 46(39). 276(31).
  náibŕ got different 294(24)
  nŕěibŕ changes 50(17).
  pagkáibŕ a being different 110(17).

íbig liked, desired 20(18). 267.
  pagíbig a desiring, loving 60(25). 64(4).
  iníbig was desired, loved 18(15). 40(16).
  iněíbig is being desired, loved 92(20).
  ěbígan mutual love 259(28).
  magěbígan loved each other 236(29).
  nagěěbígan are loving each other 236(29).
  pagiěbígan a loving each other 90(6).
  kaibigŕn desire, affection 140(2). 168(38).
  kaěbígan one of two who love each other 94(18). 140(2). 278(9).
  magkaěbígan two who love each other 42(30). 278(36).
  kayibígan friend 16(5). 139(41). 278(17).
  magkayibígan pair of friends 22(30). 278(37).
  magkakayibígan pl. 26(30). 278(40).
  pagkakayibígan a being friends 24(28). 278(30).
  makipagkayibígan make friends with 40(6). 278(31).
  nakipagkayibígan made friends with 86(30).
  kŕibígan person loved 279(41).
  nagkŕkŕibígan are loving each other 90(32). 280(4).
  maibigěn fond of 96(39). 110(15).

íbon bird 197(21).

-ígi`: maígi` accurate 28(5).

igěb that dipped 220(42).
  umigěb dip out 227(38).
  mangigěb fetch water 282(24).

Igoróte S. Igorote 110(33).

-íhaw: ihŕw roasted 222(32).
  magíhaw roast, tr. 232(21).
  iníhaw was roasted 244(16).
  ihawŕn gridiron 295(9).

-íhip: uměíhip is blowing 227(39).
  hinípan was blown on 251(33).

ikŕw thou 18(10). 47. 63. 182.
  See iyň, kŕ, mň.

-íkid: nakaíkid is coiled up 120(21).
  tagaíkid roller 315(35).

-iklě`: kaikliŕn shortness 192(21).
  maiiklě` short, pl. 24(31).
  nápakaiklě` very short 221(17).

ílag go away 151(39).
  umílag get out of the way 56(20).
  nagsiílag got out of the way, pl. 118(34).
  uměílag is running away 116(7).
  pagiílag a getting away 116(27).
  pangingílag an avoiding 102(2). 118(43). 240(8).
  ilágan inlagŕn be avoided 238(42).
  inilágan was avoided 251(37).
  iněilágan is being avoided 36(22).

ilŕn a few; how many? 16(11). 66. 98.
  íilŕn only a few 38(9). 48(28).
  makáilŕn several times 44(39). 298(33).

ilŕng uncanny 40(9).
  pagilŕng a tricking 227(41).
  kailángan kayilángan necessity 58(16). 275(35). 288(12).
  nangŕngailángan requires 108(2). 275(38).
  pangangailángan a needing 236(32). 275(39).
  kŕkailangánin will be necessitated 275(39).
  kinŕkailángan is being necessitated 46(11). 82(38).
  nailŕng was nonplussed 285(21).

-ílap: maiílap wild, pl. 28(25).

ílaw light, lamp 122(5).
  ilawŕn lamp 286(27).
  maílaw illuminated 72(6).

elektrisidŕd S. electricity 290(19).

-ílin: pangingílin performing of ceremonies 112(18).

ílog river 16(2).
  Ílog-Pásig Pasig river 244(9).

Ilóko S. Iloko 275(8).

impiyčrno, see infiyčrno.

empléyo S. employment 92(32).

impň grandmother 59. 256.
  magimpň grandmother and grandchild 242(13).

inŕ mother 30(27). 151(22). 59.
  maginŕ mother and child 242(14).
  magiinŕ pl. 242(30).
  inahěn female 238(40).
  iníinŕ godmother 247(17).

-ínam: maínam handsome, pleasant 18(14). 269(5).
  pŕináman be made very pretty 308(37).

indŕ` grandmother 59. 256.

-iněp: naíiněp is impatient 285(22).

ínit heat 134(19).
  inět heated, angry 167(9). 222(33).
  umínit became hot 227(42).
  nagínit heated; grew angry 24(22).
  nagěínit is heating 234(6).
  kainítan heat 118(20).
  maínit hot 50(9).
  maiínit pl. 96(29). and Corrigenda.
  taginět hot season 152(20). 315(11). and Corrigenda.

iniyň prep. and loc. of kayň: your, you, by you, pl. 165. 169.
  niniyň disj., by you, of you, 163.

-inlag, see ílag.

infiyčrno impiyčrno S. hell 22(6).

entabládo S. platform 98(40).

-intindč S.: nŕintindihŕn was understood 50(6).

Intsčk Chinese 56(34).

-inň: ininň was paid attention to 68(6).
  náinň got noticed 100(3).

-inňm: uminňm drank 228(2).
  paginňm a drinking 163(21).
  magiinňm drink much 206(26).
  mŕngingínom mangiínom boozer 243(11).
  ininňm was drunk 230(11).
  inuměn drinking water 247(27).
  ěnumínan water-shelf 259(22).
  ěnúman drinking-party 257(25).
  kaěnúman one of two who drink together 277(40).
  makáinňm accidentally drink 88(34).
  pinaíinňm is being caused to drink 200(18).
  tagainňm one whose only duty it is to drink 315(36).
  tagapagpainňm one whose duty it is to give drink 316(2).

inúyat molasses 253(40).

-íngat: nagíngat was careful 288(13).
  nagěíngat is being careful 48(13).
  pagiíngat a being careful 62(14).
  ingátan be done carefully 227(31).
  pagingátan be given due care 255(20).
  maíngat careful 40(22).

íngay noise 32(30).
  pagiingŕy a making much noise 293(13).
  naíngay made a sound 285(30).
  maíngay make a sound 106(5). noisy 295(16).

Ingglčs Inggléses S. English 155(24). 260(11).

ingkantádo S. enchanted 84(16).

engkantadňr S. enchanter 84(38).

ingkňng grandfather 59. 256.

ipŕ rice-hulls 120(22).

-ípat, see ápat.

-ípon: nagsěsipagípon are gathering up 262(37).
  maípon have been gathered 34(12).
  naípon has been gathered 60(32).
  mŕípon get gathered 293(39).

irč this 163(36). 64.
  nirě disj., of this, by this 316(18). 166.
  See also díne.

isŕ sŕ one, a 16(3). 67. 248. 261. 314.
  isŕ ng báhay: kasŕ-ng-báhay housemate 68(22). 266(37).
  isŕ ng daŕn: ikaisŕ-ng-daŕn hundredth 273(22).
  isŕ ng laksŕ: ikaisŕ-ng-laksŕ` millionth 273(23).
  isŕ ng líbo: ikaisŕ-ng-líbo thousandth 273(23).
  isŕ ng pů`: pangsŕ-m-pů` number ten 225(40).
  ikasŕ-m-pů` tenth 212(38). 273(24).
  makásŕ-m-pů` ten times 64(19).
  íisŕ only one 36(20).
  isŕ-isŕ one by one 32(23). 76(19). 265(4).
  nagisŕ-isŕ acted one by one 239(16).
  inisŕ-isŕ were taken one by one 76(15).

isdŕ` fish 88(26).
  mángingisdŕ` fisherman 243(6).
  palŕisdáan fishpond 315(24).

ísip thought, intelligence; think 88(15). 159(29). 184(15). 222(2).
  pangísip means of thinking 271(15).
  umísip think 228(3). thought out 96(19). 100(15).
  pagísip a thinking out 228(4).
  magísip take thought 200(23). 234(7).
  nagísip took thought, planned 207(20). 233(8).
  pagiísip a planning; thinking-power, reason
  44(25). 98(34). 234(9). 252(31). 254(27).
  magisěp think of various things 237(33).
  nagisěp thought about, ransacked his mind 102(43).
  nagíisěp is variously thinking of 202(42).
  pagiisěp a searching through one's mind 30(16).
  isípin be thought of 166(11).
  inísip was thought of 170(4).
  pinagísip was planned 246(14).
  pinagisěp was variously thought out 246(21).
  pagkaísip a having thought out 193(31).
  pagkŕísip a chance thinking out 291(7). 292(11).
  nagpaísip caused to be thought out 310(21).
  ipinaísip was caused to be thought of 306(18).

eskuwéla S. pupil 304(5).
  eskuwčlhan school 90(3).

Espániya S. Spain 80(40).

ispírito S. spirit 66(23).

Estádos-Unídos S. United States 46(33).

estasiyňn S. station 116(20).

estudiyŕnte S. student 26(29).

estopádo S. stew 182(2).

istóriya S. history 271(6).

itěm black 36(40).
  itimŕn be made black 251(40).
  kaitěm what blackness 151(27).
  kaiitěm pl. 267(41).
  maitěm black 36(12).
  pŕitimŕn be made very black 308(37).

itlňg egg 28(31).
  pinangitlugŕn was laid into 256(35).
  pŕngitlúgan place where eggs are laid 262(4).

itň yitň this, the latter, he, it 16(32). 64.
  nitň disj., of this, by this 20(34). 166.
  ganitň in this manner 26(7). 190.
  See also díto.

-íwan: íwan (for i-íwan) be left 32(3). 140(3).
  ěíwan will be left 248(21).
  iníwan was left 32(25). 44(42).
  iněíwan is being left 248(22).
  kinaiwánan was left in 237(34).
  naíwan has been left 32(27).
  nangaíwan pl. 120(33).
  nŕíwan got left 293(16).
  nagpáiwŕn caused himself to be left 50(38). 304(26).

-iyŕk: umiyŕk weep, cry 186(35).
  umíiyŕk is weeping 22(24).
  nagsísiiyŕk pl. 114(15).
  pagiyŕk a weeping, crying 100(1). 228(6).
  iněiyakŕn is being wept for 251(42).
  ěyákan a crying by many 100(4). 257(26).
  nagěyákan wept together 32(8).
  ikináiyŕk was the cause of weeping 30(37).
  paiyŕk-iyŕk weeping at intervals 300(38).
  pagpapaiyŕk a causing to cry 100(7).
  nápaiyŕk burst into tears 90(20).
  palaiyákin cry-baby 315(17).

iyŕn yŕn that 20(9). 64.
  niyŕn disj., of that, by that 157(32). 166.
  ganiyŕn in that manner 20(12). 102(22). 190.
  See also diyŕn.

iyň yň prep. and loc. of ikŕw: by thee, thee, thy 16(28). 165. 169.

iyňn yňn yoňn yaňn that, you, the former 16(9). 64.
  niyňn noňn disj., of that, by that, 34(27). 38(8). 50(27). 166.
  gayňn ganoňn in that manner 18(19). 190. 238. 239.
  magkágayňn happen thus 46(17). 271(10).
  See also doňn.

Eyurúpa Yurúpa S. Europe 82(2). 221(37).





K.

kŕ thou, enclitic form of ikŕw 47. 63. 182.

kabaliyerésa S. stable 181(39).

kabŕn box; dry measure of 75 litres, equal to 25 salňp; twenty-five
220(38). 228(36).

kabáyo S. horse 60(30). 288(25).
  See kinamatayŕn.
  nangŕngabáyo is riding horseback 240(9).
  kabá-kabayúhan hobby-horse 261(34).
  nakapangŕngabáyo is able to ride horseback 287(26).

kabiyŕw: kumabiyŕw press sugar-cane 228(6).
  kabyáwan cane-press 255(28).
  pagkabyawŕn be used to press cane in 255(27).
  pagkŕkabyawŕn will be used to press cane in 255(28).
  pinagkabyawŕn was the place of pressing cane 255(24).
  pinagkŕkabyawŕn is the place of cane-pressing 255(25).

kabuluhŕn, see -búlo.

kabutě mushroom 244(19).

-kagŕt: pagkagŕt a gnawing 36(4). 86(6).
  kinagŕt was gnawed 76(9).
  kinákagŕt is being gnawed 106(30).
  pinagkakagŕt was variously gnawed 84(24).

káhit although; no matter; any
18(11). 22(3). 28(21). 48. 68. 248. 253. 264. 290. 294.

kahňn S. box 84(42). 120(20).

káhoy wood; tree 32(33). 34(28). 58(1).
  See búnga, piráso, púno`.

-káin: kumáin eat 24(1). ate 16(16).
  kumŕkáin is eating 42(8).
  kŕkáin will eat 28(39).
  pagkáin an eating; food 28(33). 241(40). 254(5).
  nangŕngáin makes his food of 36(13).
  kánin be eaten 293(20). boiled rice 72(34).
  kináin was eaten 32(16). contents of stomach 275(7).
  mangináin graze 18(33). 241(13).
  nangěngináin is grazing 18(2).
  pangingináin a grazing 18(4).
  makapangináin have grazed 18(36).
  kinŕkáin is being eaten 36(15).
  kakaněn sweetmeats 108(6).
  nagkŕkakaněn makes sweetmeats 236(7).
  pagkánan be eaten from 255(30).
  kŕínan eating-party 284(36).
  pagkakŕínan an eating together 108(21).
  kainŕn kakanŕn dining-room 114(6). 230(12).
  makikáin eat along 192(40).
  makěkikáin will eat along 264(6).
  nakikáin ate along 264(7).
  kakŕkáin there has been eating 175(8).
  kakŕínan one of two who eat together 278(9).
  makakáin be able to eat 94(30). 281(37).
  nakáin was able to be eaten 283(27).
  pagkakáin a having eaten 108(27).
  makŕkáin happen to eat 108(9).
  makŕpakikáin-káin ever eat along 297(26).
  pangpakáin served as food 112(29).
  nagpakáin caused to be eaten 303(6).
  pagpapakáin a causing to eat 112(39).
  pakánin be caused to eat 72(33).
  ipinakipakáin was asked to be caused to eat 307(37).
  tagakáin one whose task is merely to eat 315(37).
  tagapagpakáin one who is to serve food 316(4).

kaingěn a clearing 118(40).

kakŕw S. cocoa 299(6).

káki S. khaki 122(2).

kalabása S. pumpkin 76(15).

kalabŕw (S.) carabao 70(38).
  kalabŕw-ramň grass-carabao, wild carabao 230(9).

kalabět a touch 201(26).
  kakŕlabítan one of two who touch each other 277(41).

kalabňg a thud 24(4).
  kumalabňg fell with a thud 24(9).
  kŕlabúgan thud of many objects 257(27).

kalákal merchandise 236(31).

kalámay rice-paste 56(16).

kalŕn stove, brazier 74(5).

kalasěng clink 247(21).
  kŕlasíngan clink of many objects 257(31).

-kálat: pakálat caused to be rumored 118(10).

kálaw owl 18(29).

kalaykŕy rake 225(25).
  kinalaykŕy was raked 166(22).

kŕlingkíngan, see -lingkěng.

kaliwŕ` left-hand 90(26).
  See bandŕ.

kalsáda, see karsáda.

káluluwŕ soul 72(26). 268(15).

-kaluskňs: kumaluskňs pattered 228(6).
  kŕluskúsan a pattering by many 84(20).

kamálig storehouse 253(37).
  Also as place-n., see báyan.

kamátis (S.) tomato 268(26).

kamatsilč S. a tree, Pithecolobium dulce Benth. 247(1).

kamŕy hand 22(9).
  nagkŕmáyan shook hands with each other 234(10).

kambčng goat 112(40).

kamě we, excl. 20(38). 63.
  See ámin.

kamiséta S. shirt 122(2).

-kamět: nagkamět gained 232(22).
  kŕkamtŕn will be received 272(42).
  mŕkamtŕn get obtained 40(5).
  nŕkamtŕn got obtained 62(3).

kampána` S. church-bell 80(26).

kampět kitchen-knife 174(22).

kampňn S. comrade 305(33).

-kámot: kinámot was scratched 84(2).

kamóte S. sweet-potato 253(2).

kánan right-hand 90(26).
  See bandŕ.

kandáro S. lock 283(40).

kandidáto S. candidate 209(24).

kandíla` S. candle 50(29).

kandeléro S. candlestick 293(5).

kanilŕ, see silŕ.

kanína a little while ago 22(17). 50(40). 262(5).

kaníno, see síno.
  --kanitŕ, see kitŕ.
  --kaniyŕ, see siyŕ.

kaniyŕ` therefore 20(13). 241. 295. 297. 324.

kaniyňn S. cannon 252(9).

kaniyunéro kaniyunéros S. cannoneer 200(18). See trabáho.

kŕnser S. cancer 204(11).

kantŕ S. song 208(6).
  kumantŕ sing 110(32).
  kumákantŕ is singing 228(8).
  nagsísikantŕ pl. 110(38).
  pagkantŕ a singing 112(3).
  nagkákantŕ sings 112(2).
  kantahěn be sung 110(38).
  kinantŕ was sung 208(7).
  kantahŕn be sung for 204(29).
  kantáhan song in chorus 112(4).
  nagkantáhan sang in chorus 200(20).

-kapŕ`: kumapŕ` felt out 228(9).
  kumákapŕ` is groping for 228(10).
  nangapŕ` caught with his hand 240(10).
  kinapŕ` was groped out 244(21).
  nakŕkŕkapŕ` has come to be grasping 291(31).

kapŕg when, if 187(12). 248(31). 48. 296. 300. 304.

-kapŕl: makapŕl thick 86(7).

Kapampángan, see pangpŕng.

kápit that held; a hold 66(29).
  kápit-báhay neighboring house, neighbor 38(10). 56(35). 211(5).
  magkápit-báhay pair of neighbors 242(22).
  magkakápit-báhay pl. 38(9).
  kápit-báyan neighboring town; person from the next town
  46(7). 60(12). 211(7).
  pagkápit a holding on 295(4).
  nagsikápit took hold, pl. 78(11).
  nakakápit has taken hold 64(22).
  nŕkŕkápit is clinging 78(15).
  pakapítin be caused to take hold 78(2).

kápitan S. mayor 98(38).

kapitŕn S. captain 254(34).

kapóte S. rain-coat 161(20).

kápuwŕ` fellow-; equally 36(39). 249.
  kápuwŕ tŕo: magkápuwŕ-táo two fellow-men 242(23).

karaniyúwan, see -dániw.

kárang covering of wagon or boat 118(21).

karáyom needle 224(1). See bútas.

karéra S. course 167(27).

karéta S. wagon 100(23).

karitňn S. cart 38(17).

karnabŕl S. carnival 237(8).

karnč S. meat, beef 114(11).

karsáda kalsáda S. street 201(22). 257(26).

karumáta S. carriage 52(36).

karósa S. float 234(13).

kasŕl (S.) wedding 219(38). married 54(19). 223(31).
  pagkakasŕl a uniting in marriage 90(34).
  ikinasŕl was united in marriage 94(29).
  mákasŕl get married 92(26).
  mŕkŕkasŕl will get married 295(14).
  pagkákasŕl a getting married 94(35).
  pakasŕl get married 168(16).
  ipakasŕl be caused to be united in marriage 92(17).
  ipinakasŕl was caused to be united in marriage 92(24).
  mápakasŕl get married 90(41).

kasalukúyan, see -salúkoy.

kasapuwégo S. match 193(7).

kaséra S. landlady 302(28).
  nangŕngaséra eats in a boarding-house 240(11).
  pŕngaserahŕn boarding-place 38(4). 262(9).
  nagpŕpakaséra keeps a boarding-house 303(8).

Kastíla` S. Spanish, Spaniard 28(3).

katŕm a plane 56(38).
  kumatŕm use the plane 58(10).
  mŕngangátam planer 56(34).
  pinagkatamŕn was variously planed off; shavings 56(40).

katawŕn, see táo.

kathŕ` that composed 221(2).

kátiyaw fighting-cock 238(3).

kátre S. bedstead 62(38).

katuturŕn, see -tuwěd.

káwad wire 284(22).

-káwag: ikináwag was shaken 78(14).

káwal herd, troop 106(26). 116(6).

kawále` frying-pan 114(10).

káwáwa`, see áwa`.

kawáyan bamboo 34(37). See pantŕy.
  kawayanŕn kwayanŕn bamboo-grove 260(42). 290(20).

káwit pruning-knife 240(12).
  mangáwit prune; get tired of 240(12).
  nangŕngáwit is getting tired of 104(18).

kay, see si.

káy ké than 16(9). 281.

káya ability, means 56(4). 226(35). 255(3).
  nangŕngáya has mastery 240(14).
  ikakáya be the cause of ability; means 54(22).
  makŕkáya will come within the ability 16(16).
  nakáya came within the ability 283(29).
  nakŕkáya comes within the ability 283(30).

kayŕ` else 40(5).
  so that 48(11). 47. 219. 297. 317(4). 321.

-káyas: kayŕs smoothed 222(34).
  kumáyas smoothed 228(11).
  nakáyas was able to be smoothed 283(31).

-kayilŕ`: ipinagkayilŕ` was lied about 60(18).

káylan kélan when? 70(18). 92(2). 39. 262(7). (13). 317(5).

káyo cloth 249(34).
  mangkakayň cloth-dealer 248(9).

kayň you, pl. 63. See iniyň.

kibň` least sound or movement 44(42).
  kumibň` make the least sound, budge 279(13). made the least sound,
  budged 44(5).
  pagkibň` a making the least sound or movement 104(25).

Kíka` (S.) short-n. (Francisca) 311(11).

Kíko` (S.) short-n. (Francisco) 50(36).

-kilála: kilalŕ familiar 290(19).
  kumilála make acknowledgement 90(40).
  kakilála person with whom one is acquainted 60(23).
  pagkŕkilanlŕn be used as an advertisement 58(18). 279(28).
  nakŕkěkilála nakŕkŕkilála is acquainted with
  167(30). 276(8). 292(28).
  nŕkilála was perceived, got known 70(38). 104(2).
  mŕpagkilála be found out 40(20). 66(38).
  nŕpagkilála was realized 50(32).
  nŕpagkěkilála is being recognized 44(34). 52(1).
  nagpakilála caused to be known 168(34).
  nagpŕpakilála is causing to be known, showing 44(24).
  pagpapakilála a showing 52(25).
  ipakilála be caused to be known 58(5).
  ipinakilála was caused to be known 64(40).
  ipinakěkilála is being shown 88(8).
  mŕipakilála come to be shown 68(32).

-kílos: pagkílos a moving, intr. 44(35). 66(35).
  kělúsan concerted movement 264(4).
  makakílos be able to move 311(28).

kinŕ, see sinŕ.

kinábang profit 263(39).
  pakikinábang profit; holy communion 263(38).
  pakinábang advantage 300(3).
  nagpakinábang caused to profit, gave holy communion 98(4).
  pakěkinabángan will be profited from 94(26).

-kiněg: kuminěg trembled 42(41). 64(27).

-kiněg: makiněg hear 20(16). 30(17).
  makíkiněg will hear 96(11).
  nakiněg heard 285(30).
  nakíkiněg is hearing 22(21). 96(5).
  pakinggŕn be listened to 20(29). 308(12).
  pinakinggŕn was listened to 50(27).
  nŕpakinggŕn happened to be heard 46(24).

kínis skill 56(37). 102(22).
  kakínis what cleverness, how clever? 102(14).
  makínis smooth, skilful 102(9).
  pinakamakínis most skilful 102(14).
  makikínis pl. 118(29).
  nakapagpŕpakínis is able to make smooth 58(14).

-kintŕb: nagpápakintŕb is causing to shine, polishing 114(8).

-kingg, see kiněg.

-kísig: makísig lively 78(23).

-kíta: kumíta find, earn 30(33).
  kuměkíta is finding 30(37).
  pagkíta an earning 60(37).
  magkíta see each other (two actors) 234(10).
  magkikíta pl. 28(1). 239(5).
  nagkíta saw each other 203(40).
  kinakitáan was the place of seeing, was seen in 36(32).
  makŕkíta happen to see, find 30(26). 66(6).
  makŕkěkíta will happen to see 30(36).
  nakŕkíta happened to see 16(2). 40(27).
  nakŕkŕkíta happens to see 292(31).
  mŕkíta get seen 30(25). 32(38).
  mŕkěkíta will be seen 22(37).
  nŕkíta got seen 20(24). 32(31).
  nŕkěkíta is getting seen 20(21). 26(4).
  pagkŕkíta a chance seeing 38(18). 80(12). 292(35).
  kŕpakitáan one of two who show each other 310(36).
  nagpŕpakíta causes to be seen, shows 48(14).
  ipakíta be shown 48(33). 306(21).
  ipinakíta was caused to be seen, was shown 30(38). 34(18).
  mŕipakíta come to be shown 28(15).

kitŕ thou and I; thou by me 16(19). 18(21). 63. 182.
  nitŕ disj., by, of thee and me 163.
  kanitŕ prep. and loc., thy and my, thee and me, by thee and me
  227(17). 165. 169.

kitč` chicken 238(9).

kláse S. class, school 26(36).

kristŕl S. glass 255(21).

kristiyáno (Chinese brogue: kilistiyáno) S. Christian 58(39).

Krísto S. Christ 20(4).

krůs S. cross; also as family-n. 20(24). 242(20).
  nagkurůs crossed himself 64(29).
  nagkúkurůs is crossing himself 64(5).

kň disj. of akň: of me, by me 47. 163. 182.

kúba` hump; hunchback 22(29).

-kublě: nagkublě concealed himself 94(5).
  nagkúkublě is hiding (intr.) 232(23).
  pagkukublě a hiding 186(14).
  nangúngublě is staying concealed 108(20). 240(16).
  pangúngublě a staying concealed 272(14).
  pinagkůkublihŕn is being hidden in 94(8).
  kublíhan hiding-place 36(33).
  nŕkůkublě is in hiding 108(33).
  pagkákublě a being in hiding 108(23).

kúbo hut 118(27).

kúgon nipa, Imperata arundinacea 118(27).

-kúha: kumúha took 50(38).
  kumůkúha is taking 112(7).
  kúnin be taken 202(10).
  kinúha was taken 30(7). 84(25).
  kinůkúha is being taken 74(26).
  pinagkúkuhŕ is being variously taken 74(7).
  pagkúnan be taken from 255(35).
  pagkůkúnan will be taken from 222(35).
  pinagkúnan was taken from 255(31).
  pinagkůkúnan is being taken from 255(33).
  ikinakúha was the cause of taking 272(11).
  makakůkúha will be able to take 56(40).
  nakakúha has taken 90(24).
  nakakůkúha succeeds in taking 54(4).
  pagkakúha a completed taking 52(36).
  mŕkúha get taken 34(9).
  nŕkúha chanced to be taken 58(11). 267(7).

kukň fingernail 234(23).
  manghinukň cut the fingernails 241(24).

kúlam magic principle 40(11).
  mangkukúlam sorcerer 40(1). See médiko.
  kinúlam was bewitched 42(29).
  kinůkúlam is being bewitched 40(41).
  nŕkůkúlam is bewitched 42(6).

kúlang lack 201(10).
  kulŕng made incomplete 222(35).
  nagkůkúlang is at fault 96(40).

-kulápol: nŕkůkulapúlan is encrusted 110(35).

Kulŕs (S.) n. (for Nicolás) 258(28).

Kulása (S.) n. 287(23).

kúlay color 171(21).
  kakúlay of the same color 266(10).
  kasingkúlay id. 314(37).

kulilěng small bell 225(22).

kólera S. cholera 42(3).

-kulň`: kumúkulň` is boiling, intr. 74(24).
  nagpakulň` caused to boil 96(20).

kulňg thunder 254(36).

kulugň wart 228(30).

-kulňng: kůlúngan place of imprisonment 86(4).
  kulungŕn cage, crate 238(41).
  kinŕkůkulungŕn is the place of accidental imprisonment 86(5).
  nŕkůkulňng is imprisoned 84(42).

-kumbidŕ (S.): kinumbidŕ was summoned 20(19).

kompaniyŕ S. company 221(20).

-kumpisŕl (S.) magkumpisŕl go to confession 98(22).
  pagkukumpisŕl a going to confession 98(12).
  nangumpisŕl practised going to confession 98(28).
  nangúngumpisŕl goes to confession 56(13).
  kinúkumpisŕl is being given confession 98(7).
  kumpěsálan confession 98(24).
  mapagkumpisŕl given to going to confession 98(11).
  nagpápakumpisŕl gives confession 98(3).
  pagpapakumpisŕl a giving confession 98(5).
  pŕkumpisálan confessional 96(37).

kumpňl cluster 281(35).

kumpusisiyňn S. composition 90(15).

kumustŕ S. como está? 230(39).

kúmot blanket, sheet 36(39).

-kun, see--kúha.

kung when, if, whether 16(6). 45. 298-301.

kongkristiyános S., see kapatěd.

kópiya S. copy 52(10).

kúra S. priest 50(3).

kurŕl S. corral 268(42).

korbáta S. necktie 163(36).

kurípot stingy 112(16).

koréyo S. mail 168(19).

-kúro`: pinagkůkúro` is being considered 82(24).
  mapagkúro` be able to be divined 287(10).
  napagkůkúro` is able to be divined 52(19).
  mŕpagkúro` get figured out 20(18).
  mŕpŕpagkúro` will get figured out 182(20).
  nŕpagkúro` got figured out 297(13).
  nŕpŕpagkúro` is divined, is understood 297(15).

koróna S. crown 26(24).

-kurůs, see krůs

-kurňt: kumurňt pinch 228(13).
  mangurňt pinch people 240(16).
  kurutěn be pinched 244(24).
  kurutŕn be pinched from 251(43).
  kůrútan a pinching by many 257(35).

kúsa` of its own accord 225(20).

kusína` S. kitchen 114(9).

kosinéro S. cook 114(1).

kutěng kitten 255(37).

kutsíliyo S. table-knife 114(9).

kutséro S. driver 272(2).

kúto head-louse 225(16). See pamatŕy.
  kutuhŕn lousy person 260(10).

kuwáko cigar-holder 220(34).

kuwaltŕ kuwŕlta kuwŕrta (S.) money 30(33). 141(27).

kuwŕrto S. room 84(23).

-kuwayan, see kawáyan.

-kuwčnta S.: pagkuwčnta a counting 223(6).

kuwčnto S. story 66(3).
  pagkukuwčnto a story-telling 286(5).

kúya kúyang (C.) oldest brother 46(22). 118(15). 59. 254.
  magkúya oldest brother with brother or sister 242(14).
  magkukúya pl. 242(30).





L

laŕn that reserved 221(3).
  inilálaŕn is being reserved 248(22).

-labŕ S. ipaglálabŕ will be washed for 174(40).

lában against 22(15). 282.
  lumában complete 60(40).
  labánan be opposed 60(36).
  labanŕn war 251(1).
  nagsěsipaglabanŕn are fighting each other 122(15).
  paglalabanŕn a fighting, war, battle 116(27).
  makipaglában engage in a contest 48(23).
  pakikipaglában an engaging in a contest 116(29).
  kalában opponent 266(11).
  kinŕkalában is being opposed 60(38).

labanňs (S.) large radish 252(21).

labŕng trough 289(3).
  labangŕn manger 260(25).

labŕs the outside 52(38).
  lumabŕs went out 52(34).
  lumálabŕs is going out 74(1).
  paglabŕs a going out 245(3).
  maglabŕs bring out 234(11).
  ilabŕs be brought out 270(32).
  nilŕlabasŕn is being come out at 42(14).
  naglŕlŕbásan are going out together 236(16).
  máilabŕs get taken out 110(4).
  palabŕs theatrical performance 300(4).
  papalabŕs going out 96(30).
  nagpápalabŕs is bringing out, presenting 303(9).

labě added to ten, -teen 58(12). 135.
  labi ng isŕ: panglabě-ng-isŕ number eleven 225(40).
  ika-labě-ng-isŕ eleventh 273(24).

lábis excessive 172(40).

labňng bamboo-sprout 172(25).

-ladlŕd: iniladlŕd was dropped 104(36).

lagablŕb blaze 231(6).

-lagánap: lumagánap circulated, intr. 34(29).

lagári` a saw 187(13).
  manglalagarě` food-sawer 243(17).
  mapaglagarían be able to be sawed on 288(24).

lagŕy situation, condition 46(8). 90(35).
  ilagŕy be placed 108(12).
  inilagŕy was placed 220(17).
  inilálagŕy 108(42).
  nilagyŕn was put onto, was covered 30(11). 261(30).
  nilŕlagyŕn is being put into, is being filled 108(39).
  lŕgáyan place where things are put 193(36). 258(38).
  lalagyŕn receptacle 96(25). 261(22).
  pagkakálagŕy a placing, position 270(40).
  kinŕlŕlagyŕn is the place of putting 38(32). 88(5).
  kalŕgáyan position, state 34(34). 176(35).
  málagŕy get placed 294(26).
  pagkálagŕy chance placing, position 100(20).
  nagpalagŕy caused to be placed 24(39).
  mápalagŕy chance to stay in a position 22(14).

lági` frequently 60(27). 62(15).
  palági` id. 62(10).

-lagkět: malagkět sticky 221(26).

laglŕg that falling 247(3). 257(31).
  ilálaglŕg will be dropped 24(3).
  inilaglŕg was dropped 32(24).
  nalaglŕg fell down 257(28).

lagnŕt fever 94(30).

lagpŕk a falling down 58(35).
  lumagpŕk come down on, land 46(38). came down 299(32).
  lálagpŕk will fall down on 244(39).
  paglagpŕk a falling down onto 48(22).
  nŕpŕpalagpŕk is falling down onto 108(19).

-lagň`: malagň` dense 24(31).

-lagňk: pagkalagňk a having swallowed 30(20).
  pagkálagňk a chance swallowing 291(9).

-lagňt: malagňt break off, intr. 40(28).
  nalagňt broke off 261(27).
  pagkalagňt a breaking off 112(31).

lahŕt all 26(12). 66. 132. 145. 174.
  lahŕt-lahŕt all the various things 74(35).

láhi` family, race 275(29).

lákad a going, an errand 221(4).
  lakŕd on foot 223(17).
  lumákad go, walk 18(7). went 283(1).
  lumŕlákad is walking 115(15).
  paglákad a going 66(18).
  naglákad drew on foot 234(13).
  paglalákad a drawing on foot 234(12).
  maglakŕd walk about 122(7).
  naglálakŕd is walking about, journeying 22(31). 66(9).
  nagsísipaglakŕd pl. 58(40).
  paglalakŕd a walking, journeying 66(15). 84(4).
  maglalakŕd traveler 242(43).
  lakárin be traveled over 118(26).
  nilákad was walked over 244(24).
  lakáran be gone to, be gone on 70(6). 252(4).
  nilakáran was travelled on 32(19).
  nilŕlakáran is being walked on 22(33).
  lakarŕn walking-party 260(13).
  makalŕlákad will be able to walk 104(31).
  nakalŕlákad is able to walk 34(8).
  nalákad was able to be walked over 283(33).
  nŕlákad chanced to walk 177(17).
  palákad course 50(6).
  pagpapalákad a causing to go 288(9).
  pinalákad was caused to walk 68(41).
  ipalákad be caused to go 118(19).

lakŕs force 44(6). See úbos.
  lumakŕs grew strong 76(39).
  inilakŕs was made louder 42(41).
  lakasŕn be done with strength 252(5).
  kalakasŕn strength, loudness 182(23).
  malakŕs strong, loud 18(23). 269(6).
  pinakamalakŕs strongest 309(41).
  malalakŕs pl. 18(15).

lakě size 66(12).
  lumakě grew larger 56(9).
  nagsilakě pl. 90(5).
  paglakě a growing larger 300(17).
  lakhŕn be made big 252(6).
  kalakhŕn greatness, most 44(29). 60(39).
  malakě large 18(18). 69. 99. 110. 138.
  malalakě pl. 34(38).
  ikŕpagpŕpalakě will be the means of causing to grow larger 310(22).
  kasinglakě of the same size 314(39).
  magkakasinglakě several of the same size 120(3).

lákip: kalákip having the same cover, enclosed with 173(28).

laksŕ` million 134. See isŕ.

-láko`: magláko` peddle 232(23).
  maglalakň` peddler 226(23).

-lála: nilála was woven 46(40).

-lalŕ`: inilalŕ` was the cause of getting worse 291(17).
  palalŕ` getting worse 92(10).

laláki man, male 30(31).

lálim depth 218(27).
  ilálim under side 20(28).
  nilalíman was done deeply 252(7).
  malálim deep 18(39).
  pakalalímin be made too deep 309(33).
  pakalŕlalímin will be made too deep 309(34).
  pinakalálim was made too deep 309(35).

lálo` more 24(27). 147. 242.
  nilalúan was exaggerated 98(5).

-lam, see -álam.

lamŕn flesh, muscle, contents 18(15). 48(1). See piráso.

lámang only 28(33). 47. 220. 227. 243.

lámat crack 300(17).

-lambňt: malambňt soft 163(14).

laměg cold 118(31).
  lumaměg became cold 296(39).
  lálaměg will become cold 183(16).
  kalalaměg what coldness, pl. 268(1).
  kalamigŕn coldness 272(36).
  malalaměg cold, pl. 219(32).
  taglaměg cold weather 315(30).

lamésa S. table 114(9).

-lampŕs: lumálampŕs is getting excessive 54(27).

lamňg bruised 62(28).
  naglálamňg is getting bruised 62(15).

lamňk gnat 303(9).

-lámon: lumŕlámon is feeding, intr. 228(14).
  nagsěsilámon pl. 262(21).
  lalumúnan throat 88(28).

landŕs path 252(3).

lansónes S. fruit of Lansium domesticum Jack. 306(32).

lantŕ withered 76(36).

langgŕm ant 202(20).

langěs oil 74(24).

lángit sky, heaven 22(2).
  kalangitŕn heavenly regions 104(24).

-langňy: lumangňy swim 28(21). swam 82(33).
  lŕngúyan swimming-place 258(40).
  makipaglŕngúyan go along swimming 264(28).
  makěkipaglŕngúyan will join the swimming party 264(30).
  pŕlangúyan place where something is allowed to swim 309(8).

-lápad: lapŕd widened 306(8).
  kalapáran wideness 70(40).
  malápad wide 92(35).

-lapŕg: inilapŕg was placed on the ground 106(16).
  inilálapŕg is being placed on the ground 36(41).
  nŕlŕlapŕg is lying on the ground 114(43).

lápis S. pencil 223(8).

-lápit (a) lumápit came near 26(19).
  lumŕlápit is coming near 64(19).
  paglápit a coming near 66(25).
  nilapítan was approached 24(22).
  malápit near 44(27).
  malalápit pl. 110(18).
  --(b) With accent-shift: málapět get near 100(27).
  mŕlŕlapět will be near 120(7).
  nálapět got near 98(40).
  pagkálapět a having got near 46(28).

laráwan image 20(4).

lariyň (S.) brick 302(41).

larň` game; play 46(32). 241(34).
  maglálarň` will play 232(24).
  naglarň` played 232(24).
  nagsipaglarň` pl. 86(31).
  naglálarň` is playing 46(36).
  nagsísipaglarň` pl. 46(35).
  paglalarň` a playing 48(5).
  laruěn be played with 244(25).
  lŕrúan play-ground 139(41).
  laruwŕn toy 84(6).
  paglaruwŕn be used as a plaything 255(37).
  pinaglaruŕn was played in 48(41).
  pinaglŕlaruwŕn is being used as a plaything 255(40).
  makipaglarň` play along 88(20).
  pakikipaglarň` a playing along 264(25).
  kalarň` playmate 86(33).
  kalálarň` there has been playing 267(16).
  palarň` public games 204(20).
  pagpapalarň` an allowing to be played 268(9).

lasěng drunken 108(32).
  naglasěng got drunk 282(28).
  paglalasěng a getting drunk 190(15).
  nakalálasěng makes drunk 108(8).
  nakákapaglasěng is able to get drunk 286(38).
  balasěng an intoxicant plant, Anamirta cocculus 108(7). 314(23).

laséta (S.) knife 207(6).

láta tin; can 223(26). 292(2).

-latŕ`: panglalatŕ` extreme fatigue 66(33).

-látag: ipinaglŕlátag is being spread for 62(35).
  nŕlŕlátag is lying stretched out 92(22).
  pagkŕlátag a chance spreading 269(39).

latěn S. Latin 28(23).

-láon: kalaúnan duration, length 32(1). 86(11).
  naláon took long 34(20). 70(37).
  nalŕláon takes long 108(27).
  maláon long, taking long 34(25). 108(35). 69. 110. 138.
  nalaúnan lasted long 36(33). 38(12). 54(13).

lawŕ, see sa.
  dalawŕ two 16(25). 224(22). 67.
  dalawŕ ng pů`: pangdalawŕ-ng-pů` number twenty 225(41).
  ikadalawŕ-ng-pů` twentieth 273(24).
  dalawŕ ng pů t isŕ: ikadalawŕ-ng-pů-t-isŕ twenty-first 273(25).
  dádalawŕ only two 84(30). 224(32).
  dalá-dalawŕ two by two 224(10).
  pangalawŕ number two 226(7).
  dadalawáhin having two 54(5).
  ikalawŕ second 24(15).
  makalawŕ second day, day after tomorrow 180(4). 204(18). 288(33).
  kamakalawŕ day before yesterday 166(42). 266(35). 259.
  makálawŕ twice 98(1). 262(8).

-láwak: maláwak broad 28(26). 72(18).

-láwig: lalawígan province 110(13).
  lalawíga-ng-Pampŕngga Pampanga province 210(28).
  maláwig roundabout 240(32).

-lawět: naglawět hung out, tr. 232(26).
  ilawět be hung out, down 78(1).
  inilawět was hung down 78(6).
  nakalawět hung down 38(29).

-layŕ`: kalayáan liberty 56(31).

láyag a sail 228(17).
  lumáyag sailed, voyaged 228(16).
  naglálayŕg sails back and forth 258(42).

láyas get away 222(4).
  lumáyas go away 100(8). went away 228(18).
  lŕláyas will go away 181(28).
  nilayásan was deserted 252(9).
  lŕyásan a deserting by many 259(30).
  makŕláyas-láyas ever run away 297(24).
  pagpapaláyas a driving away 36(23).
  palayásin be driven away 84(22).
  pinaláyas was driven away 72(11).
  pinalŕláyas is being driven away 72(31).

-láyaw: pagpapaláyaw a causing to be fulfilled 312(19).

-láyo` (a): kaláyo` what farness, how far? 70(5).
  maláyo` distant, far 28(26).
  malaláyo` pl. 82(37).
  --(b) With accent-shift: málayň` be far away 32(19). 34(11).
  nŕlŕlayň` is far away 80(37).

líban except 70(12). 114(23). 283.

-libŕng: paglilibŕng an amusing 116(37).
  lěbángan place for amusing 258(42).
  malibŕng be diverted 204(30).
  nalibŕng became engrossed 70(22).
  ipinalílibŕng is being caused to be amused 116(37).

-liběng: pagliliběng a burying 114(21).
  inilíliběng is being buried 112(30).
  lěbíngan burial-ground 114(21).
  pagkáliběng a chance burying 114(25).

libreríya S. library 227(36).

librň S. book 90(29).

líbo thousand 48(28). 52(43). 134. See isŕ.
  líbo-líbo a thousand at a time 100(18).
  makŕlělíbo a thousand times 50(28). 298(38).

-líbot: lumíbot took a walk 228(20).
  naglíbot carried about 234(14).
  naglibňt went on his errands 70(20).
  naglílibňt is going about 34(30).
  nagsísipaglibňt pl. 110(27).
  paglilibňt a going about 68(2).
  nalíbot has been gone round to 76(24).

-lígaw: paglígaw a courting 46(21).
  manglilígaw manlilígaw wooer 42(27). 70(10).
  nilěligáwan is being courted 70(14).

-ligŕw: paligŕw allowing himself to be led astray 32(13).

-ligáya: magsiligáya rejoice, pl. 262(21).
  nakalěligáya is gladdening 202(21).

-ligd, see -gílid.

-lígid: palígid round about 16(20). 26(8).
  palígid-lígid all around 32(33). 38(19).

ligsě speed 218(30).
  ligsihŕn be done quickly 252(10).
  maligsě quick 44(37).
  nagmámaligsě acts quickly 235(41).

-ligtŕs: nagligtŕs saved 291(39).
  naglíligtŕs saves 18(9).
  pagliligtŕs a saving 96(19).
  iligtŕs be saved 88(30).
  niligtasŕn was escaped from 22(28).
  makapagligtŕs be able to save 94(34).
  máligtŕs get saved 92(8). 96(4).
  náligtŕs got saved 122(18).
  mŕligtasŕn get escaped from 50(30).

lígo` bathe, intr. 222(4).
  malígo` bathe, intr. 28(14). 191(38).
  malělígo` will bathe 191(30).
  nalígo` took a bath 76(37). 285(38).
  nalělígo` is bathing 16(2). 32(31).
  palígo` bath 300(4).
  paligň` bathed 300(26).
  pangpalígo` used for bathing 183(23).
  pagpalígo` a bathing, intr. 40(18). 76(38). 302(20).
  magsipalígo` bathe, intr. pl. 28(12). 302(23).
  makapalígo` have bathed 32(37).
  pagkŕpalígo` a chance bathing 313(2).
  pŕliguŕn bathroom, bathtub 309(12).
  nagpalígo` caused to bathe, bathed, tr. 181(36). 303(11).
  pagpapalígo` a bathing, tr. 303(12).
  pinalěligúan is being caused to bathe, given a bath 308(14). is
  being bathed in 308(13).
  tagapagpalígo` one whose duty it is to bathe, tr. 316(5).

-liguwŕk: máliguwŕk get spilled 174(6).

líham letter 154(4).

líhim secret 24(32). 40(33).
  lihěm kept secret 36(22).
  inilíhim was kept secret 118(41).
  palihěm secretly 70(14).

liěg neck 135(17). 201(10).

-liět: kaliitŕn smallness 34(2). 118(1).
  maliět small 40(14).
  maliliět pl. 34(36).

leksiyňn S. lesson 187(24).

likňd back 24(26). 68(4).
  likurŕn rear 48(16). 68(11).
  -talíkod 315(27).
  tumalíkod turned the back 231(18).
  pagtalíkod a turning the back 231(18).
  tinalikdŕn was turned the back to 254(21).

Lílay (S.) short-n. 264(6).

lílim shade 310(43).
  malílim shady 294(27).

limŕ five 56(33). 67.
  panglimŕ number five 225(37).
  lilimáhin having five 86(21). 247(36).
  ikalimŕ fifth 273(18).
  makálimŕ five times 298(33).

-límang: limŕng confused 291(1).
  nalímang became confused 285(24).

limonáda S. lemonade 297(10).

limňs alms; ceremonial gift 112(6).
  maglimňs give alms 78(37).
  manglilímos alms-seeker 112(10).
  limusŕn be given alms 112(7).
  nilělimusŕn is being given alms 72(31).
  nagpápalimňs is asking for alms 72(30).
  nagsísipagpalimňs pl. 110(28). 304(17).

-límot: nalimútan was forgotten 208(7).
  nalělimútan is forgotten 92(2).
  nakalělímot has forgotten 276(8).

-linamnŕm: malinamnŕm tasty 16(18).

-línaw: malínaw clear 38(18). 116(38).

lindňl earthquake 289(14).
  lumílindňl there is an earthquake 281(12).

-línis: lumínis get clear 228(21).
  naglínis cleaned 181(38).
  naglělínis is cleaning 182(31).
  magliliněs cleaner 242(43).
  linísin be cleaned 238(6).
  nilínis was cleaned 56(39).
  nilělínis is being cleaned 244(26).
  kalinísan cleanness 276(32).
  pinakamalínis cleanest 310(1).
  malilínis clean, neat, pl. 259(1).

lintěk lightning 254(37).

linggň (S.) Sunday 50(11).
  linggň-linggň every Sunday 96(4).

-lingkěng: kŕlingkíngan little finger 280(13).

lípa` a smearing, plastering 196(24).
  panglípa` used for plastering 225(12).
  maglilipŕ` plasterer 242 (43).

-lipŕd: lumílipŕd is flying 88(23).
  pinalipŕd was caused to fly 295(5).

-lípas: lipŕs elapsed, evaporated 222(38). 287(7).
  magpalípas allow to elapse 26(39).
  nagpalípas allowed to elapse 92(3).
  nagpŕpalípas allows to elapse 74(12). 90(7).

-lípat: lumípat change one's abode, move 88(43). moved
118(39). 228(23).
  nagsěsilípat are changing their abode 122(13).
  ikinalípat was the cause of moving 116(26).
  mŕlělípat will go over 46(2).

-lípol: lipúlin be exterminated 24(36).

-lipumpňn: nagsísilipumpňn are swarming over 262(22).
  pinagkŕkalipumpunŕn is being overrun by many 90(19). 276(9).
  mŕpagkalipumpunŕn get overrun by many 106(28). 298(30).

-lípon: nagsěslípon are swarming over 262(22).
  nagsěsipaglípon are gathering up 262(37).
  nagkŕkalípon is getting all over 268(32).
  nalělípon has been, is able to be gathered together 98(38). 283(34).

-litŕw: lumitŕw bobbed up 78(7).

-litsňn S. paglilitsňn a pig-roasting 262(39).
  litsúnan pig-roasting party 257(37).

-litň: pagkalitň a having become confused 72(9).

-liwalěw: magliwalěw be idle, loaf 240(23).
  pagliliwalěw an amusing oneself, pleasure 96(39).

liwánag illumination 66(1).
  lumiwánag became light 201(37).
  maliwánag bright 66(37).

liyŕb flame 66(16).

léyi S. law 234(36).

lubŕy cessation 100(1).
  naglubŕy ceased 66(35).
  naglúlubŕy ceases 58(21).

lubhŕ` very 46(33). 147.
  malubhŕ` intense 46(7). 78(25).

lúbid rope 186(38).

-lublňb: naglúlublňb is splashing about 110(25).

lóbo S. wolf 299(38).

lóbo (S.) balloon 138(31).

lubňg immersion, dyeing 251(41).
  lumubňg went under 78(17).
  nálubňg got sunk 257(12).
  nŕlůlubňg is immersed 78(13).

lubňs complete 40(2). 312(19).

lugŕr S. place 20(27).

-lúgaw: maglúgaw prepare rice-broth 232(27).
  nilúgaw rice-broth 252(32).

-lúgi: ikinalúgi was the cause of losing money 239(43).

-lúgit: palúgit handicap 60(38).

-lugmňk: nŕlůlugmňk is sunk (in an emotion) 92(4). 114(14).

-lúha`: lumůlúha` is shedding tears 94(31).

-luhňd: lumuhňd kneel down 228(24). knelt down 228(25).
  nakaluhňd has knelt down, is on his knees 112(1).
  náluhňd knelt down 295(33).
  nŕlůluhňd is kneeling 22(24).
  nagpatiluhňd suddenly knelt down 313(29).
  pagpapatiluhňd a suddenly kneeling down 313(31).
  nápatiluhňd fell on his knees 313(38).

Lúkas S. n. 104(20).

luksň jump over 222(5).
  lumuksň jumped 16(21).
  pagluksň a jumping 60(14).
  luksuhŕn be jumped onto 252(11).
  luksúhan jumping by many 257(38).
  nakipagluksúhan took part in a jumping-contest 264(31).
  nakěkipagluksúhan takes part in a jumping-contest 204(19).
  pakikipagluksúhan a jumping with others 62(1).
  nŕpŕpaluksň involuntarily jumps up 62(10).

luktňn locust 191(32).

lóko S. crazy 80(31).
  panglolóko a fooling 108(3).
  nilňlóko is being fooled 50(32).
  kalokóhan insanity 313(25).
  pagkalóko a fit of insanity 313(22).
  nŕlňlóko is fooled 106(1).

lúlan that loaded onto a vehicle; an embarking
100(32). 118(18). 219(40).
  nagsilúlan embarked, pl. 118(24).
  ilúlan be put on a vehicle 20(38).
  inilúlan was put on a vessel 56(24).
  lulánan be laden 252(12).
  lůlánan an embarking by many 259(32).
  mŕlúlan get put in a vehicle 20(11).

Lóleng (S.) short-n. 134(31).

lulňd shin 254(35).
  lulurŕn be hit on the shin 252(13). the shin 261(25) Corrigenda.

lúma` worn-out, old 171(4).

lumbň cocoanut-shell drinking-cup 74(5).

lumpň lame 219(5).
  nalumpň became lame 285(28).

lúmot moss 313(41).

lundŕg a leap 48(16).
  lumundŕg leaped 70(39).
  paglulundŕg a leaping about 296(13).

lúnes S. Monday 180(5).

-lúnod: lunúrin be drowned 16(25).
  kalunúran be drowned in 274(22). west 18(22). 163(27).
  kalůlunúran will be the place of drowning 274(23).
  magkalunňd have drownings 112(13).
  malúnod get drowned 264(29).
  nalúnod got drowned 28(22).
  nangalúnod pl. 88 (31).
  pagkalúnod a drowning 88(30). 272(23).

lunggŕ` lair, hole 84(29).

-lungkňt: ikinalungkňt was the cause of regret 32(37). 88(17).
  ikinalúlungkňt is the cause of regret 80(30). 272(13).
  kalungkútan melancholy 92(5).
  nalungkňt became sad 90(34).
  nangalungkňt pl. 34(23).
  nalúlungkňt is sorry 285(25).
  palalungkútin given to grief 315(9).

lúpa` land, ground, earth 16(4). 24(4). 46(38). See hampŕs.
  lúpa-ng-Bůstos ground of Bustos 100(9).
  lúpa-ng-San-Ildepňnso ground of San Ildefonso 100(34).
  lupaěn land, country 56(17).

-lupět: kalupitŕn cruelty 74(20).
  malupět cruel 44(30).
  malulupět pl. 20(32).

lúsong aid 231(42).
  lusúngin be gone down into 244(27).
  nilúsong was gone down into 244(27).
  nilusúngan was gone to the aid of 252(15).
  lusungŕn mutual aid 260(14).

lusňng mortar 16(25).

lúto` a cooking; that cooked 182(33). 221(8).
  maglúto` cook 114(3).
  naglúto` cooked 182(1).
  naglůlúto` is cooking 108(6).
  maglulutň` cook 243(1).
  lutúin be cooked 134(19).
  nilúto` was cooked 257(35).
  nilůlúto` linůlúto` is being cooked 244(28).
  inilůlúto` ilinůlúto` is being cooked 181(18). 248(24). 249(25).
  ipinaglůlúto` is being cooked for 249(24).
  lutúan be cooked with 252(15).
  lutuŕn kitchen 114(6).
  pagkalúto` a past cooking 108(10).
  nagpŕpalúto` causes to be cooked 108(6).

loňb inside; spirit, will, opinion 36(5). 40(25). 90(40). See bigŕy.
  loňb-loňb modest opinion 98(26).
  nilóloňb is being intended 307(5).
  pumaloňb go into the inside 42(10). 302(19).
  napaloňb got into the inside 104(15).

-luwŕ, see káluluwŕ.

-luwŕ`: inilúwŕ` is being spat out 40(28).

-luwŕg: maluwŕg loose, not well fixed 92(38).

-luwalháti`: maluwalháti` in good shape 268(36).

-luwŕng: kaluwángan looseness, width 253(27).
  maluwŕng loose, too wide 289(8).

-luwŕs: lumuwŕs go down-stream 56(21).
  pagluwŕs a going down-stream 297(34).
  napaluwásan went down-stream together 279(4). 312(8).

luwŕt long duration 173(39).
  maluwŕt long 40(31). 62(22). 269(7).
  magmaluwŕt take much time 236(2).
  nagmaluwŕt acted slowly 236(1).
  naluwatŕn took long 84(8).





M.

(see also B, P).

m, see na.

mŕ` Uncle, Don, Mr. 256.

mabúlo a tree and its fruit Trichodesma zeylanicum 34(40).

madlŕ` populace 24(33).

-magŕt: pamagŕt title 86(19). 300(5).
  pamagatŕn be given a name 42(21).
  pinamŕmagatŕn is being given a name 168(8).

magíging, magěng see -gěng.

mahŕl dear 22(11).
  pagmamahŕl a holding dear 72(38).
  minámahŕl is being held dear 62(34).
  kamŕhálan highness, majesty 26(23).
  kamahalŕn dearness, high price 186(9).
  kinŕmahalŕn was got dear in 279(17).
  pinakamahŕl dearest 309(38).

-mahála`: namŕmahála` is ruling 122(4).
  pŕmahalaŕn pŕmahaláan government 56(15). See báhay.

maěs S. maize 248(29).

mačstro mayčstro S. master, teacher 88(12).

mákina S. machine 203(2).

-málas: nŕmálas got perceived 36(38). 38(19).

málay consciousness 288(18).
  nagkamálay became conscious 268(33).
  nakŕmálay happened to notice 188(10).
  nŕmaláyan got noticed 42(39).
  pamaláyan be caused to be noticed 308(15).

malě` bad 34(24). 271(42).
  kamŕlían wrongness 297(12).
  pamalímalě` repeatedly wrong 300(31).

Malólos place-n. 110(24). See báyan.

máma` uncle, sir 151(35). 59.

mámayŕ` mámiyŕ` soon 262(9).

mŕn too, as well
16(18). 47. 221. 227. 248. 262.(7).(10).(13). 219. 317(3).(5).

mána that inherited 40(5).
  nŕmŕmána is inherited 40(11).
  ipamána be bequeathed 40(30).
  ipinamŕmána is being bequeathed 40(31).
  pamanáhan be bequeathed to 40(33).

manč` peanut 76(16).

maníka` (S.) doll 40(14).

Manikěs S. family-n. 209(24).

mansŕ S. spot 191(14).

mansánas S. apple 182(27).

-máno S.: nagmŕmáno kisses the hand 56(14).

manňk hen, cock, chicken 38(30). 72(36).
  nagmanňk-manúkan played rooster 237(10).

Manuwčl S. n. 228(16).

mangŕ plural sign 16(8). 143(16). 48. 251.

manggŕ S. mango 34(40). See púno`,
  manggáhan mango-grove 255(11).

manggŕs S. sleeves 306(24).

-manghŕ`: pagkámanghŕ` a getting astonished 60(5).
  nangápamanghŕ` were astonished 52(18). 312(38).

mangkňk (C.?) bowl 248(35).

mangmŕng ignorant 94(39).
  kamangmangŕn ignorance 82(24).

mŕpápasa, mápasa, see sa.

Marikína S. place-n. See báyan.

Mariyŕ S. n. 70(11).

Mariyáno S. n. 54(1).

Mŕrkes S. family-n. 189(43).

Markíta S. n. 92(29).

-masěd: nagmámasěd is observing 100(21).
  pagmamasěd an observing 272(25).
  masdŕn be looked at 20(32).
  minŕmasdŕn is being looked at 252(17).
  pagmasdŕn be observed 255(42).
  pinagmasdŕn was scrutinized 18(4).
  pagkámasěd a chance looking at, a glancing 168(33).
  mŕmasdŕn get looked at 88(7).
  mŕmŕmasdŕn will get looked at 96(16).
  nŕmŕmasdŕn is visible 297(32).

masiyádo, see -siyádo.

Masňn S. freemason 56(12).

matŕ eye 20(27). See pilěk.
  matŕ-matŕ trellis-work 223(41).
  minámatŕ is being looked down on 30(3).
  matáan be looked round for 254(31).
  minatáan was looked round for 254(30).
  kamatŕ congenial at sight 266(12).
  mapangmatŕ given to looking down on people 18(19).
  nŕmatáan got espied 36(3).

-matŕy: ikamámatŕy will be the cause of dying 94(28).
  ikinamatŕy was the cause of dying 186(15).
  ipagkákamatŕy will be the cause of a part dying 272(34).
  kinamatayŕn was died in 38(23).
  Kinamatayŕ-ng-kabáyo place-n. 221(30).
  pagkŕkamatayŕn will be died in by some 275(13).
  pinagkamatayŕn was died in by some 275(10).
  kamŕtáyan death 94(34).
  mamatŕy die 40(32).
  mamámatŕy will die 32(1). 62(26).
  namatŕy died 16(11).
  nangamatŕy pl. 286(16).
  namámatŕy is dead 74(11).
  pagkamatŕy a dying 22(3). 40(27).
  mamatŕy-matŕy be able to die off 287(37).
  namatayŕn was died from 38(9).
  namŕmatayŕn is died from 112(19).
  magpápakamatŕy will commit suicide 309(23).
  nagpakamatŕy committed suicide 309(22).
  pagpapakamatŕy suicide 309(24).
  himatŕy fainting-fit 314(25).
  naghíhimatŕy is fainting 236(6).
  paghihimatŕy a fainting 159(6).
  himatayěn be attacked by a fainting-fit 208(5).
  hinimatŕy was attacked by a fainting-fit 246(1).
  ipinaghimatŕy was the cause of fainting 88(32). 250(3).

matsěng young monkey 110(9).
  kamatsingŕn monkey-tricks 276(32).

máy mé there is; having; about 16(8). 48. 69. 110. 138. 252. 331.
  máy ári`: nagmčmé-ári` has ownership 40(13).
  máy-roňn same as máy 18(25). 69. 110. 331.

-máyaw: magkŕmáyaw harmonize 102(13). 270(41).

mayčstro, see mačstro.

Mayníla` place-n. 50(2). See báyan.

médiko S. physician 30(2).
  médiko-ng-mangkukúlam witch-doctor 42(21).

Migčl S. n. 255(33).

milágro S. miracle 74(32).
  nagměmilágro is working a miracle 104(23).

milagróso S. miraculous 74(29).

míle-nobisiyčntos-dňs S. 1902 34(27).

milňn S. melon 76(16).

mínsan once 16(2). 22(34). 39. 42. 262(10).
  mínsanin be done all at once 246(5).
  pamínsan-mínsan once in a while 68(10).

mésa S. table 173(26).

mísa S. mass 50(37).
  magmísa say mass 96(26).
  nagměmísa says mass 96(4).
  pagmimísa a saying mass 96(18).
  pagkamísa a having said mass 98(19).
  makapagmísa be able to say mass 96(14).
  magpamísa have mass said 72(29).
  nagpamísa had mass said 72(25).
  pagpapamísa a having mass said 80(25).

měsmo S. himself 46(18). 72(29). 265(7).

míting E. meeting 236(18).

miyčrkules S. Wednesday 259(32).

mo disj. of ikŕw: by thee; of thee 47. 163.

mukhŕ` face 24(23).
  kamukhŕ` of the same appearance 266(14).

mulŕ` from 16(7). 284.
  magmulŕ` start from 32(7). 284.
  minulŕn was begun 283(9).

muláwin a tree, molave, Vitex littoralis Decne 263(27).

mulě` again 18(35). 20(17). 148.

múna previously, first 40(6). 47. 222.

mundň S. world 50(18).

Mundň (S.) short-n. 96(38).

munisiliyň S. sacristan 253(16).

munisípiyo S. town-hall 36(42).

muntě` little 174(6).
  kumuntě` what almost-ness 174(4).

múra (a) cheap 219(7).
  minúra was scolded 90(38).
  muráhan be done cheaply 252(20).
  minuráhan was sold too cheaply 252(19).
  pagmumůráhan a making things cheap 236(31).
  kamuráhan cheapness 276(33).
  pinakamúra cheapest 114(41).
  --(b) With accent-shift: nagmurŕ cursed 32(38).
  murahŕn mutual reviling 260(16).
  magmurahŕn revile each other 236(34).
  magmůmurahŕn will curse each other 203(39).
  nagmůmurahŕn are reviling each other 236(35).
  pagmumurahŕn a mutual reviling 236(37).
  kamurahŕn one of two who curse at each other 278(22).

múra` unripe 22(38).

músika S. music 48(31). See bandŕ.

músiko S. musician 110(31).

-muň`: ipinagkákamuň` is the cause of partial hardening 272(37).

muwŕng information 82(6).





N

(See also D, S, T.)

na ng m attributive 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 119. 122-159 and Syntax,
passim.

nŕ already
18(39). 47. 223. 224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244. 341(3,c). 342. 437.

nagíging, see -gěng.

-nagínip: panagínip dream 225(13).
  nanagínip dreamt 240(21).
  nanŕnagínip is dreaming 240(20).
  pananagínip a dreaming 240(17).
  nŕpanagínip was dreamt 297(22).

nagěng, see -gěng.

nákaw that stolen 221(9).
  numákaw stole 32(39).
  pagnákaw a stealing 104(1).
  magnákaw commit theft 170(4). 244(17).
  nagnákaw did some stealing 155(41).
  pagnanákaw thievery 38(2).
  magnanákaw thief, robber 36(29).
  nakáwin be stolen 102(24).
  nŕnakáwin will be stolen 32(35).
  ninákaw was stolen 32(36).
  ninŕnákaw is being stolen 102(24).
  pinagnakŕw was variously stolen 120(32).
  nakáwan be stolen from 234(8).
  ninakáwan was stolen from 252(22).
  nakawŕn robbery 178(37).
  nakapagnŕnákaw is able to commit thefts 102(17).
  mŕnákaw get stolen 102(27).
  nŕnákaw got stolen 102(27).
  mŕnakáwan chance to be stolen from 24(3).
  nŕnŕnakáwan chances to be stolen from 102(20).

namŕn on the other hand, however 22(32). 47. 224.

námin, see ámin.

nánay mother 116(17). 59.
  magnánay mother and child 242(15).
  magnanánay pl. 242(31).

nŕndon, see doňn.
  --nang, see ang.

Narsíso S. n. 296(30).

nása, nŕsása, see sa.
  --nátin, see -átin.

-náog: manáog come down from one's dwelling 264(23).
  nanáog came down 38(16).
  nanŕnáog is descending 100(25).
  panáog come down 151(40).
  pagpanáog a descending 302(20).
  magsěsipanáog will descend, pl. 108(13).
  nagsěsipanáog are descending 106(29).
  pinanaúgan was come down from 308(18).

nawŕ`, see áwa`.
  --ni, see si.

ně S. nor; any, and, and not 22(22). 48. 68. 253. 319.

nilŕ, see silŕ and sinŕ.
  --ninŕ, see sinŕ.
  --niniyň, see iniyň.
  --níno, see síno.

ningněng glow 40(16).
  nagníningněng glows 40(15).

nirč, see irč.
  --nitŕ, see kitŕ.
  --nitň, see itň.
  --niyŕ, see siyŕ.
  --niyŕn, see iyŕn.
  --niyáya`, see yáya`.

niyňg cocoanut 24(1).
  See púno`,
  niyúgan cocoanut-grove 259(3).

niyňn, see iyňn.

nobéla S. novel 86(19).

nóbiyo S. fiancé 92(31).

núno` ghost 34(32).

-noňd: nanúnoňd is looking on 48(36).
  nagsísipanoňd pl. 48(29).
  panunoňd a looking on 296(37).
  panoorěn be looked at 108(29).
  pinanónoňd is being looked at 108(32).

noňn, see iyňn.





Ng

(See also K.)

ng, see na.

ngŕ` indeed, please 40(21). 47. 226. 229.

ngálan name 156(11).
  pangálan id. 26(16).

ngayňn now, today 28(7). 262(11). 302.

-ngitě`: ngumíngitě` is smiling 228(26).
  nŕngěngitě` is asmile 92(28).

-ngiyŕw: ngumiyŕw mewed 84(27).

ngúnit but 30(6). 320. 322.





P (F)

pŕ still, yet, more 24(16). 47. 226. 243. 248. 314.

paŕ foot, leg 18(15).
  Paŕ-ng-bundňk place-n. 118(25).
  pinaahŕn was caught by the leg, hurt in the leg 252(25).
  paanŕn be turned the feet to 252(29). base, foot 98(40).
  pinaanŕn was turned the feet to 252(27).
  paánan base, foot 90(30).

Páblo S. n. 283(22).

padčr S. wall 52(11).

-padpŕd: nápadpŕd was cast by chance 96(2).

pag when, if 32(13). 45. 300. 303.

pagakpŕk applause 219(41).
  pagakpakŕn be applauded 197(36).
  pŕgakpákan applause by many 257(40).

pagigěng, see -gěng.

pagítan place between, interval 258(31). 271(17).
  pumagítan took position between 228(26).
  pamamagítan an acting as means 24(33). 38(34).
  ipinagítan was placed between 248(25).
  nŕpŕpagítan is between 171(21).

pagkŕ as soon as, after, when 181(27). 48. 296. 300. 304. 306.

pagkět wax 221(11).

págod weariness 76(1).
  pagňd tired 66(33).

pagňng turtle 16(1).

Páho` place-n. 120(11).

páin bait 108(14).
  pagpapáin a catching with bait 108(39).

pákay purpose, aim 50(33).

páko` nail 218(38).
  páko ng babŕ`: mapagpáko-m-babŕ` over-modest 289(28).
  pakuŕn nailing-place 260(20).
  nŕpŕpáko` is nailed 20(24).

pakuwŕn watermelon 203(37).

palŕ but otherwise 209(25). 47. 228. 301.

pála` gift, prize, favor 90(12). See gantě.

pálad palm of hand 106(37). See kasamaŕn, kasawiŕn, sawě`.
  nagkapálad had good fortune 34(3). 78(38).
  nagkŕkapálad has the good fortune 40(24).
  kapaláran fortune 60(17).

palakŕ` frog 228(11).

palakňl hatchet 240(5).

palŕnsa plŕnsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32). 227(42).
  pinalŕnsa was ironed 244(30).

palásiyo S. palace 26(26).

palatňn S. dish 193(3).

pálay rice, standing or in hull 163(19). See bantŕy, tánod.

palayňk earthenware pot 74(5).

palibhása` for the reason, because 54(20). 265(8).

palět exchange 148(26).
  pinalitŕn was supplanted 104(12).

pálo` hit, strike 183(25).
  pamálo` club, cudgel 70(16).
  palúin be caned 195(35).
  ikinŕpálo` was the cause of getting thrashed 273(34).
  pagkŕpálo` a thrashing that was got 272(16).

pálong comb of rooster 291(16).

famíliya S. family 54(4).

Pampŕngga S. place-n. 173(9). See lalawígan, prověnsiya.

pána` arrow 228(28).
  pumána` shot an arrow at 228(28).
  pinána` was shot with an arrow 244(31).
  nakŕpána` chanced to hit with an arrow 291(32).

panahňn time 34(25). 50(5). 52(32).

-pánaw: pumánaw departed 228(29).
  pumŕpánaw is departing 92(25).
  pagpánaw a departing 114(17).
  pinanáwan was parted from 92(27).

panŕy constant 72(20). 82(6).
  kapanayŕn continuance 276(34).

-panhěk: pumanhěk entered (a dwelling), went up into (a house)
38(27). 72(8).
  pumápanhěk is entering 106(9).
  pinanhikŕn was entered 175(41).
  mápanhěk get in 106(15).
  pagkápanhěk a getting in 72(9).
  pinapanhikŕn was caused to be entered 52(14).

paníki bat 210(26). See báhay.

paniyň S. handkerchief 147(1).

pansěn noticeable 219(8).
  pansiněn be paid attention to 46(1).
  pŕpansiněn will be minded 96(35).
  pinansěn was paid attention to 20(41). 94(2).
  pinápansěn is being paid attention to 54(19).
  nŕpŕpansěn gets noticed 100(19).

pantŕy leveled 223(32).
  pantŕy-kawáyan height of a bamboo-plant 218(28).
  pantŕy-pantŕy even, all level 118(30). 291(5).
  kapantŕy of the same height 173(28).
  magkapantŕy both of the same height 270(3).
  kasingpantŕy id. 104(6). 315(1).

páno, see anň.
  --panukála`, see akála`.

panňt bald-headed 219(10).

-pangŕw: nakapangŕw is pilloried 110(5).
  nangŕpŕpangŕw have got into the pillory 110(9).

panginoňn master 62(39). 86(31). 226(3).

pangkŕt group, team 46(34). 76(21). 110(31).
  pangkŕt-pangkŕt group by group 110(30).

pangnŕn hand-basket 261(40).

pangpŕng bank of stream 28(13).
  Kapampángan Pampanga 189(23).
  Kakapampangánan the Pampanga country 277(12).

papáno, see anň.
  --pápasa, see sa.

papáya S. papaw 163(18).

papčl S. paper 50(39).

pára like 36(12). 67. 275.

parŕ pára S. for 90(11). 286. 288.

párang forest 62(29).
  kaparángan wooded regions 82(36).

pári` S. priest, Father 20(4). 256.

parého S. equal 257(42).
  paré-parého all equal 40(13). 224(1).

Parěs S. Paris 220(31).

partč S. part 82(21).
  kapartč share 16(6).

-parň: parů-parň butterfly 88(24).

pása, see sa.

pasŕ` bruise 62(27).

pásak that calked with 221(10).
  pasakŕn calking-place 260(23).

pasŕn that carried on the shoulders 98(36).
  pumápasŕn carries on the shoulders 22(32).
  pŕpasaněn will be carried on the shoulder 104(34).
  pinasŕn was carried on the shoulder 104(38).

Pasífiko S. Pacific 259(1).

Pásig the Pasig; see ílog.

pasígan beach 16(4).

-pasiyŕl (S.): magpasiyŕl take a walk 32(2).
  magsipagpasiyŕl pl. 32(13).
  magpápasiyŕl will take a walk 232(28).
  magsísipagpasiyŕl pl. 32(15).
  nagpasiyŕl took a walk 182(7).
  nagsipagpasiyŕl pl. 279(1).
  nakapagpasiyŕl was able to take a walk 200(14).
  papasí-pasiyŕl walking about at intervals 96(6).

-pasiyčnsiya S.: magpasiyčnsiya rest content 56(8).

-paséyo S.: nagpŕpaséyo forms a procession 48(40).

paskň S. Easter; Christmas 220(24).

pastňl (S.) herdsman 116(7).

páso` a burn 220(1).
  pasň` burnt; pottery 222(40).
  pumáso` burned 228(30).
  mamáso` a blister 241(39). 244(12).
  namáso` scorched 240(21).
  napáso` has been burned 284(41).

-pások: pumások go in, enter 78(30). went in 30(17). 38(31). 50(19).
  pumŕpások enters 42(13).
  pŕpások will go in 192(5).
  pagpások a going in 42(12). 96(26).
  pasúkin be violently entered 262(19).
  pinások was illicitly entered 237(41).
  pinŕpások is being penetrated 118(30).
  pinasúkan was entered 36(36).
  makapások be able to enter 74(31).
  makapŕpások will be able to enter 22(4).
  nakapások was able to enter 80(2). 116(21).
  pagkapások a having gone in 38(32).
  pagkŕpások the way of getting put in 291(11).
  mŕipások get put in 108(41).
  nŕpasúkan chanced to be come upon in entering 297(37).
  papások going in; asking to be taken in; ask to be taken in
  204(22). 299(29). 301(24).
  papŕpások will ask to be taken in 301(40).
  pagpapapások a causing to enter 272(39).
  papasúkin be caused to enter 72(26). 80(30).
  mapapŕpások will ask to be taken in 311(34).
  napapások caused himself to be taken in; was able to be caused to
  enter 311(23.32).

-pátag: ikinŕpátag chanced to be the cause of staying quiet 116(11).

patŕk a drop 96(29).

patŕy dead person 20(8). 38(25).
  pamatŕy used for killing 225(15).
  pamatŕy-kúto louse-killer, thumb 225(15).
  pumatŕy (arch. matŕy) kill 231(2).
  pagpatŕy a killing 227(4).
  patayěn pataěn be killed 84(22).
  pŕpatayěn pŕpataěn will be killed 28(20). 44(16).
  pinatŕy was killed 244(33).
  patayŕn be killed for 252(32).
  pinagpatayŕn was killed in 274(31).
  pŕtáyan mortal combat; slaughter-house 190(15). 259(3).
  kapŕpatayŕn will be the place of killing 279(18).
  kapŕtáyan one of two who kill each other 277(42).
  mapatŕy be able to be killed 283(35).
  napatŕy has been killed 284(14).
  pagkapatŕy a having killed 282(35).
  mápatŕy get killed 36(19). 293(42).
  mŕpŕpatŕy will get killed 18(12).
  nápatŕy got killed 26(12). 38(3). 84(28).
  pagkápatŕy a chance killing 291(12). 292(15).
  ipinapápatŕy is being caused to be extinguished 122(6).

patě also, even 110(34). 112(20). 68. 305.

patěd a breaking, an interruption 42(4). 44(42). 58(1). broken 223(33).
  pumatěd break, tr. 228(31).
  kapatěd broken from the same piece; brother, sister 32(8). 266(16).
  kapatěd-kongkristiyános brother-Christians 50(22). 210(16).
  magkapatěd two brothers or sisters, brother and sister 46(20).
  magkakapatěd pl. 270(14).
  kinákapatěd child of one's godparents 271(30).
  magkinákapatěd two people, one of whom is the child of the other's
  godparents 271(31).
  magkikinákapatěd pl. 271(32).
  kapŕpatirŕn will be the place of breaking 274(29).
  kinapatirŕn was the place of breaking 274(27).
  kapŕtíran one of two who break together 277(43).
  mapatěd break off, cease 60(9).
  napatěd broke off 78(16).
  napatirŕn was broken in, suffered a fracture 88(28).

patěs shrimp-sauce 259(5).
  patisŕn be spiced with shrimp-sauce 252(33).
  pŕtísan cannery for shrimp-sauce 259(5).

pátiyo S. court-yard 98(20).

Patrísiyo S. n. 275(28).

patrúliya S. patrol 122(20).

páto S. duck 116(38).

patumanggŕ` regard, consideration 22(24).

-pátung: nŕpŕpátung is placed on 116(1).

Patúpat derisive n. 50(3).

-páwi`: pawě` allayed 222(42).
  nakapŕpáwi` will allay 28(35). 280(37).
  napáwi` has subsided 279(34).

páwid nipa fibre 30(37).

-páwis: pumŕpáwis is sweating 22(8).

-páyag: pumáyag consent 30(5). consented 18(29).
  pumŕpáyag consents 228(34).
  ipináyag was granted 248(26).
  pinayágan was agreed to 252(33).

payápa` tranquil 219(11).
  kapayapaŕn tranquility 116(9).

páyo advice 52(24).
  ipináyo was suggested 28(36).

páyong umbrella 166(27).

Pédro S. n. 20(2).

pígil that restrained 134(28).
  pigěl under control 223(1).
  nagsipígil controlled, pl. 282(14).
  pigílin be brought under control 66(23).
  nŕpigílan got restrained 66(17). 100(36).

-píhit: puměpíhit turns round 68(10).

pího surely 18(11).
  piního was ascertained 44(33).

piklŕt scar 219(9).

pěknik E. picnic 235(34).

píko S. a pick 58(33).

-píli`: pumíli` chose 228(34).
  mamíli` choose out 16(24).
  namíli` selected 186(20).
  piníli` was chosen 244(34).
  mŕpíli` get chosen 241(34).
  nŕpěpíli` is preferred 293(21).

pilěk fin, lash 210(30). Corrigenda.
  pilěk-matŕ eyelash 210(30). Corrigenda.
  pilikŕn have the fins removed 252(34).

píling side, proximity 90(8).

Felípe S. n. 208(1).

Filipínas S. the Philippines 40(2). See kapuluŕn.

-pílit: pumílit effected by trying hard 228(37).
  puměpílit is trying hard 228(35).
  pagpílit a trying hard 64(1).
  nagpílit tried very hard 44(5). 50(14).
  nagpěpílit tries very hard 44(20). 234(17).
  nagpůpumílit is making an extreme effort 168(14). 235(32).
  pilítin be striven for 18(17). 184(35).
  pinílit was compelled 244(35).
  pagpilítan was striven for 297(2).
  napěpilítan is compelled 112(28).

pelóta S. ball 48(11).

pínsan cousin 39. 42.
  magpipínsan group of cousins 242(32).

pintŕ S. paint, painting 219(12).
  pintahŕn be painted 252(35).
  pintáhan place for paint; see báhay.

pintŕs that found fault with 221(13).
  pintasŕn be found fault with 252(36).
  pintásan mutual fault-finding 257(42).
  kapintásan reprehensible quality 310(40).

pintň` door 78(30). See bantŕy.
  pintúan doorway 22(2).

pinggŕ carrying-pole 158(12).

pinggŕn dishes 114(7).

pípa S. cigarette-mouthpiece 249(29).

Pépe S. short-n. 279(5).

pípe dumb 86(23).
  napípe became dumb 285(28).
  pagkapípe dumbness 86(23).

pipíno S. cucumber 76(16).

pipět stone-sparrow 197(21).

péras S. pears 189(16).

piráso (S.) piece broken off
  piráso-ng-káhoy piece of wood 56(38).
  piráso-ng-lamŕn piece of meat 108(42) Corrigenda.
  pirasúhin be broken off 252(6).
  mapiráso go to pieces 300(19).
  napiráso went to pieces 284(42).

pirěnsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32).
  pinirěnsa was ironed 223(4).

Píro (S.) n., for Pédro. 138(28).

píso S. peso, half-dollar 102(38).

-pitŕg: pětágan respect 118(9).
  pinagpěpětagánan is being respected 256(8).

pítak section 247(11).
  pinítak section of rice-field 247(10).

-pitŕs: pumitŕs pick, pluck 22(35). picked 282(40).
  pitasěn be picked 244(36).
  pěpitasěn will be picked 22(37).
  paměmitasěn will be picked selectively, in quantity 247(2).
  pinamímitŕs is being gathered 246(42).
  pitasŕn be picked from 252(37).
  pamitasŕn be gathered from 256(36).
  paměmitasŕn will be gathered from 256(38).
  nagpětásan picked together 236(17).
  napitŕs has been picked 284(43).
  nápitŕs got picked 293(22).
  nŕpěpitŕs is picked 24(16).

pitěk fillip 225(14).
  pamitěk single rein 72(1).
  pumitěk give a fillip 228(37).

Pétra S. n. 240(29).

fétsa S. date 271(16).

pitsňn S. pigeon 252(32).

píto S. small flute, whistle 227(39).

pitň seven 20(5). 67.
  pitň ng pů`: pamitň-ng-pů` number seventy 225(42).
  pamitň number seven 225(38).
  ikapitň seventh 32(4).

piyáno S. piano 167(21).

fiyčsta piyčsta S. fiesta 98(35). 137(37).
  kapiyestáhan holiday 110(11).

plŕnsa, see palŕnsa.

Pransěsko S. n. 50(20).

presidčnte S. magistrate 38(1).

-prubŕ S.: prubahŕn be proved 52(3).
  půprubahŕn will be proved 52(4).

prověnsiya S. province 50(1).
  prověnsiya-ng-Pampŕngga Pampanga province 210(29).

pň` deferential particle 20(37). 47. 229.

pů` ten 38(6). 134. See isŕ, dalawŕ, etc.

púgad nest 228(9).

-pukpňk: pamukpňk mallet 90(30).
  pumúpukpňk is pounding 228(38).

pukňl a throw 106(36).
  pagpukňl a throwing 281(35).
  magpupukňl throw repeatedly 238(38).
  pinúpukňl is being thrown at 112(8).
  mapamukňl given to throwing things 289(39).

pulŕ red, redness 147(1).
  pulahŕn all red 261(12).
  kapulŕ what redness 173(40).

Polikŕrpiyo S. family-n. 189(43).

polěs S. policeman 34(26).

půlpito S. pulpit 20(28).

pulň` island 255(14).
  kapuluŕn kapuluwŕn archipelago 24(30).
  kapuluŕ-ng-Filipínas the Philippine archipelago 56(24).

pulúbe beggar 72(30).

púlong crowd 229(13).

púlot that picked up 221(15).
  namúlot gathered up 32(23).
  mámumulňt gleaner 243(17).
  pinamúlot was picked up selectively, in quantity 247(3).
  pinulútan was picked up in 252(38).
  půlútan a scramble 259(33).
  nŕpúlot got picked up 62(30).
  nŕpůpúlot gets picked up 40(8).

pulňt honey 174(7).

-púnas: nagpůpúnas is scrubbing 232(29).
  pinůpunásan is being scrubbed 252(40).

púnit small hole, tear 169(2).
  punět-punět full of small holes 259(6).

-punlŕ`: punláan germinating-plot 243(40).

punsň ant-hill 66(1).

puntŕ S. direction of going 106(2).
  nagsipuntŕ went to, pl. 116(18).
  púpuntŕ will go to 193(24).
  nagsísipuntŕ are going to 108(1).
  pagpuntŕ a going toward 104(35). 106(4). 116(20).
  puntahŕn be gone to 40(9).
  pinuntahŕn was gone toward 32(20).
  papuntŕ towards 84(36).
  napapúpuntŕ is able to be directed 48(10).

púno` head: of wood (i. e. tree) 16(8).
  of grass (i. e. blade) 76(31).
  of bridge 248(16).
  stem end of fruit 203(38).
  chief 306(11).
  beginning 50(15).
  púno-ng-damň blade of grass 76(29).
  púno-ng-káhoy tree 34(39).
  púno-ng-manggŕ mango-tree 254(37).
  púno-ng-niyňg cocoanut-tree 22(34).
  púno-ng-ságing banana-tree 16(3).
  púno-ng-súha` grape-fruit-tree 36(34).
  pinúno` chief, official 56(27). 116(22).
  pŕmunúan initiator 262(7).

punň` filled, full 36(40). 76(30).
  punŕn be completed, be added to 252(41).
  půnúan all full 118(21). 258(1).
  napunň` became full 26(9).

purgŕ S. purge 230(11).

purgatóriyo S. purgatory 50(17).

púri honor, respectability 94(12). See kasiraŕn.
  nagpúri an honoring 48(38). 60(9).
  nagpurihŕn praised one another 236(39).
  nagpůpurihŕn are praising one another 236(41).
  mapúri honorable 289(8).
  nagmápurě praised himself 238(25).
  nagmŕmŕpurě is praising himself 238(25).
  pagmamápurě praising oneself 238(26).
  nagpakamápurě praised himself much 309(28).

Port-Ŕrtur S. Port Arthur 306(19).

-purňl: mapurňl dull 225(6).
  mapúpurňl will get dull 248(31).

púsa` cat 84(1).

pustŕ S. a bet 60(29).
  nagsipustŕ made a bet, pl. 60(34).
  pustáhan a betting together 60(33). 102(40).
  nakipagpustáhan entered into a bet with 102(34).

púso` heart 218(24).

-putŕk: nagpúpuputŕk is cackling much 238(40).
  půtákan cackling by many 238(10).
  palapůtákin given to cackling 315(10).

fůtbol E. football 46(35).

putě` white 219(12).
  pŕputiěn be made too white 305(12).
  pŕputiŕn be made very white 308(39).

pútik mud, clay 86(37).
  putíkan be made muddy 253(1).
  putikŕn muddy place, person, thing; clay-pit 166(19). 260(24).
  mapútik muddy 110(14).

púto cake, bun 32(15).

putňk crash, report 259(34).
  pumutňk made a crash; there was a crash 64(31).
  pinůputukŕn is reached by a crash 106(33).

pútol a cut; that cut 220(2). 221(16).
  p. nang p. cuts and cuts 222(10).
  putňl cut 223(3).
  putňl-putňl all cut up 224(16).
  pamútol used for cutting 225(16).
  pumútol cut 154(4). 199(27). 226(26).
  magsipútol cut, pl. 262(26).
  nagsipútol cut, did cut, pl. 190(22).
  pumůpútol is cutting 228(39).
  nagsěsipútol pl. 262(24).
  půpútol will cut 228(40).
  magsěsipútol pl. 191(8).
  pagpútol a cutting 196(34).
  magpútol cut several things, cut on oneself 228(21).
  magsipagpútol pl. 262(38).
  magpůpútol will cut 234(21).
  magsěsipagpútol pl. 262(41).
  nagpútol cut 234(24).
  nagsipagpútol pl. 263(2).
  nagpůpútol is cutting 202(14).
  nagsěsipagpútol pl. 263(3).
  pagpupútol a cutting 234(19).
  magputňl cut variously or repeatedly, cut up 237(37).
  magpúputňl will cut 237(38).
  nagputňl cut 237(40).
  nagpúputňl is cutting 237(42).
  nagpúpuputňl is cutting to bits 239(9).
  magpuputňl cutter 243(1).
  mamútol cut selectively, in quantity, or as occupation 220(21).
  magsipamútol pl. 263(24).
  mamůmútol will cut 240(29).
  magsěsipamútol pl. 263(26).
  namútol cut 240(27).
  namůmútol is cutting 240(27).
  mámumutňl cutter 243(18).
  pamumútol a cutting 240(23).
  putúlin be cut 244(42).
  půputúlin will be cut 58(27). 207(5).
  pinútol was cut, cut off, stopped 38(34). 44(26). 154(10).
  pinůpútol is being cut 58(36). 248(34).
  pagputulěn be cut up 246(27).
  pinagpúputňl is being cut up 246(25).
  ipútol be cut for 248(29).
  ipůpútol will be cut for 248(29).
  ipinútol was cut for or with 154(15). 175(31). 248(28).
  ipinůpútol is being cut for or with 181(15). 202(6).
  ipagpútol be cut for 249(26).
  ipagpůpútol will be cut for 249(27).
  ipinagpútol was cut for or with 249(28).
  ipinagpůpútol is being cut for or with 249(29).
  ipamútol be used for cutting 250(17).
  ipinamútol was used for cutting 250(13).
  ipinamůmútol is being cut with or for, in quantity 187(13). 250(14).
  putúlan putlŕn be cut from 253(5).
  půputúlan půputlŕn will be cut from 253(7).
  pinutúlan was cut from 118(28). 154(20).
  pinůputlŕn is being cut from 60(1). 253(3).
  pagputúlan be cut on 256(1).
  pagputulŕn be cut from variously 256(13).
  pinamutúlan was cut from selectively or in quantity 158(10). 256(40).
  pinamůmutúlan is being cut from 256(33).
  nagputulŕn cut together 236(43).
  pakipútol that cut with others or as a favor 184(3). 263(40).
  makipútol cut by permission 264(12).
  makěkipútol will cut along with others 206(11).
  nakipútol cut by permission 264(8).
  nakěkipútol is cutting by permission 264(10).
  pakikipútol a cutting by permission 264(13).
  pakikipamútol a cutting, as occupation, by permission 264(39).
  pakiputúlin be cut as a favor 264(43).
  ipakipútol be cut as a favor 184(1).
  ipakěkipútol will be asked to be cut 265(13).
  ipakipagpútol be cut with as a favor 265(19).
  ipakěkipagpútol will be cut for as a favor 265(23).
  ipinakipagpútol was asked to be cut for 265(25).
  ipinakěkipagpútol is being asked to be cut for 172(26). 265(28).
  kapútol piece; brother, sister 16(5). 266(16).
  magkapútol two such 270(5).
  magkakapútol pl. 270(16).
  kŕkapútol only a piece 267(6).
  kapůpútol there has just been cutting 267(17).
  kapagpůpútol there has just been cutting of several things 267(20).
  kapŕpamútol there has just been cutting in quantity 267(23).
  magkaputňl get broken in numbers 182(22).
  magkákaputňl will many of them get broken 269(10).
  nagkaputňl got broken in numbers 269(11).
  nagkákaputňl is breaking in numbers 269(13).
  magkáputňl-putňl break into many pieces 255(21).
  magkŕkŕputňl-putňl will break into many pieces 271(23).
  nagkáputňl-putňl broke into many pieces 271(19).
  nagkŕkŕputňl-putňl gets mangled 271(21).
  ikapútol be the cause of breaking 158(12).
  ikapůpútol will be the cause of breaking or involuntary cutting
  272(19).
  ikinapútol was the cause of breaking 272(15).
  ikinapůpútol is the cause of breaking 272(17).
  ipagkaputňl be the cause of breaking in numbers 273(9).
  ipinagkaputňl was the cause of breaking in numbers 273(11).
  ipinagkákaputňl is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7).
  kapůtúlan one of two who cut together 278(10).
  makapútol be able to cut 269(7).
  makapůpútol will be able to cut 281(41).
  nakapútol has cut 282(22).
  nakapůpútol is able to cut 281(39).
  mapútol have been cut, be able to be cut 38(35). 60(4). 283(37).
  mapůpútol will be able to be cut 283(38).
  napútol has been cut, was cut 261(26).
  nangapútol pl. 286(17).
  napůpútol has just been cut, is cut 284(15). 285(1).
  nangapůpútol pl. 286(19).
  pagkapútol a having cut 282(37).
  makapagpútol be able to cut several things 286(43).
  nakapagpútol has cut 286(41).
  nakapagpůpútol is able to cut 286(42).
  maputúlan be cut from 185(21).
  mapůputúlan will be cut from 288(13).
  naputúlan was cut from 288(9).
  napůputúlan is cut from 288(10).
  napagputúlan was able to be cut on 288(26).
  makŕpútol chance to cut 290(28).
  makŕpůpútol will chance to cut 290(30).
  nakŕpútol chanced to cut 24(34). 290(20).
  nakŕpůpútol is by chance cutting 290(23).
  mŕpútol get cut 294(3).
  mŕpůpútol will get cut 294(5).
  nŕpútol got cut 293(24.43). 294(2).
  nŕpůpútol gets cut, is cut 201(30).
  pagkŕpútol the way cutting got done 291(15).
  mŕputúlan get cut from 238(2).
  mŕpůputúlan will get cut from 297(41).
  nŕputúlan got cut from 297(38).
  nŕpůputúlan gets cut from 297(39).
  papútol that caused to be cut 299(15).
  paputňl transversely 166(21).
  kapŕpapútol there has just been causing to cut 301(11).
  kapagpŕpapútol there has just been causing to cut several things
  301(13).
  papůpútol will ask to have cut 302(2).
  magpapútol cause to be cut 225(1).
  magpŕpapútol will cause to be cut 191(6).
  nagpapútol caused to be cut 303(13).
  nagpŕpapútol is causing to be cut 303(14).
  pagpapapútol a causing to be cut 303(15).
  paputúlin be caused to be cut 304(39).
  papůputúlin will be caused to cut 304(40).
  pinapútol was caused to cut 153(23).
  pinapůpútol is being caused to cut 304(37).
  papagputúlin be caused to cut on oneself 305(23).
  papagpůputúlin will be caused to cut several things 305(24).
  pinapagpútol was caused to cut 181(27).
  pinapagpůpútol is being caused to cut 181(16).
  papamutúlin be caused to cut selectively, in quantity, or as
  occupation 305(35).
  papamůmutúlin will be caused to cut 305(36).
  ipapútol be caused to be cut 306(25).
  ipapůpútol will be caused to be cut 306(23).
  ipinapútol was caused to be cut 204(10).
  ipinapůpútol is being caused to be cut 306(22).
  ipakipapútol be asked to be caused to be cut 307(29).
  ipakěkipapútol will be asked to be caused to be cut 307(32).
  ipinakipapútol was asked to be caused to be cut 307(34).
  paputúlan be caused to be cut from 308(24).
  papůputúlan will be caused to be cut from 308(25).
  pinaputúlan was caused to be cut from 308(19).
  pinapůputúlan is being caused to be cut from 308(22).
  makapagpapútol be able to cause to be cut 311(12).
  makŕkapagpapútol will be able to cause to be cut 311(15).
  nakapagpapútol has been caused to be cut 311(8).
  nakŕkapagpapútol is able to cause to be cut 311(10).
  napapútol asked to be cut for 311(38).
  napapůpútol asks to be cut for 311(40).
  palaputulěn brittle 315(21).
  tagapútol person whose duty it is to cut 315(32).

poňk place, district 40(2).

poňn lord, saint 104(5). 182(40).
  pinópoňn is being worshipped 189(3).

-puwŕ`, see kápuwŕ`.

-púyat: nagpúyat staid up, watched 232(30).
  nagpuyŕt repeatedly staid up 238(1).
  pagpupuyŕt a repeated staying up 297(7).
  namůmúyat keeps from sleeping, keeps up 240(31).
  pinúyat was kept up late 245(2).





S.

sa loc. particle 16(2). 45. 49. 195-212. 306. 515.
  sa lawŕ: sŕ-lawáhan fickle 94(1). 259(20).
  sa ulč`: pagsa-ulŕn be returned to 62(12). 72(13).
  pinagsa-ulŕn was returned to 44(25). 256(7).
  nása is in 18(22). 314(7).
  nangása pl. 118(35).
  násŕsa is being in 36(16). 44(1).
  pása go to 20(18). 314(9).
  pápŕsa will go to 314(10).
  mápasa get to 94(4).
  mápŕpasa will get to 314(15).
  nápasa went by chance 116(30). 279(4).
  nápŕpasa comes by chance to 106(26).
  pagkápasa a chance coming to 60(21). 314(16).

sŕ, see isŕ.

saŕn loc. of anň: where? to what? 42(14). 64(37). 316(34). 264.

-sabŕd: isinabŕd was said in interruption, was thrust in 102(22).

-sabŕy: sabŕy-sabŕy all at the same time 224(2).
  sinabayŕn was accompanied 82(32).
  pagkakásabŕy a happening at the same time 270(42).

sábi that said 24(8). 74(36). 198(12). 276.
  sabě-sabě chance talk 116(10). 120(9).
  nagsábi said 26(14). 36(29).
  nagsipagsábi pl. 26(5).
  nagsŕsábi is saying 156(40).
  pagsasábi a saying 155(24).
  sabíhin be said 30(15). 50(24).
  sŕsabíhin will be said 20(11). 30(14).
  sinábi was said 16(17).
  sinŕsábi is being said 96(9).
  pinagsabě was variously said 156(13).
  pinagsabě-sabě was repeatedly said 246(34).
  ipinagsábi was told about 249(35).
  pinagsabíhan was told, was ordered 20(15). 32(26).
  kasabihŕn proverb 276(11).
  pagkasábi a having said 70(28).
  makapagsábi be able to tell 52(9).
  nakapagsábi was able to tell 76(25).
  mŕsŕsábi will get said 92(37).
  pagkŕsábi a getting said 80(1). 100(36).

-sábit: sabitŕn clothes-rack 258(38).
  nakasábit is hanging (from a nail, peg, etc.) 281(4).

-sábog: nagsábog strewed 16(20).
  nŕsŕsábog is lying scattered 90(30). 108(19).
  nangŕsábog got scattered, pl. 293(40).

sabňn S. soap 184(34).

-sábong: pangsábong used for cock-fighting 297(42).
  pagsasábong cock-fighting 312(17).
  sabungŕn cockpit, cock-fight 304(1).
  sabungéro cock-fighter 98(21). 316(11).

-sabuwŕt: kasabuwŕt accomplice 298(19).

sáboy a sprinkling 68(3).
  sumŕsáboy is splashing, intr. 228(41).
  pagsáboy sprinkling 68(40).
  nagsŕsáboy is scattering 68(9).
  isináboy was sprinkled 268(11).
  sinŕsabúyan is being sprinkled at 68(24).
  napŕpasáboy falls scattering 70(4).

sadiyŕ` that come for 38(26). 78(28). 221(18)
  magsadiyŕ` go for one's purpose 74(28).
  nagsadiyŕ` went for his purpose 74(33).
  sinadiyŕ` was done intentionally 233(36).
  sinásadiyŕ` is being done intentionally 62(13). 98(32).

sagŕd close-cropped 219(13).

-sagása`: sumagása` knock, jostle 229(1).
  sagasáin be hit upon, be conflicted with 245(3).
  sinagasáan was bumped into 22(24).
  nagsŕgasaán jostled each other 237(1).
  pagsasŕgasaŕn a jostling each other 237(1).
  mŕsagasáan get run into 271(22).
  nŕsagasáan got run into 297(43).

ságing banana 16(8). See púno`.
  sagíngan banana-grove 250(40).

sagitsět sizzling 114(10).

sagňt that answered 26(23). 44(15).
  sumagňt answer 44(10). answered 26(1).
  sumásagňt answers 44(2).
  sinagňt was given an answer 191(41).
  isinagňt was said in reply 16(18).
  makasagňt be able to answer 76(4).
  nakasagňt was able to answer 68(21).

saguwŕn a paddle 261(41).
  sumaguwŕn paddled 229(1).
  pagsaguwŕn a paddling 82(12).

sahěg flooring, floor 114(43).
  isinásahěg is being used as flooring 248(32).

-sáhod: sumáhod hold under 229(1).
  isáhod be held under 248(34).

-sáing: magsáing cook rice dry 232(30).
  sináing ration of rice, not yet served 229(8).

sakŕ` then, afterwards 52(30). 68(21). 243.

-sakŕl: pagsakŕl choking 227(5).

sakatéro S. grass-cutter 96(2).

sakŕy person carried in a vehicle 80(36).
  pangsakŕy used for riding or driving 225(18).
  sumakŕy mount, ride 72(1). mounted 52(37).
  sumásakŕy is mounting, is getting on or in (a vehicle) 229(2).
  pagsakŕy mounting, riding 70(40). 167(41).
  nagsakŕy took into a vehicle 234(25).
  pagsasakŕy a taking into a vehicle 272(2).
  isinakŕy was put on a vehicle 306(16).
  ipinagsakŕy was taken into a vehicle 249(37).
  sakyŕn be embarked in 253(10).
  sinakyŕn was ridden in 253(9).
  sinŕsakyŕn is being ridden in 82(32).
  sŕkáyan embarkation by many 258(3).
  sasakyŕn vehicle 219(35).
  nakíkisakŕy embarks along with others 98(18).
  ikinásakŕy was the cause of chance mounting 273(36).
  nakasakŕy has mounted, is mounted 100(23). 281(15).
  nakasásakŕy is able to mount 281(43).
  pagkasakŕy a past mounting, ability to mount 282(12.39).
  nasakyŕn was able to be mounted 228(16).
  násakŕy got put on a vehicle 294(28).
  nŕsŕsakŕy is in a vehicle 114(22).
  pagkásakŕy a chance mounting or riding 292(17). 294(36). 295(41).
  nŕsakyŕn got mounted 298(1).
  pasakŕy that caused to be taken into a vehicle 299(17). in riding
  position, astride 299(30).
  nagpasakŕy caused to be put on a vehicle 268(25).
  pagpapasakŕy a causing to be put on a vehicle 303(17).
  ipinasakŕy was caused to be put on a vehicle 306(26).
  ipinagpasakŕy was caused to be used for riding 307(21).
  pinasakyŕn was caused to be mounted 308(28).
  ipinagkápasakŕy was the cause of causing to ride 310(18).

sakdŕl accusation 54(36).
  isinakdŕl was charged 56(12).
  ipinagsakdŕl was accused 54(31).

-sakěm: kasakimŕn selfishness 28(34). 74(20).

sákit (a) grief 223(20).
  pasákit suffering caused 42(43).
  nagpasákit caused suffering to be undergone 303(20).
  ipinasákit was caused to be suffered 22(7).
  pinasŕsakítan is being caused to suffer 40(40).
  --(b) Accent shifted: sakět pain, sickness 30(28). 42(3). 223(18).
  sumakět hurt, injure 188(30).
  sinŕsaktŕn is being hurt 60(1). 70(15).
  nagkasakět got sick 54(7). 78(24).
  pagkakasakět a getting sick 269(8).
  ipinagkasakět was the cause of getting sick 273(14).
  nakasakět cause injury 313(32).
  masakět sore 40(41). 281(31).
  masaktŕn be hurt 206(24).
  masŕsaktŕn will be hurt 204(2).
  nasaktŕn got hurt 264(25).
  palasŕkítin one who easily gets sick 315(14).

sáko S. sack 104(15).

-sákop: sakňp included 290(31).
  pagsákop an including, a saving 306(42).
  mŕnanákop savior 20(33).
  nasŕsákop is included, is under control 116(31).

sála failure, offense 38(2).
  sumála fail, miss, 64(42). failed 229(4).
  saláhan be omitted, skipped 253(11).
  sanglŕn be missed 253(14).
  sinanglŕn was missed 253(12).
  nagkŕsála sinned against 271(1).
  pagkakŕsála a sinning against 290(1).
  kasalánan sin 20(32). 98(7).
  makasalánan 22(1). 74(22). 289(22).
  pagkasála a having missed 272(10). 286(3).

salakŕb fish-trap 243(7).
  mánanalakŕb fish-trapper 243(7).

-salákay: pagsalákay an attacking 122(10).
  pananalákay a repeated attacking 122(23).
  sinalakáyan was attacked 122(9).

salakňt rain-hat of palm-leaves 212(22).

salamangkŕ S. sleight-of-hand trick 202(37).

salámat thanks 16(32). 152(4).
  magpasalámat give thanks, thank 160(15).
  napasalámat was thankful 88(16).

salaměn glass, looking-glass, eye-glass 60(7). 238(39). n. of dog
147(22).

salapě` money; half-dollar 30(27). 252(41).

salŕt needy 219(14).
  kasalatŕn lack 239(35).

salawŕl trousers 122(1).

-salaysŕy: isinalaysŕy was narrated 38(5).

salbáhi S. savage, brutal; brute 44(4). 50(17). 70(25).
  kasalbahíhan brutality 54(28).

-sáli: isáli be taken along, be included 248(37).
  isináli was included 248(36).
  kasáli participant 22(18). 48(5).
  nŕkasáli got taken as companion 296(28).
  makŕsáli chance to take part 114(28).

salitŕ` word, speech 18(13). 20(41).
  magsalitŕ` speak 28(39). 80(37).
  nagsalitŕ` spoke 104(19).
  pagsasalitŕ` a speaking 80(40).
  pananalitŕ` manner of speaking 44(35). 50(15).
  pinagsalitaŕn was spoken to 76(3).
  sŕlitáan conversation 32(7). 44(20).
  magsŕlitáan converse 114(5).
  nagsŕsŕlitáan are conversing 86(32).
  pagsasŕlitáan a conversing 28(11). 64(10). 88(3).
  kasŕlitáan one of two who converse together 278(2).
  makapagsalitŕ` be able to speak 50(14).

-sálo: kasálo fellow-partaker 42(8).

-salúbong: sinalúbong was met 18(40). 66(19).

sálok dipper; basket 229(6).
  sumálok dip out water 229(6).

-salúkoy: kasalukúyan present, at the same time 36(40). 260(11).

salňp a dry measure; see kabŕn.

sáma (a) come along, go along 182(26). 222(5).
  sumáma go along 32(13). 66(30). went along 140(19).
  sŕsáma will go along 84(12).
  pagsáma a going along 104(30).
  pagsasáma a going together 54(18).
  isáma be taken along 84(32).
  isináma was taken along 86(28).
  samáhan be gone with 253(14).
  sinamáhan was gone with 186(20).
  sŕsamáhan will be gone with 68(34).
  sŕmáhan society, company 296(32).
  sŕmáha-ng-Sumúlong the Sumulong Co. 210(30).
  sŕmáha-ng-ópera opera company 303(10).
  makisáma go along with 202(23).
  kasáma companion 30(9.22). 50(39). 273.
  magkakasáma group of three or more companions 28(25). 48(39).
  --(b) With accent-shift: samŕ act as partners 223(20).
  kasamŕ field-worker, peon 72(32). 86(22).
  kasamahŕn partner 108(32). 210(35). See Sumúlong.
  magkakasamahŕn group of three or more 207(41). 278(40).

samŕ` badness, injury 218(31).
  kasamaŕn badness, injuriousness 276 (37).
  kasamaŕ-ng-pálad bad fortune 42(28).
  masamŕ` bad, hurtful, ugly 40(14). 50(7). 58(39).

sambalílo (S.) hat 137(42).

sampŕl a slap 24(23).
  sinampŕl was slapped 24(22).

sampŕy that hung across 251(33).
  nagsampŕy hung across, tr. 232(31).
  isinampŕy was hung across 248(38).
  sampáyan clothes-line 223(33).

Sam-Pédro S. St. Peter 72(27).

sána in that case, then 34(17). 74(23). 47. 230.

San-Antóniyo S. place-n. 34(29). See táo.

sánay practice 46(16).
  sanŕy practised 46(24).
  pasasánay a drilling 116(29).
  pagkasánay a past practising 46(23).

San-Visčnte S. place-n. 220(40).

sandalě` moment, while, short space of time 18(6). 24(11).

sandáliyas S. sandals 278(35).

sandňk cooking-dipper of cocoanut-shell 74(5).
  sumandňk dipped out 229(8).

sanhě` cause 190(16).

-sánib: sumánib make one's sleeping-mat overlap 229(8).
  isánib be made to overlap 248(7).
  kasánib overlapping 266(18).
  magkasánib two that overlap 269(38).

San-Ildepňnso S. place-n. 100(10). See lúpa`.

San-Matéyo S. place-n., see báyan.

San-Migčl S. place-n. 50(9). 116(6). See báyan.

sŕnto S. saint 98(15). 104(15).

Sŕntos S. family-n. 209(26).

santňl fruit and tree of Sandoricum Indicum L. 34(40).

sangŕ bough 34(28). 118(28).

-sanggŕ: sumásanggŕ is warding off 106(36).
  sinásanggŕ is being warded off 106(35).

Sang-Huwŕn S. St. John 104(6). 110(10).

sangkálan chopping-block 256(1).

sangkŕp accompaniment 221(22).
  kasangkŕp id. 266(20).
  kasangkápan  utensil, tool, appurtenances 58(2.33). 74(6).

-sangl, see sála.

sanlŕ` pledge 252(22).
  sangláan place for pledges, see báhay.

sápa` pond 88(26).

sapagkŕt because 20(17). 201(36). 306.

-sapantáha`: sinapantáha` was conjectured 38(25).

sapŕt sufficient 305(19).

sapátos S. shoes 32(35).

-sápit: sumápit arrived, came 62(24).

-sarŕ: pangsarŕ instrument for closing 225(19).
  sumásarŕ closes, intr. 225(20).
  pagsasarŕ a closing, tr. 26(36).
  isinarŕ was closed 80(1).
  pagkásarŕ a chance closing 80(17).

-sarŕp: masasarŕp tasty, pl. 34 (39).

sári` sárě-sári` various 48(15). 74(31).

saríle self; own 48(33). 62(12). 72(13). 137. 169. 175.

saríwa` moist; fresh 184(9).
  nanaríwa` got fresh 76(40).

satsŕt tonsure 106(21).

sawě` awkward 219(15). 276(33).
  sawě-ng-pálad unlucky 211(8).
  nasawě-ng-pálad became unlucky 54(3).
  kasawiŕn awkwardness 276(37).
  kasawiŕ-ng-pálad bad fortune 94(37).

sáya S. dress, skirt 240(41).

-sayŕ: kasŕyáhan gladness 275(27).
  masayŕ gay 80(15). 92(28).

-sáyad: magsisáyad get wearied, pl. 118(20).

sáyang that regretted 219(16).
  nanghináyang grieved 292(14).
  nanghěhináyang is mourning 241(24).
  panghihináyang a mourning 241(26).
  panghinayángan be regretted 257(6).
  panghěhinayángan will be regretted 191(31).
  pinanghinayángan was regretted 257(12).
  pinanghěhinayángan is being regretted 257(13).
  nasáyang went for naught 285(5).

-sayŕw: sumayŕw dance 110(32). danced 186(18).
  sumásayŕw is dancing 112(2).
  pagsayŕw a dancing 112(4).
  nagsásayŕw is performing a dance 110(38).
  sayawŕn be danced before 253(15).
  sinayawŕn was danced to 186(21).
  sŕyáwan dance by many; ball 112(5). 186(19). 258(4).

si siy particle of names 20(2). 45. 58. 62. 78. 126. 162. 196.
  ni disj., of, by 45. 162.
  kay loc., to, for 45. 196.

Sibňl place-n. 118(26).

sibúyas S. onions 76(17).

sigŕ` bonfire 66(16).

-sigŕng: isigŕng be put on the fire 248(39).
  nakasigŕng is cooking 281(6).

sigaríliyo S. cigarette 227(1).

sigŕw that cried 221(23).
  sumigŕw yelled 24(21).
  sísigŕw will yell 24(19).
  pagsigŕw a shouting 42(41).
  nagsisigŕw kept shouting 16(31). 44(40).
  nagsísisigŕw screams continually 40(42).
  pagsisigŕw a continual shouting 16(26). 44(26).
  isinigŕw was cried out 24(13). 68(39).
  sinigawŕn was yelled at 253(16).
  sěgáwan a shouting by many 258(5).
  magsěsěgáwan will yell together 236(18).
  pagsisěgáwan a yelling together 48(37).
  nakasísigŕw is able to cry out 84(25).
  pasigŕw in a shout 70(24).
  nápasigŕw involuntarily gave a shout 88(27).

-sigl, see silěd.

-siglŕ: masiglŕ cheerful 276(35).
  magpasiglŕ cause to be cheerful 112(11).

sigúro S. no doubt 18(24). 80(39).

siět spines at base of bamboo-cluster 246(27).

-síkad: sumíkad kicked at 229(9).
  nagsísikŕd kicks repeatedly 238(3).
  nagsísisikŕd is kicking much and repeatedly 239(11).
  sinikáran was kicked at 253(17).

síkat ray of light 66(22).
  suměsíkat is shining 78(4).

-sikěp: sumikěp became narrow 229(10).
  nagsikěp grew crowded 234(27).
  masikěp crowded 98(39).

sekréta S. spy 168(5).

-siksěk: sumiksěk crowded his way 229(13).
  nagsísiksěk is stuffing 234(29).
  nakěkipagsiksíkan takes part in the crowding 98(41).

síko elbow 48(19).

síko, see tsíko.

-síkot: pasíkot-síkot nooks and corners 300(33).

silŕ they 18(27). 63.
  nilŕ disj., by them, of them 16(7). 163.
  kanilŕ prep. and loc., their, by them, them 18(26). 165. 169.
  kaní-kanilŕ prep. and loc., their various, their respective
  26(37). 165. 169.

silŕ, see sinŕ.

silakbň a flare, leap 231(6). 254(26).
  sumilakbň flared up 229(14).
  siněsilakbuhŕn is being welled up in 22(15).

-sílang: sělángan place of rising 259(41).
  silangŕn place of child-birth 260(26).
  sělangánan east 163(27).
  silángan east; place-n. 163(27). 261(13).

-silbč (S.): magsilbč serve 40(7).
  pinagsěsilbihŕn is being waited on 64(12).

síle S. chile pepper 76(16).

silěd small room 84(39). 114(13).
  sumilěd get into a small space 104(34).
  isilěd be put in 248(40).
  siglŕn be filled 138(5).
  siniglŕn was filled 20(17.34).
  siněsiglŕn is being filled 20(6).
  pinagsisiglŕn was variously filled 118(7). 256(20).
  pagkásilěd a chance putting away 104(37).

-sílip: sinílip was peeped at 106(20).

síliya S. chair 234(12).

sílong ground-floor, space under platform of house 260(29).

-simbŕ: magsimbŕ go to church 78(37).
  nagsimbŕ went to church 242(18).
  nagsísimbŕ goes to church 56(13).
  simbáhan church 20(15).
  mapagsimbŕ devout 98(10).

sinŕ silŕ pl. particle of names 48. 60. 62. 162. 196.
  ninŕ nilŕ disj., of, by 48. 162.
  kinŕ loc., to, for 48. 196.

sínag ray 66(36).

síne S. cinematograph 204(22).

sinélas S. sandals 70(1).

séniyas S. signals 246(22).

-sintŕ: pagsintŕ a proffering love 229(16).
  sinísintŕ is being loved 245(5).

sčntimos S. centimos, cents 222(37).

síno who? 97. 167.
  síno-síno pl. 97. 131.
  níno disj., of whom? by whom? 167. 168.
  kaníno prep. and loc., whose? by whom? 168. 169.
  kaní-kaníno pl. 168. 169.

sinungáling mendacious 219(17).
  nagsísinungalěng tells lies 238(5).
  kasinungalíngan falsehood 276(38).

-singěl: paniningěl a dunning 313(1).
  singilěn be dunned for 264(14).
  sinísingěl is being claimed 54(23).
  násingěl got collected 294(7).

singkamŕs (S.) Pachyrizus angulatus Rich. 76(16).

-singkŕw: nagpasingkŕw caused to be hitched up 52(35).

singsěng ring 102(2).
  palŕsingsíngan the ring finger 315(25).

sípa` that kicked away; football 46(32).
  pagsípa` a kicking 48(15).
  mŕninípa` football-player 48(24).
  sipáin be kicked away 84(9).
  sinípa` was kicked away 24(45). 84(3).
  pinagsipŕ` was variously kicked 84(43).
  pinagsisipŕ` was variously and repeatedly kicked 84(21).
  sipéro football-player 316(11).
  sipéros pl. 48(24).

-sípag: kasipágan diligence 276(38).
  masípag diligent 64(14).
  masisípag pl. 34(35).

-síra` (a) nagkasíra` got partly spoiled 268(37).
  nakasěsíra` causes ruin 235(27).
  masíra` be able to be destroyed 283(40).
  nasíra` was destroyed; deceased 78(5). 285(7).
  nasěsiráan gets damaged 301(24).
  mŕsíra` get destroyed 293(26).
  nŕsěsíra` gets destroyed 191(32).
  --(b) Accent shifted:
  sirŕ` destroyed 223(3).
  kasirŕ` opponent in anger 266(42).
  magkasirŕ` break with each other 24(28).
  nagkasirŕ` had a falling out 269(20).
  nagsipagkasirŕ` pl. 269(28).
  kasiraŕn ruin 94(12).
  kasiraŕ-ng-púri injury to honor 94(16).

serbísiyo S. service 62(35).

sčrmon S. sermon 20(16).
  isinčsčrmon is being preached about 50(16).
  sinčsčrmunan is being preached to 50(13).

-sísi: magsísi repent 20(31).
  magsipagsísi pl. 22(2).
  pagsisísi a repenting 22(25).
  pinagsisíhan was repented 291(9).

-sísid: sumísid stay under water 168(41).
  pagsísid a staying under water 309(10).
  nŕsěsísid is submerged 88(35).
  pagpapasísid a causing to dive 116(38).

sítaw the cow-pea, Vigna catjang Endl. 76(16).

siyŕ he, she; that which 47. 63. 106.
  niyŕ disj., by him, of him, 47. 163.
  kaniyŕ prep. and loc., his, by him, him 165. 169.
  kásiyŕ sufficient 268(8).
  magkŕkŕsiyŕ will be sufficient 271(4).
  pagkŕsiyahŕn be a sufficient container 52(13).
  makasísiyŕ will be adequate 281(7).
  nasiyahŕn got what corresponded to it 66(21).
  nasěsiyahŕn gets what corresponds to it 112(26).

-siyádo (S. demasiado)
  :masiyádo excessive 54(19). 289(17).

siyŕm nine 38(6). 67. pangsiyŕm number nine 225(38).
  makásiyŕm nine times 298(33).

siyásat that inquired into 203(5).
  nagsiyásat inquired 28(2). 203(2).
  pagsisiyásat an inquiring 66(21).
  maniyásat pry into 240(33).
  siniyásat was interrogated 64(34).
  nasiyásat has been inquiring into 199(32).
  mapagsiyásat inquisitive 40(20).

siyčmpre S. always 262(13).

siyéte-palábras S. Easter Mass 20(29).

subálit but 322.

-subň: sumubň boiled over, intr. 52(12).
  sinubhŕn was boiled over in 54(30).

súbo` mouthful 221(24).
  pagsusúbo` a feeding 219(15).
  subúan be fed 253(19).

-súbok: nanůnúbok is spying 40(24).
  subúkan be watched for, put to a test 68(8). 102(34).
  sinubúkan was put to a test 56(39).
  sinůsubúkan is being spied on 40(22).
  masubúkan be able to be tested 265(20).

-sugŕl (S.): nagsúsugŕl is gambling 269(22).
  nagsipagsugŕl gambled, pl. 190(34).
  pagsusugŕl a gambling 251(29).
  sůgálan gambling-party 174(29).

súgat a wound 20(8).
  sumúgat wounded 20(38).
  sinugátan was wounded 253(20).
  sugatŕn wounded person, the wounded 20(39). 260(28).
  nagsugatŕn wounded each other 237(3).
  masugátan be able to be wounded 36(21).

súha` grape-fruit 34(40). See púno`.

súhol a bribe 72(39).

súka` wine set to sour, vinegar 289(2).

súkat proper, fitting 58(18). 98(24). 268.

suklŕy comb 229(19).
  sumuklŕy combed 229(18).
  nagsuklŕy combed himself 234(30).
  sinuklŕy was combed 245(7).
  sinuklayŕn id. 253(21).
  nagpasuklŕy caused himself to be combed 303(22).
  pinapagsuklŕy was caused to comb himself 305(26).

súlat that written, letter 52(10).
  sulŕt written 199(30).
  sumúlat write 140(18). wrote 50(39).
  sůsúlat will write 138(11).
  sumůsúlat is writing 146(5).
  pagsúlat a writing 140(29).
  pagsusulŕt a writing in quantity 238(5).
  panunúlat id. 240(35).
  magsusulŕt clerk, scribe 243(2).
  mánunulŕt id. 243(20).
  sinúlat was written 154(8). 245(9).
  isinúlat was put into writing 94(22). 184(35).
  sulátan be written to 154(19).
  sulatŕn writing-desk 217(13).
  kasůlátan kasulatŕn correspondent 278(12. 24).
  makasúlat be able to write 282(2).
  nakasůsúlat is able to write 282(1).
  nakŕsúlat happened to write 176(38).
  tagasúlat writer 315(39).
  tagapagpasúlat overseer of writers 316(5).

-súlid: sumúlid spin thread 229(19).
  sinúlid thread 184(4).

sulihiyŕ the weave 48(1).

suléras S. joists 234(43).

-sulsč (S.): manulsč darn 169(2).
  tagasulsč darning-woman 169(1).

sulň` torch 90(26).

súlok corner 52(33). 64(22).
  sulňk-sulňk nooks and corners 64(21).

súlong go ahead 151(39).
  sumúlong push ahead 229(19). also as family-n. (Sumúlong at
  kasamahŕn: see běgásan).
  pagsúlong a pushing on; a going away 88(41). 308(36).
  isůsúlong will be pushed forward 58(3).
  isinůsúlong is being pushed ahead 230(3).

súman steamed rice in banana-leaves 227(1).

sombréro S. hat 137(41).

sumbňng complaint 96(12).
  nagsumbňng brought a charge 100(21).
  ipagsumbňng be complained of 96(35).
  ipinagsumbňng was complained  of 38(1). 96(10).
  palasumbúngin tattle-tale 315(10).

-sumpňng: pagsumpňng attack, fit 313(22).
  sinumpňng was overcome 18(36). 84(14).
  sinúsumpňng is being overcome 108(27).

sundálo S. soldier 52(23).
  nagsundálo became a soldier 183(2).
  pagsusundálo military service 303(34).

-sundň`: sumundň` fetch 229(21).
  pagsundň` a fetching 229(22).
  sinundň` was called for 256(41).
  sinúsundň` is being called for 104(23).
  kásundň` agreeing 268(9).
  nagkásundň` agreed with each other 168(16).
  pagkakásundň` an agreeing with each other 271(5).
  pagkŕsunduŕn pagkŕsunduwŕn be agreed upon 278(30).
  pinagkŕsunduŕn was agreed upon 32(2).
  nagpasundň` caused to be fetched 92(23).
  pagpapasundň` a causing to be fetched 303(23).
  ipinasundň` was caused to be fetched 306(28).
  ipinasúsundň` is being caused to be fetched 88(19). 92(16).

suntňk blow on the head 229(24).
  pagsuntňk a striking on the head 229(23).
  suntukěn be struck on the head 245(10).
  sinuntňk was struck on the head 245(10).
  sinúsuntňk is being struck on the head 245(11).

-súno`: nakisúno` dwelt along, dwelt with 264(15).
  kasúno` fellow-guest 118(15).
  magkakasúno` pl. 118(18).

-sunňd: sunňd-sunňd following on one another 72(25).
  sumunňd follow, comply, obey 52(24). 100(27). followed 231(6).
  sumúsunňd is following 38(7). 46(19).
  pagsunňd a following 38(10). 94(24).
  sunděn be complied with 92(8).
  sinunňd was complied with 303(16).
  sinúsunňd is being complied with 62(37). 66(13).
  isinunňd was taken next, was made to follow 76(18).
  sundŕn be followed 240(23).
  sinundŕn was followed 22(25). 36(36).
  sinůsundŕn is being followed 68(23).
  kasunňd following another 266(21).
  magkasunňd two, one of whom follows the other 42(29). 270(8).
  pagkakásunňd-sunňd a following one on the other 271(6).
  masůnúrin obedient 94(20).

súnog a burning up, conflagration 122(18). 156(10).
  sunňg burnt 66(41). 223(4).
  panunúnog a setting fire to, a burning 122(12).
  sunúgin be burned up 122(20).
  pinagsunňg was variously burned up 122(10).
  magkasúnog have a fire 268(41).
  nasúnog has been burned 172(39). 259(4).
  pagkasúnog a past burning 197(34). 283(2).
  pagkŕsúnog a getting burned 292(19). 295(19).

súnong that carried on the head 108(16).

sungánga` a blow on the mouth 212(37).
  sůsungangáin will be struck on the mouth 174(37).

súngay horn 24(29).

-sunggŕb: sinunggabŕn was seized 46(27). 58(22).
  sinůsunggabŕn is being seized 108(34).
  masunggabŕn have been taken hold of 110(2).
  nasůsunggabŕn is able to be seized 110(8).

súpot bag 34(5).

sorbétes S. sherbet 272(33).

súso breast, nipple 212(11).
  ipinakěkipasúso is being asked to be caused to take the breast
  307(38).

susň` snail 18(1).

sutsňt a whistling 197(22).
  sumúsutsňt is whistling 229(24).
  malasutsňt a young lout 315(3).
  palasutsútin one who always whistles 315(11).

soňt that worn 70(1).
  isoňt be put on 248(41).
  sootŕn be got into 104(11).

-suwŕy: pagsuwŕy a disobeying 54(3).
  makasuwŕy be able to disobey 94(21).

suwélas S. soles 306(8).

suwčldo S. pay 26(27).

-súyo`: pagsúyo` a bribing 92(38).
  panunúyo` a propitiating by bribes 72(34).

súyod a harrow 243(3).
  magsuyňd harrower.





T.

t, see at.

taŕn that set apart 221(3).
  itinátaŕn is being reserved 248(24).
  taanŕn fugitive 261(14).
  magtaanŕn flee 237(4).
  makataanŕn be able to flee 286(24). 313(29).
  nŕtŕtaŕn is reserved 80(13).

taŕs height 218(13).
  itaŕs upper part, north 36(27). 163(25).
  paitaŕs upward 48(6).
  itinaŕs was raised 88(34).
  kataasŕn north 163(25).
  mataŕs high 64(12).
  nátaŕs got raised up 78(8).

-tabŕ`: tumabŕ` grow stout 206(27).
  katabŕ` how fat 42(5).
  matabŕ` fat, stout 244(34).
  nápakatabŕ` very fat 313(12).

tabakéra S. tabatičre 220(25).

tabáko S. cigar 66(12).
  nagtŕtabáko is smoking a cigar 66(19).

tabě side; step aside 32(31). 152(1).
  nátabě got to the side of 74(14).
  pagkátabě a getting to the side of 94(8).

tablŕ S. board 34(37).

tábo` dipper 222(27).

tábon dam 245(14).
  nagtábon dammed up 232(32).
  pagtatábon a damming up 179(39).
  tinabúnan was dammed up 253(22).
  nŕtŕtábon is covering, is piled over 120(22).
  pinatabúnan was caused to be filled 26(10).

taburéte S. chair 24(39).

tadtŕd chopped up 20(7).
  pagtatadtŕd a chopping up 114(10). and Corrigenda.

tagŕ tigŕ coming from 56(23). 48. 254.

-tagŕ`: tumagŕ` hew, chop 290(27).
  tinagŕ` was chopped 44(39).

tagŕl length in time, endurance 168(41).
  tagalŕn be done long 253(23).
  matagŕl long-enduring, patient 104(26).
  natagalŕn was able to be endured in 62(6).
  pŕtagálan contest of endurance 309(10).
  pagpapŕtagálan a contesting for endurance 48(22). 309(17).
  kapŕtagálan opponent in a contest for endurance 310(32).

Tagálog Tagalog 50(15). 58(6).
  Katagalúgan the Tagalog country 50(23).

tagílid, see -gílid.

tagpě` a patch 266(4).
  tagpiŕn be mended 253(26).
  tagpían place of patching 259(7).
  katátagpě` there has just been mending 175(9).

tagpň` a meeting 220(3).
  magtatagpň` meet each other, pl. 102(4).
  nagtatagpň` met each other 26(39).
  tagpuěn be met by appointment 245(12).
  tagpuŕn be joined up 253(26).
  pagtŕtagpuŕn will be met in 26(34).
  tagpúan meeting-place 106(9).
  makíkipagtagpň` will meet another 98(26).
  makátagpň` happen to meet 66(5). 92(14).
  nakátagpň` happened to meet 18(2). 36(8).
  mŕtagpuŕn get met with 106(25).
  nŕtagpuŕn got met with 34(20). 92(15).

tágo` that put away 221(25).
  magtágo` hide oneself 32(35).
  magtagň` keep oneself in hiding 56(19).
  nagtagň` kept himself in hiding 56(21).
  pagtatagň` a staying in hiding 312(13).
  itágo` be hidden 40(25).
  itinŕtágo` is being put away 273(34).
  taguŕn place for safe-keeping; hiding-place; hiding
  52(35). 120(10). 163(22).
  kinŕtŕtagúan is the place of concealment 118(43).
  makapagtágo` be able to hide oneself 52(32).
  nŕtŕtágo` is hidden 24(31). 34(11).
  pagkŕtágo` the way of storing 268(39).
  patágo` given for safe-keeping 293(26).

-tahŕn: magtahŕn cease 232(33).
  nagtahŕn ceased 106(7).
  tŕhánan abode 66(24).
  patahanin be caused to cease 100(2).

-tahě`: manahě` sew, patch 169(2).
  pananahě` sewing as occupation 240(36).
  mŕnanáhi` seamstress 243(14).
  pinanŕnahiŕn is the place where sewing is done 256(42).
  tagatahě` person appointed to sew 315(39).

tahěd spur of rooster 238(3).

tahílan girder 227(15).

tahímik quiet 102(4). 114(4).
  tumahímik become quiet, quiet down 44(17). became quiet
  44(25). 122(23).
  nanahímik quieted down 240(37).
  nagsipanahímik pl. 36(5).
  katahimíkan quietness 116(9).
  matahímik quiet 34(35). 120(38).
  mŕtahímik get quiet 40(42).

tahňl a bark 62(8).
  tumátahňl is barking 229(25).
  pagtahňl a barking 305(2).
  pagtatahňl a barking at 234(31).
  tŕhúlan a baying together 258(7).
  nagtŕhúlan bayed together 190(17).
  ikinátahňl was the cause of barking 273(38).
  nakatahňl has barked, was able to bark 191(2). 198(18).
  pagkátahňl a chance barking 158(8).
  pagpapatahňl a causing to bark 296(10).
  pinatahňl was caused to bark 304(41).

taínga ténga ear 110(35).

-takŕ: pagtatakŕ a being surprised 64(16). 232(34).
  ipinagtátakŕ is the cause of surprise 66(4).
  katakŕ-takŕ exciting wonder 36(26).
  nakapagtátakŕ causes wonderment 36(24).

takbň a run 70(40).
  tumakbň run 18(18). ran 18(39).
  tumátakbň is running 251(39).
  tátakbň will run 18(35).
  pagtakbň a running 18(9).
  pagtakbň-takbň a running about at intervals 231(22).
  nagtátakbň runs (as repeated occurrence) 108(16).
  nagsipagtakbň ran, pl. 84(29).
  nangagsipagtakbň id. 116(13).
  pagtatakbň a running 88(25).
  nagtátatakbň is running wild 62(13). 238(42).
  takbúhan a running together 60(27). 116(5).
  nagtakbúhan ran together 22(26).
  nagsipagtakbúhan pl. 96(30).
  nagtŕtakbúhan are running together 86(40). 106(34).
  pagtatakbúhan a running together 18(1). 96(17).
  makipagtakbúhan join in a race with 18(21).
  nakěkipagtakbúhan joins in a race 60(26).
  pinakěkipagtakbuhŕn is being run with 60(29). 265(33).
  makatakbň be able to run 18(16).
  patakbň on the run 68(18). 72(8).
  pinatakbň was caused to run 70(39).

takěp cover 172(15).
  pangtakěp used as cover 94(15).

tákot fear 20(6).
  takútin be frightened 50(33).
  nagtŕtakňt-takútan pretends to be frightened 108(15).
  katákot-tákot terrifying 267(27).
  ikinatákot was the cause of fearing 272(23).
  katakútan be feared 36(9).
  kinatakútan was feared 274(30).
  kinatŕtakútan is being feared 42(18).
  pagkatakutŕn be feared by many 275(19).
  pagkŕkatakutŕn will be feared by many 275(21).
  pinagkatakutŕn was feared by many 275(15).
  pinagkŕkatakutŕn is being feared by many 36(30).
  katakútan timidity 116(14).
  katakutŕn reverence 276(11).
  katatakutŕn terrifying 34(32). 277(30).
  nakatŕtákot is causing fear 66(12).
  matákot be afraid 20(13).
  natákot grew afraid 58(23).
  nangatákot pl. 36(6).
  natŕtákot is afraid 36(7).
  pagkatákot a being afraid 72(9).
  palatakutěn easily frightened.

tála` star 272(25).

-talŕ`: nátalŕ` got fixed 116(24).

talagŕ by fate, by nature, once for all 98(33). 116(16).
  tinalagŕ was resolved upon 46(23).
  katalagahŕn fate 276(40).

-tálas: matálas keen, clever 234(9).

-talastŕs: natátalastŕs is able to be understood 284(2).
  napagtalastŕs was entirely understood 287(14).
  napagtátalastŕs napápagtalastŕs is entirely understood 287(15).

-táli`: panáli` used for tethering, tying up 225(21).
  nagtáli` tethered 232(35).
  itináli` was tethered 313(25).
  tinalían was tied up 104(37).
  nakatáli` is tied 284(16).

-tálik: tumálik became close 88(2).
  matálik intimate 22(30). 52(17).

-talíkod, see likňd.

talěm cutting-edge 221(36).
  patalěm cutting instrument 36(19).
  nagpatalěm caused to be sharp, sharpened 44(36).
  nagpápatalěm is sharpening 303(25).
  pinatalěm was made sharp 304(42).
  napatátalěm is able to be made sharp. 311(24).

talíno (S.?) intelligence 60(16).
  katalinúhan id. 50(6).
  matalíno intelligent 36(28).

-tálo (a): nagtŕtálo is contending 46(34).
  pagtatálo a contending 296(31).
  manálo be victorious 52(8).
  nanálo won 48(36).
  nanŕnálo is victorious 62(2).
  nagsěsipanálo pl. 118(5).
  pananálo victory 56(30).
  mánanalň victorious, victor 48(38). 62(1).
  talúnin be defeated 46(37).
  tŕtalúnin will be defeated 18(24).
  talúnan defeated, loser 18(42). 148(22). 163(7).
  pinanalúnan was won 60(33).
  katŕlúnan one of two who are opposing each other 278(12).
  pinagkatalunŕn was won in by many 60(27). 275(23).
  pagkatálo a being defeated 52(7).
  mŕkatálo turn out to be the opponent 168(28).
  mŕkŕkatálo will be an opponent 30(2).
  nŕkatálo was the opponent 296(29).
  nŕkŕkatálo is the opponent 296(31).
  --(b) Accent shifted: katalň opponent in winning-and-losing game
  266(43).
  nagkatalň played a game 269(21).
  pagkakatalň a winning-and-losing 48(21).

talumpáti` oration 98(38).
  nagtŕtalumpáti` is making a speech 98(41).
  pagtatalumpáti` a speech-making 236(39).

-talňn: tumalňn jumped down 88(29).
  nagtalňn jumped down 28(21). 70(30). 72(13).

talňng egg-plant 76(16).

-talungkň`: nakatalungkň` has squatted down 98(19). 112(1).
  nangŕtŕtalungkň` are in squatting position 108(29).
  patalungkň` in squatting position 220(9).

táma` (a) a hit, correct 152(7). 220(5).
  tumáma` hit 24(23). 229(26).
  tamáan be hit and destroyed or disfigured 238(39).
  mŕtamáan get hit and disfigured 298(5).
  --(b) Accent shifted: tamŕ` hit 223(5).
  tamaŕn be hit in some part 106(38).
  tinamaŕn was hit 24(25). 38(21).
  mŕtamaŕn get hit in some part 36(21). 298(11).

-tamŕd: katamarŕn be neglected 274(36).
  katŕtamarŕn will be neglected 274(39).
  kinatamarŕn was neglected 274(34).
  katŕmáran laziness 18(36).
  matamŕd lazy 260(15).

taměs sweetness 297(10).
  mataměs sweet, sugar 198(31). 252(6).

-tamn, see taněm.

-tampalásan: tinampalásan was roughly handled 94(14).
  katampalasánan roughness 310(9).

-tampň: pagtatampúhan mutual contrariness 259(28).

-tamň: magtamň partake 78(39).
  nagtátamň is partaking 112(20).

-tanŕw: tumanŕw take into view 90(39).
  tanawěn be observed 108(21).
  pagkatanŕw a having looked 283(4).
  nakátanŕw chanced to espy 28(13). 72(5).
  pagkátanŕw a chance espying, the way of seeing
  18(34). 108(16). 291(19).

-tandŕ`: tumátandŕ` is getting old 229(27).
  matandŕ` old 38(6).
  matatandŕ` pl. 114(31).
  matandaŕn be able to be remembered 24(5).
  natŕtandaŕn is able to be remembered 20(25). 28(5). 116(19).

tanikalŕ` chain 244(38).

taněm that planted 221(26).
  pananěm used for planting 86(32).
  nagtátaněm is planting 86(38).
  pagtataněm a planting 307(13).
  mŕnanánim planter 243(15).
  itátaněm will be planted 16(6).
  tamnŕn be planted in 253(28).
  nŕtŕtaněm is planted 76(31).
  nŕtŕtamnŕn is planted in 34(39).

taniyŕg much regarded 219(18).
  pagtataniyŕg an exhibiting 90(16).
  tanyágan exhibition 259(9).
  pagtatanyágan the making an exhibition 90(9).

tansň` copper 230(14).

tantiyŕ S. calculation, guess 281(41).

tánod watchman
  tánod-báhay house-watchman 210(31).
  tánod-pálay rice-guard 210(31).
  tumánod guarded 229(27).
  nagtánod stood guard, formed a guard 207(41).
  tinanúran was guarded 253(30).

tanňng that asked, question 56(5). 68(21).
  tumanňng asked (with quotation or thing asked about)
  44(8). 82(13). 106(10). 229(29).
  nagtanňng put questions, asked (with indirect quotation)
  82(3). 234(34).
  nagtátanňng is putting questions 234(33).
  tinanňng was inquired of 26(1).
  itinanňng was asked 26(3). 30(30).
  ipagtanňng be asked about 74(26).
  ipagtatanňng be repeatedly asked about 98(23).

-tánga`: tinangáan was threatened 100(13).

tángan grasp; that grasped 66(38). 108(41).
  tinangnŕn was grasped 42(39).

tangŕy that carried along 70(3).
  nagtátangŕy is carrying along 68(28).
  tinangŕy was carried along, washed away 82(34).
  tinátangŕy is being borne along 16(3).

tanggŕp that received 221(27).
  tumanggŕp received 76(25).
  tanggapěn be accepted 48(25). 245(16).
  tŕtanggapěn will be accepted 52(25).
  tinanggŕp was received, accepted 58(9). 219(29).
  tanggapŕn be taken from 253(31).
  tanggápan receiving-place 252(21).
  nátanggŕp chanced to be accepted 42(28).

-tanggňl: pagtatanggňl a defending 257(14).
  mánananggňl attorney 116(25).
  maipagtanggňl be able to be defended 288(1).
  tagapagtanggňl attorney 305(40).

-tanghŕ`: tumanghŕ` wonder 229(30).

tangháli` noon 30(29).
  manangháli` eat the noon meal 204(26).
  katanghalían middle part of day 26(14). 120(38).

-tángi`: itinángi` was refused 60(29).

-tanglŕw: pagtanglŕw an illuminating 66(36).

-tangň`: tumangň` consented 16(6).
  tumátangň` consents 229(31).

tápang courage 36(31).
  katapángan bravery 276(41).
  matápang courageous 42(19). 66(2).

tapŕt space in front 189(1).
  ipinagtapŕt was owned up 90(32).
  katapŕt facing 48(7).

tapěk a tap 220(7).
  pinagtátapěk is being petted 84(10).

-tápon: itápon be cast away 30(36). 62(23).
  itinápon was cast away 62(30).
  ipinagtapňn was variously cast away 120(40).
  tapunŕn place for throwing away 205(21).
  nagpatápon caused to be exiled 56(27).
  ipatápon be caused to be cast out 56(17).
  pagkapatápon a having caused to be banished 120(18).

tapňn S. stopper, cork 166(17).
  tapunŕn be corked 253(34).

-tápos: tapňs ended 30(19).
  tapúsin be ended 236(18).
  tinápos was ended 56(6).
  katapusŕn end, cessation 24(1). 50(18). 114(33).
  makatápos have finished 88(3). 167(26).
  matápos come to an end 50(37). 82(3).
  natápos ended 236(37).
  pagkatápos a having ended 44(37). 52(4).
  matápos-tápos be able to come to an end 287(39).

tarŕ come along 207(35).

tarabúko, see búko.

-tarangkŕ: tŕrangkáhan gateway 32(17).

-taráto S.: pagtaráto a treating 44(31).

tasŕ (S.) point 254(2).

tátal splinters 58(17).

tátay father 120(17). 122(17). 59.
  magtátay father and child 242(16).
  magtatátay pl. 242(33).

tatlň, see -tlň.

táo person, human being 20(7).
  táo-ng-báyan townsperson 50(17).
  táo-ng-San-Antóniyo person of San Antonio 34(31).
  panaúhin guest 247(29). 250(39).
  táo-taúhan manikin; pupil of the eye 88(8). 135(22).
  katáo persons 42(6). 255.
  kataúhan mankind 135(21).
  katawŕn body 20(33). 276(19).
  pangangatawŕn physique, body 18(14). 36(11).

-taňb: pagtataňb a tipping over, tr. 82(32).

taňn year 26(36).
  taňn-taňn every year 191(32).
  kátaňn at the same time 104(18).
  nagkátaňn happened at the same time 84(37). 94(6).
  pagkakátaňn a happening at the same time 271(6).
  nŕtŕtaňn comes at the same time 110(22).

táwa (a) laughter 68(27).
  t. nang t. keeps laughing 206(35).
  tumáwa laughed 18(23).
  tumŕtáwa is laughing 229(31).
  pagtáwa a laughing 100(37).
  tumŕtáwa-táwa laughs at intervals 231(23).
  tawánan be laughed at 186(34).
  tŕwánan laughter by many 259(37).
  katatawanŕn laughable, laughing-stock 24(17). 167(30).
  --(b) Accent shifted: tumátawŕ-tawŕ snickers, giggles at intervals
  231(28).
  nanawŕ-nawŕ kept snickering 241(33).
  ikátawŕ be the cause of laughter 185(23).
  ikŕtŕtawŕ will be the cause of snickering 274(2).
  ikinátawŕ was the cause of laughter 292(31).
  ikinŕtŕtawŕ is the cause of snickering 274(4).
  nakŕtŕtawŕ causes irrepressible laughter 108(28).
  matatawaněn easily made to laugh 290(3).
  patawŕtawŕ snickering at intervals 300(38).
  nápatawŕ burst out laughing 120(28).

-táwad: patŕtawárin will be pardoned, excused 184(19).

táwag a call; name 50(10). 64(18).
  pangtáwag panáwag used for calling 225(22).
  tumáwag call 18(27). called 32(39).
  tumŕtáwag is calling 64(5).
  pagtáwag a calling 64(42).
  nagtáwag announced 234(36).
  pagtatáwag an announcing 234(37).
  nagtawŕg called in numbers 238(7).
  nagtátawŕg is calling in numbers 238(7).
  pagtatawŕg a calling in numbers 238(11).
  nagtátatawŕg is calling much and variously 239(12).
  magtatawŕg town-crier 303(30).
  manáwag summon 240(38).
  tawágin be called 78(1).
  tináwag was called 16(5).
  tinŕtáwag is being called 40(32).
  itináwag was called out, was called for 42(31). 44(28). 248(42).
  ipinagtáwag was called out 249(39).
  tawágan be called to 253(36).
  pagkatáwag a having called 283(6).
  mŕtáwag get called 46(21).
  nŕtáwag got called 303(34).
  pagkŕtáwag a chance calling 291(39).
  patáwag caused to be called out 299(19).
  nagpatáwag caused to be called 303(26).
  pagpapatáwag a causing to be called 303(27).
  magpapatawŕg town-crier 248(42).
  ipinatáwag was caused to be called 52(13). 54(25).
  ipinagpŕpatáwag is being caused to be called out 307(24).

-tawěd: tumawěd cross 106(4). crossed 68(2).
  napatátawěd is causing himself to be taken across 80(35).

tayŕ` stakes 258(8).
  tŕyáan a staking by several 258(8).

táyo we, incl. 63. Cf. átin and té.

tayň` stand up 222(7). erected 223(35).
  pangtayň` used for setting up, for standing up 225(24). 306(9).
  tumayň` stood up 204(27).
  pagtayň` a standing up 289(21).
  magtayň` set up, erect 203(2).
  nagtayň` erected 234(40).
  pagtatayň` an erecting 234(22).
  itátayň` will be set up 296(2).
  itinayň` was erected 248(43).
  tinayuŕn was built in 253(36).
  pagkakátayň` a standing up together 98(39). 271(7).
  kinŕtŕtayuŕn is being stood on 98(40).
  nakatayň` is upright 110(41).
  nakatátayň` is able to stand up 282(3).
  pagkatayň` a having stood up 283(8).
  nŕtŕtayň` is standing 34(38). 50(26).
  pagkátayň` a chance standing up or erecting 104(19). 291(21).
  patayň` caused to be erected 299(20). in standing position 287(26).
  nagpatayň` caused to be erected 303(32).
  pagpapatayň` a causing to be built 303(33).
  pinatayň` was caused to stand up 304(43).
  ipinatayň` was caused to be erected 306(30).
  nápatayň` jumped to his feet 312(31).

-táyog: katáyog what tallness 267(35).

té (táyo?) come along 207(35).

teátro, see teyátro.

-tibŕ`: tumibŕ` cut down bananas 229(34).
  tinibŕn trunk of banana-tree after fruit has been gathered 184(2).

-tíbay: tumíbay grew firm 24(27).
  tibáyan be propped 296(2).
  matíbay firm 18(20). 64(36).

tigŕ, see tagŕ.

tigŕs hardness, hard 219(20). 281(26).
  tigasŕn be done with hardening 253(38).
  matigŕs hard 283(27).
  pinatigasŕn was made hard 237(31).

-tígil: nagtígil ceased 201(37).

-tiěs: tinítiěs is being endured 223(18).
  těísin hardship 62(21).

tiktěk spy 312(14).
  tumiktěk spied 36(31).

tikuwŕs lowered at one end 223(35).
  pagtikuwŕs a getting out of balance 192(22).
  nagtikuwŕs tilted 234(42).

-tilŕd: tumilŕd split, cut up 229(35).
  tinilŕd was split 46(40).
  napatilŕd asked to be sliced for 311(43).

teléfono S. telephone 291(40).

timbŕ` well-bucket 314(34).
  tumimbŕ` drew in a bucket 229(36).
  kalatimbŕ` squatting on heels 314(32).
  nagkalatimbŕ` squatted on heels 196(37).
  pinapagkalatimbŕ` was caused to squat on heels 305(29).

-timbŕng: timbángan scales 259(10).
  katimbŕng equal 42(6) and Corrigenda.

tinápay bread 32(17).

tindŕ (S.) goods for sale 259(11).
  tindáhan store, shop 170(4).

-tinděg: nagsitinděg stood on end, pl. 66(16).
  nagtinděg stood up 26(25).
  nagsipagtinděg pl. 96(29).
  nakatinděg is on his feet 38(33). 90(25).
  pagkátinděg a chance standing up 291(21).
  nápatinděg jumped to his feet 202(1).

tinidňr S. table-fork 114(8).

tiněg voice 86(25). 114(11).

tiněk spine, splinter, fish-bone 16(20). 250(34).
  nátiněk got a splinter 16(21).
  pagkátiněk the getting a splinter 295(23).

-tintéro: S.: tinterúhan ink-stand 180(33).

tinóla stew 163(18).

tingŕ foreign substance between the teeth 241(29).
  manghiningŕ pick one's teeth 241(29).

-tingěn: tumingěn watch 18(26).
  pagtingěn an observing 229(37).
  tingnŕn be looked at 64(26).
  tiningnŕn was looked at 18(13).
  tinětingnŕn is being looked at 106(34).

-tingkŕd: matingkŕd intense 147(1).

tingtěng fibre, bristle, straw 315(21).

-tipŕn: pinagtipanŕn was appointed as meeting-place 104(39).
  těpánan a meeting by appointment 102(11).
  nagtěpánan made an appointment to meet each other 26(34).

-tipěd: pagtipěd a being economical 229(37).
  nagtipěd saved 235(2).
  nagsipagtipěd pl. 236(6).
  pagtitipěd a saving 235(1).
  tinipěd was economized in 245(17).
  kaytipěd what savingness 174(1).
  natipěd has been economized in 284(18).
  matipěd economical 298(9).
  mapagtipěd given to saving 289(26).
  pagkátipěd a chance saving 292(25).
  nagpatipěd caused to be economized 303(36).
  ipatipěd be caused to be economized in 244(20).
  ipinatipěd was caused to be economized 306(31).

-típon: tipňn gathered 223(6).
  pangtípon used for gathering 225(26).
  pagtípon a gathering 229(39).
  magtípon store up 235(5).
  nagtípon stored up 235(5).
  nagtětípon stores up 202(19).
  pagtitípon a storing up 235(3).
  těpúnan meeting 259(35) Corrigenda.
  katipúnan a gathering; n. of a secret society 116(27).
  Katipunéros members of the Katipunan 116(32).
  nakatípon succeeded in gathering 282(4).
  natípon has been gathered 284(19).
  pagkatípon ability to gather, a having gathered 282(16). 283(10).
  nakŕtípon chanced to gather 291(33).
  pagkŕtípon a chance gathering 291(23).
  patípon that caused to be gathered 299(21).
  patipňn into a heap 166(23).
  nagpatípon caused to be gathered 303(37).
  pagpapatípon a causing to be gathered 303(39).
  ipinatípon was caused to be gathered 306(32).

típus S. typhoid 223(19).

-tirŕ: tumirŕ dwelt, staid 229(41).
  magtirŕ dwelt 54(12).
  nagtirŕ dwelt 50(4).
  nagtítirŕ is dwelling, stays 38(8). 114(27).
  pagtitirŕ a staying 36(25). 54(13).
  nagtútumirŕ keeps staying 112(27).
  itinirŕ was left 249(1).
  tirahŕn be dwelt in 253(40).
  tinětirahŕn is being dwelt in 253(42).
  tirhŕn be left for 253(39).
  tinirhŕn was dwelt in, was left for 118(3). 253(38).
  těráhan dwelling 16(32). 24(38).
  titirhŕn home, house 118(27).
  ikinápagtirŕ was the cause of dwelling 120(6).
  kinŕtirhŕn was lived in 120(42).
  makatirŕ be able to stay 52(39).
  mátirŕ remain, get left 192(38).
  mŕtětirŕ will have to remain 187(26).
  nátirŕ got left, dwelt 28(31). 56(30).
  nŕtětirŕ is left, dwells 26(28). 28(33).
  pagkátirŕ a chance staying 116(25).

-tísod: tinísod was kicked away 245(20).
  natísod has been kicked away 284(20).
  nakŕtísod accidentally hit with the foot 290(35).

-tiwála`: tiwalŕ` persuaded, convinced 104(40).
  paniwála` belief 40(3).
  maniwála` believe 68(29).
  naniwála` believed 106(19).
  naněniwála` believes 40(7). 52(1).
  paniniwála` a believing, faith 34(32). 40(2).
  pŕniwalaěn credulous 116(9).
  paniwaláan be given credence 52(6).
  kŕtiwála` confidential agent, manager 268(13).

tiyŕ S. aunt 59. 256.

tiyŕn womb 36(16).

tiyának goblin 68(1).

teyátro teátro S. theatre 148(27).

tiyobíbo S. merry-go-round 307(21).

-tlň: tatlň three 24(18). 67.
  tatlň ng gabě: pagtatatlň-ng-gabě a three-nights' celebration
  114(28).
  tatlň ng pů`: pangatlň-ng-pů` number thirty 226(9).
  tatlň-tatlň three by three 224(1).
  pangatlň number three 226(8).
  ikatlň third 273(19).
  makáitlň makáyitlň three times 298(36).

trabahadůr S. laborer 82(25).

trabáho S. labor 30(26).
  trabáho-ng-kaniyunéro artilleryman's work 155(22).
  magtŕtrabáho will work 138(30).
  nagtrabáho worked 90(14).
  pagtatrabáho a working 82(7).
  pinapagtŕtrabáho is being caused to work 72(33).

trabúko, see búko.

trčn S. train 116(21).

Tsŕng C. n. 263(4).

tsíko síko S. custard-apple, Achras sapota L. 34(40).

Tsína S. China 269(20).

tubŕ` sap 258(1).

túbig water 16(31).

túbo S. tube 255(20).

tubň sugar-cane 181(15).
  tubúhan cane-field 237(41). 259(18).

túbo` that grown; profit 189(24). 232(22).
  tumúbo` grew 16(12).
  tůtúbo` will grow 16(9).
  tinubúan was grown up in, was grown on 26(39). 204(10).
  katutúbo` inborn 38(13). 267(4).

-tud, see -tuwěd.

tugtňg that played, piece of music 186(21).
  tumugtňg play music 166(3).
  tumútugtňg is playing music 110(37).
  nagsísitugtňg pl. 110(32).
  mánunugtňg musician 112(3).
  tugtúgin music 247(22).
  tinůtugtugŕn is being played for 48(30).
  tugtúgan piece of music by several performers 112(4).
  pagtutugtúgan a playing together 110(40).
  pagpapatugtňg a causing to be played 80(26).

túhod knee 48(19).

tukŕ` beak 230(2).
  tumukŕ` pick with the beak 230(2).
  pangpatukŕ` given to pick 301(8).

tuksň joke 195(39).

-tuktňk: tumuktňk knocked 78(26).
  tumútuktňk is knocking 155(37).
  pagtuktňk a knocking 78(27).
  itinuktňk was knocked 30(7).
  ituktňk top, ceiling 62(15). 118(21).

-túkop: tinúkop was covered with the hand 100(2).

tulŕ` connected 186(40).
  tulá-tulŕ` coherent 44(35).

-túlad: tuláran be limited 74(23).

túlak push 252(5).
  tumúlak pushed at; went away 230(3). 235(10).
  nagtúlak pushed 235(9).

tulŕy bridge 163(12).

-tulč: tutulč ear-wax 224(22).
  manghinulč clean the ears 241(30).

-túlin: magtúlin go fast 167(35).
  nagtůtúlin is hurrying 68(16).
  tinulínan speed 310(19).
  matúlin swift 18(8). 60(31).
  nŕtúlin got faster 294(29).
  pinatúlin was caused to hurry 72(4).

túlis point 284(33).
  tulěs pointed 223(7).
  tulísan be sharpened 254(1).
  tulisŕn bandit 120(1).
  matúlis pointed 271(12).

túlog sleep 220(8).
  tumúlog slept in 64(38).
  tumůtúlog sleeps in 64(37).
  pagtúlog a sleeping 230(7).
  tinůtulúgan is being slept in 62(39). 190(12).
  tulugŕn sleeping-place 260(32).
  makitúlog sleep along with 122(14).
  matúlog go to sleep 64(5). 84(18).
  natúlog went to sleep 18(36). 38(20). 84(39).
  natůtúlog is asleep 18(38). 38(28). 62(9).
  matutulugěn sleepy-head 290(4).
  nakŕtúlog happened to sleep in 290(36).
  mŕkatúlog chance to fall asleep 296(41).
  mangŕkatúlog pl. 297(3).
  mangŕkŕkatúlog will fall asleep pl. 192(14).
  nŕkatúlog fell asleep 296(37).
  nangŕkŕkatúlog are asleep 296(43).
  pagkŕkatúlog a falling asleep 62(22).
  mŕtulúgan get slept in 84(17).
  patúlog-túlog sleeping by fits and starts 300(36).
  nagpatúlog caused to sleep 62(8).
  patulúgin be caused to sleep 305(3).
  pinatúlog was caused to sleep 36(18). 84(38).
  mapatúlog be able to be caused to sleep 64(2).

túlong help 32(39).
  tůtúlong will help 32(11).
  nagsěsitúlong are helping 114(2).
  tulúngan be assisted 234(19).
  pinagtůtulůng-tulúngan is being done by haphazard helping 106(29).
  pagtutulungŕn a mutual assisting 237(4).
  ikatúlong be the means of helping 60(23).
  nakatúlong contributed 94(37).
  nakatůtúlong is contributing 112(11).
  napatůtúlong is asking to be helped 311(35).

-túlos: pagtutúlos an offering up 50(29).
  nŕtůtúlos is set up 66(41).
  nagpatúlos caused to be set up 72(29).
  nŕipatúlos was caused to be set up 80(26).

-túloy (a): itinúloy was gone on with 287(11).
  tinulúyan was staid with 116(35).
  tůlúyan place of lodging; see báhay.
  nakitúloy asked to stay with 148(31).
  patúloy caused to go on; going on 60(3). 70(34).
  pinatúloy was caused to stay on 84(38).
  ipatúloy be caused to go on, be continued 88(43).
  ipinatúloy was continued 20(41). 66(18). 84(3).
  ipinatůtúloy is being continued 108(20).
  --(b) With accent-shift: tulňy further 28(12). 34(8). 47. 231.
  nátulňy chanced to continue, got continued 207(31). 237(5). 240(18).
  papagtůtuluyěn will be caused to go on 88(14).
  ipinatulňy was caused to be gone on with 96(31). 307(6).
  ipinapatulňy was caused to be caused to be gone on with 307(12).

tumpŕk correct 219(20).
  mŕtumpakŕn get ascertained 70(32).

túnay true 66(7). 82(31).
  katunáyan truth, truly 30(15). 82(5). 265(6).
  pinatunáyan was caused to be realized 308(29).

-tuntňn: tůtuntuněn will be followed 34(14).
  tinuntňn was followed 34(21).
  palatuntúnin querulant 315(11).
  palŕtuntúnan set of rules 315(26).

tóno S. tone 207(4).

tungkňl about, concerning 30(16). 52(25). 287. 288.
  tungkúlin concern, duty 96(40).
  katungkúlan duty, office 52(41). 110(32).

tungtňng a stand 221(31).
  tútuntóng will set foot on 70(26). 100(29).
  tinůtuntungŕn is being stood on 100(25).
  makátuntňng-tuntňng ever set foot on 100(8).
  mátuntňng happen to stand on 68(4).

-túngo: tumúngo went toward 230(8).
  nagsitúngo pl. 282(30).
  katúngo person dealt with 266(25).
  kŕtůtungúhan will turn out to be the place gone toward 279(20).
  nŕkŕkatúngo is being dealt with 68(14).
  patúngo towards 18(40). 20(3). 48(6). 285.
  pagpatúngo a going towards 120(7). 302(21).
  patůtungúhan will be headed for 90(43). 307(4).
  pinatůtungúhan is being headed for 72(6). 308(30).
  kapŕpatungúhan will be the place headed for 26(33). 310(28).
  napatúngo went toward 102(42).

-tungň: itinungň was bent over 74(16).

túpa sheep 112(40).

-tupŕd: pagtupŕd a fulfilling 96(39).
  pagkatupŕd a having fulfilled 233(35).

Tůrkos S. Turks 260(10).

torníliyo S. screw 92(38).

túro` that pointed out, a teaching 186(32). 221(32).
  turň` extended, stiff 223(8).
  panúro` pointer 225(27).
  magtúro` teach 232(36).
  nagtůtúro` is teaching 232(38).
  pagtutúro` a teaching 88(14).
  nagtúturň` is pointing out variously 238(14).
  panunúro` a pointing things out 240(39).
  itúro` be pointed out, be shown 182(43). 249(2).
  katuruŕn one of two who point at each other 278(25).
  mŕitúro` get taught 90(1).
  hintutúro` forefinger 42(14).

turumpň S. spinning-top 227(6).

túta` puppy 244(40).

túto perception, care 166(36).
  mŕtúto get educated 168(14).
  nŕtúto got taught 178(4).
  mŕtutúhan get learned 196(35).
  nŕtutúhan got learned 28(2). 50(24).

tutubč dragon-fly 291(28).

totoň true 104(23). 116(2).
  tňtohánan actuality 94(21). 259(16).
  katotohánan truth 26(5). 68(32).
  nagpatotoň testified, affirmed 303(42).
  pagpapatotoň a testifying 304(3).
  pinapagpatotoň was caused to testify 305(40).
  tagapagpatotoň witness 20(13).

toňd stump 16(23).

tuňs care 46(29).

tuwŕ` joy, gladness 46(5). 76(41). glad 80(15).
  ikinatuwŕ` was the cause of joy 26(25).
  ikinatútuwŕ` is the cause of being glad 272(26).
  kŕtwáan a rejoicing together 120(25).
  magkŕtwáan rejoice together 280(11).
  nagkŕkŕtwáan are rejoicing together 120(26).
  nakatútuwŕ` causes pleasure 280(40).
  natuwŕ` became glad 24(27).
  nangatuwŕ` pl. 34(23).
  mŕkatuwaŕn happen to be liked 40(39). 298(28).
  palatwáin easily pleased 315(13).

tuwě` every time, whenever 58(3). 60(40). 244. 300. 307. 317(5).

-tuwěd: pagtutuwěd a reckoning 232(39).
  katuwíran the right 56(7). 100(38). 257(14).
  katuturŕn right outcome 76(21).
  makatuwěd have figured out; consequence 56(15).
  matuwěd correct 44(26). 50(14).

túyot drought 191(32).





U (O).

o S? or 16(25). 45. 321.

ň oh 76(34). 80(12). 151(15).

ó, see óo.

-ubrŕ (S.): umbrŕ took effect, was suitable 230(11).
  pagubrŕ a taking effect 108(35).
  magúubrŕ will suit 235(11).

úbos exhaustion
  úbos-lakŕs exhaustion of strength 18(39). 22(16).
  úbos-lŕkásan exhaustion of strength by several 96(29).
  ipinagúbos-lŕkásan was done with exhaustion of strength 250(4).
  inůúbos is being used up 112(9).
  iniyúbos was expended 283(41).
  nakaůúbos is able to use up 112(40).
  naúbos was used up 312(29).
  naubúsan was exhausted of 32(19).

ugáli` habit 96(26).
  inugáli` was made a habit 36(25).
  kaugáli` accordant in habits 266(27).
  kaugaliŕn custom 38(10). 112(22).

ugŕt root, artery 218(32). 290(12).

úhaw thirst 280(38).
  naůúhaw is thirsty 285(25).

úkol with regard to, for 42(15). 50(28). 288.

úlam that eaten along with one's rice 72(34).

ulŕn rain 110(14).
  umulŕn rained 177(16).
  umúulŕn is raining 152(16).
  úulŕn will rain 168(34).
  pagulŕn a raining 110(21).
  maulŕn rainy 110(21).
  nagpápaulŕn causes rain 110(15).
  tagulŕn rainy season 202(18).

ulč` again 24(11). 47. 232. See sa.
  úulč` will do it again 44(12).

olíva S. olive 90(28).

úling charcoal 70(32).

-úlit: paguúlit-úlit a manifold repeating 86(10).
  inúlit was repeated 50(28).
  maúlit stubborn 24(14).

úlo head 22(10). 26(4). See básag.
  uluhŕn head-end 72(3).

ulňl foolish, crazy 16(1).
  kaululŕn foolishness 98(23).
  kaůlúlan one of two who fool each other 278(3).
  pagkaulňl insanity 254(29).

umága, see -ága.

-umět: pangungumět panguumět petty thievery 156(3). 310(6).
  inumět was filched 293(28).

-umpisŕ: magumpisŕ begin 18(31). 32(16).
  nagumpisŕ began 16(26). 20(29).
  paguumpisŕ a beginning 26(35). 96(15).
  umpisahŕn be begun 48(4).
  inumpisahŕn was begun 26(19). 50(21).
  inůumpisahŕn is being begun 48(37).

-umpňg: nagkákaumpňg-umpňg is getting repeated bumps 62(19).

-umpňk: umpúkan assemblage for talking 38(7).

úna (a) first 24(15). 38(21). 273(21).
  pangúna number one 225(39).
  mangůngúna will take the lead 240(40).
  nangúna took the lead 240(40).
  inúna was taken first 42(31).
  pagkaúna a having got ahead 283(12).
  --(b) With accent-shift: nagunŕ-unŕ competed for the first place
  239(19).
  kŕunŕ-unáhan very first 280(16).
  náunŕ got ahead 64(8).
  nŕůunŕ is ahead 88(24).
  pagkáunŕ a getting ahead 18(34).
  nagpáunŕ got himself into the first place 304(24).
  nagpáunŕ-unŕ got himself too far ahead 304(27).

únan pillow 260(6).

-únat: naúnat has been straightened 284(21).
  nŕúnat got straightened 24(26).

untě` short 219(21).
  untě-untě` little by little 76(12). 78(9).
  umuntě` grew less 28(30).
  untiŕn be lessened 254(2).
  kauntě` something small, a bit 48(32). 60(16).
  kayuntě` what fewness 267(36).
  kákauntě` only few 267(8).
  pauntiěn be caused to be few, be reduced 98(7).

ungŕs stupid 22(21).

unggň` monkey 16(1).
  nagůunggů-unggúan is playing monkey 237(11).

úpa pay 56(3). 72(33).
  ůúpa will pay 88(12).
  umůúpa hires 48(29).
  ůupáhan will be paid 34(6).
  upahŕn hired 114(1.23).

úpang in order to, so that 16(22). 18(16). 308.

ópera S. opera; see sŕmáhan.

úpo a vegetable, Lagenaria vulgaris Seringe 76(16).

upň` sit; a sitting 220(9). 222(7).
  pangupň` used for sitting 225(28).
  umupň` sit 184(23). sat 230(15).
  pagupň` a sitting 230(16).
  nagupň` seated 235(12).
  nagúuupň` sits variously 239(2).
  paguupň` a sitting variously 181(30).
  nangupň` mischievously sat down on 240(41).
  panguupň` a mischievous sitting on 240(42).
  ůupŕn will be sat on 254(4).
  inůupŕn is being sat on 32(5).
  ůpúan a sitting together 258(9). seat 24(39). 283(9).
  uupŕn chair 180(29).
  kaůpúan one of two who sit together 278(4).
  kinŕůupŕn happens to be the place of sitting 223(16).
  nakaupň` is seated 281(19).
  nangákaupň` pl. 286(11).
  nangŕkŕkaupň` are able to sit 286(14).
  maupň` sit down 184(24).
  maúupň` will sit down 192(39).
  naupň` sat down 24(39).
  naúupň` is (in the act of) sitting down 204(26).
  pagkaupň` a sitting down 286(4).
  náupň` happened to sit down 202(1).
  nŕůupň` is sitting 30(29). 96(22).
  pagkáupň` a chance sitting 277(24).
  paupň` that caused to sit 174(29). 249(35). in sitting position
  299(32).
  nagpaupň` caused to sit 304(4).
  pagpapaupň` a causing to sit 304(5).
  pinaupň` was caused to sit 305(4).
  nápaupň` involuntarily sat down 198(24).
  nápatiupň` fell into sitting position 313(39).
  nŕpŕpatiupň` falls on his seat 313(40).

úpos cigar-butt 205(21).

óras S. hour 42(4). 48(26). See kalaháti`.
  orásan be done promptly 254(5).
  orasŕn watch, clock 248(14).

orasiyňn S. prayer 104(14).

-úrong: umůúrong is going backwards 230(18).
  nangagsiúrong retreated, pl. 262(30).
  paurňng backwards 299(34).
  papaurňng backwards continually 300(40).

usŕ deer 18(1).
  nagusŕ-usáhan played deer 237(12).

úsap law-suit 199(33).
  paguúsap a conversing 70(19).
  pagusápan be discussed 102(5).
  pinagusápan was discussed 28(2).
  pinagůusápan is being discussed 30(29).
  makipagúsap converse with 28(14).
  nakěkipagúsap is entering into conversation with 74(30).
  pakikipagúsap an engaging in conversation with 80(38).
  kaúsap person conversed with 102(32).
  kumŕkaúsap is talking at 268(19).
  kausápin be conversed with 44(2). 70(21).
  kinaúsap was addressed 70(24).
  makaúsap be able to converse 68(20).
  mŕkaúsap get conversed with 70(14).
  nŕkaúsap got conversed with 44(26). 78(17).

usbňng edible shoot 253(2). 256(13).

usísa` that inquired about 221(34).
  nagusísa` made inquiry 76(1).
  nangusísa` interrogated 241(3).
  usisáin be asked about; be interrogated 76(14). 98(13). 290(26).
  inusísa` was questioned 76(28).
  pinagusisŕ` was variously questioned 76(5).
  nausísa` has been questioned 284(23).
  naůusísa` has just been questioned 76(22).
  mapagusísa` inquisitive 60(19).
  nakŕusísa` happen to inquire 290(39).
  nŕusísa` got inquired for 293(28).

úso S. fashion 287(7).

útang debt 54(12). 76(2). See báyad.
  umútang borrow 230(19).
  magutŕng borrow variously 238(15).
  maguutŕng habitual borrower 243(3).
  nangútang borrowed 241(4).
  mángungutŕng habitual borrower 243(20).
  inútang was borrowed 245(24).
  pinangútang was (reluctantly) borrowed 247(4).
  utángan be borrowed from 254(6).
  magpaútang cause to be borrowed, lend 304(8).

-utŕs: nautŕs was completed 303(18).

útos a command 56(27). 122(5).
  nagútos commanded 232(41).
  nagůútos is commanding 114(7).
  iyútos be commanded 62(37). 64(13).
  iniyútos was commanded 24(37). 26(18). 106(17).
  ipinagútos was given as an order 182(19). 249(40).
  inutúsan was given an order 92(12).
  utusŕn servant, waiter, orderly 254(34). 260(34).
  kautusŕn decree, law 54(4).

óo ó yes 26(2). 44(18).
  oóhan be answered affirmatively 254(7).
  napaóo assented 312(6).

uwalŕ`, see walŕ`.

uwč` a going home; that taken home 114(26). 221(35).
  umuwč` go home 34(12). 76(43). went home 50(36). 52(35).
  úuwč` will go home 287(20).
  nagsísiuwč` are going home 72(35).
  paguwč` a going home 70(23).
  naguwían went home together 26(37).
  pauwč` that caused to go home 298(23). homeward 34(14).
  nagpauwč` caused to be taken home, sent home 304(9).
  ipinauwč` was caused to be taken home, was sent home 304(10).





W.

walŕ` without, not having; there is not
16(10). 20(21). 69. 99. 110. 239. 248.
  walŕ ng hiyŕ`: kawalŕ-ng-hiyaŕn shamelessness 277(10).
  nápakawalŕ-ng-hiyŕ` most impudent 98(27).
  pagwawalŕ` a breaking away 232(42).
  iwalŕ` be got rid of 249(3).
  kawalŕ` partaking of freedom 196(27).
  magkawalŕ` get away 44(6).
  nagkawalŕ` got away 44(10).
  nagkákawalŕ` is getting away 58(31).
  ikinawalŕ` was the cause of being without 292(6).
  ipagkawalŕ` be the cause of getting away 272(38).
  ipagkákawalŕ` will be the cause of getting away 272(41).
  ipinagkawalŕ` was the cause of getting away 273(1).
  ipinagkákawalŕ` is the cause of getting away 273(2).
  kawŕwalŕn will be the place of losing 206(17).
  kawalŕn lack, absence 46(16). 118(1).
  makawalŕ` be able to get away 44(40).
  makawáwalŕ` will be able to get away 294(1).
  nakawalŕ` succeeded in getting away 46(31). 86(12).
  mawáwalŕ` will disappear 46(2).
  nawalŕ` disappeared 64(33). 82(10).
  nawáwalŕ` is disappearing 40(16). 76(13).
  pagkawalŕ` a disappearing 298(17).
  nawalŕn has been deprived of 70(8). 82(30).
  pawalŕn be allowed to get away 44(12).
  pinawalŕn was allowed to get away 44(8).
  magpakawalŕ` get oneself away 106(23).
  pinakawalŕn was allowed to get loose 66(28). 310(26).

walěs broom 315(22).
  nagwáwalěs is sweeping 233(2).
  wináwalěs niwáwalěs is being swept away 245(26).
  niwalisŕn was swept 94(7).
  niwŕwalisŕn is being swept 254(8).

walň eight 52(43). 67.
  pangwalň number eight 225(38).

wapélo C. exclamation of distress 58(38).

wíka` language, word, words 20(5). 28(3). 74(39).
  nagwíka` spoke 20(20).
  winíka` was spoken 18(42).
  kawikaŕn proverb 276(15).
  pagkawíka` a having spoken 20(40).

-wíli: nŕwíli got spellbound 88(2).
  pagkŕwíli a getting spellbound 295(26).

-wisěk: iniwisěk was sprinkled 96(27).
  niwisikŕn was sprinkled on 64(30).
  nŕwisikŕn got sprinkled on 76(38).





Y.

-yábang: kayabángan pride 272(2) Corrigenda.
  mayábang proud 60(15).
  nagmayabŕng boasted 238(21).
  ipinagmayabŕng was boasted of 60(17).
  nagpakamayabŕng boasted of himself 309(29).

-yábong: mayábong grassy 18(33).

yáman wealth 72(22). 80(25).
  yumáman get rich 60(25). got rich 74(9).
  pagyáman a getting rich 120(27).
  kayamánan wealth 308(16).
  mayáman wealthy 72(19).
  payamánin be caused to get rich 50(34).

yámang while 16(12). 18(33). 309.

yŕn, see iyŕn.

yantňk rattan 46(40).

Yap C. n. 234(25).

-yári: mangyári happen 54(29). 66(22).
  mangyŕyári will happen 18(11). 52(20).
  nangyári happened 24(27). 46(19).
  nangyŕyári happens 40(30). 44(20).
  kapangyaríhan power 36(10). 40(4).

yári` that made; the make 74(4). 220(10). 221(37).
  mayári` have been made 104(11).
  nayŕyári` is made 34(36). 46(40).

yaňn, see iyňn.

-yáya`: yumáya` invited 230(21).
  pagyáya` an inviting 230(22).
  nagyayŕ` urged 28(11). 34(12).
  niyáya` was invited, summoned 32(13). 36(42).

Yčng C. n. 263(4).

yéro S. iron 92(35).

yitň ytň, see itň.--yň, see iyň.

-yukayňk: nagsísipagyukayňk are nodding 108(30).

yňn, see iyňn.

Yurúpa, see Eyurúpa.

yúta` billion 134.

yoňn, see iyňn.









CORRIGENDA.


The following errors are due entirely to oversights on my part;
they would have been far more numerous, but for the accuracy and
intelligence of the typesetter, Mr. Staley, and the unfailing kindness
of the editor, Professor W. A. Oldfather.--L. B.

[Transcriber's Note: The indicated errors have been corrected in the
text of this edition, except for the one referring to 212(25), as the
instruction is not clear enough, and 322(42), as the location could
not be found.]


VOLUME I.

PAGE   LINE   FOR               READ

  20     16   mákinig           makiněg
  22      2   nabuksan          nábuksan
  24     31   n                 ng
  32      1   namámatay         mamámatay
  38     11   galían            galiŕn
  40     39   pagbibíro`        pangbibíro`
  42      6   katimbŕ`          katimbŕng
  42     39   tiningnan         tinangnan
  44      2   sumagňt           sumásagňt
  44     40   nagsisigáw        nagsisigŕw
  46     24   ngŕ               ngá
  48     20   pagbabalěk        pagpapabalěk
  60     38   nagbibigay        nagbíbigay
  62      5   syŕ               nyŕ
  68     13   siniglan          siniglŕn
  72     12   hyŕ               hyŕ`
  74     40   a                 o
  84     21   pinagdagukŕn      pinagdadagukŕn
  92      6   mámatŕy           mamámatŕy
  94     29   inapúyan          inapuyŕn
  96     29   maínit            maiínit
  98      2   magbíbinyŕg       nagbíbinyŕg
  98     39   Masakěp           Masikěp
  99     25   giving            given
 100     15   ipabíbilannggň`   ipabíbilanggň`
 108     42   pirásu ng lamŕn   pirásu-ng-lamŕn
 114     10   pagtadtŕd         pagtatadtŕd


VOLUME II.

PAGE   LINE

 190      2   Add: si nasíra ng Mariyŕ the deceased Maria.
 210     30   Add example: pilěk-matŕ eyelash (pilěk fin, lash), and at
              211(13) omit pilěk.
 212     25   Omit: bagáso etc.; the word may be S. bagazo sediment.
 212     37   Add: hantŕy hintŕy.
 215     41   Omit: lákad.
 223     17   The example of lakŕd should be transferred to 222(38).
 223     25   Binyŕk etc.; transfer to 244(7).
 244      2   Add: (ang áyap condiment).
 244      4   Add example: Ang gúlok na yŕn ay bŕbawíin ko sa iyň,
              kapag ipinamútol mo nang kawáyan. I shall take back this
              bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo.
 244      7   See on 223(25).
 245     39   Add: sagňt.
 249      8   Add: lalŕ`.
 259     35   Add example: ang těpúnan a meeting; and omit típon in
              next line.
 261     10   Add example: Ang asuhŕn nang báhay ni Pédro ay nasúnog.
              The chimney in Pedro's house burned out; and omit asň
              from line 16.
 261     24   Add example: lulurŕn shin.
 267     18   Add: So gísing, káin.
 277      2   Add example: kayabángan pride; and omit yábang, line 8.
 277      7   Add: salúkoy.
 286     30   Add example: Pagkaabňt nang bátŕ nang kanyŕ ng laruwŕn ay
              tumakbň sya ng agŕd. After reaching for his toys, the boy
              at once ran. Omit the words: see ábot.
 294     33   Omit: ibadyŕ.
 295     30   Add example: Sya y nárapŕ`. He fell on his face.
 296     19   Omit: ábot, and add example: Ang pagkáabot nyŕ sa bóte ay
              hindi magálang. The way he reached for the bottle was not
              polite.
 297     29   Add: badiyŕ.
 299     27   For pahágis read pahagěs, and transfer the example to
              300(14).
 300     14   See preceding.
 313      3   Add: With makŕ- D (§ 473) from -paríto: Hwag kŕ ng
              makŕparí-paríto. Don't you ever come round here!
 315     31   Add: With accent-shift: taginět the hot season.
 322     42   Add reference: 28(7).









NOTES


[1] An English translation by Charles Derbyshire was published in
1912 by the Philippine Education Company in Manila and the World Book
Company in New York, under the title "The Social Cancer".

[2] The entire syntax and much of the morphology, especially whatever
relates to the accent-shifts in word-formation, will be found to be
new. I have of course refrained from any and all historical surmises
beyond the indication of unassimilated loan-words. The system of
transcription used is, with a few deviations, that of the International
Phonetic Association.

[3] They were accessible to me chiefly through the courtesy of the
Newberry Library in Chicago.

[4] I owe this and the following statements about the degree of
pitch-rise to the kindness of Dr. C. Ruckmich of the Department of
Psychology of the University of Illinois.

[5] It might perhaps be more correct not to include such cases under
the term attribution (as will be done in the following analysis),
but to set up instead an additional syntactic type of "exocentric
modification".

[6] In the proverbial expression at 16,18, balŕt skin, skins is used
as an object expression without ang, contrary to the normal habit.

[7] Although grammatical terms are necessarily and properly employed in
different meanings when referring to different languages, the Tagalog
constructions in question are so different from what is ordinarily
understood by "cases" that the above terminology has been avoided in
the following discussion.

[8] At 16, 2 hábang, instead of standing at the beginning of its
clause, follows the subject, taking the place of ay. I take it
that this sentence has been handed down in this form from an older
generation of speakers. Cf. § 316.

[9] Once, at 16, 18, at is used concessively, even though, and is
placed not at the beginning of its phrase, but after the subject,
where ay would normally stand. The sentence is no doubt traditional;
it has currency as a proverb. See § 68 and cf. § 292.

[10] Cf. Kern's derivation of linggň from Spanish domingo, felt as
containing infix -um- (Sanskritsche woorden).

[11] Where S. words are, as genuine loan-words, more or less fully
Tagalized, the S. is enclosed in brackets. In cases where Mr. Santiago
is not conscious of this origin, it would have been more consistent
to omit the indication, but it would be very difficult to single
these out.






End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis, by
Leonard Bloomfield

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TAGALOG TEXTS ***

***** This file should be named 50797-8.txt or 50797-8.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/5/0/7/9/50797/

Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
Gutenberg (This book was produced from scanned images of
public domain material from the Google Books project.)


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
1.E.8.

1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country outside the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

  This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
  most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
  restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
  under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
  eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
  United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you
  are located before using this ebook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
provided that

* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
  the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
  you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
  to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
  agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
  within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
  legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
  payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
  Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
  Literary Archive Foundation."

* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
  you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
  does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
  License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
  copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
  all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
  works.

* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
  any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
  electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
  receipt of the work.

* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
  distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

For additional contact information:

    Dr. Gregory B. Newby
    Chief Executive and Director
    gbnewby@pglaf.org

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.